Skip to main content

Mathspace VCE Units 1 & 2 General Mathematics

Page 1

VCE

General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 Accreditation period from 2023


© 2025 Mathspace Group Holdings Ltd Copyright Notice This Work is copyright. All rights are reserved. Reproduction and communication for educational purposes The Australian Copyright Act 1968 (the Act) allows a maximum of one chapter or 10% of the pages of this work, whichever is the greater, to be reproduced and/or communicated by any educational institution for its educational purposes provided that the educational institution (or the body that administers it) has given a remuneration notice to Copyright Agency Limited (CAL). Reproduction and communication for other purposes Except as permitted under the Act (for example, a fair dealing for the purposes of study, research, criticism or review), no part of this book may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, communicated or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written permission. All inquiries should be made to the publisher. For permission to use material from this text or product, please email hello@mathspace.com.au For our full digital offering, visit mathspace.co The Victorian Curriculum F-10 content elements are © VCAA, reproduced by permission. The VCAA does not endorse or make any warranties regarding this resource. The Victorian Curriculum F-10 and related content can be accessed directly at the VCAA website. Title: Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 Print run 1 - January 2026 ISBN: 978-1-963022-96-4 Editors and lead authors: Erin Gallagher, Jeremy Hunter, Elisha Templin, Nazeel Ali, Katrina Du, Neeti Meghani, Jessica Purton, Isha Tiwari Writing and development team: Adam Humphreys, Ma Lourdes Ona, Sheramie Castillo, Regine Jara, Lesley Ann Lopez, Adriane Abunda, Jady Amarillas, Joy Ann Antonio, Macy Castillo, Christian Dinglasan, Adrian Doctolero, Dharent Fernandez, Dhave Fernandez, Rona Josue, Jessa Lambinicio, Eric Malabag, Julie Ann Manzano, Kyra Joy Manzano, and Mary Joy Tacud, Albert Jara Images and design team: Scott Nolan, Chastine Marquez, Keith Gimeno, Jasper Jumawan, Mary Matheu, Jemark Orevillo, Jessa Ortega


Contents 1

Data distributions

2

1.01

Types of data

4

1.02

Categorical data displays

13

1.03

Numerical data displays

26

1.04

Measures of centre

42

Investigation: The problem with average 1.05

Data distribution

56

1.06

Quartiles and spread

72

1.07

Box plots

85

1.08

Outliers

102

1.09

Standard deviation

118

1.10

Compare sets of data

138

Chapter 1 review

2

Linear relationships

160

2.01

Solve linear equations

162

2.02

Linear equation applications

168

2.03

Graphs from tables

175

2.04

Slopes and intercepts

187

2.05

Sketch linear functions

200

2.06

Equations of straight lines

208

Investigation: Filling a pool Chapter 2 review

3

Linear applications

224

Linear models

226

3.01

Investigation: Intersection of lines 3.02

Graphical simultaneous equations

237

3.03

Algebraic simultaneous equations

247

3.04

Applications of simultaneous equations

256

3.05

Piecewise functions

262

3.06

Step graphs

276

Chapter 3 review

Contents mathspace.co

iii


4

Financial arithmetic

288

4.01

Percentages

290

4.02

Rates and ratios

301

4.03

Unit cost comparisons

309

4.04

Percentage change and GST

315

4.05

Simple interest

326

4.06

Compound interest

337

Investigation: Spreadsheets and interest 4.07

Financial applications

346

4.08

Purchase options

359

Chapter 4 review

5

Number patterns and recurrence relations

374

5.01

Number patterns and sequences

376

5.02

First-order linear recurrence relations

387

5.03

Arithmetic sequences

400

5.04

Applications of arithmetic sequences

410

5.05

Geometric sequences

421

5.06

Applications of geometric sequences

431

Investigation: Saving money Chapter 5 review

6

Matrices

440

6.01

Introduction to matrices

442

6.02

Represent information in matrices

449

6.03

Addition and subtraction of matrices

460

6.04

Scalar multiplication

467

6.05

Matrix multiplication

473

6.06

Powers of matrices

486

6.07

Applications of matrices

498

6.08

Inverse matrices

510

6.09

Simultaneous equations with matrices

518

Investigation: Is there always a solution? 6.10

Transition matrices Chapter 6 review

iv

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

528


7

Graphs and networks

542

7.01

Introduction to graphs

544

7.02

Degree and adjacency matrices

556

7.03

Planar graphs and Euler’s formula

569

7.04

Walks and paths

583

7.05

Traverse connected graphs

600

7.06

Weighted graphs and networks

612

7.07

Trees

627

Investigation: Networks and coding Chapter 7 review

8

Compare numerical variables

642

8.01

Explanatory and response variables

644

8.02

Scatterplots and correlation

652

8.03

Association and causation

666

8.04

Line of good fit

675

Investigation: Answer questions with data Chapter 8 review

9

Variation 694 9.01

Direct and inverse variation

696

9.02

Orders of magnitude and logarithms

707

Investigation: Represent Australian populations 9.03

Log scales

717

9.04

Data transformations

725

9.05

Data models

746

Chapter 9 review

Contents mathspace.co

v


10

Shape and measurement

760

10.01

Significant figures

762

10.02

Measurement units

770

10.03

Pythagoras’ theorem

781

10.04

Perimeter

793

Investigation: Circumference 10.05

Arc length and perimeter of sectors

803

10.06

Area

814

10.07

Area of composite shapes

823

10.08

Total surface area

835

10.09

Volume

851

10.10

Composite solids

863

10.11

Similarity and scale factors

877

Investigation: Scale diagrams 10.12

Area and volume in similar figures

890

Chapter 10 review

Chapter 10 review

11

Applications of trigonometry

902

11.01

Trigonometric ratios

904

11.02

2D Applications of trigonometry

920

11.03

Trigonometry in 3D

933

11.04

Trigonometry of obtuse angles

944

11.05

Sine rule

950

11.06

Cosine rule

966

11.07

Area of non-right angled triangles

977

11.08

Mixed applications

990

Investigation: Triangle inequality Chapter 11 review

Answers

vi

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

1002


“Mathematicians enjoy thinking about the simplest possible things, and the simplest possible things are imaginary.” – Paul Lockhart


Big ideas • Effective data analysis begins with classifying data by type (categorical or numerical) and organising it through appropriate visual displays to reveal initial patterns and frequencies. • Key statistical measures are used to summarise and interpret the essential features of a dataset, including its central tendency, spread, and overall shape. • Visual summaries, such as box plots, and comparative statistics enable the analysis of multiple datasets, allowing for clear interpretation of their similarities and differences in centre, spread, and distribution.

1 Data distributions Chapter outline 1.01 1.02 1.03 1.04 1.05 1.06 1.07 1.08 1.09 1.10

Types of data Categorical data displays Numerical data displays Measures of centre Investigation: The problem with average Data distribution Quartiles and spread Box plots Outliers Standard deviation Compare sets of data Chapter 1 review

4 13 26 42 56 72 85 102 118 138


Box plots help detect outliers! An outlier can be a surprising piece of data, like finding penguins in a grassy, rocky area– totally unexpected but real!


1.01   Types of data After this lesson, you will be able to… • distinguish between nominal, ordinal, discrete, and continuous data. • classify real-world data sets into appropriate data types. • compare and contrast the characteristics of nominal, ordinal, ratio, and interval scales.

Types of data A statistical variable is a measurable or observable characteristic or attribute of an item or person. Statistical data are the actual values or observations collected for these variables. Data is collected to observe and analyse changes in these variables. For example: Variable

Data

Height of students

162 cm, 168 cm, 173 cm, 183 cm

Type of animal

Dog, Cat, Bird, Fish

Univariate data Data relating to a single variable. Statistical variables are classified as either numerical or categorical: Numerical data Data where each data point is represented by a number. Also known as quantitative data. • Examples of numerical data include: the number of items sold each month, daily temperatures, heights of people, and ages of a population. • The data can be further defined as either discrete (associated with counting) or continuous (associated with measuring). Categorical data Data where each data point is represented by a word or label. Also known as qualitative data. • Examples of categorical data include: brand names, types of animals, favourite colours, and names of countries. • The data can be further defined as either ordinal (it can be ordered) or nominal (unordered).

4

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Data

Numerical

Discrete

Continuous

Categorical

Ordinal

Nominal

Discrete data Numerical data with distinct, separate values. There is a definite ‘gap’ separating one data point from the next. Discrete data usually, but not always, consists of whole numbers, and is often collected by some form of counting. Examples of discrete data Number of goals scored per match

0, 0, 0, 1, 1, 1, 1, 2, 2, 2, 2, 3, 4, . . .

Number of products sold each day

386, 397, 401, 410, 411, 422, 437, . . .

Shoe size

5, 5.5, 6, 7, 8.5, 9, 10, 10, 12.5

In each of these cases, there are no in-between values. For example, there is no way to score 2.5 goals. Discrete data can involve decimals as long as there is a definite gap between possible values. For example, a shoe will not ever come in size 8.145, so it is discrete. Continuous data Numerical data that can take any value within a range. Continuous data often involves the use of decimal numbers, and is often collected using some form of measurement. Examples of continuous data Height of trees in a forest (in metres)

12.359, 14.022, 14.951, 18.276, 11.032, . . .

Times taken to run a 10 km race (minutes)

55.34, 58.03, 57.25, 61.49, 66.11, 59.87, . . .

Daily temperature (°C)

24.4, 23.0, 22.5, 21.6, 20.7, 20.2, 19.7, . . .

Since continuous data is typically measured, it is limited by the accuracy of the measuring device being used. So continuous data may appear discrete when it is rounded. For instance, it makes sense that time is continuous, even though it can only be measured to the nearest second (or millisecond, and so on). Ordinal data Categorical data with a natural order or rank.

1.01 Types of data mathspace.co

5


The word ‘ordinal’ means ‘ordered’. Examples of ordinal data Product rating on a survey

satisfactory, good, good, good, good, excellent, excellent, . . .

Exam grades

C, C, C, C, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, A, A, A, A, A, A, A, . . .

Size of fish in a lake

small, small, small, medium, medium, medium, large, large, . . .

Nominal data Categorical data with no inherent order. The word ‘nominal’ basically means ‘name’. Examples of nominal data Nationalities in a team

German, Austrian, Italian, Spanish, Dutch, Italian, . . .

Make of car driving through an intersection

Toyota, Holden, Mazda, Toyota, Ford, Toyota, Mazda, . . .

Hair colour of students in a class blonde, red, brown, blonde, black, brown, black, red, . . .

Example 1 Which one of these variables is discrete? A Height

B

The time it takes to swim 200 metres

C Daily temperature

D

The number of family pets

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Choose the option that can be counted but is distinct and separate from one another.

The correct answer is option D: The number of family pets.

Example 2 Classify this data into its correct category: Weights of kittens A Numerical discrete

B

Categorical nominal

C Numerical continuous

D

Categorical ordinal

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Determine if the data is represented by a number, or is separated into categories.

The weight of a kitten can be measured. So it is numerical or quantitative. Weight is a measurement that can have any number of decimal places, so it is continuous. The correct answer is option C.

6

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Idea summary A statistical variable is a measurable characteristic being studied. Data collected for one variable is called univariate data. Variables can be classified as either numerical or categorical. • Numerical data (quantitative) consists of numbers. It is further divided into: • Discrete data: Values are distinct and separate, often found by counting (e.g., shoe size). • Continuous data: Can take any value within a range, often found by measuring (e.g., height). • Categorical data (qualitative) consists of words or labels. It is further divided into: • Ordinal data: Categories have a natural, meaningful order (e.g., product ratings). • Nominal data: Categories have no inherent order (e.g., hair colour).

Level of measurement To perform statistical analysis of data, it is important to understand what summary statistics can be meaningfully calculated, interpreted, and compared from a given set of data. Different levels of measurement can be applied depending on the properties of the given data. The four widely applied levels of measurement are: Nominal scale

True zero

A level of measurement with categories that do not have a natural order or ranking.

A point on a scale representing the complete absence of the measured quantity.

Example: Employment status, blood type, or eye colour Ordinal scale A level of measurement with categories together with an explicit ranking. Example: Customer satisfaction ratings (very low, low, average, high, very high)

Interval scale A numerical scale for numerical data with equal intervals but no true zero. Example: Temperature in Celsius, as 30°C is not ‘double as warm’ as 10°C, but is 20°C warmer

Other examples of interval scale include: • pH scale - 0 does not mean an absence of pH, it means as acidic as possible • Dates - for the year 2025, 0 is not the ‘beginning of time’ • Time during the day using a 12-hour clock

1.01 Types of data mathspace.co

7


Ratio scale A numerical scale for numerical data with equal intervals and a true zero. Example: Mass, as 5 g is half as heavy as 10 g and 0 g means there is no mass Other examples of ratio scale include: • Temperature measured in Kelvin as 0 K has no molecular movement, so is a true zero • Speed, because 40 km/h is indeed twice as fast as 20 km/h • Time using a stopwatch The significant difference between an interval scale and a ratio scale is the inclusion of a ‘true zero’ or ‘absolute zero’.

RATIO Named + Ordered + Equal scale + Can accommodate absolute zero

INTERVAL Named + Ordered + Equal scale

ORDINAL Named + Ordered variables

NOMINAL Named variables A C D B

0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3

2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5

A<B<C<D

The properties of each scale can be compared in terms of how they lend themselves to being used to calculate and compare statistics:

Categorises the values

Nominal

Ordinal

Interval

Ratio

Y

Y

Y

Y

Ranks values in order

Y

Y

Y

Frequency distribution

Y

Y

Y

Y

Mode

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Mean

Y

Y

Can say one value is _ units greater or smaller than the other

Y

Y

Median

Can say one value is _ times greater or smaller than the other

Y

Note: The mean of ordinal data can sometimes be calculated by assigning numbers to the outcomes. For example, for a survey asking for a customer satisfaction rating of very low, low, average, high, and very high, the numbers 1 to 5 can be assigned to the outcomes, and the mean level of satisfaction reported can be calculated. However, it is debatable whether this can be meaningfully interpreted, as the original categories are not separated into equal intervals.

8

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 3 Classify this data into its correct category: Population of a town A Nominal

B

Ordinal

C

Interval

Ratio

D

Create a strategy Use the table:

Categorises the values

Nominal

Ordinal

Interval

Ratio

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Ranks values in order Frequency distribution

Y

Y

Y

Y

Mode

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Mean

Y

Y

Can say one value is _ units greater or smaller than the other

Y

Y

Median

Can say one value is _ times greater or smaller than the other

Y

Apply the idea The population can be compared through a ratio of values. For example, a population of 2000 is considered twice as large as a population of 1000. The correct answer is option D.

Idea summary The four levels of measurement classify data based on their properties, which determines the types of statistical analysis that can be performed. • Nominal scale: Used for categorical data where categories have no natural order or rank (e.g., blood type). • Ordinal scale: Used for categorical data where categories have a meaningful, explicit ranking (e.g., satisfaction ratings). • Interval scale: A numerical scale with equal intervals between values, allowing for meaningful differences. It lacks a true zero (e.g., temperature in Celsius). • Ratio scale: A numerical scale that has all the properties of an interval scale but includes a true zero, allowing for meaningful ratios (e.g., height, mass). The critical distinction between interval and ratio scales is the concept of a true zero (also known as an absolute zero), which represents the complete absence of the quantity being measured.

1.01 Types of data mathspace.co

9


1.01 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

Fill in the blanks with the terms from this list: • a b c d

2

3

Interval

•

Numerical

•

Categorical

•

Variable

Univariate data can be numerical or ⬚ data. We can find the mean of ⬚ data. Univariate means one ⬚.

There is no true zero on an ⬚ scale.

Determine whether each statement is true or false: a

A ratio scale has a true zero.

b

An interval scale is a special type of ratio scale.

c

Discrete data is a special type of numerical data.

d

Categorical data can be broken down into ordinal and interval data.

e

The mode of categorical data can be determined.

Identify whether these examples are numerical or categorical data: a

Favourite flavours

b

Maximum temperature

c

Daily temperature

d

Types of horses

e

Amount owed on lay-by

f

Types of vegetables

g

Daily UV index

h

Maximum rainfall

i

Favourite colours

j

Brands of phones

k

Types of dogs at the park

l

Maximum snowfall

Practice 4 Ex 1

5

10

Identify whether these data variables are discrete or continuous: a

The number of classrooms in a school

b

Daily humidity

c

The time taken to run 200 metres

d

Lengths of cats’ whiskers

e

The distance from the Earth to nearby galaxies

f

The number of people taller than you in each class

g

Marks on the most recent Physics test

h

Time it takes to fall asleep at night

i

The amount of water consumed in a day

Identify whether these are nominal or ordinal categorical data: a

Eye colour

b

Birthdate

c

Temperature

d

Favourite song

e

State/territory of birth

f

Year level

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


6

Classify these data examples as one of these types: • Numerical discrete • Numerical continuous • Categorical ordinal • Categorical nominal

Ex 2

7

8 Ex 3

9

a

Types of trailers in a shopping centre car park

b

Heights of people at an athletics carnival

c

Weights of dogs

d

The languages spoken in a class

e

The number of languages students in a town speak

f

The number of people at an athletics carnival

g

The time spent playing games each day

h

The number of sports people play

Classify these data examples as one of these types:

a b c d

• Numerical continuous • Numerical discrete • Categorical The workplaces of people living in Sydney The body temperature of a hospital patient taken over a 21-hour period The brands of breakfast foods in a supermarket The weights of club members

e

The number of people attending a netball game

Identify the level of measurement that can be applied to these data as nominal, ordinal, interval or ratio: a

Number of pets in a household

b

pH of liquid

c

Make of car

d

Weights of eggs

e

Daily rainfall in a city

f

Military rank

g

Temperature measured in degrees Celsius

h

Letter grades on an assignment (A to F)

i

Year of birth

Identify the level of measurement that can be applied to the data generated in each situation as nominal, ordinal, interval or ratio: a

The time taken for a team of swimmers to complete one lap of a swimming pool is recorded by their coach.

b

The shoe sizes of shoe prints left at the scene of a crime are recorded by a detective.

c

The religion practised by a person is recorded during a census.

d

A driver is being rated by customers on a scale of 1 star to 5 stars.

1.01 Types of data mathspace.co

11


10

Determine whether these statistics can be meaningfully computed, interpreted, and compared, from the data in each situation: i

Mode

iii a

c

Differences between outcomes iv Ratios between outcomes The temperature, in degrees Celsius, of the ocean at a particular location is monitored and fed back to a weather station. A group of people is surveyed and asked to indicate their attitude on a recent government policy by selecting a number from 1 to 5, where 1 = strongly disagree, 2 = disagree, 3 = neutral, 4 = agree and 5 = strongly agree. The flavour of ice cream selected by customers at a market stall is recorded over a day.

d

The weight of puppies at a puppy school is recorded each week.

b

Median

The graph shows the height of each student in Kate’s class:

Number of students

11

ii

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 Height (cm)

a

Is the variable ‘height of student’ continuous or discrete? Explain your answer.

b

Is the variable ‘number of students in a given height range’ continuous or discrete? Explain your answer.

Extend your thinking 12

Patients at a hospital are asked to give their pain a rating from 1 to 10. Vera says: “The pain ratings are interval data because they are numerical and have a scale going up in equal amounts.” Critique Vera’s reasoning and give a correct explanation for the level of measurement that can be applied to the pain rating data.

13

Recording the distance, in kilometres, between towns is supposed to produce continuous data. However, distances listed on road signs are always represented as whole numbers. Explain how this can be.

14

Explain in your own words why the amount of money spent on groceries is a discrete variable even though it involves decimal values.

15

Explain in your own words why postcode is a categorical variable while the number of houses in a postcode is a numerical variable.

12

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


1.02   Categorical data displays After this lesson, you will be able to… • construct frequency tables and bar charts for categorical data. • interpret graphical displays of categorical data distributions. • identify and interpret the mode in context for categorical data distributions.

Categorical data and frequency tables Categorical data uses labels or words to describe observations. When the same category appears multiple times, data displays should be used to organise the data with the number of occurrences of each response. Frequency table Lists the frequency (number of occurrences) of observations. Frequency distribution The division of a set of observations into a number of classes, together with a listing of the number of observations (the frequency) in that class.

Tally

Frequency

12

Black

llll

9

10

12

8

White

II

Blue Green

ll llll

Silver

7 4

l

Frequency

Vehicle colour

6 4

6

2 0

Yellow

II

2

Red

Illl

4

Colours of vehicles passing through intersection

k

ac

Bl

te

W

hi

ue

Bl

en

e Gr

r

lve

Si

w

lo

l Ye

d Re

Vehicle colour Notice that the frequency table has three columns: • The first column shows the categories or subgroups within the data. In this case, the colours. • The tally column (optional) uses tally marks to record the frequency of each category. • The final column sums the tally marks and records the frequency as a number. The sum of the frequencies is equal to the total number of data values. In this case, the colours of 44 vehicles were recorded.

1.02 Categorical data displays mathspace.co

13


Example 1 Mr. Rodriguez recorded the number of pets owned by each of the 45 students in band. He found that 15 people had no pets, 19 people had one pet, 3 people had two pets and 8 people had three pets. Write Mr. Rodriguez's results in the frequency table: Number of pets

Frequency

0

⬚

1 2 3

Create a strategy

⬚ ⬚ ⬚

‘Frequency’ means the number of people. Use the given information to fill this column in.

Apply the idea Number of pets

Frequency

0

15

1

19

2

3

3

8

Reflect and check Total students surveyed: 15 + 19 + 3 + 8 = 45 The sum of frequencies (45) matches the total number of students.

Idea summary Frequency tables organise categorical data and their frequencies, showing the frequency distribution. The sum of frequencies equals the total observations.

Column graphs and bar charts

14

Column graph

Mode

A graph used in statistics for organising and displaying categorical data.

The category with the highest frequency in a distribution.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Exploration

1. Which sport is the most popular? Explain how you know. 2. Assuming that 20 students preferred hockey, how many students preferred tennis? Explain how you know.

Number of students

A group of students were surveyed about their preferred sport, and the results are shown in this column graph: Preferred sport

Football Tennis

Rugby Basketball Hockey Sport

3. If 12 students preferred football, 14 preferred rugby, and 14 preferred basketball, how many students were surveyed in total?

Product F 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Sales (thousands of units) Bar chart

Product F

Product E

Product E

Product D

Product D

Product C

Product C

Product B

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Product B

Product A

Product A

Sales (thousands of units)

Bar charts and column graphs are both used to display the frequency of categorical data. Each category is represented by a separate bar. Column and bar graphs have: • Equal-width bars with gaps. • One axis represents the categories and the other axis represents the frequencies. • The length (height) of a bar corresponds to the frequency of that category.

Column graph

Column graph features to remember: • Title the graph clearly. • Label each axis. • Label each category and give the vertical axis a clear scale. • Make sure the columns are equal widths and equally spaced. • Make sure that the height of the column matches the value it represents, which is often the frequency of the category (how often that outcome occurred). The heights of the bars can be used to interpret and make conclusions from the data set.

1.02 Categorical data displays mathspace.co

15


Example 2

Number of students

Miss Yen recorded her students’ favourite pets in this column graph: 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Students’ favourite pets

Hamster

Dog

Cat

Fish

Bird

Pets a Identify the mode and interpret it in context.

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Find the tallest bar, which represents the highest frequency.

The bird category has the tallest column in the column graph, indicating that birds are the most popular pet.

b Determine the number of students who selected fish as their favourite pet.

Apply the idea The height of the fish column is 8. So, 8 students picked a fish as their favourite pet.

c How many students were surveyed in total?

Apply the idea Number of students = 6 + 7 + 4 + 8 + 11 = 36 The sum of the frequencies is 6 + 7 + 4 + 8 + 11 = 36. Therefore, 36 students were surveyed in total.

16

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

Write the equation Evaluate


Example 3 This table represents the sizes of t-shirts ordered from an online store over the past week: T-shirt size

Frequency

Small

10

Medium

8

Large

10

Extra Large

12

Total

40

a Classify this categorical variable as ordinal or nominal.

Create a strategy If the categories can be ordered or ranked in a meaningful way, the variable is ordinal. Otherwise, the variable is nominal.

Apply the idea T-shirt sizes have a meaningful order because they reflect increasing measurements. Each size represents a different range of body measurements, allowing for a natural ranking from smallest to largest. Therefore, t-shirt size is an ordinal variable.

b Construct a column graph to represent the data.

Create a strategy Place the categories on the horizontal axis and the frequencies on the vertical axis. Draw columns above each category to represent the corresponding frequency. Add labels for both axes and include a descriptive title.

Frequency

Apply the idea 12 10 8 6 4 2 0

Size breakdown of shirts ordered

Small

Medium

Large Extra large

T-shirt size

1.02 Categorical data displays mathspace.co

17


Idea summary Column graphs and bar charts are used for organising and displaying categorical data. The category with the highest frequency in a distribution is the mode, represented by the tallest bar. When creating a column graph: • Title the graph clearly. • Label each axis. • Label each category and give the vertical axis a clear scale. • Make sure the columns are equal widths and equally spaced. • Make sure that the height of the column matches the value it represents, which is often the frequency of the category (how often that outcome occurred). The heights of the bars can be used to interpret and make conclusions from the data set.

1.02 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

2

Is each statement true or false: a

Column graphs are used for continuous data.

b

Frequencies can be read off column graphs.

c

The same data set can be represented with a frequency table or a column graph.

d

The sum of the frequencies can be found from a frequency table.

e

The vertical axis of column graphs is unlabelled.

For each of these scenarios, identify what categories A, B, C and D represent in the corresponding frequency tables: a

b

18

Sophia asked 28 of her students to pick their favourite sport. 8 picked football, 15 picked volleyball, 5 picked basketball, and 5 picked tennis. Rochelle asked her students how they spent their weekend. 11 said beach, 13 said skiing, 6 said fun park, and 10 said camping.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

Sport

A

B

C

D

Frequency

8

15

5

5

Activity

A

B

C

D

Frequency

11

13

6

10


Match the frequency tables with the bar charts.

iii

ii

Animal Frequency

Bird

1

Bird

2

Cat

3

Cat

3

Dog

2

Dog

1

Fish

4

Fish

4

Animal Frequency

iv

Animal Frequency

Bird

1

Bird

2

Cat

2

Cat

1

Dog

3

Dog

3

Fish

4

Fish

4

Animal

a

Animal Frequency

b

Fish

Fish

Dog

Dog

Animal

i

Cat

0

1

2 3 Frequency

4

0

1

2 3 Frequency

4

0

1

2 3 Frequency

4

d

Fish

Fish

Dog

Dog

Animal

c

Cat Bird

Bird

Animal

3

Cat

Cat Bird

Bird 0

1

2 3 Frequency

4

1.02 Categorical data displays mathspace.co

19


Practice 4

5

6 Ex 2

For each scenario, construct a frequency table for the results: a

Katrina asked 34 people to choose their favourite fruit. 10 people picked apples, 15 people picked bananas, 6 people picked grapes and 3 people picked pears.

b

Ben asked 35 people about how many siblings they have. He found that 12 people had no siblings, 15 people had one sibling, 3 people had two siblings and 5 people had three siblings.

c

Bob asked 41 of his students to choose their favourite toy. 7 students picked cars, 13 people picked planes, 6 people picked balls and 15 people picked video games.

d

Noah asked his students to choose their favourite method of travelling. 9 students picked car, 13 people picked plane, and 5 people picked boat.

In a survey, some people were asked to name their favourite sport. The frequency table containing the results is given: Sport

Soccer

Basketball

Football

Tennis

Volleyball

Other

Frequency

17

14

26

9

4

12

a

Determine the number of people who took part in the survey.

b

Determine the sport that most people rate as their favourite.

A survey of the preferred sport was done for a group of boys and the results are shown in the given column graph:

Number of boys

Ex 1

Preferred sport

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Football

Tennis

Rugby

Basketball

Hockey

Sport

20

a

Identify the mode and interpret it in context.

b

Determine the number of students who selected football as their preferred sport.

c

How many students participated in the survey?

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


7

The column graph shows the number of cars by brand that are fixed by the local mechanic: 30

Frequency

25 20 15 10 5 0

BMW

Holden Car brand

Mercedes

a

Identify and interpret the mode of this data set.

b

Which car brands does the mechanic fix equally often?

Mitsubishi

Kathleen recorded the number of phone calls she received over four days. The results are displayed in the given column graph:

Frequency

8

Toyota

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Tuesday

Wednesday

Thursday

Friday

Day a

What day did Kathleen receive the most calls?

b

Which days did she receive an equal number of phone calls?

c

Determine the fraction of total calls received on Wednesday.

1.02 Categorical data displays mathspace.co

21


Edward asked his students to choose their favourite animals. He plotted the results in this column graph:

Frequency

9

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Cats

Birds

Dogs

Hamster

Animal

10 Ex 3

a

Identify and interpret the mode of this data set.

b

Which animals were equally popular?

c

What fraction of the total students prefer cats?

A company conducted a customer satisfaction survey to understand how clients feel about their new product: a b

11

12

22

Satisfaction level

Frequency

Very unsatisfied

3

Classify this categorical variable as ordinal or nominal.

Unsatisfied

7

Neutral

12

Construct a bar chart to represent the data.

Satisfied

15

Very satisfied

8

Total

45

Amelia counted the cookbooks on her grandparents’ shelf and recorded the results in this table: a

Classify this categorical variable as ordinal or nominal.

b

Construct a bar chart to represent the data.

Type of cookbook

Number of cookbooks

Baking

2

Italian

3

Quick meals

2

Gourmet

4

Total

11

Laura asked some of her friends about their favourite colours and presented the results in the frequency table: Colour

Black

Brown

Blue

Red

Yellow

Frequency

3

10

12

5

15

a

Determine the number of people who took part in the survey.

b

Determine the least favourite colour.

c

Construct a column graph using the results from the table.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


13

A restaurant owner recorded how many employees arrived early, on time or late. The frequency table for the results is given: Early

On-time

Late

10

22

7

Frequency

14

15

a

Determine the number of employees that the restaurant owner surveyed in total.

b

When did the majority of employees arrive?

c

Construct a column graph using the results from the table.

In a survey some people were asked approximately how many minutes they take to decide between brands of a particular product. The frequency table with the results is given: Minutes taken

1

2

3

Frequency

13

17

12

a

Determine the number of people that took part in the survey.

b

Determine the number of minutes that most people take to decide between brands.

c

Construct the column graph using the results from the table.

For each of these scenarios: i

Construct a frequency table of the results.

ii

Create a column graph that represents the information in the frequency table.

a

Sandy asked 12 of her friends where they went on holiday last year. Their responses were: beach, camping, caravan, beach, snow, caravan, caravan, camping, beach, beach, caravan, caravan

b

In a survey, 20 people were asked how many languages they spoke. Their responses were: 1, 1, 1, 2, 3, 2, 3, 1, 1, 1, 2, 2, 1, 1, 1, 3, 1, 1, 1, 1

Extend your thinking 16

The set of marks for a class of students is given: 81, 81, 71, 81, 81, 61, 71, 93, 71, 58, 71, 58, 61, 93, 93, 71, 61, 61, 81, 58, 93 a

Organise the data into a frequency table.

b

Determine the number of students in the class.

c

Determine the number of students that will get a Distinction grade (80 < Score ≤ 90).

d

Determine the number of students that will get a High Distinction grade (Score > 90).

e

Determine the percentage of students getting a High Distinction grade. Round your answer to two decimal places.

1.02 Categorical data displays mathspace.co

23


17

The table shows the number of people who visited Disneyland between 2008 and 2012: Year

2008

2009

2010

2011

2012

Number of people (in hundred thousands)

158

155

155

157

160

House

Yellow

Blue

Red

Green

Points

15

25

40

60

Construct a column graph for the data. 18

19

The table shows the house points earned by four different houses at their swimming carnival: a

Construct a column graph for the data.

b

Which house earned the most points?

c

Which house earned as many points as the Yellow house and Blue house combined?

The sales of different products are shown in this horizontal bar chart: Product A Product B Product C Product D Product E Product F 0

24

2

4 6 8 Sales (thousands of units)

10

a

What was the best-selling product?

b

Determine the total number of products sold.

c

Determine the revenue generated by Product B alone, given that Product B was sold at $50 each.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


For these three column graphs:

0

Tom

John Name

Kate

Is the tallest person the oldest? Explain your reasoning.

b

Is the heaviest person the oldest? Explain your reasoning.

c

Is the heaviest person the tallest? Explain your reasoning.

d

Is the youngest person the lightest? Explain your reasoning.

e

Is it possible for a 10-year old to be lighter than an 8-year old based on the data displayed? Give your reasoning.

50 45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0

Mass

Tom

John Name

Kate

Height

140 120 Centimetres

a

Age

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Kilograms

Years

20

100 80 60 40 20 0

Tom

John Name

Kate

1.02 Categorical data displays mathspace.co

25


1.03   Numerical data displays After this lesson, you will be able to… • construct histograms, stem plots, and dot plots for numerical data. • select the most appropriate graphical representation (histograms, stem plots, dot plots) based on context and purpose. • interpret numerical data distributions using various graphical displays.

Histograms and grouped data Histograms display the frequency distribution of continuous numerical data, like time or height, using adjacent bars. Histogram A graph with no gaps between bars, showing the frequency of numerical data in class intervals.

Although a histogram looks similar to a bar chart, there are several important differences between them: Histogram

Column graph

Shows distribution of data values

Show and compare frequencies of categories

Used for numerical data

Used for primarily categorical data

Numerical scales on both axes

Numerical scale only on vertical axis

Columns cannot be reordered

Can reorder columns and retain meaning

Distribution of running times for a 10 km race

12

35

10 Frequency

25 20 15 10

6 4 2

5

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

hi te Bl ue G re en Si lv e Ye r llo w Re d

W

re

45 50 55 60 65 70 Running time (minutes)

en

0

Histogram

26

8

G

Frequency

30

0

Colours of vehicles passing through intersection

Vehicle colour Column graph


Class interval

Frequency

45 ≤ Time < 50

9

50 ≤ Time < 55

7

55 ≤ Time < 60

20

60 ≤ Time < 65

30

65 ≤ Time < 70

6

Total

72

This frequency table organises the data that is represented in the “Distribution of running times for a 10 kilometres race” histogram. Notice that the histogram has only five columns or grouped intervals, even though it represents 72 different data values.

Key features of a frequency histogram: • Continuous numerical scale on the horizontal axis (class intervals). • Data is grouped into equal-width class intervals. • Frequency on the vertical axis. • No gaps between bars and about half-column gap at the start. For class intervals with frequency zero, the gap should remain. • Technology can be used to verify or create histograms. There are several different ways that class intervals are defined. Here are some examples with two adjacent class intervals: Class interval formats

Frequency

45 ≤ Time < 50 0 ≤ Time < 55

Lower endpoint included, upper endpoint excluded. This is the most common approach.

45 < Time ≤ 50 0 < Time ≤ 55

Upper endpoint included, lower endpoint excluded.

45 to < 50

45 to < 50

Lower endpoint included, upper endpoint excluded.

45 - 49

50 - 54

Suitable for data rounded to the nearest whole number, or discrete data.

45 → 50

50 → 55

Not clear which endpoints are included or excluded. Assume the lower endpoint is included.

Regardless of the format used, each class interval for a given set of data should be consistent across all class intervals to avoid double counting any values in two intervals.

1.03 Numerical data displays mathspace.co

27


Exploration This histogram summarises numerical univariate data. 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0

200

400

600

800

1000

1. The modal class can be said to be 100 – < 200. What is meant by this statement? 2. One data value is 842, what could that value be called? 3. One of the measures of centre is 199. Which measure of centre would this be? Explain. 4. One of the measures of centre is 114. Which measure of centre would this be? Explain.

Example 1 As part of a fuel watch initiative, the price of petrol at a service station was recorded each day for 21 days. The frequency table shows the findings: Price (cents per litre)

Class centre

Frequency

130.0 - 134.9

132.5

6

135.0 - 139.9

137.5

5

140.0 - 144.9

142.5

3

145.0 - 149.9

147.5

6

a What was the highest price that could have been recorded?

Create a strategy Look for the maximum value in the highest class interval.

Apply the idea Based on the table, the highest price that could have been recorded is 149.9 cents as this is the maximum value in the highest class interval.

28

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


b How many days was the price at least 140.0 cents?

Create a strategy Find the sum of the frequencies from the appropriate classes.

Apply the idea The prices were observed to be above 140.0 in the last two classes: 140.0 - 144.9 and 145.0 - 149.9. So, the frequencies of those two classes should be added. Days = 3 + 6 =9

Add the frequencies Evaluate

c Construct a histogram to show the data distribution.

Create a strategy The data is already in a grouped frequency table, so the class intervals (bins) are already determined. The horizontal axis should go from 130 to 150 going up by 5s. The vertical axis can go up by 1s up to 7.

Apply the idea

Reflect and check If class centres are used, it would look like this: Distribution of gas prices 6

5

5 Frequency

Frequency

Distribution of gas prices 6

4 3 2

3 2 1

1 0

4

130 135 140 145 150 Price of gas (cents per litre)

0

132.5 137.5 142.5 147.5 Price of gas (cents per litre)

1.03 Numerical data displays mathspace.co

29


Idea summary For grouped data: • Every data value must go into exactly one and only one class interval. Class intervals should be equal in width. • Each class interval must be the same size, for example: 1 – < 5, 5 – < 10, 10 – < 15, . . . Key features of a frequency histogram: • • • •

Continuous numerical scale on the horizontal axis (class intervals). Data is grouped into equal-width class intervals. Frequency on the vertical axis. No gaps between bars and about half-column gap at the start. For class intervals with frequency zero, the gap should remain. • Technology can be used to verify or create histograms.

Dot plots Dot plot A data display for numerical or categorical data with a horizontal axis with dots representing the frequency of data values.

Dot plots are best used for small to mediumsized sets of data and are good for visually highlighting how the data is spread and whether there are any gaps in the data or outliers. Each dot represents one occurrence (e.g., 5 dots at 2 days). Ideal for small data sets to show spread and gaps. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Days per week spent exercising Key features: • Labelled and evenly spaced horizontal axis • No vertical axis • Evenly spaced dots stacked above the numerical scale to show the frequency

30

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 2 Here is a dot plot of the number of goals scored in each of Bob’s soccer games:

0

1

2 3 4 Number of goals

5

a How many times was one goal scored?

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Count the number of dots above the number 1.

There are 7 dots above the number 1, so 1 goal was scored 7 times.

b Identify the number of goals that were scored with the highest and equal frequency.

Create a strategy Look for the scores that have the same number of dots, and the most dots.

Apply the idea On the dot plot, there are two scores that have the same number of dots and also the most dots. These are 0 and 3. So, the correct answers are 0 and 3.

c How many games were played in total?

Create a strategy Count all the dots in the graph.

Apply the idea Add the number of dots in each column. Number of games = 10 + 10 + 5 + 7 + 6 + 3 = 41

Write the equation Evaluate

1.03 Numerical data displays mathspace.co

31


Idea summary Dot plots show numerical data with dots for each value, best for small sets to highlight distribution and gaps. Note: Technology can be used to construct dot plots of numerical data.

Stem plots Stem plot A display for numerical data that involves splitting numbers into a stem (leading digits) and leaf (last digit). Sometimes called a stem-and-leaf plot.

21

163

10.5

stem leaf

stem leaf

stem leaf

Stem plots are best used for small to medium-sized numerical data sets where values are more than one digit.

Score of 10

Score of 56

Stem

Leaf

1

036

2

1 678

3

556

4

1 1 569

5

All of 0 3 6 8 these are

Features to note: • Stems are listed in consecutive, ascending order. • Leaves are placed next to their corresponding stems, also in ascending order. • Leaves are aligned in imaginary columns. • A key is provided to explain how the stems and leaves combine to form each data value.

in the 40s Key 2|1 = 21

The given stem plot represents the raw data set: 10, 13, 16, 21, 26, 27, 28, 35, 35, 36, 41, 41, 45, 46, 49, 50, 53, 56, 58

32

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 3 The given stem plot shows the age of people to enter through the gates of a concert in the first 5 seconds: Stem

Leaf

1

1 26899

2

02345778

3

2247

4 5

9 Key 1|2 = 12

a How many people passed through the gates in the first 5 seconds?

Create a strategy Count the number of leaves.

Apply the idea The number of people surveyed can be found by counting the number of leaves in the stem plot, since each data entry is represented by one leaf. There are 6 people aged 10 to 19, 8 people in their 20s, 4 people in their 30s, and 1 person in their 50s. So, the total number of people can be found by adding all these numbers. Total number of people = 6 + 8 + 4 + 1 = 19

Write the equation Evaluate

b What was the age of the youngest person?

Create a strategy Find the smallest number recorded.

Apply the idea The smallest number will be in the smallest stem, which is 1, and have the smallest leaf, which is also 1. This stem and leaf make the number 11. The youngest person is 11 years old.

1.03 Numerical data displays mathspace.co

33


c What was the age of the oldest person?

Create a strategy Find the largest number recorded.

Apply the idea The largest number will be in the largest stem which is 5, and have the largest leaf which is 9. This stem and leaf make the number 59. The oldest person is 59 years old.

d What proportion of the concert-goers were under 24 years old?

Create a strategy Divide the number of people whose ages are less than 24 by the total number of people.

Apply the idea There are 9 people aged less than 24 years old. Since the total number of people is 19, then the proportion of concert-goers is

9 . 19

Idea summary Stem

Leaf

1

036

2

1 678

3

556

4

1   1 5 6 9

5

0368

Key 2|1 = 21

34

A stem plot, sometimes called a stem-and-leaf plot, is used for organising and displaying numerical data. It is appropriate for small to moderately sized data sets. An advantage of a stem plot is the individual scores can be seen. The right-most digit in each data value is split from the other digits, to become the leaf. The remaining digits become the stem.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


1.03 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

2

3

Describe a data set that is suited to each data display: a

An ungrouped frequency table

b

A grouped frequency table

c

A stem plot

d

A dot plot

e

A histogram

Determine whether the data should be displayed in a frequency table with or without class intervals, and explain your reasoning: a

A researcher is studying the income distribution of a large population.

b

A survey collects data on individuals’ preferred hobbies.

c

A teacher surveys a class of 30 students to determine how many books each student read over the summer.

d

A teacher wants to analyse exam scores for a large class.

e

A community centre collects data on the number of pets owned by families in the neighbourhood.

If the range of a set of scores is 48, determine the appropriate group size to group the data into each number of groups: a

4

5

3 groups

b

8 groups

Determine whether each statement is true or false about an ordered stem plot: a

The scores are ordered.

b

A stem plot does not give an idea of outliers and clusters.

c

It is only appropriate for data where scores have high frequencies.

d

The individual scores can be read on a stem plot.

20 people were asked how many hours of sleep they had gotten the previous night. The results are shown: 1, 6, 9, 8, 7, 9, 7, 10, 2, 3, 8, 7, 7, 3, 7, 3, 3, 7, 10, 9 a

How many people got 7 hours sleep?

b

What is the maximum amount of sleep reported by the group?

1.03 Numerical data displays mathspace.co

35


6

The table shows the number of trains arriving either on time or late at a particular station: a

How many trains were late on Friday?

b

How many trains passed through the station on Wednesday?

c

How many trains were on time throughout the entire week?

d

What fraction of trains were on time over the whole week?

Day

Arriving on Arriving time late

Monday

23

38

Tuesday

12

25

Wednesday

22

29

Thursday

30

27

Friday

11

14

Saturday

15

11

Sunday

14

10

Practice 7

Ex 1

8

9

Construct a grouped frequency table for these data: a

46, 54, 35, 23, 24, 28, 26, 11, 19, 17, 32

b

83, 68, 39, 42, 86, 66, 64, 76, 63, 43, 65, 83, 63, 67, 49, 51, 32, 55, 38, 65, 41, 73, 35, 36, 74

A group of Year 11 students were surveyed on their height, and the results are shown in the frequency table: Height (cm)

Frequency

135 ≤ h < 145

4

145 ≤ h < 155

12

155 ≤ h < 165

13

165 ≤ h < 175

8

175 ≤ h < 185

2

185 ≤ h < 195

1

Total

40

a

What was the tallest a person in this survey could be?

b

How many people were at least 165 cm tall?

c

Construct a histogram to represent this data.

Consider this set of scores: 12, 59, 61, 27, 58, 18, 76, 27, 52, 19, 13, 56, 71, 31, 73, 60, 41, 17, 22, 68, 57, 15, 40, 19, 76, 44, 60, 55, 36

36

a

Determine the set of seven class intervals that should be used to organise this data.

b

Construct a grouped frequency table for the data.

c

Construct a histogram to represent the data.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


The histogram shows the number of hours that students in a particular class had slept for the night before:

Frequency

10

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0

2

4

6 8 Time (hours)

a

Complete the frequency table for this set of data.

b

How many students are in the class?

c

How many students had at least 8 hours of sleep that night?

d

How many students have less than 6 hours of sleep?

e

What percentage of students had less than 6 hours of sleep?

10

14

12

Number of hours

Frequency

0≤t<2

⬚

2≤t<4

⬚

4≤t<6

⬚

6≤t<8

⬚

8 ≤ t < 10

⬚

10 ≤ t < 12

⬚ ⬚

Total 11

This frequency table shows the resting heart rate of people taking part in a study: a

How many people took part in the study?

b

How many people had a resting heart rate between 55 and 74?

c

12

How many people had a resting heart rate of below 65?

For the given frequency table: a

Complete the cumulative frequency column.

b

Calculate the total frequency.

c

Identify the class size.

d

Determine the value such that approximately half of the scores recorded are greater than.

Heart rate

Frequency

45 − 54

15

55 − 64

25

65 − 74

26

75 − 84

30

x

f

1→5

16

6 → 10

28

11 → 15

19

16 → 20

17

21 → 25

5

26 → 30

3

1.03 Numerical data displays mathspace.co

cf ⬚

⬚ ⬚ ⬚

⬚ ⬚ 37


13

Construct a dot plot that represents this data: 49, 49, 49, 50, 48, 47, 50, 49, 51, 50, 51, 49, 52, 47, 50, 50, 48, 51, 51, 50, 48, 49, 52, 49, 47, 47, 52, 52, 49, 47, 52, 48, 51, 50, 49, 52, 48, 48, 52, 50, 48, 47, 52, 52, 52, 48, 48, 49

14

The goals scored by a football team in their matches are represented in this dot plot. Construct the frequency distribution table for this data.

0 15

1

16

17

Ex 3

18

38

5

Consider this dot plot: a

Construct the frequency distribution table for this data.

b

How many students scored above 20?

c

How many students scored below 30? 10

Ex 2

2 3 4 Goals scored

20 30 40 50 Score

Christa is a casual nurse. She used a dot plot to keep track of the number of shifts she did each week for several weeks: a

Over how many weeks did Christa record her shifts?

b

For how many weeks did she work 5 shifts?

c

How many weeks did she work less than 6 shifts?

d

If Christa works at least 6 shifts a week, she buys a weekly train ticket. What fraction of the time did she buy a weekly train ticket?

3

4 5 6 7 Shifts per week

8

Construct a stem plot for these data sets: a

11, 12, 13, 13, 14, 14, 16, 16, 17, 20, 22, 24, 29, 29, 32, 35, 35, 35, 53

b

24, 26, 25, 37, 36, 37, 37, 38, 41, 46, 49, 56, 67, 63, 67, 68, 69, 75, 80, 80

c

9.2, 4.3, 9.8, 7.8, 8.9, 0.7, 1.8, 4.9, 6.7, 3.4, 2.0, 8.1, 2.2, 7.9, 6.7, 8.2, 9.0, 9.0, 6.8, 2.0

d

142, 173, 121, 157, 149, 126, 137, 162, 118, 152, 130, 115, 144, 176, 123, 138, 167, 119, 146, 175

The scores for a recent spelling test are shown in the stem plot. The maximum possible score on the test was 100: a

How many students took the test?

b

What was the highest score on the test?

c

What test score occurred the most frequently?

d

How many marks separate the highest score and the most frequent score?

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

Stem     Leaf 6

233667

7

0 1 1   1 1   4 5 8

8

1 1 23456999

9

4579 Key 7|6 = 76


19

Consider the stem plot:

Stem Leaf

Construct a frequency table for the data.

1

1 237

2

347779

3

279

4

0 1 156

5

26

Key 1|2 = 12 20

Determine the best display for each data set. Justify your answer. a The heights of every student at a school with over 1000 students b The number of goals scored in 15 football (soccer) games c

The ages of 40 people on a tram

Extend your thinking 21

The dot plot shows the rounded maximum temperature (°C) in a town over several weeks: Temperature in a town

21

23 25 27 29 31

33 35

Explain the features of the dot plot that make it a better display than a stem plot. 22

A principal wants to investigate the performance of students at his school studying Engineering. To do this, he has the marks of each student collected into groups and put into a frequency table. Each group of marks is assigned a grade as shown:

a b c d

Grade

x

f

cf

E

0 ≤ x < 20

7

D

20 ≤ x < 40

16

C

40 ≤ x < 60

35

⬚

B

60 ≤ x < 80

102

A

80 ≤ x < 100

72

⬚ ⬚ ⬚ ⬚

Complete the cumulative frequency column. Determine the total frequency. Identify the class size. Determine the number that approximately three quarters of the scores are greater than.

1.03 Numerical data displays mathspace.co

39


23

Here are the luggage weights of 15 passengers, rounded up to the nearest kilogram: 20, 21, 18, 17, 19, 22, 20, 17, 22, 16, 21, 21, 18, 21, 20 a

Complete the frequency table.

b

How many times did someone check-in luggage that weighed more than 19 kilograms?

c

There is a baggage restriction of 20 kilograms and the airline charges each passenger $1.50 for every kilogram in their luggage above this restriction.

Weight (kg)

Frequency

15 < x ≤ 16

⬚

16 < x ≤ 17 17 < x ≤ 18 18 < x ≤ 19 19 < x ≤ 20

Calculate the total amount charged for excess baggage.

20 < x ≤ 21 21 < x ≤ 22

24

The speed of passing cars on a stretch of highway are recorded by a police officer. The results are shown in the first table:

40

Speed (km/h)

Frequency

80 < x ≤ 90

3

90 < x ≤ 100

55

100 < x < 110

10

110 ≤ x < 120

6

120 ≤ x < 130

0

130 ≤ x < 140

1

a

How many cars did the police officer observe?

b

The stretch of highway that the police officer was observing had a speed limit of 100 km/h. How many drivers were recorded to be speeding?

c

Use the information in the second table, to determine: Speed over the limit

Fine

Demerit points

x < 10

165

2

10 ≤ x < 20

350

3

20 ≤ x < 30

730

5

30 ≤ x < 45

870

7

i

The total value of fines to be issued

ii

The total number of demerit points to be dealt out

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

⬚ ⬚ ⬚ ⬚

⬚ ⬚


25

A car manufacturing company records the number of cars produced each day over a period of one month. The data collected is as follows: 10

Frequency

8 6 4 2 0

0

10 20 30 40 Number of cars

50

If the goal for the month was to produce at least 800 cars, did the company meet its target? Assume the company manufactured an average number of cars within each interval. 26

The level of mercury in 40 fishing waters was tested and recorded. The results are given in this stem plot: Stem

Leaf

9

1 3 5 5 6

10

1 2 4 4 5 5 6 8 9 9

11

1   1 2 3 3 3 5 6 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 9

12

222223469 Key 1|2 = 12 units

a

What was the second-highest reading?

b

In how many places was a reading of 117 or higher recorded?

c

What was the 11 th lowest score?

d

If the safe level of mercury is recommended to be 109 or lower, what percentage of the places have safe levels of mercury? Round your answer to one decimal place.

1.03 Numerical data displays mathspace.co

41


1.04   Measures of centre After this lesson, you will be able to… • calculate measures of centre (mean and median) from data sets and data displays. • use technology to calculate and verify the mean and median of large data sets. • interpret measures of centre in context of the data. • compare measures of centre to analyse data distributions.

Mean Mean A measure of centre often referred to as the average. To calculate the mean, add all the scores in a data set, then divide this by the number of scores. The mean of a data set, denoted by x, is given by:

x

x n

Σx is the sum of the values n is the total number (count) of values in the data set Technology can be utilised to calculate the mean. The mean can also be found from data displays. For dot plots and stem plots, the raw data can be read off the display and used to calculate the mean. For histograms, the mean can only be estimated because the raw data cannot be determined. To find the mean from a histogram: 1. Write the information in a grouped frequency table. 2. Calculate the cumulative (total) frequency by adding up all of the frequencies. 3. Place two columns to the end of the table called ‘Class centre’ and ‘Class centre × frequency’. 4. Fill in the ‘Class centre’ column by finding the average of the two endpoints for that row. 5. Fill in the ‘Class centre × Frequency’ column by multiplying the class centre and frequency. 6. Add up the ‘Class centre × Frequency’ column. 7. Produce an estimated mean (average) by dividing the sum of the ‘Class centre × Frequency’ column by the total frequency.

42

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Class interval

Frequency

Class centre

Class centre × Frequency

45 ≤ time < 50

9

47.5

9 × 47.5 = 427.5

50 ≤ time < 55

7

52.5

7 × 52.5 = 367.5

55 ≤ time < 60

20

57.5

20 × 57.5 = 1150

60 ≤ time < 65

30

62.5

30 × 62.5 = 1875

65 ≤ time < 70

6

67.5

6 × 67.5 = 405

n = 72 Mean x

Σx = 4225 x n

4225 72

58.68

Did you know?

Measures of centre, like the mean, median, and mode, are crucial for understanding data! For instance, in sports statistics, the mean can show the average points scored by a player over a season, while the median can give a better sense of a player's consistent performance by eliminating outliers from extreme games. These measures are also widely used in education to understand student achievement across different assessments. No matter the field, measures of centre provide valuable insights that support smarter decision-making.

1.04 Measures of centre mathspace.co

43


Example 1 The histogram shows the speed of balls delivered by cricket bowlers: 16 14 Frequency

12 10 8 6 4 2 0

100

110

120

130 140 Speed (km/h)

150

160

170

a Complete the table: Speed (km/h)

Frequency

Class centre

Class centre × Frequency

110 ≤ x < 120

4

120 ≤ x < 130

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

130 ≤ x < 140 140 ≤ x < 150 150 ≤ x < 160 Total

Create a strategy

⬚

⬚

135

⬚ ⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚ ⬚ ⬚ ⬚

The frequencies can be read off from the height of the bars. The class centre can be found by calculating the average of the endpoints for that class interval.

Apply the idea

44

Speed (km/h)

Frequency

Class centre

Class centre × Frequency

110 ≤ x < 120

4

115

4 × 115 = 460

120 ≤ x < 130

12

125

12 × 125 = 1500

130 ≤ x < 140

8

135

8 × 135 = 1080

140 ≤ x < 150

5

145

5 × 145 = 580

150 ≤ x < 160

2

155

2 × 155 = 310

Total

n = 31

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

Σx = 3930


b Determine the mean speed of the cricket balls, rounded to two decimal places.

Create a strategy The formula is x x , all of the needed information can be found in the table. n

Apply the idea

x x n

= 126.77

Write the formula

3930 31

Substitute the values for Σx and n Evaluate and round

The mean speed of balls delivered by these 31 cricket bowlers is 126.77 km/h.

Reflect and check This is reasonable because the tallest bar is 120 ≤ x < 130 and this falls in that range.

Example 2 The mean of 4 scores is 21. If three of the scores are 17, 3, and 8, find the 4th score, x.

Create a strategy Use the formula: x

x n

Apply the idea The given values are x = 21, Σx = 17 + 3 + 8 + x, and n = 4. x n

Write the formula

21

17 3 8 x 4

Substitute the values

21

28 x 4

Perform the addition

x

84 = 28 + x

Multiply both sides by 4

x = 56

Subtract 28 from both sides

1.04 Measures of centre mathspace.co

45


Idea summary The mean, x, is a measure of centre often referred to as the average. It is calculated by adding all the scores in a data set and dividing by the number of scores. This is represented as:

x

x n

Σ x is the sum of the values n is the total number (count) of values in the data set Technology can be utilised to calculate the mean.

Median Median The middle score in a data set when the data is sorted in order. To find the median of a data set: 1. Sort the data points into order.

n 1 th score). 2 3. If there are an even number of scores, the median is calculated by finding the mean of the n n 1 th scores). two middle scores (the th and 2 2 2. If there are an odd number of scores, the median is the middle score (the

Sets ordered smallest to largest Median Odd number of scores:

Even number of scores:

Median:

46

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

2


Example 3 Determine the median of these nine numbers: 1, 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 9, 10, 15

Create a strategy The median in an odd set of scores is the

n 1 th score, where n is the total number of scores. 2

Apply the idea There are 9 scores. Median position =

n 1 2

Write the formula

=

9 1 2

Substitute the values

10 2 = 5th score =

Evaluate the numerator Simplify

Therefore, the median will be the 5th score. Median = 7

Reflect and check This data set had an odd number of scores, so the median was just the middle score, as it was ordered from smallest to largest.

Example 4 Determine the median from the frequency distribution table: Score (x)

Frequency ( f )

23

2

24

26

25

37

26

24

27

25

Create a strategy Add a cumulative frequency column to the frequency table to determine the final cumulative frequency (total data points). Use the formula to find the median position. Find the median by locating the cumulative frequency that meets or exceeds this position.

1.04 Measures of centre mathspace.co

47


Apply the idea Create a cumulative frequency column. Calculate the cumulative frequency by adding each frequency to the sum of all previous frequencies, row by row. Score

Frequency

Cumulative frequency

23

2

2

24

26

2 + 26 = 28

25

37

28 + 37 = 65

26

24

65 + 24 = 89

27

25

89 + 25 = 114

Since there are 114 scores, the median will be in the of the 57th and 58th values.

114 + 1 = 57.5th position, which is the average 2

Based on the table: • The first and second values had a score of 23. • The third to 28th values had a score of 24. • The 29th to 65th values had a score of 25. Therefore, the 57th and 58th values are both 25. Median =

25 25 25 2

Idea summary To find the median of a data set: 1. Sort the data points into order. 2. If there are an odd number of scores, the median is the middle score n 1 (the th score). 2 3. If there are an even number of scores, the median is calculated by finding n n 1 th scores). the mean of the two middle scores (the th and 2 2 To find the median using a frequency table: 1. Add a cumulative frequency column by summing frequencies row by row. 2. Find the total number of data points (final cumulative frequency, n). 3. Calculate the median position using the formula. 4. Locate the cumulative frequency that equals or exceeds this position. 5. Identify the corresponding data value or class interval as the median. Technology can be utilised to calculate the median of small or large data sets.

48

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Mode Mode The most frequently occurring score. A data set can have more than one mode, if two or more scores are equally tied as the most frequently occurring. For grouped data, it can be called a modal class and the class interval with the highest frequency is the mode.

Example 5 Determine the mode of these scores: 8, 18, 5, 2, 2, 10, 8, 5, 14, 14, 8, 8, 10, 18, 14, 5

Create a strategy Choose which number in the set appeared the most.

Apply the idea The number can be listed along with how many times it appears: • 8 appeared in the set 4 times. • 18 appeared in the set 2 times. • 5 appeared in the set 3 times. • 2 appeared in the set 2 times. • 10 appeared in the set 2 times. • 14 appeared in the set 3 times. Mode = 8

Idea summary The mode of a data set is the most frequently occurring score. The modal class is the class interval with the highest frequency for grouped data.

1.04 Measures of centre mathspace.co

49


1.04 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

2

3

For these sets of scores: i

Determine the number of scores.

ii

Calculate the sum of the scores.

iii

Calculate the mean.

a

9, 5, 2, 3, 1

b

3, 2, 5, 1, 4

c

1, 3, 7, 5, 2

d

4, 5, 6, 7, 3

e

56, 89, 95, 71, 75, 84, 65, 83

f

−14, 0, −2, −18, −8, 0, −15, −1

ii

Determine the median.

For each set of scores: i

Sort the scores in ascending order.

a

17, 8, 6, 11, 9, 18

b

69.4, 66.7, 46.6, 76.6, 52.8, 80.6, 63.9

c

44.9, 45.6, –54.8, 74.7, –77.6, –42.6, 67.9, 40.6

A consumer group surveys the price of petrol per litre at six different petrol stations. The prices are as follows: $1.68, $1.64, $1.64, $1.71, $1.64, $1.57 Identify the mode petrol price.

Practice 4

Consider the given histogram: 6 5 Frequency

Ex 1

4 3 2 1 0

50

39

40

41 42 43 Scores

a

Determine the total number of scores.

b

Calculate the sum of the scores.

c

Calculate the mean, rounded to two decimal places.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


5

For each data set, use the midpoint of the interval to estimate the mean. Round your answer to one decimal place. a

6

Score Frequency

b

Score

Frequency

0 ≤ x < 20

4

20 − 24

5

20 ≤ x < 40

15

25 − 29

10

40 ≤ x < 60

23

30 − 34

16

60 ≤ x < 80

73

35 − 39

4

80 ≤ x < 100

45

40 − 44

3

45 − 49

2

50 − 54

1

A group of high school students wanted to convince their principal that the school needed air-conditioning. They measured the temperature in a classroom at 1 p.m. every day during February and summarised the results (in °C) in the grouped frequency table: a

Complete this frequency table: Class

Class centre, cc

Frequency, f

f × cc

22 − 24

23

5

25 − 27

26

6

28 − 30

29

8

⬚

31 − 33

32

5

34 − 36

35

4

⬚ ⬚ ⬚ ⬚ ⬚

Total:

7

b

Determine the modal class.

c

Calculate the average temperature, rounded to two decimal places.

Consider the frequency distribution table: a

Complete the table.

b

Determine the mean of the scores, rounded to two decimal places.

c

Identify the mode of the scores.

d

How many scores are less than the mode?

Frequency, f

4

11

5

⬚

35

43

365

⬚ 14

Total:

Ex 2

fx

Score, x

16

8

The mean of a set of scores is 35 and the sum of the scores is 560. Calculate the number of scores.

9

There are five numbers with a mean of 7. If four of the numbers are 10, 10, 8, 6 and x, determine the value of x.

10

The five numbers 16, 16, 17, 24 and 17 have a mean of 18. If a new number is added that is bigger than 24, determine whether the mean will become higher or lower.

1.04 Measures of centre mathspace.co

51


11

In each game of the season, a basketball team recorded the number of ‘three-point shots’ they scored. The results for the season are represented in the given dot plot: a

What was the total number of points scored from three-point shots during the season?

b

Considering the total number of points, what was the mean number of points scored each game? Round your answer to two decimal places.

c

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Number of three-point shots

What was the mean number of three point shots per game this season? Round your answer to two decimal places.

12

A set of 69 scores is arranged in ascending order. In what position does the median score lie?

13

In a set of 152 scores between which two scores does the median lie?

14

Determine the median of each data set: 920, 709, 694, 667, 657, 630, 610, a 584, 567, 555

Ex 3, 4

Score

Frequency

11

24

12

9

13

21

14

9

15

6

For the given histogram: a

Determine the number of scores.

b

Identify the median.

10 8 Frequency

15

b

6 4 2 0

16

52

46

47

48 49 Scores

50

On Sunday, 20 planes were delayed at the airport. The dot plot shows the number of hours each departure was delayed: a

What was the median number of minutes a plane was delayed?

b

What percentage of planes were delayed for longer than the median time?

c

If a plane is delayed for more than 30 minutes, the airline must pay $5000. In total, how much were airlines fined that day?

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

0.5

1.0 1.5 2.0 Hours late

2.5


17

This stem plot shows the ages of 20 employees in a company: a

What is the mode age?

b

What is the median age of the employees?

c

What is the mean age of the employees?

d

How old is a typical employee at this company? Explain your answer.

Stem

Leaf

2

0356779

3

02227

4

44578

5

237

Key 1|2 = 12 years old

Ex 5

19

A diver measures how long she can hold her breath underwater over several dives. If the median time is 3.9 minutes, determine whether these statements are true: a

The longest she held her breath is 7.8 minutes.

b

Most of the time she held her breath for less than 3.9 minutes.

c

Half the dives she was able to hold her breath longer than 3.9 minutes.

d

The shortest time she held her breath is 1.95 minutes.

e

Most of the time she held her breath for longer than 3.9 minutes.

Determine the mode(s) of each data set: a

c

2, 2, 6, 8, 8, 8, 8, 12, 14, 14, 14, 14, 18, 18

Stem Leaf 2

25679

3

00568

4

0 1 389

b

Frequency

25

17

26

42

d

Key 2|4 = 24

20

Score

Frequency

18

This stem plot shows the number of hours students spent studying for a science exam: Calculate, rounded to two decimal places if necessary:

27

35

28

32

29

12

30

20

20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 0

68 69 70 71 Scores

72

Stem

Leaf

6

0236778

7

3 69

a

Mean

8

0567

b

Median Mode

9

2

c

Key 1|2 = 12

1.04 Measures of centre mathspace.co

53


21

The dot plot shows the number of goals scored across each of Eileen’s soccer games: a

How many games were played in total?

b

How many goals were scored in total?

c

Calculate the mean number of goals per game.

0

22

1 2 3 4 Number of goals scored

5

The dot plot shows the number of sit-ups achieved by students in a physical education exam: Calculate, rounded to two decimal places if necessary: a

Mean

b

Median

c

Mode 0 5 10 15 2025 30 35 40 45 5055 Numbers of sit-ups per student

The given histogram shows the number of hours that students in a particular class had slept for the night before: a

How many students are in the class?

b

Use the class centres to determine an estimate of:

c

24

54

i

Mean

ii

Median

Identify the modal class.

Frequency

23

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 Frequency

As part of a fuel watch initiative, the price of petrol at a service station was recorded each day for 14 days. The frequency table shows the findings: Price (cents per litre)

Class centre

Frequency

130.0 - 134.9

133.4

4

135.0 - 139.9

138.4

5

140.0 - 144.9

143.4

2

145.0 - 149.9

148.4

4

a

What is the modal class?

b

What percentage of prices were in the modal class? Round your answer to two decimal places.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Extend your thinking 25

The mean of a set of 41 scores is 18.6. If a score of 71.8 is added to the set, determine the new mean. Round your answer to two decimal places.

26

Han wants to try out as a batsman for a cricket team. In his last three matches, he scored 61, 75 and 66 runs. In his last match before trying out, he wants to lift his mean to 70. Determine the number of runs he needs to score to achieve this.

27

Identify 4 consecutive odd numbers whose median is 40.

28

Consider this set of data that represents the number of apps on six people’s phones: 10, 13, 14, 17, 20, 20 If each person downloads another 9 apps, which of the measures of centre would change?

29

30

Determine whether these statements are true or false: a

If two sets of data have the same median, then the data sets must be the same.

b

If two sets of data have different modes then, the highest values cannot be the same.

c

Two sets of data have the same highest and lowest values. This means they must have the same range.

d

Two sets of data that have the same highest and lowest values must have the same mean.

Consider the dot plot given: From which score can a dot be removed so that the mean, median and mode remain unchanged? 200

31

250

300

350

400

Carl has been recording his spelling test scores for the past semester: 14, 16, 2, 15, 15, 16, 15 a

Calculate the median of Carl’s scores.

b

Calculate the mean of Carl’s scores. Round your answer to two decimal places.

c

Which measure of centre most accurately describes the centre of this data set? Explain your answer.

Investigation: The problem with average

Investigate online

mathspace.co

1.04 Measures of centre mathspace.co

55


1.05   Data distribution After this lesson, you will be able to… • identify the shape of different distributions. • interpret the shape and spread of data distributions represented with histograms, dot plots, and stem plots. • explain how summary statistics relate to the shape of distributions. • use statistical tools to analyse the effect of extreme values on the measures of centre.

Shape of data Exploration This histogram represents the points scored by a local football team over the past several years: 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 1. From this graph, can a statement be made about the score range that is typically achieved? Explain your answer. 2. What is the best measure of centre for this graph? Should the median or the mean be used? Provide an explanation for the choice. 3. 60 is in the middle of the range (20 to 100), would this be a good measure of centre? Explain why or why not?

56

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Data may be described as symmetrical or asymmetrical. There are many cases where the data tends to be around a central value with no bias left or right. In such a case, roughly 50% of scores will be above the mean and 50% of scores will be below the mean. In other words, the mean and median roughly coincide. Mean Median Mode The normal distribution is a common example of a symmetrical distribution of data. The normal distribution looks like this bell-shaped curve.

Percentage

30 25 20 15 10 5 75 80 85 90 95 100105 110

This shows how a data set that has an approximate normal distribution may appear in a histogram. The dark line shows the nice, symmetrical curve that can be drawn over the histogram that the data roughly follows.

Frequency

Weight

20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 0

A special type of symmetrical distribution is called a uniform distribution. This is when all of the bars are approximately the same height on the histogram or the curve is actually a horizontal line.

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Skipping rope jumps completed

If a data set is asymmetrical instead (i.e. it is not symmetrical), it may be described as skewed.

1.05 Data distribution mathspace.co

57


Positive skew A data set that has positive skew (positively skewed) has a longer tail of values to the right of the peak of the graph, such that more than half of the scores are to the right of the peak. It is sometimes called right skew. As a result, the mean is greater than the median, which is greater than the mode:

Mode Median Mean

Frequency

Mode < Median < Mean

This graph shows how positively skewed data may appear in a histogram.

Score Negative skew A data set that has a negative skew (negatively skewed) has a longer tail of values to the left of the peak of the graph, such that more than half of the scores are to the left of the peak. It is sometimes called left skew. As a result, the mode is greater than the median, which is greater than the mean:

Median

Mode

Mean

Frequency

Mean < Median < Mode

This graph shows how negatively skewed data may appear in a histogram.

Score

58

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 1 Determine whether the scores in each histogram are positively skewed, negatively skewed or symmetrical (approximately): a

Frequency

10

5

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Score

Create a strategy Check where the bulk of the data sits and look at the general shape of the distribution.

Apply the idea The scores are roughly even in both the high and low end, so the distribution is symmetrical.

b

Frequency

10

5

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Score

Create a strategy Check where the bulk of the data sits and look at the general shape of the distribution.

Apply the idea Most of the scores on the histogram are relatively low, so the distribution is positively skewed.

1.05 Data distribution mathspace.co

59


c

Frequency

10

5

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Score

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Check where the bulk of the data sits and look at the general shape of the distribution.

Most of the scores on the histogram are relatively high, so the distribution is negatively skewed.

Idea summary The shape of a data distribution can be described as either symmetrical or asymmetrical. • In a symmetrical distribution, the left and right sides are mirror images. The mean, median, and mode are approximately equal. • The normal distribution is a common, bell-shaped symmetrical distribution. • A uniform distribution is a symmetrical distribution where all outcomes have roughly the same frequency. • An asymmetrical distribution is described as skewed. The direction of the “tail” determines the type of skew. • Positive skew (right-skewed): The tail is on the right, with most data concentrated on the left. Generally, Mean > Median. • Negative skew (left-skewed): The tail is on the left, with most data concentrated on the right. Generally, Mean < Median. Negatively skewed (Left skewed)

Frequency

Mode Median

Symmetrical distribution Mean Median Mode

Mean

Mean < Median < Mode Mean = Median = Mode

60

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

Positively skewed (Right skewed) Mode Median Mean

Mean > Median > Mode


Cluster and modality In a set of data, a cluster occurs when a large number of the scores are grouped together within a very small range. Modality describes the prevalence of local peaks in a data set. The peaks do not necessarily need to be the mode of the whole data set, but rather a local cluster of data that is more frequent and stands out from the surrounding data. When looking at the modality of a data set, it is usually useful to examine a graph of the data. Modality is described by the number of peaks. Data with one peak is called unimodal. 20 15 10

A data set that has two distinct peaks, like in this histogram, is called bimodal.

5 0

5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 Price

To determine the modality of a distribution, simply identify the number of modal peaks. For instance, the data shown in the dot plot has three modal peaks because there are local peaks at scores of 6, 12, and 20.

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 Score

Example 2 For the given stem plot: Stem 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Leaf 5 78 08 133789 135888

2

Key 1|2 = 12

1.05 Data distribution mathspace.co

61


a What is/are the modal class(es)?

Create a strategy Look at the class that occurs most often. Note that there may be more than one modal class.

Apply the idea

Reflect and check

Stems 3 and 4 have the same number of data points, and both have the highest frequency.

This means that the majority of the data lies in the interval 30 – 49. 12 out of 18 data points lie 2 in this range which is or 66.7%. 3

So the correct answers are the intervals 30 – 39 and 40 – 49.

b The distribution of the data is: A

Positively skewed

B

Symmetrical

C

Negatively skewed

D

Uniform

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Ignore the extreme value and check where most of the scores lie.

Most of the scores are relatively high in the data set, which makes a negatively skewed distribution. So the correct answer is option C.

Example 3 How many peaks are there on the graph?

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 Score

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Count how many high points are in the data distribution.

Scores on 6, 12, and 20 are observed to have high points or frequency in the data distribution, making them the peaks. So, 3 peaks are present on the graph.

62

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Idea summary A cluster occurs when a large number of data points are grouped together in a small range. Modality describes the number of peaks or prominent clusters in a data distribution. • A distribution with one peak is called unimodal. • A distribution with two distinct peaks is called bimodal.

Best choice of centre It is important to note that certain features in a data set can significantly affect one or more of the three measures of central tendency (the mean, median and mode). Remember the mode is the most frequently occurring score. It is most useful when analysing nominal data. The shape of the data is key in determining which measure of centre is the most appropriate of a numerical data set. If a data set is symmetrical, then the mean and median will be approximately equal. If the data is unimodal (has only one mode), then the mode will also be approximately equal. If the data has more than one mode (e.g. if it is bimodal) then the modes may be different to the mean and median. Recall that when data is positively skewed, the mean is the highest measure of central tendency and the mode is the lowest measure of central tendency. For positively skewed data: Mode < Median < Mean Similarly, when data is negatively skewed, the mode is the highest measure of central tendency and the mean is the lowest measure of central tendency. For negatively skewed data: Mean < Median < Mode Therefore, in skewed data, the most appropriate measure of central tendency will be the median. Here is a basic summary of selecting an appropriate measure of central tendency. Note that often it can be helpful to consider more than one measure. Data set ...

Mean

Has outliers

Median yes

Is nominal data

yes

Is skewed Is symmetrical

Mode

yes yes

yes

yes

Sometimes the context of the data being analysed lends itself to particular measures as well.

1.05 Data distribution mathspace.co

63


Example 4 Determine the best choice of centre. a Which measure of centre would be best for this data set? 15, 14, 16, 16, 15, 15, 15, 12, 11, 13, 12, 15, 16, 14, 17, 12, 13, 11, 10, 9, 14 A

Mean

B

Mode

C

Median

Create a strategy Use the table to check the best measure of centre suited for the given data set. Data set ...

Mean

Has outliers

Median

Mode

yes

Is nominal data

yes

Is skewed

yes

Is symmetrical

yes

yes

yes

A display created with technology could also be used to help identify any skew.

Apply the idea 8

Frequency

6 4 2 0

64

By creating a histogram or dot plot, this data could be identified as negatively skewed. As the data is skewed, the median is the most effective measure of central tendency. The correct answer is option B. 9

11

13 15 Data

17

19

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


b Every week for 45 weeks, a kayaking club runs social sessions that are open to the public. In each session, the number of people who attended is recorded. The results are displayed in the table provided: Number of people attending 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Number of weeks 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6

Considering the distribution of the responses, which of these statements is true? A The mean is a better indicator of the typical number of people who attended each session than the median. B The median is a better indicator of the typical number of people who attended each session than the mean. C The mean and median are equally accurate indicators of the typical number of people who attended each session.

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Use the table to determine the distribution of the data set.

Notice that the distribution is uniform as the responses are fairly consistent. This distribution suggests that both mean and median can be equally accurate indicators of the data set. So the correct answer is option C.

Idea summary Here is a basic summary of selecting an appropriate measure of central tendency. Note that often it can be helpful to consider more than one measure. Data set ...

Mean

Has outliers

Median yes

Is nominal data

yes

Is skewed Is symmetrical

Mode

yes yes

yes

yes

Sometimes the context of the data being analysed lends itself to particular measures as well.

1.05 Data distribution mathspace.co

65


1.05 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

Match each histogram with the best description: i

Symmetrical

ii

Uniform

iii

Negative skew

iv

Positive skew

v

Bimodal

vi

No clear shape, multimodal

a

12

b

8 6

8

Frequency

Frequency

10

6 4 2 0

c

5

d

Frequency

Frequency

10 15 20 25 30 Scores

5

10 15 20 25 30 Scores

5

10

15

6 4 2

e

5

20

8

0

2 0

10 15 20 25 30 Scores

10

4

10 5 0

5

10 15 20 25 30 Scores

12

f

6

8

Frequency

Frequency

10

6 4

4

2

2 0

66

5

10

15 20 25 30 Scores

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

0

15 20 25 30 Scores


2

3

a

For symmetrical data, about half of the data lies on either side of the mean.

b

For uniformly distributed data, the mean, median and mode are very similar.

c

For data with a negative skew, the mean is generally greater than the median.

d

For data with a positive skew, the mean is generally greater than the median.

e

Positive skew refers to a distribution where the tail is on the left side of the distribution.

f

Bimodal data has two modes or modal classes.

g

The shape can only be determined from histograms.

Determine whether the scores in each graph can be described as positively skewed, negatively skewed or symmetrical: a

Stem Leaf 1

677

2

2222333

3

33366677777

4

444444

5

77

b

6

Key 1 | 6 = 16 years old c

Histogram

7 8

15 Frequency

10

5

10

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Score

4

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Sample

d

15 Frequency

Ex 1

Is each statement true or false?

This stem plot shows the age of people to enter the library in the first five seconds: Is the data positively or negatively skewed?

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Stem

Leaf

1

01 234566

2

0 1 1   2 2 5

3

479

4

4

5

1

Key 1|2 = 12 years old

1.05 Data distribution mathspace.co

67


5

For each data set: i

Is the data set symmetrical or asymmetrical?

ii

Are there any extreme values in the data set?

iii

Would the mean be an appropriate measure of centre?

a

13, 14, 14, 15, 15, 15, 16, 16, 17

b

8, 10, 14, 18, 19, 91

c

18 19 21 22 24 27 32 48 Age

Practice 6

7

The table shows the number of crime novels in a bookshop for different price ranges: Price of crime novel, to the nearest $5

Frequency

$0 − < $5

3

$10 − < $15

9

$15 − < $20

19

$20 − < $25

6

$25 − < $30

9

$35 − < $40

3

a

Plot this data as a histogram.

b

Describe the shape of the data.

The given stem plot shows the age of people to enter through the gates of a concert in the first 5 seconds: a

What was the median age?

b

What was the mean age? Round your answer to two decimal places.

c

Is the data positively or negatively skewed?

Stem

Leaf

1

01 2233444888

2

1 7

3

455

4

0

5

4 Key 1|2 = 12 years old

68

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


8

For each of these graphs: i

Are there any clusters? If so where?

ii

What is the mode?

iii

Describe the distribution of the data.

a

Stem Leaf 0

b

2

1 2

0366

3

1 45667

4

04679

5

0

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2021 2223 24 Sample

Key 5|2 = 52 hours 9

Describe the distribution of each graph: a

b 15 Frequency

Ex 2

10 5

5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 Score 10

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

The number of peanuts in mixed nut packets were sampled and recorded in this stem plot: a

Complete the frequency distribution table: Score

Stem

Frequency

40 − 49 50 − 59 60 − 69 70 − 79 80 − 89 90 − 99 100 − 109 110 − 119

⬚ ⬚ ⬚ ⬚ ⬚ ⬚ ⬚

4

368

5

1 22

6

67788

7

0033459

8

1   1 1 4 6 8 8 9

9

024569

10

1   2 3 5 5 6 7 8

11

0457

⬚

Key 5|2 = 52

b

Describe the shape of the data.

c

Describe the modality of the data using one of these: i

Unimodal

ii

Leaf

Bimodal

iii

Multimodal but not bimodal

1.05 Data distribution mathspace.co

69


Ex 3

11

How many peaks are there on this dot plot?

2 4 6

Ex 4a

12

8 10 12 14 16 18 20 Score

Oprah has been growing watermelons. The weight of the watermelons (in kilograms) are shown: 15, 6, 5, 2, 4, 4, 5

13

Calculate the median weight of Oprah’s watermelons.

b

Calculate the mean weight of Oprah’s watermelons. Round your answer to two decimal places if necessary.

c

Determine the most appropriate measure of centre of this data set.

Consider the histogram:

Frequency

Ex 4b

a

180 160 140 120 100 80 60 40 20 0

9

10

11

12

13

14

15 16 Scores

17

18

19

20

21

Determine the measure of centre that would be most appropriate to use to represent the data in this graph. Explain your answer. 14

A timed quiz consists of 6 puzzles. The data shows the times (in seconds) that it took Sophia to complete each question on her first and second attempts of the quiz: • Times in first attempt: 11, 15, 17, 20, 23, 34 • Times in second attempt: 20, 20, 20, 19, 21, 20

70

a

Calculate the mean time spent on each puzzle in the first attempt.

b

Calculate the mean time spent on each puzzle in the second attempt.

c

For which of Sophia’s attempts would the mean number of minutes spent per question be a better indicator of her performance than the median number of minutes spent per question? Explain your answer.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Extend your thinking 15

Four numbers have a range of 5, a median of 9 and a mode of 11. Write the four numbers of this data set.

16

A company records the number of sales made by its salespeople over a month. The data is heavily skewed to the right. What can be inferred about the sales performance of the team?

17

A teacher wants to compare the test scores of two different classes. One class has a symmetrical distribution, while the other has a positively skewed distribution. How might the teacher interpret and compare the performance of the two classes based on these distributions?

18

The price of petrol at a petrol station was recorded each day for two weeks. The results are presented in the given table: Monday

Tuesday

Wednesday

Thursday

Friday

Saturday

Sunday

Week 1

$1.70

$1.50

$1.62

$1.46

$1.49

$1.46

$1.55

Week 2

$1.25

$1.36

$1.25

$1.21

$1.21

$1.20

$3.30

The mean petrol price across the 14 days of records is $1.54 per litre. For which week is this mean a better indication of the price of petrol? Explain your answer.

Number of passengers

These histograms represent the luggage weight of each passenger on board an airline’s morning and afternoon flight:

Number of passengers

19

Morning flight check-in luggage weights 25 20 15 10 5 0

35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0

20

22

24

28 26 Weight (kg)

30

32

34

Afternoon flight check-in luggage weights

2

3

4

5 6 Weight (kg)

7

8

9

The airline wants to get an indication of how much luggage each passenger is checking in. For which flight’s data would the median be a more precise indicator of a typical passenger’s luggage weight than the mean? Explain your answer.

1.05 Data distribution mathspace.co

71


1.06   Quartiles and spread After this lesson, you will be able to… • calculate quartiles and the interquartile range (IQR) for data sets, with and without technology. • interpret the five-number summary in context. • use the IQR to describe the spread of data distributions.

Range The simplest measure of spread for quantitative (numerical) data is the range. The range can be determined by calculating the difference between the maximum (highest value) and minimum (lowest value) in a data set. Range = Maximum – Minimum

Example 1 The range of a set of scores is 8, and the highest score is 19. What is the lowest score in the set?

Create a strategy Rearrange the formula for the range to solve for the minimum.

Apply the idea Range = Maximum – Minimum Minimum = Maximum – Range

Write the formula Rearrange

= 19 – 8

Substitute the given values

= 11

Evaluate

Reflect and check The difference between the minimum, 11, and the maximum, 19, is 19 – 11 = 8. This is what the question stated the range was equal to.

Idea summary The range is the simplest measure of spread. It is calculated using the formula: Range = Maximum – Minimum

72

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Quartiles The range tells us about the spread of the data based on the minimum and maximum, but does not provide information about the spread of data within these two values. The median is a measure of centre, and indicates the middle of the data set is. For a data set with n items: Median is the

n 1 th value 2

Interactive exploration

Discover this concept in action online

mathspace.co

To get a better picture of the internal spread in a data set, quartiles can be determined. Quartiles Values that split a data set into four equal sections. These equal sections can be used for a measure of spread called interquartile range (IQR). Quartiles are scores at particular locations in the data set, which is similar to the median, but instead of dividing a data set into halves, they divide a data set into quarters. • Minimum: Lowest value • Lower quartile, Q1: At most 25% of the data is below this value • Median, Q2: 50% of the data lies on either side of this value • Upper quartile, Q3: At most 25% of the data is above this value • Maximum: Highest value First quarter

Second quarter

2, 3, 5, 5, 7, 9, Minimum

Third quarter

10, 11,

13,

Fourth quarter

16,

18,

Median Q1 = 5

22,

39

Maximum Q3 = 17

1.06 Quartiles and spread mathspace.co

73


The position of the lower quartile (Q1), median (Q2), and upper quartile (Q3) depends on the number of scores in a data set. The following example demonstrates how to create quartiles in a data set with a even number of scores:

1

3

4

7

11

12

14

19

Ensure the data set is ordered before finding the quartiles or the median.

Median

1

3

4

7

11

12

14

19

Locate the median, between the 4th and 5th scores.

There are four scores in each half of the data set. Split each of the four scores in half to determine the quartiles. Q1

1

3

Q3

Median

4

7

11

12

14

19

The first quartile, Q1, is between the 2nd and 3rd scores. The third quartile, Q3, is between the 6th and 7th scores.

For an odd number of scores, the median is the middle score, and the lower and upper quartiles are determined from the remaining halves. For 9 scores, the 5th term is the median. There are four terms on either side of the median. So Q1 is still between the 2nd and 3rd scores and Q3 is between the 6th and 7th scores. Q1

8

8

Q3

Median

10

11

13

14

18

22 25

For 10 scores, the median is between the 5th and 6th scores. This time, however, there are 5 scores on either side of the median. So Q1 is the 3rd term and Q3 is the 8th term. Q1

12

13

14

Median

19

19

21

Q3

22 22 28 30

These quartiles are a special type of percentiles. A percentile is a percentage that indicates the value below which a given percentage of observations in a group of observations falls. For example, if a score is in the 75th percentile in a statistical test, it is higher than 75% of all other scores. The median represents the 50th percentile, or the halfway point in a data set.

74

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


• Q1 is the first quartile (sometimes called the lower quartile). • It is the middle score in the bottom half of data and it represents the 25th percentile. • Q2 is known as the second quartile and is commonly referred to as the median, which has already been learned. • It represents the 50th percentile of the data set. • Q3 is the third quartile (sometimes called the upper quartile). • It is the middle score in the top half of the data set, and represents the 75th percentile. The interquartile range (IQR) is the difference between the third quartile and the first quartile. Fifty percent of scores lie within the IQR. Since it focuses on the middle 50% of the data set, the interquartile range often gives a better indication of the internal spread compared with the range, and it is less impacted by outliers.

IQR = Q3 – Q1 Q1 Lower quartile Q3 Upper quartile CAS technology statistic functions can automatically calculate the values of Q3 and Q1. The IQR cannot be automatically obtained through the same functions and will need to be calculated with the formula.

Example 2 Here are Ray’s scores from his last 13 rounds of golf played: 66, 66, 68, 68, 70, 78, 80, 84, 106, 116, 126, 130, 132 a What is his median score?

Create a strategy Use the formula, median.

n 1 th where n is the total number of scores, to determine the position of the 2

Apply the idea There are n = 13 scores in the list: Position of median = =

n 1 th 2

Write the formula

13 1 2

Substitute the vlaues

= 7th Median = 80

Evaluate Choose the 7th score

Reflect and check The data set was already ordered, otherwise it would have needed to be ordered first.

1.06 Quartiles and spread mathspace.co

75


b What is the lower quartile?

Create a strategy Determine the median of the lower half of the scores excluding the median.

Apply the idea The lower half of the scores are: 66, 66, 68, 68, 70, 78 Lower quartile =

68 68 2

Average the middle scores

= 68

Evaluate

c What is the upper quartile?

Create a strategy Determine the median of the upper half of the scores excluding the median.

Apply the idea The upper half of the scores are: 84, 106, 116, 126, 130, 132 Upper quartile =

116 126 2

= 121

Average the middle scores Evaluate

Reflect and check Check the answer visually: Q1

66

66

68

Q3

Median

68

70

78

80

84

106

From the diagram, the data seems to be separated into quarters.

76

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

116

126

130

132


Example 3 Consider this data: 5, 14, 18, 18, 18, 24, 24, 32, 38, 38, 50, 50, 50, 50, 59 Determine the interquartile range of the set of scores.

Create a strategy Determine the median, lower and upper quartiles then use the formula: IQR = Q3 – Q1

Apply the idea There are 15 scores in the list: Position of median =

15 1 2

= 8th

Substitute n = 15 Evaluate

The 8th score is 32. Median = 32 There are 7 scores in the lower half excluding the median. The lower quartile will be the 4th score from the list. Lower quartile = 18 The upper quartile will be the 4th in the upper half, which is the 8 + 4 = 12th score overall. Upper quartile = 50 Solving for the interquartile range: IQR = Q3 – Q1

Write the formula

= 50 – 18

Substitute the quartiles

= 32

Evaluate

1.06 Quartiles and spread mathspace.co

77


Example 4 For this set of scores in the column graph: 5

Frequency

4 3 2 1 0

30

40

50 60 Scores

70

a Input the data in this distribution table: Score (x)

Frequency ( f )

Cumulative frequency (cf )

30

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

40

⬚

⬚

50 60

⬚

⬚

70

⬚

⬚

Total

Create a strategy Look for the frequencies of each score in the column graph. To find the cumulative frequency, add the frequency of each row to the cumulative frequency of the previous row.

Apply the idea Here is the complete distribution table:

78

Score (x)

Frequency ( f )

Cumulative frequency (cf )

30

5

5

40

5

5 + 5 = 10

50

5

5 + 10 = 15

60

1

1 + 15 = 16

70

3

3 + 16 = 19

Total

19

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


b Find the median score using the distribution table in part (a).

Create a strategy Use the cumulative frequency column in part (a) to determine the middle score.

Apply the idea Since there are 19 scores in total, the median will be the

19 1 th = 10th score. 2

Looking at the cumulative frequency table in part (a), the 10th score falls in 40. So, Median = 40

c Find the first quartile score.

Create a strategy Determine the middle value of the lower half of the scores, excluding the median, in the distribution table in part (a).

Apply the idea So, the first quartile is determined as the middle of the first 9 scores, which corresponds to the 9 1 th = 5th score. From the table, it can be observed that the 5th score is 30. 2

d Find the third quartile score.

Create a strategy Determine the middle value of the upper half of the scores, excluding the median, in the distribution table in part (a).

Apply the idea The median in part (b) is the 10th score. The third quartile is determined as the middle of the last 9 1 15th score. From the table, it can be observed that the 9 scores, which is computed as 10 2 15th score is 50. Q3 = 50

Reflect and check All of the quartiles can be verified using technology by inputting the raw data or frequency table into a spreadsheet or CAS.

1.06 Quartiles and spread mathspace.co

79


e Find the interquartile range.

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Use the interquartile range formula: IQR = Q3 – Q1

Q1 = 30 from part (c) and Q3 = 50 from part (d) can be used. IQR = Q3 – Q1

Write the formula

= 50 − 30

Substitute the quartiles

= 20

Evaluate

Idea summary Quartiles are values that divide an ordered data set into four equal parts. They are specific types of percentiles. • The first quartile (Q1), or lower quartile, is the 25th percentile. It marks the middle of the lower half of the data. • The second quartile (Q2) is the median, or the 50th percentile, which splits the entire data set in half. • The third quartile (Q3), or upper quartile, is the 75th percentile. It marks the middle of the upper half of the data. The interquartile range (IQR) measures the spread of the middle 50% of the data and is less affected by outliers than the range. It is calculated using the formula:

IQR = Q3 – Q1 IQR is the interquartile range Q1 is the lower quartile Q3 is the upper quartile

1.06 Pratice questions What do you remember? 1

80

Is each statement true or false? a

Approximately 25% of data lies above Q1.

b

Approximately 50% of data lies above the median.

c

Approximately 75% of data lies below Q3.

d

The interquartile range is heavily influenced by outliers.

e

The formula for interquartile range is IQR = Q3 – Q1.

f

The interquartile range includes the middle 50% of the data set.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


2

Determine the range of these sets of scores: a 10, 7, 2, 14, 13, 15, 11, 4 b 15, –2, –8, 8, 15, 6, –16, 15 c

3

In a study, a group of people were shown 30 names, and after 1 minute they were asked to recite as many names by memory as possible. The results are presented in the dot plot: a What does one dot represent? b How many people took part in the study? c Identify the largest number of names someone remembered. d Identify the smallest number of names someone 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 remembered. e

4

–0.5537, 1.7444, –0.3381, 0.7200, –0.3381, 1.0435

Determine the range of the data.

Names remembered

What is the interquartile range for this data set? Q1 = 4

Q3 = 14.5

1, 2, 3, 5, 5, 7, 11, 14, 15, 16

Minimum 5

Median = 6

Maximum

Consider this set of scores: 13, 15, 5, 16, 7, 20, 12 a c e

Sort the scores in ascending order. Determine the median. Determine the first quartile.

g

Determine the interquartile range.

b d f

Determine the total number of scores. Determine the range. Determine the third quartile.

Practice Ex 1

6

The range of a set of scores is 14, and the highest score is 37. What is the lowest score in the set?

7

A group of students had a range in marks of 14 and the lowest score was 9. Determine the highest score in the group.

8

The stem plot shows the number of hours students spent studying for a science exam: From the data in the stem plot, determine the following: a

Mean

b

Median

c

Mode

d

Range

Stem Number of hours 6

27

7

1 22479

8

01 257

9

01 Key 1|2 = 12 hours

1.06 Quartiles and spread mathspace.co

81


9

For each data set, the median is shown, determine: i

The upper quartile

ii

The lower quartile

a

0, 1, 4, 6 8, 9, 11

b

22, 24, 25, 29, 32, 34

Median Median: 27 c

5, 11, 19, 20, 22 24, 26, 27, 27

d

14, 15, 16, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 24, 25, 30, 36

Median Median: 18.5 10

For each data set: i

Determine the number of scores.

ii

Determine the median.

iii

Determine the first quartile.

iv

Determine the third quartile.

v

Determine the interquartile range.

a

33, 38, 50, 12, 33, 48, 41

b

–3, –3, 1, 9, 9, 6, –9

c

Stem Leaf

d

Score

Frequency

2

256 79

5

3

3

00568

13

3

4

001 8 9

16

2

28

2

31

3

Key 1|2 = 12

Ex 3

Ex 4

11

12

82

38

4

48

2

Determine the interquartile range for each data set: a

31, 32, 34, 42, 49, 50, 51

b

21, 23, 26, 31, 34, 38, 42, 47, 48

c

2, 10, 28, 35, 50

d

41, 42, 43, 44, 49, 50, 51, 53, 58

e

8, 9, 11, 12, 13, 15

f

3, 4, 6, 7, 7, 8, 12, 14

g

5, 7, 12, 14, 15, 22, 24, 30

h

7, 8, 9, 12, 18, 21, 31, 33

Consider the set of scores in this column graph: a

Organise the data into a frequency table that includes an fx column and a cumulative frequency column.

b

Determine the median score.

c

Determine the first quartile.

d

Determine the third quartile.

e

Determine the interquartile range.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

Frequency

Ex 2

26 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 0

7

8

9 Score

10


13

Dylan records the number of fish he catches for each fishing trip over a period of time:

Frequency

20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 0

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

Number of fish caught

14

a

How many fishing trips did he go on?

b

Determine the range in the number of fish caught.

c

Determine and interpret the interquartile range.

Meteorologists predicted huge variations in temperatures throughout the month of April. The temperature each day for the first two weeks of April was recorded: 16, 18, 20.5, 21, 21, 21, 21.5, 22, 22, 24, 24, 25, 26, 27 a

Determine the range.

b

Determine the interquartile range. What does this number indicate?

c

Is the statement ‘Huge variation coming in April’ a valid statement based on the data? Explain.

Extend your thinking 15

A cyclist measured his heart rate immediately after finishing each event in which he competed. The results are recorded in this stem plot: a b

Determine the difference between his slowest and fastest heart rate. For each extra heartbeat per minute, it takes 10 seconds longer for him to recover. How much longer would it take to recover when he finishes with the fastest heart rate than when he finishes with the slowest heart rate?

Stem

Heart rate

16

0 1   4 4 6 7 8

17

1 2235556

18

4468

19

01 36 Key 13|2 = 132

16

In competition, a diver must complete 8 rounds of dives. Her scores for the first 7 rounds are: 7.3, 7.4, 7.7, 8.4, 8.7, 8.9, 9.4 Determine her score in the 8th round if the upper quartile of all of her 8 scores is 8.85

1.06 Quartiles and spread mathspace.co

83


17

In a competition, a contestant must complete 12 challenges earning as many points as possible. Her scores for the first 11 challenges are: 32, 38, 45, 55, 66, 86, 94, 98, 106, 108, 117 Determine her score in the 12th round if the lower quartile of all of her 12 scores is 47.5

18

Alex is analysing a set of 9 exam scores. He calculates the median and the interquartile range of the scores. Unfortunately, one of the scores is smudged and unreadable. Given that the median score is 70 and the interquartile range is 12, determine the missing score if the remaining scores are as follows: 58, 62, 67, 69, 72, 75, 78, 82

19

A data set has these known statistics: Median

Mode

Range

Interquartile range

12

8

18

7

Determine the new value for each of the statistics, given each value of the data set was: a 20

Increased by 6

b

Multiplied by 3

Sophia is conducting a biology experiment. She repeats the experiment 12 times and records the results. She calculates the first quartile (Q1) and the mode of her results and records these as well. Unfortunately, before she can write up the experiment, she spills water on her results sheet, and one of the data values is no longer readable. If Q1 = 3.0 and the mode is 3.0, and the 11 legible data values are as given: 2.9, 3.2, 3.0, 3.5, 3.1, 3.3, 3.0, 3.4, 3.1, 3.2, 3.5 Calculate the interquartile range of the completion times, including the missing value.

21

There is a test to measure the Emotional Quotient (EQ) of an individual. Here are the EQ results for two groups of 21 people listed in ascending order: Group 1: 90, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 95, 95, 97, 99, 100, 108, 114, 116, 116, 117, 118, 118, 122, 129 Group 2: 85, 85, 85, 86, 86, 88, 90, 95, 97, 98, 100, 100, 100, 100, 102, 105, 105, 105, 110, 110, 115

84

a

Calculate the range, interquartile range, median and mean for both data sets.

b

Compare the centre of both data sets. What does this tell you about the EQ scores of the groups?

c

Compare the spread of both data sets. What does this tell you about the variability in EQ scores within the groups?

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


1.07   Box plots After this lesson, you will be able to… • construct box plots using the five-number summary. • interpret the shape, centre, and spread of box plots in context of the data. • compare histograms and box plots for the same data set.

Box plots The quartiles in combination with the two extremes of a data set simplify the data into a five-number summary. A five-number summary for data sets consists of: • Minimum value (Min) - the smallest value in the data set • Lower quartile (Q1) - 25% of the data set lies below this value • Median (Q2) - 50% of data lies on either side • Upper quartile (Q3) - 25% of the data set lies above this value • Maximum value (Max) - the largest value in the data set The five numbers from the five-number summary break up a set of values into four parts with 25% of the values in each quartile: Q1

Min 25%

Q3

Median 25%

25%

50%

Max 25%

50%

The four intervals have about the same number of data points (25%), but do not necessarily cover the same range of values. CAS technology or spreadsheets often have a statistics tool that will output the five-number summary given the data set. Box plots (also known as box-and-whisker plots) are a way of illustrating the five-number summary for a data set. Here is an example of a five-number summary for a set of data: Minimum

17

Lower quartile

52

Median

69

Upper quartile

87

Maximum

100

1.07 Box plots mathspace.co

85


This box plot visually shows a concise summary of this information: Minimum value

0

10

20

Median Lower quartile

30

40

50

60

70

Maximum value Upper quartile

80

90

100

The box plot consists of a number line, a rectangle with a line inside (the box) and two horizontal lines (the whiskers). The box represents the middle 50% of the scores and its width represents the interquartile range. Approximately 25% of the scores lie in each quartile. In this example, 25% of the scores would lie between 17 and 52, 52 and 69, 69 and 87, and 87 and 100.

Minimum and outlier

Lower quartile Q1

Median Q2

Upper quartile Q3 Maximum

∼25%

∼25%

∼25%

∼25%

Interquartile range

Example 1 The list shows the number of points scored by a basketball team in each game of their previous season: 52, 52, 55, 58, 59, 68, 69, 77, 80, 89, 96, 96, 96, 97, 99 a Find the maximum value.

Create a strategy Choose the last value when the data has been sorted in ascending order.

Apply the idea Maximum value = 99

b Find the minimum value.

Create a strategy Choose the first value when the data has been sorted in ascending order.

86

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

Apply the idea Minimum value = 52


c Find the median value.

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

The median is the middle score, or the average of the two middle scores.

There are 15 scores, so the middle score will be the eighth score when the scores are in order. Median = 77

d Find the lower quartile.

Create a strategy Find the middle score of the scores below the median.

Apply the idea Scores below the median: 52, 52, 55, 58, 59, 68, 69 Q1 = 58

The middle score is 58

e Find the upper quartile.

Create a strategy Find the middle score of the scores above the median.

Apply the idea Scores above the median: 80, 89, 96, 96, 96, 97, 99 Q3 = 96

The middle score is 96

Example 2 Consider this data set: 20, 36, 52, 56, 24, 16, 40, 4, 28 a Complete the table for the given data: Minimum Lower quartile Median Upper quartile Maximum

⬚ ⬚ ⬚ ⬚ ⬚ 1.07 Box plots mathspace.co

87


Create a strategy Order the numbers from smallest to largest to find the values of the five-number summary.

Apply the idea Ordered data: 4, 16, 20, 24, 28, 36, 40, 52, 56 Minimum = 4

The first score

Maximum = 56

The last score

Median = 28 Q1 =

16 20 2

The middle score Average the middle scores of 4, 16, 20, 24

= 18

Evaluate

40 52 Q3 = 2

Average the middle scores of 36, 40, 52, 56

= 46

Evaluate

The completed table is shown: Minimum

4

Lower quartile

18

Median

28

Upper quartile

46

Maximum

56

b Construct a box plot for the data.

Create a strategy Use the five-number summary in part (a) to construct the box plot.

Apply the idea Data

0

88

10

20

30

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

40

50 60


Example 3 Using this box plot: Glass width

10.7 10.8 10.9 11.0 11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4 a Determine what percentage of scores lie between: • 10.9 and 11.2 • 11.1 and 11.3 • 10.8 and 10.9 • 10.9 and 11.3

• 10.8 and 11.2

Create a strategy Think about how many quartiles are in that range. One quartile represents 25% of the data set.

Apply the idea • 50% of scores lie between Q1 and Q3. So 50% of scores lie between 10.9 and 11.2 • 25% of the scores lie between the lowest score and Q1. So 25% of scores lie between 10.8 and 10.9 • 50% of scores lie between the median and the highest score. So 50% of scores lie between 11.1 and 11.3 • 75% of scores lie between Q2 and the highest score. So 75% of scores lie between 10.9 and 11.3 • 75% of scores lie between the lowest score and Q3. So 75% of scores lie between 10.8 and 11.2

b In which quartile (or quartiles) is the data the most spread out?

Create a strategy Which quartile takes up the longest space on the graph?

Apply the idea The second quartile is the most spread out.

1.07 Box plots mathspace.co

89


c Determine the interquartile range.

Create a strategy Read Q3 and Q1 off the box plot and then use the formula.

Apply the idea From the box plot, Q1 = 10.9 and Q3 = 11.2 IQR = Q3 – Q1

Write the formula

= 11.2 – 10.9

Substitute the values

= 0.3

Evaluate

Reflect and check This means that the spread of the middle 50% of glass widths was 0.3 mm, so it was fairly consistent.

Idea summary A five-number summary for data sets consists of: • • • • •

Minimum value (Min) - the smallest value in the data set Lower quartile (Q1) - 25% of the data set lies below this value Median (Q2) - 50% of data lies on either side Upper quartile (Q3) - 25% of the data set lies above this value Maximum value (Max) - the largest value in the data set

Technology, such as graphing calculators, can calculate the five-number summary. The key features of a box plot are:

Median Minimum value

0

10

20

Lower quartile

30

40

50

60

Maximum value Upper quartile

70

80

90

100

• The left-hand side of the box is Q1, and the right-hand side of the box is Q3. • The vertical line inside the box shows the median (the middle score) of the data. • The endpoint of the left line is at the minimum score, while the endpoint of the right line is at the maximum score. • Technology can be utilised to construct box plots.

90

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Shape of histogram and box plots Histograms and box plots can be used to represent the same set of data because they can both be used for numerical data sets.

Exploration A high school has scholarship programs for gymnastics and basketball. The histogram and box plot summarise the heights of 29 students in a class, in inches:

Number of students

Classmates’ heights 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 75 65 70 Height (in)

60

80

Classmates’ heights

60

62

64

66

68

70

72

74

76

78

80

1. What differences are noticeable between the various displays of the same data? 2. What information does the histogram show that the box plot does not? 3. What information does the box plot show that the histogram does not?

Histograms are useful representations as they can show the spread, modality, shape, and the frequencies of various scores or intervals. However, it can be difficult to read off summary statistics like the measure of centre. The five-number summary and spread of a data set can be clearly read off a box plot. Both types of data displays can assist in determining the shape of the data distribution.

1.07 Box plots mathspace.co

91


For box plots: Symmetric A symmetric data set is distributed around the centre with a similar amount of data on the left and right side of the median. Notice that the same number of data points are in each quartile. In this example, the data in the box is a little less spread out than in the whiskers, but is still symmetrical. 0

5

10

15 20 25 30 35 Uniform A uniform data set is evenly distributed across all values. In other words, all four quartiles appear to be the same size. In this box plot, notice that the whiskers and each part of the box is 7 units in length.

0

5

10

15 20 25 30 35

Negative (left) skew

0

5

10

15 20 25 30 35

A data set has a negative skew when the majority of the data points have higher values, with some data points at lower values. It is sometimes called a left skew because it looks stretched to the left. Remember, each quartile still contains the same number of data points. In this box plot, notice that the top 50% of the data is between the values 25 and 31. However, the bottom half of the data is much more spread out.

Positive (right) skew A data set has a positive skew when the majority of the data points have lower values, with some data points at higher values. It is sometimes called a right skew because it looks stretched to the right. In this box plot, notice that the bottom 50% of the data is between the values 5 and 12. However, the top half of the data is much more spread out.

0

5

92

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

10

15 20 25 30 35


The shapes of box plots and histogram can be compared for the same data set:

Frequency

Symmetric 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Score

Frequency

Positive (right) skewed 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Score

Frequency

Negative (left) skewed 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Score

1.07 Box plots mathspace.co

93


Example 4 Match the box plot shown to the correct histogram:

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 A

1

2 3 4

5 6 7 8

B

9 10

C

1

2 3 4

5 6 7 8

1

2 3 4

5 6 7 8

9 10

1

2 3 4

5 6 7 8

9 10

D

9 10

Create a strategy Look for characteristics of the data set like the value it is centred around, the range of the data, and the shape - skewed or symmetrical.

94

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Apply the idea

Reflect and check

The given box plot shows negative (left) skewed data, where the median is closer to the first quartile, and the left whisker is longer. Only option C shows this pattern with most data between 6 and 9 and a longer tail toward lower values.

If other histograms were negatively skewed, they could be matched by ensuring that the range of values is 1 to 10, and the data set is centred around 7, with most values between 6 and 8.5

The correct answer is option C.

Idea summary Histograms and box plots can both represent the same numerical data, but each display highlights different features. • Histograms are useful for showing the frequency of data within intervals, making it easy to see the data's spread, modality, and overall shape. • Box plots clearly display the five-number summary (minimum, first quartile, median, third quartile, and maximum), offering a concise look at the centre and spread. Both displays can be used to identify the shape of a data distribution, such as whether it is symmetric, uniform, has a positive skew (skewed right), or a negative skew (skewed left).

1.07 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

Fill in the missing numbers for the box plot: Minimum 26

2

Lower quartile

33

Median

41

Upper quartile

44

Maximum

45

Match each term with its definition: i

The largest data value

ii

50% of the data lies on either side of this value

iii

About 25% of the data is above this value

iv

The smallest data value

v

About 25% of the data is below this value

a

Minimum

b

Lower quartile, Q1

d

Upper quartile, Q3

e

Maximum

c

Median

1.07 Box plots mathspace.co

95


3

For each five-number summary, determine the: i

Range

ii

Interquartile range

a

Minimum 26

b

Minimum

16

Lower quartile

27

Lower quartile

4

5

33

Median

41

Median

35

Upper quartile

44

Upper quartile

42

Maximum

45

Maximum

50

Is each statement true or false for the data set shown in the box plot? a

The maximum is 16.

b

The minimum is 8.

c

The median is 11.

d

There is an error as the median is not exactly in the middle of Q1 and Q3.

e

The interquartile range is 3.

6

8

10

For the box plot shown, determine the: a

Minimum value

b

Maximum value

c

Range

d

Median

e

Interquartile range

12

14

16

18

20

Score

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 6

Match each box plot with the correct description: i

Negative (left) skew

ii

Positive (right) skew

iii

Uniform

iv

Symmetric

a

b

0 c

10

15 20 25 30 35

0

96

5

5

10

15 20 25 30 35

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

0

5

10

15 20 25 30 35

0

5

10

15 20 25 30 35

d


Practice 7

Construct a box plot to represent the data in these tables: a

Ex 1, 2

8

Minimum 5

b

Minimum

8

Lower quartile

25

Lower quartile

10

Median

35

Median

16

Upper quartile

60

Upper quartile

24

Maximum

75

Maximum

28

Consider this data: 20, 36, 52, 56, 24, 16, 40, 4, 28 a

9

10

Determine the five-number summary.

b

For each data set, use technology to: i

Complete the table for the given data.

ii

Create a box plot.

a

15, 8, 13, 15, 7, 15, 2, 7, 16

b

20, 36, 52, 56, 24, 16, 40, 4, 28

c

15, 17, 10, 18, 19, 11, 12, 13

d

71, 73, 79, 85, 89, 80, 79, 76

Construct a box plot for the data. Minimum Lower quartile Median Upper quartile Maximum Interquartile range

For each box plot, determine the:

⬚ ⬚ ⬚ ⬚ ⬚ ⬚

i

Minimum

ii

Lower quartile

iii

Median

iv

Upper quartile

v

Maximum

vi

Interquartile range

a

0 c

10

20

b

30

40

0 1

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 d

40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60

1.07 Box plots mathspace.co

97


Ex 3

11

Consider the box plot shown: Score

0 a

b 12

13

10

15

20

Determine what percentage of scores lie between: i

7 and 15

ii

1 and 7

iv

7 and 19

v

1 and 15

iii

19 and 9

In which quartile is the data the least spread out?

The box plot shows the age at which a group of people got their driving licenses:

Age

a

Determine the oldest age at which someone got their license.

b

Determine the youngest age at which someone got their license.

c

What percentage of people were aged from 18 to 22?

d

The middle 50% of responders were within how many years of one another?

e

In which quartile are the ages the least spread out?

f

The bottom 50% of responders were within how many years of one another?

15

20

The box plot shows the number of hours a group of students studied per week for their final exams: a

Formulate two questions that can be answered by the box plot.

b

Select the option that describes the shape of the box plot:

c

98

5

A

Symmetric

B

Uniform

C

Negatively skewed

D

Positively skewed

25

30

35

Hours per week

0

5

10

15

20

25

Use centre and spread to describe the typical number of hours students in this group studied per week.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

30


Ex 4

14

Match the histograms on the left to the corresponding box plots on the right: Box plot 1

Histogram A

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Box plot 2

Histogram B

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Box plot 3

Histogram C 10

5 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 Box plot 4

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Histogram D

9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1.07 Box plots mathspace.co

99


Box plot 5

Histogram E 10

5 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 Box plot 6

Histogram F 10

5 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90

Extend your thinking 15

100

The glass windows for an airplane are cut to a certain thickness, but machine production means there is some variation. The thickness of each pane of glass produced is measured (in millimetres), and the dot plot shows the results: a

Determine the median thickness.

b

Determine the interquartile range.

c

Plot a box plot that represents the data.

d

What percentage of thicknesses were between 10.8 mm and 11.2 mm inclusive? Round your answer to two decimal places.

10.8 10.9 11.0 11.1 11.2 11.3 Glass thickness

e

According to the box plot, in which quartile are the results the most spread out?

f

Determine whether these can be determined from the box plot: i

The mode thickness

ii

The frequency of each thickness

iii

The median thickness

iv

The spread of thicknesses

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


16

Two groups of people, athletes and non-athletes, had their resting heart rate measured. The results were displayed in this pair of box plots: a

Identify the median heart rate of athletes.

b

Identify the median heart rate of the non-athletes.

c

Which group has the lower heart rates?

d

Determine the interquartile range of the athletes’ heart rates.

e

Determine the interquartile range of the non-athletes’ heart

Athletes

40

50 60 70

80

90

Non-athletes

rates. f

Which group has more consistent heart rate measures?

40 17

In training, a fighter pilot measures the number of seconds he blacks out over several flights. He constructs this box plot.

50 60 70

80

90

Seconds

As long as the pilot is not unconscious for more than 7 seconds, he will be safe to fly. The pilot concludes that he is safe to fly all the time. Explain why his conclusion is incorrect. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 18

VO2 Max is a measure of how efficiently the body uses oxygen during exercise. The more physically fit you are, the higher your VO2 Max. A group of people had their VO2 Max measured, the results are: 21, 21, 23, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 29, 29, 30, 30, 32, 38, 38, 42, 43, 44, 48, 50, 76

19

a

Determine the median VO2 Max.

b

Determine the upper quartile value.

c

Determine the lower quartile value.

d

Construct a box plot for this data.

Explain why these pairs of histograms and box plots do not match: a

b

1.07 Box plots mathspace.co

101


1.08   Outliers After this lesson, you will be able to… • identify outliers using the upper and lower fences: Q1 – 1.5 × IQR and Q3 + 1.5 × IQR. • construct box plots with outliers to visually represent data distributions. • explain the significance of outliers in a data set. • evaluate the impact of outliers on summary statistics.

Quantify outliers Outlier A data point that varies significantly from the body of the data. An outlier will be a value that is either significantly larger or smaller than other observations. Outliers are important to identify as they often indicate that further investigation may be in order or that there was a measurement or data entry error. Previously, outliers were visually identified, but there was no quantitative rule that defined an outlier.

Interactive exploration

Discover this concept in action online

mathspace.co

To determine if a data value is an outlier, there is a rule that involves the interquartile range (IQR). This rule calculates the upper and lower fences of a box plot. A fence refers to the upper and lower boundaries, and any score that lies outside of the fences are classified as outliers. A data point is classified as an outlier if it lies above the upper fence or below the lower fence. These are calculated as follows: Lower fence = Lower quartile (Q1) – 1.5 × (Interquartile range) Upper fence = Upper quartile (Q3) + 1.5 × (Interquartile range) A box plot can be constructed, and any outliers can be identified using the five-number summary and the upper and lower fences. Smallest value that’s not an outlier

Lower fence equation: Q1 − 1.5 (IQR)

Largest value that’s not an outlier Outliers

Upper fence equation: Q3 + 1.5 (IQR)

Q1 Q3 First 25% of data First 75% of data

The diagram shows the construction of the box plots and how the upper and lower fences are constructed. Any data points outside of these are outliers.

102

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 1 Consider the data set: 1, 1, 3, 21, 7, 9, 10, 6, 11 a Construct a five-number summary.

Create a strategy Determine the minimum and maximum scores, the lower and upper quartiles, and the median.

Apply the idea First, the data set should be sorted in order. The ordered data set is: 1, 1, 3, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 21 It can be clearly observed that the minimum value is 1 and the maximum value is 21. Since there are 9 scores, the middle score, which is the fifth score in order, represents the median. The median is 7. To determine the quartiles, the data set is divided into two parts on either side of the median. The lower part consists of 1, 1, 3, 6, and the upper part consists of 9, 10, 11, 21. Since both parts contain an even number of scores, the quartiles are calculated as the averages of their middle scores: Q1

1 3 2

2   Q3

10 11 2

Minimum

1

Q1

2

Median

7

Q3

10.5

Maximum

21

10.5

So the five-number summary is:

b Determine the values of the lower and upper fences.

Create a strategy Calculate the lower fence and upper fence using the formulas: Lower fence = Lower quartile - 1. 5 × IQR Upper fence = Upper quartile + 1.5 × IQR

1.08 Outliers mathspace.co

103


Apply the idea The IQR is solved first. As found in part (a), Q1 = 2 and Q3 = 10.5 IQR = Q3 – Q1

Write the formula

= 10.5 – 2

Substitute the quartiles

= 8.5

Evaluate

Lower fence = 2 – 1.5 × 8.5 = – 10.75 Upper fence = 10.5 + 1.5 × 8.5 = 23.25

Substitute the values Evaluate Substitute the values Evaluate

c Identify any outliers.

Create a strategy Compare the largest and smallest values to the fences found in part (b).

Apply the idea

Reflect and check

1 > –10.75, so there is no lower outlier.

Notice that although 21 is quite a bit larger than the other scores in the set, it is not far enough away to be considered an outlier. The upper and lower fence values should always be checked to determine whether a score is an outlier or not.

21 < 23.25, so there is no upper outlier. So there are no outliers in this data set.

d Construct a box plot to represent this data.

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Use the five-number summary from part (a).

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 2022

104

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 2 The five-number summary for the given dot plot is shown:

Minimum

1

Q1

2

Median

3

Q3

4

Maximum

9

1

2

3

4

5 6 Score

7

8

9

a Calculate the interquartile range.

Create a strategy Use the interquartile range formula: IQR = Q3 – Q1

Apply the idea IQR = 4 – 2 =2

Substitute the quartiles Evaluate

b Determine if there is an outlier. Justify your answer.

Create a strategy Calculate the lower fence and upper fence using the formulas: Lower fence = Lower quartile − 1.5 × IQR Upper fence = Upper quartile + 1.5 × IQR

Apply the idea It was given that Q1 = 2 and Q3 = 4. In part (a), it was found that IQR = 2. Lower fence = Q1 – 1.5 × IQR

Write the formula

= 2 – 1.5 × 2

Substitute the values

= –1

Evaluate

Upper fence = Q3 + 1.5 × IQR

Write the formula

= 4 + 1.5 × 2

Substitute the values

=7

Evaluate

Since 9 is above the upper fence of 7, then the outlier is 9.

1.08 Outliers mathspace.co

105


c Construct a box plot of this data.

Create a strategy Use the five-number summary, but the upper whisker will end at the highest non-outlier.

Apply the idea

0 1

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Reflect and check When verifying with technology, the outlier may not be shown. However, statistically, it should be shown.

Idea summary A data point is classified as an outlier if it lies above the upper fence or below the lower fence. These are calculated as follows: Lower fence = Lower quartile - 1.5 × Interquartile range Upper fence = Upper quartile + 1.5 × Interquartile range Technology can be used to automatically obtain the quartile values using statistics functions. Fence calculations, however, will typically still need to be completed manually with technology support. When graphing a box plot using technology it may or may not show outliers.

Effects of outliers Once an outlier is identified, the underlying cause of the outlier should be investigated. If the outlier is simply a mistake, then it should be removed from the data. If the data is not a mistake, it should not be removed from the data set as while it is unusual, it is representative of possible outcomes. When data contains an outlier, its impact on any calculations should be considered. Observe the effect that outliers have on the three measures of centre - mean, median and mode.

106

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Interactive exploration

Discover this concept in action online

mathspace.co

Outliers can skew or change the shape of a data set. This can be problematic (especially for small data sets) because the mean, median and range might not be a true representation of the data. This can be counteracted by removing outliers. Removing outliers will have these impacts: Removing a low outlier

Removing a high outlier

The range will decrease.

The range will decrease.

The median might increase.

The median might decrease.

The mean will increase.

The mean will decrease.

The mode will not change.

The mode will not change.

Data will become less skewed.

Data will become less skewed.

Did you know?

Skewed data distributions can reveal surprising insights! For example, in real estate, the distribution of house prices is often right-skewed—meaning most properties are moderately priced, but a few luxury homes dramatically raise the average. By identifying this skew, analysts avoid misleading conclusions and use the median (rather than the mean) to better represent typical house prices. Understanding skewness helps ensure data tells the real story, especially when extremes are involved!

1.08 Outliers mathspace.co

107


Example 3 Consider this set of data: 37, 46, 35, 56, 56, 35, 125, 36, 48, 56 a Fill in this table of summary statistics. ⬚

Mean

⬚

Median

⬚

Mode

Create a strategy To find the mean, use the formula: Mean To find the median, find the middle score.

Sum of scores Number of scores

To find the mode, find the most frequent score.

Apply the idea 37 46 35 56 56 35 125 36 48 56 10

Use the formula

530 10

Evaluate the addition

= 53

Evaluate the division

Mean

To find the median, order the scores: 35, 35, 36, 37, 46, 48, 56, 56, 56, 125 The middle scores are: 46, 48 46 48 Median 2

Find the average

= 47

Evaluate

To find the mode, choose the score which occurs most often. Mode = 56 By filling in the table:

108

Mean

53

Median

47

Mode

56

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


b Which data value is an outlier?

Create a strategy Choose the value that is much greater or much smaller than the rest of the data set.

Apply the idea Outlier = 125

c Fill in this table of summary statistics after removing the outlier. ⬚

Mean

⬚

Median

⬚

Mode

Apply the idea

37 46 35 56 56 35 36 48 56 9

Mean

Use the formula

405 9

Evaluate the addition

= 45

Evaluate the division

To find the median, order the scores: 35, 35, 36, 37, 46, 48, 56, 56, 56 The middle score is 46. Median = 46 To find the mode, choose the score which occurs most often. Mode = 56 By filling in the table: Mean

45

Median

46

Mode

56

1.08 Outliers mathspace.co

109


d Let A be the original data set and B be the data set without the outlier. Complete the table using the symbols >, < and = to compare the statistics before and after removing the outlier. With outlier

>, <, =

Without outlier

⬚

B

Mean

A

Median

A

Mode

A

B

⬚

B

⬚

Create a strategy Compare the statistics in part (a) and in part (c).

Apply the idea Statistics from parts (a) and (c): With outlier

Without outlier

Mean

53

45

Median

47

46

Mode

56

56

Comparison table: With outlier

>, <, =

Without outlier

Mean

A

>

B

Median

A

>

B

Mode

A

=

B

Idea summary The mean will be significantly affected by the inclusion of an outlier: • Including a high outlier will increase the mean. • Including a low outlier will decrease the mean. The median is the middle value of a data set, the inclusion of an outlier will not generally have a significant impact on the median. The mode is the most frequent value, as an outlier is an unusual value it will not be the mode. The inclusion of an outlier will have no impact on the mode.

110

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Suitability of measures of centre The mean, median, or mode can be used to describe the centre of a data set. At times, one measure may better represent the data than another, and in certain cases, a single statistic may be preferred for an article or report instead of detailing multiple measures. When choosing which measure to use, it is important to consider which one best represents the type of data. Some main considerations are: • Is there a repeated value? If there are no repeated values or only a couple of randomly repeated values, then the mode will not be representative of the data. If there are one or two highly frequent data points, these may be a fair representation of the centre of the data. • Is there an outlier? As observed, an outlier can significantly affect the mean — potentially distorting the perceived centre of the data. For example, if a list of houses sold in an area includes a historic mansion sold at a price far above the others, using the median would be a better representation of average house prices in the area than the mean. • Do you need all the data values to be taken into account? Only the mean uses all the values in its calculation.

Example 4 The salaries of part-time employees at a company are given in the dot plot. Which measure of centre best reflects the typical wage of a part-time employee? Salaries (in $1000’s)

18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38

Create a strategy Choose the measure that is appropriate for data with extreme values.

Apply the idea The data set has extreme values that are away from the rest of the set at 37 and 38. So the median is the best measure of centre, since it will not be affected by the extreme values.

Idea summary Main considerations when choosing a suitable measure of centre: • If there are no repeated values or only a couple of randomly repeated values, then the mode will not be representative of the data. • If there are outliers, the median will be more suitable than the mean. • Only the mean uses all the values in its calculation.

1.08 Outliers mathspace.co

111


1.08 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

For each data set, calculate: i

The interquartile range

ii

The value of the lower fence (Q1 – 1.5 × IQR)

iii

The value of the upper fence (Q3 + 1.5 × IQR)

a

Minimum 5 Q1

6

Median

12

Q3

17

Maximum

28

b

2 2

4

6

Mode

b

Range

c

Interquartile range

For each of these scenarios, determine whether the outlier that was removed must have had a value smaller or larger than the values that remain: a

A set of data has an outlier removed and the mean lowers.

b

A set of data has an outlier removed and the mean rises.

c

A set of data has an outlier removed and the median lowers.

d

A set of data has an outlier removed and the median rises.

For the given dot plot, the current range is 11. If the outlier is removed, determine the new range.

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Three-pointers

112

8 10 12 14 16 18

When an outlier is removed from a data set, describe the effect on the: a

3

4

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Practice 5

For the data set: 3, 10, 9, 2, 7, 5, 6

6

7

Ex 1

Ex 2

8

9

a

Construct the five-number summary.

b

Calculate the interquartile range.

c

Calculate the value of the lower fence.

d

Calculate the value of the upper fence.

e

Would the value –5 be considered an outlier?

f

Would the value 16 be considered an outlier?

Determine the outlier(s) in these data sets: a

73, 77, 81, 86, 131

b

69, 79, 86, 72, 86, 77, 73, 82, 81, 76, 83, 47, 87, 70, 80, 85

c

58, 63, 58, 59, 64, 68, 68, 30, 73, 25, 72, 61, 65, 69, 75, 72

The table shows the average temperature (°C) in a particular city over several years. Identify the year in which the temperature is an outlier. Year

2002

2003

2004

2005

2006

2007

2008

Temperature (°C)

34.2

26.5

22.6

22.5

24.2

23.0

24.1

For each data set: i

Construct the five-number summary.

ii

Calculate the value of the lower fence.

iii

Calculate the value of the upper fence.

iv

Identify any outliers.

v

Construct a box plot of the data with the outlier(s) displayed separately.

a

6.8, 4.0, 3.5, 5.1, 2.4, 1.6, 3.9, 3.5, 3.1, 3.6, 7.6, 3.7, 4.0, 5.1, 3.6, 3.8, 3.6, 6.7

b

10, 15, 12, 26, 18, 15, 11, 38, 25, 12, 19, 17, 16, 17, 11, 36, 9, 2, 21, 18, 16

For the given data set and five-number summary: 82, 87, 92, 76, 80, 85, 71, 84, 61, 79, 81, 81, 86, 97, 101, 80, 71, 76, 78, 86, 84

Minimum

61

Q1

77

Median

81

Q3

86

Maximum

101

a

Calculate the interquartile range.

b

Determine if there is an outlier. Justify your answer.

c

Construct a box plot of this data

1.08 Outliers mathspace.co

113


10

Redraw the box plots showing the outlier(s) as points: a

104, 115, 215, 127, 109, 118, 121, 130, 116, 134, 131, 129, 125

b

0

100 120 140 160 180 200 220 c

11

d

61, 80, 108, 68, 70, 72, 63, 65, 75, 78

60

70

80

90

100

4.0, 3.5, 5.1, 4.4, 0.3, 3.9, 3.5, 3.1, 4.9, 4.3, 4.7, 5.0, 3.7, 3.8

110

1

2

3

4

5

6

22, 37, 39, 27, 29, 30, 60, 31, 32, 34, 28, 29, 35, 42, 25, 45

20 26 32 38 44 50 56 62

Consider the given stem plot: Stem Leaf 3

449

4

6689

5

14

6 7 8

4

Key 2|3 = 23 If the outlier is removed, what is the new mean? Round your answer to two decimal places. 12

Consider the given stem plot:

Stem Leaf 2

5

3 4

99

5

00457

6

26

Key 1|2 = 12 If the outlier is removed, determine the new range.

114

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Ex 3

13

14

For each set of data: i

Determine the mean, median, mode and range. Round your answers to two decimal places where necessary.

ii

Which data value is an outlier?

iii

Remove the outlier from the set and recalculate the values found in part (i).

iv

Describe how each of the four statistics changed after removing the outlier.

a

27, 50, 24, 37, 47, 41, 27, 126, 44, 27

b

4.7, 2.8, 1.9, 0.9, 0.9, 2.2, 2.2, 1.2, 1.5, 0.9

c

4700, 4700, 4700, 4500, 5300, 4900, 5200, 4800, 1500, 5100

The selling price of recently sold houses is given: $760 000, $650 000, $810 000, $780 000, $760 000, $590 000, $1 360 000

Ex 4

15

a

Determine the mean selling price. Round your answer to the nearest thousand dollars.

b

Identify the median selling price.

c

Recalculate the mean selling price excluding the outlier.

d

Recalculate the median selling price excluding the outlier.

e

Which measure of centre best identifies the typical selling price of recently sold houses? Explain your answer.

The number of goals scored by different soccer teams in a tournament is given in the dot plot. Which measure of centre best reflects the typical number of goals scored? Explain your answer.

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Goals scored 16

A group in a study take a test to assess their reaction time. The participants clicked a button as soon as they heard a sound which was played at random intervals. The reaction time, in milliseconds, of each participant is shown: 220, 280, 210, 220, 215, 180, 185, 190, 190, 195, 150, 190, 195, 195 a

Construct the five-number summary.

b

Identify any outliers and use statistical calculations to justify your answer.

c

Create a box plot of the data with the outlier displayed separately.

d

Give a possible explanation for the outliers present.

1.08 Outliers mathspace.co

115


17

VO2 Max is a measure of how efficiently the body uses oxygen during exercise. The more physically fit you are, the higher your VO2 Max. Here are some people’s results when their VO2 Max was measured: 46, 27, 32, 46, 30, 25, 41, 24, 26, 29, 21, 21, 26, 47, 21, 30, 41, 26, 28, 26, 76 a

Arrange the values into ascending order.

b

Determine the median VO2 Max.

c

Determine the upper quartile value.

d

Determine the lower quartile value.

e

Calculate 1.5 × IQR, where IQR is the interquartile range.

f

Identify any outliers using upper and lower fences.

g

Construct a box plot of the data with the outlier displayed separately.

h

An average untrained healthy person has a VO2 Max between 30 and 40. Using the box plot, what level of exercise is likely to describe the majority of people in this group?

18

When an outlier is removed from a data set, describe the effect on the: a

Mean

b

Median

Extend your thinking 19

The data point 5 is below the lower fence and is considered an outlier. The interquartile range is 12. Determine the smallest integer value the lower quartile can be.

20

The data point 37 is above the upper fence and is considered an outlier. The interquartile range is 10. Determine the largest integer value the upper quartile can be.

21

Consider this frequency table: Weight in kilograms

Frequency

12

2

13

5

14

1

15

2

16

0

17

0

18

1

If the outlier is removed what is the new mean? Round your answer to two decimal places if needed.

116

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


22

The glass windows for an aeroplane are rolled to a certain thickness, but machine production means there is some variation. The thickness of each pane of glass produced is measured (in millimetres), and the dot plot shows the results: Glass thickness (mm)

10.5

23

10.7

10.9

11.1

11.3

a

The current median is 11.15. If the outlier is removed what is the new median?

b

The current mean is 11.1. If the outlier is removed what is the new mean? Round your answer to two decimal places.

A journalist wanted to report on road speed cameras being used as revenue raisers. She obtained data that showed the number of times 20 speed cameras issued a fine to motorists in one month. The results were: 101, 102, 115, 115, 121, 124, 127, 128, 130, 130, 143, 143, 146, 162, 162, 163, 178, 183, 194, 977 The journalist wants to give the impression that speed cameras are just being used to raise revenue. Which measure of centre should she use in her article? Explain your answer.

24

The selling prices of artworks sold at an auction are given: $18 000, $11 000, $17 000, $20 000, $18 000, $16 000, $15 000, $218 000 Which measure of centre best identifies the typical selling price of recently sold artwork? Explain your answer.

1.08 Outliers mathspace.co

117


1.09   Standard deviation After this lesson, you will be able to… • calculate the standard deviation using technology. • interpret sample standard deviation as a measure of spread. • analyse symmetrical and asymmetrical data distributions using appropriate summary statistics. • calculate and interpret the percentage of data lying within several standard deviations of the mean.

Standard deviation Standard deviation A measure of spread, which helps give a meaningful estimate of the variability in a data set when the range and interquartile range do not tell the full story. Consider these data sets and their summary statistics: Set A

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

Set B

1

1

1

4

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

12

15

15

15

Summary statistic

Set A

Set B

Mean

8

8

Median

8

8

Range

14

14

Q1

4

4

Q3

12

12

Interquartile range

8

8

The data sets are clearly different, but the existing summary statistics do not show that. While the quartiles describe the spread about the median, the standard deviation describes the spread from the mean. It is a weighted average of the distance of each data point from the mean. • A small standard deviation indicates that most scores are close to the mean. • A large standard deviation indicates that the scores are more spread out away from the mean value. The standard deviation can be calculated for a population or a sample. The symbols used are: Population standard deviation = σ (lowercase sigma) Sample standard deviation = s

118

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


In statistics mode on a calculator, these symbols might be used: Population standard deviation = σn Sample standard deviation = σn–1 Note: It is only required to calculate standard deviation using the automatic function in the statistics mode on CAS calculators, so use of the formal equation is not required. The standard deviation is found by calculating the square root of the sample or population variance. Variance is the average of the squared differences from the mean. Here is the population variance formula:

2

( x1

)2

( x2

)2 n

( xn

)2

σ 2 is the population variance n is the population size x is a particular data value μ is the population mean The population standard deviation is then: 1 ( xi )2 n In this formula, • The numbers xi are the values in the data set. There is one value for each subscript i. • There are n numbers xi in the data set. So, i goes from 1 to n in the summation. • The symbol μ (Greek letter ‘mu’) is the population mean. • The Greek letter σ (sigma) is used for the population standard deviation. • The symbol Σ (upper case sigma) is the summation symbol. The sample standard deviation is:

( x x )2 n 1

s s x x

n

is the standard deviation is a data value is the sample mean is the sample size

Standard deviation describes the spread of data by comparing the distance of each score to the mean. It is a tedious process to calculate, but it gives a lot of information about the spread of data because it takes into account every data point in the set. Standard deviation is also a very powerful way of comparing different data sets, particularly if there are different means and population numbers.

1.09 Standard deviation mathspace.co

119


Here are some examples of what a data set can look like with the same measures of centre, but different measures of dispersion: • Mean = 5, Median = 5, Standard deviation = 2.84 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1

2

3

4 5

6

7

8

9 10

6

7

8

9 10

6

7

8

9 10

6

7

8

9 10

• Mean = 5, Median = 5, Standard deviation = 2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1

2

3

4

5

• Mean = 5, Median = 5, Standard deviation = 0.93 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1

2

3

4

5

• Mean = 5, Median = 5, Standard deviation = 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1

120

2

3

4

5

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 1 Determine the population standard deviation of this set of scores using technology with statistics functions: 8, 20, 16, 9, 9, 15, 5, 17, 19, 6 Round your answer to two decimal places.

Create a strategy Enter all the scores into a spreadsheet or list, then use technology to find the population standard deviation.

Apply the idea σ = 5.30

Reflect and check The sample standard deviation would be s = 5.58, because it is the same total, but divided by a smaller number, the sample standard deviation is larger.

Example 2 Data was collected and organised in a grouped frequency table. Class

Frequency

1−9

8

10 − 18

6

19 − 27

4

28 − 36

6

37 − 45

8

Total a Complete the table: Class

Class centre

Frequency

fx

1−9

⬚

8

⬚

10 − 18 19 − 27 28 − 36 37 − 45 Total

⬚

6

⬚

8

⬚ ⬚

4 6 ⬚

⬚ ⬚ ⬚ ⬚ ⬚

1.09 Standard deviation mathspace.co

121


Create a strategy To find the class centre, determine the average of the upper and lower bounds of each class. To find the relative frequency, f x, multiply the class centre with its corresponding frequency.

Apply the idea Here is the complete table: Class

Class centre

Frequency

fx

1−9

1 9 2

5

8

5 × 8 = 40

10 − 18

10 18 2

14

6

14 × 6 = 84

19 − 27

19 27 23 2

4

23 × 4 = 92

28 − 36

28 36 2

32

6

32 × 6 = 192

37 − 45

37 45 2

41

8

41 × 8 = 328

32

736

Total

b Use the class centres to estimate the mean of the data set, rounded to two decimal places.

Create a strategy Use the formula: Mean

fx f

Apply the idea Looking at the table in part (a), the sum of the relative frequencies is found at the bottom of the fourth column, which is Σ fx = 736. The total number of scores or the sum of the frequencies can also be seen at the bottom of the third column, which is Σ f = 32. Mean =

736 32

= 23

Substitute the values Evaluate using a calculator

Reflect and check It is possible to enter the data as a frequency table on most CAS calculators, but there is often an additional step required to convert to a list or define it as a frequency table before calculating the summary statistics.

122

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


c Use the class centres to estimate the population standard deviation, rounded to two decimal places.

Create a strategy Use the Statistics mode on your calculator to find the population standard deviation.

Apply the idea Enter the class centres and their corresponding frequencies.

σn = 13.87

d If the original ungrouped data were used to calculate the standard deviation, would the ungrouped data result in a higher or lower standard deviation?

Create a strategy Recall the definition of the standard deviation.

Apply the idea A small standard deviation indicates that most scores are close to the mean, while a large standard deviation indicates that the scores are more spread out away from the mean value. So, having the original ungrouped data would have a higher standard deviation because there would be more variables and a wider spread in the data set.

Idea summary Standard deviation is a weighted average of how far each piece of data varies from the mean. The standard deviation can be calculated for a population (σ) or a sample (s). The standard deviation is a more complex calculation but takes every data point into account. It is significantly impacted by outliers. For each measure of spread: • A larger value indicates a wider spread (more variable) data set. • A smaller value indicates a more tightly packed (less variable) data set.

1.09 Standard deviation mathspace.co

123


Standard deviations from the mean Exploration Consider the data sets represented by the histograms:

7

11

15

19 23 27 31

8

Histogram 1

12

16 20 Histogram 3

10 12

14 16 18 20 22

Histogram 2

24

5

10 15 20 25 30 35 40 Histogram 4

1. Match each of the histograms to the correct mean and standard deviation: • μ = 16, σ = 3 • μ = 15, σ = 2 • μ = 19, σ = 4 • μ = 18, σ = 2 2. Justify your choices. 3. These histograms are all symmetrical and bell-shaped (normally distributed). How many standard deviations away from the mean are the maximum and minimum for each histogram?

Depending on the shape of a data set, the percentage of the data that lies within 1, 2, or 3 standard deviations of the mean varies. For most data sets, it is a manual process of determining the boundaries of ±1, ±2, and ±3 standard deviations from the mean and finding the percentage of the data values that lie in those intervals.

124

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Normal distribution

y

A statistical distribution represented with symmetrical bell-shaped graph.

1 x −1

1

For symmetrical, bell-shaped data, there is a special property called the 68 – 95 − 99.7% rule, also known as the empirical rule. This rule estimates the spread only for data that is approximately normally distributed. According to this rule, the majority of scores (68%) fall within one standard deviation of the mean, most scores (95%) fall within two standard deviations of the mean, and nearly all scores (99.7%) fall within three standard deviations of the mean.

34%

34% 13.5%

13.5%

2.35%

2.35%

µ −σ

µ −2σ

µ − 3σ

µ +σ

µ

µ + 2σ µ + 3σ

68% 95% 99.7% Empirical rule

Empirical rule (68 – 95 – 99.7% rule) A statistical rule that provides an estimate for the distribution of approximately normal data.

Example 3 Consider the normally distributed data sets shown:

10

11

12

13

Distribution A

14

12

13

14

15

16

Distribution B

1.09 Standard deviation mathspace.co

125


a Which data set has a higher mean?

Create a strategy A normal curve is symmetric about the mean. To compare the means of the distributions, the value on the line of symmetry for each curve can be identified, then compare those values.

Apply the idea

The mean of Distribution A is 12 since the curve is symmetric about that value. 10

12

11

13

12

14

13

15

14

16

The mean of Distribution B is 14 since the curve is symmetric about that value.

Since 14 > 12, Distribution B has a higher mean value.

Reflect and check The shape of the curve does not affect the mean. The mean determines the curve’s line of symmetry in a symmetric distribution.

b Which data set has a smaller standard deviation?

Create a strategy The standard deviation affects the spread of a normal curve. To compare the standard deviations of the distributions, the spread of each curve can be analysed and compared.

Apply the idea In Distribution A, approximately 100% of the data lies between 10 and 14. In Distribution B, the curve stretches beyond 12 and 16. The curve is wider and less peaked, showing it has a larger spread. Distribution A has a smaller deviation.

Reflect and check Because the normal curve has an area of 1, curves with a smaller standard deviation will be tall and thin. As the variation in the data increases (as the data values spread further from the centre), the curve will become shorter and wider.

126

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 4 For each display, the mean and standard deviation are given. Determine the percentage of the data that lies in the given range. a What percentage of the data lies in the range 72°F to 88°F, given that the mean is 78°F and the standard deviation is 6°F? Daily temperatures 12

Frequency

10 8 6 4 2 0

60.00 64.00 68.00 72.00 76.00 80.00 84.00 88.00 92.00 96.00 Temperature

Create a strategy This data set is fairly symmetrical, but is a small sample. The empirical rule might be a poor estimate.

Apply the idea 29 There are 57 data values and 8 + 11 + 10 = 29 of them lie in this range. So 51% of the data 57 values lie in this range.

Reflect and check Since the mean is 78°F and the standard deviation is 6°F, the range 72°F = 78°F – 6°F to 84°F = 78°F + 6°F is within one standard deviation of the mean. However, there is significantly less than 68% of data values in this range because it is a small sample and not quite normally distributed.

1.09 Standard deviation mathspace.co

127


b What percentage of data values lie between 12 and 56, given that the mean is 34 and the standard deviation is 11? Stem   Leaf 1

588

2

1 233444

3

23477 788888

4

233557

5

28 Key 2|3 = 23

Apply the idea

28 96.6% of the data values lie in There are 29 data values and 28 of them lie in this range. So 29 this range.

Reflect and check This is fairly close to what the empirical rule predicts.

c What percentage of data values lie between 1.5 and 17.1, given that the mean is 9.3 and the standard deviation is 2.6?

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Sample

Create a strategy This data set is not symmetrical, so the empirical rule does not apply.

Apply the idea

Reflect and check

This range includes all of the data, so 100% of data values lie in this range.

In general, 3 standard deviations should include most of the data for any set, unless it is very skewed.

128

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 5 The grades on a recent exam are approximately normally distributed with a mean score of 72 and a standard deviation of 4. a Construct a normal curve and label the boundaries for the empirical rule.

Create a strategy A normal curve will have a symmetric bell-like appearance with the mean as the central value and divisions for: • Mean ± 1 standard deviation • Mean ± 2 standard deviations • Mean ± 3 standard deviations

Apply the idea Subtract the standard deviations from the mean to find the values on the left side of the curve: • 1 standard deviation below the mean: 72 – 4 = 68 • 2 standard deviations below the mean: 72 – 2 (4) = 64 • 3 standard deviations below the mean: 72 – 3 (4) = 60 Add the standard deviations to the mean to find the values on the right side of the curve: • 1 standard deviation above the mean: 72 + 4 = 76 • 2 standard deviations above the mean: 72 + 2 (4) = 80 • 3 standard deviations above the mean: 72 + 3 (4) = 84

60

64

68

72

76

80

84

b Determine the percentage of students who scored between 64 and 68 on the exam.

Create a strategy To use the empirical rule, first determine how many standard deviations 64 and 68 are away from the mean score of 72.

1.09 Standard deviation mathspace.co

129


Apply the idea 64 is two standard deviations below the mean and 68 is one standard deviation below the mean.

60

64

68

72

76

80

84

According to the empirical rule, the percentage of data between 1 and 2 standard deviations below the mean is 13.5%.

c If 32 students took the exam, determine the number of students expected to score 80 or more on the exam.

Create a strategy First, determine the number of standard deviations 80 is away from the mean score of 72. Then, multiply the percentage found from the empirical rule by 32 students to determine the number of students who may have scored more than 80.

Apply the idea 80 is two standard deviations above the mean. According to the empirical rule, 95% of the data is within 2 standard deviations of the mean. Since all of the data lies below the curve, then 1 − 0.95 = 0.05 or 5% of the data lies above and below 2 standard deviations of the mean. Divide it in half to find the percentage of data that is only 2 standard deviations above the mean: 0.05 0.025 or 2.5%. 2 2.5% of the 32 students are expected to score 80 or more. This gives 32 (0.025) = 0.8. If the data is approximately normal, not even one student will score above an 80 in a class of 32.

Reflect and check Use the empirical rule to check the reasonableness of this solution. According to the rule, 95% of the students will receive scores between 64 and 80 because these are 2 standard deviations from the mean. 32 × 0.95 = 30.4 Because of the rounding error, there are still 2 students that scored below 64 or above 80 on the test. A conclusion that 1 student scored 80 or above on the test would still be valid.

130

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Idea summary A data set that is symmetric and bell-shaped is said to have an approximately normal distribution. The mean, median, and mode are approximately equal in a normal distribution. The centre of the normal distribution is at the arithmetic mean, μ. The standard deviation σ, describes the spread of the data. The normal curve represents a probability distribution, and the area under the entire curve is equal to 100%, or 1. The percentage of data between 1, 2, and 3 standard deviations can be accurately summarised using the empirical or 68 – 95 − 99.7% rule. However, for non-normal distributions or for small data sets, the percentages need to be calculated manually.

1.09 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

2

Ex 1

3

Match each term with its description: i

The whole group from which the information will be gathered

ii

The spread of the middle 50% of the data set

iii

The average distance from the mean calculated as the square root of the variance

iv

A portion of the group chosen for gathering information

v

The average of the square difference from the mean

a

Standard deviation

b

Variance

c

Sample

d

Population

e

Interquartile range

Are the statements always, sometimes, or never true? a

If all values in a data set were increased by the same amount, the standard deviation would also increase by that amount.

b

If the range of a data set is large, the standard deviation will be large.

c

If an extreme value is added to a data set, it will not affect the standard deviation.

d

The standard deviation of a data set will always be positive.

e

The variance is larger than the standard deviation.

Determine the standard deviation of the sets of scores using the statistics mode on the calculator. Round the answer to two decimal places. a

12, 18, 25, 7, 10, 15, 20, 13, 17

b

− 17, 2, − 6, 9, − 17, − 9, 3, 8, 5

1.09 Standard deviation mathspace.co

131


4

The shoe size of 16-year-olds are normally distributed. Which is closest to the percentage of these shoe sizes that is within 3 standard deviations of the mean? D

99.7%

For the given data set, the mean is 55 and the standard deviation is 30.

Stem

A 5

0.3%

B

95%

C

5%

Describe each interval in relation to the mean: a

25 to 85

b

– 15 to 115

c

– 45 to 145

Leaf

0

47

1

01 79

2

4 88

3

5

4

47

5

3 466

6

1 1 57

7

05

8

3 457

9

3 4688

Key 1|2 = 12

Practice 6

i

Determine the sample variance of each set of scores, rounded to four decimal places.

ii

Determine the sample standard deviation of each set of scores, rounded to two decimal places.

a

20, 44, 27, 25, 21, 28, 41, 24, 27, 39, 35, 43, 30, 17, 40

b

3, 14, 11, 17, 3, 18, 15, 6, 17, 15

For each data set, determine: i

Population standard deviation

ii

a

20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 0 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

b

Sample standard deviation

Frequency

7

For each data set, use technology to:

132

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

25

26

27

28

29

30


Ex 2

8

a

Complete the table: Class

Class centre

Frequency

fx

1−9

⬚

8

⬚

10 − 18 19 − 27 28 − 36 37 − 45 Totals

9

⬚

6

⬚

8

⬚

⬚ ⬚

4

⬚

⬚

6

⬚

⬚

⬚

b

Use the class centres to estimate the mean, rounded to two decimal places.

c

Use the class centres to estimate the standard deviation, rounded to two decimal places.

d

If the original ungrouped data were used to calculate the standard deviation, would the ungrouped data have a higher or lower standard deviation? Explain your answer.

Consider the normally distributed data sets shown:

Ex 3

Ex 4

10

62 66 70 74 78 82 86

75 76 77 78 79 80 81

Distribution A

Distribution B

a

Which data set has a higher mean?

b

Which data set has a smaller standard deviation?

Consider the dot plot with mean of 25.14 and standard deviation of 1.36: a

Determine the actual percentage of data that lie within 1 standard deviation of the mean.

b

Determine the percentage of data that lie within 2 standard deviations of the mean. 23

11

The dot plot shows the number of sit-ups completed by students in a Physical Education exam. The mean number of sit-ups was 27.73 and the standard deviation was 11.59 a

Determine the actual percentage of data that lie within 1 standard deviation of the mean. Round your answer to one decimal place.

b

Determine the actual percentage of data that lie within 2 standard deviations of the mean.

24

25 26 Sample

27

Number of sit-ups per student

0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55

1.09 Standard deviation mathspace.co

133


12

For the given stem plot, determine the values, rounded to two decimal places:

Stem Leaf

a

Mean

b

Standard deviation

c

Percentage of data that lie within 1 standard deviation of the mean.

d

Percentage of data that lie within 2 standard deviations of the mean.

1

339

2

38

3

4

4

479

5

58

6

8

7

5

8

3

9

7

Key 1|2 = 12 13

The table shows the number of goals scored by a football team in each game of the year: a

In how many games were 0 goals scored?

b

Determine the median number of goals scored.

Score

Frequency

c

Calculate the mean number of goals scored, rounded to two decimal places.

0

3

d

Calculate the standard deviation, rounded to two decimal places.

1

1

2

5

3

1

4

5

5

5

e f

14

Determine the percentage of data that lie within 1 standard deviation of the mean. Determine the percentage of data that lie within 2 standard deviations of the mean.

The histogram and statistics for a data set are shown: n

25

Mean

22.5

σ

10.4019

s

10.6164

Σx 2

134

562.5

Σx

15361.25

Min

2

Q1

14.5

Median

22.5

Q3

30.5

Max

43

y 5 4 3 2 1 x 0 0

5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50

a

What is the range of scores that fall within 1 standard deviation of the mean?

b

Approximately what percentage of scores lie within 1 standard deviation of the mean?

c

What is the range of scores that fall within 2 standard deviations of the mean?

d

Approximately what percentage of scores lie within 2 standard deviations of the mean?

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


15

A normally distributed data set has a mean of 0 and a standard deviation of 0.75. Which is the closest to the percent of values between –1.5 and 1.5? A

16

34%

B

95%

D

68%

The number of offspring in litters of puppies is normally distributed, as shown:

3

17

50%

C

5

7

9

11

a

Determine the percentage of litters that have no more than 9 puppies.

b

Determine the percentage of dogs that have at least 7 puppies.

c

Determine the percentage of puppies that are within 2 standard deviations of the mean.

d

99.7% of the litters will be between what numbers of puppies?

The mean income of people in Country A is $19 069. This is the same as the mean income of people in Country B. The standard deviation of Country A is greater than the standard deviation of Country B. In which country is there likely to be the greatest difference between the incomes of the high-income and low-income?

Ex 5

18

The operating times of phone batteries are approximately normally distributed with a mean of 34 hours and a standard deviation of 4 hours. a

Construct a normal distribution curve that models the operating times of phone batteries and label the boundaries for the empirical rule.

b

Determine the percentage of batteries that last between 22 and 42 hours.

c

Any battery that lasts less than 22 hours is deemed faulty. The company CEO asked one of the managers. “If we manufactured 51 000 batteries, approximately what number of batteries would we be able to sell?” Answer the CEO’s statistical question.

1.09 Standard deviation mathspace.co

135


Extend your thinking 19

Consider the test results for four Geography classes, labelled as Class W, Class X, Class Y, and Class Z:

Class W

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0

Class Y

2

4

6

0

8 10

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Class X

2

4

6

8 10

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0

2

4

6

8 10

Class Z

0

2

4

6

8 10

Rank the classes from largest standard deviation to smallest standard deviation. Explain your reasoning. 20

21

Seven millionaires with an average net wealth of $41 million with a standard deviation of $7 million are having a party. Suddenly Carlos Slim, who has a net wealth estimated to be $31 billion, walks into the room. a

Determine the new average net wealth in the room. Round your answer to the nearest million.

b

Will the new standard deviation be higher, lower or unchanged from before?

c

Will the new mode be higher, lower or unchanged from before if at least two of the original seven millionaires have the same net wealth?

d

Will the range be higher, lower or unchanged from before?

The scores obtained by two classes are given: • Red Class: 55, 57, 49, 58, 68, 57, 60, 53, 56, 51 • Blue Class: 53, 57, 62, 51, 56, 62, 58, 55, 58, 51

136

a

Which class performed better on average? Use statistical calculations to justify your answer.

b

Which class produced more consistent results? Use statistical calculations to justify your answer.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


22

23

Han, a cricketer, has achieved scores of 52, 20, 68, 70 and 150 in his first five innings this season. In his sixth innings, he scored 0. a

Describe how his season batting average changed from before to after the sixth inning.

b

Describe how his standard deviation changed from before to after the sixth inning.

c

Describe how his median score changed from before to after the sixth inning.

d

Describe how his range changed from before to after the sixth inning.

The table shows the heart rate data of a group of people after exercise on the Stair Champion 10 000:

a

Height of step

Stepping rate

Heart rate

Short step

Slow

89

Short step

Slow

91

Short step

Medium

106

Short step

Medium

105

Short step

Fast

124

Short step

Fast

128

Tall step

Slow

100

Tall step

Slow

96

Tall step

Medium

125

Tall step

Medium

129

Tall step

Fast

132

Tall step

Fast

127

Complete this table. Round all values to one decimal place. Height of step Short step Tall step

Data

Slow

Medium

Fast

Average heart rate

90.0

Standard deviation of heart rate

1.0

Average heart rate

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

Standard deviation of heart rate

⬚

⬚ ⬚

⬚ ⬚

b

Which of the combinations of step height and stepping rate generated the higher heart rate? Quote relevant statistics in your answer.

c

Which combination of step height and stepping rate showed the least variability? Quote relevant statistics in your answer.

1.09 Standard deviation mathspace.co

137


1.10   Compare sets of data After this lesson, you will be able to… • construct back-to-back stem plots to compare data distributions across two groups. • construct parallel box plots to compare data distributions across two or more groups. • compare distributions across groups using centre (mean, median) and spread (range, IQR, standard deviation, outliers). • interpret differences between data sets in context using appropriate statistical language.

Compare data sets The measures of centre, measures of spread and shape of the data are all used to analyse data sets. Measures of centre summarise a data set and indicate where the majority of the data lies. Advantages

Drawbacks

Mean

Includes all of the data in the calculation, widely used

Heavily impacted by outliers

Median

Indicates the middle value, not impacted by outliers

Does not include all data values

Mode

Quick to identify, indicates the most frequent value(s)

Does not include all data value, is not necessarily representative of the data

Measures of spread tell us about the variability and consistency. Advantages

Drawbacks

Easy to calculate, utilises the extremes of the data

Heavily impacted by outliers

Interquartile range

Indicated the middle 50% of the data, not impacted by outliers

Does not include all data values

Standard deviation

Indicates how far values are from the mean, widely used in other areas of statistics

Impacted by outliers, difficult to calculate without technology

Range

The shape of the data provides insight into the distribution of values within a data set, which differs from measures of centre or spread. While measures of centre summarise the central tendency of the data, and measures of spread describe how dispersed the data points are, the shape of the data indicates the overall pattern of distribution.

138

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Advantages

Drawbacks

Identifies whether the data is evenly distributed or if it has a tail on one side.

Does not provide insight into the spread or exact values of the data.

Modality

Reveals whether the data has one or multiple peaks, which can suggest distinct groups or patterns.

Modality focuses on peaks, which may overlook important information about the tails of the distribution.

Outliers

Outliers are critical in detecting Focusing too much on outliers can anomalies or unusual observations detract from understanding the that could influence results. overall pattern of the data.

Skew/symmetry

Describing and comparing data sets using multiple measures of centre, spread and shape, provides an accurate and comprehensive understanding of the data’s characteristics. By incorporating various measures such as the mean, median, standard deviation, range and skewness, the strengths of one measure can offset the weaknesses of another. This multi-faceted approach minimises the limitations of relying on a single measure, allowing for a more balanced assessment of the data. As a result, it leads to better-informed conclusions about data sets. Using a variety of well-chosen summary statistics makes it easier to compare data sets.

Example 1 The given data sets show the time to get to school for 20 students at two different schools, rounded to the nearest minute. Some summary statistics are given: School A 3

4

5

8

9

11

11

11

12

13

14

15

15

18

19

27

33

33

42

45

School B 15

15

17

17

17

18

18

18

18

19

19

22

22

22

23

23

23

24

24

24

School A

School B

Mean

17.4

19.9

Median

13.5

19

Variance

142.14

9.09

1.10 Compare sets of data mathspace.co

139


a Interpret and compare the means for both schools.

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

The mean is also called the average and describes a typical value that balances all of the data points. Check the difference between the means provided in the summary.

From the given summary, it shows that School A has a lower mean of 17.4 compared to School B that has a mean of 19.9. This shows that the typical travel time for students going to School A is shorter by 2.5 minutes compared to students going to School B.

b Interpret and compare the medians for both schools.

Create a strategy Median is the middle value of a data set, which is not impacted by extreme values. Check the difference between the medians provided in the summary.

Apply the idea

Reflect and check

It can be seen from the given summary that School A has a lower median of 13.5 compared to School B that has a median of 19. This shows that the typical travel time for students going to School A is shorter by 5.5 minutes compared to students going to School B.

The two measures of centre tell the same story that School B students have a longer journey to school than School A students. However, the median makes this conclusion more obvious because the difference is larger.

c Calculate the standard deviations for both schools.

Create a strategy Use the given variance to find the standard deviation which is the square root of the variance.

Apply the idea

Variance

School A

School B

142.14

9.09

Get the square root: School A

School B

Variance

142.14

9.09

Standard deviation

142.14 11.92

9.09 3.01

Reflect and check The units for the standard deviation are the same as the original context, so the standard deviation for School A is 11.92 minutes and the standard deviation for School B is 3.01 minutes.

140

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


d Interpret and compare the standard deviations for both Schools.

Create a strategy Observe the difference between the standard deviations for School A and School B. Remember that the standard deviation quantifies how spread out the values in the data set are relative to the mean value.

Apply the idea The standard deviation for School A is 11.92 while it is 3.01 for School B. This suggests that the time students take to get to School A have greater variability or the values are more spread out, compared to School B. On average, there is 11.92 minutes of difference from the mean for School A, indicating higher variability. On the other hand, there is less variability or the values are closer to each other for School B, with an average difference from the mean of 3.01 minutes.

Reflect and check The higher standard deviation or variability for students travelling to School A suggests that they may have encountered heavier traffic conditions, frequent road closures, or other factors that contribute in increased travel time.

Idea summary The measures of centre, measures of spread and shape of the data are all used to analyse data sets. By incorporating multiple measures, the strengths of one measure can offset the weaknesses of another, leading to better informed conclusions about data sets. When comparing data sets: • To determine which data set scored higher, compare the measures of centre. • To determine which data set is more consistent, compare the measures of spread.

Compare data displays Data displays are helpful because they allow for a visualisation of a data set which is often less cumbersome than looking at a long list of data values. For numerical data, the most common displays are: • Histograms - used for continuous data and clearly show shape, range, clustering/modality, and mode (modal class) • Box plots - used for numerical data and clearly show shape, spread, outliers, median, and the five-number summary • Stem plots - used for discrete data and show the shape, range, and the raw data values • Dot plots - used for small discrete data and show the shape, range, mode, and the raw data

1.10 Compare sets of data mathspace.co

141


All displays also have disadvantages. Based on the advantages and disadvantages of each display, it may be easier or more difficult to compare two data sets using the displays. Histograms Advantages

Disadvantages

Good for large quantities of data

Individual data values are lost

Easy to read off the spread, clusters, and trends

Bin size can affect the conclusion

We do not need to round when collecting data Box plots Advantages

Disadvantages

Good for large quantities of data

Individual data values are lost (other than maximum and minimum)

Easy to read off shape, interquartile range, and outliers

Cannot easily see gaps or trends

Median is clearly shown Stem plots Advantages

Disadvantages

Data is sorted

Difficult to show large quantities of data

Keeps the original data

Not helpful if the data only varies in the last digit

Can see some clusters in the data Dot plots (line plots) Advantages

Disadvantages

Simple to create

Difficult to show for large quantities of data

Can read off the most and least common response

Difficult to show a large number of categories or a large spread

Can see some clusters in the data To compare two or more sets of data with data displays, it is important to be able to identify key features and compare and contrast them. If outliers are identified in the data displays, then it is important that these are mentioned in the comparison, with an explanation of how they are handled. In particular, a statement should be made if outliers are included or excluded from comparisons, and the effect that this has on the analysis.

142

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 2 Data on player height was collected from the Year 8 and the Year 12 basketball teams: Year 8

10

Number of students

Number of students

Year 12

8 6 4 2 0

155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 Height (cm)

10 8 6 4 2 0

135 140 145 150 155 160 165 Height (cm)

a Compare and contrast the shape, modality, and presence of outliers for the two teams.

Create a strategy Identify the overall shape of the distributions. Then determine whether the data is single modal or multimodal and identify any outliers that stand out from the main distribution.

Apply the idea Both distributions are approximately symmetrical and single modal. The modal class for Year 12 (170 – 175 cm) is higher than the modal class for Year 8 (150 – 155 cm). There is a possible outlier in Year 12 around 195 – 200 cm, but Year 8 has no significant outliers.

b Compare the overall heights of the two teams.

Create a strategy Compare the mean, median, or modal class of both distributions. Consider whether the data is clustered around a certain height range.

Apply the idea Year 12 has a higher overall height distribution, with most students clustered around 170 – 180 cm. Year 8’s height distribution is lower, mostly between 145 – 160 cm. The modal class for Year 12 (170 – 175 cm) is much higher than for Year 8 (150 – 155 cm), confirming that Year 12 consists of older students.

1.10 Compare sets of data mathspace.co

143


c Compare the variability within each team.

Create a strategy Assess the range and observe how spread out the data is from the centre.

Apply the idea If the outlier values are ignored in Year 12 (195 – 200 cm), both distributions have similar ranges (35 cm for Year 12 and 30 cm for Year 8). The heights for Year 12 appear to be more spread out overall compared to Year 8. Year 12’s data is slightly more dispersed, suggesting greater height variability among older students.

Idea summary Data sets can be compared using data displays. The data displays can be the same or different. The numeric or descriptive information that can be determined from the display varies by display. Strengths Histograms

Box plots

Stem plots

Dot plots

144

Drawbacks

Easily display large or spread out Cannot see individual data values. data sets. The shape, mode, and Depending on the number or size of spread are visible. the bins or intervals, the shape can look different. Easily display large or spread out Cannot see individual data values or gaps data sets. The shape, median, in data spread. interquartile range, and outliers are visible. Useful for individual data values. Do not work well for large data sets. Can The highest and lowest values be slower to make by hand. are easy to see. Useful for individual data Do not work well for large data sets. Can values. The highest and lowest be slower to make by hand. categories are easy to see.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Parallel box plots Parallel box plots Used to compare two or more sets of data visually. These box plots are presented parallel to each other along the same number line using the same scale. When comparing box plots, the five-number summary is important to consider. Other statistics can be derived such as the range and interquartile range, and visual observations can be made of symmetry, skew, and outliers that should be considered in any comparisons. The term parallel is used because the box plots are presented parallel to each other along the same number line for comparison. They must therefore be on the same scale, so a visual comparison is fairly straightforward. Key comparisons for box plots: When comparing two sets of data, compare the five-number summary as shown. There are key questions that should be asked: • How do the spreads of data compare? • How do the skews compare? Is one set of data more symmetric? • Is there a big difference in the medians? • Can we see regions on one box plot that extend past the comparable region on the other? Always consider what factors are more important for the given situation. In some cases, it might be necessary to make judgements by simply comparing the median value; sometimes the minimum or the maximum value is the critical measurement. In other situations, the consistency will be more important than extreme values so it is also worth considering measures of spread to make judgements. If outliers are identified in the box plots, then it is important that these are mentioned in the comparison, with an explanation of how they are handled. That is, there should be a statement if outliers are included or excluded from comparisons, and the effect that this has.

Example 3 Data was collected on the time it took for people to complete an online task. The data was grouped by age using parallel box plots: 25

18 20

12

5 Under 30s

16

6

22

27

30

Over 30s

0

2

4

6

8

10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 Seconds

1.10 Compare sets of data mathspace.co

145


a Compare the five-number summary for the two groups.

Create a strategy Determine the minimum and maximum scores, the lower and upper quartiles, and the median of the data set for each age group.

Apply the idea Under 30s

Over 30s

Minimum

5

6

Q1​

12

16

Median

18

22

Q3

20

27

Maximum

25

30

It can be seen that each statistic for the ‘Under 30s’ group is lower than that of the ‘Over 30s’ group, indicating faster completion times on average for the younger group. b Which group was more consistent? Explain.

Create a strategy Determine and compare the ranges (difference between maximum and minimum) and interquartile ranges (difference between Q3 and Q1) of the two groups.

Apply the idea Under 30s

Over 30s

Range

25 – 5 = 20

30 – 6 = 24

IQR

20 – 12 = 8

27 – 16 = 11

The ‘Under 30s’ group was more consistent because it has both a smaller range and IQR, which indicate greater consistency in completion times compared to the ‘Over 30s’ group.

146

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


c Which statement is incorrect? A

100% of the under 30s completed the task before the slowest 25% of the over 30s.

B

t least 75% of the under 30s completed the task in under 22 seconds, which is the median A time for the over 30s.

C

They both have a positive skew.

D

The under 30s had more consistent times than the over 30s

Create a strategy Analyse each statement based on the data provided in the box plots and the properties of distributions such as skewness.

Apply the idea All ‘Under 30s’ completed the task before the slowest 25% of the ‘Over 30s’. So Option A is true. 75% of ‘Under 30s’ finished in 20 seconds or less, while the median for ‘Over 30s’ is 22 seconds. So Option B is true. The box plots show that the ‘Over 30s’ have a distribution that extends further right relative to the median compared to the ‘Under 30s’, indicating a positive skew for the ‘Over 30s’ and not necessarily for the ‘Under 30s’. So Option C is false. Option D is true based on the IQR and range discussed. So, the incorrect statement is option C.

d Overall, which group performed better?

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Evaluate overall performance by comparing all aspects of the box plots, focusing on measures of centre and data distribution.

Every one of these measures is in favour of the under 30s so, overall, it can be concluded that the under 30s performed better.

Idea summary Parallel box plots are used to compare two or more sets of data visually. These box plots are presented parallel to each other along the same number line using the same scale. When comparing two box plots, compare the five-number summary and overall distribution. There are key questions that could be asked: • • • •

How do the spreads of data compare? Are there any outliers? How do the skews compare? Is one set of data more symmetrical? Is there a big difference in the medians? Can we see regions on one box plot that extend past the comparable region on the other?

1.10 Compare sets of data mathspace.co

147


Back-to-back stem plots Back-to-back stem plots Allow for the display of two data sets at the same time using a common stem. These types of plots are a great way to make comparisons between data sets.

Group A

Group B

73

1

036

50

2

1 678

655

3

556

1 1

4

1 1 569

84 3

5

0368

Key 3|1 = 13

One set of data is shown with its leaves on the left and the other on the right. The leaves are written in ascending order, moving outward from the stem.

Key 1|0 = 10

Example 4 The back-to-back stem plots show the number of pieces of paper used over several days by Maximillian’s and Charlie’s students: Maximillian’s students

Charlie’s students

7

0

7

3

1

1 23

8

2

8

43

3

234

765

4

9

32

5

2

Key 2|1 = 21

Key 6|1 = 61

Which of these statements are true? I. Maximillian’s students did not use 7 pieces of paper on any day. II. Charlie’s median is higher than Maximillian’s median. III. The median is greater than the mean in both groups.

148

A

I and II

B

II and III

C

None of the statements are correct

D

III only

E

II only

F

I only

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Create a strategy Examine both stem plots and assess the validity of each statement.

Apply the idea Statement I: Based on the stem plot of Maximillian’s students, they used 7 pieces of paper on any day. This means that statement I is incorrect. Statement II: Both groups have 10 data points. For Charlie’s students, the median lies between 28 and 32 as these are the 5th and 6th data points, respectively. For Maximillian’s students, the median lies between 34 and 45 as these are the 5th and 6th data points, respectively. Calculating the median for each group: Maximillian’s median =

34 45 2

= 39.5 Charlie’s median =

28 32 2

= 30 This means that Maximillian’s median is higher than the median of Charlie’s, so statement II is incorrect. Statement III: Calculating the mean for each group, Maximillian’s mean =

7 13 28 33 34 45 46 47 52 53 10

= 35.8 Charlie’s mean =

7 11 12 13 28 32 33 34 49 52 10

= 27.1 Comparing the calculated mean of both groups with their respective median, the median is greater than the mean in both groups. This means that the statement III is correct. So, the correct answer is option D, III only.

Idea summary A back-to-back stem plot are very similar to a regular stem plots, in that the “stem” is used to group the scores and each “leaf” indicates the individual scores within each group. When a stem plot is being created, it is easier for the scores to be written in ascending order before they are placed into a back-to-back stem plots.

1.10 Compare sets of data mathspace.co

149


1.10 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

Marge grows two different types of bean plants. She records the number of beans that she picks from each plant for 10 days: • Plant A: 10, 4, 4, 5, 7, 10, 3, 3, 9, 10 • Plant B: 8, 7, 5, 5, 9, 7, 8, 7, 5, 6

2

a

Determine the mean number of beans picked per day for Plant A.

b

Determine the mean number of beans picked per day for Plant B.

c

Determine the range for Plant A.

d

Determine the range for Plant B.

e

Which plant produces more beans on average? Explain your answer.

f

Which plant has a more consistent yield of beans? Explain your answer.

The parallel box plots show the data collected by the manufacturers on the lifespan of light bulbs, measured in thousands of hours: Manufacturer A

Manufacturer B

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Thousands of hours a

Complete the table. Express each answer in terms of hours. Manufacturer A

Manufacturer B

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

Median Lower quartile Upper quartile Range Interquartile range b

150

⬚ ⬚ ⬚

⬚ ⬚ ⬚

Which manufacturer produces light bulbs with the best lifespan? Explain your answer.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


3

A mathematics test is given to two classes. The score out of 20 received by students in each class are represented in the box plots: Class 8P

Class 8Q

0

4

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18 20 22

a

Which class tended to score better?

b

Which class(es) had an outlier?

c

Which class(es) had symmetrical shape?

d

Would the range or interquartile range be better for describing the spread of Class 8Q?

e

Which class had more consistent results?

The back-to-back stem plots show the batting scores of two cricket teams, A and B. Determine: Team A Team B a The median score of Team A. 762 6 268 b The median score of Team B. 8665 2 7 1 57 c The range of Team A’s scores. 84 8 1 4 79 d The range of Team B’s scores. 9 47 e The interquartile range of Team A’s scores. f

The interquartile range of Team B’s scores.

Key 6|1 = 16

Key 1|2 = 12

Practice 5

The residents of two blocks of townhouses were asked about the number of pets they owned. The frequencies of various responses are presented in the dot plots:

0

1

2 3 Block A

4

0

1

2 3 4 5 6 Block B

a

In which block is pet ownership lower?

b

How many pets do most households have in Block A?

c

How many pets do most households have in Block B?

d

Describe the shape of the data for Block A.

e

Determine the range for Block A.

f

Which block has more variability in the number of pets per household?

g

Does either block have an outlier?

1.10 Compare sets of data mathspace.co

151


6 Ex 1, 2

A group of students recorded the resting heart rates for 30 students and 30 teachers. The results are represented with the histograms: Resting heart rate of teachers 12

10

10

8

8

6

6

4

4

2

2

0

40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75

Teachers

7

Resting heart rate of students

12

0

40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 Students

Mean

55.7

Mean

58.4

Median

56

Median

58

Range

21

Range

20

Interquartile range

6

Interquartile range

7

Standard deviation

4.3

Standard deviation

5.0

a

Compare the spread (dispersion) of the student and teacher data sets. Explain what this means in the context.

b

Compare the centres of the student and teacher data sets. Explain what this means in the context.

The pulse rates of two groups are given: • Group 1: 82, 85, 88, 65, 73, 89, 79, 90, 76, 68, 88, 65, 63, 62, 88, 82 • Group 2: 75, 88, 74, 73, 80, 76, 67, 81, 71, 83, 89, 62, 63, 80, 71, 78

152

a

Determine the mean pulse rate of Group 1, rounded to two decimal places.

b

Determine the mean pulse rate of Group 2, rounded to two decimal places.

c

Determine the standard deviation of Group 1, rounded to two decimal places.

d

Determine the standard deviation of Group 2, rounded to two decimal places.

e

What is the range for Group 1?

f

What is the range for Group 2?

g

Which group has the greater spread?

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


8

The median house price in the suburb of Humbleton is $950 000 with a mean price of $1 000 000 and the median house price in the suburb of Brockway is $950 000 with a mean price of $880 000. Which suburb is more likely to have very expensive houses? Explain your answer.

9

The hours of sleep per night for two people over a two-week period are shown:

a

Person A

8

5

10

7

9

7

6

10

6

9

7

7

10

5

Person B

8

8

8

7

7.5

8

7.5

7

7

7

7.5

7

7

7.5

Calculate the following (rounded to one decimal place where necessary) for Person A: i

b

ii

The median

iii

The mode

The range

iv

Calculate the following (rounded to one decimal place where necessary) for Person B: i

10

The mean

The mean

ii

The median

iii

The mode

The range

iv

c

Which person is the least consistent in their sleep habits? Explain your answer.

d

Which person has the most sleep over the 14 nights? Explain your answer.

The test scores of 11 students in Drama and German are listed: • Drama: 75, 85, 62, 65, 52, 76, 89, 83, 55, 91, 77 • German: 82, 86, 76, 84, 64, 73, 89, 62, 54, 69, 78 Construct parallel box plots to represent both data sets.

Ex 3

11

Two bookstores recorded the selling price of all their books. The results are presented in the parallel box plots: Bookstore A Bookstore B

50

60

70

80

90

100

110

120

130

140

150

Prices ($) a

Which bookstore had the more consistent prices?

b

Comparing the most expensive books in each store, how much more expensive is the one in Bookstore B?

c

True or False: 25% of the books in Bookstore B are at least as expensive as the most expensive book in Bookstore A.

d

True or False: 25% of the books in Bookstore B are cheaper than the cheapest book in Bookstore A.

1.10 Compare sets of data mathspace.co

153


12

The parallel box plots show the distances, in centimetres, jumped by two high jumpers: Matt

Paul

150

140

160

180

170

Distance (cm)

13

a

Who had a higher median jump?

b

Who made the highest jump?

c

Who made the lowest jump?

d

Who has the larger range?

The parallel box plots show the prices, in dollars, of the items on the menu of an upmarket restaurant and the menu of a fast food restaurant: Upmarket restaurant

Fast food

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

Price

154

a

Which restaurant has the higher median price for the items they sell?

b

What is the difference between the median prices of the items sold by each restaurant?

c

Which restaurant has a greater price range for the items on their menu?

d

What is the price difference between the most expensive items sold by each restaurant?

e

What amount of the cheapest item at the fast food restaurant could be bought for the same price of the most expensive item at the upmarket restaurant?

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Ex 4

14

The back-to-back stem plots show the number of books read in a year by a random sample of university and high school students. Which of these statements are true? University

High school 7

0

663

1

0035

432 1

2

1 2 446

9886

3

1 89

82

4

01

5 6 3

7

Key 2|1 = 12 books

15

a

Compare the medians of both groups.

b

Compare the range of both groups.

c

Which group of students read more books? Explain your answer.

The back-to-back stem plots show the length (in minutes) of a random sample of phone calls made by Sharon and Tricia: a

16

Key 1|2 = 12 books

Determine Sharon’s mean, rounded to one decimal place.

Sharon

Tricia 3

1

34

76432

2

678

98

3

24

b

Determine Sharon’s median.

43

4

1 2

c

Determine Tricia’s mean, rounded to one decimal place.

76

5

678

d

Determine Tricia’s median.

e

Who generally makes slightly longer phone calls?

The back-to-back stem plots show the number of desserts ordered at Hotel A and Hotel B over several randomly chosen days:

Key 2|1 = 12 minutes

Key 1|2 = 12 minutes

Hotel A

Hotel B

3

0

432

1

34

a

Interpret the lowest score for Hotel A.

b

Which hotel’s median is higher?

76

2

7

Is the mean greater than the median in both groups?

43

3

34

6

4

67

2

5

234

c

Key 2|1 = 12

Key 1|3 = 13

1.10 Compare sets of data mathspace.co

155


17

Two friends compete in hammer throw competitions and train together over a season. They compete in 15 competitions and their final throw for each competition is shown: • Tim: 29.8, 37.4, 33.9, 38.8, 34.3, 36.5, 34.5, 30.0, 35.2, 38.4, 33.0, 33.2, 39.6, 35.0, 36.9 • Odi: 32.2, 35.4, 34.8, 33.0, 38.4, 26.0, 40.0, 37.2, 39.5, 42.4, 38.6, 42.3, 38.4, 42.8, 37.2 a

Complete this table of statistics: Tim

Odi

Minimum

29.8

Q1

33.2

⬚

Median

35.0

Q3

37.4

Maximum

39.6

Mean (1 d.p.)

37.2

Sample standard deviation (2 d.p.)

⬚

2.93

Range

⬚

⬚

⬚

Interquartile range

⬚ ⬚ ⬚ ⬚ ⬚ ⬚

b

Which competitor throws more consistently? Explain your answer.

c

Identify any outliers and use statistical calculations to justify your answer.

d

Create parallel box plots of the two sets of data with the outlier(s) displayed separately.

e

Who is the better hammer thrower? Explain your answer.

f

When considering Odi’s average throw is it reasonable to remove the outlier before calculating the mean? Explain your answer.

Extend your thinking 18

156

The ages of employees at two competing fast food restaurants on a Saturday night are recorded. Some statistics are given in the table: Mean

Median

Range

Berger’s Burgers

18

17

6

Fry’s Fries

18

19

2

a

If the data for Berger’s Burgers was represented using a histogram, would it be positively or negatively skewed?

b

Which restaurant has the oldest employee on the night the data is recorded?

c

Which restaurant has the most consistent ages among employees? Explain your answer.

d

Which restaurant has an older workforce? Explain your answer.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


19

The weight (in kilograms) of a group of men and women were recorded and presented in a back-to-back stem plots as shown: Men

Women 5

01 234445557

988766 653

6

0223477 8

64322 1 0000

7

0

0

8

Key 2|4 = 42 kg

20

Key 4|2 = 42 kg

a

Find the mean weight of the group of men.

b

Find the mean weight of the group of women.

c

Which group is heavier overall? Explain your answer.

A cinema is showing three films, labelled A, B and C. The ages of people watching each of the films are illustrated in the parallel box plots: A B C 0

21

10

20

30

40

50

60

a

Which film do you think has an adults only rating, restricting it to viewers 18 years of age and older? Explain your answer.

b

Which film would be recommended for a group of 15-year-olds to watch? Explain your answer.

c

Which film would you recommend to a family of two parents in their 40’s and two teenagers? Explain your answer.

Cooper and Marion are racing go-karts. The times (in seconds) for the 12 laps of their qualifying race are shown: • Cooper: 58.9, 46.5, 52.6, 66.6, 58.4, 53.1, 45.0, 52.1, 52.4, 52.7, 44.8, 51.7 • Marion: 47.8, 54.6, 68.5, 68.0, 62.8, 57.2, 54.8, 63.4, 58.1, 64.3, 66.2, 47.1 a

Construct the five-number summary for each set.

b

Identify any outliers and use statistical calculations to justify your answer.

c

Create a parallel box plots of the two sets of times with the outlier(s) displayed separately.

d

Which racer will be in pole position for the final race, if it is given to the racer with the fastest qualifying lap time?

e

Does spinning out on a lap, causing a high outlier, impact the selection for pole position? Explain your answer.

1.10 Compare sets of data mathspace.co

157


22

23

These box plots summarise results from a medical study. The treatment group received an experimental drug to relieve cold symptoms, and the control group received a placebo. The box plots show the number of days each group continued to report symptoms: Control group

Treatment group

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20

a

Describe the shape of the data from the control group.

b

Describe the shape of the data from the treatment group.

c

Does the drug have a positive effect on patient recovery? Explain your answer.

The box plots drawn shows the number of repetitions of a 70 kg bar that Weightlifter A and Weightlifter B can lift. They both record their repetitions over 30 days:

A

B 0

2

4

6

8 10 12 Repetitions

14

16

a

Which weightlifter has the more consistent results? Explain your answer.

b

Which weightlifter can do the most repetitions of the 70 kg bar? Explain your answer.

Chapter 1 review

Online review

158

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

mathspace.co


“Mathematics is a place where you can do things which you can’t do in the real world.” – Marcus du Sautoy


Big ideas • Linear relationships are characterised by a constant rate of change and can be represented algebraically as equations or visually as straight-line graphs. • The key features of a linear graph, specifically its slope and intercepts, provide critical information for interpreting, sketching, and defining the unique equation of the line.

2 Linear relationships Chapter outline 2.01 2.02 2.03 2.04 2.05 2.06

Solve linear equations Linear equation applications Graphs from tables Slopes and intercepts Sketch linear functions Equations of straight lines Investigation: Filling a pool Chapter 2 review

162 168 175 187 200 208


The slope of a line isn’t just math; it represents change! A steeper slope means a faster change – just like climbing a hill!


2.01

Solve linear equations After this lesson, you will be able to… • solve multi-step linear equations with rational coefficients and constants. • verify solutions using appropriate technology. • apply inverse operations to solve equations systematically.

Solve linear equations Solving linear equations involves applying two fundamental principles: • Using inverse (or opposite) operations • Keeping both sides of the equation balanced Inverse operation An operation that is used to reverse the mathematical operations applied to the variable. Inverse operations allow the equation to be simplified step by step until the variable is isolated. Operation

Inverse operation

Example

Addition

Subtraction

x+4−4=x

Subtraction

Addition

x–3+3=x

Multiplication

Division

y×4÷4=y

Division

Multiplication

y÷2×2=y

Applying the same mathematical operation to both sides of the equation keeps it balanced and ensures both sides remain equal, much like keeping a scale balanced. The objective is to determine the value of the variable that makes both sides of the equation equal, ensuring the solution is valid. This method is effective for equations requiring either single or multiple steps to isolate the variable. To solve multi-step equations, consider how the equation is built, then apply inverse operations in reverse order to both sides of the equation until the variable is isolated. This process is also known as making a variable the subject of an equation.

Interactive exploration

Discover this concept in action online

Equations can be solved and solutions can be verified using technology.

162

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

mathspace.co


Example 1 Solve each equation. a 24 + p = 59

Create a strategy

Apply the idea 24 + p = 59

The inverse of addition is subtraction, therefore, subtract 24 from both sides to isolate the variable.

b

Write the equation

p = 35 Subtract 24 from both sides

u 7 5 2

Create a strategy Apply the inverse operations in the reverse order of how the equation was built.

Apply the idea The equation was built by: 7 u

2 u 7

u 7 2

The order of inverse operations will be: 1. Multiply by 2. 2. Subtract 7. u 7 5 2

Write the equation

u + 7 = 10

Multiply both sides by 2

u=3

Subtract 7 from both sides

Reflect and check Substitute u = 3 into the original equation to check. u 7 5 2

Write the equation

3 7 5 2

Substitute u = 3

10 5 2

Evaluate the addition

5=5

Evaluate and check that the two sides are equal

2.01 Solve linear equations mathspace.co

163


c – 3 (–2h – 5) = 33

Apply the idea The equation was built by: × –2 h

× –3

–5 – 2h

– 2h – 5

– 3 (– 2h – 5)

So, the order of inverse operations will be: 1. Divide by – 3. 2. Add 5. 3. Divide by – 2. – 3 (– 2h – 5) = 33

Write the equation

– 2h – 5 = – 11

Divide both sides by –3

– 2h = – 6

Add 5 to both sides

h=3

Divide both sides by – 2

Reflect and check This equation can also be solved using technology by entering the equation into a solve function or command.

d

5x 9 4 8

Apply the idea The equation was built by: ×5

x

÷8 5x

–9 5x 8

5x –9 8

So, the order of inverse operations will be: 1. Add 9. 2. Multiply by 8. 3. Divide by 5. 5x 9 4 8 5x 5 8 5x = 40 x=8

164

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

Write the equation Add 9 to both sides Multiply both sides by 8 Divide both sides by 5


Idea summary A linear equation is a type of equation where the highest power of the variable is one. Solving linear equations involves applying two fundamental principles: • Using inverse (or opposite) operations • Keeping both sides of the equation balanced To solve multi-step equations, consider how the equation is built, then apply inverse operations in reverse order to both sides of the equation until the variable is isolated. Equations can also be solved using technology.

Equations with variables on both sides Inverse operations can be used to combine terms for equations with variables on both sides. Once all the terms containing the variable are on one side, that side can be simplified by collecting like terms. Then the equation can be solved like a multi-step equation applying the inverse operations in reverse order. Best practice is to eliminate the variable term with the smaller coefficient to avoid unnecessary introduction of negative coefficients. To keep the equation balanced when moving terms, remember to do the same operations to both sides of the equation.

Example 2 Digital only example

Explore in the online lesson

mathspace.co

Example 3 Solve the equation 4 (x + 3) − 2x = 3 (x − 1).

Create a strategy First, expand the brackets on both sides then collect like terms.

Apply the idea 4 (x + 3) − 2x = 3 (x − 1)

Write the equation

4x + 12 − 2x = 3x − 3

Expand the brackets on both sides

2x + 12 = 3x − 3

Combine like terms on the left-hand side

12 = x − 3

Subtract 2x from both sides

15 = x

Add 3 to both sides

x = 15

Rewrite

2.01 Solve linear equations mathspace.co

165


Idea summary To solve an equation with variables on both sides, begin by using inverse operations to move all variable terms to one side. Then, continue applying inverse operations in reverse order to isolate the variable. Expanding any brackets may be necessary before starting to solve the equation.

2.01 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

For each of the equations, identify the inverse operation that must be applied to both sides to solve the equation: 1 3 x a x–4=6 b 4x = 92 c 7 d x 5 5 5

2

For each pair of operations:

3

i

Determine the expression if one starts with x, and applies the two given operations.

ii

Determine the inverse operations in reverse order of application.

a

Add 6 then multiply by 4

b

Multiply by – 3 then subtract 7

c

Subtract 9 then divide by 3

d

Divide by 11 then add 8

For each equation: i

Determine the inverse operation needed to make the variable the subject of the equation.

ii

Solve the equation.

a

y+5=9

n 4 9

b

9p = 36

c

t – 3 = – 45

d

n + 27 = 11 t 1.6 5

d

6 = – 16 + n v 5 5

Practice 4

Ex 1a

5

Solve: a

x – 4 = 10

b

3x = 18

c

e

t – 15 = 0

f

9t = 3

g

b

4x − 6x = 4

c

Solve: a

166

h

3x + 11 = 5

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

− 10 + 3k = 5

d

8m + 9 = 65


Ex 1b

Ex 1c

6

7

Solve: 5x 11 a 6

8

9

10

Ex 3

11

12

m 6 4.25 4

d

n 36 11 2

b

3 (q + 3) = – 18

c

2 (p – 5) = – 12

d

7 (11 – n) = 210

4

b

3x 8

12 15

c

d

8 p 13 8

b

6x = 5x + 37

c

10x = 9x + 50

d

39x + 125 = 40x

b +5 3

1 3

7 4

4

7x = 6x + 2

Solve and verify with technology: a

2x – 9 = 5x

b

7x = x + 30

c

3x = x – 18

d

8x = 6x + 10

e

7x = 3x – 12

f

3x = − 8x − 44

g

4x = − x + 5

h

6x = 16 − 2x

Solve: a

6y − 3 (y + 4) = − 12

b

4x + 3 − 4 = 8 1 x 1 2

c

5 (x − 2) − 3x = 2 (x + 5)

d

13 = 4m − (2m − 7)

b

3y 3 3

d

3.9 k 28 5 4

Solve each equation and justify each step:

c

14

c

Solve:

a

13

2 (q + 11) = 20

Solve: y 2 a 6

a

Ex 2

x 15 5 2

Solve: a

Ex 1d

b

14 k 76 2 2k 2 5x 2 2x 8 3

2y 4 4

2 y 10 0.6k

Identify the step where Angus made an error and explain what he should have done instead: 1

4x – 8 = 12

2

4x = 4

Subtract 8 from both sides

3

x = 1

Divide both sides by 4

Write the equation

Ryan attempted to solve the equation 9 (4x – 6) = 18, and his working is shown: 9 (4x – 6) = 18 4x – 6 = 91 4x = 15 15 x 4 a

Identify the error made.

b

Solve the equation correctly.

2.01 Solve linear equations mathspace.co

167


15

Jamie had x pencils in her pencil case. She finds one more, and then shares all her pencils equally with her friend, Teddy. Her sister then gives her 5 more pencils. Jamie now has 7 pencils left in her pencil case: a

Explain why the three-step equation that can represent this situation is given by: x 1 5 7 2

b

Solve the equation to determine the number of pencils Jamie started with.

Extend your thinking 16

A square with side length 4x − 11 m has the same perimeter as a square with side length 2x + 9 m. Determine the value of x.

17

A car rental company charges a flat fee of $50, plus $0.20 per kilometre driven. If a customer returns a car with a total rental fee of $74, after driving it, how many kilometres did they drive?

18

In a parallelogram, the base is 3 times the height. If the area of the parallelogram is 48 cm2, determine the base and height of the parallelogram.

2.02   Linear equation applications After this lesson, you will be able to… • develop linear equations from contextual information. • interpret the solutions of linear equations in real-world contexts.

Equations from worded descriptions To develop a linear equation from a worded problem: • Define the unknown quantity and represent it with a variable. • Identify the relationships between the quantities described. • Form an equation using the variable to express these relationships mathematically, applying the four operations (addition, subtraction, multiplication, division) as appropriate.

168

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Keywords in the problem often indicate which operation to use. This table highlights common keywords and their corresponding operations: Addition (+)

Subtraction (−)

Multiplication (×)

Division (÷)

Sum

Difference

Product

Quotient

Total

Decrease

Times

Shared

Increase

Minus

Of

Per

Plus

Less than

Double

Out of

More than

Reduce

Twice

Ratio

Combined

Fewer

Triple

Half

For every

Split

Per

Average

Together

Groups of Notice that “per” appears in both multiplication and division because it can signal different operations depending on the context: • Multiplication: When “per” indicates a rate (how much of one quantity for each unit of another), it typically signals multiplication to find a total amount over multiple units. For example, “60 kilometres per hour” means 60 km are travelled for each hour. To find the total distance covered after t hours, multiply the rate by the number of hours: Distance = (60 × t) km. • Division: “Per” can also signal division when the context is about distributing some quantity. For example, “100 dollars per 5 people” suggests dividing the total amount by the number of people: 100 ÷ 5.

Example 1 Write each situation as an algebraic equation. a Four less than twice a number equals the same number increased by six

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Represent the ‘number’ with a variable. ‘Less than’ indicates subtraction. ‘Twice’ means multiply by 2, and ‘increased’ indicates addition.

Let the number be x. The term ‘equals’ means separating the expressions. So, the equation is: 2x – 4 = x + 6

b The product of six and the sum of a number and three is the difference of the number and twelve

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Use a variable to represent the ‘number’. ‘Product’ indicates multiplication, ‘sum’ means addition, and ‘difference’ means subtraction.

Let the number be x. Parentheses are needed to group the sum (x + 3) before multiplying. The equation can be written as: 6 (x + 3) = x – 12

2.02 Linear equation applications mathspace.co

169


c The quotient of four more than triple a number and two is nine

Create a strategy Use a variable to represent the ‘number’. ‘Quotient’ indicates division, ‘triple’ means multiplied by 3, and ‘more than’ indicates addition.

Apply the idea The word and acts as the separator between the numerator and denominator for the fraction representing the quotient. This means ‘four more than triple a number’ is the numerator and ‘two’ is the denominator. Using the word is to separate the expressions, the equation can be written as: 3x 4 2

9

Idea summary To develop a linear equation from a worded problem: • Define the unknown quantity and represent it with a variable. • Identify the relationships between the quantities described. • Form an equation using the variable to express these relationships mathematically, applying the four operations as needed.

Solve practical problems Once a linear equation has been developed from a worded description, solving it involves applying inverse operations in reverse order to isolate the variable. For practical problems, it is important to interpret the solution in the context of the problem, checking it is valid and reasonable.

Example 2 Carrie is going shopping to buy school supplies. She plans to buy 6 notebooks, 2 packages of pens and 1 three-ring binder. The total cost will be $30. She remembers that the binder costs twice as much as a notebook, and a pack of pens costs the same as six notebooks. a Write an algebraic equation to represent the situation.

Create a strategy Assign a variable to represent the cost of one notebook. Since the binder costs twice as much as a notebook and a pack of pens costs the same as six notebooks, the costs of the binder and pens can be expressed in terms of the notebook’s cost. Finally, use the total amount Carrie can spend to set up the equation.

170

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Apply the idea The sum of everything Carrie buys is $30, so: 6 notebooks + 2 pens + 1 binder = $30 Let n represent the cost of one notebook in dollars. So the cost of 6 notebooks is 6n. The cost of one pack of pens is the same as the cost of 6 notebooks or 6n, so the cost of 2 packs of pens is 2 × 6n. The cost of one binder is twice (or two times) the cost of a notebook, n, so the cost of a binder is 2n. Adding these up and setting them equal to $30, the equation is: 6n + 2 × 6n + 2n = 30

b Carrie solves the equation using the information she knows. Her value for n is 1.5. Verify and interpret the solution.

Create a strategy To verify Carrie’s solution, substitute her value for n into the equation, 6n + 2 × 6n + 2n = 30, and check if the result matches the total cost of $30.

Apply the idea Substituting n = 1.5 into the equation: 6 (1.5) + 2 × 6 (1.5) + 2 (1.5) = 30 9 + 18 + 3 = 30 30 = 30 This shows that the value of 1.5 for n makes the equation true, so it is the solution. Since n represents the cost of one notebook, this shows that, the cost of one notebook is $1.50, a pack of pen is $9.00 and a binder is $3.00.

Example 3 A rectangle has a length that is 4 units more than its width. If the perimeter of the rectangle is 36 units: a Determine an equation to represent this situation using x for the width.

Create a strategy Observe the relationships between the quantities by identifying keywords and construct a linear equation.

2.02 Linear equation applications mathspace.co

171


Apply the idea The unknown variable, defined as x, represents the width of the rectangle. x = the width of the rectangle Keywords such as “more than” indicate addition. x + 4 = the length of the rectangle To calculate the perimeter of a rectangle, twice the width needs to be added to twice the length. Perimeter = 2 × Width + 2 × Length

Write the formula for the perimeter of a rectangle

36 = 2 × x + 2 × (x + 4)

Substitute the variable and expression

36 = 2x + 2x + 8

Simplify and expand brackets

36 = 4x + 8

Collect like terms

b Determine the length and width of the rectangle.

Create a strategy Solve for the unknown by applying the inverse operations in reverse order.

Apply the idea 36 = 4x + 8

Write the equation

28 = 4x

Subtract 8 from both sides

7=x

Divide both sides by 4

The width of the rectangle is 7 units. Since the length of the rectangle is 4 more units than the width, the length is 11 units.

Reflect and check Calculate the perimeter of the rectangle with a width of 7 and length of 11 to verify the solution is correct. Perimeter = 2 × Width + 2 × Length

Write the formula for the perimeter of a rectangle

= 2 × 7 + 2 × 11

Substitute the values

= 14 + 22

Evaluate the multiplication

= 36

Evaluate the addition

Idea summary For practical problems, develop the equation, solve for the unknown by applying inverse operations in reverse order to isolate the variable. Interpret the solution in the context of the problem, checking it is valid and reasonable.

172

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


2.02 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

2

Express these statements as equations and solve them. Let x represent the unknown number: a

If 11 is subtracted from a number, the result is – 7.

b

The quotient of a number and – 3 is – 20.

Determine an expression for the perimeter of the rectangle in terms of n. 2 cm

8n cm 3

Determine an expression for the perimeter of the triangle in terms of b. 5b m

4

Solve these linear equations for x: a

x + 5 = 12

b

3x – 4 = 11

c

2x + 7 = 5x – 8

d

4(x – 3) + 2 = 3x – 7

Practice Ex 1

5

Write each situation as an algebraic equation, where x represents the number: a

Five less than 2 times a number equals the number increased by 7.

b

Twice a number increased by 15 totals the difference of the number and 1.

c

8 times a number increased by the product of 6 and the sum of the number and 11 is 25. 25 Seven times a number is equal to more than twice the number. 3

d e f 6

The quotient of 9 and the difference of 2 and a number is the number. 4 The quotient of a number and – 3 is – . 3

The perimeter of this triangle is 189 cm. a

Determine the perimeter of the triangle in terms of x.

b

Solve for the value of x.

9x cm

5x + 21 cm

7x + 84 cm

2.02 Linear equation applications mathspace.co

173


7

Given that the perimeter of this triangle is 98 cm, determine an equation in terms of x and solve for the unknown.

2x + 17 cm

2x + 13 cm

8

Ex 2

9

10

Ex 3

11

Express the statements as equations and solve them for x: a

The sum of 8 and 12x is equal to 92.

b

The product of 5 and the sum of x and 7 equals 50.

Kate and Isabelle do some fundraising for their sporting team. Together they raised $600. If Kate raised $272 more than Isabelle, and Isabelle raised $p: a

Write an equation in terms of p that represents the relationship between the different amounts, and then solve for p.

b

How much did Kate raise?

John and Uther do some fundraising for their sporting team. Together they raised $403. If John raised $m, and Uther raised $71: a

Determine an equation that represents the relationship between the amounts each contributed.

b

Determine the value of m.

Vanessa is cutting out a rectangular board to construct a sign. The board is to have a perimeter of 48 centimetres, and its length is to be 3 centimetres shorter than double the width. Let x be the width of the board. a

12

5x + 14 cm

Solve for x, the width of the board.

b

Determine the length of the board.

Marge is looking at accommodation prices in Paris. One particular hotel charges $184.70 for the first night, and then $153.97 for every additional night. Marge has a budget of $1108.52. Use an equation to determine how many nights she can afford to stay.

Extend your thinking 13

The cost of a cricket ball is 136 cents more than the cost of a rugby ball. Let $x be the cost of a cricket ball and $y be the cost of a rugby ball.

174

a

Express x in terms of y

b

8 cricket balls and 9 rugby balls cost $119. Express this statement as an equation in terms of x and y.

c

Determine the value of y, the cost of a rugby ball.

d

Determine the value of x, the cost of a cricket ball.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


14

15

Beth is 7 times as old as James. Let x be the present age of Beth in years and y be the present age of James in years. a

Express x in terms of y.

b

In 2 years time, Beth will be 5 times as old as James. Express this sentence as an equation in terms of x and y.

c

Determine the value of y, James’ present age.

d

Determine the value of x, Beth’s present age.

A website advertises properties for sale. If the property is sold within the month, the website charges $130 for the advertisement, but if the property is not sold within the month, the website pays the advertiser $20. In a particular month, 58 advertisements were placed, and a total revenue of $3040 was earned from all advertisements. Use an equation to determine the number of advertisements that resulted in a sale of the property.

16

Three consecutive integers are such that the sum of the first and twice the second is 15 more than twice the third. a

Let x be the smallest of the integers. Solve for x.

b

Determine the three consecutive integers.

c

Are there any other sets of three consecutive integers that could fulfill the requirements? Explain how you know.

2.03

Graphs from tables

After this lesson, you will be able to… • determine if a table, graph, or equation represents a linear relation. • create tables of values from linear equations using substitution. • plot points to construct linear graphs. • identify constant rate of change in tables of values.

Linear relationships Linear relationship A relationship between two quantities, typically denoted by x and y, where there is a constant rate of change.

2.03 Graphs from tables mathspace.co

175


Linear functions have graphs that are straight lines. The following are examples of linear graphs and their corresponding equations. 8 6 4 2

y

4 3 2 1

x

−8 −6 −4 −2 −2 −4 −6 −8

y

x

−4 −3 −2 −1 −1

2 4 6 8

1

2 3 4

−2 −3 −4

y=x

y

1–

1 x 2

Not all relationships between two quantities form a linear graph on the Cartesian plane. The following are examples of non-linear graphs and their corresponding equations. 4 3 2 1 −4 −3 −2 −1

−1 −2 −3 −4

y

x 1

2 3 4

y = x2 + 1

4 3 2 1 −4 −3 −2 −1 −1 −2 −3 −4

y

x 1

2 3 4

y = 2x3 − 1

The equation of a linear relationship can be arranged into the forms: • y = a + bx, where y, is the response (dependent) variable and the subject of the equation in terms of x, the explanatory (independent) variable. • Ax + By = C, where A, B, C are constants The x-term and y-term in a linear relationship will always have a power of 1. Non-linear functions are represented by equations that often have higher powers, and cannot be represented by y = a + bx or Ax + By = C.

176

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


A table of values can also be used to determine if a relationship is linear or non-linear. If there is a common difference between y-values as x changes by a constant amount, then, the table represents a linear relation. A constant rate of change is a key feature of linear relationships. +2

+2

+2

+2

Weeks (x)

0

2

4

6

8

Growth in cm (y)

3

4

5

6

7

+1

+1

+1

+1

A key feature of linear relationships is a constant rate of change. In the table, for every increase of 2 in the x-values, the y-values consistently increase by 1, demonstrating this linear relationship.

Example 1 Determine whether these equations are linear: a y=

11 – 9x 2

Create a strategy Consider that if x and y have linear relationship, then their equation is of the form y = a + bx or Ax + By = C.

Apply the idea The equation is in the form y = a + bx, therefore, it is linear. b y = x10 + 5x + 26

Create a strategy The x term in a linear relationship must always have a power of 1.

Apply the idea The first term is raised to the power of 10, therefore, it is not linear.

Example 2 Digital only example

Explore in the online lesson

mathspace.co

2.03 Graphs from tables mathspace.co

177


Example 3 Determine if each table of values represents a linear relationship. a

x

3

6

9

12

15

y

−7

−14

−21

−28

−35

Create a strategy Check if for constant increases in x, y changes by a constant amount.

Apply the idea +3

+3

+3

+3

x

3

6

9

12

15

y

–7

–14

–21

–28

–35

–7

–7

–7

–7

From the table, notice that the x-values go up by 3 each time. For each 3 unit increase in x, y decreases by 7. So, the given table represents a linear graph as there are constant changes in the x-values and y-values. The relationship is linear.

b

x

7

21

35

49

63

y

15 2

15

45 2

45

135 2 ​

Apply the idea +14

+14

+14

+14

x

7

21

35

49

63

y

15 2

15

45 2

45

135 2

+15 2

+15 2

+45 2

+45 2

From the table, notice that the x-values go up by 14 each time. For each 14 unit increase in x, the y-values do not increase or decrease by a constant amount. So, the given table does not represent a linear relationship.

178

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Reflect and check To further confirm that the relationship is not linear, plot the points from the table on a Cartesian plane and observe the resulting shape. y 70 60 Connecting these points does not form a straight line, as the rate of change in y varies. This graph confirms that the relationship is not linear as there are no constant differences.

50 40 30 20 10

x 0

10 20 30 40 50 60

Idea summary Linear relations have graphs that are straight lines. Linear relations have equations that are written or can be arranged in the form of y = a + bx or Ax + By = C. When given a table of values relating two quantities, a linear relationship exists if there is a common difference between y-values as x changes by a constant amount.

Graph lines with tables of values Table of values A table that represents ordered pairs which satisfy a given equation (or rule defining a relationship). A table of values for a linear relationship can be created by substituting several x-values into the equation and evaluating to get the corresponding y-values. Each pair, (x, y), is called an ordered pair and represents a point on the line. For example, for y = –6 + 3x: x

0

1

2

3

y = −6 + 3x

−6 + 3(0) = −6

−6 + 3(1) = −3

0

3

Once the table of values is complete, plot the points on the Cartesian plane and connect with a line.

2.03 Graphs from tables mathspace.co

179


Using a spreadsheet tool on a computer or graphing calculator, creating a table of values can be very efficient. These steps illustrate this process: A

B

x

y

1

C

2

Start by labelling the header row with x and y.

3 4 5

A

B

1

x

2

0

3

= A2 + 1

4

⫶

C

y

Next, fill in x-values by starting with the initial value and using a formula to fill down.

⫶

5

A

B

1

x

2

0

= − 6 + 3 × A2

3

1

4

2

5

3

⋮

C

y

⋮

With the x-values filled in using a formula or manually, use a formula for the equation and fill down.

⋮

A

B

1

x

y

2

0

–6

3

1

–3

4

2

0

5

3

3

C This gives a completed table of values. Optionally, these points can be plotted using built-in functions on the calculator.

Alternatively, linear relationships can be graphed from the equation using the graphing page on a graphing calculator.

180

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 4 3x 1. 2 a Complete the table of values. Consider the equation y

x

−2

0

2

4

y

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

Create a strategy

3x To complete the table, each given x-value will be substituted into the equation y - 1 to 2 calculate the corresponding y-value.

Apply the idea • For x = –2: y=

3x 1 2

y=

3( 2) 2

=

6 2

Write the equation Substitute x = –2

1 1

Evaluate the multiplication

= –3 – 1

Evaluate the division

= –4

Evaluate

• For x = 0: y= y= =

3x 1 2

Write the equation

3(0) 0 2

Substitute x = 0

1

2 1

Evaluate the multiplication

=0–1

Evaluate the division

= –1

Evaluate

• For x = 2, substituting and evaluating gives y = 2. • For x = 4, substituting and evaluating gives y = 5. Therefore, the completed table of values with the calculated y-values: x

−2

0

2

4

y

−4

−1

2

5

2.03 Graphs from tables mathspace.co

181


b Plot the points from the completed table of values to draw the graph of y =

3x 1. 2

Create a strategy To plot the points, each (x, y) pair from the completed table will be located and marked on a Cartesian plane. Then join the points with a line.

Apply the idea 1. Identify the coordinate pairs from the completed table of values. The coordinate pairs are (– 2, – 4), (0, – 1), (2, 2), and (4, 5). 2. Plot these points on a Cartesian plane. The x-axis should range from at least –2 to 4, and the y-axis from at least –4 to 5. 5 4 3 2 1

y

(4, 5)

(2, 2) x

−3 −2 −1 1 2 3 4 5 −1 (0, −1) −2 (−2, −4) −3 −4

3. Connect the points with a straight line. 5 4 3 2 1

y

(4, 5)

(2, 2) x

−3 −2 −1 1 2 3 4 5 −1 (0, −1) −2 −3 (−2, −4) −4

Reflect and check Since points from the table of values form a straight line, y =

182

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

3x 1 is a linear relationship. 2


Idea summary Each pair in a table of values can be written as coordinates in the form (x, y). This pairing of numbers is known as an ordered pair. A table of values can be created by substituting each x-value into the given equation by hand or with technology. Using a table of values, a linear function can be graphed.

2.03 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

2

Determine if each statement is true or false: a

Linear equations cannot have powers higher than 1 on variables.

b

Linear relationships involve a constant rate of change.

c

Linear functions have graphs that are curved.

d

The x-values need to go up by 1s in a table of values for it to represent a linear relationship.

For each table of values: i

Plot the points on the Cartesian plane.

ii

Determine whether the graph of the equation is linear.

a

y = –3x

x 3

y

b

x −3 −2 −1 0 x y 3

9

6

3

y

0

−3

0

3

6

1

0

−1

−2

Given the linear equation y = 2x – 3, complete the table of values by substituting the given x-values: x

−1

0

2

4

y

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

Practice Ex 1

4

Determine whether these equations are linear: 12 11 a y = x5 + 26 b y c y 26 x 4x 3 2 1

e

y

2x 2

2

f

y

16

20 x

g 3–3=0

10

20 x+ 16 16 = d y +y x6x6+ 20x

21 2

h 9x2 + 3 = 0

2.03 Graphs from tables mathspace.co

183


5 Ex 2

Determine if each graph represents a linear or non-linear relationship: a

y 4 3 2 1 −4 −3 −2 −1 −1 −2 −3 −4

c

6

d

4 3 2 1

x

2 3 4

f

4 3 2 1

x

−4 −3 −2 −1 −1 −2 −3 −4

2 3 4

2 3 4

1

2 3 4

1

2 3 4

y

x

−4 −3 −2 −1 −1 −2 −3 −4

x 21 42 63 84 y

184

x 1

y

x

Determine whether these tables of values represent linear relationships: a

7

1

y

−4 −3 −2 −1 −1 −2 −3 −4

2 3 4

y 4 3 2 1 −4 −3 −2 −1 −1 −2 −3 −4

Ex 3

1

4 3 2 1

x

y 4 3 2 1 −4 −3 −2 −1 −1 −2 −3 −4

e

1

b

11 2

55 2

77 2

55

105

b

66

x

5

10

25

30

50

y

11

22

55

66

110

d

y = 1 – 2x

For each equation: i

Construct a table of values for x = − 1, 0, 1, 2.

ii

Plot the points from the table of values on the Cartesian plane.

iii

Sketch the graph of the equation.

a

y = 4x

b

y = – 4x

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

c

y = 1 + 3x


Ex 4

8

a

9

13

14

−3

0

3

y

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

x . 5 Complete the table of values: x

−10

−5

0

5

y

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

x

−4

−2

0

2

y

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

b

Plot the points from the table on the Cartesian plane.

c

Is the relationship linear?

b

Plot the points from the table on the Cartesian plane. x . Sketch the graph of y 5

c

x . 2 Complete the table of values: 5

b c

x . 4 Complete the table of values:

Consider the equation y a

12

−6

Consider the equation y a

11

x

Consider the equation y a

10

2x 4. 3 Complete the table of values:

Consider the equation y

Plot the points from the table on the Cartesian plane. x Sketch the graph of y 5 . 2

5

x

−8

−4

0

4

y

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

Consider these equations:

b c

Plot the points from the table on the Cartesian plane. x . Sketch the graph of y 5 4

i

Construct a table of values for x = –1, 0, 1.

ii

Sketch the graph of the equation.

a

y = 8x

b

y = 1 + 9x

c

d

y = –7x

e

y = –3 – 7x

f

4 5x 3 9x – y = –6 y

–

a

3 5x : 4 Create a table of values using reasonable values of x. Explain your choice.

b

Sketch the graph of y

For the linear relationship y

3 5x . 4

Sketch each linear relationship: x x a y b y 7 4

c

y

5

x 6

d

y

6

x 3

2.03 Graphs from tables mathspace.co

185


Extend your thinking 15

Let the height of a candle be y cm. If the candle is lit, the height decreases according to the equation y = 8 – 2t, where t is the elapsed time in minutes. a

16

186

t

0

1

2

3

y

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

b

Sketch the graph of y = 8 – 2t.

c

The height of the candle and the time elapsed must be non-negative. For which values of t does the equation y = 8 – 2t accurately model the height of the candle?

Let the volume of water in a tank be V L. If the tank is initially empty, then the amount of water in the tank is given by V = 5t, where t is the elapsed time in minutes and 5 is the rate that the tank fills in litres per minute. a

17

Complete the table of values:

Complete the table of values: Time (t)

0

1

2

3

Volume of water (V)

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

b

Sketch the graph of V = 5t.

c

The volume of the tank is 15 L and the time elapsed is non-negative. For which values of t does the equation V = 5t accurately model the volume of the tank?

A photography drone starts on a cliff 20 m above sea level. Its flight path consists of two distinct legs. For the first leg, its height above sea level is modelled by h1 (t) = 20 – 4t, where h1 is in metres and t is the time in minutes from the start of its flight. For the second leg, which begins immediately after the first, its height above sea level is modelled by h2 (t) = 8 + 2t, where h2 is in metres and t is the total time in minutes from the initial start of its flight. a

Determine the time t and the height h (in metres) at which the drone transitions.

b

Construct a graph showing the height of the drone above sea level for the first 6 minutes of its flight.

c

Assess whether the drone’s path for these two legs could be modelled by a single linear equation instead. Justify your answer using the rates of change for each leg.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


2.04

Slopes and intercepts

After this lesson, you will be able to… • calculate slope given two points. • identify slope and x- and y-intercepts from a graph or equation. • use slopes and intercepts in practical situations.

Slope (gradient) Slope (gradient) Describes the steepness of a straight line. Rise . The rise (vertical length) and Run run (horizontal length) are calculated by forming a right-angled triangle using any two points on the line. The slope can be calculated by using the formula: Slope =

y

This line has a slope of

2 1 x

4 −3

−2

1

−1 −1

Rise 4 . Run 3

In this case, the slope is positive, because over the 3 unit increase in the x-values, the y-values have also increased. Increasing lines have positive slopes, and decreasing lines have negative slopes (as x-values increase, the y-values decrease).

−2 3

Interactive exploration

Discover this concept in action online

mathspace.co

2.04 Slopes and intercepts mathspace.co

187


• If the line goes up to the right, then it is increasing, and has positive slope.

• If the line goes down to the right, then it is decreasing, and has negative slope.

y

y x

x

• If the size (absolute value) of the slope is larger, the line will be steeper. For example, if |b| = 5:

• If the size (absolute value) of the slope is smaller, the line will be less steep. For example, if |b| = 0.3:

y

y x

x

Sometimes, a graph may not be available, in which case, coordinates may be used to determine the slope. The slope can be found by recognising that the rise and run values are related to the x- and y-values in the coordinates. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 −1 −1

y

Slope = =

Difference in y-values Difference in x-values

=

2 6 7 3

(x2, y2)

(x1, y1) 1

Rise Run

8 4 = –2 =

x

2 3 4 5 6 7

Therefore, for any two points (x1, y1) and (x2, y2), the slope can be found using the formula: Slope =

188

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

y2 y1 x2 x1


Example 1 Create a right-angled triangle and determine the slope of the line shown using points A and B. y

9 8 7 6 5

B

4 3 2 1

A

0

x 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Create a strategy Draw a right-angled triangle to find the rise and run, and then use the slope formula: Rise Slope Run

Apply the idea y

9 8 7 6 5

Using the right-angled triangle, this line has a run of 3 and a rise of 2. B 2

4 3 2 1

A

0

3

Rise Run 2 = 3

Slope =

x 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Reflect and check The line is increasing so it should have a positive slope.

2.04 Slopes and intercepts mathspace.co

189


Example 2 Determine the slope of a line that passes through the points A (3, 5) and B (– 2, 10).

Create a strategy Use the slope formula: Slope

y2 x2

y1 x1

Apply the idea Let A be coordinate 1, x1 = 3 and y1 = 5 and B be coordinate 2, x2 = –2 and y2 = 10. Slope =

y2 x2

y1 x1

10 5 2 3 5 = 5 =

Write the slope formula Substitute the coordinates Evaluate the subtraction

= –1

Simplify

Idea summary The slope (gradient), denoted as b, describes the steepness of a straight line. When given a graph, it can be calculated using the formula:

Slope =

Rise Run

Rise is the vertical length Run is the horizontal length When given any two coordinates (x1, y1) and (x2, y2), the slope can be found using the formula:

Slope =

y2 y1 x2 x1

(x1, y1) are the coordinates of the first point (x2, y2) are the coordinates of the second point

190

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Intercepts Most straight line graphs extend across the Cartesian plane and either cross the x-axis, y-axis or both, passing through the origin, (0, 0). Intercept The point where the line crosses or intersects an axis • The x-intercept is the point where the line crosses the x-axis. The coordinates of the x-intercept will always have a y-coordinate of zero. • The y-intercept, often denoted as a, is the point where the line crosses the y-axis. The coordinates of the y-intercept will always have an x-coordinate of zero. Here are some examples: y 4 3 2 1 –4 –3 –2 –1 –1 –2 –3 –4

4 3 2 1

x 1

2 3 4

–4 –3 –2 –1 –1 –2 –3 –4

x-intercept: (−3, 0); y-intercept: (0, 2)

y

x 1

2 3 4

A line passing through the origin has an intercept at (0, 0)

To calculate intercepts algebraically, use substitution. • To calculate the x-intercept, substitute y = 0 into the equation. • To calculate the y-intercept, substitute x = 0 into the equation.

Example 3 Consider this graph: 4 3 2 1 –4 –3 –2 –1 –1 –2 –3 –4

y

x 1

2 3 4

2.04 Slopes and intercepts mathspace.co

191


a Determine the x-value of the x-intercept.

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

The x-intercept is the point where the line intersects the x-axis.

The line intersects the x-axis at (3, 0). So, the x-value of the x-intercept is x = 3.

b Determine the y-value of the y-intercept.

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

The y-intercept is the point where the line intersects the y-axis.

The line intersects the y-axis at (0, 4). So, the y-value of the y-intercept is y = 4.

Example 4 A line has the equation y = – 3 + 3x: a Determine the y-value of the y-intercept.

Create a strategy Substitute x = 0 into the given equation.

Apply the idea y = –3 + 3x

Write the equation

= – 3 + (3 × 0)

Substitute x = 0

= –3

Evaluate

b Determine the x-value of the x-intercept.

Create a strategy Substitute y = 0 into the given equation.

Apply the idea y = –3 + 3x

Write the equation

0 = –3 + 3x

Substitute y = 0

3x = 3

Add 3 to both sides

x=1

Divide both sides by 3

Idea summary An intercept is the point where the line crosses or intersects an axis. • The x-intercept is the point where the line crosses the x-axis. The coordinates of the x-intercept will always have a y-coordinate of zero. • The y-intercept, denoted as a, is the point where the line crosses the y-axis. The coordinates of the y-intercept will always have an x-coordinate of zero.

192

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Interpret the slope and y-intercept In real-world problems, the slope represents a constant rate of change, while the y-intercept represents an initial or starting value. Response variable 9 8 Rate of change 7 6 5 4 3 2 Initial value 1 Explanatory variable 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 In many contextual situations, specific words or phrases will indicate what part of slope-intercept form they will represent. Often indicates the y-intercept: • Starting value • One-time fee or cost • Initial position

Often indicates slope: • Each • Per • For every • Changes over time

Example 5 A diver starts at the surface of the water and begins to descend below the surface at a constant rate. The table shows the depth of the diver, in metres, over several minutes: Time passed (min)

0

1

2

3

4

Depth (m)

0

−1.4

−2.8

−4.2

−5.6

a Identify the explanatory and response variables.

Create a strategy The value of the response variable changes based on the value of the explanatory variable.

Apply the idea

Reflect and check

How far the diver has descended depends on the amount of time passed.

The explanatory variable and response variable are often associated with consistent variables across different representations if specific variables are not listed.

The explanatory variable is time passed in minutes, and the response variable is the depth in metres.

The explanatory variable is an input, so it is associated with x. The response variable is an output, so it is associated with the variable y.

2.04 Slopes and intercepts mathspace.co

193


b Determine and interpret the slope in the situation.

Create a strategy The slope, or rate of change, is represented by the ratio

Change in y . Change in x

Apply the idea To find the slope, observe that the x-values change by 1, so to find the change in y-values, subtract the previous value from the current value, checking all pairs to make sure the rate is constant. Slope = =

Change in y Change in x y2 y1 x2 x1

Write the formula for slope as rate of change Write the slope formula

=

1.4 0 1 0

Substitute x1 = 0, y1 = 0, x2 = 1, and y2 = –1.4

=

1.4 1

Evaluate the subtraction

= – 1.4

Simplify

The slope is – 1.4, which means that the diver is descending at 1.4 metres per minute.

c Determine and interpret the y-intercept of the situation.

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

The y-intercept is represented by the pair (0, y) in a table.

The pair (0, 0) is in the table, so this is the y-intercept. This means that initially, the diver is at the surface of the water.

Idea summary Linear relationships (functions) as equations, tables, and graphs can be used to solve a variety of real-world problems. For y = a + bx: • The slope, b, will represent a rate of change. • The y-intercept, a, represents the initial or starting value (the value of y when x = 0).

194

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


2.04 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

Match each term with its definition and representation on the graph. Slope

i

The point where the line crosses or intersects with the x-axis, where y = 0. Rise The rate of change of the line, defined as the . Run

ii iii

2

b

x-intercept

c

The point where the line crosses or intersects with the y-axis, where x = 0.

2 1

y B 1 2 3 4 5 6

–2 –1 –1 –2 –3 –4 –5 –6 A

x

C

Identify what each variable represents for the equation of a line: y = a + bx: a

3

y-intercept

a

b

b

a

y-intercept

For each line segment, determine the: i

Slope

ii

a

y 4 3 2 1

b

–4 –3 –2 –1 1 –1 –2 A –3 –4

y 5 4 A 3 2 1

B x

3 4 2 3

–4 –3 –2 –1 –1 –2 –3

4

y Given the slope formula b = 2 x2 which point is (x2, y2)?

5

A line is drawn on the Cartesian plane:

1

B 2 3 4

x

y1 and two points, does it matter which point is (x1, y1) and x1

Which of these describe the relationship between the slopes of the segments? A

Slope of AB is equal to slope of AC.

B

Slope of AB is twice slope of AC.

C

Slope of AC is twice slope of AB.

y 4 C

3 2 B

1 –4 –3 –2 –1 –1

1

x

2 3 4 A

2.04 Slopes and intercepts mathspace.co

195


Practice Ex 1

6

y 16 B 12 8 4

Create a right-angled triangle and determine the slope of the line shown using points A (4, 0) and B (0, 16).

–5–4–3–2–1 –4 –8 –12 –16 7

Determine the slope, b, of these lines: a

y 4 3 2 1 –4 –3 –2 –1 –1 –2 –3 –4

c

1

b

x

5 4 3 2 1 –6–5–4–3–2–1 –1 –2 –3 –4 –5

2 3 4

y 5 4 3 2 1 –5 –4 –3 –2 –1 –1 –2 –3 –4 –5

196

A 1 2 3 4 5

d

y

x 1 2 3 4 5 6

y 4 3

x

1 2 3 4 5

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

2 1 –6–5–4–3–2–1 –1 –2

x 1 2 3 4 5 6

x


8

Is the slope of each line positive or negative? a

y 4 3 2 1 –4 –3 –2 –1 –1 –2 –3 –4

c

Ex 2

10

11

x

y

x

–4 –3 –2 –1 –1 –2 –3 –4

d 4 3 2 1

x

1

2 3 4

1

2 3 4

d

(– 6, – 6) and (6, 2)

y

x

–4 –3 –2 –1 –1 –2

2 3 4

–3 –4

i

Sketch the line that passes through the given points.

ii

Determine the slope.

a

(– 1, 3) and (0, 6)

b

(– 1, 0) and (0, – 5)

c

(2, 1) and (8, – 2)

Determine the slope of the line that passes through: a

Point A (3, – 9) and the origin

b

Point A (– 4, 0) and Point B (0, 4)

c

Point A (– 2, 4) and Point B (5, 1)

d

Point A (– 3, – 1) and Point B (– 5, 1)

e

Point A (1, – 1) and Point B (– 1, – 2)

Complete the coordinates using the points and slope provided: a c

12

1

4 3 2 1

2 3 4

y 4 3 2 1 –4 –3 –2 –1 –1 –2 –3 –4

9

1

b

(4, – 3) and (1, ⬚), slope = – 2 (5, 3) and (⬚, 63), slope = 4

b d

(5, 3) and (2, ⬚), slope = – 4

(11, ⬚) and (– 20, 16), slope =

4 7

The points A (– 11, – 9), B (– 5, 1) and C (– 2, 6) are plotted on the Cartesian plane: a

Determine the slope of AB.

b

Determine the slope of BC.

c

Do the points A, B and C lie in a straight line? Explain your answer.

2.04 Slopes and intercepts mathspace.co

197


Ex 3

13

For each graph: i

Determine the x-value of the x-intercept.

ii

Determine the y-value of the y-intercept.

a

y 3

b

2 1

x

–3 –2 –1

1

2

3

–1

–3

y 4 3 2 1 –4 –3 –2 –1 –1 –2 –3 –4

Ex 4

14

15

198

x

–2 –1 –1 –2

–2

c

y

6 5 4 3 2 1

1

1

d

2 3 4 5 6

y 1 x –2 –1 –1

x

2 3 4

1

2

3

4

5

–2 –3 –4

For each equation: i

Determine the value of the x-intercept.

ii

Determine the value of the y-intercept.

a

y = 2x – 2

b

3x + y = –3

c

y = 4x – 8

d

e

y = 9x

f

2y + 2x = 4

g

3x – 5y = 1

h

2y + x = –3 3 y 10 x= 5

A cellphone salesman earned $600 in a particular week during which he sold 26 phones and $540 in another week during which he sold 20 phones. a

What are the explanatory and response variables?

b

Determine the slope of this linear relationship.

c

Interpret the slope in the situation.

d

Determine the y-intercept.

e

Interpret the y-intercept in the situation.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Ex 5

16

The number of fish in a river is approximated over a five year period. The results are shown in the table: Time in years (t)

0

1

2

3

4

5

Number of fish (F)

4800

4600

4400

4200

4000

3800

a

Identify the explanatory and response variables.

b

Determine and interpret the slope in the situation.

c

Determine and interpret the y-intercept in the situation.

Extend your thinking 17

A line passing through the points (– 1, 4) and (– 4, t) has a slope of –3. Determine the value of t.

18

19

4 A line passes through the points (11, c) and (– 20, 16) and has a slope of . 7 Determine the value of c. Consider the ramp: a

b

20

Determine the slope of this skateboard ramp if it rises 0.9 metres above the ground and runs 1 metre horizontally at the base.

Rise

The ramp can only be classified as a ‘beginner’s ramp’ if for every 1 metre horizontal run, it has a rise of at most 0.5 metres. Can it be classified as a ‘beginner’s ramp’?

Run

A certain ski resort has two ski runs as shown in the diagram: a

Determine the slope of Run A. Round your answer to two decimal places.

b

Determine the slope of ski run B. Round your answer to two decimal places.

c

Run A

21 m 7m

Which run is steeper?

Run B

20 m 29 m 21

Gas costs a certain amount per litre. The table shows the cost of various amounts of gas in dollars: Number of litres (x)

0

10

20

30

40

Cost of gas (y)

0

15

30

45

60

Calculate, if there is any, the change someone will receive if they use a $100 bill to pay for 47 L of gas. 22

A racing car starts the race with 150 L of fuel. From there, it uses fuel at a rate of 5 L per minute. How many minutes will it take for the car to run out of fuel?

2.04 Slopes and intercepts mathspace.co

199


2.05   Sketch linear functions After this lesson, you will be able to… • sketch linear functions in slope-intercept and general forms using key features. • sketch horizontal and vertical lines. • use technology to graph and verify linear functions.

Sketch from slope-intercept form Slope-intercept is a helpful form because two key features, the slope and the y-intercept can be read off without any calculations required.

y = a + bx a is the y-intercept of the line b is the slope (gradient) of the line

Interactive exploration

Discover this concept in action online

mathspace.co

To graph a straight line, only two points are needed. These points can be determined from a linear equation in the form y = a + bx by following these steps: 1. Identify the y-intercept, a, and plot the point (0, a) on the Cartesian plane. Rise 2. Express the slope (gradient), b, as a fraction in the form: . Move from the y-intercept Run according to the rise and run values to determine the second point. 3. Draw a straight line through the two points, extending it across the graph. Alternatively, a second point can be found by substituting any non-zero value for x into the equation. To graph using technology, equations in the form y = a + bx, can be input as functions. While equations in other forms may need to be input as relations.

200

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 1 Sketch the graph of the line y = – 1 + 4x using its slope and y-intercept.

Apply the idea 1. Identify the y-intercept a, and plot the point (0, a) on the Cartesian plane. The y-intercept is at (0, – 1). Rise . Run Move from the y-intercept according to the rise and run 4 values to determine the second point. Since b 4 , 1 move 1 unit right then 4 units up from the y-intercept

2. Express the slope b as a fraction in the form:

leading to the point (1, 3). 3. Draw a straight line through the two points, extending it across the graph. Connect the points to form the line y = – 1 + 4x.

5 4 3 2 1 −5 −4 −3 −2 −1 −1 −2 −3 −4 −5

y y = 4x − 1 x 1 2 3 4 5

Reflect and check Technology can be used to verify the line’s accuracy by inputting the equation into the graphing page on a calculator and ensuring the sketched line matches.

Idea summary To graph a straight-line from a linear equation in the form y = a + bx, first plot the y-intercept (0, a), then use the slope (gradient), b, to determine a second point by moving according to the rise and run. Then, join the two points to construct a line.

Sketch using intercepts Alternatively, a linear function can be graphed by finding the x-intercept and y-intercept. The steps to graph using intercepts are: 1. Substitute x = 0, and solve for y to get the coordinates of the y-intercept: (0, y). 2. Substitute y = 0, and solve for x to get the coordinates of the x-intercept: (x, 0). 3. Plot the two points on the Cartesian plane. 4. Connect the points with a straight line. Note that for functions where the x- and y-intercepts are equal, this will result in only one point - the origin (0, 0). Another point is needed, so choose another point, say x = 1, and substitute x = 1 into the equation and solve for y to find a second point that lies on that line.

2.05 Sketch linear functions mathspace.co

201


In all forms, the strategy of setting x = 0 and then y = 0 to reveal the two intercepts can be used. • The general form is usually written as Ax + By = C. • The slope-intercept form y = a + bx where the slope of the line is given by the coefficient b and the y-intercept given by a.

Example 2 Consider the linear equation –6x + 2y – 12 = 0. a Determine the y-value at the point where x = 0.

Create a strategy Substitute x = 0 into the given equation.

Apply the idea – 6x + 2y – 12 = 0

Write the equation

– 6 (0) + 2y – 12 = 0

Substitute x = 0

2y – 12 = 0

Evaluate the multiplication

2y = 12

Add 12 to both sides

y=6

Divide both sides by 2

The coordinates of the y-intercept at (0, 6).

b Determine the x-value at the point where y = 0.

Create a strategy Substitute y = 0 into the given equation.

Apply the idea – 6x + 2y – 12 = 0

Write the equation

– 6x + 2(0) – 12 = 0

Substitute y = 0

– 6x – 12 = 0 – 6x = 12 x = –2 The coordinates of the x-intercept at (– 2, 0).

202

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

Evaluate the multiplication Add 12 to both sides Divide both sides by –6


c Use these points to graph the line.

Create a strategy Plot the points found and draw a line through them.

Apply the idea Plot the x-intercept at (– 2, 0) and the y-intercept at (0, 6). y 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 –6x + 2y – 12 = 0 1 x –4 –3 –2 –1 –1

1

2

3

4

Idea summary The x-intercept occurs at the point where y = 0. The y-intercept occurs at the point where x = 0. The x- and y-intercepts can be connected to sketch a line.

Horizontal and vertical lines y

Horizontal line A straight line that runs parallel to the x-axis on a Cartesian plane.

x

• The slope (gradient) of a horizontal line is always zero. This is because the rise is 0, so Rise 0 0. Run Run • The equation of any horizontal line is y = a, because b is zero in the equation of a line given by y = a + bx. • The x-axis is a horizontal line, and every point on it has a y-value of 0 so the equation of the x-axis is y = 0.

2.05 Sketch linear functions mathspace.co

203


y

Vertical line A straight line that runs parallel to the y-axis on a Cartesian plane.

x

• The slope of a vertical line is undefined. The run is 0, leading to division by zero for Rise Rise , which is mathematically undefined. 0 Run

• Vertical lines cannot be written in the slope-intercept form as the slope is undefined. The equation for a vertical line is written in the form x = k where k is the x-intercept of the line. • The y-axis is a vertical line, and every point on it has a x-value of 0 so the equation of the y-axis is x = 0.

Example 3 Digital only example

Explore in the online lesson

mathspace.co

Example 4 Consider the graph: a Determine the equation of the line. 4 3 2 1 –4–3–2–1 –1 –2 –3 –4

y

x 1 2 3 4

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Horizontal lines have equations of the form y = a, where a is the y-intercept.

The y-intercept of the horizontal line is 4, therefore, a = 4. The equation of the line is y = 4.

b Determine the equation of the line that is parallel to the y-axis and passes through the point (– 8, 3).

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Any line that is parallel to the y-axis is a vertical line and all vertical lines are in the form of x = k, where k is the x-coordinate of every point on the line.

The x-coordinate of the point (– 8, 3) is – 8, therefore, k = – 8.

204

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

The equation of the line is x = – 8.


Idea summary A horizontal line has a slope (gradient) of 0 with an equation of the form y = a, where a is the y-value of the y-intercept of the line. A vertical line has an undefined slope (gradient) with an equation of the form x = k, where k is the x-value of the x-intercept of the line.

2.05 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

In the equation of a line, y = a + bx, identify what the values of b and a represent.

2

Complete the statement: 2 x , plot ⬚ on the y-axis, then rise ⬚ units up and run ⬚ units to the right 3 which gives the point ⬚, then draw a line passing through the points ⬚ and (3, 6). To graph y

3

4

Match each graph to its corresponding slope description. i

y 4 3 2 1 –4 –3 –2 –1 –1 –2 –3 –4

iii

1

1

x

4 3 2 1

y

x

–4 –3 –2 –1 –1 –2 –3 –4

2 3 4

y 4 3 2 1 –4 –3 –2 –1 –1 –2 –3 –4

ii

iv

x

4 3 2 1 –4 –3 –2 –1 –1 –2 –3 –4

2 3 4

1

2 3 4

1

2 3 4

y

x

a

The slope is positive

b

The slope is negative

c

The slope is zero

d

The slope is undefined

2.05 Sketch linear functions mathspace.co

205


4

For the equation y = 5x – 2, describe how to determine the: a

Slope

b

y-intercept

c

x-intercept

Practice 5

Sketch on a Cartesian plane: a b

6 Ex 1

Sketch the graph of each equation using the slope and y-intercept: a e

7

Ex 2

8

9

10 Ex 4

y=x+1 1 y x 3 2

y = 3x – 1 3 y x 4 2

b f

y = –x + 4

d

y = – 3x – 4

g

y = – 2x

h

y=x

i

Determine the x-intercept.

ii

Determine the y-intercept.

iii

Sketch the graph of the line.

a

y = 4 – 4x

b

3x + y = – 2

c

– 3x + 2y = 12

d

3x – 5y = – 15

e

5x – 3y = – 15

f

2x + y = 10

Consider the equation y = –2x. a

Determine the y-intercept of the line.

b

Determine the x-intercept of the line.

c

Determine the value of y when x = 2.

d

Sketch the line on Cartesian plane.

c

y = –2

Sketch the lines on a Cartesian plane: y=8

x=7

b

d

y=0

Determine the equation of each line: a

y 4 3 2 1 –4 –2 –1

2

4

6

b

x 8 10

–2

206

c

For each equation:

a

Ex 3

A line with a y-intercept of – 2 and slope of – 3 3 A line with a y-intercept of 3 and slope of − 2

6 5 4 3 2 1

–3

–5 –4 –3–2 –1 –1

–4

–2

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

y

x 1 2 3 4 5


c

y 4 3 2 1 –6 –5 –4 –3 –2 –1 –1 –2 –3 –4

11

12

13

14

d 4 3 2 1

x 1

2

–3 –2 –1

y

x 1

–1 –2

2

3

–3 –4

a

What is the x-coordinate of the points (3, 2), (3, – 1) and (3, 9)?

b

Would these points lie on a horizontal line or a vertical line?

c

Determine the equation of the line that passes through these three points.

a

What is the y-coordinate of the points (3, 2), (5, 2) and (– 7, 2)?

b

Would these points lie on a horizontal line or a vertical line?

c

Determine the equation of the line that passes through these three points.

Sketch the graphs of these linear equations. Identify which strategy you used and why. a

6x + 2y = 12

b

– 20x + 5y = 40

c

y=4–x

e

x = –6

f

i

y = – 1 + 4x

j

d

y = –3

y = 2x

g

6x – 3y = – 18

k

y = – 4x

h

y – 3x = 0

– 6x + 3y = – 24

l

6y + 3x = 12

c

y=3–x

d

2x – y = 2

Use technology to graph each equation. a

y = –2 – x

b

y=1–x

Extend your thinking 15

Elisabeth and Arthur’s teacher asks them to sketch a graph that passes through the 2 point (– 1, 3) and has a slope of − . Each student sketches a different graph: 3 Elisabeth’s graph

Arthur’s graph

y y 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 x −4 −3 −2 −1 1 −4 −3 −2 −1 1 2 3 4 −1 −1

x 2 3 4

Who is correct? Why? 2.05 Sketch linear functions mathspace.co

207


The line kx + 3y = 15 passes through the point (13, – 8).

16

a

Determine the value of k.

b

Solve for the x-value of the x-intercept of the line.

c

Solve for the y-value of the y-intercept of the line.

A band plans to record a demo at a local studio. The cost of renting studio A is $250 plus $50 per hour. The cost of renting studio B is $50 plus $100 per hour.

17

The cost, y, in dollars of renting the studios for x hours can be modelled by the linear system: • Studio A: y = 250 + 50x

• Studio B: y = 50 + 100x

a

Determine the x and y-intercepts of the line y = 250 + 50x.

b

Determine the x and y-intercepts of the line y = 50 + 100x.

c

Graph the lines of the both equations on the same Cartesian plane.

d

Determine the values of x and y which satisfy both equations.

e

Explain what these x and y-values mean in context.

Neil plans to start taking an aerobics class. Non-members pay $4 per class. Members pay a $10 membership fee plus an additional $2 per class. The monthly cost, y, of taking x classes can be modelled by the linear system:

18

• Non-members: y = 4x

• Members: y = 10 + 2x

a

Graph the lines of both equations on the same Cartesian plane.

b

Determine the values of x and y which satisfy both equations.

c

Explain what these x and y-values mean in context.

2.06   Equations of straight lines After this lesson, you will be able to… • convert between different forms of linear equations ( y = a + bx and Ax + By = C). • determine the equation of a line given information (point and slope, or two points) or a graph. • write equations of lines using slope and y-intercept.

Slope-intercept form When the slope and y-intercept of a line are known, they can be substituted into the slope-intercept form of a line, y = a + bx, to write the equation of the line. This information may be given explicitly or need to be identified from a graph, so: 1. Identify the slope from graph, two points, or given information 2. Identify the y-intercept from graph or given information 3. For y = a + bx, replace a with the y-intercept and b with the slope

208

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 1 Determine the equation of the line graphed on the Cartesian plane. 7 6

y

5 4 3 2 1 −4 −3 −2 −1 −1

x 1

2 3 4

a Determine the slope of the line.

Create a strategy Determine two points on the line and use the slope formula: Slope =

y2 y1 . x2 x1

Apply the idea Identify the points A (0, 4) and B (1, 1). y2 y1 x2 x1

Write the slope formula given two points

=

1 4 1 0

Substitute the coordinates

=

3 1

Evaluate the subtraction

Slope =

= –3

Simplify

Reflect and check The same two points can be used to apply the rise over run method using the graph. Slope =

Rise Run

Write the formula for slope

=

3 1

Substitute the Rise = – 3 and Run = 1

= –3

Simplify

2.06 Equations of straight lines mathspace.co

209


b Determine the y-intercept.

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

The y-intercept is where the line crosses the y-axis.

The line crosses the y-axis at (0, 4).

c Determine the equation in slope-intercept form.

Create a strategy Substitute the values found in parts (a) and (b) into the equation y = a + bx.

Apply the idea The slope (b) is – 3 and the y-value of the y-intercept (a) is 4. y = a + bx

Write the slope-intercept form of a line

y = 4 – 3x

Substitute the values

Idea summary To find the equation of a line given the slope and y-intercept, use the slope-intercept form of a line:

y = a + bx b a

is the slope is the y-intercept

Given other information When given the slope of the line and one point that lies on that line, the equation of that line can be found by following a few simple steps: 1. Substitute the slope into the slope-intercept form of the equation y = a + bx. 2. Using the given coordinate point, substitute each x- and y-value into the equation and solve for the remaining unknown a, the y-intercept. 3. State the equation for the line This process can be streamlined using the point-slope formula: y – y1 = b (x – x1) where b is the slope and (x1, y1) is the known coordinate on the line. If using this formula, the brackets need to be expanded and y needs to be made the subject of the equation, so that the equation is displayed in its simplest slope-intercept form.

210

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


When only provided with two coordinate points from the graph, the equation can be found by using the following steps: 1. Let the given coordinates equal (x1, y1) and (x2, y2) respectively. 2. Use the coordinates of the two points to determine the slope, b

( y2 ( x2

y1 ) . x1 )

3. Substitute this value for the slope into the equation. There is now only one unknown, a. 4. Substitute the coordinates of one of the two points on the line into this new equation and solve for the unknown a, the y-intercept. 5. Substitute the values of b and a into the general equation y = a + bx to obtain the equation of the straight line.

Example 2 Given that the line y = a + bx has a slope of – 2 and passes through (– 7, 5): a Determine a, the value of the y-intercept of the line.

Create a strategy Use the slope-intercept form y = a + bx and substitute the given values.

Apply the idea y = a + bx a + bx = y a + (– 2) × (– 7) = 5 a + 14 = 5 a = –9

Write the slope-intercept form Swap the sides Substitute b = – 2, x = – 7, and y = 5 Simplify Subtract 14 from both sides

b Determine the equation of the line in the form y = a + bx.

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Substitute the slope and the value of a found from part (a) into y = a + bx.

y = –9 – 2x

Reflect and check The point-slope formula, y – y1 = b (x – x1), can also be used to find the equation of the line. y – y1 = b (x – x1)

Write the point-slope formula

y – 5 = –2 (x– (– 7))

Substitute x1 = – 7, y1 = 5, and b = – 2

y – 5 = –2 (x + 7)

Evaluate the adjacent signs

y – 5 = – 2x – 14

Expand the brackets

y = – 2x – 9

Add 5 to both sides

y = – 9 – 2x

Rewrite in the form y = a + bx

2.06 Equations of straight lines mathspace.co

211


Example 3 A line passes through the points (3, – 5) and (– 7, 2). a Determine the slope (gradient) of the line.

Create a strategy Substitute the given two points into the slope formula.

Apply the idea Let x1 = 3, y1 = – 5, x2 = – 7 and y2 = 2. b

y2 x2

y1 x1

Write the slope formula

2 (–5)

Substitute the coordinates

7 3 7 10

Evaluate

b Determine the equation of the line by substituting the slope and one point into y – y1 = b (x – x1).

Apply the idea Let (– 7, 2) be one point and from part (a), b y – y1 = b(x – x1)

7 . 10 Write the point-slope formula

y–2=

7 (x – (–7)) 10

Substitute x1 = –7, y1 = 2, and b

y–2=

7 (x +7) 10

Evaluate the adjacent signs

y–2=

7 49 x 10 10

Expand the brackets

y=

7 29 x 10 10

Add 2 to both sides

y=

29 10

Rewrite as y = a + bx

7 x 10

Reflect and check This can also be written as y

212

29 7 x . 10

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

7 10


Idea summary When given the slope of the line and one point that lies on that line, use these steps: 1. Substitute the slope into the slope-intercept form of the equation y = a + bx. 2. Using the given coordinate point, substitute each x- and y-value into the equation and solve for the remaining unknown a, the y-intercept. 3. State the equation for the line The equation of a line can also be found given the slope and a point by using the point-slope formula:

y – y1 = b(x – x1) b is the slope (x1, y1) are the coordinates of the given point The slope may also need to be found using the formula if it is not given: b

( y2 ( x2

y1 ) x1 )

General form The general form of a linear relationship is a way of writing the equation with all of the variables on one side where:

Ax + By = C A, B, C are integers The equation is typically written with a positive value for A. Equations in the form y = a + bx, can be input as functions into technology, while equations in other forms may need to be input as relations. Standard form can be converted to slope-intercept form, using the solve function on a graphing calculator. Often something like, solve (ax + by = c, y).

2.06 Equations of straight lines mathspace.co

213


Example 4 A line with a slope of

1 passes through the point (– 8, 5). 4

a Express the equation of the line in slope-intercept form.

Create a strategy Use the slope and the point to solve for the y-intercept and write in slope-intercept form.

Apply the idea y = a + bx 1 5= (–8) + b 4

Write the slope-intercept form 1 Substitute y = 5, b , and x = – 8 4

5=2+b 3=b

Evaluate the multiplication Subtract 2 from both sides

y=

1 x 3 4

Write in slope-intercept form

b Convert this equation to standard form.

Create a strategy Rearrange the terms and multiply coefficients as needed to fit standard form.

Apply the idea 1 x 4 1 x 4×y=4 3 4 y=3

4y = 12 – x

Write the equation from part (a) Multiply both sides by 4 Evaluate

x + 4y = 12 Move the x term to the other side of the equation. The standard form of the equation is x + 4y = 12

c Determine the x-intercept and y-intercept using the standard form equation.

Create a strategy Substitute y = 0 to find the x-intercept, (x, 0), and substitute x = 0 to find the y-intercept, (0, y).

214

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Apply the idea Finding the x-intercept: x + 4y = 12 x + 4 (0) = 12 x + 0 = 12 x = 12

Write the standard form equation from part (b) Substitute y = 0 Evaluate the multiplication Simplify

The x-intercept is (12, 0). Finding the y-intercept: x + 4y = 12

Write the standard form equation from part (b)

(0) + 4y = 12

Substitute x = 0

4y = 12

Evaluate the addition

y=3

Simplify

The y-intercept is (0, 3).

Example 5 Consider the line shown in the graph below. 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 −1

−1

y

x 1

2

3

4

Express the equation of the line in standard form.

Create a strategy Write the equation in slope-intercept form y = a + bx, then convert it to standard form Ax + By = C where A, B, and C are integers.

2.06 Equations of straight lines mathspace.co

215


Apply the idea First, find the slope (b) of the line. b

y2 x2

y1 x1

Write the formula

4 1 0 2

Substitute y2 = 4, y1 = 1, x2 = 0 and x1 = 2

3 2

Evaluate the subtraction

3 2

Simplify

3 The slope of the line is . 2 Now, identify the y-intercept (a) from the given graph. From the graph, the line passes through the point (0, 4). Therefore, the y-intercept (a) is 4. Substitute the slope and the y-intercept into the slope-intercept form: y = a + bx y

4

Write the slope-intercept form

3 x 2

Substitute b

3 and a = 4 2

Then, convert the slope-intercept form to standard form: y=4

3 x 2

y×2= 4

3 x 2

2y = 8 – 3x

Write the equation 2

Multiply both sides by 2 Evaluate the multiplication

2y + 3x = 8

Add 3x to both sides

3x + 2y = 8

Rearrange to standard form

The equation of the line in standard form is 3x + 2y = 8.

Reflect and check To confirm our equation, check the intercepts: For the x-intercept, set y = 0: 3x + 2(0) = 8 3x = 8 8 x= 3 The x-intercept is

216

Substitute y = 0 Evaluate the multiplication Divide both sides by 3

8 , 0 . 3

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


For the y-intercept, set x = 0: 3(0) + 2y = 8

Substitute x = 0

2y = 8 y=4

Evaluate the multiplication Divide both sides by 2

The y-intercept is (0, 4). These intercepts match the points given in the original problem, confirming that the equation 3x + 2y = 8 is correct.

Idea summary The general form of a linear relationship is:

Ax + By = C A, B, C are integers To write the equation of the line in standard form, follow these steps: 1. Use the given information to write the equation in slope-intercept form, y = a + bx. 2. If b is a fraction, multiply each term in the equation by the denominator of b. 3. Move the x term to the y side of the equation. Standard form is useful when both intercepts of the line are known or need to be determined.

2.06 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

Determine whether each equation is written in slope-intercept form, standard form, or neither: 1 x 14 7 y a 3x + 2y = 6 b y = –x + 1 c d 18x – 6y = 12 2

2

Express each equation in slope-intercept form: a

y = 5 – 4x

b

y – 1 = 5 (x – 4)

c

3x – 2y = – 4

d

y + 7 = – 3x

2.06 Equations of straight lines mathspace.co

217


3

Consider the graph of each linear function. i

Determine the slope.

ii

a

y 4 3 2 1

b

–4 –3 –2 –1 –1 –2 –3 –4

4

For the linear function y

1

2 3 4

4

–4 –3 –2 –1 –1 –2 –3 –4

y

x 1

2 3 4

3 x, determine if each statement is true or false: 2

a

The slope is 4.

b

The y-intercept is 4.

c

The equation 3x + 2y = 8 will have the same graph.

d

The graph can be drawn by plotting (0, 4), then going down 3 units and right 2 units to plot a new point, then connecting the points.

e

This is its graph:

–4 –3 –2 –1 –1 –2 –3 –4

y

x 1

2 3 4

Determine the equation in slope-intercept form of: a

A line whose slope is − 8 and crosses the y-axis at – 9.

b

A line with slope – 3 and its y intercept is – 2. 3 A line which has a slope of , and cuts the y-axis at – 1. 4 2 A line which has slope of and goes through the point (0, 3). 3

c d e f

218

4 3 2 1

x

4 3 2 1

5

Determine the y-intercept.

A line that has the same slope as y = 7 – 3x and the same y-intercept as y = – 8 – 7x. 3 A straight line passing through the point 0, with slope 2. 4

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Practice Ex 1

6

Consider the line graph: a

Determine the y-intercept.

b

Determine the slope.

c

Determine the equation in slope-intercept form.

y

6 5 4 3 2 1

x

–6 –5 –4 –3 –2 –1 –1 –2 –3 –4 –5 –6 7

1 2 3 4 5 6

Determine the equation of the line in slope-intercept form. a

y 6 5 4 3 2 1 –1

c

1

–1 –2

2

b 2 1

x –2

1

2

–1

3 –2

1

–1 –2

x 1

y

d

1 –1

–1

x

y 2

–2

y

2

x –1

1

2

3

4

5

–1 –2

–3 –4

–3

2.06 Equations of straight lines mathspace.co

219


Ex 2

8

9

Ex 3

Ex 4

10

11

12

13

220

For each line: i

Determine the y-intercept.

a

A line which has a slope of – 2 and passes through (– 6, – 3).

b

A line passes through Point A (8, 2) and has a slope of 2.

ii

Express the equation in slope-intercept form.

Given the following points and slopes, use the point-slope formula to express the equation of the line in slope-intercept form. 5 2

a

Point A (– 4, 3), and slope – 9

b

Point A (8, 1), and slope

c

Point A

5 , 7 , and slope 7 9

d

Point A (– 4, 5), and slope 3

1 2

For each pair of points: i

Determine the slope of the line that passes through the points.

ii

Determine the equation of this line.

a

(0, – 3) and (1, 4)

b

(0, – 6) and (6, – 48)

c

(0, 4) and (2, 5)

d

(0, 3) and (4, 2)

e

(0, 1) and (3, 1)

f

(– 5, 1) and (2, – 34)

A line has a slope of – 2 and passes through the point

6,

4 . 3

a

Express the equation of the line in slope-intercept form.

b

Determine the equation of the line in standard form.

c

Determine the x-intercept and y-intercept using the standard form equation.

Consider the line with equation 2x – 3y = – 10. a

Determine the x-intercept of the line.

b

Determine the standard form equation of the line that passes through (7, 10) and the x-intercept of 2x – 3y = – 10.

Consider the line with equation 2x + y = 8. a

Determine the x-intercept of the line.

b

Determine the equation of a line with a slope of – 4 that passes through the x-intercept of the original line.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Ex 5

14

For each graph, write the equation of the line in standard form. a

y 4 3 2 1 −4 −3 −2 −1 −1 −2 −3 −4

c

15

x

y

x

–4 –3 –2 –1 –1

1

2 3

4

1

2 3 4

–2 –3 –4

1

d

1

4 3 2 1

x 2 3 4

y 4 3 2 1 –4 –3 –2 –1 –1 –2 –3 –4

4 3 2 1

2 3 4

y 4 3 2 1 −4 −3 −2 −1 −1 −2 −3 −4

e

1

b

y

x

−4 −3 −2 −1 −1 −2 −3 −4 f

4 3 2 1

x

−4 −3 −2 −1 −1 −2 −3 −4

2 3 4

y

x 1

2 3 4

A line which goes through the points (0, 6) and (0, 8). a

Determine the slope of the line.

b

Determine the equation of the line.

Extend your thinking 16

Create a scenario where you would choose to use each of the following forms and explain why you would use that form over the others: a

Point-slope form, (y – y1) = b (x – x1)

c

Standard form, Ax + By = C

b

Slope-intercept form, y = a + bx

2.06 Equations of straight lines mathspace.co

221


17

18

19

The line ax + 4y = 12 passes through the point (8, – 3). a

Solve for a.

b

Write the equation of the line in standard form.

The line kx + 3y = 15 passes through the point (13, – 8). a

Determine the value of k.

b

Solve for the x-value of the x-intercept of the line.

c

Solve for the y-value of the y-intercept of the line.

Given: • Line A: 5x + 3y + 5 = 0 • Line B: 7x + 6y – 3 = 0 Which line is steeper? Justify your answer.

20

Sally receives an order to make key chains for an upcoming festival. She is told to make at least 50 and at most 100 key chains, and will be paid $8 for each key chain she makes. Sally makes 80 key chains and is paid $665 altogether. a

Let x represent the number of key chains Sally makes and y represent the amount she is paid. Write an equation in point-slope form relating x and y.

b Convert the equation from part (a) to slope-intercept form. c

Interpret the y-intercept in the context of the problem.

d Explain whether the equation can be used in part (a) to predict the amount paid for 10 key chains. 21

Paige is planning an event and the brochure for the caterer at the venue shows the following formulas for the meal costs. Point-slope form: y – 500 = 12.5 (x – 10) Slope-intercept form: y = 12.5x + 375 Compare and contrast the information presented by each equation.

Investigation: Filling a pool

Investigate online

mathspace.co

Chapter 2 review

Online review

222

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

mathspace.co


“The essence of mathematics is not to make simple things complicated, but to make complicated things simple.” – Stanley Gudder


Big ideas • Linear equations serve as powerful models for representing and analysing real-world situations involving a constant rate of change. • Systems of simultaneous linear equations are used to model and solve problems involving two unknown variables, with solutions found at the point where their graphical representations intersect. • Piecewise and step functions extend linear modelling to situations where the rate of change is not constant, allowing for the representation of relationships that vary across different intervals.

3 Linear applications Chapter outline 3.01 3.02 3.03 3.04 3.05 3.06

Linear models Investigation: Intersection of lines Graphical simultaneous equations Algebraic simultaneous equations Applications of simultaneous equations Piecewise functions Step graphs Chapter 3 review

226 237 247 256 262 276


Step graphs resemble staircases, jumping from one level to another.


3.01

Linear models After this lesson, you will be able to… • develop linear models from practical situations. • specify appropriate domains for linear models. • use linear models to make predictions within the domain. • interpret slope and vertical intercept of linear models in context.

Linear models In a straight-line equation, variables often represent physical quantities like time, distance, cost, mass, or temperature. Instead of x and y, more relevant symbols may be used. In linear modelling situations: • The explanatory variable or independent variable goes on the horizontal axis. • The response variable or dependent variable goes on the vertical axis. • The vertical (y-) intercept represents the initial value. Keywords include: • Starting value • One-time fee or cost • Initial position • The slope or gradient represents the rate of change. Keywords include: • Each • Per • For every • Changes over time • The domain is the interval of values the x-variable can take. The units of the slope are: Units of response variable (y) Units of explanatory variable (x ) rise can be interpreted as: run “The (response variable, y) increases/decreases by (rise) (units) for every (run) (units) of the (explanatory variable, x).” The slope

The equation y = a + bx has a fixed or constant component of a and a variable component of bx.

226

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Distance travelled by helicopter 1365 Distance from base (D) km 1260 Vertical intercept 1155 1050 945 840 Rate of change 735 630 525 420 315 210 105 Time (t) H 0

1

2

3

4

5

In this case: • The explanatory variable is time in hours. • The response variable is distance from base in kilometres. • The initial distance from the base is 1260 km • The unit of the slope is km/h • The slope can be interpreted as: “The distance from the base decreases by 315 km every 1 hour” or “The helicopter is flying back to the base at 315 km/h.” • The domain where this model is applicable is 0 ≤ t ≤ 4

Example 1 Digital only example

Explore in the online lesson

mathspace.co

Example 2 The graph shows the amount of water remaining in a bucket that was initially full before a hole was made in its side: 36 32 28 24 20 16 12 8 4

Volume of water (litres)

Time (minutes) 0 4 8 12 16 2024 28 32 36

a Determine and interpret the slope of the function.

Create a strategy The slope of a linear function represents its rate of change. It can be determined by calculating the ratio of the ‘rise’ (vertical change) to the ‘run’ (horizontal change) between any two points on the line.

3.01 Linear models mathspace.co

227


Apply the idea 36 32 28 24 20 16 12 8 4

Volume of water (litres)

From the graph, two points on the line are identified: the starting point at (0, 34) and the point at 12 minutes, (12, 28). The ‘rise’ is the vertical change in the volume of water between the two points. So, rise = 28 – 34 = − 6 Time (minutes) 0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36

The ‘run’ is the horizontal change in time between the two points: run = 12 – 0 = 12 b=

rise run

Write the slope formula

=

6 12

Substitute rise = – 6 and run = 12

1L 2 minutes

Evaluate

=

This means that 1 litre of water is lost every 2 minutes.

Reflect and check This can also be interpreted that for every 1 minute that passes, the bucket loses

1 a litre of water. 2

b Determine and interpret the vertical intercept.

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

The vertical intercept is the value at which the line crosses the vertical axis or when the explanatory variable is zero (t = 0).

Looking at the graph, the line touches the vertical axis at 34. In context, this means that initially, there were 34 litres of water in the bucket.

c Determine an equation to represent the amount of water remaining in the bucket, w, as a function of time, t.

Create a strategy Use the form y = a + bx, where the slope from part (a) and vertical intercept from part (b) are known.

228

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Apply the idea From parts (a) and (b), the slope is

1 and vertical intercept is 34. Using the given variables: 2 1 w 34 t 2

which can also be written as w

34

t 2

d Determine when the bucket is empty.

Create a strategy Set the volume w to 0 in the equation to represent the bucket being empty.

Apply the idea w = 34

t 2

Write the equation from part (c)

0 = 34

t 2

Substitute w = 0

t = 34 2

Add

t to both sides 2

t = 68

Multiply both sides by 2

The bucket is empty after 68 minutes or 1 hour and 8 minutes.

e Determine the domain.

Create a strategy The domain is the interval of values the explanatory variable can take in the context of this scenario.

Apply the idea The linear function is defined from the time when the bucket starts draining (0 minutes) until it is completely empty (68 minutes). Therefore, the domain is 0 ≤ t ≤ 68.

Reflect and check There might be a misconception that the domain could extend beyond 68 minutes because, theoretically, time continues. However, the linear function represented by this graph only models the scenario up to the point where the bucket is empty. Beyond this, the function does not describe the situation accurately since the volume of water cannot be negative, and the linear relationship ends.

3.01 Linear models mathspace.co

229


Example 3 A carpenter charges a callout fee of $150 plus $45 per hour. a Determine a linear equation to represent the total amount, y, charged by the carpenter as a function of the number of hours worked, x.

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

The slope, b, represents a repeated change as x increases. The y-intercept, a, represents an initial value or constant value that is added once.

A callout fee is a one-time fee that is added to the charge. This value of $150 is a, the y-intercept. A charge of $45 per hour is applied as the number of hours increases. This value is the slope, b.

The slope-intercept form of a linear equation, y = a + bx, will use this rate of change, b, and constant, a, to write the equation.

y = a + bx Write the equation in slope-intercept form y = 150 + 45x Substitute b = 45 and a = 150 The equation is y = 150 + 45x.

b Use the function to complete the table shown. Use the table to determine the total amount charged by the carpenter for 6 hours of work. Hours

0

2

4

6

8

Total amount charged ($)

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

Create a strategy Use the equation from part (a), y = 150 + 45x, and substitute and evaluate the values of x. Using technology such as a spreadsheet or CAS calculator is also an efficient way to do the substitution if available.

Apply the idea Each value of x from the table will be used as an input to the equation and evaluated. $150 = $150 + $45 × 0

Substitute x = 0 and evaluate

$240 = $150 + $45 × 2

Substitute x = 2 and evaluate

$330 = $150 + $45 × 4

Substitute x = 4 and evaluate

$420 = $150 + $45 × 6

Substitute x = 6 and evaluate

$510 = $150 + $45 × 8

Substitute x = 8 and evaluate

Pairing each input with its output in the table: Hours

0

2

4

6

8

Total amount charged ($)

150

240

330

420

510

For 6 hours of work, the total amount charged will be $420.

230

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Reflect and check Total amount charged ($) 500 (8, 150) 450 (6, 420) 400 350 (4, 330) 300 250 (2, 240) 200 150 (0, 150) 100 50 Hours 0 2 4 6 8

The table can also be completed by graphing the function in the Cartesian plane using the equation y = 150 + 45x and finding the y-values paired with the x-values.

Idea summary In linear modelling situations: • • • • •

The vertical y-intercept represents the initial value. The slope represents the rate of change. The explanatory variable goes on the horizontal axis. The response variable goes on the vertical axis. The domain is the interval of values the x-variable can take.

3.01 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

2

Consider the points presented in the table: Time in minutes (x)

1

2

3

4

5

Temperature in °C (y)

8

13

18

23

28

a

What are the explanatory and response variables?

b

By how much does the temperature increase each minute?

c

What would the temperature have been at time 0?

The equation y = 85 + 25x represents the total manufacturing cost, y, as a function of the number of plastic chairs manufactured, x: a

Determine the slope of the relationship.

b

Determine the y-intercept of the function.

3.01 Linear models mathspace.co

231


3

The graph shows the temperature of a room after the heater has been turned off: a

Determine the slope of the line.

b

Determine the y-intercept.

c

Determine the temperature of the room 16 minutes after the heater was turned off.

26 Temp (°C) 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2

Time (mins) 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18

Practice 4 Ex 1

Ex 2

5

The cost of a taxi ride is given by C = 3 + 5.5t, where t is the duration of the trip in minutes: a

Interpret the equation in terms of the context.

b

If the taxi passenger has $80, what is the maximum time they could afford?

The graph shows the temperature of a room after the heater has been turned on. a b c d e

6

232

Determine an equation to represent the temperature Temperature (°C) 9 of the room, T, as a function of time, t. 8 Calculate and interpret the slope of the function. 7 Determine and interpret the y-intercept. 6 The heater is turned off when the temperature 5 reaches 21°C, determine when this happens. 4 Determine the domain. 3 2 1 Time (minutes) 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20

The graph shows the amount of money Iain earns from his job as a librarian, given the number of hours he worked that week. a

How much does Iain earn per hour?

b

How much would Iain be paid if he worked 4 hours?

c

How long does Iain need to work to get paid $120?

d

Determine the equation of the line that represents the amount of money earned, y, in terms of the number of hours worked, x.

e

Using the equation, determine the amount he would be paid for 32 hours.

f

How many hours does he have to work to earn $260?

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

200 Salary ($) 180 160 140 120 100 80 60 40 20

Hours 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10


Ex 3

7

8

Mae’s heart rate is initially 49 beats per minute. After Mae starts running, her heart rate increases at a constant rate of 3 beats per minute. a

Determine an equation that describes the relationship between the number of minutes passed (x) and Mae’s heart rate (y).

b

Complete the following table:

10

0

2

4

6

8

10

12

Heart rate (y)

49

⬚

⬚ ⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

Number of minutes passed (x)

0

5

10

15

20

Amount of fuel left in the tank (y)

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

A racing car starts the race with 150 L of fuel. From there, it uses fuel at a rate of 5 L per minute. a

9

Number of minutes passed (x)

Complete the following table of values:

b

Determine an algebraic relationship linking the number of minutes passed (x) and the amount of fuel left in the tank (y).

c

How many minutes will it take for the car to run out of fuel?

Emily sells cooking accessories. Her company pays her $300 per week plus a commission of 4% on her weekly sales. a

In her first week, she sells $3200. How much would she get paid?

b

Complete the following table of values: Weekly sales ($)

0

10 000

20 000

30 000

Weekly pay ($)

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

c

Determine an equation that relates her weekly pay (P) to her weekly sales (S).

d

Interpret the slope and y-intercept of the equation.

e

Use the equation to plot a linear graph representing the scenario.

A car travels at an average speed of 75 km per hour away from home. a

Construct an equation to represent the distance travelled in kilometres, D, away from home after t hours.

b

Describe what the slope of the line represents in this context.

c

The vehicle has enough petrol to drive a distance of 465 km. Determine the value of t, the time it takes in hours for the car to travel a distance of 465 km away from home.

d

By considering the context, determine the domain of the equation.

e

If the car is initially 15 km away from home, construct another equation to represent the distance travelled in kilometres, D, from home after t hours.

3.01 Linear models mathspace.co

233


11

12

13

14

15

234

The number of fish in a river is approximately declining at a rate of 200 fish per year. a

If there are initially 4000 fish in the river, construct an equation to represent the amount of fish, F, in the river after t years.

b

Describe what the slope of the line represents in this context.

c

Determine the value of t, the time it takes in years for the population of fish in the river to reach zero.

d

By considering the context, determine the domain of the equation.

e

If there are initially 2400 fish in the river, construct another equation to represent the amount of fish, F, in the river after t years.

Amy is taking her new car out for a drive. She has only driven 50 km in it previously and is now driving it down the highway at 60 km/h. a

Construct an equation to represent the total distance travelled by the car in kilometres, D, after t hours of driving down the highway.

b

Describe what the slope of the line represents in context.

c

The car reaches its destination along the highway. The total distance covered by the car at this point is 140 km. Determine the value of t, the time it takes in hours for the car to reach its destination.

d

By considering the context, determine the domain of the equation.

e

If the car had previously driven 90 km instead, construct another equation to represent the total distance travelled in kilometres, D, after t hours down the highway.

Glen is running a 180 km ultramarathon at an average speed of 9 km/h. a

Construct an equation to represent the total distance travelled by Glen in kilometres, D, after t hours of running in the ultramarathon.

b

Describe what the slope of the line represents in context.

c

Determine the value of t, the time it takes in hours for Glen to reach the halfway point.

d

By considering the context, determine the domain of the equation.

e

Construct another equation to represent the total distance travelled in kilometres, D, t hours after reaching the halfway mark.

Rosey earns an hourly wage of $17.40. a

Sketch the graph of her total wages against the number of hours worked.

b

Determine the slope of the line.

c

Express y, Rosey’s total wages, in terms of x, the number of hours worked.

d

Determine her total wages if she works a total of 25 hours.

e

Determine the number of hours she must work to earn $696.00.

The variable cost of running a business is $110 an hour. a

Sketch the graph that depicts the total variable cost (y) against time (t) in hours.

b

Calculate the slope of the line.

c

Express y in terms of t.

d

Determine the total variable cost if the business operates for a total of 26 hours.

e

Determine the number of hours the business has operated for if it incurs total variable costs of $3960.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


16

17

A carpenter charges a callout fee of $150 plus $45 per hour. a

Construct an equation to represent the total cost incurred in dollars, C, after t hours worth of work.

b

Describe what the slope of the line represents in context.

c

Determine the value of t, the time it takes in hours for the carpenter to complete a job that earns $285.

d

Determine the domain of the equation, if the maximum earned from a single job is $285.

e

Construct another equation to represent the total cost in dollars, C, after t hours worth of work if the callout fee was instead $60.

Beth’s income is based solely on the number of hours she works, and she is paid a fixed hourly wage. She earns $750 for working 30 hours. a

Sketch the graph that depicts her income (y), against her hours worked (x).

b

Calculate the amount Beth earns each hour.

c

Determine an equation relating x and y.

d

Determine Beth’s income when she works 25 hours.

e

How many hours must Beth work if she wants to earn $125?

Extend your thinking 18

The number of university students studying computer science in a particular country is modelled by a linear equation. In the year 2004, there were 12 000 students, then in the year 2025 there were 14 688 students. Determine an equation that can be used to model this scenario. Clearly define the variables used.

19

A small business owner leases a coffee machine for a fixed weekly fee of $120 plus a variable cost of $0.50 per coffee sold. The owner sells each coffee for $4.50.

y 180 160 140 C 120 100 80 60 40 20

a

Develop linear models for the weekly cost C and weekly revenue R as functions of the number of coffees sold, n.

b

Interpret the slope and y-intercept of the cost model in the context of the business.

c

Determine the minimum number of coffees that x must be sold in a week to make a profit, and 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 specify the domain for the cost and revenue models, assuming a maximum capacity of 2000 coffees per week.

R

3.01 Linear models mathspace.co

235


20

21

22

A delivery company operates two vans. Van A has a fixed daily cost of $80 and a fuel cost of $0.30 per kilometre. Van B has a fixed daily cost of $50 and a fuel cost of $0.40 per kilometre. The company charges $2 per kilometre for deliveries. a

Construct linear models for the daily cost of operating each van, CA and CB, and the daily revenue R, as functions of the distance travelled, d, in kilometres.

b

Determine the range of distances for which Van A is cheaper to operate than Van B, and specify the domain for the models, assuming a maximum daily distance of 500 kilometres.

c

Predict the profit for a day when Van A travels 250 kilometres, and interpret the slope of the revenue model.

A farmer is planning to fence a rectangular paddock. One length and one adjacent width will be fenced with premium fencing, which costs $15 per metre. The other length and width will be fenced with standard fencing, which costs $10 per metre. The paddock’s length is l metres, and its width is w metres, with a total budget of $2500. a

Develop a linear model for the total cost C of fencing the paddock in terms of l and w, and interpret the coefficients.

b

Given the budget constraint, express w in terms of l, and specify the domain if the paddock’s perimeter must be at least 100 metres.

c

If the farmer sets the length to 60 metres, predict the width and the total area of the paddock, and verify if the perimeter constraint is satisfied.

The two entertainment options for the school holidays are movies and roller skating. • Movies, m, cost $12 each • Roller skating, r, costs $21 per session a

If Isabel’s maximum budget for these activities on the school holidays is $150, create an equation to model the scenario.

b

Would going to 10 movies and 3 roller skating sessions be within her $150 budget?

c

Would going to 3 movies and 5 roller skating sessions be within her $150 budget?

d

Sketch the linear relationship.

e

Shade the region of the graph containing all points that are under budget.

Investigation: Intersection of lines

Investigate online

236

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

mathspace.co


3.02   Graphical simultaneous equations After this lesson, you will be able to… • graph pairs of linear equations using technology. • solve linear equations graphically. • interpret solutions of simultaneous equations graphically in context.

Graphical method Simultaneous linear equations A set of two or more linear equations that share the same variables, for which a common solution is sought. To determine the solution of simultaneous equations, find the variable values that satisfy all equations. y 8 y=x+1

6 4 2 −4 −2 −2 −4

2

Graphically, the solution to a pair of simultaneous linear equations is the point where their lines intersect on a Cartesian plane.

x

To determine this solution, plot both lines on the same Cartesian plane and identify their intersection point.

5 13 y = – –x + — 4 4 x 2 4 6 8

If the lines have the same slope but are different, they will be parallel and will have no point of intersection, meaning there is no solution.

4

6

8

y = 2x – 1

y 8 6 4 2 −8 −6 −4 −2 −2 −4 5x + 4y = –20 −6 −8

3.02 Graphical simultaneous equations mathspace.co

237


y 8 6 4 2 –4 –2 –2 –4 –6 –8

6x – 3y = 12 x 2 4 6 8 2x – y = 4

If the lines have the same slope and are the same line, there are infinitely many solutions.

Example 1 Digital only example

Explore in the online lesson

mathspace.co

Example 2 Consider the simultaneous linear equations: y = 5x − 7 y = −x + 5 a Plot the two lines on the same Cartesian plane.

Create a strategy Use the slope (b) and y-intercept, (a) from the equations to plot the lines.

Apply the idea

8 6 4 2 −4 −3 −2 −1 −2 −4 −6 −8

238

y For the line y = 5x − 7, b = 5 and a = − 7: 1. Plot the y-intercept, (0, − 7). x 1

2 3 4

y = 5x – 7

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

2.  Use the slope of 5 to find another point by moving right 1 unit and up 5 units, which is the point (1, − 2). 3. Connect the points with a straight line.


8 6 4 2

y y = –x + 5

For the line y = − x + 5, b = − 1 and a = 5: 1. Plot the y-intercept, (0, 5). x

2.  Use the slope of − 1 to find another point by moving 1 unit to the right and 1 unit downwards, which is the point (1, 4).

1 2 3 4 5 −5 −4 −3 −2−1 −2 −4 −6 y = 5x – 7 −8

3. Connect the points with a straight line.

b Determine the point of intersection of the two lines.

Create a strategy Use the graph to identify the point of intersection.

Apply the idea

8 6 4 2

y y = –x + 5

1 2 3 4 5 −5 −4 −3 −2−1 −2 −4 −6 y = 5x – 7 −8

x

The point of intersection is at (2, 3).

c Determine the solution to the simultaneous equations: y = 5x − 7 y = −x + 5

Create a strategy The point of intersection is the solution that satisfies both equations simultaneously.

3.02 Graphical simultaneous equations mathspace.co

239


Apply the idea The x- and y-coordinates represent the values of the variables that satisfy both equations. Therefore, the solution to the simultaneous linear equations is the point of intersection, (2, 3).

Reflect and check Substitute the x- and y-coordinates into the equations and evaluate to check that they satisfy both equations. y = 5x − 7

Write the equation

3 = 5 (2) − 7

Substitute the values

3 = 10 − 7

Evaluate the multiplication

3=3

Evaluate

y = −x + 5

Write the equation

3 = − (2) + 5

Substitute the values

3=3

Evaluate

Example 3 Tyson is saving money in order to purchase a new smartphone for $800 when the latest model is released. He currently has $350 saved up and is able to put away $100 each month. a Express the situation using simultaneous linear equations.

Create a strategy To write simultaneous equations, first define some variables. Then, write two separate equations using the given information.

Apply the idea Let y represent the amount of money (in dollars). Let x represent the number of months that have passed. Using these variables, the amount of money Tyson has saved over time can be represented by: y = 350 + 100x The price of the smartphone can be represented by: y = 800

240

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


b Sketch the two lines representing these equations on the Cartesian plane.

Create a strategy Draw the graph using technology or by hand. Use key features of the two linear equations to determine an appropriate scale or zoom.

Apply the idea Tyson’s cell phone savings 900 800 700 600 500 400 300 200 100

Amount of money Also, both x and y only make sense for positive values in this context, so only the top right quadrant is needed. The y-intercepts of the two linear equations are $350 and $800, so an appropriate scale would go up to at least $1000. The points of intersection should be visible.

0 1

Time (months) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

c If the new phone is to be released in 5 months’ time, determine if Tyson will be able to afford it on release.

Apply the idea Tyson’s cell phone savings 900 800 700 600 500 400 300 200 100

Amount of money

0 1

The point of intersection on the graph occurs at (4.5, 800), meaning that in 4.5 months, Tyson will have saved $800. Therefore, Tyson will have saved enough money before the phone is released.

Time (months) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Reflect and check While the model equation of Tyson’s savings is linear, in reality, he probably puts money away once per month or once per week, depending on how often he gets paid. So, although the point of intersection is at x = 4.5 months, Tyson will likely reach $800 in savings by the end of the 5th month.

3.02 Graphical simultaneous equations mathspace.co

241


Idea summary A system of simultaneous linear equations involves finding a common solution that satisfies all equations. Graphically, the number of solutions corresponds to the number of intersection points between the lines. • One solution exists when the lines intersect at a single point. • No solution exists when the lines are parallel and distinct, as they never intersect. • Infinitely many solutions exist when the equations represent the exact same line.

Solve simultaneous equations with technology Technology can be utilised in two different ways to solve a system of linear equations. 1. A graphical approach would be to use technology to graph both linear equations on the same set of axes, then use the intersection tool to find the point of intersection. 2. The system of equations can be entered algebraically, then a solve function can be used to find the point of intersection without graphing.

Example 4 Consider the system of equations: Equation 1 : 3x − 1.6y = 5.9 Equation 2 : 0.45x + 0.7y = − 0.02 Solve the system of linear equations using technology, leaving the answer as a pair of coordinates, rounded to 2 decimal places.

Create a strategy Using technology, such as a CAS calculator, input equations into the relevant solve function and evaluate.

Apply the idea Using technology, the coordinates of the point of intersection for the two lines in this system is given by: (1.45, − 0.96)

Idea summary Technology can be utilised in two different ways to solve a system of simultaneous linear equations: graphically and algebraically.

242

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


3.02 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

Describe how the graphical solution of a system of two linear equations is found.

2

What do the coordinates of the point of intersection of two straight lines on a graph represent?

3

The graph displays simultaneous linear equations:

6 5 4 3 2 1

How many solutions does this system of simultaneous linear equations have? Explain your answer.

y

x −6−5−4−3−2−1−1 1 2 3 4 5 6 −2 −3 −4 −5 −6 4

Determine the number of solutions for each graphed simultaneous linear equations: a

y 6 5 4 3 2 1 −6−5−4−3−2−1−1 −2 −3 −4 −5 −6

c

b

x −6−5−4−3−2−1−1 1 2 3 4 5 6 −2 −3 −4 −5 −6

y

x −6−5−4−3−2−1 1 2 3 4 5 6 −1 −2 −3 −4 −5 −6

x 1 2 3 4 5 6

y 6 5 4 3 2 1

6 5 4 3 2 1

d 5 4 3 2

y

1 −5 −4 −3 −2 −1−1

x 1 2 3 4 5

−2 −3 −4 −5

3.02 Graphical simultaneous equations mathspace.co

243


5

A system of simultaneous linear equations has no solutions. If one of the equations is y = − 4x − 3, choose the other equation in the system out of the following: x x 3 4 A y = − 4x − 4 B y C y = 4x + 3 D y 4 4

Practice 6 Ex 1

7

The graph displays simultaneous linear equations: a

How many solutions does the system of simultaneous linear equations have?

b

Determine the solution to the system of simultaneous linear equations as an ordered pair (x, y).

y

1 −5 −4 −3 −2 −1 −1 −2 −3 −4 −5

x 1 2 3 4 5

Identify the solution to the simultaneous linear equations represented by the two lines: a

y 10 8 6 4 2

b

y 10 8 6 4 2

d

10 8 6 4 2

x −10−8 −6 −4 −2 2 4 6 8 10 −2 −4 −6 −8 −10

c

x −10−8 −6 −4 −2 2 4 6 8 10 −2 −4 −6 −8 −10

244

5 4 3 2

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

y

x −10−8 −6 −4 −2 2 4 6 8 10 −2 −4 −6 −8 −10 4 y 3 2 1 −3 −2 −1−1 −2 −3 −4 −5 −6 −7 −8 −9

x 1 2 3 4 5 6 7


8

Use the given graph to solve each pair of simultaneous equations: y

5 4 3 2 1 −3

a

9

−2

−1 −1 −2 −3 −4 y = x – 2 −5

1

2

3

4

x – 2y = 4 x 6 7

5

y = –8 + 2x

y=x−2

b

y=x−2

y = − 8 + 2x

x − 2y = 4

y = − 8 + 2x

c

x − 2y = 4

Consider the system of simultaneous linear equations: y = 4x − 3

Ex 2

y = 4 − 3x

10

a

Graph the lines on the same Cartesian plane.

b

Determine the point of intersection of the lines.

c

Determine the solution to the simultaneous linear equations.

For each pair of linear equations: i

Sketch the lines on the same Cartesian plane.

ii

Determine the solution.

a

y = 4x − 4

c

y=x+3

y = − x − 9

y = −x + 3

y = 3x + 6

y = −x − 3

b

y = 8 − 2x d

2x − 4y = − 8

e

− 4x +2y = − 8 Ex 3

11

12

y=x+9

f

y = − x + 2

y = −1

Mia is saving money to buy a gaming laptop costing $1200 which will be available in the market soon. She already has $450 saved and can set aside $150 every month. a

Express the given situation as a system of simultaneous linear equations.

b

Graph the system of simultaneous linear equations on a Cartesian plane.

c

If the laptop launches in 6 months, will Mia have enough savings?

For each system of simultaneous linear equations: i

Graph the two linear functions using technology and determine the number of solutions for the system of simultaneous linear equations.

ii

How could the answer to part (i) have been predicted from looking at the equations?

a

6x − y = 1

b

− 9x + 8y = − 5

c

− 3x + y = − 5

12x − 2y = 2   5x + 7y = − 9  9x − 3y = − 4

3.02 Graphical simultaneous equations mathspace.co

245


Ex 4

13

Solve each pair of simultaneous linear equations using technology. a

c

14

4x − 3y = − 13

b

y = 4x

4x + 3y = 5 y = 27 − 5x x 2y 1 d 2.5x + 3.2y = 10.8 3 3 1.1x – 0.9y = 4.3 x y 7 2 3

Consider these equations: Equation 1: x − y = − 6 Equation 2: − x + 2y = 9 Equation 3: 2x − 7y = − 42 Graph each pair of lines using technology and determine the solution to the system of simultaneous linear equations: a

Equations 1 and 2

b

Equations 1 and 3

c

Equations 2 and 3

Extend your thinking 15

The equation y = 5x + 3 has been graphed:

4 3

A second line of the form y = a+ bx intersects this line at the point (0, 3):

16

a

Can the value of a be determined? If so, determine the value.

b

Can the value of b be determined? If so, determine the value.

Two equations, y1 and y2, represent the growth of two different houseplants over time: Use the graph of y1 and y2 to support the claim that the two plants will never reach the same height on the same day.

y

2 1 −4 −3 −2 −1

−1 −2 −3 −4

25 20 15 10 5 −40−30−20−10 −5 −10 y1 −15 −20 y2 −25

17

x 1

2 3 4

y

x 10 20 30

Consider this system of linear equations: 3x − 2y = 6 ax + 4y = 6 Given that the lines intersect at the point (− 14, b), determine the values of a and b.

246

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


3.03   Algebraic simultaneous equations After this lesson, you will be able to… • solve simultaneous equations using substitution and elimination methods. • select and apply the most appropriate method for solving simultaneous equations. • verify algebraic solutions using technology. • interpret solutions in the context of the problem.

Substitution method The substitution method is another way to solve simultaneous equations without graphing, especially when technology is unavailable. Substitution method An algebraic method for solving systems of simultaneous equations where one equation is rearranged to express one variable in terms of the other(s), and this expression is then substituted into another equation. To implement this technique: 1. Label the equations with numbers or letters. For example: 2x + 6y = 14

1

5x + 1 = 3y

2

2. Rearrange one of the equations to make one variable the subject. For example: 1 2x + 6y = 14 ⇒ x = 7 − 3y 3. Substitute that expression for that variable in the other equation to create an equation in one variable. For example: Substitute 1 into 2 gives: 5x + 1 = 3y ⇒ 5 (7 − 3y) + 1 = 3y 4. Solve for the remaining variable. For example: 5 (7 − 3y) + 1 = 3y 35 − 15y + 1 = 3y 36 = 18y 2=y 5. Substitute the known variable into the rearranged equation to solve for the other variable. For example: x = 7 − 3y ⇒ x = 7 − 3 (2), so x = 1 6. Determine the solution and verify using graphing or substitution into both original equations. Sometimes, the equation already has one variable as the subject, making it simple to substitute the expression into the other equation.

3.03 Algebraic simultaneous equations mathspace.co

247


Example 1 Solve these simultaneous linear equations using the substitution method: y = x + 11

1

y = 3x + 19

2

a Solve for x.

Create a strategy Substitute the expression for y from equation 1 into equation 2 and then solve for x.

Apply the idea x + 11 = 3x + 19

Substitute 1 into 2

11 = 2x + 19

Subtract x from both sides

– 8 = 2x

Subtract 19 from both sides

x = –4

Divide both sides by 2 and swap the sides

Using substitution, x = – 4.

b Solve for y.

Create a strategy Substitute the value of x into one of the equations and solve for y.

Apply the idea y = x + 11

Write equation 1

y = – 4 + 11

Substitute x = – 4

y=7

Evaluate

Reflect and check To check that x = – 4, y = 7 is also a solution to 2 , substitute the value of x into 2 and see if the same value for y is obtained. y = 3x + 19

Write equation 2

y = 3 (– 4) + 19

Substitute x = – 4

y=7

Evaluate

y = 7 is the same value. This confirms that x = – 4, y = 7 is the solution. This can also be written as (– 4, 7), the intersection point of the two lines when graphed.

248

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Idea summary Algebraically, the solution to a pair of simultaneous linear equations is the pair of values (x, y) that satisfies both equations. To solve simultaneous equations using the substitution method: 1. Label the equations. 2. Rearrange one of the equations to make one variable the subject. 3. Substitute the expression for one variable, into the other equation to create an equation in one variable. 4. Solve the resulting equation. 5. Substitute the known value back into one of the original equations to determine the value of the other variable.

Elimination method The substitution method is one method to solve simultaneous equations algebraically. Another method is the elimination method. Elimination method An algebraic method for solving systems of simultaneous equations where equations are added or subtracted (possibly after multiplication by constants) to eliminate one variable, allowing the other variable to be solved. To use this technique: 1. Manipulate the equations by rearranging and multiplying constants, so that one variable has the same coefficient in both equations. • For example: 2x + 5y = 13

1

4x − 3y = 10

2

To eliminate x, multiply 1 by 2: 2x + 5y = 13

×2

4x + 10y = 26

4x − 3y = 10

→

4x − 3y = 10

2. Eliminate one variable by adding or subtracting the two equations vertically, so a single equation with one unknown is formed. • For example: Subtract 2 from the manipulated 1 to eliminate x: 4x + 10y = 26 − (4x − 3y = 10) 13y = 16

3.03 Algebraic simultaneous equations mathspace.co

249


3. Solve for the remaining variable. • For example: 13y = 16 y

16 13

4. Substitute the known variable back into either of the original equations, to find the value of the second variable. • For example: Substitute y

16 into 2 : 13 4x 3

16 13

10

4x

48 13

10

4x

10

48 13

178 13 89 x 26

4x

5. Determine the solution and verify. • Solution: x

89 16 , y . 26 13

• Verify by substituting into 1 and 2 . Sometimes, the coefficients of the variables may not be aligned for direct elimination. In such cases, it may be necessary to first multiply one or both of the equations by a constant to make the coefficients of one variable equal in magnitude. This manipulation ensures that adding or subtracting the equations will eliminate one variable, making it possible to solve the other.

Example 2 Solve the simultaneous linear equations using the elimination method. a 9x + y = 62 5x + y = 38

Create a strategy Numbering the equations helps to describe the solving process: 1

9x + y = 62

2 5x + y = 38 The goal of the elimination method is to combine the two equations until one variable is eliminated. In this problem, the y term will be eliminated by subtracting equation 2 from equation 1 .

250

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Apply the idea Subtract equation 2 from equation 1 : 9x + y = 62 – (5x + y = 38) 4x + 0y = 24 4x = 24

Eliminate the y term

x=6

Divide both sides by 4

Since x is known, substitute it back into either of the original equations: 5 (6) + y = 38

Substitute x = 6 into equation 2

30 + y = 38

Evaluate the multiplication

y=8

Subtract 30 from both sides

The solution to the simultaneous linear equations is the ordered pair (6, 8).

Reflect and check The algebraic solution can be verified using graphing technology, such as a CAS calculator. This involves graphing both linear equations and finding their point of intersection.

y 60 50 40

Graph the two functions and use the ‘Analyse Graph’ or ‘Intersection’ tool to find the point where they cross.

30 20 10

(6, 8) 0

2

4

6

The technology confirms that the point of intersection is (6, 8). This matches the solution found using the elimination method, verifying that the answer is correct.

x

8

b 2x + 3y = 19 4x – y = 10

Create a strategy Numbering the equations helps to describe the solving process: 1

2x + 3y = 19

2

4x – y = 10

Multiple approaches can be used to solve this system: • Multiply equation 1 by 2 and subtract it from equation 2 . • Multiply equation 1 by −2 and add it to equation 2 . • Multiply equation 2 by 3 and add it to equation 1 . Only one approach needs to be chosen.

3.03 Algebraic simultaneous equations mathspace.co

251


Apply the idea Multiply the first equation by – 2: 1

– 4x – 6y = – 38

2

4x – y = 10

Then, add equation 1 and equation 2 together: – 4x – 6y = – 38 + 4x – y = 10 0x – 7y = – 28 – 7y = – 28 y=4

Eliminate the x term Divide both sides by – 7

Since y is known, it can be substituted back into either of the original equations: 2x + 3 (4) = 19

Substitute y = 4 into equation 1

2x + 12 = 19

Evaluate the multiplication

2x = 7

Subtract 12 from both sides

x = 3.5

Divide both sides by 2

The solution to the simultaneous linear equations is the ordered pair (3.5, 4).

Reflect and check The solution of the simultaneous linear equations is unchanged when multiples of one equation are added to the other equation.

Idea summary To solve simultaneous equations using the elimination method: 1. Align equations with like terms. 2. Equalise coefficients of one variable by multiplying if needed. 3. Add or subtract the equations to eliminate that variable. 4. Solve the resulting equation for the remaining variable. 5. Substitute this value into either original equation to determine the second variable. Choosing the best method: Substitution is more efficient when a variable is already isolated (one or both equations have y = or x = ) while elimination is more efficient when both equations are in the form Ax + By = C form.

252

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


3.03 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

What do the coordinates of the point of intersection of two straight lines on a graph represent?

2

Identify the solution to the simultaneous linear equations represented by the two lines: a

y 10 8 6 4 2 −10 −8 −6 −4 −2 −2 −4 −6 −8 −10

c

3

x 2 4 6 8 10

y 10 8 6 4 2 −10−8−6 −4 −2 −2 −4 −6 −8 −10

b

x 2 4 6 8 10

10 8 6 4 2 −10 −8 −6 −4 −2 −2 −4 −6 −8 −10

d

y

x 2 4 6 8 10

4 y 3 2 1 −3 −2 −1−1 −2 −3 −4 −5 −6 −7 −8 −9

x 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Determine whether these statements are true or false: a

The method of substitution involves isolating one variable in one equation and substituting this expression into the other equation.

b

The substitution method can be used to solve any simultaneous linear equations.

c

Once one of the equations has been solved for one variable, substitution is required back into the other equation.

d

Solving simultaneous equations by substitution will always result in the same solution, regardless of which variable is solved first.

e

Simultaneous linear equations can have exactly two solutions, no solutions, or infinitely many solutions.

3.03 Algebraic simultaneous equations mathspace.co

253


4

Determine whether each ordered pair of numbers is a solution to the given simultaneous linear equations: a

Ordered pair: (5, 2)

b

Ordered pair: (4, 17)

x + y = 7       y = 6x − 7 x − y = 3 4x + 3y = 67 5

For these simultaneous linear equations: 3x − 7y = 4 − 12x + 28y = − 16 a

Rearrange 3x − 7y = 4 to make x the subject in terms of y.

b

Substitute the expression for x from part (a) into − 12x + 28y = − 16. What can be concluded about the number of solutions for this system?

Practice 6

For the simultaneous linear equations: 2x + 3y = 7   x − y = − 4

Ex 1

7

a

What number should the second equation be multiplied by to eliminate y?

b

Eliminate y and then determine the value of x that satisfies both equations.

c

Substitute the x value to determine the value of y that satisfies both equations.

Solve the simultaneous equations using the substitution method: a

d

2x + 3y = 26

b

c

5x + 4y = 10

8x − 5y = 36

5x + 6y = 0  3x + 7y = − 17

4x + 3y = 17

− 7f + 2g = − 0.4

e

9x − 4y = 6 8

2x + 7y = 23

f

− 4a + 7b = 11.5

− 2.1f + g = 0.36  − 2a + 2.1b = 2.25

For these simultaneous equations: 3x + y = 7 2x − y = 4 Explain the steps to determine the solution to the simultaneous equations and the reasoning behind each step.

9 Ex 2

Solve these simultaneous linear equations using the elimination method: a

d

y = 8x − 30

c

4x + 3y = 52

5x + 9y = 38

x + 2y = 13

7x − 5y = 9

x = − 5y − 27

x = − 4y − 39

x = 4y − 27

b

e

x = 7y + 45

254

y = − 2x − 1

f

4x = 24y + 164

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

2y + x = 21


10

A group of students were solving the equations: x + y = 10 3x − y = 5 a

Liam substituted x from the first equation into the second.

b

Olivia substituted y from the second equation into the first.

c

Ethan substituted y from the first equation into the second.

d

Sophia substituted x from the second equation into the first.

For each student’s approach described, determine the resulting equation they would need to solve and comment on the efficiency of their method.

Extend your thinking 11

12

Consider the straight line y = ax + b that passes through the two points (2, 4) and (5, − 2): a

Identify a pair of simultaneous equations using the points given.

b

Determine the value of a and b.

c

Determine the equation of the straight line that passes through the points (2, 4) and (5, − 2).

What does it indicate about simultaneous linear equations if solving them using substitution method results in: a

A false statement, such as 0 = 5?

b

A statement that is always true, such as 0 = 0, 5 = 5, etc.?

3.03 Algebraic simultaneous equations mathspace.co

255


3.04   Applications of simultaneous equations After this lesson, you will be able to… • formulate simultaneous equations from practical situations. • translate worded problems into systems of linear equations. • solve and interpret systems of equations in real-world contexts.

Applications of simultaneous equations Contexts with two unknown quantities and enough information about both quantities can be solved by setting up simultaneous equations. To do so: 1. Declare the two unknown quantities using variables. “Let a represent …” 2. Use the given information to set up two equations involving the two variables. 3. Solve the simultaneous equations using an appropriate strategy. 4. Answer the question in terms of the context. Four strategies can be used to solve pairs of simultaneous linear equations: •

Graphically by hand: useful for visualising the solution but can be imprecise and time-consuming.

•

Substitution method: often used when one of the variables is already isolated or has coefficient of 1.

•

Elimination method: often used when the equations are in the same form and one variable has a coefficient that is a multiple of the corresponding coefficient in the other equation.

•

Technology: generally the quickest method, though not always available.

Generally, all approaches will work, but the structure of the equations and personal preference can determine which process to use.

256

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 1 When comparing test results, Verna noticed that the sum of her chemistry and english test scores was 128 and that their difference was 16. She scored higher on her chemistry test. a Formulate simultaneous equations for this scenario, where x represents Verna’s chemistry test score, and y represents her english test score.

Create a strategy Since Verna’s chemistry test score is higher than her english test score, the difference of the two scores should be expressed as x – y to get a positive result.

Apply the idea

Reflect and check

Let x represent the chemistry test score and y represent the english test score.

There are two other constraints based on typical test scores that can be applied to this problem: 0 ≤ x ≤ 100 and 0 ≤ y ≤ 100

1

x + y = 128

2

x – y = 16

b Solve the pair of simultaneous linear equations to determine her test scores.

Create a strategy Since the equations have the same coefficient of the y with opposite signs, add the two equations to eliminate y and solve for x.

Apply the idea x + y = 128 +

x–y=

16

2x + 0y = 144 2x = 144

Eliminate the y term

x = 72

Divide both sides by 2

72 + y = 128 y = 56

Substitute x = 72 into equation 1 Subtract 72 from both sides

So Verna scored 72 on her chemistry test and 56 on her english test.

3.04 Applications of simultaneous equations mathspace.co

257


Reflect and check In this case, the two equations also had the same coefficient of x with the same sign. So another approach is to subtract the two equations and solve for y first. x + y = 128 – x–y=

16

0x + 2y = 112 2y = 112

Eliminate the x term

y = 56

Divide both sides by 2

x – 56 = 16

Substitute y = 56 into equation 2

x = 72

Add 56 to both sides

c Does the solution make sense in terms of the context? Explain your answer.

Apply the idea Yes. Assuming that the tests were out of 100, then 72 and 56 are both valid test scores to obtain.

Example 2 A theatre club at a high school charges a student rate and an adult rate to attend the spring musical. The cost for a student ticket is $3 and the cost for an adult ticket is $7. If 200 people attended the show and the theatre club at the school raised $700, determine how many students and how many adults attended.

Create a strategy Formulate two equations: one for the total number of attendees and one for the total revenue. Choose substitution or elimination to solve, as both variables have a coefficient of 1 in the first equation.

Apply the idea Let x represent the number of students. Let y represent the number of adults. Simultaneous linear equations that model the situation are: x + y = 200 3x + 7y = 700 To solve the pair of simultaneous linear equations using the substitution method, at least one equation must have an isolated variable. Either variable can be isolated as they both have a coefficient of 1. x + y = 200 x = 200 – y

258

Write the first equation Subtract y from both sides

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Substitute the expression 200 – y for x in the second equation to solve for y. 3x + 7y = 700

Write the second equation

3(200 – y) + 7y = 700

Substitute x = 200 – y from the first equation

600 – 3y + 7y = 700

Expand the brackets

4y = 100 Combine like terms and subtract 600 from both sides y = 25

Divide both sides by 4

x + y = 200

Write the first equation

x + 25 = 200

Substitute y = 25

Solve for x using y = 25.

x = 175

Subtract 25 from both sides

So, the solution to the simultaneous equations is x = 175, y = 25, which can be written as the ordered pair (175, 25). In context, this means that 175 students and 25 adults attended the spring musical.

Idea summary To solve problems involving two unknown quantities: 1. Declare variables for the unknowns. 2. Write two simultaneous linear equations involving the unknowns. 3. Solve the simultaneous linear equations using graphing, substitution method, elimination method, or technology. 4. Interpret the solution in the context of the problem to ensure it makes sense.

3.04 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

2

Write a pair of simultaneous equations to represent each situation: a

The sum of two mystery numbers is 4. The difference of the two numbers is − 2.

b

Rochelle and Mohamad are siblings. Rochelle’s age is 11 more than 4 times the age of Mohamad. The sum of their ages is 21.

Kang and Elvia are working together on an assignment. They have broken the work into 9 parts of the same size. The number of parts Kang completes is 9 less than twice the number of parts Elvia completes. To model this, a student set up the following simultaneous equations: Equation 1: x + y = 9 Equation 2: y = 2x − 9 They found that the solution was x = 6 and y = 3. However, the student forgot to declare the variables in the problem. Interpret the solution in terms of the context. 3.04 Applications of simultaneous equations mathspace.co

259


3

Describe each method of solving and when it is applicable: a

Graphing by hand

b

Substitution method

c

Elimination method

d

Technology

Practice 4 Ex 1

When comparing his test results, Tom noticed that the sum of his Maths score and english score was 150, and their difference was 18. He also noticed that he scored higher on the Maths test. Let x and y be his Maths score and his english score, respectively.

5

a

Form two equations in terms of x and y from the information given.

b

Determine his Maths score.

c

Determine his english score.

For two numbers, x and y: • The sum of the x and y is 18. • The difference between four times x and two times y is 12.

Ex 2

a

Formulate two equations that represent this information.

b

Determine the two numbers.

6

A bookstore owner purchases eight notebooks and five pens for $260. Later, they buy four notebooks and three pens for $140. Determine the price of a notebook and a pen respectively.

7

A taxi driver charges a fee for the initial pick-up and an additional amount per kilometre travelled. A journey of 10 km costs $105, while a journey of 15 km costs $155. a

Determine the amount of the fixed charge and the charge per kilometre.

b

How much does a person have to pay for travelling a distance of 25 km?

8

A café sells coffee and sandwiches. One customer buys 2 coffees and 3 sandwiches for $18, while another customer buys 3 coffees and 2 sandwiches for $16. Determine the price of one coffee and one sandwich.

9

Mikhail sells sausages and soft drinks. Each sausage costs $1.50 and each soft drink costs $0.50. At the end of the day, he made a total of $78.50 from selling a total of 87 sausages and soft drinks combined. How many sausages and how many soft drinks were sold?

10

A plumber charges a fixed service fee and an additional amount per hour of work. A job that takes 3 hours costs $90, while a job that takes 5 hours costs $130.

260

a

Determine the fixed service fee and the hourly charge.

b

How much would a customer pay for a job that takes 8 hours?

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


11

12

A couple plans to rent two different halls for their wedding event. The cost of renting Hall A is $400 plus $75 per hour. The cost of renting Hall B is $200 plus $125 per hour. The cost, y, in dollars, of renting each hall for x hours can be modelled by the simultaneous equations: a

Determine the equations that represent the cost, y, in dollars, for renting each hall for x hours.

b

Plot the two lines on the same Cartesian plane.

c

Determine the coordinates of the point of intersection.

d

What do the coordinates from part (c) represent in the context of the problem?

A rectangle is to be 6 m longer than it is wide, with a total perimeter of 24 m. a

Let y represent the length of the rectangle and x represent the width. Create two equations that represent this information.

b

Plot the two lines on the same Cartesian plane.

c

Determine the length and width of the rectangle.

Extend your thinking 13

14

What does it indicate about simultaneous equations if when solving them it results in: a

A false statement, such as 0 = 5

b

An always true statement, such as 0 = 0, 5 = 5 etc.

A company produces two types of products: A and B. The cost to produce each unit of product A is $20, and the cost to produce each unit of product B is $15. The company has a budget of $3000 for production costs. The company also needs to meet a production goal: the number of units of product B produced must be twice the number of units of product A produced. Let x be the number of units of product A produced, and let y be the number of units of product B produced. Determine the greatest number of each product the company can produce.

15

A farmer is planning to plant two types of crops, wheat and corn, on his 200-acre farm. He knows that: • Each acre of wheat requires 3 workers, and each acre of corn requires 2 workers. The farm has a total of 450 workers available. • The profit per acre of wheat is $500, while the profit per acre of corn is $400. a

Create the two equations that represent this information.

b

Determine how many acres of each crop the farmer should plant to use exactly 200 acres and 450 workers.

c

Calculate the total profit if the optimal planting plan is followed.

3.04 Applications of simultaneous equations mathspace.co

261


3.05

Piecewise functions

After this lesson, you will be able to… • identify situations that can be modelled by piecewise linear graphs. • construct piecewise linear given a context or equation. • interpret piecewise functions in practical contexts such as tax scales and charges.

Graphs of piecewise linear functions Piecewise function A function made up of two or more functions defined over different intervals of x.

4

y

2 −2 −2

x 2 4

When more than one function is needed to create a model for a given situation, a piecewise function can be used to connect the different pieces. Each piece has an interval where the given function applies Piecewise function name

f (x) =

x 4 x +1 2

, x < –2 , –2 ≤ x < 0 , x>0

Each piece is on a separate line

Brace Functions

Domains (Defined interval) This graph has three straight-line segments which create a complete graph over the domain 0 ≤ x < 10.

y 10

This particular graph is continuous over the defined x-values (though this is not always the case).

8 6

The equation of this function is:

4 2 x 0

2

4

6

8

10

f (x)

2, 0 x 4 3x 4, 4 x 8 2 16 x, 8 x 10

This graph is defined for 0 ≤ x < 10 and undefined for x ≥ 10 since there are no assigned y-values beyond this interval. 262

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


The inequalities in the domains help determine whether the endpoints are filled (closed) or unfilled (open). Filled (closed): ( • ) for ≤ or ≥ Unfilled (open): (o) for < or > Technology can also be used to generate graphs and evaluate piecewise functions by calculating the function’s values at specific points or intervals. Various tools, such as graphing calculators and software, assist in these tasks.

Interactive exploration

Discover this concept in action online

mathspace.co

Common contexts where piecewise functions arise are: • An hourly rate changes after a set amount of time • Distance-time graphs where different segments are done at different speeds • Tax brackets

Did you know?

Transport timetables are often modelled using piecewise functions! For example, trains, buses, and trams don’t travel at one constant speed for the entire journey. Instead, each part of the trip — stopping, accelerating, cruising, and slowing down — can be represented as a separate piece of a piecewise function. By using these models, transport planners can calculate travel times more accurately and adjust timetables to reduce delays and keep the network running smoothly!

3.05 Piecewise functions mathspace.co

263


Example 1 The function y is defined as: y

4, x x 2, x

3 3

a Sketch the graph of the function.

Create a strategy Sketch the graph of the two different functions on either side of x = 3. To the left of x = 3, the graph of the function y = 4 should be drawn. To the right of x = 3, the graph of the function y = x + 2 should be drawn.

Apply the idea 11 y 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

x

−2−1−1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 −2 For x < 3, use y = 4: • y = 4 is a horizontal line where the y-coordinate is always 4, regardless of the x-coordinate. • Draw a horizontal line at y = 4. • The endpoint (3, 4) will have an open circle as the function y = 4 is only applicable for values less than 3, not including 3. For x ≥ 3, use y = x + 2: • Substitute x = 3 into the equation y = x + 2 to determine y. This gives y = 3 + 2 = 5. • The point (3, 5) will have a closed circle. • Substitute any x-value greater than 3 to determine the corresponding y-value. For example, x = 8 will give y = 8 + 2 = 10. • Plot the points (3, 5) and (8, 10) and use them as the base for drawing the line extending it to the right.

264

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


b Which of these statements is true? A The function is defined and continuous at x = 3 B The function is not defined and not continuous at x = 3 C The function is defined but not continuous at x = 3 D The function is not defined but continuous at x = 3

Create a strategy To determine if the function is continuous at x = 3, check two conditions: 1. The function must be defined at x = 3. This can be verified by checking if x = 3 is included in any of the domain intervals of the piecewise function. 2. The graph must have no breaks at x = 3 when traced from left to right, meaning it could be drawn without lifting the pen.

Apply the idea For this function, the interval x ≥ 3 includes x = 3, so the function is defined at that point. The graph cannot be drawn without lifting the pen as there is a jump at x = 3. On the left, the function is moving towards y = 4, while on the right, the function is moving towards y = 5. These are not the same. Since the function is defined at x = 3 but not continuous, the correct statement is: “The function is defined but not continuous at x = 3.” So, the answer is option C.

Idea summary A piecewise function is a function made up of two or more functions defined over different intervals of x. A graph can be used to model different linear functions. A graph is defined if there is a y-value for every x-value. It is undefined otherwise. A graph is continuous if it can be traced across the whole graph with no breaks. An endpoint on the graph that is filled or closed circle is for ≤ or ≥, while an unfilled or open circle is for < or >.

3.05 Piecewise functions mathspace.co

265


Did you know?

Linear applications can be used in yoga to track progress! Instructors measure the relationship between practice frequency and flexibility improvements, helping students set realistic fitness goals.

Equations of a piecewise linear function To determine the equation of a piecewise linear function: • Identify the equation of each linear segment, which can be done by determining the y-intercept (a) and the slope (b) and filling in y = a + bx. • Clearly state the domain of x-values over which each equation is valid, specifying the interval that each segment represents.

Example 2 Determine the function shown in the graph. 5 4 3 2 1 −5 −4 −3 −2 −1 −1 −2 −3 −4 −5

y

, ,

y

x 1 2 3 4 5

x x

Create a strategy Consider each piece of the function and its domain separately.

266

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Apply the idea 5 4 3 2 1 −5 −4−3 −2 −1 −1 −2 −3 −4 −5

5 4 3 2 1 −5 −4 −3 −2 −1 −1 −2 −3 −4 −5

y

This part of the function is only defined between its endpoints. The x-values of its endpoints are x = − 5 and x = 1. The domain is written as − 5 ≤ x ≤ 1.

x 1 2 3 4 5

This section of the graph includes a straight line with a y-intercept of 1, and a gradient of 1. Therefore, y = x + 1 when − 5 ≤ x ≤ 1.

y This part of the function is defined for any value of x greater than 1 and less than or equal to 4. The domain is written as 1 < x ≤ 4.

x 1 2 3 4 5

This part of the graph involves a straight line with a gradient of − 1, passing through the point (2, − 1). Therefore, y = 1 − x when 1 < x ≤ 4.

The function shown in the graph is: y

x 1, 5 x 1 1 x , 1 x 4

Reflect and check When writing the piecewise function, list the function rules in order of the intervals, starting with the leftmost segment and proceeding to the right.

Idea summary To determine a piecewise linear function, determine the equation for each segment by determining its gradient and y-intercept and stating it beside its specified domain.

3.05 Piecewise functions mathspace.co

267


Model with linear piecewise functions In real-life, the relationship between two variables does not always stay the same. For example, the speed of a car might increase steadily until it reaches a certain point, then remain constant. In such cases, a single linear model would not capture the entire scenario. Instead, piecewise functions are used to apply different linear models to different parts of the situation.

Example 3 Ken starts travelling at 9 a.m. from point A and moves towards point B in a straight line, but at different speeds. The distance between Ken and point B at various times in his journey is shown on this graph:

Distance (km)

120

A

100 80 60 40 20 0

B 9 a.m. 10 a.m. 11 a.m. 12 p.m. 1 p.m. Time

2 p.m. 3 p.m.

4 p.m.

a How far is point B from point A?

Create a strategy Use the graph to determine the initial distance (when Ken is at A at 9 a.m.) and the final distance at point B (at 4 p.m.). Subtract these distances.

Apply the idea At 9 a.m. Ken is at 120 km distance and at 4 p.m. he is at 0 km. The distance between point A and point B is 120 – 0 = 120 km. Alternatively, the distance is directly read as the initial distance (120 km). It is simply the starting value on the “distance from point B” at 0 km.

b How many hours was Ken’s journey from point A to point B?

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Add the number of hours between 9 a.m. and 12 p.m. to the number of hours between 12 p.m. and 4 p.m.

There are 3 hours between 9 a.m. and 12 p.m., 4 hours between 12 p.m. and 4 p.m. Add the hours: 3 + 4 = 7 hours The journey took 7 hours.

268

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


c Between what times did Ken travel at the fastest speed?

Create a strategy The slope of a graph between two points indicates the speed of travel at that point. A steeper slope represents a faster speed, while a gentler slope indicates a slower speed.

Apply the idea The slope of the travel graph is steepest between 1:30 p.m. to 2 p.m.

d What was Ken’s fastest speed in km/h?

Create a strategy Calculate the slope or gradient between 1:30 p.m. and 2 p.m.

Apply the idea There is 0.5 hour between 1:30 p.m. and 2 p.m. At 1:30 p.m., Ken was 100 km away from point B and 40 km away from point B at 2 p.m. Divide the distance by the number of hours. Speed

Change in distance Change in time 100 40

0.5 60 0.5 = 120 km/h

Write the formula for speed Substitute the values Evaluate the subtraction Simplify

Ken’s speed from 1:30 p.m. to 2 p.m. is 120 km/h.

e What was the distance in kilometres travelled by Ken between 1:30 p.m. and 4 p.m.?

Create a strategy Subtract the distances travelled in each relevant time interval.

Apply the idea At 1:30 p.m., Ken is at 100 km distance and at 4 p.m., he is at 0 km. The difference between the initial distance and final distance is 100 – 0 = 100 km. Since Ken moves toward point B, the distance from 1:30 p.m. to 4 p.m. is 100 km. It is simply the starting value on the “distance from point B”.

3.05 Piecewise functions mathspace.co

269


f

What is the total distance travelled by Ken from 9 a.m. to 4 p.m.?

Create a strategy Add up the distances travelled during each segment of the journey.

Apply the idea The distance-time graph is composed of several linear segments (a piecewise linear function). To find the total distance Ken travelled, calculate the distance covered during each segment and then sum these individual distances. The distance for each segment is the absolute difference between the position at the end and start of the time interval. • From 9 a.m. to 10 a.m.: The distance covered is |120 – 70| = 50 km. • From 10 a.m. to 12 p.m.: The distance covered is |70 – 100| = |– 30| = 30 km. Note that distance is a scalar quantity and is always non-negative; hence, use the absolute value of the change in position. • From 12 p.m. to 1:30 p.m.: The distance covered is |100 – 100| = 0 km. A distance of 0 km over a time interval indicates that Ken was stationary. • From 1:30 p.m. to 2 p.m.: The distance covered is |40 – 100| = |– 60| = 60 km. • From 2 p.m. to 2:30 p.m.: The distance covered is |40 – 40| = 0 km. This indicates Ken was again stationary during this period. • From 2:30 p.m. to 4 p.m.: The distance covered is |0 – 40| = |– 40| = 40 km. Total Distance = 50 + 30 + 0 + 60 + 0 + 40 Add the individual distances calculated for each time segment = 180 km

Evaluate

Reflect and check Notice that in part (a), the distance between point A and point B was 120 km. However, the total distance travelled was 180 km, which is 60 km greater. From 10 a.m. to 12 p.m., Ken travels back for 30 km. To return to the same position, he must then travel an additional 30 km, accounting for the extra 60 km in the total distance.

Idea summary In real-life, when the relationship between two variables changes at different stages, piecewise functions are used.

270

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


3.05 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

Complete the equation for this piecewise function: , x y x 3, x 4

9 y 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 −4−3−2−1 −1 −2 −3 −4

2

x 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Complete the graph for this piecewise function: 4 x, x 2 y 2 x 2 6, 4 x, x 2

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 −4 −3 −2 −1

3

−1

y

x 1

2 3 4

For each piecewise function: i

Determine the function value (y) at the given x-value.

ii

Determine if the function is continuous at the given x-value.

a

At x = 3

b

At x = 2

y 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 x −2 −1 −1

1

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

2 3 4 5 6 7 −2 −1

y

x 1

2 3 4 5 6 7

3.05 Piecewise functions mathspace.co

271


c

At x = 4

d

At x = − 5

y 4 y 8 3 7 2 6 1 x 5 −8 −6 −4 −2−1 2 4 6 8 4 −2 3 −3 2 −4 1 −5 x −6 −12−10−8−6−4−2 2 4 6 8 10 12 −7 −1 −8 −2 −9 4

Determine if each scenario would be best modelled by a piecewise function or a linear function: a

A plumber charges a call out fee of $100 and $60 per hour.

b

A welder charges a call out fee of $150 and $80 per hour for the first two hours and $50 per hour for the next five hours.

c

A runner runs 10 km/h for the first hour and a half of the race, and then speeds up to a speed of 14 km/h for the last half-hour.

d

A hairdresser charges $55 for a shoulder length haircut, plus for each additional $2 per centimetre past shoulder length.

Practice 5 Ex 1

For each piecewise function: i

Sketch the graph of the function on the Cartesian plane.

ii

Determine whether the function is defined and continuous at x = 4. 5, x 1, x 4 0 x 4 y b y x 1, 4 x 8 x 2, x 4

a

c 6

1 x, x 1 x 1, 4 x

8

Plot each piecewise function on the Cartesian plane: a

c

e

272

y

y

3, x 0 x 3, x 0

y

3 x 2, x 2 x 2, x

0 0

y

3 x 16, x 2 x 1, 2 4, x

3 x 3 2

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

b

d

f

y

x 2, x x 3, x

y

1, x 0 x 1, 0 x 2 2 x 1, x 2

y

2 x 4, x 4, 4 x 9,

5 5

x 0 1 x 0 x 1


7

Consider the graph of y, which is defined for all real x.

Ex 2

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 −2 −1 −1 −2 −3

y

x 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Complete the equation of the function represented by the graph. y

8

, x , x

Determine the equation of the piecewise function for each graph: a

y 4 3 2 1

b

x −6−5−4−3−2−1 1 2 3 4 5 6 −1 −2 −3 −4

c

y 10 8 6 4 2 −4 −3 −2 −1 −2 −4 −6 −8 −10

1

2 3 4

x

−6 −5 −4−3−2−1 1 2 3 4 5 −1 −2 −3 −4 −5 d

x

y

5 4 3 2 1

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

y

−5−4−3−2−1 1 2 3 4 5 −1 −2 −3 −4

x

3.05 Piecewise functions mathspace.co

273


9

This graph shows Ben’s distance from his starting point at various times of the day using 24-hour time: 250 Distance (km)

Ex 3

200 150 100 50 0

10

a

At what time did Ben start his journey?

b

How far had Ben travelled by 11:00?

c

What happened to Ben’s speed at 11:00?

d

Calculate Ben’s speed between 11:00 and 13:00.

e

What distance did Ben travel between 13:00 and 14:00?

f

What is the furthest distance travelled from the starting point?

g

Calculate the total distance travelled by Ben between 09:00 and 16:00.

A runner completes a 22 km race in 2 hours. She ran 10 km/h for the first hour and a half of a race, and then speeds up to 14 km/h for the last half-hour. a

Calculate the distance that the runner has travelled at each time period. Recall that Distance Speed , so Distance = Speed × Time Time i

11

9:00 10:00 11:00 12:00 13:00 14:00 15:00 16:00 17:00 Time

30 minutes

ii

1 hour

iii

1.5 hours

iv

b

Draw a piecewise graph to represent the distance versus time for this scenario.

c

What do the slopes of each segment represent?

d

Determine the equation for a piecewise function to represent this context.

A kitchen sink starts with 20 L of water. It empties at a rate of 4 L per minute and after 4 minutes, the drain becomes blocked. No water empties for 2 more minutes while it gets unblocked. Then, the remaining water is drained out in 1 minute. Sketch the graph of the piecewise function that represents this scenario.

274

2 hours

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


12

A real estate agency offers a tiered bonus structure to its agents based on the final sale price of a property. 500, 1 x 200 000 1200 , 200 000 x 400 000 y 2500, 400 000 x 600 000 4000, 600 000 x 800 000 6000, x 800 000

The piecewise function outlines the bonus amount, y (in dollars), for a given sale price, x (in dollars): a

How much of a bonus (y) will an agent receive for selling a property valued at a sale price (x) of $350 000?

b

What is the maximum sale price (x) of a property for which an agent receives a $2500 bonus (y)?

c

An agent, Maria, sold three properties last quarter. Their sale prices (x) were $180 000, $450 000, and $820 000. How much did Maria earn in bonuses (y) altogether for these three sales?

d

If an agent sells a property for a sale price (x1) of $400 000, how much more bonus (△y) will they receive if they manage to sell it for a sale price (x2) of $400 001 instead?

Extend your thinking 13

Consider the 2024-2025 tax table: Resident tax rates (2024-2025) Taxable income

a

14

0 − $18 200

Nil

$18 201 − $45 000

16c for each $1 over $18 200

$45 001 − $135 000

$4288 plus 30c for each $1 over $45 000

$135 001 − $190 000

$31 288 plus 37c for each $1 over $135 000

$190 001 and over

$51 638 plus 45c for each $1 over $190 000

Calculate the tax payable on an income of: i

b

Tax on this income

$32 500

ii

$82 000

iii

$190 000

Determine the piecewise function defining this income tax table.

Determine the area of the shape bounded by the lines of y = f (x) and the x-axis. f (x)

12 2 x, 12 2 x,

0 x 6

6 x 0

3.05 Piecewise functions mathspace.co

275


Water is being added to a tank. The rate of flow of water into the tank changes at specific times. Initially, water flows in at a rate of 4 L per minute for four minutes. The flow is then stopped (rate of 0 L per minute) for two minutes. Finally, water flows in again at a rate of 3 L per minute for one minute. The process stops after a total of 7 minutes.

15

a

Determine the piecewise function that models the rate of flow, y (in L/min), into the tank at time x (in minutes from the start, 0 ≤ x ≤ 7).

b

Sketch the graph of the function relating the time (x) and the rate of flow (y).

c

What is the rate of flow into the tank at x = 3.5 minutes?

d

During which time interval(s) is the rate of flow 0 L/min?

For the piecewise function:

16

y

4 x 6, x x x 1,

a a

a

Given that the graph of the piecewise function is continuous, solve the equations simultaneously to determine the value of a.

b

Determine the value of y when x = a.

3.06   Step graphs After this lesson, you will be able to… • identify situations that can be modelled by step graphs. • construct step graphs given a context or equation. • interpret step graphs in practical contexts such as cost.

Step graphs Step graph A graph consisting of horizontal line segments or steps, where the function takes on a constant value over specific intervals of the input variable and jumps to a different constant value at the interval boundaries. A step graph does not change continuously, but has distinct steps. This kind of graph is common for fee structures, like the tariff structures in household bills, where a certain amount is charged for the first block of energy, and then a different amount is charged for the next block, and so forth. The ends of each step in the graph indicate whether that value is included or not: • A closed circle (filled in) means the value is included in the interval. • An open circle (not filled in) means the value is not included in the interval.

276

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Here is an example of a step graph: Price per MJ (cents)

2.4 2.2 Energy used, x (MJ)

Price per MJ, y (cents)

2

2.2

1.8

Next 20 MJ (30 < x ≤ 50)

1.8

1.6

Next 20 MJ (50 < x ≤ 70)

1.4

1.4

Any remaining (x > 70)

1.2

1.2

First 30 MJ (0 ≤ x ≤ 30)

1

Energy used (MJ) 0

20

40

60

80

Example 1 The graph shows the cost (in dollars) of a mobile phone call as a function of the length of the call: 2 1.8 1.6 1.4 1.2 1 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2 0

Cost

Minutes 1

2

3

4

5

6

a How much does a call that lasts 4 minutes and 5 seconds cost?

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Check the cost corresponding to a duration greater than 4 minutes and less than 5 minutes in the graph.

Notice that the small intervals on the vertical axis are increasing by $0.10 Cost = 1.70 dollars

b How much does a 3-minute call cost?

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Use the graph to check the cost at a certain duration.

There are two steps to consider at 3 minutes. Use the step that has a closed circle. Cost = 1.30 dollars

3.06 Step graphs mathspace.co

277


c What is the longest possible call that could be made for $1.50?

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Use the graph to check the duration based on the cost.

Consider the step that corresponds to a height of $1.50 Use the x-coordinate of the rightmost point on this step. Longest call = 4 minutes

d What is the cost increase for each new minute of call time?

Create a strategy Use the graph to check the difference between steps on the vertical axis.

Apply the idea

Reflect and check

Determine the interval of cost from a 4-minute call to a 5-minute call.

The cost difference between any two consecutive steps is $0.20.

Cost difference = $1.70 – $1.50 = $0.20

Example 2 At an indoor ski facility, the temperature is set to − 5°C at 2:00 p.m. At 3:00 p.m., the temperature is immediately brought down to − 12°C and maintained for 3 hours before being lowered again to − 18°C where it stays for the rest of the day’s operation. The facility operates until 10:00 p.m.: a Complete the step function that models the indoor temperature setting, y, at a certain time of the day, x hours after midday. 5, ⬚ x 3 y

, 3 x 6 , 6 x 10

Create a strategy Identify the three distinct parts to this function.

Apply the idea The temperature is – 5°C between 2:00 p.m. and 3:00 p.m. At 3:00 p.m., the temperature changes to – 12°C. At 6:00 p.m., the temperature changes to – 18°C. y

278

5, 2 12, 3 18, 6

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

x 3 x 6 x 10


b Create a graph of the step function that relates the time of day and set temperature inside the ski facility.

Create a strategy Graph a separate horizontal line for each part of the function, with a circle at each start and end point. The circle should be closed (filled in) if the value is included or left open if it is not.

Apply the idea Set up the axes. The horizontal axis needs to include 2:00 p.m. to 10:00 p.m. The vertical axis needs to include − 5°C to − 18°C. Consider the temperature − 5°C over the interval 2 ≤ x < 3. Draw a horizontal line at y = − 5. Since the temperature was set to − 5°C at 2:00 p.m., there will be a closed circle at x = 2. The circle at 3:00 p.m. must be open, since the temperature changed to − 12°C at 3:00 p.m. Consider the temperature − 12°C over the interval 3 ≤ x < 6. Draw a horizontal line at y = − 12 with a closed circle at x = 3. The circle at 6:00 p.m. will be open since this is when the temperature changed to − 18°C. Consider the temperature − 18°C over the interval 6 ≤ x ≤ 10. Draw a horizontal line at y = − 18 with a closed circle at x = 6. The ≤ symbol indicates that the interval includes 10:00 p.m., so use a closed circle at x = 10.

1 0 –2 –4 –6 –8 –10 –12 –14 –16 –18 –20

2

3

Time (p.m.) 4 5 6 7

8

9 10

Temperature (°C)

c Lakota entered the ski facility at 3:30 p.m. What was the set temperature inside the facility at this time?

Create a strategy Identify which interval in the step function (from part (a)) or which segment on the graph (from part (b)) corresponds to this x-value. Determine the temperature y for that interval or segment.

Apply the idea Lakota entered at 3:30 p.m. which corresponds to x = 3.5 hours. Using the step function defined in part (a), the value x = 3.5 falls into the second interval, 3 ≤ x < 6. For this interval, the temperature y is – 12°C. Alternatively, looking at the graph from part (b): find 3:30 p.m. (or x = 3.5) on the horizontal time axis. Trace vertically upwards to the segment of the graph. This segment is at a height corresponding to – 12°C on the vertical temperature axis. Therefore, the temperature inside the facility was set to – 12°C at 3:30 p.m.

3.06 Step graphs mathspace.co

279


d Xavier wants to wait until the indoor temperature is − 7°C or lower. When is the earliest he can enter the facility?

Create a strategy Examine each interval of the step function from part (a) or each segment of the graph from part (b). Identify all intervals/segments where the temperature meets the condition y ≤ – 7°C, and then determine the earliest start time among these valid intervals/segments.

Apply the idea 1. In the first interval, 2 ≤ x < 3 (2:00 p.m. to just before 3:00 p.m.), the temperature is − 5°C. Since − 5 is not less than or equal to − 7 (i.e., − 5 > − 7), this period does not meet Xavier’s requirement. 2. In the second interval, 3 ≤ x < 6 (3:00 p.m. to just before 6:00 p.m.), the temperature is −12°C. Since − 12 ≤ − 7, this temperature meets Xavier’s condition. This period starts at x = 3, which is 3:00 p.m. 3. In the third interval, 6 ≤ x ≤ 10 (6:00 p.m. to 10:00 p.m.), the temperature is − 18°C. Since − 18 ≤ − 7, this temperature also meets Xavier’s condition. This period starts at x = 6, which is 6:00 p.m. The time periods when the temperature is − 7°C or lower are from 3:00 p.m. onwards. The earliest time this condition is met is the start of the first such period. Therefore, the earliest Xavier can enter the facility is 3:00 p.m.

Idea summary A step graph consists of multiple horizontal line segments that do not connect, creating distinct steps as the graph moves from one level to another.

3.06 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

280

Determine if each statement about step graphs is true or false: a

A step graph consists of horizontal line segments where the value of the function is constant over specific intervals.

b

In a step graph, a closed circle at the end of an interval means the value at that point is not included in the interval.

c

A step graph can model a situation where a fee increases by a fixed amount at regular intervals, such as every hour.

d

The graph of a step function is always continuous because the steps are connected.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


2

3

Match each step function equation to its correct property: 1, 1 x 1 2, 0 x 2 y i ii y 3, 1 x 3 4, 2 x 5 0, 0 x 1 5, 1 x 2 10, 2 x 4

2, 2 x 0 0, 0 x 2

y

iii

y

a

The step at x = 2 has an open circle on the left and a closed circle on the right.

b

The function has three distinct steps over the intervals [0, 1), [1, 2], and (2, 4].

c

The step at x = 0, the graph has an open circle at y = − 2 and a closed circle at y = 0.

d

The step at x = 1 has an open circle on both the left and right.

iv

The graph shows the starting times of a shot put event for participants in different age groups. 8

Time (p.m.)

7 6 5 4 0

Age 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

Determine if each statement is true or false:

4

a

Only 7-year-olds start at 4 p.m.

b

11-year-olds start at 6 p.m.

c

17-year-olds can participate.

d

10- and 11-year-olds start at 5 p.m.

The graph shows the amount (in dollars) a lawyer charges for consultations: a

b c

Select the best description of the payment model: A

The lawyer charges $400 per hour

B

The lawyer charges $400 for 50 minutes

C

The lawyer charges $400 for up to, but not including, an hour

D

The lawyer charges $400 for up to and including an hour

How much does the lawyer charge for a 4-hour consultation? What is the shortest possible consultation that the lawyer charges for $800?

2600 Cost 2400 2200 2000 1800 1600 1400 1200 1000 800 600 400 200 0 1 2

3

4

Hours 5 6

3.06 Step graphs mathspace.co

281


5

The graph shows the cost per t-shirt (in dollars) when purchasing in bulk: 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Cost

T-shirts 10 20 30 40 50 60 70

a

What does an open circle on this step graph indicate?

b

If you purchase 10 t-shirts, what is the cost per t-shirt?

c

Does the cost per t-shirt generally increase or decrease as more t-shirts are purchased?

d

For which quantity range of t-shirts is the cost per t-shirt $5?

e

Identify the correct statements about the step graph. Select all that apply: A

The cost per t-shirt for purchasing exactly 15 t-shirts is $7, and the interval from 15 to 40 t-shirts is represented with an open circle at 15 and a closed circle at 40

B

The step graph has a constant cost of $3 per t-shirt over the interval [40, 55]

C

The cost per t-shirt drops from $5 to $3 at exactly 40 t-shirts, with a closed circle at 40 on the $5 step

D

The step graph is continuous because the steps are connected at each interval boundary

Practice 6

The graph shows the altitude (in kilometres) of a weather balloon over time:

Ex 1

18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 0

282

Altitude (km)

1

2

3

4

Time (hr) 5 6

a

What is the altitude of the balloon after 2 hours and 30 minutes of flight?

b

What is the altitude of the balloon after exactly 4 hours of flight?

c

What is the maximum time the balloon has been airborne if its current altitude is 15 km?

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


7

The step graph shows the prescribed dosage (in milligrams) of a medication based on a patient’s weight (in kilograms): a

8

Determine the prescribed dosage for a patient who weighs: i

1.7 kg

ii

2.5 kg

iii

0.5 kg

iv

3.2 kg

b

If the maximum safe dosage a particular patient can receive is 11 mg, what is the maximum weight this patient can be, according to the chart, to stay within this safe limit?

c

What is the maximum weight (as an interval boundary) a patient can be if their prescribed dosage will be: i

6 mg

ii

7 mg

iii

5.5 mg

iv

14 mg

The graph shows the parking costs (in dollars) over different time periods: a

How much would 5 hours of parking cost?

b

What is the longest duration a car can be parked for $6?

c

The carpark offers a weekly pass for $44. If Aaron parks his car for 6 hours each day, five days a week, how much would he save each week with the weekly pass?

14 Dosage (mg) 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Weight (kg) 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4

Cost

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Hours

0 9

The step graph shows the charges (in dollars) for a home phone plan: a

How much will a 3-minute phone call cost?

b

How much will 4 phone calls, lasting more than 1 minute but less than 2 minutes, cost?

c

A phone line user made these calls during one month: • 12 calls that were just under 2 minutes long each • 13 calls just under 4 minutes long each • 5 calls of less than 1 minute each

Calculate the total monthly charges, rounded to the nearest dollar.

3 2.7 2.4 2.1 1.8 1.5 1.2 0.9 0.6 0.3 0

1

2

3

4

5

6

Cost

Minutes 1

2

3

4

5

3.06 Step graphs mathspace.co

6

283


Ex 2

10

A plumber charges a $20 call-out fee to visit the site and an additional $30 for each 30-minute block or part thereof while on site. a

Complete the step function that models the total charge, y, for a plumber’s service, for x minutes after the call-out: 20, x ⬚ 50, ⬚ x ⬚ y 80, x 110, x 140, x

b

Create a step graph that matches this scenario.

c

Determine the total charge for a service that takes 45 minutes.

d

A customer has a budget of $100. Determine the time duration (in minutes) the plumber can work without exceeding the budget.

11

Hiring helium tanks for balloons at a party costs $20 up to and including the first hour, and $5 per extra hour or any part thereof. Construct a step graph to represent the total cost for hiring helium tanks from 0 to 5 hours.

12

The cost of a train fare is calculated at $1.30 for the first zone and then 20c for each additional zone after that. Sketch a graph of the fares for trips up to five zones, with the vertical axis in dollars.

13

Create a step graph for the charge for sending parcels, where the vertical axis is in dollars: Express Post satchels (mm)

284

Maximum weight (g)

Charge per item

Small (220 × 355)

500

$2.50

Medium (310 × 405)

3000

$4.25

Large (435 × 510)

5000

$7.75

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


14

An insurance company charges a fixed monthly premium depending on which age group a person falls into.

y

112.17, 128.72, 151.73, 176.27, 184.52,

18 x 25 x 35 x 45 x 55 x

25 35 45 55 65

The piecewise function outlines the premium, y, for a given age, x:

15

a

How much will the monthly premium for a 22-year old person be?

b

What could be the maximum age of someone who is paying $176.27 per month for their premium?

c

Fikile held an insurance policy from when she turned 26 to when she turned 30. During this time, how much did she pay altogether in premiums?

d

If you are 35 years old, how much will your annual premium increase by once you turn 36 years old?

A hotel charges these rates for hiring their function room: • $160 per hour for up to 2 hours inclusive. • $120 per hour for more than 2 hours and up to 5 hours inclusive. • $80 per hour for more than 5 hours and up to 10 hours inclusive. Create a step graph that shows the rate charged per hour based on the length of time the function room is booked.

Extend your thinking 16

A company offers a subscription service where the monthly fee decreases based on how long the customer has been subscribed. Additionally, if the customer cancels their subscription before completing a full year, they must pay a penalty fee. The pricing structure is as follows: • For the first 3 months, the monthly fee is $100. • From months 4 to 6, the monthly fee drops to $90. • From months 7 to 12, the monthly fee further decreases to $80. • After 12 months, the monthly fee stabilises at $70. If a customer cancels their subscription before the end of the 12th month, they incur a cancellation fee: • Cancelling in the first 3 months incurs a $200 penalty. • Cancelling between the 4th and 6th months incurs a $150 penalty. • Cancelling between the 7th and 12th months incurs a $100 penalty. a

Calculate the total cost of the subscription if the customer cancels after 5 months.

b

If the customer decides to cancel after 9 months, compare the total cost incurred versus if they had continued the subscription until the end of the 15th month. What is the difference in cost, and does it justify continuing the subscription?

3.06 Step graphs mathspace.co

285


17

A mobile data plan offers these usage steps: • For the first 2 GB of data, the cost is $10 per GB. • From 2 GB to 5 GB, the cost is $8 per GB. • From 5 GB to 10 GB, the cost is $6 per GB. • Beyond 10 GB, the cost is $5 per GB. A user consumes data at a variable rate, increasing by 1 GB every hour for the first 4 hours and then increasing by 2 GB every hour for the next 3 hours:

18

a

Determine the total cost of the user’s data usage at the end of the 7-hour period.

b

If another plan offers a flat rate of $7 per GB for any amount of data, compare the total cost for the 7-hour period under both plans. Which plan is more cost-effective?

A tenant lives in an apartment with a unique rent payment structure that escalates over time in a step-wise manner. The rent starts at $1000 per month for the first 6 months. After that: • From months 7 to 9, the rent increases to $1200 per month. • From months 10 to 12, the rent increases to $1500 per month. • From months 13 to 15, the rent increases to $1800 per month. • After 15 months, the rent increases to $2000 per month. To encourage long-term tenancy, the landlord offers a rebate program where, for every 3-month period the tenant stays beyond 12 months, they receive a $500 rebate, applied at the end of the 15th month and every 3 months after that: a

Calculate the total rent paid by the tenant by the end of the 18th month, taking into account the rebates.

b

A different tenant moves out after 14 months. Calculate the total rent they paid. By how much is this less than the net amount the first tenant paid after staying for the full 18 months?

Chapter 3 review

Online review

286

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

mathspace.co


“Linear algebra is a remarkably applicable subject, connecting mathematics to the real world through models and computations.” – Gilbert Strang


Big ideas • Percentages, rates, and ratios are the foundational tools of financial arithmetic, used to calculate, compare, and analyse monetary values in various contexts. • Simple and compound interest are distinct mathematical models that describe how investments or loans grow over time, with compounding leading to exponential growth. • Financial models are used to track changes in asset values through appreciation and depreciation, and to evaluate different purchasing options, enabling informed consumer decisions.

4 Financial arithmetic Chapter outline 4.01 4.02 4.03 4.04 4.05 4.06 4.07 4.08

Percentages Rates and ratios Unit cost comparisons Percentage change and GST Simple interest Compound interest Investigation: Spreadsheets and interest Financial applications Purchase options Chapter 4 review

290 301 309 315 326 337 346 359


If you save 20% of your weekly allowance each week for a year, you’ll have saved more than double your monthly allowance!


4.01   Percentages After this lesson, you will be able to… • convert between fractions, decimals, and percentages. • solve problems involving percentages in practical contexts. • calculate percentages using mental, written, and digital methods.

Percentages and fractions Both percentages and fractions can be used to represent identical portions. Percentage means “per hundred” or divide by 100, so any percentage can be written as a fraction with the denominator of 100. To convert fractions to percentages and vice versa: × 100%

Fraction

Percentage

÷ 100%

Example 1 Xanthe and Jimmy are checking the spelling of an article before it is printed. Xanthe checks

3 of 5

the article and Jimmy checks 34% of the article. a What percentage of the article have they checked altogether?

Create a strategy Convert

3 to a percentage and combine with 34%. 5

Apply the idea Converting 3 5

3 to percentage: 5

3 100% Multiply the fraction by 100% 5 = 3 × 20%

Divide 100% by 5

= 60%

Evaluate

Adding the two percentages: 3 34% 5

60% 34%

= 94%    Evaluate

Therefore, the percentage of the article they have checked altogether is 94%.

290

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

Substitute

3 60% 5


b What fraction of the article have they checked altogether?

Create a strategy Convert 94% to a fraction.

Apply the idea Converting 94% to a fraction: 94% 100% 47 50

94%

Divide the percentage by 100% Simplify fraction and cancel out the % 47 . 50

So, the fraction of the article they have checked altogether is

Idea summary To convert fractions to percentages and vice versa: × 100%

Fraction

Percentage

÷ 100% Simplify the resulting fraction where possible.

Percentages and decimals Percentages and decimals also represent identical portions and are converted using calculations similar to those for percentages and fractions. To convert decimals to percentages and vice versa: × 100%

Decimal

Percentage

÷ 100%

4.01 Percentages mathspace.co

291


Exploration This is a 10 × 10 grid. 1. How many blocks are coloured in? Express this amount as a fraction, decimal and percentage. 2. If an additional 15 blocks were coloured in, express the new amount of coloured blocks as a fraction, decimal and percentage.

Example 2 A bushfire moves through an area of land, burning 20% of the area. Express how much of the land is burnt as a decimal.

Create a strategy Convert 20% into a decimal by dividing it by 100%.

Apply the idea 20% Divide the percentage by 100% 100% 2 Simplify 10 Express as a decimal 0.2 Burnt portion of land

Therefore, the burnt portion of land as a decimal is 0.2

Reflect and check When technology is not available, it is useful to remember the methods for converting a fraction to a decimal: 2 1. Division method: A fraction represents a division. For the simplified fraction , this means 10 2 ÷ 10 = 0.2 20 2. Place value method: The fraction means “twenty hundredths,” which is written as 0.20 100 2 or 0.2. The simplified fraction means “two tenths,” which is written as 0.2. The digit ‘2’ is 10 placed in the tenths position after the decimal point.

292

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 3 Convert 0.42 to a percentage.

Create a strategy Multiply 0.42 by 100%.

Apply the idea 0.42 = 0.42 × 100%

Multiply the decimal by 100%

= 42%

Evaluate

Idea summary To convert decimals to percentages and vice versa: × 100%

Decimal

Percentage

÷ 100%

Percentages of an amount When determining the percentage of an amount without technology, it is useful to remember how to calculate some common simple percentages by breaking them down into smaller, more manageable parts. To calculate: • 50%, use that

50% 1 , so divide the amount by 2 100% 2

• 25%, use that

25% 1 , so divide the amount by 4 100% 4

• 10%, use that

10% 1 , so divide the amount by 10 100% 10

• 5%, use that

5% 1 1 of 10%, so determine 10% then divide the amount by 2 100% 20 2

Alternatively, divide the amount by 20. 1% 1 • 1%, use that , so divide the amount by 100 100% 100

4.01 Percentages mathspace.co

293


Example 4 Determine 85% of $420 by hand.

Create a strategy Break down the percentage into smaller manageable parts.

Apply the idea Choose percentages like 50%, 25%, and 10% for ease of mental calculation as they involve simple divisions (by 2, 4, and 10). Determine 50%, 25% and 10% of the amount and then add the amounts together. To determine 50% of $420: 50% of $420 = $420 ÷ 2 = $210

Divide the amount by 2 Evaluate

To determine 25% of $420: 25% of $420 = $420 ÷ 4 = $105

Divide the amount by 4 Evaluate

To determine 10% of $420: 10% of $420 = $420 ÷ 10 = $42

Divide the amount by 10 Evaluate

To determine 85% of $420: 85% of $420 = 210 + 105 + 42 = $357

Sum all the amounts Evaluate

Therefore, 85% of $420 is $357.

Reflect and check The percentage can be calculated directly: 85 420 100

0.85 420 = $357

Idea summary To calculate: • • • •

50%, divide the amount by 2 25%, divide the amount by 4 10%, divide the amount by 10 5%, determine 10% of the amount and then halve that result • Alternatively, divide the amount by 20 • 1%, divide the amount by 100

294

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


One quantity as a percentage of another Expressing one amount as a percentage of another is a key mathematical skill used in everyday situations, such as determining how full a container is, analysing survey data, or comparing measurements. To calculate the percentage, form a fraction: Percentage =

Current amount 100% Total amount

When quantities have different units, convert them to the same unit before calculating the percentage. For example, to determine what percentage 65 cm is of 3 m, convert 3 m to 300 cm or convert 65 cm to 0.65 m.

Example 5 There are 26 cats and 24 dogs at an animal shelter. a Determine the total number of animals in the animal shelter.

Create a strategy Add the number of cats and dogs.

Apply the idea Total = 26 + 24 = 50

Add the number of cats and dogs Evaluate

b What percentage of the animals in the shelter are dogs?

Create a strategy Write down the number of dogs as a fraction of the total number of animals in the animal shelter then multiply by 100% to convert it to percentage.

Apply the idea Percentage of dogs

Number of dogs 100% Write the formula for the Total number of animals percentage of dogs 24 100% Substitute the number of dogs 50 and total number of animals 100 Rearrange for easier calculation 24 % 50 24 2% = 48%

Simplify the percentage Evaluate

4.01 Percentages mathspace.co

295


Reflect and check This can also be done by converting the fraction to a denominator of 100: Number of dogs Total number of animals

24 50

Substitute the values

24 2 50 2

Scale the fraction to a denominator of 100

48 100

Evaluate numerator and denominator

= 48%

Express as a percentage

c What percentage of the animals in the shelter are cats?

Create a strategy Since dogs and cats are the only animals, their percentages sum to 100%. Subtract the percentage of dogs from 100%.

Apply the idea Percentage of cats = 100% – Percentage of dogs

Write the equation

= 100% – 48% Substitute the value for percentage of dogs = 52%

Evaluate

Reflect and check There are 26 cats in the shelter, so using the number of cats in the shelter can also give the percentage of cats: Percentage of cats =

Number of cats 100% Total number of animals

26 100% 50 = 52% =

Idea summary To find a quantity as a percentage, represent the quantity as a fraction, with the quantity as the numerator and the whole as the denominator. Multiply the fraction by 100% to convert it to a percentage.

296

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


4.01 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

Fill in the blanks: a b c d

2

3

4

8

To convert from percentages to decimals, ⬚ the percentage by ⬚. c

35 100

d

50 100

d

80 % 100

Express these percentages as fractions: 7%

b

27%

c

47%

d

100%

c

85%

d

100%

0.55

c

0.99

d

1.01

12% = ⬚ 25

d

90% = 9 ⬚

Express these percentages as decimals: 13%

b

29%

Express these decimals as percentages: a

7

To convert from decimals to percentages, ⬚ the decimal by 100%.

Identify whether these fractions are equivalent to 80%: 80 4 a b c 0.8 10 5

a 6

To convert from percentages to fractions, ⬚ the percentage by ⬚ and simplify.

Express these fractions as percentages: 6 10 a b 100 100

a 5

To convert from fractions to percentages, multiply the fraction by ⬚ and evaluate.

0.11

b

Complete each statement: a

10% = 0.⬚

b

8.3% = 0.⬚

c

e

120% = 1

⬚ 5

f

205% = 2.⬚

g

What percentage is 8 of 32?

⬚% = 0.05

h

⬚% = 2.3

Practice 9 Ex 1a

Express these fractions as percentages: 9 2 a b 10 5 e

7 20

f

35 35

c

2 25

d

1 4

g

22 50

h

6 8

4.01 Percentages mathspace.co

297


10 Ex 1b

11

12 Ex 2

Express these percentages as simplified fractions: a

8%

b

10%

c

25%

d

50%

e

65%

f

75%

g

90%

h

96%

Express these percentages as simplified fractions or mixed numbers: a

1.2%

b

28.8%

c

30.1%

d

4.25%

e

18.97%

f

43.55%

g

450%

h

0.1%

d

172%

Convert these percentages to decimals: a

5%

b

52%

c

80%

e i

0.65%

f

25%

g

100%

h

321%

591%

j

9.7%

k

0.69%

l

75.08%

13

Using technology, convert 38.76% to a decimal.

14

Convert these decimals to percentages:

Ex 3

15

a

0.24

b

0.03

c

0.7

d

0.004

e

1.04

f

0.55

g

2.17

h

0.9

i

0.13

j

0.9

k

8.34

l

0.051

Convert between percentages, fractions and decimals to complete these tables: a

Fraction Decimal 1 2 ⬚ ⬚

Percentage

⬚

⬚

⬚

30%

b

Fraction

17

For the fraction

19

⬚

⬚

112.5%

⬚

Convert 0.6 into a percentage, rounded to two decimal places.

Ex 4

⬚

⬚

16

18

Percentage

5 8

⬚

0.75

Decimal

a

144 : 400 Convert it to a fraction with a denominator of 100.

b

Convert it to a percentage.

0.04

⬚

Evaluate: a

50% of 720

b

10% of 36

c

25% of 80

d

46% of 1000

e

30% of 23 L

f

28% of 500 m

g

16% of 4 hrs

h

900% of 90 m

Evaluate, rounded to two decimal places: a

49.8% of 890

b

5.2% of 80 kg

c

1.57% of $426.23

d

3.5% of $27 599

e

70% of 63.9 kg

f

30% of 28.55 L

g

12.7% of 13 hrs

h

33% of 33 mL

20

What percentage is 50 cm of 4 m?

298

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


21

Using technology, what percentage is 318.75 of 425?

22

In a basket, there are 5 apples and 11 oranges.

Ex 5

23

a

Determine the total number of fruits in the basket.

b

What percentage of the fruits is apples?

c

What percentage of the fruits is oranges?

Interest rates are often listed as percentages, but decimal values are needed when using them in calculations. What is the decimal representation of each of these interest rates? a

24

25

26

12%

b

8.2%

c

7.14%

Patricia and Nadia are among the candidates for a school leader. Patricia receives 0.3 of the total votes cast and Nadia receives 0.6 of the total votes cast. a

What was the combined percentage of votes for Patricia and Nadia?

b

What percentage of votes did not go to Patricia?

Irene spends 27% of her pocket money each week. a

Express how much of her pocket money she spends as a decimal.

b

Express how much of her pocket money she saves as a decimal.

In a census, it was found that 25.5% of the population were born overseas. What fraction of the entire population were born overseas?

27

Shaun spends 94% of his pocket money each week. a

28

29

What fraction does he spend?

b

What fraction does he save?

In a recent survey of planes landing at a major airport, it was observed that 19% of the flights were delayed less than an hour and 3% of the flights were delayed an hour or more but less than two hours. a

Find the percentage of flights that are delayed less than two hours.

b

If 9000 flights arrive at the airport in a day, how many flights are delayed less than two hours?

Amelia spends 40% of her weekly income on rent. If her rent is $440 each week, use technology to determine her weekly income.

Extend your thinking 30

Find 10% of $321.06, rounded to the nearest 5 cents.

31

Ryan scored 60% on his maths exam. The total number of marks that could be scored was 110. What was Ryan’s actual mark out of 110?

4.01 Percentages mathspace.co

299


32

A theatre has a capacity of 1000 people. On the opening night, the theatre was 95% full. On the second night, it was 70% full. Determine the total number of people that attended the theatre on the first two nights.

33

Jay scored 92% of a possible 600 marks. He had aimed to score 96% of the marks. How many more marks were required to reach his goal?

34

A car weighs 2200 kg and a truck weighs 4 tonnes. Using technology, express the weight of the car as a percentage of the weight of the truck. (Note that 1 tonne = 1000 kg.)

35

A city implements environmental policies to reduce emissions over a 3-year period, targeting the manufacturing and transportation sectors. The policies include carbon taxes, green technology subsidies and stricter regulations. Initial emissions and expected reduction rates: Manufacturing sector:

300

Transportation sector:

• Initial emissions: 500 000 metric tonnes

• Initial emissions: 200 000 metric tonnes

• Expected annual reduction rate: 8%

• Expected annual reduction rate: 6%

• Additional reduction in the second year: Extra 3% due to technology grants

• Additional reduction in the third year: Extra 10% due to a new public transportation initiative

a

Calculate the total emissions for each sector after 3 years, accounting for the different reduction rates and special initiatives.

b

Determine the percentage contribution of each sector to the total emissions at the end of the 3-year period. Compare this with the initial contribution to understand the impact of the policies.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


4.02   Rates and ratios After this lesson, you will be able to… • express rates in simplest form. • convert rates to different units. • apply rates in practical contexts.

Simplify and convert rates Understanding and using rates and ratios for comparisons is essential. Ratio A comparison of the relative size of two or more quantities.

For example, if a bag of marbles contains 3 blue marbles and 2 red marbles, the comparison between the number of red and blue marbles as a ratio is described as red : blue = 2 : 3. Rate A type of ratio that compares two quantities measured in different units. It measures how one quantity changes in relation to another.

For example, the rate at which a tap leaks may be 30 mL every 5 minutes. Rates are often expressed as unitary rates (or a unit rate) where the second quantity in the rate has a measure of 1 unit. The unitary rate for the leaking tap would be 6 mL for every 1 minute. To abbreviate, the unitary rate for the leaking tap can be written as 6 mL/min. Common examples of rates include: • Speeds, for example 60 km/h, 20 m/s • Growth rates, for example 20 cm/year, 15 mm/month, 2 kg per week • Cost of groceries, for example $5 per kg, $1.20 per 100 g, $10 per box A rate is usually considered simplified when it is represented as a unitary rate. To simplify a rate, divide one quantity by another and write the compound unit. Converting rates to unitary rates allows comparison of rates with similar compound units. Sometimes a rate can be measured in several different units. For example, speed which measures distance per time, could be measured in km/h, m/s, mm/s and the units used will depend on what is reasonable for the speed being measured. To compare the speed of a car travelling 40 km/h and a sprinter who runs at 12.2 m/s, the units of one of these rates need to be converted to the other by multiplying or dividing the rate by the appropriate constant.

4.02 Rates and ratios mathspace.co

301


× 1000

× 100

m

km

÷ 1000 ÷ 60

seconds

× 60

mm

cm

÷ 100

÷ 10

÷ 60

minutes

× 10

÷7

÷ 24

hours

× 60

days

× 24

weeks

×7

Example 1 Eliza drove 468 km in 6 hours. a What was her speed in km/h?

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Use the speed formula

Speed =

Speed =

Distance Time

468 Substitute the values 6 for distance and time

= 78 km/h Evaluate

b What was her speed in m/h?

Create a strategy Use the relationship 1 km = 1000 m.

Apply the idea 468 km can be converted into m. So, 468 × 1000 = 468 000 m. The given Time = 6 hours. Speed = =

Distance Time

468 000 Substitute the values for the converted distance and time 6

= 78 000 m/h

302

Start with the formula for speed

Evaluate

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Reflect and check When converting units, think carefully about whether the answer should get smaller or larger and if there is a need to divide or multiply by the conversion factor. For instance, the distance travelled in metres within an hour should be greater than the distance travelled in kilometres within the same time frame. Therefore, a rate in m/h will be greater than if it were expressed in km/h.

c What was her speed in m/s? Round the answer to two decimal places.

Create a strategy Divide the distance in metres by the time in seconds. Use the relationship 1 hour = 3600 seconds.

Apply the idea One hour has 60 minutes and 1 minute has 60 seconds. So 6 hours has 6 × 60 × 60 = 21 600 seconds. Converted rate =

468 000 m Substitute the values for converted distance 21 600 s and converted time

= 21.67 m/s Evaluate and round

Reflect and check Another way to determine the speed in m/s is by using the answer in part (b) and directly converting the hours to seconds: 78 000 m 78 000 m = 3600 s 1 h = 21.67 m/s

Example 2 Patricia eats 7.2 litres of ice cream in 6 minutes in an ice cream eating contest. Patricia wants to determine her rate of ice cream consumption in millilitres per second. a How many millilitres of ice cream did Patricia consume?

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Use the relationship 1 L = 1000 mL. ÷ 1000

÷ 1000

÷ 1000

7.2 L = 7.2 × 1000 Multiply the amount in litres by 1000 = 7200 mL

mL × 1000

L

kL × 1000

ML

Evaluate

Patricia consumed 7200 mL of ice cream.

× 1000

4.02 Rates and ratios mathspace.co

303


b How many seconds did it take for Patricia to consume all the ice cream?

Create a strategy Use the relationship 1 minute = 60 seconds.

Apply the idea 6 min = 6 × 60 = 360 s

Multiply the time in minutes by 60 Evaluate

It took 360 seconds for Patricia to consume all the ice cream.

c What is her rate of consumption of ice cream in mL/s?

Create a strategy Divide the number of millilitres by the number of seconds and determine the compound units.

Apply the idea Consumption rate =

7200 mL Substitute the values for converted 360 s volume and time

= 20 mL/s

Evaluate

Patricia’s rate of consumption is 20 mL/s.

Idea summary • A ratio is a comparison of the relative size of two or more quantities. • A rate is a ratio between two quantities that are measured in different units. Rates are often expressed as unitary rates where the second quantity in the rate has a measure of one. To simplify a rate to a unitary rate, divide one quantity by another and write the compound unit. To convert the units of a rate, multiply or divide the rate by the appropriate constant.

Compare rates Rates are fundamental in comparing quantities and understanding relationships between variables in various real-world contexts. For instance, comparing if it is better to work for Company A which pays $40 per hour or Company B which pays $75 000 per year requires comparing their hourly rates. By simplifying rates and converting units to compare rates, it is possible to compare rates and make important decisions.

304

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 3 Two shearers wanted to work out who was the faster shearer. Jenny sheared 144 sheep over 6 days, and Sean sheared 115 sheep in 5 days. a At what rate per day did Jenny shear sheep?

Create a strategy Divide the number of sheep sheared by the number of days it took.

Apply the idea Number of sheep sheared Write the formula for rate of sheared Number of days sheep per day 144 sheep = Substitute the values 6 days

Rate =

= 24 sheep per day

Evaluate and write compound units

b At what rate per day did Sean shear sheep?

Apply the idea Rate =

115 sheep Divide the number of sheep sheared by 5 days number of days

= 23 sheep per day

Evaluate and write compound units

c Who sheared sheep at a faster daily rate?

Create a strategy The faster the rate, the greater the average number of sheep sheared per day.

Apply the idea Jenny has a faster rate of 24 sheep per day while Sean has a slightly slower rate of 23 sheep per day.

Idea summary Rates are fundamental in comparing quantities and understanding relationships between variables in various real-world contexts.

4.02 Rates and ratios mathspace.co

305


4.02 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

Skye is taking part in a hotdog eating competition. What compound units could be used to measure how quickly she can eat hotdogs?

2

A tap fills up a 240-litre tub in 4 hours. a b

3

A toy manufacturer makes 720 toys in 9 hours. 720 toys a Simplify to a unit rate. 9 hours b

4

5

What compound unit should be used for the rate of water flow? Amount of water Complete the statement: L L per 4 Time

How many toys can be made in one hour?

Convert each unit: a

120 minutes to hours

b

3000 metres to kilometres

c

4 minutes to seconds

d

5 litres to millilitres

Convert each compound unit by completing each statement: a c

1 km/h = ⬚ m/h 1 h/km = ⬚ min/km

b d

1 L/h = ⬚ mL/h

1 m/s = ⬚ m/min

Practice

Ex 1

6

Tricia reads 20 pages of her book in 2 hours. What is the unit rate of pages per hour?

7

Tina burns 640 calories by jogging 8 kilometres. What is the rate at which Tina burns calories per kilometre?

8

A car travels 253 kilometres on 11 litres of biofuel. Express the fuel consumption as a unit rate.

9

A filmmaker is stitching together frames for a movie. They put together 6 frames for every 0.2 seconds. What is the frame rate of the movie in frames per second?

10

It requires approximately 8 mL of polyethylene to create 20 plastic bags.

11

306

a

What is the rate of polyethylene used per plastic bag?

b

How much polyethylene would be required to create 5 plastic bags?

Daisy travelled 429 kilometres in 6.5 hours. a

What was her speed in m/h?

b

What was her speed in m/s? Round the answer to two decimal places.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


12

Ex 2

13

14

Convert: a

600 km/h to km/min

b

300 mL/h to mL/min

c

36 dollars/h to dollars/min

d

96 L/day to L/h

A crabeater seal can filter 0.9 litres of water in each dive while looking for food. They can stay underwater for 30 minutes each dive. a

What is the rate of water filtered in L/min?

b

What is the rate of water filtered in mL/min?

c

What is the rate of water filtered in mL/s?

A runner approximates the distance between two street lights to be 33 metres. It takes them 10 seconds to run from one street light to the other. a

15

Ex 3

16

What is the runner’s speed in m/h?

b

What is the runner’s speed in km/h?

Calculate the amount per dollar, rounded to two decimal places, if purchasing: a

349 g for $9

b

709 mL for $5

c

27 m for $15

d

50 g for $6.95

e

20 mL for $5.25

f

140 m for $2.18

Toby and Lina are competing to see who scores more goals in soccer: • Lina has scored 58 goals over 31 matches. • Toby has scored 76 goals over 42 matches.

17

a

What is the unit rate of goals scored per match for each of the players?

b

Who is the better scorer?

c

How many goals are expected for each player over 150 matches?

Car A uses 103 L of petrol for 850 km travelled, and Car B uses 74 L of petrol for 680 km travelled. a

What is the fuel consumption in kilometres per litre for Car A?

b

What is the fuel consumption in kilometres per litre for Car B?

c

Which is the most fuel-efficient car?

d

How far would 350 L of petrol take Car B?

18

A carton of 10 eggs costs $6.50. How much does 1 egg cost?

19

A 0.75-litre bottle of milk costs $1.05. How much does the milk cost per litre?

20

While filling a rectangular pool 72 centimetres deep, Victoria notices it has taken 3 hours to fill it up to a depth of 36 centimetres.

21

a

At what rate, in metres per hour, is the pool being filled up? Express your answer as a decimal.

b

At this rate, Victoria estimates that it will take her 6 hours to fill up the pool. Is she correct?

In an ice cream eating contest, the winner ate 2.22 litres of ice cream in 2 minutes. What was the winner’s rate of consumption of ice cream in mL/s?

4.02 Rates and ratios mathspace.co

307


Extend your thinking 22

Tom’s car can travel 5000 kilometres on 1260 litres of fuel. Susana’s car can travel 1600 kilometres on 192 litres of fuel.

Who owns the most fuel-efficient car? Explain your answer. 23

Avril is running from John in a game of tag. Avril runs 30 metres every 5 seconds and John runs 21 metres every 3 seconds. How long will it take for John to tag Avril if they are initially 8 metres apart?

24

Barry’s Bargain Bins sells backpacks for $5.00 each, and if you buy 5 backpacks the 6th is free. Lucie’s Low Price Supplies sells backpacks for $6.50 each, and if you buy 6 backpacks the 7th is free. Holly wants to buy 21 backpacks. Which store should Holly shop at? Explain your answer.

25

James paid $89 for 61 litres of petrol in North Haverbrook. Valentina paid $76 for 45 litres of petrol in Dunkilderry. James buys 28 litres of petrol in Oklachusetts. How much will this cost if the petrol price matches the best price per litre between North Haverbrook and Dunkilderry?

26

308

The Van Allen belts are regions around Earth filled with high-energy particles, posing a significant radiation risk to spacecraft and astronauts. These particles, including electrons and protons, can penetrate shielding and cause serious health issues. The radiation dose absorbed by materials and living tissue is measured in Grays (Gy) and Sieverts (Sv), respectively, with 1 Gy = 1 Sv for electrons and gamma rays and 1 Gy = 2 Sv for protons. a

An astronaut on the International Space Station (ISS) is exposed to a radiation dose rate of 1 milliSv/day. Calculate the equivalent number of days this dose represents compared to the natural background radiation on Earth, which is 4 milliSv per year.

b

In the Van Allen belts, the average radiation dose rate for a satellite is 50 Grays per year. If an astronaut, shielded similarly to a satellite, passes through the belts in 2 hours, calculate the total radiation dose they would receive. Assume 1 Gy = 1 Sv for simplicity.

c

A satellite can safely function until it accumulates 1000 Grays of radiation. If the annual radiation dose in the Van Allen belts is 50 Grays, how many years will the satellite last before reaching its radiation limit?

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


4.03   Unit cost comparisons After this lesson, you will be able to… • express rates and ratios in simplest form. • solve “best buy” problems using rates and the unitary method. • apply proportional reasoning in practical contexts.

Unit cost comparisons Unit cost The cost of a single unit of a good or service. Unit cost comparisons involve evaluating the cost per unit or unit cost of different products or services to determine which option offers the best value for money. The best buy will have the lower price per unit. When faced with two options that involve different quantities, rate calculations are used to determine the unit cost of the item.

Example 1 Isabelle is buying juice for her nephew’s birthday party. A 3.2 L bottle of apple juice costs $13.76. A 2.1 L bottle of orange juice costs $6.30 a How much does apple juice cost per litre?

Create a strategy Divide the cost of the bottle by the number of litres.

Apply the idea Given: Cost of one bottle = $13.76, Number of litres = 3.2 L Cost of one bottle Number of litres $13.76 = 3.2 L = $4.30/L

Unit cost of apple juice =

Write the formula for unit cost of apple juice Substitute the values Evaluate and express with proper compound unit

4.03 Unit cost comparisons mathspace.co

309


b How much does orange juice cost per litre?

Create a strategy Divide the cost of the bottle by the number of litres.

Apply the idea Given: Cost of one bottle = $6.30, Number of litres = 2.1 L Cost of one bottle Number of litres $6.30 = 2.1 L

Unit cost of orange juice =

= $3.00/L

Write the formula for unit cost of orange juice Substitute the values Evaluate and express with proper compound unit

c Which juice is the best buy?

Create a strategy Compare the answers in part (a) and (b) and determine which juice is cheaper per litre.

Apply the idea The cost of apple juice per litre is $4.30, while the cost of orange juice per litre is $3.00. So the best buy is the orange juice.

Example 2 A supermarket sells three different-sized options for coffee: • Option A: $43 for 1 kg • Option B: $12 for 150 g • Option C: $35 for 700 g Rank the coffee options in order of best buys by determining the cost per 100 g of coffee.

Create a strategy Convert each option’s quantity to units of 100 g by dividing the mass (in grams) by 100. Divide the cost of each coffee option by the number of 100 g and then rank from the lowest unit cost to the highest unit cost.

310

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Apply the idea Option A is 1 kg which is equal to 1000 g. This contains 10 units of 100 g: Option A =

$43 10

Write the equation for the cost per 100 g coffee

= $4.30 per 100 g Evaluate and express with proper compound unit Option B is 150 g, this contains 1.5 units of 100 g: $12 Write the equation for the cost per 100 g coffee 1.5 = $8 per 100 g Evaluate and express with proper compound unit

Option B =

Option C is 700 g, this contains 7 units of 100 g: $35 Write the equation for the cost per 100 g coffee 7 = $5 per 100 g Evaluate and express with proper compound unit

Option C =

Ranking the options from the lowest to the highest unit cost to determine the best value: Option A ($4.30 per 100 g), Option C ($5 per 100 g), Option B ($8 per 100 g)

Reflect and check Using 100 g as a single unit rather than 1 g simplifies the comparison and calculation process for several reasons: • Ease of comparison: Larger units, such as 100 g, make it easier to compare prices at a glance because the differences in cost become more apparent and significant. If using 1 g, the costs would be very small numbers, making comparisons less intuitive. • Practicality: In everyday scenarios, people buy products in larger quantities rather than per gram. Pricing per 100 g is closer to real-world purchasing habits and makes more practical sense for consumers.

Idea summary The unit cost is the cost of a single unit of a good or service. Calculating unit costs using proportional reasoning or the unitary method allows comparison of multiple options to identify the best buy.

4.03 Unit cost comparisons mathspace.co

311


4.03 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

A 1.5 kg crab costs $24. What is the cost per kilogram of crab?

2

Calculate the unit cost of each item:

3

a

6 g costs $0.84

b

43 mL costs $3.44

c

13.2 kg costs $3.30

d

141 g costs $15

e

274 mL costs $7

f

26.2 m costs $17

Determine the cost per 100 g of each item: a

$35 per 500 g

b

$40 per 700 g

c

$20 per 250 g

d

$98 per 2.8 kg

Practice Ex 1

4

A supermarket sells two different brands of eggs, Happy Hens and Sunny Side Up: • Happy Hens eggs cost $6.00 for 12 eggs. • Sunny Side Up eggs cost $1.50 for 5 eggs.

5

a

What is the cost in cents per egg from Happy Hens?

b

What is the cost in cents per egg from Sunny Side Up?

c

Which brand sells its eggs at a cheaper price?

Marcus feels like buying some ice cream for himself and his friends: • A box of 8 Frostspire cones costs $18.00 • A box of 5 Chocovelve bars costs $7.25 a b

Calculate the cost of a Frostspire cone. Calculate the cost of a Chocovelve bar.

c

Which type of ice cream is the better buy?

6

At Emporio, durian is sold for 76 cents per kilogram. At Greenery, each 5.5 kg durian is sold for $2.97. Which store offers the best buy?

7

Pauline is buying juice for her son’s birthday party. She considers these offers: • A 2.6 L bottle of pineapple juice costs $8.84 • A 1.7 L bottle of grape juice costs $4.42 Which juice is the best buy?

8

James needs 1 kg of blueberries to make a pie. He made a list of the prices of blueberries in four supermarkets close to his house: • Market Fresh: 1 kg for $3 • Garden Fresh: 500 g for $2.25 • Fruit World: 2 kg for $5.50 • My Market: 2 kg for $6 Which shop was selling blueberries at the cheapest price per kilogram?

312

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Ex 2

9

There are three brands of bottled water in the market. Their prices are as shown: • Brand A: 2 L for $3 • Brand B: 7 L for $11 • Brand C: 15 L for $9 Determine which brand is:

10

11

12

13

14

a

The best buy

b

The most expensive

Determine which shop offers the best buy: a • Bill’s Brilliant Bars: 152 grams for $19, or • Charlie’s Cheery Chocs: 90 grams for $9 b

• Frankie’s Fabric: 16 metres for $208, or • Chloe’s Cloth: 18 metres for $216, or • Marge’s Material: 11 metres for $121

c

• Honest Anne’s Soda: 600 mL for $2.10, or • Fair Freddy’s Pop: 2 L for $9

Consider the sale listings of two properties, the first property is a 350 m2 property priced at $650 000 and the second is a 459 m2 property listed for $750 000. a

Calculate the price in dollars per square metre of the first property.

b

Calculate the price in dollars per square metre of the second property.

c

Based on the price per square metre, which listing appears to be a better buy?

Two litres of milk, with an expiry date a week from today, costs $3. A large 4-litre bottle of the same brand, which expires in two days, is discounted to $3.40: a

What is the unit cost of the 2 L bottle?

b

What is the unit cost of the 4 L bottle?

c

Based only on the unit costs, which is the better buy?

d

If a family usually takes a week to get through 2 litres of milk, is it worth spending more money to get the cheaper unit cost for the family? Explain your answer.

Carol needs two planks of wood to complete a cabinet she is going to sell. The planks of wood are sold in packs of three for $40 per pack or in a pack of ten for $100 per pack. a

What is the unit cost for the pack of three?

b

What is the unit cost for the pack of ten?

c

Based on the unit costs, which is the better buy?

d

In Carol’s circumstance, is it worth spending more money to get the cheaper unit cost? Explain your answer.

At a grower’s market, mangosteens are sold at Fresh Mart for 56 cents per kilogram. At Nature’s Harvest, each 4.5 kg mangosteen is sold for $3.50: a

Calculate the price of 4.5 kg of mangosteen from Fresh Mart.

b

Which store is the best buy?

c

What is the most that the owner of Nature’s Harvest can charge for his 4.5 kg mangosteens if he wants to beat the best buy by 5%?

4.03 Unit cost comparisons mathspace.co

313


15

A 500 g bag of almonds usually costs $12.95 and a 200 g bag of almonds costs $8.95. Today, the 500 g bag is for sale at 10% off. a

Determine the price per gram of the 500 g bag of almonds after the discount in cents. Round your answer to two decimal places.

b

Determine the price per gram of the 200 g bag of almonds in cents. Round your answer to two decimal places.

c

Which bag of almonds is better value in terms of price per gram?

d

What is the difference between the two bags of almonds in terms of cents per gram?

Extend your thinking 16

A local grocery store is offering two different deals on cereal. The first deal is a buy one, get one 50% off offer on a box of Bouncy Berries priced at $6. The second deal is a buy two, get one free offer on a box of Krispy Krunchers priced at $5. Which deal offers the better value for money?

17

Maria needs to stock up on dish soap and is evaluating two brands. Brand A sells a 2.5 L bottle for $8.75, while Brand B offers a 3.0 L bottle for $10.50. If Brand A has a promotion where buying two bottles gets a 15% discount on the total price, how much will Maria save per litre if she buys 5 litres of dish soap from Brand A instead of Brand B?

18

Jessica is comparing two brands of detergent. Brand A offers a 2.75 kg box for $9.90, and Brand B offers a 3.5 kg box for $13.65. Brand A is running a “Buy 3, Get 1 free” promotion, and Brand B offers a 20% discount on purchases over $40. If Jessica wants to buy at least 10 kg of detergent, which brand offers the best value considering the promotions?

19

A school’s robotics club needs to assemble 7 identical robot kits for a competition. Each kit requires: • 3 rods • 5 gears • 2 panels They can purchase components from two suppliers, Supplier A and Supplier B. The prices are as follows: Supplier A: • Rods: Pack of 10 for $5.00 • Gears: Pack of 20 for $8.00 • Panels: Pack of 5 for $3.00

Supplier B: • Rods: Pack of 13 for $7.00 • Gears: Pack of 15 for $6.50 • Panels: Pack of 10 for $5.50

Determine and justify the most cost-effective purchasing plan to acquire the necessary number of components needed for all 7 kits. Specify the supplier and quantity of packs for each type of component. Calculate the total minimum cost. You can mix suppliers.

314

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


4.04   Percentage change and GST After this lesson, you will be able to… • calculate percentage increases and decreases. • determine mark-ups and discounts in financial contexts. • calculate GST inclusive and exclusive prices.

Percentage increase and decrease There are many financial applications for percentages, including the value of something either increasing or decreasing. A common example of a percentage decrease is in retail, when an item is advertised as being on sale. If an item is advertised as 20% off, calculations can be made to find the new price of the item when given the original value. Or vice versa, the original price when given only the sale price. When applying a percentage decrease: Decrease in value

% × Original value 100

New value = Original value – Decrease in value = Original value × (100% - Percent decrease %) An item can also increase in value. This is sometimes referred to as a mark-up, where the value of an item is increased by a certain percentage. A restaurant, for example, may introduce a 15% surcharge on Sundays, meaning that the total bill is increased by 15%. When applying a percentage increase: Increase in value

% × Original value 100

New value = Original value + Increase in value = Original value × (100% + Percent increase %)

Example 1 An initial amount of 200 is to be increased by 10%: a Determine 10% of 200.

Apply the idea 10% of 200 = 10% × 200 10 200 100 = 20

Replace “of” with multiplication Convert the percentage to a fraction Evaluate

4.04 Percentage change and GST mathspace.co

315


b Add the percentage increase to the original amount to find the amount after the increase.

Apply the idea Total amount = Original amount + Increase

Write the formula for total amount

= 200 + 20

Substitute the values

= 220

Evaluate

c Calculate 110% of 200.

Apply the idea 110% of 200 = 110% × 200 110 200 100 = 220

Replace “of” with multiplication Convert the percentage to a fraction Evaluate

Reflect and check The calculation can also be done as: 110% of 200 = 1.1 × 200 = 220

d Is increasing an amount by 10% equivalent to finding 110% of that amount?

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Compare the values found in parts (b) and (c).

The answers from part (b) and (c) are equal. So increasing an amount by 10% is equivalent to finding 110% of that amount.

Idea summary When applying a percentage decrease: % Decrease in value × Original value 100 New value = Original value – Decrease in value = Original value × (100% – Percent decrease %) When applying a percentage increase: % × Original value 100 New value = Original value + Increase in value = Original value × (100% + Percent increase %)

Increase in value

316

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Percentage change Percentage can be useful when comparing a change in values. For example, the cost of bread at a store may have increased due to drought from $2.00 to $2.30. To compare this increase to another store, it is useful to use percentage rather than dollars. The price of bread has increased by 30 cents. 0.30 Comparing this increase to the starting value: = 0.15. By converting this to a percentage, it can 2.00 be said that the price of bread has increased by 15%. To find the percentage change: Percentage change

New value Original value Original value

100%

Example 2 A holiday resort in Tasmania reduced its overnight rates from $320 to $120. a Determine the amount that Beth would save if she is to take advantage of the sale.

Create a strategy Subtract the discounted price from the original price.

Apply the idea Savings = Original price – Discounted price

Write the formula for the amount saved

= 320 – 120

Substitute the values

= $200

Evaluate

b Express this amount saved as a percentage discount. Round your answer to two decimal places.

Create a strategy Use the formula: Discount percentage

Discount amount 100% Original price

Apply the idea Discount percentage

200 100% 320

Substitute values of discount amount and original price

= 0.625 × 100% Evaluate the division = 62.50%

Evaluate

4.04 Percentage change and GST mathspace.co

317


Reflect and check Using the percentage change formula would emphasise that this is a discount with a negative answer: New value Original value 100% Original value

Percentage change

120 320 100% 320 200 100% 320 = – 0.625 × 100% = – 62.50%

Idea summary To find the percentage change: Percentage change

New value Original value 100% Original value

This can be broken down into the steps of: 1. Calculate the change amount between new and original prices 2. Divide the change amount by the original price 3. Multiply by 100% to get the percent change

Calculate original value The original value of an item can be calculated when given a new amount and a percentage change (increase or decrease). This can be done by rearranging: New value = Original value × (100% + Percent change %) New value = Original value 100% Percent change % For increases, the percent change will be positive. For decreases, the percent change will be negative. For the particular cases, this gives: Higher value Percent increase % Lower value 100% Percent decrease %

Original value

100%

Original value These can also be done using decimals as: Original value = Original value

318

Higher value 1 Decimal of percent increase Lower value 1 Decimal of percent decrease

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 3 There is a 12% off sale in store. With this discount in place, a particular item sells for $2992. Calculate the regular price of this item, rounded to the nearest dollar.

Create a strategy 12% off means it is a sale or lower price. Use the rearranged formula: Original value =

Lower value 1 Decimal of percent decrease

Apply the idea The original value is unknown. The sale or lower price is $2992. The 12% discount as a decimal is 0.12. Original value =

Sale value 1 Decimal of percent decrease

Write the formula for the original value

2992 Substitute sale price = 2992 and 1 0.12 Discount % = 0.12 2992 = Evaluate the subtraction 0.88 = $3400

Evaluate

The regular price of this item is $3400.

Idea summary Finding original value given new amount (percentage increase): Higher value Original value 100% Percent increase % Finding original value given new amount (percentage decrease): Original value

Lower value 100% Percent decrease %

4.04 Percentage change and GST mathspace.co

319


Goods and services tax (GST) Goods and services tax (GST) A tax of 10% on most goods, services and other items sold or consumed in Australia. Businesses charge the customer an additional 10% of the original price as a GST amount. For example, if the original price (cost excluding GST) of an item was $20, the GST on this item would be $2 since 10% of $20 is $2. The total price then charged would be $22. For tax reasons, businesses need to keep track of how much GST they pay and receive, so it is important to be able to calculate prices before and after GST, as well as the amount and rate of GST. Calculations including GST: Cost including GST = Cost excluding GST × 1.1 This is because: Cost including GST = Cost excluding GST + Cost excluding GST × 10%

= Cost excluding GST + Cost excluding GST × 0.1

= Cost excluding GST × (1 + 0.1)

= Cost excluding GST × 1.1

To find the amount of GST: Amount of GST This is because,

Cost including GST 11

Cost including GST = Cost excluding GST + Amount of GST where Cost including GST represents Cost including GST, Cost excluding GST represents Cost excluding GST, and Amount of GST represents Amount of GST: Cost including GST = Cost excluding GST + Amount of GST Write the formula for cost including GST Cost including GST Cost including GST = Amount of GST 1.1 Rearrange formula and substitute cost excluding GST 1.1 × Cost including GST = Cost including GST + 1.1 × Amount of GST Multiply both sides by 1.1 1.1 × Cost including GST – Cost including GST = 1.1 × Amount of GST Subtract both sides by cost including GST 0.1 × Cost including GST = 1.1 × Amount of GST Evaluate subtraction 0.1 Cost including GST = Amount of GST Divide both sides by 1.1 1.1 Cost including GST Amount of GST = Switch sides and simplify 11 fraction

320

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Rearrange and substitute the formulas into one another to get calculations involving cost excluding GST: Cost excluding GST

Cost including GST 1.1

Amount of GST

Cost excluding GST 10

Example 4 The sale price of an item, including GST, is $45. Calculate the price of the item without GST.

Create a strategy The sale price is the cost including GST. Use the formula for finding the cost excluding GST.

Apply the idea Cost including GST 1.1 45 = 1.1

Cost excluding GST =

= $40.91

Write the formula for cost excluding GST Substitute the value of the sale price Evaluate

Idea summary Calculations involving GST: Cost including GST = Cost excluding GST × 1.1 Cost including GST 11 Cost including GST Cost excluding GST 1.1 Cost excluding GST Amount of GST 10 Amount of GST

4.04 Percentage change and GST mathspace.co

321


4.04 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

Is each statement true or false? a

If an item is marked up by 15%, then multiply the regular price by 1.15 to get the marked up price.

b

If an item is on sale with 20% off, then multiply the regular price by 0.2 to get the sale price.

c

If an item is reduced by 30%, then multiply the regular price by 0.7

d

GST is 11%.

e

To determine the cost of an item including GST, use the formula: (Cost including GST) = 1.1 × (Cost excluding GST)

f

If an item is on sale for $90 and the discount was 20%, then the original price can be 90 . found by doing 0.8

2

Increase 700 by 10%.

3

Duncan is going to buy a hat that is marked as 15% off. The original price was $30.

4

a

Evaluate 0.15 × $30, the value of the discount.

b

What is the price that Duncan will pay for the hat?

During a sale period, there is 50% off on a blouse whose original price was $674. What is the sale price of the blouse?

5

A store is having a 13% off sale. An item is discounted and now costs $3723.75. What was the original price of the item? A

6

$4280.17

B

$4207.84

C

$3295.35

D

$3239.66

d

$77.80

Calculate the 10% GST applicable given the following original prices: a

$80

b

$39.50

c

$35

Practice Ex 1

7

8

322

The staff are entitled to a 10% discount on a $25 movie ticket: a

Calculate 10% of $25.

b

Subtract the percentage discount from the original price to determine the discounted price.

c

Calculate 90% of $25.

d

Is applying a 10% discount equivalent to determining 90% of the original price?

Steph is going to buy a hat that is marked as 25% off. The original price was $36. a

What is the value of the discount in dollars?

b

What is the price that Steph will pay for the hat?

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


9

10

11

Brad is going to purchase some sports gear on lay-by. This involves paying some money as a deposit and paying the remainder later. The amount of the lay-by is $180. a

If the amount the store needs as a deposit is 20%, calculate the dollar amount of the deposit.

b

Calculate the remaining balance on the lay-by.

A store is offering a 20% discount on all goods. Ivan purchases a fridge with an original price of $640 and a stove with an original price of $840. a

Without a discount, how much would Ivan have to pay altogether?

b

Calculate the total discount amount that Ivan receives.

c

Determine the amount Ivan pays for the goods after discount.

A store sells a laptop valued at $1200. Determine the new price of the laptop if: a

The price decreases by 40% during a clearance sale.

b

The price increases by 35% due to increased import costs.

c

The price increases by 200% due to high demand for a limited edition model.

d

The price decreases by 4.5% as a part of a promotional discount.

12

A basket of goods was valued at $43.70 in January 2020. If the inflation rate for the year was 8%, determine the expected cost of the basket of goods in January 2021.

13

A sales assistant is paid a commission of 15% on her weekly sales. Determine her commission for a week in which she sells products to the value of $2000.

14

The value of Leni’s car depreciated 5% this year. If its value at the start of the year was $4000: a

Ex 2

15

16

By how much did it depreciate?

b

Calculate the current value of the car.

A holiday resort in Ballarat reduced its overnight rate from $232 to $120. a

Determine the amount that Beth would save if she is to take advantage of the sale.

b

Determine the percentage discount, rounded to two decimal places.

A bike regularly sells for $300 but is now on sale for $255. a

By how much has the price of the bike been decreased?

b

Calculate the percentage discount on the bike.

17

The cost of a plane ticket from Sydney to Melbourne was $130 two weeks ago. It now costs $169. By what percentage has the cost of the ticket increased by?

18

In 2009, 10.3 million smartphones were sold in Hungary. In 2015, this dropped to 5.7 million. What is the percentage decrease in the number of smartphones sold? Round your answer to one decimal place.

19

Every item in a store is sold at 9% more than its cost. If a product is sold for $110, calculate: a

The cost price

b

The profit

4.04 Percentage change and GST mathspace.co

323


Ex 3

20

A store is having a 15% off sale. Calculate the original price of a discounted item that is on sale for $495.

21

A woman is paid a commission of 9% on her weekly sales. If her total commission for the week was $541, calculate: a

The value of 1% of her sales

b

The total value of her sales for that week, rounded to the nearest dollar

22

An investor sold his portfolio at 8% profit for a price of $2000. Calculate the original value of his portfolio.

23

A manufacturer is selling its old factory machinery for $34 320, which represents a loss of 12%. At what price did the manufacturer purchase the machinery?

24

Calculate the sales price, including GST, for an item with an original price of $20.

25

Calculate the GST on an item with a sales price (including GST) of: a

Ex 4

$40

b

$83.90

26

The sales price of an item, including GST, is $80. Calculate the price of the item without GST.

27

Calculate the amount of GST paid on the receipt shown: Humble Hut 12 Miller Rd, Perth WA, 6000 BILL FOR TABLE 306 ABN: 90 082 402 695 Printed by: Michael Started by: Freedham Printed from: POS9 - VP Dining Date: 06/09/19 18:53 Item

Qty

Price

*Tofu scramble

1

$11.50

*Buckwheat pancakes

1

$9.00

*Acai bowl

1

$8.00

TOTAL INCLUDES GST *GST item We do not split bills

Note: The prices shown already include GST.

324

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

$28.50


Extend your thinking 28

Two stores advertised the same range of books: • Honest Anne offered 20% off the publisher’s recommended price. • Fair Freddie offered up to 50% off the publisher’s recommended price.

29

a

Fiona bought books from Honest Anne’s with a total marked price of $130, prior to discount. Determine the value of the discount she will receive.

b

How much did Fiona pay for the books at Honest Anne’s Shop?

c

At Fair Freddie’s, Donna bought the same books for the same price and was given 10% off the first $100 worth of purchase and 50% off the remainder of the purchase. Calculate the total discount Donna received from Fair Freddie’s shop.

d

How much did Donna pay for the books at Fair Freddie’s Shop?

e

Which bookshop offer is the best for this purchase?

Identify which of these offers gives the greater discount: a • Offer A: Successive discounts of 6% and 11% • Offer B: A single discount of 13% b

• Offer A: A single discount of 16% • Offer B: Successive discounts of 5% and 11%

30

At the end of the financial year, a television originally advertised at $3800 is discounted by 5%. Valentina negotiates a further discount for paying cash, which brings the price down to $3285.10. Calculate the further percentage discount Valentina received for paying cash.

31

Sally purchased a dress for $20 and auctioned it online for $41. Calculate:

32

a

The profit as a percentage of the cost, rounded to two decimal places

b

The profit as a percentage of the revenue, rounded to two decimal places

In a fire sale, a store sold goods at 41% below cost price. If $13 900 was earned from the sale, calculate: a

The original cost of goods sold

b

The loss on the sale

33

John received a bill of $68 for consultation and $10 for herbal supplements from a medical professional. If GST is only applied to the consultation fee, what is the total bill that John must pay?

34

Fruits and vegetables do not incur a GST of 10%. If the total shopping bill is $109, and fruits and vegetables amount to $62, what is the cost of the other items prior to adding GST?

4.04 Percentage change and GST mathspace.co

325


4.05   Simple interest After this lesson, you will be able to… • calculate simple interest using the formula I = PRT. • determine the total amount including simple interest. • solve problems involving simple interest in financial contexts.

Calculate simple interest Simple or flat-rate (straight-Iine) interest A method where interest is calculated on the initial principal at a constant (fixed) rate over time. It is calculated using the formula:

I

PrT 100

I is the total interest earned P is the principal (the initial amount borrowed/invested) r is the interest rate per period, expressed as a whole number (leave as a percentage) T is the number of time periods (the duration of the loan/investment) Alternatively, if the interest rate is expressed as a decimal or fraction, this formula can be used:

I = PRT I P

is the total interest earned is the principal (the initial amount borrowed/invested) r% 100 is the number of time periods (the duration of the loan/investment)

R is the interest rate per period, written as a decimal R T

The interest rate is often given as a percentage per time period. For example, 4.5% p.a. where “p.a.” is an abbreviation of per annum, which means every year. However, the unit of time used for T must match the unit of time used in the interest rate r. Sometimes, this means a conversion is required. For example, the time of a loan/investment may be given as a number of days, which would then need to be converted into a number (or fraction) of years. Any three known variables or pieces of information in the simple interest formula allow calculation of the unknown variable. The formula can be rearranged to find the principal, the rate, or the time. Understanding the simple interest formula makes it easier to work out different variations, though seeing them can still be helpful.

326

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


To find the interest rate (r%), where r is expressed as a percentage: r

100 I PT

T

100 I Pr

P

100 I rT

To find the time (T):

To find the principal amount (P):

For simple interest, once the interest is calculated, it can then be added to the principal amount to calculate the total amount of the loan/investment, represented by A. This is found using the formula: A=P+I In some cases, the final amount of the investment, A, may be known, but not I, the interest earned. In this case, this formula can be used: P

A ( 1 RT )

Exploration Often in financial problems, it is important to understand the context of the time period in comparison to the length of the year. Therefore, it is typically assumed: Time conversion summary 1 year = 4 quarters (of 3 months each) = 12 months = 26 fortnights = 52 weeks = 365 days 1 fortnight = 2 weeks 1 month ≠ 4 weeks 1. Are there exactly 52 weeks in a year? Multiply 7 days by 52 weeks and compare the result to the number of days in a standard year (365 days). What is noticed about the difference? 2. Why is 52 weeks used as a standard measure for a year rather than the precise number calculated in the previous question? 3. Explain why one month is not exactly equal to four weeks.

4.05 Simple interest mathspace.co

327


Example 1 For a loan of $8000 at 8% p.a. for 6 years: a Calculate the simple interest.

Create a strategy Use the simple interest formula: I = PRT. As the interest rate and time period length match, no conversion is required for T.

Apply the idea

Reflect and check

The given values are: P = $8000, R = 0.08 and T=6

If R was not converted to a decimal, then it would be:

I = PRT Write the simple interest formula = 8000 × 0.08 × 6 Substitute P = 8000, R = 0.08, T = 6 = $3840

Evaluate

I

PrT 100 8000 8 6 100

= $3840

b Determine the total amount owing on the loan after 6 years.

Create a strategy Use that: A = P + I

Apply the idea A=P+I

Write the formula for total amount owing

= 8000 + 3840

Substitute P = 8000 and I = 3840

= 11 840

Evaluate

The total amount owing is $11 840.

c If the loan was paid off early after 18 months, determine the total paid out on the loan after 18 months.

Create a strategy Use the I = PRT, then A = P + I, but with the new value of T.

328

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Apply the idea Given: P = 8000 R = 0.08 T

18 1.5 years 12 I = PRT

Write the simple interest formula

= 8000 × 0.08 × 1.5

Substitute the values

= 960

Evaluate

A=P+I

Write the formula for total amount owing

= 8000 + 960

Substitute P = 8000 and I = 960

= 8960

Evaluate

If the loan was paid off early after 18 months, then the total amount owing would be $8960.

Reflect and check Another variation of the formula is A = P (1 + RT ). A = P (1 + RT ) Write the alternative formula for total amount of investment = 8000 × (1 + 0.08 × 1.5)

Substitute the values

= 8960

Evaluate

Example 2 For a simple interest rate of 6% p.a., calculate the number of years, T, needed for an interest of $1174.20 to be earned on the investment $1957. Round your answer to the nearest whole number of years.

Apply the idea Given: I = $1174.20, R = 0.06 and P = 1957 I = PRT

Write the simple interest formula

1174.2 = 1957 × 0.06 × T

Substitute the values

1174.2 T= 1957 0.06

Rearrange to make T the subject of the equation

T = 10

Evaluate

Reflect and check Substitute back the formula to verify: I = PRT = 1957 × 0.06 × 10 = 1174.20 Another variation of the formula is T

100 I . Pr

4.05 Simple interest mathspace.co

329


Idea summary Simple or flat-rate (straight-Iine) interest is calculated as:

I = PRT

P R T

is the principal amount invested (or borrowed) is the interest rate per year expressed as a decimal or fraction is the time in years

The total value of an investment or loan A is formula calculated as the principal plus interest: A=P+I

Graph simple interest Simple interest can be modelled as a linear graph. Simple interest graphs can be used to compare different scenarios, such as: I 500 400 300 200 100 T 0

2

4

6

8

0

10

The interest, I, versus time, T. With P = 1000, r = 5%, for T = 0 to T = 10

300

A

T 2

4

6

8

10

The total value A, versus time, T. With P = 1000, r = 5%, for T = 0 to T = 10

I The graph of simple interest is a straight line, since the interest rate is constant. The slope of the line indicates how much interest is earned in each time period. If the graph shows interest, I, against T, then the y-intercept will be zero.

250 200 150 100 50 0

1600 1400 1200 1000 800 600 400 200

P 200 400 600 800 1000

If the graph shows the total amount, A, against T then the y-intercept will represent the initial amount invested or borrowed.

The interest versus principal, P. With r = 5%, T = 6, and P = 0 to 1000 When presented with a graph, make sure to read the description of the given graph and the axis labels to understand the context of the question. 330

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 3 The graph shows the amount of interest earned over time at a particular interest rate: Interest earned (dollars)

1400 1200 1000 800 600 400 200

Time (years) 0

2 4

6

8 10 12

a How much interest is earned after 5 years?

Create a strategy Focus on the point on the line that corresponds to 5 years.

Apply the idea The point on the line that corresponds to 5 years on the horizontal axis: 1400 1200 1000 800 600 400 200

Interest earned (dollars)

0 2

Reading across, it can be seen that this point corresponds to 600 on the vertical axis. So the total interest earned after 5 years is $600. Time (years) 4

6

8 10 12

b Determine the slope (gradient) of the line.

Create a strategy Focusing on the same point, observe that there was an increase of $600 (rise), and that five years Rise had passed (run). Use the formula: Slope , where Rise = 600 and Run = 5. Run

Apply the idea Slope =

600 5

= 120

Substitute Rise = 600 and Run = 5 Evaluate

4.05 Simple interest mathspace.co

331


Reflect and check Using any other point on the graph, such as (10, 1200) would give the same slope. The slope which is also the rate of change, calculated as rise over run, represents interest earned per year.

c How long will it take to earn $1800 of interest?

Create a strategy Divide $1800 by the slope found in part (b).

Apply the idea Number of year =

1800 120

= 15

Divide 1800 by 120 Evaluate

It will take 15 years to earn $1800 of interest.

Example 4 The graph shows the amount of simple interest charged each year by a particular bank, on a 3-year loan: Interest 300 250 200 150 100 50 Principal 0

1000 2000 3000 4000 5000

a Calculate the total amount of simple interest charged on a loan of $5000 over a 3-year period.

Create a strategy Focus on the point on the line that corresponds to $5000. Determine the value of the interest and then multiply the interest by 3 to represent the 3-year period.

332

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Apply the idea The point on the line that corresponds to $5000 on the horizontal axis: Interest 300 250 200 150 100 50 Principal 0

1000 2000 3000 4000 5000

Reading across, it can be seen that this point corresponds to 300 on the vertical axis. Total interest = I × T

Multiply the interest by time

= 300 × 3

Substitute I = 300 and T = 3

= $900

Evaluate

b Determine the simple interest rate per year, r, charged by the bank on this loan. Give your answer as a percentage.

Create a strategy Use the simple interest formula: I

PrT 100

Apply the idea Given: P = $5000, I = $900 and T = 3 PrT 100 5000 r 3 900 = 100 900 100 r= 5000 3 90000 rr = 15000 I=

r=6

Write the simple interest formula Substitute the values Make r the subject of the equation Evaluate the multiplication Evaluate

The simple interest rate r per year, is 6%.

4.05 Simple interest mathspace.co

333


Idea summary Simple interest graphs can be used to compare different scenarios, such as: • The interest, I, earned over time, T • The interest earned for different principals, P • The total value of a loan or investment, A, over time, T

4.05 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

2

Determine if each statement is true or false: a

For a given principal and interest rate, the amount of simple interest earned per period will always be the same.

b

For a principal of $1000, a simple interest rate of 2% p.a., and a time period of 6 months, the filled in formula is: I = 1000 × 0.02 × 6.

c

Most banks use simple interest on their long-term savings accounts.

d

The graph of simple interest over time forms a straight line.

In the simple interest formula, I = PRT, describe what each variable represents: a

3

I

b

P

c

R

d

T

If the principal is $1000, the annual simple interest rate is 3%, fill in the rest of the formula to determine the amount of interest for each time period: I = 1000 × 0.03 × T a

1 year

b

10 years

c

6 months

d

1 month

4

Calculate the simple interest earned on an investment where: • Principal is $2500 a b • Principal is $15 325 • Interest rate is 3% p.a. simple interest • Interest rate is 4% p.a. simple interest • Time is 4 years • Time is 9 years and 3 months

5

If $16 716 of simple interest was earned in 7 years, determine how much interest was earned: a

Each year

b

Each month

Practice Ex 1

6

Calculate the simple interest charged on these loans: a

334

$2600 at 8% p.a. for 4 years

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

b

$12 950 at 5% p.a. for 8 years


Ex 2

7

What is the total interest to be paid on a 3-year $8000 loan at 13% p.a. simple interest?

8

If Jack is given a loan of $110 000 at 5% p.a. simple interest, what is the total amount needing to be repaid after 2 years?

9

Sarosha pays for her purchase of a new carpet, valued at $9000, by paying a $3000 deposit and borrowing the balance at 5% p.a. simple interest to be repaid over 3 years.

10

a

Calculate the amount Sarosha borrowed.

b

Calculate the total interest she will have to pay.

c

Calculate the total amount she will pay for the carpet.

The simple interest on an investment of $3600 over 30 months is $504.00 Determine the annual simple interest rate as a percentage, rounded to one decimal place.

11

Ex 3

a

Calculate the total interest charged on the loan.

b

Calculate the percentage annual simple interest rate.

12

For how many whole years does $4078 need to be invested to earn $4078 in interest, if simple interest is paid at 10% p.a.?

13

Ray invests $635 at 5% p.a. simple interest. He wants to know the number of years it will take the investment to grow to $889.00

14

Ex 4

Amarah made loan repayments totalling to $1360 on a loan of $1000 over 6 years.

15

a

Calculate the interest that must be earned on the investment for Ray to reach his goal.

b

Calculate the number of whole years it will take for the investment to reach his goal.

Ryan takes out a loan to purchase a new motorcycle. The total amount to be repaid is $56 000. a

If Ryan makes 14 equal loan repayments, what is the value of each repayment?

b

If Ryan pays the loan back in three and a half years with repayments of $4000, how often did he make repayments?

This graph shows the yearly simple interest accumulated by a bank for a 4-year loan: a

Calculate the total simple interest accumulated on a loan amount of $4000.

b

Determine the simple interest rate per year applied by the bank for 4-year loans.

I 250 200 150 100 20 P 0

1000 2000 3000 4000

4.05 Simple interest mathspace.co

335


16

For how many whole quarters does $7151 need to be invested to earn $250.29 interest, if simple interest is paid at a rate of 2% p.a.?

17

Kay and Maggie are looking to invest $7900 and $20 600, respectively for 9 years. This table shows the simple interest offered for different principals: Principal

Rate p.a.

Between $4600 and $14 600

3%

Between $14 600 and $24 600

4%

Greater than $24 600

5%

a

How much interest will Kay earn on his investment?

b

How much interest will Maggie earn on her investment?

c

How much will they earn if they invest their money together?

d

How much more interest will they earn by combining their money?

Extend your thinking 18

19

Beth takes out a loan for a used car with value of $3000 at a simple interest rate of 8% p.a. She plans to repay the loan over 4 years through equal regular monthly repayments. a

Calculate the total interest that Beth will be charged over the duration of the loan.

b

Calculate the total amount she will pay for the car.

c

Calculate the total number of monthly repayments.

d

Calculate the value of each loan repayment.

Sean is offered three different loan plans when borrowing money from the bank: • Option 1: Interest is charged daily at a simple interest rate of 0.02% per day. • Option 2: lnterest is charged fortnightly at a simple interest rate of 0.34% per fortnight. • Option 3: Interest is charged quarterly at a simple interest rate of 1.98% per quarter. Which option should Sean choose if he wants to pay as little interest as possible?

20

Ariella wants to invest her savings. She is considering two options: • Option 1: Simple interest rate of 0.5% per month for two years • Option 2: Annual rate of 2.5% simple interest for 42 months Which option will result in Ariella earning the most interest? Justify your choice.

21

David has $38 800 that he decides to invest in two different schemes to earn interest. He invests one portion of the amount at 6% interest per six months. The rest of the money is invested at 5% interest per annum, but this investment starts only after one year. After three years from the time the first investment was made, the total interest earned from both investments has a ratio of 5:4. How much money did David invest in the second scheme that offered 5% per annum?

336

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


4.06   Compound interest After this lesson, you will be able to… • explain compound interest as repeated application of simple interest. • generate compound interest values using the formula, spreadsheet and other tools. • compare simple and compound interest in practical contexts.

Compound interest Compound interest An interest calculated periodically on the initial principal and all previously accumulated interest, typically at regular intervals such as daily, monthly, quarterly, or annually. At the end of each compounding period, the total amount (principal plus interest) from previous compounding periods is used to calculate the new quantity of interest. This is typically the most commonly used form of interest. Rather than the same interest amount being added each time period, it is adjusted according to the balance sitting in the account at the end of the time period.

Exploration Lila and Noah each open an account with $2000 that interest at 8% per annum. 1. Lila earns simple interest. Complete the table to show how the account balance grows over 5 years: Year

Opening balance

Interest

Closing balance

1

2000

160

2160

2

2160

160

2320

3

⬚

⬚

⬚

4 5

⬚ ⬚

⬚ ⬚

⬚ ⬚

4.06 Compound interest mathspace.co

337


Exploration (Continued) 2. Noah’s interest payment changes each year as he earns interest on the closing balance in the account from the previous year instead of on the principal. Complete the table to show how Noah’s account balance grows over 5 years now: Year Opening balance Interest

Closing balance

1

2000

0.08 × 2000 = 160

2000 + 160 = 2160

2

2160

0.08 × 2160 = 172.80

2160 + 172.80 = 2332.80

3

2332.80

4

⬚

0.08 × 2332.80 = 186.62 ⬚

5

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

3. Plot the closing balances for the first 5 years for Lila and Noah’s accounts on the same Cartesian plane. How does the growth of Lila’s account compare to the growth of Noah’s account? 4. Which account would earn more money in the long run?

Breaking compound interest down into individual time periods, the simple interest formula is used and added immediately to the value of the balance. For example, if $1000 was invested for 2 years, at a rate of 5% compounding annually, start by calculating the value of the investment at the end of the first year: I = PRT = 1000 × 0.05 × 1 = $50 Therefore,

AAfter one year = $1050

As compound interest takes into account the interest added at the end of each compound period, this new balance must be used to calculate how much interest will accrue in the second year:

I = PRT

= 1050 × 0.05 × 1

= $52.50

At the end of the two years, the balance of the account would be: A = $1102.50 Therefore, by repeatedly applying this formula at the end of each compound period, it can be seen that the amount of interest that is earned would increase over time, rather than remain the same throughout the lifetime of the investment. Applying the same formula on the output of the previous iteration is called recursion.

338

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Note that in both calculations, it is essential to recognise that only one time period has passed, so using this interest formula in this context requires T = 1 in each instance. For a short term or a small amount, the difference between simple and compound interest may not seem like much. However, if $2 000 000 was invested instead of $2000, or if the investment was made for 50 years instead of 5, the difference would be extreme.

Example 1 $8000 is invested for 3 years at a rate of 3% p.a. compounded annually. a Complete the table. Interest ($)

Balance ($)

After 0 years

−

8000

After 1 year

⬚

⬚

After 2 years After 3 years

Create a strategy

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

For each row, apply the interest to the previous balance, then write this into the “Interest” column. The new balance will be the previous balance plus the interest, which is then entered into the “Balance” column.

Apply the idea For the first year: Interest = 8000 × 0.03 × 1 = $240 Balance = 8000 + 240 = $8240

Calculate the interest using I = PRT Evaluate Add the initial and current interest (A = I + P) Evaluate

The interest for the second year must now be calculated based on the balance at the end of the first year. For the second year: Interest = 8240 × 0.03 × 1 = $247.20 Balance = 8240 + 247.20 = $8487.20

Calculate the interest using I = PRT Evaluate Add the previous and interest (A = I + P) Evaluate

The same method can be used to complete the rest of the table: Interest ($)

Balance ($)

After 0 years

−

8000

After 1 year

240

8240

After 2 years

247.20

8487.20

After 3 years

254.62

8741.82

4.06 Compound interest mathspace.co

339


b Calculate the total interest accumulated over 3 years.

Create a strategy Add the values in the Interest column from the table in part (a).

Apply the idea Total interest = 240 + 247.20 + 254.62 = $741.82

Add the interest for each year Evaluate

Reflect and check Another way is to subtract the initial investment of $8000 from the final balance of $8741.82: Total interest = 8741.82 – 8000 Subtract the investment from the final balance = $741.82

Evaluate

Idea summary Compound interest is calculated at the end of each compounding period, on the total amount (principal plus interest) from the previous compounding period.

Compound interest formula Why does money grow faster with compound interest than simple interest?

Money

Compound Interest

Simple Interest

As seen before, simple interest is earned only on the principal amount, whereas compound interest is earned on the principal amount plus previously earned interest. So instead of the value of your investment increasing it a straight line as with simple interest, it will exponentially grow as shown on the graph.

Time Consider a deposit of $1000 into an online account for 2 years that pays 10% p.a. compounded annually. In this case, the interest earned in the first year would be $1000 × 10% × 1 = $100. The new principal at the end of the first year would be $1000 + $100 = $1100. The interest earned in the second year would then be $1100 × 10% × 1 = $110. So the total compound interest earned over the two years would be $100 + $110 = $210 which is $10 more than what would be earned with simple interest (I = PRT = $1000 × 10% × 2 = $200).

340

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Notice that for compound interest, at the end of each compounding period, there is a two-step process: calculate the interest and then add it to the account balance. This could be treated as a percentage increase, combining these two steps as follows:

Balance after 1 year = 500 + 500 × 0.1 (Note 10% = 0.1)

= 500 × (1 + 0.1)

= 550

This suggests a formula: New balance = Previous balance × (1 + 0.1) In other words, the balance at the end of each year can be calculated by repeatedly multiplying by (1 + 0.1):

Balance after 1 year = 500 × (1 + 0.1) Balance after 2 years = 500 × (1 + 0.1) × (1 + 0.1) = 500 × (1 + 0.1)2

Balance after 3 years = 500 × (1 + 0.1) × (1 + 0.1) × (1+0.1) = 500 × (1 + 0.1)3

This leads to the compound interest formula:

A

r P 1 100

n

A is the final amount of money P is the principal r is the interest rate per compounding period, expressed as a whole number n is the number of compounding time periods For interest rates, R, that are expressed as a decimal or a fraction, this formula can be used instead: A = P (1 + R)n This formula gives the total amount (ie. the principal and interest together). To calculate how much of the final amount is interest, I, this can be done by subtracting the principal, P, from the total amount of the investment/loan, A: I=A–P

4.06 Compound interest mathspace.co

341


Example 2 William’s investment of $2000 earns interest at a rate of 6% p.a. compounded annually over 4 years. What is the future value of the investment, rounded to the nearest cent?

Create a strategy Use the formula: A = P (1 + R)n

Apply the idea A = P (1 + R)n

Write the formula 4

= 2000 (1 + 0.06)

Substitute P = 2000, R = 0.06, n = 4

= $2524.95

Evaluate

Example 3 Tom wants to put a deposit on a house in 4 years. In order to finance the $12 000 deposit, he decides to put some money into a high interest savings account that pays 5% p.a. interest, compounded monthly. If P is the amount of money that he must put into his account now to accumulate enough for the deposit, find P, rounded to the nearest cent.

Create a strategy R is the monthly interest rate, and n is the total number of compounding periods. Since the interest is compounded monthly, divide the annual interest rate by 12 to get the monthly rate and multiply the number of years by 12 to get the total number of compounding periods.

Apply the idea A = 12 000 P is unknown 0.05 12 n = 12 × 4 = 48 R

A = P (1 + R)n 12 000 P

P

1

Write the compound interest formula

0.05 12

48

12 000 0.05 1 12

48

P = $9828.85

Substitute the values Make P the subject of the equation

Evaluate using technology

Tom needs to deposit at least $9828.85

342

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Idea summary To determine the final value of an investment or loan, use the formula:

A A P r n

r P 1 100

n

is the final amount of money is the principal is the interest rate per year is the number of compounding time periods

For interest rates r that are expressed as a decimal or a fraction, this formula can be used instead: A = P (1 + R)n To find the interest earned, use the formula:

I=A–P I is the interest earned A is the final amount of money P is the principal

4.06 Practice questions What do you remember? Ex 1

1

$3900 is invested for three years at a rate of 10% p.a. compounded annually. a

Complete the table to determine the final value of the investment: Balance at beginning of year

Interest earned

First year

$3900

$390

Second year

$4290

$429

Third year

⬚

⬚

Fourth year b

⬚

Calculate the total interest earned over the three years.

—

4.06 Compound interest mathspace.co

343


2

$3700 is invested for three years at a rate of 7% p.a. compounded annually. a

Complete the table to determine the final value of the investment: Balance at beginning of year

Interest earned

First year

$3700

$259

Second year

$3959

$277.13

Third year

⬚

⬚

⬚

Fourth year b 3

Calculate the total interest earned over the three years.

—

Scott wants to have $1500 at the end of 5 years. If the bank offers 2.3% p.a. compounded annually, how much should he invest now?

Practice Ex 2

4

Use the compound interest formula to calculate the amount, A, that an investment of $1000 is worth after 3 years at an interest rate of 4% p.a. compounded annually.

5

Use the compound interest formula to calculate the amount, A, that is owed after 4 years if $1000 is borrowed at an interest rate of 9% p.a. compounded annually.

6

A $7510 investment earns interest at 4.5% p.a. compounded annually over 6 years. Use the compound interest formula to calculate the final value of this investment.

7

Joan’s investment of $3000 earns interest at a rate of 3% p.a. compounded annually over 4 years. What is the value of the investment at the end of 4 years?

8

John borrows $6000 from a personal lender at a rate of 20% p.a. compounded annually. He is not able to make any repayments for 5 years. How much does he owe at the end of 5 years?

9

Emma borrows $7000 from a personal lender at a rate of 4.7% p.a. compounded annually. She is not able to make any repayments for 3 years. How much does she owe at the end of 3 years?

10

Kate invests $3000 at a rate of 2% p.a., compounded annually. Determine how much the investment is worth after: a

11

b

18 months

c

30 months

$4000 is deposited into an account that attracts interest at a rate of 2.5% per annum. Calculate the amount of interest accumulated over 8 years if: a

Ex 3

24 months

Simple interest is used.

b

The interest is compounded annually.

12

Over 6 years, an investment accumulated to $84 000. If the compound interest rate was 4.6% p.a. for the entire 6 years, calculate the original amount invested.

13

Alex borrowed money from the bank for 4 years at a rate of 7.5% per annum. At the end of the 4 years, he owed the bank $8950. How much did he initially borrow?

344

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Extend your thinking 14

$380 is invested at 2% p.a. compounded annually for 5 years. At the end of 5 years, the entire value of the investment is reinvested at 3% p.a. compounded annually for 4 more years. What is the final value of the investment at the end of the 9 years?

15

Ben borrows $7000 at a rate of 2% p.a. compounded annually. After 2 years, he makes a repayment of $500. After another 3 years, with no further repayments, how much does Ben owe?

16

Xavier invests $7000 in a term deposit with a rate of 2% p.a. compounded annually. After 3 years, he withdraws $600, and leaves the rest in the term deposit for 2 more years. How much is the investment worth after the total 5 years?

17

Bob applies for a loan of $5000 over 4 years at a rate of 3.5% per annum. He is offered the choice between simple interest and interest compounded annually. a Calculate how much interest he would pay if he chooses: i Simple interest ii Compound interest b

Which type of interest should he choose in order to minimise the amount of interest he has to pay?

18

Jeremy has just won $50 000. When he retires in 15 years, he wants to have $94 000 in his fund which earns 6% interest per annum. How much of his winnings does he need to invest now to achieve this?

19

Victoria has been promised an inheritance of $70 000 in 5 years’ time. What is the most she can borrow now at a rate of 7% p.a. compounded annually, and still be able to pay off the loan with her inheritance?

Investigation: Spreadsheets and interest

Investigate online

mathspace.co

4.06 Compound interest mathspace.co

345


4.07   Financial applications After this lesson, you will be able to… • use flat-rate and reducing balance depreciation to determine the final value of an item. • evaluate the impact of inflation or appreciation. • make informed financial decisions based on calculations.

Flat-rate depreciation Depreciation The decrease in the value of an item or investment over time. Items can be depreciated using the flat-rate (straight-line) method, which is similar to simple interest, but an amount is subtracted every period instead of added. The flat-rate method assumes the value of depreciation is constant per period. Typically, this value is a percentage calculated on the principal value of the item. Flat-rate depreciation can be modelled with this formula:

An = P - nd An P d n

is the new value of the item is the principal value or the original cost is the amount the item is depreciated after each time period is the number of time periods

The annual depreciation rate can be given instead of an amount. To find the amount, d: d

r P 100

where r is the annual flat-rate of depreciation as a percentage and P is the principal amount. Value ($) 20 000 15 000 10 000 5000 Number of periods (years) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 The straight line graph assumes a $20 000 initial value with a depreciation of $3000 p.a.

346

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 1 A 2020 Holden Commodore is priced at $33 000 and depreciates by approximately $4000 per year. a Complete the table: Year

Price (dollars)

0

33 000

1

⬚

2 3 4 5

⬚ ⬚ ⬚ ⬚

Create a strategy Subtract the depreciation amount from the original value for the first year, and then subtract the amount from the remaining value of the car every year.

Apply the idea Year

Price (dollars)

0

33 000

1

29 000

2

25 000

3

21 000

4

17 000

5

13 000

4.07 Financial applications mathspace.co

347


b By this calculation method, will the car ever be worth nothing?

Create a strategy Subtracting the same amount annually beyond 5 years will help determine when the car will be worth nothing.

Apply the idea After 9 years, the car’s value would reach zero. The calculation is simple, but using a spreadsheet can make it even easier. By entering the correct formulas and filling down, all the values are calculated automatically. Gives A

B

1

Year

Value ($)

2

1

33 000

3

= A2 + 1

= B2 - 4000

4 5 6

A

B

1

Year

Value ($)

2

1

33 000

3

2

29 000

4

3

25 000

5

4

17 000

6

5

13 000

7

6

9 000

7

8

7

5 000

8

9

8

1000

9

10

9

– 3000

Note that the calculated value for Year 9 in the table is − 3000. In the context of depreciation, an asset’s value cannot be negative. This means the car’s value effectively becomes $0 during the 9th year. Once an asset depreciates to zero, its value remains at $0 for subsequent periods, regardless of the formula yielding a negative result.

Reflect and check Dividing the car’s initial value by the annual depreciation gives: 33 000 8.25 4000 The car’s value after 9 years will be worth nothing.

348

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 2 The graph shows the depreciation of a car’s value over 4 years. Value ($) 36 000 27 000 18 000 9000 0

1

Age (years) 3 4

2

a What is the initial value of the car?

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Find the value at year 0.

The y-intercept on the graph is (0, 36 000). So at year 0, the value was $36 000. The initial value is $36 000.

b By how much did the car depreciate each year?

Create a strategy Subtract the value of the car after one year from its initial value.

Apply the idea First, determine how much each interval on the vertical axis is increasing by. Value ($) 36 000

Each $9000 on the vertical axis is divided into 5 intervals. So each interval represents 9000 ÷ 5 = $1800.

27 000 18 000

After 1 year, the value of the car is 1 interval above $27 000. So the value is 27 000 + 1800 = $28 800.

9000 Age (years) 0

1

2

3

4

Now, subtract the value of the car after one year from its initial value. Depreciation = 36 000 - 28 800 = $7200

Subtract the values Evaluate

4.07 Financial applications mathspace.co

349


Reflect and check This means that the flat annual depreciation rate is: r d P 100 d r 100 P 7200 r 100 36 000 r = 20% c After how many years will the car be worth $14 400?

Create a strategy Divide the desired amount of depreciation by the depreciation rate per year.

Apply the idea The depreciation amount can be found by subtracting $14 400 from the initial value: Depreciation = 36 000 - 14 400 = $21 600

Subtract 14 400 from the initial value Evaluate

To find how many years this will take, divide the depreciation by the depreciation rate of $7200 per year 21 600 Years Divide by the depreciation per year 7200 =3 Evaluate The car will be worth $14 400 after 3 years. d What is the value of the car after 4 years?

Create a strategy In the graph, find the y-value of the point in the depreciation line which corresponds to 4 years.

Apply the idea Value ($) 36 000 The value that corresponds to the 4 years hits the vertical axis 1 interval below 9000.

27 000

From part (b), each interval represents $1800.

18 000

So, the corresponding value is 9000 - 1800 = $7200.

9000 0

1

2

Age (years) 3 4

The car will be worth $7200 after 4 years.

350

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Reflect and check To verify the car’s value after 4 years, apply the flat-rate depreciation formula: An = P – nd

Write the flat-rate depreciation formula

A4 = 36 000 – 4 × 7200

Substitute P = 36 000, n = 4 and d = 7200

= 36 000 – 28 800

Evaluate the multiplication

= 7200

Evaluate

Idea summary The flat-rate (straight-line) method assumes the value of depreciation is constant per period:

An = P - nd An is the new value of the item P is the principal value d  is the amount the item is depreciated after each time period n is the number of time periods

Appreciation and reducing balance depreciation While flat-rate depreciation decreases the value by the same amount each time period, reducing balance depreciation is when the value of an object or investment is said to depreciate at a decreasing amount per period. It depreciates on the current owing balance, not the original owing amount, so the depreciation of each period goes down.

An = P (1 - R)n P is the principal (original value) R is the depreciation rate as a decimal, per time period n An is the new total value after n periods Appreciation The increase in the value of an item or investment, like a collectible or property, over time.

4.07 Financial applications mathspace.co

351


When an object or investment is said to appreciate, this means it increases in value by a given average percentage. The following formula can be used to calculate appreciation, just like compound interest:

An = P (1 + R)n P is the principal (original value) R is the appreciation rate as a decimal, per time period n An is the new total value after n periods

Exploration Bruno is purchasing a new car for $35 000. It depreciates at a rate of 10% p.a. He takes out a loan for the whole amount at a rate of 8% p.a. These graphs show the depreciation and owing balance using the two types. Flat-rate and reducing balance methods are shown for depreciation, while simple and compound interest methods are shown for the loan balance.

35 000

Value ($)

30 000 25 000 20 000 15 000 10 000

B

A

Time (years) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Depreciated value

75 000 70 000 65 000 60 000 55 000 50 000 45 000 40 000 35 000

Value ($)

C D

Time (years) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Loan balance owing

1. For the depreciation graphs, which curve is flat-rate depreciation, and which is reducing balance? Explain how you know. 2. For the interest graphs, which is simple, and which is compound? Explain how you know. 3. If Bruno could choose between flat-rate depreciation or reducing balance for the same rate, which should he choose? Explain. 4. If Bruno could choose between simple and compound interest for the same rate, which should he choose? Explain. 5. If the bank/lender for the loan could choose between simple and compound interest for the same rate, which would they choose? Explain.

352

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 3 If a piece of land appreciates at an average rate of 3.7% per annum and its current value is $430 000, calculate its value in 3 years. Round your answer to the nearest dollar.

Create a strategy Since this question involves appreciating the value, use the formula: An = P (1 + R)n

Apply the idea Given: P = 430 000, R = 3.7% = 0.037, n = 3. An = P (1 + R)n

Write the formula for appreciation 3

A3 = 430 000 (1 + 0.037)

Substitute the values

3

= 430 000 × 1.037

Evaluate the addition

= $479 518

Evaluate and round

Example 4 Monique purchases her first car for $13 000. The value of her car is predicted to depreciate at a rate of approximately 6.6% p.a. After how many full years, will the value of the vintage collector’s item be below $6500?

Create a strategy Since the question involves depreciating the value, use the formula: An = P (1 - R)n

Apply the idea Given: An = 6500, P = 13 000, R = 0.066 An = P (1 - R)n

Write the formula for depreciation

6500 = 13 000(1 - 0.066) n

6500 = 13 000 × 0.934 n

0.5 = 0.934 n ≈ 10.15

n

Substitute the values Evaluate the subtraction Divide both sides by 13 000 Evaluate using technology and round

As depreciation is calculated at the end of the time period, round up the value of n to the next year, regardless of the decimal values. Therefore, n ≈ 11 years

4.07 Financial applications mathspace.co

353


Idea summary When an item’s value is expected to appreciate (increase), use the formula:

An = P (1 + R)n P is the principal (original value) R is the rate the value is increasing by, written as a decimal, per time period n An is the new total value after n periods For reducing balance depreciation, where an item’s value decreases based on its current balance, use the formula:

An = P (1 - R)n P is the principal (original value) R is the rate the value is decreasing by, written as a decimal, per time period n An is the new total value after n periods

Inflation Inflation The rate at which prices of goods and services increase over time, reducing purchasing power. Inflation is a very similar concept to appreciation, but instead of looking at the increase in value of an investment, it examines the increase in the prices of goods and services in an economy over time. The rate of inflation is expressed as a percentage. As inflation causes an increase in prices, the compound interest formula can be used again. Often, the rate of inflation in a particular country is reported as the average annual inflation rate.

Example 5 A one-year sports club membership currently costs $332. Calculate the cost in 6 years’ time if the inflation rate is 2.6% per annum. Round your answer to the nearest dollar.

Create a strategy Inflation is a similar concept to appreciation. The future cost is the new total value after n periods, so use the formula: An = P (1 + R)n

354

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Apply the idea Given: P = 332, R = 0.026, n = 6 An = P (1 + R)n Write the formula for appreciation (future cost) A6 = 332 (1 + 0.026)6 = 332 × 1.026

6

Substitute the values Evaluate the addition

= $387 Evaluate using technology and round

Idea summary Inflation examines the increase in the prices of goods and services in an economy over time. It uses the compound interest formula: An = P (1 + R)n

4.07 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

2

3

For each statement, identify which depreciation method is described: flat-rate depreciation, reducing balance depreciation, or neither: a

The value decreases linearly (constant rate).

b

The amount of depreciation in the first and second periods will be the same.

c

Assuming the object remains untouched, the amount of depreciation cost per period increases.

d

Assuming the object remains untouched, the amount of depreciation cost per period decreases.

e

The depreciation is determined by the initial value every period.

f

The depreciation is determined by the current value every period.

g

With the same annual rate, this type will have a lower end value.

A wine collection is currently valued at $4790 and appreciates at a rate of 9% p.a. After 10 years, what will be its value? a

Identify P, R (as a decimal), and n.

b

Use the formula An = P (1 + R)n to determine the appreciated value.

A car worth $35 000 depreciates at a rate of 12% per year using reducing balance depreciation. The owner wants to know the value of the car after 5 years. a b

Complete the formula: An = (⬚) (1 - ⬚)⬚ Determine the depreciated value.

4.07 Financial applications mathspace.co

355


4

A brand-new desk is currently valued at $1330 and increases in price due to an annual inflation rate of 11%. After 7 years, what will be its value? a

Identify P, R (as a decimal), and n.

b

Use the formula An = P (1 + R)n to determine the appreciated value.

Practice Ex 1

5

A 2018 Ford Mustang is priced at $45 000 and depreciates by approximately $5500 per year. a

Complete the table.

b

Will the car ever be worth nothing?

c

What depreciation method is being used?

Year

Price (dollars)

0

45 000

1

⬚ ⬚

2

⬚

3

⬚

4

⬚

5 Ex 2

6

The graph shows the depreciation of a smartphone’s value over 5 years: a

Identify the initial value of the smartphone.

b

Calculate the annual depreciation amount.

800

c

After how many years will the smartphone be worth $320?

700 600

d

What is the value of the smartphone after 5 years?

500

Value ($)

400 300 200 100

Age (years) 0

7

8

2

3

4

5

6

7

It is estimated that a house purchased for $254 500 will depreciate by an average of $9400 each year. a

How much will the house be worth after 1 year?

b

How much will the house be worth after 6 years?

Marge purchased shares at a total value of $99 800. After 6 months, the shares had dropped in value to $99 200. a

What is the monthly depreciation using the straight-line method?

b

Sketch the graph showing the depreciation of the shares’ value over 6 years.

c

What is the slope of the line?

d

What does the slope represent in this context?

e

What is the y-value of the y-intercept of the line?

f

What does the y-intercept represent in this context?

g

Let V represent the value of the shares after n months. Write the equation of the line. 1 Calculate the value of the shares after 5 years. 2

h

356

1

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


9

Ex 3

Ex 4

Ex 5

Production robots to be used in a car manufacturing plant were purchased for $4 455 000. After 5 years, they depreciated to a value of $4 385 000. a

What was the annual depreciation using the straight-line method?

b

After 7 years, the robots are sold off. If they continue to depreciate at an annual rate of $14 000, how much can they be sold for?

10

The value of land is expected to grow by 6.8% each year for the next 5 years. If it currently costs $460 per square metre, how much will it cost at the end of 5 years?

11

Due to dwindling supplies of oil, oil prices are expected to appreciate by 7.2% p.a. If the current price of oil is $79 a barrel, what is the expected price of a barrel in 23 years’ time?

12

A house was valued 6 years ago to be worth $548 000. Its value appreciated at 5.2% p.a. What is its appreciated value? Round your answer to the nearest dollar.

13

A company purchases an asset for $50 000. It depreciates by 10% per year using reducing balance depreciation. After how many years will the asset’s value fall below $20 000?

14

A motorcycle depreciates at a rate of 18% per year using reducing balance depreciation. If its initial value was $14 000, calculate the total loss in value after 6 years.

15

In 2001, the price of a bottle of orange juice was $3.20. What was the price of a bottle of orange juice in 2006 if the inflation rate was 8% p.a.?

16

For an inflation rate of 7.4% per year, what is the expected value of a $210 basket of groceries 7 years from now?

Extend your thinking 17

The federal government wants to increase funding to a certain program over 8 years at a constant rate of 4.75% per annum over that time period. If the initial funding was $14 000 000, calculate the value of the funding (rounded to the nearest dollar) after: a

18

19

1 year

b

4 years

c

8 years

There were 10 100 digital sales of a particular song in its first month of release. The number of monthly digital sales decreased by 360 each month thereafter. a

The song registered 7580 digital sales in a particular month. What was the decrease in the monthly sales from the first month?

b

In how many months after the initial month of release did the song register 7580 in monthly digital sales?

Determine the original price of these items: a

A hat today costs $35.50. Determine the price of the hat 9 years ago at an inflation rate of 3.7% per annum.

b

An item costs $15 000 today. Determine the price of the item 4 years ago at an inflation rate of 3.5% per annum.

4.07 Financial applications mathspace.co

357


20

21

A machine with an initial cost of $150 000 depreciates using reducing balance depreciation at 7.5% per year. a

Determine a general formula for the machine’s value after n years.

b

Calculate the value of the machine after 10 years.

c

Determine the number of years after which the machine’s value first falls below $50 000.

A company is considering two depreciation methods for a $40 000 asset: • Flat-rate depreciation: 10% of the original value per year • Reducing balance depreciation: 10% per year a

Calculate the value of the asset after 5 years using each method.

b

Graph both depreciation methods on the same set of axes.

c

Explain the key differences between flat-rate and reducing balance depreciation in terms of long-term value.

d

Discuss which method might be more suitable for assets that lose value quickly in their early years.

Did you know?

Financial arithmetic is crucial for managing credit card debt. The high interest rates on credit cards can cause your debt to spiral, but by using formulas, you can figure out how long it will take to pay off your balance and how much interest you will pay in the process. By understanding this math, you can make strategies to pay off your debt faster and avoid costly interest payments!

358

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


4.08   Purchase options After this lesson, you will be able to… • compare different purchase options including cash, credit, and loans. • evaluate the total cost of different payment methods. • make informed decisions about purchase options using financial calculations.

Credit cards Debit cards withdraw directly from a bank account and can only be used to pay if there is enough money in the account, as the money is withdrawn immediately. Debit cards can be used in person and online in some cases. Credit cards allow people to buy goods and services that may be too expensive to buy in a one-off purchase otherwise or for purchases that can’t be done with cash or debit such as purchases online or from another country. Also, credit cards can have rewards programs such as cash back or travel points that make purchasing using the credit card beneficial. Credit cards provide a revolving line of credit, allowing borrowing up to a limit, with interest charged on unpaid balances. However, credit card interest rates are often very high and if the full balance is not paid off, the customer can see their owing balance rise very quickly. Balance

Repayments

The total amount owing on a credit card.

Money paid back to the bank for any charges that may have been incurred.

Charges Purchases or expenses charged to a credit card. Minimum payment The minimum repayment required that period.

Statement A document generated by a bank or financial institution showing all transactions and the final account balance within a given period of time. Per annum Each year

4.08 Purchase options mathspace.co

359


The interest rate is normally written as a rate per annum. However, the interest may actually be calculated daily, weekly, biweekly, or monthly. The periodic or nominal interest rate is calculated by dividing the annual interest rate by the number of periods per year.

A = P (1 + R)n A is the balance with interest P is the closing balance R is the periodic interest rate

Annual rate Periods per year

n is the number of periods per year

Example 1 The opening balance on a credit card is $1600, and purchases of $631 and repayments of $419 are made during the month. a If the credit card company requires a minimum payment of 8% of the closing balance or the balance after transactions, calculate the minimum payment required. Round your answer to the nearest cent.

Create a strategy Determine the closing balance and multiply by the minimum payment rate of 8% or 0.08 as decimal.

Apply the idea Determine the closing balance by adding the opening balance and purchases and subtracting any payments made. Based on the problem, opening balance = $1600, purchases = $631 and payment = $419. Closing balance = Opening balance + Purchases – Payment Write the formula for closing balance = 1600 + 631 – 419

Substitute the values

= 1812

Evaluate

Determine the minimum payment by multiplying the closing balance by the minimum payment rate. Minimum payment = Closing balance × Minimum payment rate Write the formula for minimum payment = 1812 × 0.08 Substitute closing balance = 1812 and minimum payment rate = 0.08 = $144.96

Evaluate

b If the minimum payment is made, find the owing balance after one month of interest at 18% p.a.

Create a strategy Subtract the minimum payment from the closing balance to find the principal. Then find the closing balance using the related monthly interest rate.

360

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Apply the idea Principal = Closing balance – Minimum payment

Write the formula for principal

= 1812 – 144.96

Substitute values from part (a)

= $1667.04

Evaluate Monthly interest rate =

18% = 1.5% = 0.015 12 months

A = P (1 + R)n Write the formula for total balance after n period = 1667.04 (1 + 0.015)1

Substitute P = 1667.04, R = 0.015 and n = 1

= $1692.05

Evaluate

Reflect and check By applying the monthly interest rate to the principal, it is found that the interest for the month was approximately $25.00. Adding $25 per month doesn’t seem like much. It is important to remember that if interest rates were to increase, say to 21% p.a., the monthly interest rate would change from 1.5% to 1.75%. This would lead to a higher owing balance, demonstrating how increases in interest rates can quickly add up over time.

Idea summary Debit cards withdraw money directly from a bank account, while credit cards allow borrowing for purchases. These charges contribute to the outstanding balance. A monthly statement details all transactions and the required repayments, including the minimum payment. Interest rates are often advertised per annum (per year) but are calculated more frequently and can be very high on unpaid balances.

Lay-by Lay-by is a method of payment, where an initial deposit is made to secure an item for purchase and the balance is paid off at a later date, usually after a number of repayments. The initial deposit may be a fixed amount or a percentage of the total price, and sometimes includes a small administrative fee. The retailer holds the item until the balance is fully paid. Once the total amount is paid, the item can be taken home. If payments are made on time, then there is no additional cost beyond the administrative fee. However, if payments are not made on time or the customer changes their mind, then lay-by can be much more expensive than paying cash or using a debit card because of cancellation fees.

4.08 Purchase options mathspace.co

361


Example 2 Maria purchased on lay-by an item valued at $180. If she paid a deposit of 19% and paid the balance off with fortnightly payments of $26, how many fortnights are there until she receives ownership of the item? Round your answer to the nearest integer.

Create a strategy First, find the amount owing after the deposit is subtracted, and then divide it by the amount of each fortnightly payment.

Apply the idea The deposit amount can be calculated by multiplying the given percentage by the item value: $180 × 0.19 = $34.20 Find the amount owing: Amount owing = Item value – Deposit

Write the formula for amount owing

= $180 – $34.20 Substitute item value = $180 and deposit amount = $34.20 = $145.80

Evaluate

Find the number of fortnights: Amount owing Write the formula for number of fortnights Fortnight payment $145.80 = Substitute amount owing = $145.80 and $26 fortnight payment = $26 ≈ 5.6077 Evaluate and cancel dollar sign

Number of fortnights =

Rounding up to the nearest integer, Maria will own the item after 6 fortnights.

Reflect and check The owing balance could also be determined by calculating 180 × 0.81 because if 19% was paid in the deposit, then 81% is left to pay. Amount owing = 180 × 0.81 = 145.80

Idea summary Lay-by secures items with a deposit and instalments, held by the retailer until paid, with possible cancellation fees.

362

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Buy now-pay later systems Purchasing using a buy now-pay later system, sometimes called hire purchase or deferred payment plan, allows for the purchase of more expensive items, like a television, without needing all the money to make the purchase. A deferred payment plan is an arrangement that essentially allows customers to “buy now and pay later.” It is similar to lay-by in that there is a deposit and then payments to pay for the balance until sometime in the future. Usually, an agreement is made with the company selling the goods to pay for the item in monthly instalments over a set period. In return, the item can be taken home for immediate use. It is similar to using a credit card or applying for a personal loan as interest is charged by the company. Monthly payments or instalments include repaying the cost of the item along with the interest charged. There are some third-party platforms that do “buy now-pay later” with no interest. If payments are made on time, then no additional fees are charged. Also, if payments are not made on time, then fees can add up quickly.

Example 3 Andre buys a new TV for $1500 with a buy now-pay later plan. The plan involves five equal payments and no administrative fees or interest. However, if he misses a payment, an initial fee of $15 is charged. If the payment is not received within a fortnight, another fee of $5 will also apply. He pays the first two payments on time but is three weeks late on the third payment and one week late on the fourth payment. He pays the last payment on time. a Determine the total amount of fees Andre had to pay.

Create a strategy There are no fees on three of the payments. There are two fees on one payment and one fee on the other payment. These fees all need to be added up.

Apply the idea Fees on third payment = Initial fee + More than a fortnight fee = 15 + 5 = 20 Fees on fourth payment = Initial fee = 15 Total fees = Fees on third payment + Fees on fourth payment = 20 + 15 = 35 The total amount of fees is $35.

4.08 Purchase options mathspace.co

363


b Determine the percentage of the original cost he paid in fees, rounded to one decimal place.

Create a strategy To find the percentage, the fees need to be divided by the original cost then multiplied by 100%.

Apply the idea

Reflect and check

35 100% Percentage = 1500 = 2.3%

2.3% is fairly minimal compared to other options like credit cards which often charge around 20% if payments are late.

The fees are 2.3% of the original cost.

Example 4 A store offered interest-free terms for 23 months on all purchases. Valentina purchased a $322 treadmill by paying an initial $27 deposit followed by 8 monthly instalments. She was also charged an account-keeping fee of $3 per month. a Determine the amount of each instalment, rounded to the nearest cent.

Create a strategy First, find the amount owing and divide it by the number of instalments, and then add the monthly account-keeping fee.

Apply the idea Based on the problem, item value = $322, deposit = $27, number of instalments = 8 and account-keeping fee = $3. Find the amount owing: Amount owing = Item value – Deposit

Write the formula for amount owing

= $322 – $27 Substitute the values = $295

Evaluate

Find the size of each instalment: Amount owing + Account-keeping fee Write the formula Number of instalments 295 3 = Substitute the values 8

Size of each instalment =

364

= 36.88 + 3

Evaluate the division

= $39.88

Evaluate

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


b Determine the total amount paid for the treadmill?

Create a strategy Add the purchase price and the total amount paid in account-keeping fees. Multiply the accountkeeping fee by 8 months to find the total amount paid in account-keeping fees.

Apply the idea The total account-keeping fee is calculated by multiplying the account-keeping fee by the number of monthly instalments: $3 × 8 = $24 Total amount paid = Item value + Total account-keeping fees Write the formula for total amount paid = 322 + 24

Substitute the values

= $346

Evaluate

Reflect and check This could also be calculated by doing: Total amount paid = Deposit + 8 × Monthly payment amount = 27 + 8 × 39.88 = 27 + 319.04 = $346.04 The difference of 4 cents is due to rounding up.

Idea summary A buy now-pay later system, also known as hire purchase or a deferred payment plan, allows a customer to take an item home immediately and pay for it over time in instalments. While often interest-free, significant fees can apply if payments are not made on time.

Purchase with a personal loan Making a purchase with a personal loan is very similar to using a credit card, but is usually reserved for more expensive purchases, like buying a car. First, an application for a loan must be made through a lender, such as a bank or a car dealer. If the loan is approved, regular payments, usually monthly, are required to repay the borrowed amount along with the interest charged as a borrowing fee. Depending on the circumstances, careful consideration is needed before taking out a personal loan, especially since the total amount paid will exceed the item’s original price due to interest charges. When purchasing a car, it is important to remember that a car depreciates, or loses value, immediately after buying it.

4.08 Purchase options mathspace.co

365


Personal loans are typically calculated using compound interest, but the periods are often fortnightly, monthly, or sometimes quarterly, so it can be difficult to compare rates if they aren’t both annual. To determine which option offers the best interest rate, the effective interest rate can be calculated, taking into account how often compounding occurs: Effective interest rate

Nominal rate n

1

n

1

where nominal rate refers to the interest rate given in % p.a. converted to decimals, and n refers to how often it compounds within a single year.

Example 5 Luigi has two payment options for purchasing a new item as shown in the table: Purchase option

Interest rate

Compounding interval

Buy now-pay later

7.45%

Quarterly

Personal loan

7.25%

Monthly

a Determine the effective interest rate E1% (the equivalent annual interest rate) used in buy now-pay later system. Give the answer as a percentage, rounded to two decimal places.

Create a strategy Use the formula: Effective interest rate

1

Nominal rate n

n

1

Apply the idea Given: Nominal rate = 7.45%, convert this to a decimal, and n = 4 since there are 4 quarters in a year. Effective interest rate = 1 E1 = 1

366

Nominal rate n 0.0745 4

n

4

1

1

Write the formula for effective interest rate Substitute nominal rate = 0.0745, n = 4

= (1.0186)4 – 1

Evaluate the operations inside the brackets

= 0.0766

Evaluate

= 7.66%

Convert to a percentage

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


b Determine the effective interest rate E2% (that is, the equivalent annual interest rate) of the personal loan. Give your answer as a percentage, rounded to two decimal places.

Apply the idea Given: Nominal rate = 7.25%, convert this to a decimal, and n = 12 since there are 12 months in a year. E2 = 1

0.0725 12

12

1

Substitute nominal rate = 0.0725, n = 12

= (1.0060416)12 1

Evaluate the operations inside the brackets

= 0.0750

Evaluate

= 7.50%

Convert to a percentage

c Which payment option should Luigi prefer so he pays the least: personal loan or buy now-pay later system? Create a strategy Compare the two effective interest rates found in part (a) and part (b), and choose the smaller rate.

Apply the idea From part (a) the effective interest rate applied in buy now-pay later system is 7.66% while from part (b) the effective interest rate of personal loan is 7.50%. The effective interest rate of the personal loan has a smaller rate so it means that personal loan is more preferred.

Reflect and check In the case of loans, a smaller effective interest rate is typically more desired as this results in paying less interest. In the case of savings accounts, a higher effective interest rate results in a higher return on the investment.

Idea summary Personal loans for large purchases involve interest, with effective interest rates. The effective interest rate can be calculated using this formula: Effective interest rate

1

Nominal rate n

n

1

where nominal rate refers to the interest rate given in % p.a., and n refers to how often it compounds within a single year.

4.08 Purchase options mathspace.co

367


4.08 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

Determine whether each statement is true or false: a

A credit card balance that is not paid in full by the due date will incur interest charges.

b

A debit card is the same as a credit card.

c

Cash purchases do not incur interest charges or repayment fees.

d

With buy now-pay later systems, if the payment is made on time, there is generally no additional interest or fee.

e

Personal loans used to finance purchases always require immediate and complete payment at the point of sale.

f

With lay-by, you buy now and pay later.

2

Calculate the closing balance on a credit card with opening balance $1068, if purchases to the amount of $802 and repayments to the amount of $643 are made during the month.

3

These people purchased different items on lay-by. Determine how much more they still need to pay for the item:

4

5

a

Maya’s item was valued at $165. She paid a deposit of $16.00

b

Darwin’s item was valued at $418. He paid a deposit of 8%.

c

James’s item was valued at $110. The deposit required was 5% and the lay-by fee was $17.

Fred needs to buy the equipment shown in the table for his work as a tiler, but doesn’t have the necessary funds: $250

Tile cutter

$300

Polisher

$500

Circular saw

$600

a

If Fred was able to pay by cash, what would the total cost be?

b

Fred uses a hire purchase at a simple interest rate of 7% p.a. to pay for the equipment. If he pays 9 equal monthly instalments, what time T in years, should be used to calculate the simple interest?

c

Calculate the simple interest charged for the total cost (cash price) of all the items

Larissa bought a van for $46 700. She repaid it with 62 monthly instalments of $947.81. Calculate: a

368

Drill

The total amount that had to be repaid

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

b

The interest on the loan


Practice 6

7

Valerie takes out a personal loan to purchase a motorbike valued at $5000. The loan has an interest rate of 22.8% p.a. compounded monthly. a

How much will she owe after the first month?

b

If Valerie pays $3829 between the first and second month, how much will she owe after the second month?

c

If she pays off the remaining amount after the third month, how much has she paid in total?

d

How much more has she paid taking out a personal loan instead of using a debit card to pay for the car up front?

In the past month, Tracy made purchases to the amount of $482 and repayments to the amount of $114 on her new credit card, which charges interest at 3% p.a. compounded monthly. a

Determine the closing balance before interest.

b

Determine the closing balance after interest.

c

If the credit card company requires a minimum payment of 5% of the closing balance, what is the minimum payment Tracy will have to pay?

d

If Tracy only pays the minimum amount, what is her balance owing?

Ex 1

8

The opening balance on a credit card is $2000, and purchases of $500 and repayments of $350 are made during the month. If the credit card company requires a minimum payment of 8% of the closing balance, determine the minimum payment required.

Ex 2

9

Han purchased an item on lay-by that was valued at $340. If he paid a deposit of $5 and paid the balance off with weekly payments of $30, after how many whole weeks will he receive ownership of the item?

10

Amelia purchased an item on lay-by that was valued at $110. If she paid a deposit of 22% and paid the balance off with monthly payments of $38, after how many full months will she receive ownership of the item?

11

These people purchased different items on lay-by. Determine the size of their regular payments given that the item is purchased on lay-by:

Ex 3

12

a

Valentina’s item was valued at $200. She paid a deposit of 15% and paid the balance off with regular weekly payments over 14 weeks.

b

Dave’s item was valued at $160. He paid a deposit of $30 and paid the balance off with regular monthly payments over 3 months.

Samantha buys a new laptop for $2000 with a buy now-pay later plan. The plan involves six equal payments and no administrative fees or interest. However, if she misses a payment, an initial fee of $20 is charged. If the payment is not received within two weeks, another fee of $7 will also apply. She makes the first three payments on time, but is two weeks late on the fourth payment and one week late on the fifth payment. She makes the last payment on time. a

Determine the total amount of fees Samantha had to pay.

b

Determine the percentage of the original cost she paid in fees.

4.08 Purchase options mathspace.co

369


Ex 4

13

14

15

A gym offered a membership plan with a one-time joining fee of $100 and a monthly fee of $20 for 12 months. Sheryll joined the gym by paying the joining fee and plans to pay the monthly fee for the entire year. a

Determine the average monthly cost throughout the year, including the joining fee.

b

Determine the total cost of the membership for one year.

Mae purchased a $4084 sofa on a deferred payment plan. She paid a $622 deposit, followed by nothing for the first year and then 33 fortnightly instalments of $134. a

How much did Mae pay for the sofa in total?

b

How much interest did she pay?

c

What was the annual rate of interest charged for buying on a deferred payment plan? Round your answer to two decimal places.

Neil bought a $4800 LCD television on deferred payment terms, and was given the choice of two payment plans: • Plan 1: 18% deposit with 51 monthly instalments of $212 • Plan 2: $375 deposit and fortnightly instalments of $52 over 6 years Which plan is most affordable for Neil? Support your answer with appropriate calculations.

16

Beth purchased a $3200 second hand car on deferred payment terms, and was given the choice of two payment plans: • Plan 1: 7% deposit with monthly instalments of $104 over 3 years • Plan 2: $362 deposit with 77 weekly instalments of $63 Which plan is most affordable for Beth? Support your answer with appropriate calculations.

17

Dan purchased a desk, valued at $878, on interest-free terms for 21 months, with an initial $80 deposit and 9 monthly payments. A penalty fee of 10% of the balance owing is charged for instalments that are not paid on time.

Ex 5

18

a

Determine the monthly instalment.

b

Determine the penalty fee due if Dan is late in paying the third monthly instalment.

Roland has two payment options for purchasing a new item as shown in the table:

a

370

Interest rate

Compounding interval

Hire purchase

6.5%

Monthly

Personal loan

7.2%

Quarterly

Determine the effective equivalent annual interest rate for each purchase option, rounded to two decimal places: i

b

Purchase option

Hire purchase

ii

Personal loan

What option should Roland choose in order to pay the least interest? Assume that he pays in monthly intervals.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


19

These purchase options were provided to a customer. Assume the payment intervals for each purchase option are the same:

a

20

Interest rate

Compounding interval

Credit card

6.85%

Daily

Hire purchase

6.65%

Weekly

Determine the effective equivalent annual interest rate for the options to two decimal places: i

b

Purchase option

Credit card

ii

Hire purchase

Which option is the most affordable? Explain your answer.

The marked price of a particular grinder sold in a store is $350. If the store offered a store-wide discount of 12% and a further discount of 7% is applied to the discount price to customers who paid by cash, how much was the cash price?

Extend your thinking 21

22

23

Alexia is interested in buying a new computer valued at $1818.09. She doesn’t have the money to pay up front, but the store has an option to pay by hire purchase, with 12 equal monthly payments. a

Alexia wants to avoid paying more than $192 per month. What is the largest simple interest rate, r% p.a., that Alexia would agree to? Round your answer to two decimal places.

b

How much more does she pay using the hire purchase with this simple interest rate, than if she paid with cash?

The sale price of a bike is $800. Vincent chooses to purchase the item on a credit card, with 16 days interest-free. His card has an interest rate of 14% per annum, compounded daily. a

Vincent pays $483 on his payment due date. How much does he still owe?

b

Vincent pays the remaining balance 22 days later. How much does he pay overall for the item?

c

How much more does Vincent pay by using his credit card instead of cash?

The sale price of a television is $581. Noah chooses to purchase the television on a credit card, with 7 days interest-free. His card has an interest rate of 26.75% p.a. compounded daily. a

Noah pays $208 off on the day of purchase. How much does he still owe?

b

Noah wants to avoid paying more than $610. How many full days, n, from the date of purchase does Noah have before the total costs exceed $610?

4.08 Purchase options mathspace.co

371


24

Irene wants to buy a second hand car for $1685 and is deciding between using her credit card or taking out a personal loan. The interest rates and additional fees for a credit card and a personal loan are shown in the table: Personal loan

Credit card

Legal fee

$100

NA

Application fee

$350

$200

Annual fee

$30

$80

Interest (p.a.)

18.45%

17.75%

Compounding interval

Monthly

Daily

a

If Irene chooses to take out a personal loan, how much money will she spend in fees in the first year?

b

If Irene decides to apply for a credit card and pay with that, how much will she spend on fees in the first year?

Irene takes a loan out for $1685 and pays $825 during each monthly payment interval (or the remaining balance if less than $825). A record of the payments and owing balance has been started in this table:

25

Balance (before interest)

Balance (after interest)

Payment

Balance (owing)

Month 1

$1685

$1710.91

$825

$885.91

Month 2

$885.91

Month 3

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

c

Complete the table.

d

How much does Irene pay using a personal loan, including fees?

e

Consider the situation if Irene uses a credit card instead with 40 interest-free days. If she pays her balance within the interest-free period, how much does she pay including fees?

Han made these purchases on deferred payment plans: • Item A: A fridge, valued at $702. He paid a 6% deposit, followed by monthly instalments of $21 over 3 years. • Item B: A couch, valued at $726. He paid a 11% deposit, followed by fortnightly instalments of $10 over 3 years. • Item C: A TV, valued at $975. He paid a 12% deposit, followed by weekly instalments of $5 over 4 years. • Item D: A car, valued at $36 653. He paid a $1714 deposit, followed by nothing for the first 6 months and then 31 monthly instalments of $1266.

372

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Complete the table. Round your answers to two decimal places.

Deposit paid for the item Balance owing (after deposit) Total payments in instalment Total payment for the item Interest charged to the item Interest charged as a percentage to the item Annual rate of simple interest 26

Item A

Item B

Item C

Item D

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚ ⬚ ⬚ ⬚

⬚

⬚ ⬚ ⬚ ⬚ ⬚

Jazelle needs to buy a laptop for her university studies. At her local appliance store, Harry’s Gadgets, the salesperson offers Jazelle several options for her budget of $1000. Lay-by option: • Initial deposit: $100 • Weekly payments: $50 for 20 weeks

Payment plan option: • Initial deposit: $150 • Monthly payments: $100 for 9 months Purchase with personal loan option:

Cash payment option: • 10% off the total price immediately with cash

• Loan amount: $1000 • Interest rate: 50% per annum, compounded monthly • Loan term: 1 year

a

Calculate the total cost for each purchase option: i For the lay-by option: Calculate the total cost including the initial deposit and weekly payments. ii For the cash payment option: Calculate the discounted price for paying upfront in cash. iii For the payment plan option: Calculate the total cost including the initial deposit and monthly payments. iv For the personal loan option: Calculate the total amount repaid at the end of the loan term, including interest.

b

Rank the options from most to least expensive.

c

Discuss the pros and cons of each purchase option for Jazelle, considering factors like immediate ownership, total cost, and financial flexibility.

d

Based on the calculations and comparisons, which purchase option would you recommend to Jazelle? Explain your reasoning.

Chapter 4 review

Online review

mathspace.co

4.08 Purchase options mathspace.co

373


Big ideas • Sequences are ordered sets of numbers that can be described and generated using rules that define the relationship between consecutive terms. • Arithmetic sequences model linear growth and decay, where a constant difference is added or subtracted to generate each subsequent term. • Geometric sequences model exponential growth and decay, where each term is generated by multiplying the previous term by a constant ratio.

5 Number patterns and recurrence relations Chapter outline 5.01 5.02 5.03 5.04 5.05 5.06

Number patterns and sequences First-order linear recurrence relations Arithmetic sequences Applications of arithmetic sequences Geometric sequences Applications of geometric sequences Investigation: Saving money Chapter 5 review

376 387 400 410 421 431


The ancient Greeks used number patterns to design perfect temples — including the Parthenon.


5.01   Number patterns and sequences After this lesson, you will be able to… • identify and describe patterns in number sequences. • use appropriate mathematical vocabulary and notation for sequences. • generate terms in a sequence using the explicit form.

Sequence definition Sequence An ordered set of elements such as numbers, instructions, or objects. Getting from one number to the next can be thought of as a step. A simple pattern is formed when the same number is added or subtracted at each step. Consider these examples: +2

+2

2 4 –3

+2

6 –3

+2

8 10 –3

17 14 11 8

–3

5

This is an increasing pattern, where 2 is added at every step.

This is a decreasing sequence, where 3 is subtracted at every step.

The next number in a sequence can be found by identifying the pattern and applying it to the last known term. For example, the next number in the decreasing sequence above would be 5 – 3 = 2.

Example 1 Find the next number in the sequence:

Create a strategy

5, 8, 11, 14, ⬚

If the sequence is increasing, find the number added or multiplied every time.

Apply the idea Since 5 + 3 = 8, 8 + 3 = 11, and 11 + 3 = 14, this means 3 is added every time. So the next number is 14 + 3 = 17. 5, 8, 11, 14, 17

376

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Idea summary A sequence is an ordered list of numbers. In an increasing sequence, each term is greater than the previous term. In a decreasing sequence, each term is less than the previous term.

Describe sequences In mathematics, a sequence is often given as a list of numbers, each separated by commas. Each of the separate numbers in a sequence is called a term. The position of a term is shown with a subscript number. An initial value is often labelled t0. The term that follows it is the first term, t1, the next is the second term, t2, and so on. In general, any nth term in a sequence can be referred to as tn and any previous term would be tn – 1 and the subsequent term would be tn + 1. Note that any letter could be used to refer to the terms, not just t. If the sequence ends, it is known as a finite sequence. – 3, 5, 13, 21 and 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10 000 are examples of finite sequences. An infinite sequence is a sequence with infinite terms. In other words, a sequence that never ends. 1 1 1 1 1 , , , , , . . . is an example of an infinite sequence, where the denominator increases by 2 3 4 5 6 one for each subsequent term. 1,

The three dots (. . .) at the end of the sequence means that the number pattern in the sequence continues indefinitely, making this an infinite sequence. When a number pattern is detectable in a sequence, a generating rule can often be established and then used to determine a term in the sequence. Mathematicians can sometimes develop explicit generating rules that allow the calculation of any particular term in the sequence. 1 means that the nth term is the reciprocal of n. This is an example n where n = 1, 2, 3, . . ., so t1 would be the first term and not t0, as n = 0 cannot be substituted into 1 1 this generating rule. So the first term becomes t1 1 and the second term t2 etc., so that the 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 sequence becomes 1, , , , , , . . . and so on. 2 3 4 5 6 There are some sequences that appear to have no pattern at all, and therefore it is difficult or impossible to find an explicit generating rule. But they can nevertheless have a certain logical way of building. For example, the sequence 3, 1, 4, 1, 5, 9, . . . separating the digits of π exhibits no discernible pattern and continues to do so indefinitely. For example, the rule tn

5.01 Number patterns and sequences mathspace.co

377


Example 2 Determine the first five terms of the sequence an = 3n – 3, starting from n = 1.

Create a strategy Substitute n = 1 until n = 5 into the sequence.

Apply the idea a1 = 3 × 1 – 3

Substitute n = 1

=3–3

Evaluate the multiplication

=0

Evaluate

a2 = 3 × 2 – 3

Substitute n = 2

=6–3

Evaluate the multiplication

=3

Evaluate

a3 = 3 × 3 – 3

Substitute n = 3

=9–3

Evaluate the multiplication

=6

Evaluate

a4 = 3 × 4 – 3

Substitute n = 4

= 12 – 3

Evaluate the multiplication

=9

Evaluate

a5 = 3 × 5 – 3

Substitute n = 5

= 15 – 3

Evaluate the multiplication

= 12

Evaluate

Here are the first five terms of the sequence an = 3n – 3: 0, 3, 6, 9, 12

378

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 3 Determine the first five terms of the sequence an = 2n + 1.

Create a strategy Substitute n = 1 until n = 5 into the sequence.

Apply the idea a1 = 21 + 1 2

Substitute n = 1

=2

Evaluate the addition

=4

Evaluate

a2 = 22 + 1 3

Substitute n = 2

=2

Evaluate the addition

=8

Evaluate

a3 = 23 + 1 4

Substitute n = 3

=2

Evaluate the addition

= 16

Evaluate

a4 = 24 + 1 5

Substitute n = 4

=2

Evaluate the addition

= 32

Evaluate

a5 = 25 + 1 6

Substitute n = 5

=2

Evaluate the addition

= 64

Evaluate

Here are the first five terms of the sequence an = 2n + 1: 4, 8, 16, 32, 64

Idea summary A sequence is an ordered list of numbers, where each number is called a term. A sequence can be classified based on its length and pattern. • A finite sequence has a specific number of terms and comes to an end. • An infinite sequence continues indefinitely, which is often indicated with an ellipsis (...). • When a sequence follows a discernible pattern, an explicit generating rule can sometimes be found to calculate any term.

5.01 Number patterns and sequences mathspace.co

379


Sequences in tables and graphs Here is a drawing of a simple pattern:

A table of values can be generated to count the number of petals visible at a given time, based on how many flowers are present: Flowers, n

1

2

3

4

Petals, an

5

10

15

20

In this pattern, n represents the step number in the sequence (that is, the number of flowers) and an represents the total number of petals at that step. Notice that the number of petals is increasing by 5 each time — in particular, the value of an is always equal to 5 times the value of n. Therefore, the generating rule for this sequence must be an = 5n, where a1 = 5 represents the first term. This rule can now be used to predict future results. For example, to calculate the total number of petals when there are 10 flowers present, substitute n = 10 into the rule to find a10 = 5 × 10 = 50 petals. So, even though there were only 1, 2, 3, and 4 flowers present in the given sequence, the rule has determined that there would be 50 petals visible when there are 10 flowers present. A graph can also be used to represent a sequence. Consider the given number pattern, the number of petals an versus the number of flowers n is shown in the graph: Petals (an) 20 15 10 5 Flowers (n) 0

380

1

2

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

3

4


Example 4 Matches were used to make this pattern:

a Complete the table: Number of triangles (t)

1

2

3

5

10

20

Number of matches (m)

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

Create a strategy The diagram can be used to find the number of matches added every time the number of triangles increases.

Apply the idea Using the diagram, count the number of matches that make up the 1, 2, and 3 triangles. Number of triangles (t)

1

2

3

5

10

20

Number of matches (m)

3

5

7

⬚

⬚

⬚

Since 3 + 2 = 5 and 5 + 2 = 7, this means that 2 matches are added every time to form a new triangle. If the diagram shows that 4 triangles have 9 matches, then 5 triangles will have 9 + 2 = 11 matches. • For t = 5: An additional 2 triangles are added after t = 3. This requires 7 + 2 × 2 = 11 matches. • For t = 10: An additional 5 triangles are added after t = 5. This requires 11 + 5 × 2 = 21 matches. • For t = 20: An additional 10 triangles are added after t = 10. This requires 21 + 10 × 2 = 41 matches. Number of triangles (t)

1

2

3

5

10

20

Number of matches (m)

3

5

7

11

21

41

5.01 Number patterns and sequences mathspace.co

381


b Write a formula that describes the relationship between the number of matches, m, and the number of triangles, t.

Create a strategy Use the pattern found in part (a).

Apply the idea From part (a), it was found that each new triangle adds 2 matches. This constant increase means the rule will contain the term 2t. Test 2t against a known value, such as t = 1. For t = 1, 2t = 2 (1) = 2. However, the actual number of matches is 3. There is a difference of +1. This suggests the rule is “twice the number of triangles, plus one”. Therefore, the formula is: m = 2t + 1

Reflect and check Verify the formula by substituting a value of t from the table, such as t = 10. m = 2t + 1

Write the formula

= 2 (10) + 1

Substitute t = 10

= 20 + 1

Evaluate the multiplication

= 21

Evaluate the addition

The result, m = 21, matches the value for t = 10 in the completed table from part (a). This confirms that the formula m = 2t + 1 correctly models the pattern.

c How many matches are required to make 77 triangles using this pattern?

Create a strategy Use the formula from part (b) using t = 77.

Apply the idea m = 2t + 1

Write the formula

= 2 × 77 + 1

Substitute t = 77

= 154 + 1

Evaluate the multiplication

= 155

Evaluate

To make 77 triangles, 155 matches are needed.

Idea summary Tables and graphs can be used to represent the patterns in a sequence and to predict future results.

382

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


5.01 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

2

3

Determine whether these patterns are increasing, decreasing or neither: a

7, 6, 11, 3, 9

b

25, 22, 19, 16, 13

c

6.5, 6.6, 6.7, 6.8, 6.9

d

5, 4, 9, 1, 7

e

21, 20, 19, 18, 17

f

5.4, 9.4, 6.2, 6.6, 7.0

For each pattern: i

Identify whether the pattern is increasing or decreasing.

ii

Determine by how much the pattern is increasing or decreasing each time.

a

9.5, 9.7, 9.9, 10.1, 10.3

b

15.3, 14.7, 14.1, 13.5, 12.9

c

31, 25, 19, 13

Identify the third term in the sequence: 4, –5, 6, –7, 8, . . .

4

Consider the sequence an. If the first term is a1, express the notation used for the fifth term of the sequence.

5

Determine whether each sequence is finite or infinite:

6

a

1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6

b

–1, –2, –3, –4, –5, –6, . . .

c

–1, –2, –3, –4, –5

d

1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, . . .

If all the dates in July were used to form a sequence, would the sequence be finite or infinite?

Practice Ex 1

7

Determine the next number in the given sequences: a

8 Ex 2, 3

9

2, 4, 6, 8

b

65, 58, 51, 44

c

1 1 2, 2 , 3, 3 2 2

Determine the first five terms of each sequence, beginning at n = 1. Round the terms to four decimal places where necessary. a

an = 4n – 2

b

an = –2n

d

an = (– 2)n (3n)

e

an

1 n

c

an = 3n – 1

f

an

1

1 n

n

Consider the rule: “The starting number, N, has 9 added to it. The sum is then multiplied by 5 to get the answer A.” a

Use the rule to complete the table of values:

b

Express the rule for A in terms of N.

Starting number (N)

4

5

6

Answer (A)

⬚

⬚

⬚ ⬚

5.01 Number patterns and sequences mathspace.co

7

383


Ex 4

10

Each of the patterns was created in steps using matchsticks: i

Complete the table of values: 2

3

4

5

10

Number of matchsticks (m)

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

Express a formula that describes the relationship between the number of matches, m, and the step number, t.

a

3

c

b

2 1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

4

1

2

3

4

d

Vanessa is making a sequence of shapes out of tiles. She creates a table comparing the sequence number of a shape to the number of tiles needed to make it: Sequence number (n)

1

2

3

4

5

6

Number of tiles (T )

3

5

7

⬚

⬚

⬚

a

How many new tiles are added at each step?

b

Calculate how many tiles Vanessa will need to make the next three shapes in the sequence by completing the table of values.

c

An equation to represent the relationship between a shape’s sequence number and the number of tiles needed can be written in the form T = s + (n – 1) d, where s is the starting number of tiles and d is the number of new tiles added each step.

d

384

1

ii

1

11

Step number (t)

i

Write an equation to represent the relationship between a shape’s sequence number and the number of tiles needed in the form given.

ii

Express the equation found in the form T = an + b.

Calculate how many tiles Vanessa will need to make the 20th shape in the sequence.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


12

Christa deposits $1 into a new bank account while Jenny deposits $38 into a new bank account. The next day, Christa adds $2 to the account and doubles how much she adds each day thereafter. Jenny adds $5 each day. a

List the amount Christa had in her account each day for the first four days.

b

List the amount Jenny had in her account each day for the first four days.

c

On which day will they have the same amount of money in their respective bank accounts?

Extend your thinking 13

A population of predators (Pn) and prey (Vn) in an ecosystem is modelled at the end of each year n. The initial populations are P0 = 50 and V0 = 1000. The populations for the next year are generated by the following rules: • The prey population for the next year is twice the current prey population minus a number equal to the current predator population: Vn + 1 = 2Vn – Pn. • The predator population for the next year is half the current predator population plus Pn Vn . one-hundredth of the current prey population: Pn 1 2 100 a

Calculate the predator and prey populations at the end of the first year (P1, V1) and the second year (P2, V2). Round your answers to the nearest whole number.

b

Describe the trend you observe for each population after two years.

5.01 Number patterns and sequences mathspace.co

385


14

15

Consider a sequence where the first term is t1 = 1 and each subsequent term is found by adding the term number, i.e., tn + 1 = tn + (n + 1). a

Determine the first five terms of this sequence.

b

Explain why this rule is inefficient for finding the 100th term, t100.

c

This sequence can also be described by an explicit generating rule of the form n ( n a) tn . By testing the first few terms, find the integer values of a and b. b

Consider the pattern of images:

n=1

16

n=2

n=3

n=4

a

If t represents the number of shaded triangles, write an expression for t in terms of n.

b

Determine the value of t when n = 8.

A population of rabbits are counted in an area, and it is found that the population is doubling each month. The population counts at the end of each of the first three months are shown:

Month 1

Month 2

Month 3

a

b

386

Complete the table, showing the population at the end of each of the first 5 months: Month (n)

1

2

3

4

5

Population (P)

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

If the population continues to grow in this manner, the population at the end of the nth month would be given by P = 2n. Determine the population at the end of 1 year.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


5.02   First-order linear recurrence relations After this lesson, you will be able to… • use recurrence relations to represent sequences. • generate sequence terms using recurrence relations. • identify sequence behaviour as increasing, decreasing, constant, oscillating, or limiting values.

First-order linear recurrence relations Recurrence relation

First-order recurrence relation

A formula that defines and generates a sequence by using the previous terms to determine the next term in the sequence.

A recurrence relation where a term is defined in terms of only the previous term.

The recurrence relation un + 1 = un + 2 where u0 = 1 says to “start with 1 and add 2 to determine the next term”. The rule can be used to generate the sequence 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, . . .: u1 = u0 + 2 = 1 + 2 = 3 u2 = u1 + 2 = 3 + 2 = 5 u3 = u2 + 2 = 5 + 2 = 7 u4 = u3 + 2 = 7 + 2 = 9 The value of the index of the recurrence relation represents the position that the term holds in the sequence, nth term, and that the previous, (n–1)th term, was used to generate it. When reading recurrence relations, the recurrence equations can make use of the features seen in this form:

un + 1 = Run + d, u0 = Initial value u0 is used to represent the starting value of a sequence d is a constant difference that can either be added or subtracted in each recurrence R is a common ratio that can be multiplied by the previous term in the sequence un is used to represent the current nth term in a sequence (u2 refers to the 2nd calculated term in the sequence) un + 1 refers to the next term in the sequence after the previous term un

5.02 First-order linear recurrence relations mathspace.co

387


Recurrence relations require using the previous term in a sequence to determine the next term. At this stage, it is not possible to skip from u1 to u4, without calculating u2 and u3. When reading the recurrence relation, if un is the current term: • un – 1 represents the term that comes immediately before the current term, un. • un + 1 represents the term that comes immediately after the current term, un. • un + 2 represents the term that comes two positions after the current term, un. Variations to the form of the recurrence relation have a significant impact on the sequence that is generated. The index of the recurrence relation can also be expressed in a variety of ways. The letter ‘u’ is the generic variable used in writing a recurrence relation. Any letter can be used for a recurrence relation. The primary requirement of a recurrence relation is that the next term is generated from the previous term. For example: un = Run – 1 + d, u0 = Initial value The key difference in this form is the index notation: • un is used to represent the current nth term in a sequence (u2 refers to the 2nd calculated term in the sequence) • un – 1 refers to the term immediately preceding the current term un. The recurrence relation mentioned includes both R and d. This chapter will explore two key forms that use only one of these values in the variables of their respective rules: Arithmetic: un + 1 = un + d, u0 = Initial value A key feature of the arithmetic recurrence relations is that the sequence that is generated increases or decreases by a fixed amount, d. Geometric: un + 1 = Run, u0 = Initial value Geometric recurrence relations increase or decrease exponentially at a rate determined by the common ratio, R.

Example 1 Determine whether these are valid or invalid first-order recurrence relations: a un = un – 2 + 3, u0 = 5

Create a strategy Consider whether this recurrence relation generates the next term in the sequence, based on the previous term and if an initial value is given.

Apply the idea Focusing on the index notation, this recurrence relation states that the current terms are equal to 3 plus the term two places earlier in the sequence. A first-order recurrence relation must define a term using only the immediately preceding term. Therefore, this is not a valid first-order recurrence relation.

388

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


b un 1

1 un 2

1, u0 = 4

Apply the idea The next term in the sequence is shown to be calculated based on the previous term, so this is a valid recurrence relation.

c un + 1 = 3un

Apply the idea As no initial value is given, it is impossible to begin the sequence given by this recurrence relation. This is not a valid first-order recurrence relation.

d un – 1 = 2un – 4, u0 = 2

Apply the idea As it is currently expressed, the recurrence relation requires a future value in order to calculate un – 1. Therefore, it is invalid. Note: if the question was rearranged to make un the subject, it would become a valid recurrence relation.

Idea summary Recurrence relations are recurrence equations that have this form:

un + 1 = Run + d, u0 = Initial value n is the position in the sequence u0 is used to represent the starting value of a sequence d is a constant difference that can either be added or subtracted in each recurrence R is a common ratio that can be multiplied by the previous term in the sequence un is the nth term, or “term at step n” un + 1 refers to the next term in the sequence after the previous term un This specific form is a first-order recurrence relation, where each term is defined using only the single term that precedes it.

5.02 First-order linear recurrence relations mathspace.co

389


Generate sequences To generate sequences using recurrence relations: 1. Start by identifying the initial term or terms. 2. Interpret the recurrence relation in English. 3. Use the rule to determine the next term and repeat. For an arithmetic sequence defined by un + 1 = un + d, the term un + 1 is obtained by adding a constant difference d to the current term un. Similarly, for a geometric sequence defined by un + 1 = Run, the term un + 1 is obtained by multiplying the current term un by a common ratio R. By starting with an initial term u0 and repeatedly applying the recurrence relation, the entire sequence can be generated.

Example 2 Complete each table of values based on the given recurrence relation: a ln + 1 = ln + 14, l0 = 2 n

l n + 1​

0

l1 = l0 + 14 = 2 + 14 = 16

1

l2 = l1 + 14 = 16 + 14 = 30

2

⬚

3 4 5

Create a strategy The recurrence relation can be interpreted as “start with 2, then to determine the next term, add 14 to the current term”. Following the example given by the first row, substitute the previous answer for ln in each row.

390

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

⬚ ⬚ ⬚

Apply the idea n

ln + 1

0

l1 = l0 + 14 = 2 + 14 = 16

1

l2 = l1 + 14 = 16 + 14 = 30

2

l3 = l2 + 14 = 30 + 14 = 44

3

l4 = l3 + 14 = 44 + 14 = 58

4

l5 = l4 + 14 = 58 + 14 = 72

5

l6 = l5 + 14 = 72 + 14 = 86


b kn + 1 = 3kn, k0 = 3 n

kn + 1

0

k1 = 3k0 = 3 × 3 = 9

1

⬚ ⬚

2

⬚

3

⬚

4

⬚

5

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

The recurrence relation can be interpreted as “start with 3, then to determine the next term, multiply the current term by 3”.

n

kn + 1

0

k1 = 3k0 = 3 × 3 = 9

1

k2 = 3k1 = 3 × 9 = 27

2

k3 = 3k2 = 3 × 27 = 81

3

k4 = 3k3 = 3 × 81 = 243

4

k5 = 3k4 = 3 × 243 = 729

5

k6 = 3k5 = 3 × 729 = 2187

c hn + 1 = 2hn + 3, h0 = 1 n

hn + 1

0

h1 = 2h0 + 3 = 2 × 1 + 3 = 5

1

⬚

2 3 4 5

Create a strategy The recurrence relation can be interpreted as “start with 1, then to determine the next term, multiply the current term by 2, then add 3”.

⬚ ⬚ ⬚ ⬚

Apply the idea n

hn + 1

0

h1 = 2h0 + 3 = 2 × 1 + 3 = 5

1

h2 = 2h1 + 3 = 2 × 5 + 3 = 13

2

h3 = 2h2 + 3 = 2 × 13 + 3 = 29

3

h4 = 2h3 + 3 = 2 × 29 + 3 = 61

4

h5 = 2h4 + 3 = 2 × 61 + 3 = 125

5

h6 = 2h5 + 3 = 2 × 125 + 3 = 253

5.02 First-order linear recurrence relations mathspace.co

391


Example 3 Digital only example

Explore in the online lesson

mathspace.co

Idea summary To generate sequences using recurrence relations: • Identify the initial term or terms to start the sequence. • Apply a defined rule (recurrence relation) to determine subsequent terms. • A recurrence relation recursively defines a sequence by relating each term to its previous terms. • Start with an initial term and repeatedly apply the recurrence relation to generate the entire sequence.

Recurrence relations graph A recurrence relation can be represented visually by plotting the terms of the sequence. This allows for the identification of trends, such as linear or exponential growth, and other long-term behaviours. Steps to graph a recurrence relation: 1. Calculate the first several terms of the sequence. 2. Plot the terms on a graph with the term number, n, on the horizontal axis and the value of the term, un, on the vertical axis. The graphical behaviour of a sequence is determined by its recurrence relation. The two fundamental types are arithmetic and geometric. • Arithmetic: The graph consists of points that lie on a straight line, representing constant (linear) growth or decay.

• Geometric: The graph consists of points that lie on a curve, representing exponential growth or decay.

un

un

14

50

12 40

10 8

30

6

20

4 10

2

n 0

392

1

2

3

4

5

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

n 0

1

2

3

4

5


•

Long-term behaviour of sequences

Analysing the values of R and d in the relation un + 1 = Run + d helps predict the long-term trend of the sequence. • Limiting (Convergent) sequence sequence converges to a long-term limiting value if the common ratio R is between –1 and A 1 (that is, –1 < R < 1). un 10 • If 0 < R < 1, the terms approach the limit smoothly. For example, un + 1 = 0.5un + 5 with u0 = 2 generates 2, 6, 8, 9, 9.5, . . ., which gets closer to a limit of 10.

8 6 4 2 n 0

1

2

3

4

5

6

2

3

4

5

6

un 8 • If –1 < R < 0, the sequence is oscillating as it converges to the limit. For example, un + 1 = – 0.5un + 9 with u0 = 2 generates 2, 8, 5, 6.5, 5.75, . . ., which oscillates around the limit of 6.

6 4 2 n 0

1 un

• If R = 0, the sequence becomes constant after the first term. The first term is calculated, and all subsequent terms will be equal to d. For example, un + 1 = 0 ⋅ un + 10 with u0 = 50 generates 50, 10, 10, 10, . . ., converging immediately to a steady state of 10.

50 40 30 20 10 n 0

1

2

3

4

5

6

5.02 First-order linear recurrence relations mathspace.co

393


•

Increasing without limit (Divergent) sequence

A sequence is divergent if its terms do not approach a finite limit. Instead, the terms grow infinitely large. This occurs when the common ratio R is greater than 1 or less than or equal to –1 (that is, R > 1 or R ≤ –1). un 50 • If R > 1, the sequence grows without bound. For example, un + 1 = 1.5un with u0 = 10 generates 10, 15, 22.5, 33.75, 50.625, . . . .

40 30 20 10 n 0 15

• If R ≤ – 1, the sequence is oscillating and divergent. For example, un + 1 = –1.2un with u0 = 10 generates 10, –12, 14.4, . . ., where the terms switch sign and their magnitude increases.

1

2

3

4

un

10 5 0 −5

n 1

2

3

4

−10 −15

•

Constant sequence (Steady state)

A sequence remains constant if its terms do not change. For the general form, this happens when R = 1 and d = 0. For example, the recurrence relation un + 1 = un with u0 = 5 generates the sequence 5, 5, 5, 5, . . .

Example 4 Based on her estimations, Cherry realised she would need to work additional shifts at her casual job. A new recurrence relation can now be used to model her savings: An + 1 = 1.2An + 430, where A0 = 200 Here, An represents the amount in her savings account at the end of month n. a Calculate the first five terms of the sequence (from A0 to A4).

Create a strategy Starting with the initial value A0 = 200, repeatedly apply the rule An + 1 = 1.2An + 430 to calculate the values for A1, A2, A3, and A4.

394

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Apply the idea The first five terms are calculated as follows: A0 = 200 A1 = 1.2(200) + 430 = 240 + 430 = 670 A2 = 1.2(670) + 430 = 804 + 430 = 1234 A3 = 1.2(1234) + 430 = 1480.80 + 430 = 1910.80 A4 = 1.2(1910.80) + 430 = 2292.96 + 430 = 2722.96 The first five terms of her savings are $200, $670, $1234, $1910.80, and $2722.96

b Plot the first five terms of the sequence on a graph.

Create a strategy Plot the points (n, An) for n = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 on a Cartesian plane. The term number, n, is the horizontal axis, and the savings amount, An, is the vertical axis.

Apply the idea 2500

An (Savings amount, $)

2000 1500 1000 500 n (Number of months) 0

1

2

3

4

c Describe the shape of the graph and the long-term behaviour of Cherry’s savings.

Create a strategy Observe the pattern of the plotted points to identify the type of growth. Analyse the value of R in the recurrence relation to confirm the long-term trend.

Apply the idea The recurrence relation is An + 1 = 1.2An + 430, which is in the form un + 1 = Run + d. • Shape of the graph: The points on the graph do not form a straight line. The vertical distance between consecutive points increases each month, creating a curve that bends upwards. This indicates non-linear, exponential growth. • Long-term behaviour: The value of R is 1.2. Since R > 1, the sequence shows divergent growth. This means Cherry’s savings will continue to increase at an accelerating rate and will not approach a limiting value.

5.02 First-order linear recurrence relations mathspace.co

395


Idea summary The long-term behaviour of a sequence described by the recurrence relation un + 1 = Run + d depends on the value of the common ratio, R. • Convergent (approaches a limit): This occurs when – 1 < R < 1. • If 0 < R < 1, the sequence approaches the limit smoothly. • If – 1 < R < 0, the sequence oscillates as it approaches the limit. • Divergent (does not approach a limit): This occurs when R > 1 or R ≤ – 1. • If R > 1, the sequence increases or decreases without bound. • If R ≤ – 1, the sequence oscillates and its magnitude increases or stays constant. • Constant (steady state): Occurs when R = 1 and d = 0.

5.02 Practice questions What do you remember?

Ex 1

1

Identify the two essential components required for generating a first-order recurrence relation sequence.

2

Determine whether these are valid or invalid first-order recurrence relations:

3

a

tn + 1 = 2tn, t0 = 5

b

tn + 1 = tn – 1 + 4, t0 = 1

c

tn + 1 = tn – 3

d

tn = 5tn – 1, t0 = 10

Complete each statement about first-order linear recurrence relations: a b c

4

In a recurrence relation of the form Tn + 1 = aTn + b, if a is equal to 1, the sequence is ⬚.

In a recurrence relation of the form Tn + 1 = aTn + b, if b is equal to 0, the sequence is ⬚.

A first-order linear recurrence relation defines each term in a sequence based on the ⬚ term.

Each term in a sequence is obtained by subtracting 6 from the previous term. The initial term is 10. Express a recurrence relation, Tn + 1, in terms of Tn and the initial term T0 for this sequence.

5

Each term is obtained by multiplying the previous term by 4. The first term is 30. Express a recurrence relation for Tn + 1 in terms of Tn and an initial term T0 for this sequence.

396

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Practice 6

7

Ex 2

8

9

10

Consider the sequence represented in the table: n

5

6

7

8

9

xn

− 23

− 27

− 31

− 35

− 39

a

Determine x10.

b

Determine x4.

c

Describe how the sequence is changing, using any of the following relevant terms: increasing, decreasing, constant, or oscillating.

Consider the sequence represented in the table: n

−3

−2

−1

0

1

an

2

1

1 2

1 4

1 8

a

How is the sequence changing as n increases?

b

Determine a2.

c

Describe how the sequence is changing, using any of the following relevant terms: increasing, decreasing, constant, or oscillating.

Determine the first five terms of the given sequences: a

a0 = 7 and an + 1 = an + 5

b

c

a0 = 3 and an + 1 = 3an – 3

d

e

a0 = 2 and an + 1 = 0.5an – 7

a0 = 2 and an + 1 = 4an 1 an a0 = 54 and an 1 3

Formulate a recurrence relation, an + 1, in terms of an and the initial term a0 for the following sequences: a

− 4, 6, 16, 26, . . .

b

7, 13, 19, 25, . . .

c

– 6, – 4, – 2, 0, . . .

d

– 9, –27, – 81, – 243, . . .

e

10, – 30, 90, – 270, . . .

f

– 405, 135, – 45, 15, . . .

g

– 5, – 14, – 41, – 122, . . .

h

an = 4 + 5n

Consider the sequence: 21, 14, 7, 0, . . . Formulate a recurrence relation, for an + 1 in terms of an and the initial term a0.

11

Consider the sequence: 3000, 600, 120, 24, . . . Formulate a recurrence relation, Tn + 1, in terms of Tn and the initial term T0.

12

Consider the sequence: 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, . . . a

Plot the points on a Cartesian plane.

b

Is the sequence arithmetic or geometric?

c

Formulate a recurrence relation, for tn + 1 in terms of tn and an initial condition for t0.

5.02 First-order linear recurrence relations mathspace.co

397


13

For each sequence plot: i

Determine the first five terms of the sequence.

ii

Formulate a recurrence relation, Tn + 1, in terms of Tn and the initial term T0 for the sequence.

a

Tn 12

b 32 28

10

24

8

20

6

16 12

4

8

2

4

n 0 c

14

15 Ex 3

Tn

1

16 Tn 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 0 1 –2 –4 –6 –8

2

3

4

0

5

n 1

2

3

4

5

n 2

3

4

5

For each recurrence relation, generate the first five terms (t0, t1, t2, t3, t4) and describe the long-term behaviour of the sequence (e.g. increasing, decreasing, constant, oscillating, approaches a limiting value): a

t0 = 15, tn + 1 = tn – 4

b

t0 = 10, tn + 1 = tn

c

t0 = 1, tn + 1 = –2tn + 5

d

t0 = 100, tn + 1 = 0.2tn + 10

A conservation team is managing the population of a rare fish species in a protected lake. At the start of the project, there are 800 fish. The population is expected to grow by 10% each year through natural reproduction. To support this growth, the team also adds 50 fish to the lake at the end of each year. The population of the fish, Pn, after n years can be modelled by the recurrence relation: Pn + 1 = 1.1 × Pn + 50, P0 = 800

398

a

Calculate the population of fish in the lake at the end of each of the first three years. Round your answers to the nearest whole number.

b

The conservation project has a long-term goal of reaching a population of at least 1500 fish. Determine the fish population at the end of the fifth year to assess their progress.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Ex 4

16

A team of environmental scientists is monitoring the population of koalas in a managed wildlife reserve. The initial population was recorded as 200 koalas. The population grows by 20% each year, and the conservation team introduces an additional 430 koalas from a breeding program at the end of each year. The population, Pn, at the end of year n, is modelled by the recurrence relation: Pn + 1 = 1.2Pn + 430, P0 = 200 a

Calculate the first five terms of the sequence, representing the koala population from the start of the study (P0) to the end of the fourth year (P4).

b

Plot the first five terms of the sequence on a set of axes. Label your axes clearly.

c

Describe the shape of the graph and explain the long-term behaviour of the koala population.

Extend your thinking 17

Given the sequence an + 1 = 2an + 3. If a2 = 61, determine a0.

18

A biologist is studying the population of a bacteria colony. The population at the start of the experiment is 120 bacteria. Each hour, the population increases by 25%, but 30 bacteria are removed due to external factors. The population follows the recurrence relation: Bn + 1 = 1.25Bn – 30, B0 = 120

19

a

Determine the population after 3 hours.

b

After several hours, the researcher notices that the population stabilises (reaches a limiting value) and stops changing significantly. Assuming that if the population stabilises, Bn + 1 = Bn, estimate the stable population size.

c

If the bacteria removal rate was increased to 40 bacteria per hour, would the population still stabilise? Justify your answer by showing the population for the first 3 hours.

A research team is tracking the growth of a rare plant species in a controlled environment. Every month, the number of plants increases by 20% due to natural reproduction, but 15 plants are also removed for replanting in other locations. The team records that there were 50 plants at the start of the study. a

Formulate a recurrence relation to model the population of plants.

b

Calculate the number of plants after four months. Round your answer to the nearest whole number.

c

The researchers want the plant population to stabilise over time at exactly 100 plants. What change should they make to the removal rate to achieve this equilibrium? Let the new removal rate be R. Express the new recurrence relation in terms of Tn + 1 and Tn.

5.02 First-order linear recurrence relations mathspace.co

399


20

Given the graph, determine a possible recurrence relation that would generate the points observed:

y 60 50 40 30 20 10 0

x 1

2

3

4

5

5.03   Arithmetic sequences After this lesson, you will be able to… • identify the initial value and common difference from recurrence relations and sequences. • determine the recurrence relation and explicit rule given an arithmetic sequence. • explain the connection between arithmetic sequences and linear functions. • convert between recurrence relations and explicit forms of arithmetic sequences.

Arithmetic sequence Arithmetic sequence A sequence in which each term changes from the last by adding or subtracting a constant amount Example: – 5, – 3, – 1, 0, . . . The number being added or subtracted to produce the next number in the sequence is known as the common difference, which will result from subtracting any two successive terms un + 1 – un. For example, the sequence –3, 5, 13, 21, . . . is an arithmetic sequence with a common difference of 8. On the other hand, the sequence 1, 10, 100, 1000, . . . is not arithmetic because the difference between each term is not constant. The initial term in an arithmetic sequence is denoted by the letter u0 and the common difference is denoted by d. Since u1 = u0 + d, u2 = u1 + d, and so on, any arithmetic sequence can be expressed as the recurrence relation: un + 1 = un + d, u0 = initial value where d = common difference and n = position in sequence. Note: When writing a recurrence relation, it is expected that both the d and the initial value are substituted. For example: un + 1 = un + 3, u0 = 2

400

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


An explicit generating rule can be found in terms of u0 and d. This is useful for finding the nth term without listing the sequence or using the previous term in the sequence each time to find the next term. Consider the table to see the pattern for the explicit formula. For the sequence –3, 5, 13, 21, . . ., the starting term is –3 and there is a common difference of 8, that is u0 = –3 and d = 8. A table of the sequence is shown: n

un​

Pattern

0

−3

−3 + 8 × 0

1

5

−3 + 8 × 1

2

13

−3 + 8 × 2

3

21

−3 + 8 × 3

...

...

...

n

un​

−3 + 8 × n

By correctly identifying the pattern, the tenth term becomes u10 = 77 = –3 + 8 × 10 and the 100th term would be u100 = 797 = –3 + 8 × 100. Following the pattern, the explicit formula for the nth term is un = –3 + 8n. A similar table can be created for any arithmetic sequence with a starting value u0 and common difference d and the same pattern would be observed. Hence, the explicit generating rule for the nth term in any arithmetic sequence is given by:

un = u0 + dn un u0 d n

is the value of the term at position n is the initial value is the common difference is the position in the sequence

Note: In a general rule, a value for u0 and d must be substituted.

Example 1 Consider the sequence: 87, 80, 73, 66, . . . a Determine a recurrence relation.

Create a strategy Find the common difference, d, to substitute into un + 1 = un + d, u0 = initial value.

Apply the idea Since 87 – 7 = 80, 80 – 7 = 73, and so on, therefore, d = –7. The first term is 87, so u0 = 87. un + 1 = un + d, u0 = initial value

Write the formula

un + 1 = un – 7, u0 = 87

Substitute

5.03 Arithmetic sequences mathspace.co

401


b Write the recurrence relation as an explicit rule for the nth term.

Create a strategy Take the initial term u0 and common difference d found previously, and substitute them into the explicit rule form un = u0 + dn.

Apply the idea un = u0 + dn

Write the formula

un = 87 – 7n

Substitute u0 = 87, d = –7

c Determine the 30th term.

Create a strategy Substitute n = 30 into un = 87 – 7n.

Apply the idea un = 87 – 7n

Write the formula

u30 = 87 – 7 × 30

Substitute n = 30

= 87 – 210

Evaluate the multiplication

= –123

Evaluate

Example 2 For the sequence 10, 14, 18, 22, 26, . . ., determine n if the nth term is 186.

Create a strategy Substitute un = 186, u0 = 10, and value of d into un = u0 + dn.

Apply the idea Since 10 + 4 = 14, 14 + 4 = 18, and so on, d = 4.

402

un = u0 + dn

Write the formula

186 = 10 + 4n

Substitute un = 186, u0 = 10, and d = 4

176 = 4n

Subtract 10 from both sides

44 = n

Divide both sides by 4

n = 44

Make n the subject

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 3 The initial term, u0, of an arithmetic sequence is 2. u4 is 26. a Solve for d, the common difference of the sequence.

Create a strategy Construct an equation between 26 and the steps to get into it.

Apply the idea To get to u4, which is 26, add 2 to 4 times the common difference: 2 + 4d = 26 Use the equation to solve for d: 2 + 4d = 26

Write the formula

4d = 24

Subtract 2 from both sides

d=6

Divide both sides by 4

b Write a recurrence relation for un + 1 in terms of un which defines this sequence and an initial value for u0.

Create a strategy Substitute d = 6 and u0 = 2 into the recurrence relation un + 1 = un + d.

Apply the idea un + 1 = un + d, u0 = initial value

Write the formula

un + 1 = un + 6, u0 = 2

Substitute d = 6 and u0 = 2

Example 4 In an arithmetic sequence, where T0 is the initial term, and d is the common difference, T7 = 44 and T14 = 86. a Determine d, the common difference.

Create a strategy Divide the difference of T7 from T14 by the number of steps between them.

5.03 Arithmetic sequences mathspace.co

403


Apply the idea The difference of two terms is 86 – 44 = 42. The number of steps between T7 and T14 is 14 – 7 = 7. 42 7 =6

d=

Divide the difference by the number of steps Evaluate

b Determine T0, the initial term in the sequence.

Create a strategy Find the product of d and number of steps between T0 and T7 to subtract from T7 = 44.

Apply the idea The number of steps from T0 to T7 is 7, so multiplying it by d = 6 will give 6 × 7 = 42. T0 = 44 – 42 =2

Subtract the product from T7 = 44 Evaluate

c Write the equation for Tn, the nth term in the sequence.

Create a strategy Substitute T0 = 2 and d = 6 into the explicit formula Tn = T0 + dn.

Apply the idea Tn = T0 + dn = 2 + 6n

Write the formula Substitute T0 = 2 and d = 6

d Find T25, the 25th term in the sequence.

Create a strategy Substitute n = 25 into Tn = 2 + 6n.

Apply the idea

404

Tn = 2 + 6n

Write the formula

T25 = 2 + 6 × 25

Substitute n = 25

= 2 + 150

Evaluate the multiplication

= 152

Evaluate

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Idea summary An arithmetic sequence with initial value u0 and common difference d can be expressed in two forms: • Recurrence relation is a way to express any term in relation to the previous term:

un + 1 = un + d, u0 = initial value d u0

is the common difference is the initial value

• Explicit form is a way to express any term in relation to the term number:

un = u0 + dn u0 d n

is the initial value is the common difference is the position in the sequence

Arithmetic sequences in tables and graphs As the form of the explicit rule contains constants, d and u0, this is in the form of a straight-line equation y = a + bx. So if an arithmetic sequence is plotted as a series of points, all the points lie on a straight line with the slope being the common difference. This makes sense as there is a constant rate of change, i.e. the common difference. un 14 12 10

The first term is represented by the point shown at n = 1, u1 = 5, and the slope of this line is the common difference d = 2.

8 6 4 2

n 0

1

2

3

4

5

An arithmetic sequence can be identified from a table, such as: n

1

2

3

4

5

un​

5

7

9

11

13

Here, the first term, u1 = 5, and the common difference can be seen in the steps between the un values in the second row. Since 2 is being added each time to create the next term in the sequence, the common difference is d = 2.

5.03 Arithmetic sequences mathspace.co

405


Example 5 The plotted points represent terms in an arithmetic sequence: 14

Tn

12 10 8 6 4 2

n 0

1

2

3

4

5

a Complete the table of values for the given points: n

1

2

3

4

Tn

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Write the corresponding Tn-value of each n-value from the graph.

n

1

2

3

4

Tn

1

5

9

13

b Identify d, the common difference between consecutive terms.

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Subtract the value of T1 from T2.

d=5–1 =4

Subtract T1 = 1 from T2 = 5 Evaluate

c Write a simplified expression for the general nth term of the sequence, Tn.

Create a strategy Substitute the first term, T1 = 1, and d = 4 into the explicit formula Tn = T0 + dn.

Apply the idea Tn = T0 + dn 1 = T0 + 4 × 1

406

Write the formula Substitute T1 = 1 and d = 4

–3 = T0

Subtract 4 from both sides

Tn = –3 + 4n

Substitute T0 = –3, and d = 4 into the explicit formula

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


d Calculate the 14th term of the sequence.

Create a strategy Substitute n = 14 into Tn = –3 + 4n.

Apply the idea Tn = –3 + 4n

Write the formula

T14 = –3 + 4 × 14

Substitute n = 14

= –3 + 56

Evaluate the multiplication

= 53

Evaluate

Idea summary Steps for evaluating an arithmetic sequence from a graph: 1. Make a table of values of the corresponding n and Tn-values. 2. Identify the common difference, d, by subtracting the first term from the second term. 3. If u0 is not observed, use the general equation, substituting un, n, and d into the explicit formula un = u0 + dn and solve for u0. 4. Write the rule un = u0 + dn, substituting u0 and d.

5.03 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

Identify the next two terms for each arithmetic sequence: a

4, 8, 12, 16

b

2, 3.5, 5, 6.5

c

6, 2, –2, –6

d

– 8,

23 22 , , –7 3 3

2

Determine the common difference for each arithmetic sequence: 39 36 33 , , ,... a –6, b 330, 280, 230, 180, . . . 7 7 7

3

For each arithmetic sequence: i

Determine the first four terms of the sequence.

ii

Determine the common difference.

a

un = 3n + 8

b

un = 11 + (n – 1) × 10

c

un = –7 – 3(n – 1)

5.03 Arithmetic sequences mathspace.co

407


4

5

Determine the first four terms in each arithmetic sequence: a

The first term is –10, and the common difference is 4.

b

The first term is –8, and the common difference is –2.

c

The first term is a, and the common difference is d.

Determine the missing terms in the given arithmetic sequences: a

6

8, ⬚, 16, 20, ⬚

b

⬚, 0, ⬚, 10, ⬚

Consider the arithmetic sequence: 1.4, 2.3, 3.2, . . ., 10.4: a

Determine d, the common difference.

b

Solve for n, the number of terms in the sequence.

Practice 7

Ex 1

8

9

Ex 2

Ex 3

Ex 4

10

11

12

408

For each general formula of an arithmetic sequence: i

Determine u0, the initial value.

ii

Determine d, the common difference.

iii

Determine the indicated term in the sequence.

a

un = 15 + 5n; u9

b

un = – 8n + 28; u5

Consider the first three terms of these arithmetic sequences: i

Determine the common difference, d.

ii

Determine un, the general rule for the nth term in the sequence.

iii

Determine the indicated term in the sequence.

a

5, 12, 19, . . .; u10

b

c

10, 3, −4, . . .; u9

d

17, 16.2, 15.4, . . .; u13 23 13 , , . . .; u14 5, 4 2

Determine the missing 5 terms in the arithmetic sequence which has –12 as its first term and 24 as its last term: –12, ⬚, ⬚, ⬚, ⬚, ⬚, 24

For each sequence, determine the value of n: a

0.9, 1.5, 2.1, . . . where un = 22.5

b

c

2, −3, −8, . . . where un = –578

d

2, 7, 12, . . . where un = 132 17 7 5, , , . . . where un = –37 4 2

In an arithmetic sequence with common difference d, the first term is 32: a

Write a simplified expression for the 5th term.

b

Write a simplified expression for the 9th term.

c

Given that the 9th term is 4 times the 5th term, determine the common difference d.

In an arithmetic sequence, u5 = 21 and u19 = 77: a

Determine the value of d.

b

Determine the value of u0.

c

Determine the general rule for un.

d

Determine u11.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


13

The nth term of an arithmetic sequence is un = –530. Determine the value of n given that u0 = 28 and d = –18.

14

Ex 5

15

The nth term of an arithmetic sequence is given by the equation un = 15 – 5 (n – 1): a

Complete the table of values:

n

2

3

4

10

b

Determine the difference between consecutive terms.

c

Plot the points in the table on a Cartesian plane.

d

un​ ⬚ ⬚

⬚

⬚

If the points on the graph were joined, would they form a straight line or a curve?

⬚

The plotted points represent terms in an arithmetic sequence: a

Complete the table of values for the given points: n

1

2

3

4

un​

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

b

Identify the value of d, the common difference.

c

Write a simplified expression for the general term, un.

d

Determine the 14th term of the sequence.

1

14 un 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

n

0

1

2

3

4

Extend your thinking 16

Determine the value of x such that x + 4, 6x + 5, and 9x – 8 form successive terms in an arithmetic sequence.

17

The plotted points represent terms in an arithmetic sequence:

18

a

Identify the value of d, the common difference.

b

Write a simplified expression for the general term, un.

c

Determine the slope of the line that passes through these points.

The plotted points represent terms in an arithmetic sequence: a

Identify the value of d, the common difference.

b

Write a simplified expression for the general term, un.

c

The points are reflected about the horizontal axis to form three new points.

If these new points represent consecutive terms of an arithmetic sequence, write the equation for uk, the kth term in this new sequence.

un

6 5 4 3 2 1 0 –1 –2 –3 –4

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

n 1

2

3

un

n 0

1

2

3

4

5

5.03 Arithmetic sequences mathspace.co

409


A diving vessel descends below the surface of the water at a constant rate so that the depth of the vessel after 1 minute, 2 minutes, and 3 minutes is 50 m, 100 m, and 150 m, respectively:

19

20

a

By how much is the depth increasing each minute?

b

Determine the depth of the vessel after 4 minutes.

c

Write a recurrence relation to define the vessel’s depth as an arithmetic sequence in terms of dn + 1 with first term d1.

d

Determine the depth of the vessel after 10 minutes.

For a fibre-optic cable service, Christa pays a one-off amount of $200 for installation costs and then a monthly fee of $30: a

Complete the table of values for the total cost (T) of Christa’s service over n months.

b

By how much are consecutive terms in the sequence increasing?

c

Considering the table of values, plot the points corresponding to n = 1, 2, 3, and 4.

d

If the points on the graph were joined, would they form a straight or curved line?

n

1

2

3

4

18

T

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

5.04   Applications of arithmetic sequences After this lesson, you will be able to… • model simple interest using arithmetic sequences. • apply arithmetic sequences to linear depreciation problems. • solve practical problems involving linear growth and decay.

Applications of arithmetic sequences Arithmetic sequences can be used to model linear growth. Hence, arithmetic sequences play a critical role in many facets of life, from calculating simple interest earnings and modelling straightline depreciation rates, to structuring recurring rental payments, organising event schedules, determining savings growth, and even planning construction layouts with uniform spacing. The most common application of arithmetic sequences is for both simple interest and flat-rate depreciation. •

Simple interest Simple interest (also called flat rate interest) describes a method of calculating interest where the interest amount is fixed (that is, it doesn’t change). It can be modelled using the recurrence relation and general rule, where u0 represents the initial principal amount and n is the number of time periods. The constant amount of interest, d, is calculated based on the annual interest r rate, r, using the formula d = × u0. 100

410

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


• Recurrence relation: un + 1 = un + d, u0 = principal amount • General rule: un = u0 + dn •

Flat-rate depreciation When an asset is purchased, for a variety of reasons from monitoring value for insurance purposes, tax purposes for work assets, it is important to model the reduction in value over time, which is referred to as depreciation. Flat-rate depreciation refers to when the same value is deducted each time period. It can be modelled with the following recurrence relation and general rule: • Recurrence relation: un + 1 = un – d • General rule: un = u0 – dn

Example 1 Elijah deposits $1000 into a bank account that earns simple interest at a rate of 4% per year. a Define a recurrence relation to calculate the total amount in their account after n years.

Create a strategy In simple interest, the interest earned each year is constant. The total amount after n years depends on the amount in the previous year plus the interest earned that year.

Apply the idea Let un + 1 represent the total amount in the account after n years, and d be the annual interest. The interest earned each year is: r × principal 100 4 1000 = 100 = $40

d=

Write the formula for annual interest Substitute r = 4 and principal = 1000 Evaluate

Therefore: un + 1 = un + d, u0 = Principal amount

Write the formula

un + 1 = un + 40, u0 = $1000

Substitute the values

5.04 Applications of arithmetic sequences mathspace.co

411


b Calculate the total amount in the account after 5 years using the recurrence relation.

Create a strategy Use the recurrence relation un + 1 = un + 40, u0 = $1000, to calculate the total amount year by year.

Apply the idea u0 = 1000 u1 = u0 + 40 = 1000 + 40 = 1040 u2 = u1 + 40 = 1040 + 40 = 1080 u3 = u2 + 40 = 1080 + 40 = 1120 u4 = u3 + 40 = 1120 + 40 = 1160 u5 = u4 + 40 = 1160 + 40 = 1200 After 5 years, the total amount is $1200.

c Write the recurrence relation as a general rule for the total amount after n years.

Create a strategy The general rule uses the same values, but includes u0 instead of un, and multiplies the d value for each n years.

Apply the idea un = 1000 + 40n

d Using the general rule, determine how many years it will take for the total amount to reach $1600.

Create a strategy From the information provided, substitute all the known information into the rule. Then solve the equation for n, the unknown value. This can be done with technology.

Apply the idea As un in the rule is the value after n years, 1600 can be substituted with it: 1600 = 1000 + 40n 1600 – 1000 = 40n 600 = 40n 600 n= 40 = 15

Substitute un = 1600 into the rule Subtract 1000 from both sides Simplify the left side of the equation Divide both sides by 40 Evaluate

It will take 15 years for the total amount to reach $1600.

412

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 2 A car bought at the beginning of 2019 is worth $1500 at the beginning of 2025. The value of the car has depreciated by a constant amount of $50 each year since it was purchased. a What was the car purchased for in 2019?

Create a strategy Multiply the gap year by the yearly depreciation and add the product to the given price.

Apply the idea The gap year between 2019 and 2025 is 2025 – 2019 = 6. Depreciation amount = 6 × 50 = $300 Purchase price = 1500 + 300 = $1800

Multiply the gap year by the depreciation Evaluate Add the given price to the depreciation amount Evaluate

b Plot the value of the car, Vn, on the graph from 2019 (represented by n = 0) to 2025 (represented by n = 6).

Create a strategy Subtract 50 from each value generated starting from the purchase price.

Apply the idea For n = 0, the value will be the purchase price (1800), so the first point is at (0, 1800). • For n = 1, the value is 1800 – 50 = 1750, so the point is at (1, 1750). 2000 Value 1900 • For n = 2, the value is 1750 – 50 = 1700, so the 1800 point is at (2, 1700). 1700 • For n = 3, the value is 1700 – 50 = 1650, so the 1600 point is at (3, 1650). 1500 • For n = 4, the value is 1650 – 50 = 1600, so the 1400 1300 point is at (4, 1600). 1200 • For n = 5, the value is 1600 – 50 = 1550, so the 1100 point is at (5, 1550). 1000 • For n = 6, the value is 1550 – 50 = 1500, so the 1 2 3 4 point is at (6, 1500).

n 5

6

5.04 Applications of arithmetic sequences mathspace.co

413


c Write an explicit rule for the value of the car, Vn, after n years. Give the rule in its expanded form.

Create a strategy Substitute the values required from part (b) into the explicit formula Vn = V0 – dn.

Apply the idea The variable V0 is the value when n = 0, which is 1800 as seen from the graph in part (b). The common difference d is the amount decreases each year, which is 50. Vn = V0 – dn = 1800 – 50n

Write the formula Substitute V0 = 1800, d = 50

d Solve for the year n at the end of which the car will be worth half the price it was bought for.

Create a strategy Substitute Vn

Purchase price into Vn = 1800 – 50n. 2

Apply the idea Vn = =

Purchase price 2

Divide the purchase price by 2

1800 2

Substitute purchase price = 1800

= 900

Evaluate

Substituting Vn = 900 into the rule: Vn = 1800 – 50n

Write the equation

900 = 1800 – 50n

Substitute Vn = 900

– 900 = – 50n 18 = n

Subtract 1800 from both sides Divide both sides by –50

After 18 years, the car will be worth half the price it was bought for.

414

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Idea summary The concept of arithmetic sequences can be applied to situations that involve linear growth or linear decay. Hence, a graph of an arithmetic sequence is characterised by a linear growth or linear decay. • Simple interest • Recurrence relation: un + 1 = un + d, u0 = principal amount • General rule: un = u0 + dn • Flat-rate depreciation • Recurrence relation: un + 1 = un – d • General rule: un = u0 – dn For these models: • • • •

un is the value after n periods u0 is the initial value (principal/purchase price) d is the constant amount of interest or depreciation per period n is the number of periods

5.04 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

For each of the following scenarios, identify whether it is best modelled by simple interest or flat-rate depreciation: a

Michael invests $5000 into a bond that pays him a fixed amount of $200 each year.

b

A company purchases a new delivery van for $40000. For tax purposes, the company reduces the van’s value by a constant $4000 each year.

c

Jessica takes out a loan of $1000. Each month, a fixed fee of $50 is added to the total amount she owes.

d

A piece of industrial machinery, bought for $150 000, loses $10 000 of its value for every year it is in operation.

5.04 Applications of arithmetic sequences mathspace.co

415


2

A new lounge suite depreciates by a constant amount each year and its value is modelled by the recurrence relation Vn + 1 = Vn – 700, V0 = 4800 where Vn is the value of the lounge suite, in dollars, after n years:

3

a

Determine the initial cost of the lounge suite.

b

Determine the amount of value lost each year.

Each day, Kata withdraws $3 from her bank account to spend on lunch. Before she withdraws this amount on January 1, she has $3000 in her bank account. This situation can be modelled using the recurrence relation Vn + 1 = Vn + d, where V0 is the initial value. Identify the components of the recurrence relation from the description:

4

a

What is the initial value of the account (V0)?

b

What is the common difference (d) that occurs each day?

c

Using your answers from parts (a) and (b), complete the recurrence relation for the value of Kata’s account: Vn + 1 = Vn + ⬚, with V0 = ⬚

An investment pays simple interest annually and is modelled by the recurrence relation Vn + 1 = Vn + 2310, V0 = 30 000 where Vn is the value of the investment after n years: a

Determine the initial amount invested.

b

Determine the amount of interest paid each year (d).

c

Express the formula that connects the annual interest amount (d), the principal (V0), and the interest rate (r).

d

Calculate the annual interest rate (r), expressed as a percentage. Round your answer to one decimal place.

Practice 5

A piece of jewellery appreciates in value by a constant amount each year and its value is modelled by the following recurrence relation: Vn + 1 = Vn + 220, V0 = 3000 where Vn is the value of the jewellery, in dollars, after n years:

416

a

Identify the initial value of the piece of jewellery.

b

By how much does it appreciate each year?

c

Determine an explicit rule for Vn that gives the value of the piece of jewellery after n years.

d

Find the value of the investment after 12 years.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Ex 1

6

7

Sarah deposits $5000 into a savings account that earns simple interest at a rate of 3% per year: a

Define a recurrence relation to calculate the total amount in her account after n years.

b

Calculate the total amount in the account after 4 years using the recurrence relation.

c

Determine the explicit rule (or general rule) for the total amount after n years.

d

Using the general rule, determine how many years it will take for the total amount to reach $6500.

A motorbike depreciates in value by a constant amount each year and its value is modelled by the recurrence relation Vn + 1 = Vn – 1200, V0 = 15 000 where Vn is the value of the motorbike, in dollars, after n years:

Ex 2

8

a

Determine the purchase price of the motorbike.

b

At what rate (in percent) is it decreasing in value each year?

c

Determine an explicit rule for Vn that gives the value of the motorbike after n years.

d

Find the value of the motorbike after 9 years.

A truck purchased at the beginning of 2020 is worth $25 000 at the beginning of 2024. The value of the truck has depreciated by a constant amount of $1000 each year since it was purchased: a

What was the truck purchased for in 2020?

b

Plot the value of the truck, Vn, on the graph from 2020 (represented by n = 0) to 2024 (represented by n = 4). 29 000 28 000 27 000 26 000 25 000 24 000 23 000 22 000 21 000 0

9

Value

n 1

2

3

4

c

Determine an explicit rule for the value of the truck, Vn, after n years. Give the rule in its expanded form.

d

Solve for the year n at the end of which the truck will be worth half the price it was bought for.

The value of Belem Bank shares is decreasing by $1.55 each day. At the beginning of today’s trading, the shares are worth $48.83: a

Today is March 6. How much are they worth at the start of March 11?

b

Determine a recurrence relation for Vn + 1 in terms of Vn which defines the value of the shares at the end of day n, and an initial value V0.

5.04 Applications of arithmetic sequences mathspace.co

417


10

The balance of a savings account earning simple interest each year is given by the explicit rule Vn = 2200 + 300 (n – 1) where Vn is the balance after n years:

11

12

13

a

How much interest is the account earning each year?

b

Calculate the account balance after 1 year.

c

Determine the original investment amount.

d

Determine a recurrence relation for Vn + 1 in terms of Vn, and an initial value V0.

For a photo, the animals at an animal shelter have been arranged such that there are 10 animals in the front row and each subsequent row has 7 more animals than the row in front of it: a

Express a recurrence relation for an + 1, the number of animals in the (n + 1)th row, in terms of an and an initial value a0.

b

Express a general formula for an in terms of n.

c

How many animals are in the 7th row?

A cake is taken out of a 156°C oven and left to cool in a room with a constant temperature of 26°C. As soon as it is taken out, the temperature of the cake drops by 2.5°C each minute: a

Find the temperature of the cake after 8 minutes.

b

Determine a recurrence relation that gives the temperature Tn + 1 of the cake after n minutes in terms of Tn with initial temperature T0.

c

By how many degrees has the temperature of the cake dropped after half an hour?

d

Find the number of minutes it will take for the cake to reach room temperature.

Glen decided to start saving by depositing some money in a safe each month. On 1st January 2019, Glen put $10 in the safe. On 1st February and 1st March in the same year, he deposited $13 and $16, respectively:

14

418

a

If he continued this pattern, how much did Glen put in the safe on August 1st 2019?

b

Determine a recurrence relation which gives the amount Tn + 1 that Glen deposits in the safe (n + 1) months after January 1st 2019 in terms of Tn.

c

In which month will Glen deposit exactly $40 into the safe?

Megan is learning French using an app on her phone. Before using the app she already knows 30 words. The app gives her 10 new words to learn each day: a

How many words will she know in total after using the app for 6 days?

b

Determine a recurrence relation, Tn + 1, the total number of words she has learnt after (n + 1) days of using the app, in terms of Tn.

c

Solve for n, the number of days it will take her to learn 500 words.

d

Determine a recurrence relation, Wn + 1, the total number of words she has learnt after (n + 1) weeks of using the app, in terms of Wn.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


15

The value of a fridge depreciates by a constant amount each year and is modelled by the recurrence relation Vn + 1 = Vn – 300, V0 = 1600 where Vn is the value of the fridge, in dollars, after n years. Plot the value of the fridge for the first five years, including year 0 on a Cartesian plane.

16

A TV depreciates at a constant rate each year. The value, in dollars, of the TV after n years is represented by the graph shown: a

State the initial value of the TV.

b

By how much does the value of the TV drop each year?

c

Determine a recurrence relation, Vn + 1, that gives the value of the TV after (n + 1) years and an initial condition V0.

190 Vn 180 170 160 150 140 130 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0

n 1

2

3

4

5

Extend your thinking 17

A business buys a fleet car for $52 000. The car is expected to depreciate by $170 for every 1000 km driven. However, here’s the twist: the driver logs inconsistent kilometres each month: Month

Distance travelled

1

2000 km

2

4000 km

3

3000 km

4

5000 km

Total distance Depreciation travelled

Car value

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚ ⬚

⬚ ⬚

⬚ ⬚

a

Complete the table showing the value of the car after each month.

b

Determine a recurrence relation that represents the value of the car after each 1000 km, not by month.

c

If the monthly driving pattern (2 km, 4 km, 3 km, 5 km) continues in this cycle, in which month will the car’s value first fall below $48 000?

5.04 Applications of arithmetic sequences mathspace.co

419


18

19

A vertical farming company grows microgreens in stackable trays. At the start of the year, they install 50 trays. Each week, they add 12 new trays as their business expands: a

Determine a recurrence relation that models the number of trays after each week.

b

How many trays will they have after 8 weeks?

c

After how many weeks will they have at least 200 trays?

d

Assuming the trays take up 0.5 m2 each, calculate the total floor area required for 200 trays.

Two drivers share a delivery van worth $60 000, which depreciates at $200 per 1000 km. • Driver A uses it Monday to Thursday, driving 1000 km per week. • Driver B uses it Friday to Sunday, driving 500 km per week. Every 4 weeks, the company reviews the value of the van:

20

420

a

Determine the van’s depreciation per 4-week cycle.

b

Determine a recurrence relation representing the van’s value every 4 weeks.

c

After how many cycles will the van’s value fall below $50 000?

d

If the company wants to replace the van once it loses more than 20% of its value, in which week should they begin the replacement process?

A café purchases a high-end commercial coffee machine for $12 000. It depreciates in value by $80 for every 1000 cups of coffee made. On average, the café makes around 900 cups of coffee per week. They plan to sell the machine once it’s worth 75% or less of its original value: a

Define a recurrence relation that models the value of the machine after every 1000 cups brewed.

b

Determine how many cups must be made before the machine is worth $9000 or less.

c

Based on the café’s usage rate, how many weeks will it take before the machine should be replaced?

d

Comment on any assumptions made in your model, and whether this model would work for all types of machines or cafés.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


5.05   Geometric sequences After this lesson, you will be able to… • identify the initial value and common ratio from recurrence relations and sequences. • determine the recurrence relation and explicit rule given a geometric sequence. • explain the connection between geometric sequences and exponential functions. • convert between recurrence relations and explicit forms of geometric sequences.

Geometric sequence Geometric sequence A sequence in which each term is found by multiplying the previous term by a constant factor. The constant factor used to generate the next term in a geometric sequence is called the common un 1 . ratio, denoted by R. It can be found by dividing any term by its preceding term: R un The initial term of the sequence is denoted by u0. For example, the sequence 4, 8, 16, 32, . . . is geometric with an initial term u0 = 4 and a common ratio R = 2. The sequence 100, – 50, 25, – 12.5, . . . is geometric with an initial term u0 = 100 and a common ratio R = – 0.5. Since each term is generated from the previous one (e.g., u1 = Ru0, u2 = Ru1, and so on), any geometric sequence can be described by the recurrence relation: un + 1 = Run,

u0 = initial value

A general (explicit) generating rule can be found in terms of u0 and R. This is useful for finding the nth term directly, without needing to calculate all preceding terms. Consider the pattern for the sequence 5, 10, 20, 40, . . .. Here, the initial value is u0 = 5 and the common ratio is R = 2. n

un

Pattern

0

5

5 × 20

1

10

5 × 21

2

20

5 × 22

3

40

5 × 23

...

...

...

n

un

5 × 2n

This pattern shows that the explicit formula for the nth term is un = 5 × 2n.

5.05 Geometric sequences mathspace.co

421


For any geometric sequence with an initial value u0 and common ratio R, the nth term is given by the explicit rule:

un = u0 Rn un

is the value of the term at position n

u0

is the initial value of the sequence

R

is the common ratio

n

is the position in the sequence (term number)

Example 1 Consider the given sequence: 162, 54, 18, 6 Determine the common ratio between the terms.

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Divide the second term by the first term.

R

54 Divide the second term by the first 162 term 1 Evaluate 3

Example 2 Consider the geometric sequence: 810, 270, 90, 30, . . . a Find an explicit rule for the term un.

Create a strategy First, identify the initial value, u0, and the common ratio, R. Then, substitute these values into the explicit rule form un = u0Rn.

Apply the idea The initial value (the first term listed) is u0 = 810. To find the common ratio, divide the second term by the first term: R

u1 270 1 u0 810 3

The explicit rule for the sequence is: un

422

810

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

1 3

n


b Using the rule, calculate the value of the 9th term in the sequence.

Create a strategy It is important to correctly identify the term number, n. Since the sequence starts with an initial term u0 (the 1st term), the 9th term in the sequence corresponds to n = 8. Substitute n = 8 into the explicit rule.

Apply the idea To find the 9th term, set n = 8 in the rule un u8

1 3

810

8

18

810

38 1 810 6561 810 6561 10 81 10 The 9th term of the sequence is . 81

810

1 3

n

.

Substitute n = 8 to find the 9th term Apply the index law

a b

m

am bm

Evaluate the power Multiply the fractions Simplify

Example 3 For the sequence 5, 20, 80, 320, . . ., determine n if the nth term is 327 680.

Create a strategy Substitute un = 327 680, u0 = 5, and value of R into un = u0 Rn.

Apply the idea Since 5 × 4 = 20, 20 × 4 = 80, and so on, therefore, R = 4. un = u0 Rn 327 680 = 5 × 4

n

Write the formula Substitute un = 327 680, u0 = 5, R = 4

n

Divide both sides by 5

n

4 =4

Express 65 536 in exponential form

8=n

Equate the indices of same bases

65 536 = 4 8

The number 327 680 is the eighth term of the sequence.

5.05 Geometric sequences mathspace.co

423


Example 4 If a geometric sequence has u3 = 12 and u6 = 96, determine the recurrence relation for the sequence.

Create a strategy Use the fact that each equation is equal to un = u0Rn. Then set up the proportion of the ratio of u0Rn terms and un values. Write these as two equations and solve with appropriate technology.

Apply the idea u3 = 12 will be solved through u3 = u0R3 = 12. u6 = 96 will be solved through u6 = u0R6 = 96. u0 R6 u0 R

3

R6 R

3

96 12

Divide Equation 2 by Equation 1

96 12

Cancel the common term u0

R3 = 8

Apply the index law for division

R=2

Take the cube root of both sides

un = 12 where n = 3 and R = 2 can be substituted into the explicit formula to work out for u0: un = u0Rn

Write the explicit formula 3

12 = u0 × 2

Substitute un = 12, R = 2, n = 3

12 = u0 × 8

Evaluate the exponent

12 u0 8 u0 = 1.5

Divide both sides by 8 Convert fraction to decimal

Now, substitute the values found into the recurrence relation un + 1 = Run, u0 = initial value: un + 1 = Run, u0 = initial value Write the recurrence relation un + 1 = 2un, u0 = 1.5

Substitute R = 2 and u0 = 1.5

Example 5 Digital only example

Explore in the online lesson

424

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

mathspace.co


Idea summary A geometric sequence is a sequence where each term is found by multiplying the previous term by a constant factor known as the common ratio (R). A geometric sequence can be expressed using two types of rules: • A recurrence relation, which expresses a term in relation to the previous term:

un + 1 = Run, u0 = Initial value R is the common ratio • A general (explicit) generating rule, which expresses a term directly from its position in the sequence:

un = u0Rn u0 is the initial value R is the common ratio n is the position in the sequence

Geometric sequences in tables and graphs When given a formula for the nth term, a table of values can be generated for the sequence. For example, in the sequence given by the formula un = 12 × 1.5n, by substituting for n appropriately and using technology, the given table can be created, listing the first 6 terms of the sequence: n

0

1

2

3

4

5

un

12

18

27

40.5

60.75

91.125

Perhaps more interesting though is the different types of graphs that geometric sequences correspond to. The graphs are not linear like arithmetic sequence, except for the trivial case of R = 1. The path of points plotted from a geometric sequence follow an exponential curve for positive values of R. Geometric sequences of the form un = u0Rn, where u0 > 0 will follow: • The path of an exponential growth function for R > 1. 6 5 4 3 2 1 −4 −3 −2 −1

−1 −2

un

n 1

2 3 4

5.05 Geometric sequences mathspace.co

425


• The path of an exponential decay function for 0 < R < 1. 6 5 4 3 2 1 −4 −3 −2 −1

−1 −2

un

n 1

2 3 4

• If u0 is negative, the path will be reflected across the x-axis. What if R is negative? The values of successive terms flip their sign so that the graph is depicted as either a growing (|R| > 1) or diminishing (|R| < 1) zigzag path — alternating between points on the graph f (n) = u0|R|n and f (n) = –u0|R|n, depending on the power being odd or even.

Interactive exploration

Discover this concept in action online

mathspace.co

For |R| > 1, the values will diverge as n increases. The terms will keep getting larger in size without bound. For |R| < 1, the values will converge as n increases. Each term gets smaller and approaches a limit of 0. For the geometric sequence with starting value 12 and ratio R = – 1.5, a table can be created and a graph of the sequence can be plotted. This is the same as the example in the previous table, but the ratio is now negative. The nth term is given by un = 12 × (– 1.5)n, the table will be the same, but the sign of the terms will alternate. The new table becomes: n

1

2

3

4

5

un

−18

27

−40.5

60.75

−91.125

Verifying, for n = 0, the result is u0 = 12 × (– 1.5)0 = 12 and for n = 1, the result is u1 = 12 × (– 1.5)1 = –18, continuing on terms with even n values become positive and terms with odd n values become negative.

426

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Here is a graph of the two geometric sequences depicted in both tables. Note that the evennumbered terms of the zigzag graph coincide with the terms of the first geometric sequence. 100 80 60 40 20 0 −20 −40 −60 −80 −100

un

n 1

2

3

4

5

6

Example 6 The nth term of a geometric sequence is given by the equation un = 2 × 3n. a Complete the table of values: n

0

1

2

3

9

un

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

Create a strategy

Substitute each n value into un = 2 × 3n.

Apply the idea un = 2 × 3n

Write the formula

0

=2×3

Substitute n = 0

=2×1

Apply the zero index law

=2

Evaluate

Repeating the same working to the next n values gives the complete table: n

0

1

2

3

9

un

2

6

18

54

39 366

b What is the common ratio between consecutive terms?

Create a strategy From reading the given rule, note which value takes the position of R in comparing it to the generic rule: un = u0Rn

Apply the idea R=3

5.05 Geometric sequences mathspace.co

427


c Plot the points in the table that correspond to n = 0, n = 1, n = 2, and n = 3.

Apply the idea 56 52 48 44 40 36 32 28 24 20 16 12 8 4

y

By plotting the values in the table, the points obtained are at (0, 2), (1, 6), (2, 18), and (3, 54).

x 0

1

2

3

4

d If the plots on the graph were joined, they would form: A

A straight line

B

A curved line

Create a strategy A graph of a geometric sequence is represented by a curved line.

Apply the idea The graph from part (c) represents the geometric sequence un = 2 × 3n, so the answer is option B.

Idea summary Because of the exponential nature of a geometric sequence, its graph is represented by a curved line, dictated by the common ratio, R. • The path of an exponential growth function for R > 1. • The path of an exponential decay function for 0 < R < 1. • If u0 (u0 = initial term) is negative the path will be reflected across the x-axis.

428

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


5.05 Practice questions What do you remember?

Ex 1

1

Explain how the common ratio of a geometric sequence can be found.

2

Determine the common ratio of these geometric sequences:

3

4

a

2, – 16, 128, – 1024, . . .

c

– 70.4, – 17.6, – 4.4, – 1.1, . . .

For each sequence: i

Determine if the sequence is arithmetic or geometric. Explain your answer.

ii

Determine the common ratio or common difference, whichever is applicable.

a

11, – 99, 891, – 8019, . . .

6

2, 6, 10, 14, . . .

b

Determine the next two terms for each sequence: a

5

– 9, 8.1, – 7.29, 6.561, . . .

b

4, 12, 36, . . .

b

12, – 48, 192, . . .

1,

c

3 9 , ,... 4 16

d

– 6, 9,

27 ,... 2

Determine the first four terms in each geometric sequence: a

The initial value is 6 and the common ratio is 4.

b

The initial value is 7 and the common ratio is –2.

c

The initial value is 700 000 and the common ratio is 1.04

d

The initial value is –2 and the common ratio is 3.

e

The initial value is 1.3 and the common ratio is –4.

Consider the recurrence relation un + 1 = 2un, u0 = 4: a

b

Complete the table of values: n

0

1

2

3

un

4

⬚

⬚

⬚

Determine u6.

Practice 7

Ex 2

8

For each explicit rule: i

List the first four terms of the sequence.

ii

Identify the common ratio.

a

Tn = 3 × 4n

b

Tn = – 4 × (– 3)n

For each geometric sequence: i

Determine the general or explicit rule for the nth term of the sequence.

ii

Determine T10.

a

– 2, – 12, – 72, – 432, . . .

b

– 0.3, – 1.5, – 7.5, – 37.5, . . .

5.05 Geometric sequences mathspace.co

429


Ex 3

9

If the initial value of a sequence is 1.2 and the common ratio is –5, determine the 5th term.

Ex 4

10

If a geometric sequence has u4 = 1.5 and u7 = 0.1875, determine the recurrence relation for the sequence.

11

In a geometric sequence, T3 = 24 and T6 = 192.

Ex 5

Ex 6

12

a

Determine the value of R, the common ratio in the sequence.

b

For the case where R is positive, determine the value of T0, the initial value in the sequence.

c

Consider the sequence in which the first term is positive. Determine an expression for Tn, the nth term of this sequence.

The nth term of a geometric sequence is given by the equation Tn = 4 × 1.5n. a

13

Complete the table of values: n

0

1

2

3

5

Tn

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

b

Determine the common ratio between consecutive terms.

c

Plot the points in the table that correspond to n = 0, 1, 2, 3, and 5 on a Cartesian plane.

d

Determine whether the joined points would form a straight line or a curve.

The plotted points represent terms in a geometric sequence: a

Complete the table of values for the given points: n

0

1

2

3

Tn

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

b

Identify R, the common ratio between consecutive terms.

c

Write a simplified expression for the nth term of the sequence, Tn.

d

Determine the 10th term of the sequence.

24 Tn 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 0 1

n 2

3

4

5

Extend your thinking 14

430

A small island has a population of 500 people. The population increases by 4% every year due to both natural growth and immigration: a

Write a recurrence relation that models the population each year.

b

How many people will be on the island after 7 years?

c

After how many years will the population first exceed 800 people?

d

What is the population after the first 10 years if the population increase is reduced to 3% each year?

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


15

16

A person invests $5000 into an account that offers an annual interest rate of 6%, compounded yearly: a

Write a recurrence relation that models the value of the investment each year.

b

How much will the investment be worth after 5 years?

c

After how many years will the investment exceed $8000?

d

If the interest rate was 5% instead of 6%, how long would it take for the investment to exceed $8000?

A laboratory begins with 1000 g of a radioactive substance. The substance decays at a rate of 3% per hour: a

Write a recurrence relation to model the amount of substance remaining after each n hour.

b

How much of the substance will remain after 10 hours?

c

After how many hours will the mass of the substance fall below 600 g?

d

What will the mass be after 20 hours?

5.06   Applications of geometric sequences After this lesson, you will be able to… • model compound interest using geometric sequences. • apply geometric sequences to reducing balance depreciation. • solve practical problems involving exponential growth and decay.

Applications of geometric sequences There are many applications of geometric sequences such as compound interest, exponential growth of bacteria, and exponential decay of radioactive elements. If an amount is increasing or decreasing by a constant factor at set time periods, the process can be considered as being geometric. A particular application of interest is the growth of an investment due to compound interest. Recall that the compound interest formula is A n

the formula un = u0 R .

P 1

r 100

n

. The form of this equation is very similar to

The value of the investment after n time periods is defined by A. The principal P, which is the initial value of the investment before the first interest period, is equivalent to u0, the initial value (or term at n = 0) of a geometric sequence. The compound interest rate r is expressed as a percentage and added to 1 to give the common ratio, R, of a geometric sequence.

5.06 Applications of geometric sequences mathspace.co

431


An amount of $2000 invested at a compound interest rate of 5% per annum could be expressed as a geometric sequence with u0 = 2000 and r = 5%: un

2000

1

5 100

n

= 2000 × 1.05n Some conditions to note on compound interest: r • If a quantity is increasing by r%, multiply by 1 to find successive terms. Multiplying by 100 r 1 calculates the new total in one step: the ‘1’ retains the original amount (100%), and 100 r the ‘ ’ adds the percentage increase. 100 • If a quantity is decreasing by r%, multiply by 1

r to find successive terms. 100

• For different compounding frequencies, adjust the rate and time periods accordingly. 8% For example, 8% p.a. compounding quarterly for three years becomes a rate of 2% 4 per quarter and the number of time periods becomes 4 × 3 = 12 quarters.

Example 1 After receiving $500 for her birthday, Amara decides to spend 10% of this money each week. a Find a model for Bn, the amount of birthday money she has left at the start of the nth week.

Create a strategy Find R to substitute into Bn = B0 Rn.

Apply the idea Use the formula: R

1

r 100

As Amara is spending 10% of her money, the decreasing form of R is used: R

r 100 10 1 100 1

= 0.9 B0 = 500 and R can be substituted into the formula: Bn = 500 × 0.9n Substitute B0 = 500, R = 0.9

432

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


b If instead of spending, Amara invests her $500 in an account that earns 10% interest each week, how long before she reaches her savings goal?

Create a strategy Substitute the goal savings into Bn and new R value into Bn = 500 × Rn.

Apply the idea The goal savings is double her initial money so Bn = 500 × 2 = 1000. To find an increasing R: R R

r 100 10 1 100 1

R = 1.1 Bn = 500 × Rn 1000 = 500 × 1.1 n = 7.27

n

Write the formula Substitute Bn = 1000 and R = 1.1 Use technology to solve for n

Since n = 7.27 weeks, the goal of $1000 is reached during the 8th week. Therefore, her savings will exceed $1000 after 8 weeks. Note: It can be confirmed this is the case by evaluating B7 = 500 × 1.17 ≈ 974.36 and B8 = 500 × 1.18 ≈ 1071.79

Example 2 The average rate of depreciation of the value of a Ferrari is 14% per year. A new Ferrari is bought for $90 000. a What is the car worth after 1 year?

Create a strategy Create a rule to represent the decay in value: Fn = F0 Rn

Apply the idea Given the depreciation rate is 14%: R

1

14 100

R = 0.86 Given F0 = 90 000, R = 0.86, F1 will provide the value of the car after 1 year. Fn = 90 000 × 0.86n 1

F1 = 90 000 × 0.86 = 77 400

Write the equation Substitute n = 1 Evaluate

After 1 year, the Ferrari will be worth $77 400.

5.06 Applications of geometric sequences mathspace.co

433


b What is the car worth after 3 years?

Create a strategy Using the rule found in part (a): Fn = 90 000 × 0.86n

Apply the idea Using the rule, finding F3 will provide the value of the car after 3 years: F3 = 90 000 × 0.863 = 57 245.04

Substitute n = 3 Evaluate

After 3 years, the Ferrari will be worth $57 245.04

c Write a recurrence relation for Fn + 1, defining the value of the car after n years.

Create a strategy Substitute R = 0.86 and F0 = 90 000 into un + 1 = Run, u0 = initial value.

Apply the idea un + 1 = Run, u0 = initial value

Write the recurrence relation

Fn + 1 = 0.86Fn, F0 = 90 000

Substitute R = 0.86, F0 = 90 000

Idea summary There are many applications of geometric sequences, particularly in financial modelling of compound interest, where an amount increases or decreases by a constant percentage over time. This process can be described as exponential growth or decay. The explicit rule un = u0 Rn is used to model these situations: • For geometric growth, the common ratio is R

1

percentage increase. • For geometric decay, the common ratio is R percentage decrease.

1

r , where r is the 100 r , where r is the 100

The rate r and number of periods n must be consistent with the compounding frequency.

434

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


5.06 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

Mass of element D ( g) loses half its mass every day. a

Complete the table for element D: Day

Mass of element D (g)

0

800

1

⬚

2 3 4 b

Is this type of decay linear or exponential?

⬚ ⬚ ⬚

2

Complete each statement to correctly describe the components of a geometric growth or decay model. a The formula for the nth term of a geometric sequence is un = u0 × ⬚. b For a quantity increasing by r% per period, the common ratio R is calculated as 1 + ⬚. c For a quantity decreasing by r% per period, the common ratio R is calculated as 1 − ⬚. d In a compound interest problem, the initial principal P is equivalent to the term ⬚ in a geometric sequence.

3

An investment of $8000 earns compound interest at a rate of 6% per annum, compounding quarterly. a Identify the principal value, u0, for a geometric model of this investment. b Calculate the quarterly interest rate as a percentage. c Determine the common ratio, R, that would be used to model the value of the investment each quarter.

4

For each scenario, identify whether it represents geometric growth or geometric decay, and determine the common ratio R. a A car depreciates in value by 15% each year. b The population of a town increases by 2.5% annually. c A radioactive substance has a half-life of 50 years. d

A bank account balance doubles every 12 years.

Practice 5

The average daily growth of a seedling is 6% per day. A seedling measuring 8 cm in height is planted. a

Calculate the height of the seedling at the end of day 1.

b

Calculate the height of the seedling, to the nearest hundredth, 4 days after it is planted.

c

Formulate a recurrence relation, Hn + 1, defining the height of the seedling n + 1 days after it is planted, including the initial height H0.

5.06 Applications of geometric sequences mathspace.co

435


6

Valerie invests $24 000 in an account that earns 6% p.a. with interest calculated at the end of each year. a

Ex 1

Ex 2

7

8

9

10

Complete the table, calculating the value of the investment, Vn, at the end of each year for the first four years. Round all values to the nearest dollar. n

0

1

2

3

4

Vn​

24 000

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

b

Determine the common ratio, R, between consecutive values of the investment.

c

Determine the explicit rule that models the value of the investment, Vn, after n years.

A regional park has an initial population of 800 koalas. Due to habitat loss, the population is decreasing by 8% each year. a

Determine a model for the koala population, P(n), after n years.

b

Suppose that instead of decreasing, a successful conservation programme increases the initial population of 800 koalas by 5% each year. Calculate how many years it will take for the population to first exceed 1200.

A sports car is purchased for $60 000 and its value depreciates at an average rate of 14% per year. a

Calculate the sports car’s value after 1 year.

b

Calculate the sports car’s value after 3 years.

c

Formulate a recurrence relation, Vn + 1, defining the value of the sports car after (n + 1) years, including the initial value V0.

A ball is dropped from a height of 9 m. After each bounce, it rebounds back up to 70% of its previous height. Let hn be the height of the ball after the nth bounce. a

Formulate a recurrence relation for hn + 1 in terms of hn that describes the height of the ball.

b

Determine an explicit rule for hn in terms of n.

c

Calculate the height of the ball after the 4th bounce.

A car enthusiast purchases a vintage car for $220 000. Each year, its value increases by 12% of its value at the beginning of the year. Calculate the value of the car after 7 years.

11

436

Dakota colours her hair with a non-permanent colour that gradually washes out over a series of washes. Every time she washes her hair, the colour diminishes by 20%. a

Determine the proportion of colour left after 1 wash.

b

Write a recurrence relation which defines an + 1, the proportion of colour left in her hair after (n + 1) washes, in terms of an with initial condition a0.

c

Calculate the percentage of colour remaining after 6 washes. Round your answer to two decimal places.

d

Calculate the percentage of colour lost after 7 washes. Round your answer to two decimal places.

e

Dakota will colour her hair again once the proportion of colour remaining falls below 20%. Determine n, the number of times she can wash her hair before recolouring.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


12

13

14

15

A sample of 2600 bacteria was taken. After 1 day, the number of bacteria was found to be 2912. a

By what percentage did the number of bacteria increase over the first day?

b

Assuming the bacteria continue to multiply at this rate, what will the population be 18 days after the sample was taken? Round your answer to the nearest whole number.

The zoom function on a camera multiplies the dimensions of an image. In an image, the height of a waterfall is 30 mm. After one zoom, the height is 36 mm. After a second zoom, its height is 43.2 mm. a

Determine the factor by which the image is enlarged each time the zoom function is applied.

b

If the zoom function is applied a third time, determine the exact height of the waterfall in the image.

Suppose Hank saves $1 the first day of a month, $2 the second day, $4 the third day, $8 the fourth day, and so on. That is, each day Hank saves twice as much as he did the day before. a

How much will Hank put aside for savings on the 17th day of the month?

b

How much will Hank put aside for savings on the 29th day of the month?

c

On which day will the amount Hank puts aside for savings first exceed $1 000 000?

A bouncy ball is dropped from a height of 13 m. On each bounce, the ball reaches a maximum height of 50% of its previous maximum height. a

Formulate a recurrence relation for an + 1, the height of the ball after the (n + 1)th bounce.

b

Determine an explicit rule for an, the height reached on the nth bounce.

c

How high does the bouncy ball reach after the 4th bounce? Round your answer to two decimal places.

Extend your thinking 16

Evie is considering whether to travel from Geelong to Melbourne for uni each week by V/Line train or drive her own car. Evie wants to compare the long-term costs of each option. A used car is currently worth $25 000. It loses 18% of its value each year due to depreciation. a

Determine a recurrence relation to model the value of the car over time.

b

Calculate the value of the car after 5 years.

c

A V/Line Myki Pass from Geelong to Melbourne costs about $290 per month. Assume 11 months of travel each year. How much would it cost in total to travel by train for 5 years?

d

Which travel option seems more cost-effective in the long term? What other factors should you consider before making your decision?

5.06 Applications of geometric sequences mathspace.co

437


17

Sophie is choosing between two ways to get the latest smartphone from a phone provider: • Option A: Buy the phone outright for $2199. • Option B: Sign up for a 24-month plan at $115 per month, which includes the phone and data.

18

19

20

a

If Sophie chooses Option B, how much will she pay in total over the two years?

b

Assume Sophie could sell the phone at the end of the two years for 40% of its original price. If she bought it outright (Option A), what would the phone be worth after 2 years?

c

A separate SIM-only data plan costs $25 per month. Compare the total cost of each option over two years. Which is better value? Justify your answer using calculations.

Alex has an AFL Gold Membership that increases in cost by 6% each year. His first membership fee, back in 2016, was $620. a

Determine a recurrence relation to model the cost of his membership over time. Let M0 be the initial cost and Mn be the cost after n years.

b

Use your recurrence relation (or an explicit rule derived from it) to calculate the cost of the membership in 2025.

c

Alex has a friend who thinks it’s too expensive and not worth it. If general admission tickets cost $42 per game, and Alex attends 12 games per season, is his membership good value in 2025? Explain your reasoning.

Liam buys a smart watch for $360 to track his running. The value of the watch depreciates by 25% per year. a

Determine a recurrence relation to model the value of the watch each year.

b

Calculate the value of the watch after 4 years.

c

If Liam plans to sell the watch in 4 years at its depreciated value, what percentage of the original price will he get back? Round your answer to one decimal place.

Priya buys a commuter bike for $2000 to ride to uni and around the city. The bike loses 15% of its value each year. a

Determine a recurrence relation to model the bike’s value over time.

b

What will the bike be worth after 3 years?

c

After 3 years, she wants to sell the bike. She is offered $1400. Is this a fair offer based on depreciation? Explain your reasoning.

Investigation: Saving money

Investigate online

mathspace.co

Chapter 5 review

Online review

438

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

mathspace.co


“Life is good for only two things: discovering mathematics and teaching mathematics.” – Simeon Poisson


Big ideas • Matrices provide a structured format for representing data in rows and columns, upon which fundamental arithmetic operations can be performed. • Advanced matrix operations, including multiplication and the calculation of inverses, provide powerful tools for solving complex problems such as systems of linear equations and analysing multi-step connections in networks. • Specialised applications of matrices, particularly transition matrices, are used to model and analyse dynamic systems, allowing for the prediction of future states and long-term equilibrium.

6 Matrices Chapter outline 6.01 6.02 6.03 6.04 6.05 6.06 6.07 6.08 6.09 6.10

Introduction to matrices Represent information in matrices Addition and subtraction of matrices Scalar multiplication Matrix multiplication Powers of matrices Applications of matrices Inverse matrices Simultaneous equations with matrices Investigation: Is there always a solution? Transition matrices Chapter 6 review

442 449 460 467 473 486 498 510 518 528


DNAsequencing sequencingalgorithms algorithmsuse usematrices matricesto tocompare comparegenetic genetic DNA sequences,helping helpingin inmedical medicalresearch researchand anddiagnostics. diagnostics. sequences,


6.01   Introduction to matrices After this lesson, you will be able to… • identify different types of matrices. • determine matrix size and properties. • use matrix notation to identify elements.

Features of a matrix Matrix A rectangular array of numbers, symbols or expressions displayed in rows and columns, enclosed in a set of square brackets and often named with capital letters. Consider this matrix:

1 2 3

13 6 3 10 8 9

Rows run horizontally and are numbered from top to bottom.

1 2 13 6 3 10 8 9

Columns run vertically and are numbered from left to right.

The size (or order) of a matrix is written in the form m × n, where m is the number of rows and n is the number of columns. The size of matrix A is 3 × 2.

The size of matrix B is 2 × 4. Elements are the individual entries of a matrix. The notation aij describes the element in the ith row and the jth column of the matrix.

442

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 1 Suppose H is a 3 × 2 matrix. a How many rows does H have?

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Use the fact that m × n matrix has m rows and n columns.

m×n 3 × 2 = 3 rows × 2 columns So, H has 3 rows.

b How many columns does H have?

Apply the idea m×n 3 × 2 = 3 rows × 2 columns So, H has 2 columns.

Example 2 Consider this matrix:

a What is the entry at a23?

Create a strategy Use the fact that aij denotes the element in the ith row and jth column of the matrix.

Apply the idea A=

−2 −5 −1 1 8 4

5 −7 7

The number at the intersection of row 2 and column 3 is −7. So, a23 = −7.

6.01 Introduction to matrices mathspace.co

443


b Where is the value −5 located, in terms of i and j?

Apply the idea A=

−2 −5 −1 1 8 4

The value −5 is located in row 1 and column 2.

5 −7 7

So, it is the element a12.

Idea summary A matrix is a rectangular array of numbers, symbols or expressions displayed in rows and columns, enclosed in a set of square brackets, and represented by capital letters. Rows run horizontally and are numbered from top to bottom. Columns run vertically and are numbered from left to right. The size (or order) of a matrix is written in the form m × n where m is the number of rows and n is the number of columns. Elements are the individual entries of a matrix where aij describes the element in the ith row and the jth column of the matrix.

Types of matrices A row matrix has just a single row. For example: T = [3

4

5]

A column matrix has just a single column. For example:

In a square matrix, the number of rows and columns is equal. For example:

J=

2 16 0.1

0 2 3

−1 5 −7

All square matrices have a leading diagonal, which consists of the elements from the top-left to the bottom-right corner. For example, the leading diagonal in matrix J is highlighted.

The identity matrix is any square matrix typically represented by I, in which all the elements in the leading diagonal are ones and all other elements are zeros.

444

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


For example:

A zero matrix is a matrix of any size where all the elements are zero. Here are some examples: O

A

B

D

Example 3 Identify the row matrix: A

B

[− 4

1

4]

C

D

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Use the fact that a row matrix contains only a single row.

Only option B has a single row. This means option B is the row matrix.

Idea summary Type of matrix Row matrix (row vector)

Description A single row

Column matrix A single column (column vector)

Square matrix

Identity matrix

Zero matrix

Examples T = [3 4 5]

M

Equal number of rows and columns. Has a leading diagonal, which consists of the elements from the top-left to the bottom-right corner. Any square matrix in which all elements in the leading diagonal are ones and all other elements are zeros. Every element is zero

O

6.01 Introduction to matrices mathspace.co

445


6.01 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

Define: a

2

3 Ex 1

4

A matrix

b

A square matrix

c

A row matrix

d

Determine if each statement is true or false. a

For matrices, the terms order, size, and dimensions all mean the same thing.

b

For matrices, the matrix is usually named with a lower case letter.

c

Element a23 of matrix A is the element in row 3 and column 2.

d

A matrix that has 4 rows and 3 columns has dimensions 4 × 3.

e

A 1 × 3 matrix is a row matrix.

Suppose K is a 4 × 3 matrix: a

How many rows does K have?

b

How many columns does K have?

b

How many columns does J have?

[3

−5

11

[− 4

3

6 9]

Suppose J is a 3 × 2 matrix: a

How many rows does J have?

Practice 5

Determine the sizes of each matrix: a

b

c

d

e

f

g

h

i

446

An identity matrix

[−5

2

−2]

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

j

16 − 8]


6

k

l

m

n

Identify each element from the given matrix B =

:

Ex 2a

a

7

b14

b

b22

b32

c

d

b21

Identify the location of each value in the form aij, for the matrix A =

:

Ex 2b

a 8

4

b

−6

c

0

d

3

c

Square matrix

d

Zero matrix

For these matrices:

Ex 3

Which of these matrices is a: a 9

10

b

Column matrix

Construct: a

A row matrix consisting of the numbers − 4, 1 and 4

b

A column matrix consisting of the numbers 5, − 2, 2 and 4

c

A 2 × 2 identity matrix

d

A 3 × 3 zero matrix

Determine whether the matrices with these dimensions are square, row or column matrices: a

11

Row matrix

1×4

b

2×2

3×1

c

d

3×3

Identify the number of elements in the each matrix: a

A matrix with 4 rows and 5 columns

b

The third column of a 7 × 8 matrix

c

The leading diagonal of a 4 × 4 matrix

d

A square matrix with 5 rows

12

If a column matrix contains 6 elements, how many rows does the matrix have?

13

For the matrices A = a

and B =

Determine the value of a21 − b11.

: b

Determine the value of a13 × b31.

6.01 Introduction to matrices mathspace.co

447


14

For the matrix A =

Determine whether these statements are true or false:

15

a

This matrix is an identity matrix.

b

This matrix is a square matrix.

c

a11 = 1

d

There are exactly 4 elements.

Identify if each matrix is an identity matrix. Justify your response. a

16

b

c

d

Determine whether these statements are true or false. Explain each answer: a

If two matrices have the same number of elements, then they have the same size.

b

A square matrix with two or more rows will have more elements than a column matrix with the same number of rows.

c

Adding a new row to a matrix with size m × n will add the same number of elements as adding another column.

Extend your thinking 17

Matrix K is a 2 × 3 matrix. The elements of K are determined by the rule kij = (i + j ). Select matrix K: A

2 3 4

B

3 4 5 D

1 2 1 2 3 2

18

1 2 3 2 3 4

E

C

0 1 2 1 2 3

2 3 4 4 5 6

Matrix M is a 2 × 2 matrix. The elements of M are determined by the rule mij = i2 − j. Write out matrix M.

19

Provide an example of a matrix for each region of the Venn diagram. Identify any regions that are impossible to fill and explain why.

Square matrix

Zero matrix

448

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

Identity matrix


20

For a matrix with 120 elements: a

How many different sizes can this matrix have? Explain your answer.

b

Which order of matrix will minimise the number of rows and columns combined?

List all the possible sizes of a matrix with each property:

21

a

36 elements

c

54 elements and three fewer rows than columns

b

20 elements

22

Can a matrix be simultaneously a row matrix, a column matrix, and a square matrix at the same time? If so, what would the dimensions of such a matrix be? Justify your answer.

23

For the matrix N given by:

The elements of matrix N in row i and column j are denoted as nij. Determine the rule that defines the elements nij in terms of i and j. Explain how to derive this rule based on the entries of N. 24

For the equation:

Determine the value of: a

t

b

u

e

x

f

y

c

v

d

w

6.02   Represent information in matrices After this lesson, you will be able to… • organise data into matrix form from real-world contexts. • interpret information presented in matrices.

Represent information in matrices Matrices can be used for storing and displaying information in a variety of applications, such as tables, databases, and connections in social or road networks. The order of data in a matrix has significance so it is important to identify what each row and column represents by labelling the matrix rows and columns.

6.02 Represent information in matrices mathspace.co

449


Exploration Information is often displayed in a format that is easy to interpret, such as a table: Preferred fruit Apples Bananas Oranges

Team Red 10 12 8

Team Blue 15 13 17

This same information can also be represented as a matrix: Red

Blue

Apples

10

15

Row 1

Bananas

12

13

Row 2

Oranges

8

17

Row 3

Column 1 Column 2

1. Compare how the information is presented in the table and in the matrix. 2. What does each row in the matrix represent? 3. What does each column in the matrix represent? 4. Describe how you would find out the total number of votes for “Bananas” by looking at the matrix. 5. If you were to add another team, how would the matrix change?

Example 1 Digital only example

Explore in the online lesson

mathspace.co

Example 2 The costs of a train ticket during different periods are: • Weekdays: $7 during peak hours, $4 during off-peak hours • Weekends: $12 during peak hours, $6 during off-peak hours • Public holidays: $18 during peak hours, $10 during off-peak hours a Organise the data into a 2 × 3 matrix, T.

Create a strategy Identify which variable should be represented by rows and which variable by columns.

450

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Apply the idea The two variables are: • Type of day (Weekday, Weekend or Public holiday) • Time of day (Peak and Off-peak) To construct a 2 × 3 matrix: 1. The variable with two options can be represented by the rows, which in this case, is time of day. 2. The variable with three options can be represented by the columns, which in this case, is type of day. 3. Enter the corresponding ticket costs into the matrix based on time and type of day. The elements in the corresponding location of the matrix: Weekday Weekend T

Peak

7 4

Off-peak

Public holiday

12 6

18 10

b The value at t12 was changed to 8, interpret what that would mean in the scenario.

Create a strategy Identify what t12 represents in the matrix. The matrix rows and columns correspond to the time of day and type of day, respectively.

Apply the idea t12 corresponds to the element in the 1st row and 2nd column which is 12. It is the peak hour cost on weekends. Changing the value of t12 to 8 would mean that the new cost for a peak hour train ticket on weekends would be reduced from $12 to $8.

Example 3 Represent the road connections shown in this map using a matrix:

J

Pink Pond

K

Shell Lake Mountain Range M

L

6.02 Represent information in matrices mathspace.co

451


Create a strategy Construct a square matrix where rows and columns represent towns, and elements indicate the number of direct road connections.

Apply the idea Construct a blank 4 × 4 matrix to represent the four towns. Label the rows and columns with the first letter of each town’s name. This matrix will be labelled as A. Fill in the leading diagonal of the matrix by identifying towns that have a direct road looping back to themselves. These loops should not pass through any other town. If a town has one direct loop, write a 1 in the corresponding diagonal position in the matrix; otherwise, write a 0. J

Pink Pond

The only town that has a loop is M.

K

So, a11 = 0, a22 = 0, a33 = 0 and a44 = 1.

Shell Lake Mountain Range L

M

Fill in the remainder of the matrix by considering the direct road connections between each town. J

Pink Pond

K

Shell Lake

There are three direct routes between J and K. So, a12 = a21 = 3.

Mountain Range L

M

There are no direct routes between J and L. So, a13 = a31 = 0. J

Pink Pond

K

Shell Lake

There are three direct routes between J and M. So, a14 = a41 = 3.

Mountain Range M

452

L

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


J

Pink Pond

K

Shell Lake

There is one direct route between K and L. So, a23 = a32 = 1.

Mountain Range L

M J

Pink Pond

K

Shell Lake

There are two direct routes between K and M. So, a24 = a42 = 2.

Mountain Range L

M J

Pink Pond

K

Shell Lake

There is one direct route between L and M. So, a34 = a43 = 1.

Mountain Range L

M

Therefore, the matrix that represents the information from the map is:

Reflect and check Notice these paths are not one-way connections. Therefore, the square matrix will be symmetrical along the leading diagonal.

Idea summary Matrices can be used for storing and displaying information in a variety of applications, such as tables, lists of data and networks. he order of data in a matrix has significance so it is important to identify what T each row and column represents.

6.02 Represent information in matrices mathspace.co

453


6.02 Practice questions What do you remember? 1 Ex 1

2

This table shows the number of customers walking through the doors of two businesses over a long weekend: Saturday

Sunday

Monday

Florist

140

110

98

Butcher

150

118

135

a

Organise the data into a matrix. Let the position of each element be the same as the position in the table.

b

What is the size of the matrix?

This table displays the average temperature (in degrees Celsius) in two cities for each season: Summer

Autumn

Winter

Spring

Perth

30

25

17

28

Melbourne

32

26

15

27

This data is organised into the matrix:

3

a

Do the rows of the matrix represent the temperatures for each season or for each city?

b

What is the size of the matrix?

c

Identify the element t32 and interpret its meaning in context.

Mia has a part-time job. Each week, she earns money and saves some of it. The matrix represents the amounts earned (E) and saved (S), in dollars, in each of three weeks:

4

454

a

How much did Mia save in Week 1?

b

Which week did Mia save the most money?

c

Determine how much Mia earned in total over the three weeks.

The number of hours worked by Alex (A), Beth (B), Charlie (C), Dana (D), and Ethan (E) across five days of a week (Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday) is shown in the matrix: a

How many hours did Charlie work on Wednesday?

b

Who worked 9 hours on Friday?

c

Calculate the total number of hours worked by Beth during the week.

d

Who worked the most hours on Monday?

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Practice 5 Ex 2

6

Jack, a chef, is known for these two recipes: Crazy Cookie which contains: Scrumptious Surprise which contains: • 360 g of butter • 420 g of butter • 410 g of sugar • 390 g of sugar • 630 g of flour • 650 g of flour • 185 g of egg • 200 g of egg • 450 g of chocolate chips • 80 g of chocolate chips a

Represent the amounts into a 2 × 5 matrix labelled A.

b

If the value of a21 was changed to 320, interpret the meaning in the scenario.

A long jump competition was down to four competitors in the final. Uther jumped 7.4 m, 5.7 m and 7.5 m in his attempts. Yuri jumped 6.7 m, 7.3 m and 6.9 m. Vincent jumped 7.1 m, 5.9 m and 6.8 m, and Luigi jumped 5.6 m, 6.1 m and 6.3 m. Represent the data into a 3 × 4 matrix.

7

The friendships between five children are summarised in a graph: a

Represent this information in a matrix, using a 0 to indicate no friendship and a 1 to indicate friendship.

b

The leading diagonal from top left to bottom right contains all zeros. Why is this?

Brad Sharon Adam Joanne Edward

8

The path connecting various buildings on a university campus are shown in the graph: C

L

G

S

A H

Represent the path connections in a matrix.

6.02 Represent information in matrices mathspace.co

455


9

Represent the road connections, alphabetically, in this map using a matrix: A

Ex 3

B

F E C

D

10

Consider this map:

Young

Temora

A41

Boorowa

B94 Harden Cootamundra

B94

B81

B85 A41

M31

Yass

Junee A25

A41 Lake Burrinjuck

Construct a matrix to represent the major roads (in yellow) connecting the towns, in alphabetical order. 11

The Riverdale Soccer Club has five new players join its team: Jamie, Kai, Lisa, Max and Noah. The graph shows the players who have played soccer together before joining the team. For example, the edge between Jamie and Kai shows that they have previously played soccer together.

456

J

K L N M

a

Represent this information in a matrix.

b

How many of these players had Max played soccer with before joining the team?

c

Who had played soccer with both Kai and Noah before joining the team?

d

During the season, another new player, Olivia, joined the team. Olivia had not played soccer with any of these players before. Add this information to the matrix.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


12

13

The distances, in kilometres, along three major roads between the Californian cities San Francisco (S), Los Angeles (L), and San Diego (D), are displayed in the matrix: a

What is the distance, in kilometres, between San Francisco and Los Angeles?

b

Jamie drove 120 km directly between two of the Californian cities. Which two cities did she drive between?

c

The Martinez family would like to drive from San Francisco to Los Angeles, and then to San Diego. Determine the total distance, in kilometres, that they will travel.

A clothing store has three locations: Location X, Location Y, and Location Z. These locations sell three types of clothing: shirts (S), pants (P ), and jackets (J ). The table lists the number of each type of clothing in three different sizes that are currently held at each location: Location

Small

Medium

Large

Location X

5 shirts

3 pants

2 jackets

Location Y

4 pants

6 shirts

3 jackets

Location Z

2 jackets

4 shirts

3 pants

Complete the matrix that shows the total number of each type of clothing (Shirts, Pants, Jackets) in each size across all locations.

14

Small

This map network shows the roads that connect three towns:

Carraway

Create a 3 × 3 matrix which represents the direct paths between the three towns. For the rows and columns, use the order of towns as: Arwick then Bogville then Caraway. Arwick

Bogville 15

This network shows the roads that connect five towns: a

b

Create a 5 × 5 matrix which represents the direct paths between the towns. For the rows and columns, put the towns in alphabetical order.

B A

Create a 5 × 5 matrix which represents the paths between the towns using exactly two paths (or exactly one stop-over).

C

E

D

6.02 Represent information in matrices mathspace.co

457


16

Consider the image which shows a train network and the stations that are connected by train lines:

Expo Centre

Willamette River

Airport Rose Quarter

Pioneer Square

Gateway

Hillsboro Gresham

PSU Beaverton

17

Clackamas Town Centre

a

Construct a matrix that represents the train network in order from left to right.

b

List the stations that would be passed if travelling from the airport to PSU.

A company is reviewing three key expense categories: Training, Equipment, and Marketing, across two departments: Research and Development. The budgeted amounts and the actual expenses for the year are represented in matrix B and C, respectively:

T B R D a

E

T

M

6000 7000 5000 5500 6000 7500

C

R D

Budgeted expenses?

ii

Actual expenses?

b

Was Marketing Research under or over budget?

c

What does the value at c21 in matrix C represent in the context?

Extend your thinking The matrix N displays the number of roads connecting five towns: Arlington (A), Bristol (B), Camden (C), Dover (D) and Elmont (E): a

458

Construct a road map using the information shown.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

M

4000 7020 6000 6700 5950 8000

For Marketing Research, what were the: i

18

E


b

c

19

Determine whether these statements are true or false: i

There is a road loop at Bristol.

ii

Direct travel between Camden and Elmont is possible.

iii

There are two roads connecting Arlington and Camden.

iv

There are three different ways to travel between Bristol and Elmont.

A major flood washes away part of the road connecting Arlington and Camden. Which elements in matrix N will need to be changed to reflect the new road conditions between the towns?

The matrix T shows the results of a round-robin chess tournament among six friends: Alan (A), Beth (B), Carlos (C), Dana (D), Evan (E) and Fiona (F ). Each participant played against every other participant exactly once. A 1 in the matrix indicates that the player in that row defeated the player in the corresponding column, and a 0 indicates a loss. Identify the error in the matrix. Justify using mathematical reasoning.

20

A beach volleyball social competition team can have 3 players on the court at any time. The team has 5 players at the tournament. The table shows 3 combinations that the coach has already used in the first three games. Games Players chosen There is one more game left in the tournament. 1 Ryan, Jimmy, Lucy Who should the coach choose to play so that every 2 Lucy, Beth, Ellie team member has played with every other team member 3 Ellie, Ryan, Jimmy at least once? Justify your answer using a matrix.

21

A few colleagues decided to carpool on the way to work. The matrix displays the distances between each house:

Determine the shortest route that starts at House A and visits every house exactly once.

6.02 Represent information in matrices mathspace.co

459


6.03   Addition and subtraction of matrices After this lesson, you will be able to… • determine when matrices can be added or subtracted. • perform addition and subtraction of matrices. • solve mathematical problems involving matrix addition and subtraction.

Matrix addition and subtraction Exploration The matrices show the number of goals and behinds for two football teams across four games:

Team A =

Goals

Behinds

Game 1

10

5

Game 2

8

7

Game 3

12

4

Game 4

9

6

Team B =

Goals

Behinds

Game 1

7

8

Game 2

9

5

Game 3

10

6

Game 4

11

4

1. How many goals did Team A score in Game 1? 2. In which game(s) did Team B score more goals than Team A? 3. How many goals were scored in total by both Team A and Team B in Game 4? 4. Determine a way to add the matrices together to create a new matrix that shows the combined goals and behinds for each game. Write the new matrix.

For matrix addition and matrix subtraction, the operations are performed on corresponding elements. Formally, matrix addition is represented as: a b c d

e f g h

a e b f c g d h

Corresponding elements are added 2 1 4

460

3 0 5

1 6 3

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

1 1 2

3 7 7

2 1 7


And matrix subtraction is represented as: a b c d

e f g h

a e b f c g d h

Corresponding elements are subtracted 2 1 4

3 1 0 – 6 5 3

1 1 2

1 5 1

4 1 3

Due to the nature of matrix addition and subtraction, where operations are performed element by element, only matrices of the same dimensions can be added or subtracted. The resulting matrix will have the same dimensions as the matrices involved in the operation. Matrix addition follows several important properties, including the existence of an additive identity and additive inverse: Additive identity

Additive inverse

A matrix such that it leaves any matrix unchanged when added. The zero matrix that is the same order (size) as A is the additive identity of A because: A + 0 = A and 0 + A = A.

A matrix that when added results in the zero matrix. For any matrix A, the additive inverse is −A because: A + (−A) = 0 and (−A) + A = 0.

One important law of matrices is that addition of matrices is commutative, that is A + B = B + A. However, subtraction of matrices, like subtraction of real numbers, is not commutative, that is A − B ≠ B − A. To add or subtract matrices using technology, input the matrices and then use the addition and subtraction buttons like adding or subtracting numbers.

Example 1 Consider these matrices:

Is A + B possible?

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Matrix addition is only possible with matrices of the same size.

Matrix A is a 3 × 2 matrix whereas matrix B is a 2 × 3 matrix. Since the matrices are different sizes, A + B is not possible.

6.03 Addition and subtraction of matrices mathspace.co

461


Example 2 If A =

and B =

, determine A + B.

Create a strategy Add the corresponding elements in each matrix.

Apply the idea A+B=

7 −7 −5

8 2 4

+

Write the matrices

=

7+8 −7 + 2 −5 + 4

Add the elements

=

15 −5 −1

Evaluate each element

Reflect and check The answer matrix must have the same size as matrices A and B.

Example 3 If A =

and B =

, determine A − B.

Create a strategy Subtract the corresponding elements in each matrix by hand, or use technology to perform the subtraction.

Apply the idea A−B=

9 2 6 5 −7 8

−

−3 −5 3 −1 −6 7

Write the matrices

9 − (−3) 2 − (−5) 6 − 3 = 5 − (−1) −7 − (−6) 8 − 7

Subtract the elements

12 7 3 = 6 −1 1

Evaluate each element

462

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 4 Solve for x in this matrix equation:

Create a strategy Use the elements from the matrices that correspond to x to form an equation.

Apply the idea x+3=8 x=5

Reflect and check Write the equation Subtract 3 from both sides

Substitute the value back into the matrix and check the answer. 5+3=8

Idea summary Matrix addition and matrix subtraction are performed by adding or subtracting the corresponding elements. For this reason, the operations can only be performed on matrices of the same dimensions. Key properties of matrix addition include: • It is commutative, meaning A + B = B + A. • The additive identity is the zero matrix (0), as A + 0 = A. • Every matrix A has an additive inverse (–A), such that A + (–A) = 0.

6.03 Practice questions What do you remember? 1 Ex 1

2

For each pair of matrices: i

Identify the size of matrix A.

iii

Is A + B possible?

a

A=

and B =

Consider the matrices: A =

,B=

ii

Identify the size of matrix B.

b

A=

and C = [a

and B =

b].

a

Identify the size of matrix A.

b

Identify the size of matrix B.

c

Identify the size of matrix C.

d

Is A + B possible?

e

Is B − C possible?

f

Is C + A possible?

6.03 Addition and subtraction of matrices mathspace.co

463


3

Consider the matrices:

a

Identify the size of matrix A.

b

Identify the size of matrix B.

c

Identify the size of matrix C.

d

Is A + B possible?

e

Is A + B − C possible?

f

Is B − A possible?

b

A=

Practice Ex 2

Ex 3

4

5

6

Determine A + B, if: a

A=

and B =

c

A=

and B =

d

A=

and B =

e

A=

and B =

f

A = [1

0 3] and B = [2

b

A=

and B =

d

A=

and B =

f

A=

a

b

c

d

e

f

−2

−5]

−2] − [−1

4

Determine A − B, if: a

A=

c

A=

e

A=

and B =

and B =

and B =

and B =

Evaluate:

g

464

and B =

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

h

[3

1 4] + [2

[1

2

5 7]

−1] + [0 −3

3]


7

Given A = a

Ex 4

8

,B=

A−B+C

b

, and C =

, determine:

B+C−A

c

Solve these matrix equations for x: a

9

C−A+B

b

The number of points scored and assists made by four basketball players were recorded in two different games. The columns represent the players Smith, Johnson, Davis, and Brown, respectively. The first row represents the points scored, and the second row represents the assists made in each game. Game 1:

10

Game 2:

a

Calculate the matrix which shows the total points scored and assists made by each player over the two games.

b

Which player scored the highest total points over the two games?

A store received shipments of two types of items (shoes, S, and bags, B) across three branches (X, Y, and Z) on Wednesday:

S X Wednesday : Y Z

On Thursday, they returned some defective items:

S

Assuming there were no sales, determine the current inventory in each branch, after the returns.

11

X Thursday : Y Z

B

4 7 6 5 3 8 B

1 3 2 4 1 2

The tables show the numbers of fruit and vegetables sold at Mohamad’s three shops over a particular weekend: Saturday:

Sunday: Fruit

Vegetables

Fruit

Vegetables

Shop 1

58

29

Shop 1

45

32

Shop 2

48

71

Shop 2

40

62

Shop 3

54

38

Shop 3

38

46

a

Represent the sales of fruit and vegetables for Saturday as a 3 × 2 matrix.

b

Represent the sales of fruit and vegetables for Sunday as a 3 × 2 matrix.

c

Add the matrices from part (a) and part (b) to determine the total number of sales of fruit and vegetables for each shop over the entire weekend.

6.03 Addition and subtraction of matrices mathspace.co

465


12

Determine the missing matrix X in each equation: a

13

b

Consider this matrix equation: Determine the value of the unknown variables.

14

Given the matrices A = and B = , Angelita calculated A – B and got 3 . Identify and correct her error. C= 1 1

15

1

Consider matrix A =

and the zero matrix 0 =

. Based on the result of adding

these two matrices, come up with an explanation regarding what happens when a zero matrix is added to any matrix.

Extend your thinking 16

Identify these statements as true or false. Justify your reasoning. a

When adding two matrices, the resulting matrix will have the same size as the original matrices.

b

Two matrices of different sizes can be added together as long as the number of elements are the same.

c

Subtracting a matrix from itself results in a zero matrix.

17

Lucas believes that because addition with integers is commutative, matrix addition must also be commutative. Evaluate the reasonableness of Lucas’s assumption.

18

This table shows information about two matrices, A and B: Determine A + B.

19

Matrix

Order

Rule

A

3×3

aij = 2i + j

B

3×3

bij = i − j

This table shows the number of visitors to a website by country: Australia

New Zealand

Thailand

China

January

37

25

29

41

February

26

35

19

51

March

32

22

18

27

April

30

28

24

37

May

31

20

24

28

Show a matrix calculation that determines how many more visitors were from China than from Thailand.

466

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


20

In geometry, the centroid of a set of points is the arithmetic mean (average) position of all the points. It is the point where all the coordinate values average out. In a certain city, the coordinates of three parks are used to determine the centroid. • Park A’s coordinates are represented by the matrix: • Park B’s coordinates are represented by the matrix: • The centroid coordinates are represented by the matrix: Determine the matrix of the coordinates of the third park, D.

6.04   Scalar multiplication After this lesson, you will be able to… • multiply a matrix by a scalar. • apply scalar multiplication to solve practical problems.

Scalar multiplication A scalar is a quantity described by a single numerical value. Scalar multiplication is the process of multiplying a matrix by a scalar (number). Scalar multiplication can be applied to any matrix, regardless of its dimensions, producing a matrix of the same size. In general, the multiplication of a matrix by a scalar involves multiplying each element within the matrix by the given scalar and will appear similar to this:

where the scalar, denoted by λ, represents the multiplication factor. Scalar multiplication can also be done using technology by entering the matrices and using the multiplication function.

Example 1 If A =

, determine 3A.

Create a strategy Multiply each element of matrix A by 3.

6.04 Scalar multiplication mathspace.co

467


Apply the idea Write the equation and substitute matrix A

Multiply each element by 3

Evaluate each element

Example 2 Determine

if A =

and B =

.

Create a strategy Multiply each of the elements in matrix A by

, and multiply each element in matrix B by .

Add corresponding elements of the matrices

A and

B.

Apply the idea Write the equation with the matrices A and

Complete the scalar multiplications

Add each of the corresponding elements

Example 3 The cost matrix C shows the current cost, in dollars per square metre, of four different manufacturing materials: C = [50

120 90 70]

Due to an increase in supplier prices, the cost of each material is expected to rise by 8%. Determine the new cost matrix after the price increase.

Create a strategy Use scalar multiplication to scale each element in the matrix by the same percentage.

468

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

B


Apply the idea An increase of 8% can be represented as a scalar 1.08 New cost matrix = 1.08 × [50 = [54

120

129.60

90

70]

Multiply the original cost matrix by 1.08

97.20 75.60] Evaluate the scalar multiplication

Reflect and check Recall: An 8% increase = 100% + 8% = 108% = 1.08. This scalar indicates that 100% of the original amount is included plus 8% on top of the original amount. An 8% decrease = 100% − 8% = 92% = 0.92. This scalar indicates that resulting matrix is 92% of the original.

Idea summary A scalar is a quantity described by a single numerical value. Scalar multiplication is the process of multiplying a matrix by a scalar (number). Scalar multiplication is used to change each element in the matrix by the same factor. In general, the multiplication of a matrix by a scalar will appear similar to this:

where lambda, λ, represents the scalar quantity.

6.04 Practice questions What do you remember? Ex 1

1

If A = a

2

3

2A

If A = a

, determine: b

− 4A

c

, determine:

3A

b

−A

c

10A

d

Evaluate the following: a

b

c

d

6.04 Scalar multiplication mathspace.co

469


4

5

If multiplying matrix

7

8

:

a

Identify the scalar.

b

Verify your result by performing the scalar multiplication on matrix Q.

c

Identify the scalar that when multiplied by matrix R, produces matrix Q.

For each expression, determine the value of y:

a

6

by a scalar produces

Let T =

b

.

a

Multiply T by the scalar 0 and explain the result.

b

Multiply T by the scalar 1 and discuss the significance of this operation.

Determine the scalar that represents these percentage increases: a

5%

b

1%

c

25%

d

72%

e

200%

f

10%

g

150%

h

3%

Determine the scalar that represents these percentage decreases: a

5%

b

10%

c

45%

d

8%

e

90%

f

20%

g

53%

h

2%

c

5A + 3B

d

Practice Ex 2

9

If A = a

10

11

4A + B

If A = a

and B = b

2A − B

and B =

4A + 2B

Let A =

, determine:

b ,B=

, determine: 2A − 2B , and C =

c

3A + 5B

d

0.3A + 2.5B

.

Determine 4A − B + 2C. Ex 3

12

The quarterly revenue (in millions) for three products is given in the table. The company projects a 12% increase in revenue for next year. a b

470

Determine the scalar that represents the percentage increase. Determine the projected revenue matrix, rounded to two decimal places.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

Q1

Q2

Q3

Product A

10

12

11

Product B

15

16

14

Product C

13

14

15


13

14

A factory produces three different products with the costs (in dollars) per batch. The factory implements a cost reduction strategy that decreases the cost of each product by 5%. a

Determine the scalar that represents the percentage decrease.

b

What is the new cost matrix after the reduction?

B2

B3

Product A

200

180

220

Product B

250

230

210

Product C

270

260

240

A pizzeria is about to mark up prices on their items by 140%. The table shows their current prices: Using scalar multiplication, calculate the marked-up prices. Express your answer as a 3 × 2 matrix.

15

B1

Pizza

Drinks

Small

$6

$3

Medium

$8

$4.50

Large

$12

$6

Glorious Jeans will be offering a 25% discount on all food items for their Boxing Day sales. The table shows their regular prices: Small

Large

Sandwiches

$4.50

$7

Pies

$5

$8.50

Cakes

$6

$9.20

Using scalar multiplication, calculate the discounted prices. Express your answer as a 3 × 2 matrix. 16

17

18

Identify these statements as true or false: a

Scalar multiplication by 1 leaves the matrix unchanged.

b

Scalar multiplication can change the dimensions of a matrix.

c

Scalar multiplication of a matrix by a negative number reverses the sign of each element in the matrix.

d

The order in which you multiply a matrix by two different scalars does not matter; that is, k1 (k2 A) = k2 (k1 A).

In a particular town, 30% of households own no pets, 50% of households own one pet, 15% of households own two pets, and 5% of households own more than two pets. a

Organise the percentages into a 1 × 4 row matrix in the same order as stated.

b

If there are 300 households in the town, multiply your matrix to determine the number of households in each category. Express your answer as a 1 × 4 matrix.

Consider these matrices:

Given the equation A + nB = C, solve for the scalar n.

6.04 Scalar multiplication mathspace.co

471


19

Solve for n: a

b

c

20

Solve these matrix equations for matrix A: a

21

b

Mia and Ethan completed the same problem but arrived at different answers. Their working out is shown: Mia’s response:

Ethan’s response:

Provide a detailed explanation of any errors in their calculations and identify the correct answer.

Extend your thinking 22

Explain why matrix addition and subtraction are only defined for matrices of the same size, while scalar multiplication is always defined, regardless of the matrix’s dimensions.

23

The cost prices of three different electrical items in a store are $230, $290 and $310, respectively. Show a matrix calculation to determine the selling price of each item allowing for a 30% mark-up and a $20 commission.

24

Given the cost matrix (C) and the sale price matrix (S) for three products across two different stores, calculate the profit matrix for each product in each store, assuming both stores offer a 10% discount on the sale price.

472

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


25

If C =

and D =

, determine matrices X and Y such that 3C − 4X = D

and 2C + Y = 3D. 26

The time matrix for five tasks in a project is given by the matrix: T = [3.5 4.2

2.8

5.1 3.9]

(in hours)

The manager estimates that the actual time taken will be 150% of the planned time due to potential delays. Determine the estimated extra time required for each of the five tasks and write them in a 1 × 5 matrix.

6.05   Matrix multiplication After this lesson, you will be able to… • determine when two matrices can be multiplied. • multiply matrices with and without technology. • apply matrix multiplication to contextual and mathematical problems.

Conditions for matrix multiplication Matrix multiplication The process of multiplying one matrix by another matrix. Two matrices can only be multiplied if the number of columns in the first matrix equals the number of rows in the second matrix. If matrix A is of size m × n and matrix B is of size n × q, then the condition for matrix multiplication is satisfied, and the product of A and B can be calculated. Size of 1st matrix

Size of 2nd matrix

m× n

n ×q Must be equal

The size of the resulting matrix will be m × q, or the number of rows in the first matrix by the number of columns in the second matrix. Size of 1st matrix

Size of 2nd matrix

m×n

n× q

Size of the answer matrix 6.05 Matrix multiplication mathspace.co

473


Example 1 Consider these matrices: G=

,H=

,I=

Determine whether these matrix multiplications are defined. If defined, determine the size of the resulting matrix: a IGH

Apply the idea I

G

H

12 13 14

2 3 4 5

6 7 8 9 10 11

3× 1

2× 2

2 ×3

Not equal

The matrix multiplication is not possible as the number of columns in matrix I is not equal to the number of rows in matrix G.

Equal

b GHI

Apply the idea G

H

I

2 3 4 5

6 7 8 9 10 11

12 13 14

2×2

2× 3

3× 1

Equal

The matrix multiplication GHI is defined. The resulting matrix will be 2 × 1 in size.

Equal 2×1

Reflect and check The matrix multiplication GHI can be performed in steps: • Consider the size of G (2 × 2) and the size of H (2 × 3). • Since the inner dimensions match (2 = 2), the product GH is possible. • The resulting size of GH is determined by the outer dimensions, which will be 2 × 3. then • The size of GH is 2 × 3 and the size of I is 3 × 1. • Since the inner dimensions match (3 = 3), the product GHI is possible. • The resulting size of GHI is determined by the outer dimensions, which will be 2 × 1.

474

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Idea summary Matrix multiplication is the process of multiplying one matrix by another matrix.

Must be the same

Two matrices can only be multiplied if the number of columns in the first matrix is equal to the number of rows in the second matrix. If matrix multiplication is possible, the resulting matrix will have the same number of rows as the first matrix and the same number of columns as the second matrix.

(m × n) (n × p) = (m × p) order order of A of B

order of AB

Multiplication process Interactive exploration

Discover this concept in action online

mathspace.co

The simplest matrix product is the product of a row matrix and column matrix. Each entry in the row matrix is multiplied by the corresponding entry in the column matrix, and the sum of these products is the result. a11

a12

a13

b11 b21 b31

a11b11

a12b21

a13b31

This is why the number of columns of the left matrix must equal the number of rows of the right matrix. This process of multiplying a row by a column is repeated for each row of the first matrix with each column of the second matrix to form the elements of the product matrix. To multiply two matrices: 1. Check if the multiplication is defined and determine the size of the resulting matrix: • Verify that the number of columns in the first matrix matches the number of rows in the second matrix. • The resulting matrix will have the same number of rows as the first matrix and the same number of columns as the second matrix. 2. Represent the resulting matrix using element notation: • The element in the ith row and j th column of the resulting matrix is denoted as aij. 3. Calculate each element by multiplying rows of the first matrix with columns of the second matrix and summing the products: • For each element aij, multiply each element in the ith row of the first matrix by the corresponding element in the j th column of the second matrix. • Sum these products to obtain the value for aij. Matrix products can also be calculated with technology, but it is important to understand the process.

6.05 Matrix multiplication mathspace.co

475


Example 2 For this matrix product:

a Which expression could be used to find a21? A

1 × 13 + 2 × 14 + 3 × 15

B

2 × 10 + 5 × 8 + 6 × 12

C

4 × 10 + 5 × 11 + 6 × 12

D

4 × 13 + 5 × 14 + 6 × 15

Create a strategy Element aij is calculated by taking the sum of the products of corresponding entries from the ith row of the first matrix and the jth column of the second matrix.

Apply the idea Element a21 is the product of the 2nd row of the first matrix and the 1st column of the second matrix. So the product is: 10 4 5 6 11 12

4

10

5

11

6

12

b Evaluate the product.

Apply the idea 1. Check if the multiplication is defined and determine the size of the resulting matrix. 3×2

3×3

3×2

The multiplication is defined, and the resulting matrix will be a 3 × 2 matrix. 2. Represent the resulting matrix using element notation.

476

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


3. Calculate each element by multiplying rows of the first matrix with columns of the second matrix and summing the products. Start with the element a11. A=

a11 a12 a21 a22 a31 a32

Run across row 1 and climb down column 1. 1 2 3 4 5 6 × 7 8 9

10 13 11 14 12 15

a11 = 1 × 10 + 2 × 11 +3 × 12 = 68 Next, consider element a12. A=

68 a12 a21 a22 a31 a32

Run across row 1 and climb down column 2. 1 2 3 4 5 6 × 7 8 9

10 13 11 14 12 15

a12 = 1 × 13 + 2 × 14 + 3 × 15 = 86 Next, consider element a21. A=

68 86 a21 a22 a31 a32

Run across row 2 and climb down column 1. 1 2 3 4 5 6 × 7 8 9

10 13 11 14 12 15

a21 = 4 × 10 + 5 × 11 + 6 × 12 = 167 Start with the element a22. A=

68 86 167 a22 a31 a32

Run across row 2 and climb down column 2. 1 2 3 4 5 6 × 7 8 9

10 13 11 14 12 15

a22 = 4 × 13 + 5 × 14 + 6 × 15 = 212 Next, consider element a31. A=

68 86 167 212 a31 a32

Run across row 3 and climb down column 1. 1 2 3 4 5 6 × 7 8 9

10 13 11 14 12 15

a31 = 7 × 10 + 8 × 11 + 9 × 12 = 266 Next, consider element a32. A=

68 86 167 212 266 a32

Run across row 3 and climb down column 2. 1 2 3 4 5 6 × 7 8 9

10 13 11 14 12 15

a32 = 7 × 13 + 8 × 14 + 9 × 15 = 338 Therefore, the resulting matrix is:

6.05 Matrix multiplication mathspace.co

477


Reflect and check Step 3 can be done with the working out in the matrix. 10 13 11 14 12 15

A=

1 2 3 4 5 6 × 7 8 9

=

a11 a12 a21 a22 a31 a32

=

1 × 10 + 2 × 11 + 3 × 12 4 × 10 + 5 × 11 + 6 × 12 7 × 10 + 8 × 11 + 9 × 12 68

86

=

167

212

1 × 13 + 2 × 14 + 3 × 15 4 × 13 + 5 × 14 + 6 × 15 7 × 13 + 8 × 14 + 9 × 15

266 338

This can all be verified using technology.

Example 3 1 Determine the value of n in the equation: 3

4 2 1 n

5 7 1

31 . 12

Create a strategy Perform matrix multiplication on the left-hand side to form two equations, one for each row of the resulting matrix. Set these equal to the corresponding elements on the right-hand side (31 and 12). Solve the resulting equations, focusing on the equation involving n, to find the value of n.

Apply the idea Multiply the matrices on the left-hand side:

1 3

5 4 2 7 . 1 n 1

For a 2 × 3 matrix multiplied by a 3 × 1 matrix, the result is a 2 × 1 matrix. Compute each element: • First row: 1 × 5 + 4 × 7 + 2 × ( – 1) = 5 + 28 – 2 = 31. • Second row: 3 × 5 + ( – 1) × 7 + n × ( – 1) = 15 – 7 – n = 8 – n. So, the left-hand side becomes:

478

31 . 8 n

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Set this equal to the right-hand side:

31 8 n

31 . 12

This gives two equations: 31 = 31

First row equation

8 – n = 12

Second row equation

The first equation holds true, confirming the multiplication. Solve the second equation: 8 – n = 12

Write the equation

– n = 12 – 8

Subtract 8 from both sides

=4

Simplify

n = –4

Multiply both sides by – 1

The value of n is – 4. This value satisfies the original matrix equation.

Reflect and check Substitute n = – 4 back into the original equation to verify: • First row (already computed): 1 × 5 + 4 × 7 + 2 × ( – 1) = 5 + 28 – 2 = 31, which equals 31, correct. • Second row: 3 × 5 + ( – 1) × 7 + ( – 4) × ( – 1) = 15 – 7 + 4 = 12, which equals 12, correct. Both equations hold, confirming n = – 4 is the correct solution.

Example 4 Frank owns two pizza stores, Pepperoni Palace and Crispy Crust, at which he sells small pizzas for $7, medium-sized pizzas for $15 and large pizzas for $28. The table shows the number of pizzas sold at each store on a particular day. Small

Medium

Large

Pepperoni Palace

21

25

12

Crispy Crust

26

11

22

a Organise the prices in a column matrix.

Create a strategy Create a column matrix for the prices, arranging them in the order of small, medium, and then large from top to bottom.

Apply the idea A

7 S 15 M 28 L

6.05 Matrix multiplication mathspace.co

479


b Organise the number of pizzas sold in a 2 × 3 matrix.

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Express each numerical element of the table in the corresponding location of the matrix.

The matrix as given in the table: S M L P 21 25 12 B C 26 11 22

c Calculate Frank’s total revenue for each store.

Create a strategy Use the matrices A and B from part (a) and (b), and perform matrix multiplication.

Apply the idea To calculate the total revenue for each store, determine the correct order to multiply matrices A and B. Start by considering the information the final matrix should contain. The question asks for the revenue for each store — specifically, the revenue for Pepperoni Palace and Crispy Crust — so the final matrix should be either a 2 × 1 or a 1 × 2 matrix. BA AB Next, check if both AB and BA are possible, and determine ( 3 × 1 )( 2 × 3) 2× 3 3× 1 which order gives the correct result. Since AB is not possible, but BA is, multiply B by A to obtain the required 2 × 1 matrix representing the total revenue for each store. 7 21 25 12 BA = 15 26 11 22 28

Not possible

Possible 2×1

Write the equation with the matrices

=

(21 7 ) (25 15) ( 12 28) (26 7 ) ( 11 15) (22 28)

Determine the calculation for each element

=

858 963

Evaluate each element

Reflect and check Check the matrix multiplication by considering how the answer could be calculated without matrices. For example, the revenue for Pepperoni Palace can be found by multiplying the number of small pizzas by the cost of a small pizza, the number of medium pizzas by the cost of a medium pizza, and the number of large pizzas by the cost of a large pizza, then adding these products together. Revenue for Pepperoni Palace = 21 × 7 + 25 × 15 + 12 × 28 = 858 This corresponds to the calculation in the matrix multiplication.

480

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Idea summary To multiply two matrices: 1.  Check if the multiplication is possible and determine the size of the resulting matrix. 2.  Represent the resulting matrix using element notation. 3.  Calculate each element by performing a row-by-column multiplication: sum the products of corresponding entries from a row of the first matrix and a column of the second matrix.

6.05 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

2

For each pair of matrices, determine whether the product AB or BA is possible. If possible, determine the size of the resulting matrix. a

A = [8] and B = [4]

b

A=

c

A=

and B = [4 9 − 5]

d

A=

e

A=

and B =

f

A=

g

A=

and B = and B =

and B =

and B =

For these matrices:

Determine whether these matrix multiplications are possible. If possible, determine the size of the resulting matrix. a

KJ

b

KL

c

LM

d

MK

e

JK

f

MJ

g

KM

h

JL

6.05 Matrix multiplication mathspace.co

481


3

For these matrices:

Ex 1

Determine whether these matrix multiplications are possible. If possible, determine the size of the resulting matrix.

Ex 2a

4

a

ABC

b

DEF

c

BCD

d

CDE

e

EFA

f

FAB

g

DBA

h

ADF

For this matrix product: B

2 4 6 3 5 7 8 10 12

15 19 16 20 17 21

Which expression could be used to find b32?

5 Ex 2b

482

A

8 × 19 + 10 × 20 + 12 × 21

B

2 × 19 + 4 × 20 + 6 × 21

C

3 × 15 + 5 × 16 + 7 × 17

D

3 × 19 + 5 × 20 + 7 × 21

For each pair of matrices A and B: i

Determine the size of AB.

ii

Calculate the matrix AB.

a

A=

b

A=

and B =

c

A=

d

A=

and B =

e

A=

f

A=

g

A=

and B =

and B =

and B =

and B =

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

and B =


Practice 6

7

Consider the matrices A =

and B =

a

What is the size of AB?

b

Determine the matrix AB.

c

What is the size of BA?

d

Determine the matrix BA.

e

Is AB equal to BA?

Consider the row matrix R = [1

.

3] and the column matrix C =

2

.

Determine the matrix: a 8

9

10

RC

Consider A =

CR

b

and I =

.

a

Determine the matrix AI.

b

Determine the matrix IA.

c

Discuss the significance of the identity matrices in matrix multiplication.

Let E =

be the zero matrix, and F =

.

a

Determine the product EF.

b

What happens when any matrix is multiplied by a zero matrix? Explain why this result occurs.

Consider A =

. If A can be multiplied by a column matrix B, what is the size of

matrix B? 11

If A is a 4 × 2 matrix and the product AB is a 4 × 5 matrix, what is the size of B?

12

A matrix calculation of A = BC resulted in the matrix A =

.

If B is a 3 × 2 matrix, what is the size of matrix C? 13

Matrix F = [7

8] is to be multiplied by matrix G to obtain a 1 × 1 matrix.

a

What is the size of G?

b

Provide an example of matrix G and compute FG.

6.05 Matrix multiplication mathspace.co

483


14

Matrix P is a 2 × 4 matrix while Q is a 4 × 2 matrix. Explain whether these matrix expressions involving P and Q are possible and justify your answers: a

Ex 3

15

P+Q

b

P−Q

PQ

c

d

QP

Solve these equations for n:

a

b

c

16

Consider these 2 × 2 matrices: A=

17

,B=

, and C =

a

Determine AB.

b

Determine BC.

d

Determine A(BC).

e

Is (AB)C = A(BC)?

c

Determine (AB)C.

Tobias owns two pizza stores, Paris Pizza and Penrith Pizza, at which he sells small pizzas for $5, medium-sized pizzas for $11 and large pizzas for $18. The table shows the number of pizzas sold at each store on a particular day: Small

Medium

Large

Paris Pizza

26

11

28

Penrith Pizza

19

24

35

a

Organise the prices into a column matrix, A, in increasing size order.

b

Organise the number of pizzas sold into a 2 × 3 matrix, B, as given in the table.

c

Calculate Tobias’ total revenue for each store using matrix multiplication.

Extend your thinking 18

Compare and contrast scalar multiplication with matrix multiplication in terms of what each involves, when each is possible, and the size of the resulting matrix.

19

Given the matrices: A=

,B=

Show that A (B + C) = AB + AC.

484

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

,C=


20

The transpose of a matrix A, denoted by AT, is formed by swapping the rows and columns of A. For example, if A =

, then AT =

.

The 2 × 2 matrices A, B, and C are given: 16 18 Determine the value of x, given BT AT = C. 21

A summing matrix is a row or column matrix where all the elements are 1. The purpose of a summing matrix, when used in matrix multiplication, is to calculate the sum of the elements in each row or each column of the other matrix. Construct a matrix multiplication to sum the numbers 5, 8, 3, 2, and 6.

22

Consider this matrix equation:

Identify the two linear equations that this matrix equation represents. Explain how the matrix format corresponds to individual linear equation. 23

Determine the values of a and b:

24

In transportation logistics, matrices can be used to model and analyse aspects such as speed, time, and distance for various routes. Suppose a company is analysing the transportation of goods between three routes (Route 1, Route 2, Route 3) using two vehicles (Vehicle 1, Vehicle 2) over two different days (Day 1, Day 2). The following matrices represent the speeds of vehicles (in kilometres per hour) and the time taken (in hours) for these routes. Let S be the speed matrix, where rows represent the two vehicles (Vehicle 1, Vehicle 2) and columns represent the three routes (Route 1, Route 2, Route 3): S= Let T be the time matrix, where rows represent the three routes (Route 1, Route 2, Route 3) and columns represent the two days (Day 1, Day 2): T= Calculate and interpret the distance matrix D, which represents the total distances covered by each vehicle across all three routes for the two different days. Provide a clear explanation of how the three dimensions (routes, vehicles, days) are handled in this calculation.

6.05 Matrix multiplication mathspace.co

485


6.06   Powers of matrices After this lesson, you will be able to… • calculate powers of matrices using technology. • interpret the meaning of matrix powers in context.

Powers of matrices Exploration Given the matrices:

1. Determine the size of matrices A and B. 2. Write the multiplication expression A × A. Is this multiplication possible? Explain why or why not. 3. Write the multiplication expression B × B. Is this multiplication possible? Explain why or why not. 4. Write the multiplication expression C × C. Is this multiplication possible? Explain why or why not. 5. Write the multiplication expression D × D. Is this multiplication possible? Explain why or why not. 6. Based on your observations, formulate a rule for when matrices can be multiplied by themselves (that is, when they can be raised to a power).

Only square matrices can be raised to a power. Recall that matrix multiplication is only possible if the number of columns in the first matrix is equal to the number of rows in the second matrix. Size of 1st matrix m×n

Size of 2nd matrix n×q

Must be equal

For matrix A, raising it to a power n involves multiplying the matrix by itself repeatedly, n times. • A2 = A × A • A3 = A × A × A • An = A × A × … × A (multiplying A by itself n times)

486

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Suppose A is a square matrix (m × m):

Suppose A is a non-square matrix (m × n):

A2 = A × A m×m

A2 = A × A m×m

m×n

The resulting matrix A2 is possible and have a size m × m.

m×n

The resulting matrix A2 is not possible, therefore cannot be multiplied.

The resulting matrix will have the same size as the original matrix. To calculate powers of matrices using technology, first input the matrix and define it with a name like A. Then type: A

^

n

where n is the power, just like finding the power of a number.

Example 1 Consider the matrix A =

:

a Which one of these describes the calculation A2? A

B

C

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

2

Use the fact that A = A × A.

Therefore, option A is correct.

b Calculate A2.

Create a strategy Use the fact that A2 =

from part (a).

Apply the idea

Reflect and check Write the equation

Perform matrix multiplication

This can be verified using technology, and would not be defined if A was not a square matrix.

Evaluate each element

6.06 Powers of matrices mathspace.co

487


Idea summary Only square matrices can be raised to a power. The resulting matrix will have the same size as the original matrix. For a matrix A, the matrix power An means that A is multiplied by itself n times.

Road networks In networks or systems involving movement or transitions between different points, powers of matrices are used to find multi-step routes. Adjacency matrix A matrix that represents the connections between points (or nodes) in a network, where each element indicates the number of direct, one-step paths between the corresponding points. When the matrix is raised to a power, the resulting matrix indicates the number of possible routes involving multiple steps. For example, squaring a matrix reveals the number of two-step paths between points. A two-step path uses exactly two connections between points or passes through one intermediate point along the route.

Example 2 The map shows four towns and the paths connecting them. Matrix A represents all the single-step connections between the towns: Ashland Walking track

Greenville

Kingston Dunham

488

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


a Determine A2, the matrix that represents all possible two-step paths between the towns.

Create a strategy Use technology to calculate A2.

Apply the idea

b How many two-step connections can be taken from Ashland to Dunham?

Create a strategy The entries in A2 represent the number of two-step connections between the towns. Look for the element in the row for the starting vertex and the column for the finishing vertex.

Apply the idea Identify the intersection of row A and column D. Kingston

Ashland

Greenville

Dunham

Kingston

6

1

7

2

Ashland

1

2

0

5

Greenville

7

0

10

0

Dunham

2

5

0

13

So, the number of two-step connections that can be taken from Ashland to Dunham is 5.

Reflect and check A two-step connection indicates how many ways of travelling from one town to another using exactly two paths or via one other town. In this scenario, there are five ways of travelling from Ashland to Dunham using exactly two paths. Three of these are via Greenville and two via Kingston.

Idea summary Adjacency matrices can be used to determine the number of connections between two vertices. or an adjacency matrix A, element aij is the number of direct, one-step paths from F i to j.

6.06 Powers of matrices mathspace.co

489


Communication networks Communication patterns of people and systems can also be analysed using matrix techniques. One-step communication matrix An adjacency matrix representing one-step communication links between individuals, with a 1 indicating a direct link and a 0 indicating no direct link. Typically the rows represent the sender and the columns represent the receiver. For example, the communication network shown relates to the one-step communication matrix: Alex

Charlie

Greg

Meg

Eliza

A direct link is referred to as a one-step communication. • For example, Alex can communicate directly with Greg. A two-step communication involves a third person. • For example, for Alex to send a message to Meg, he has to send it via Greg. Communication links are considered redundant if the sender and receiver are the same individual, as the exchange serves no productive purpose. • For example, Meg. The number of two-step communication links can be determined by squaring the original communication matrix. The two-step communication matrix for the network is shown:

Notice that the element in the row for Alex and column for Meg in M2 is 1, indicating one two-step connection via Greg.

490

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 3 This network represents the communication links between four colleagues, Peter (P ), Quinn (Q), Rachel (R), and Sarah (S).

P

S

Q

R

a Create the matrix, M, to represent the one-step communication links.

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Use this structure with a 1 to indicate direct one-step communication and 0 to indicate no communication.

Use the diagram to complete the communication matrix.

Receiver P Q R S M Sender

P Q R S

Receiver P Q R S P 0 0 1 1 Q 1 0 1 1 M Sender R 0 1 0 0 S 1 0 1 0

b Explain why the leading diagonal consists of zeros.

Create a strategy Looking at the matrix, consider what a number 1 would indicate in the leading diagonal.

Apply the idea The leading diagonal in the matrix represents instances where the sender and the receiver are the same individual. Since communication requires an exchange of information between different individuals, these self-connections are not considered communication or are redundant, and are therefore, represented by zeros.

6.06 Powers of matrices mathspace.co

491


c Determine the matrix M 2, which represents the two-step communication.

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

2

M indicates that the matrix has been multiplied by itself.

Using technology will give this two-step communication matrix M 2.

d Determine the number of redundant links in M 2.

Create a strategy Communication links are considered redundant if the sender and the receiver are the same individual.

Apply the idea

P Q M = Sender R S 2

Receiver PQRS 1 1 1 0 1 1 2 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1

There are four redundant links in M 2.

e How many ways can Quinn send a message to Rachel via a third person?

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Use the matrix from part (c) to identify the element in the row of Quinn and the column of Rachel.

The element = 2. Therefore, there are two ways that Quinn can send a message to Rachel via a third person. Based on the communication network, the two ways are: • Quinn - Sarah - Rachel • Quinn - Peter - Rachel

Idea summary A communication matrix is used to represent one-step communication links. A two-step communication involves a third person. The number of two-step communication links can be determined by squaring the original one-step communication matrix. Communication links are said to be redundant if the sender and the receiver are the same person.

492

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


6.06 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

2

3

Determine if each statement is true or false: 5 0 a The size of matrix P = 1 2 is 2 × 3. 3 6 b

If matrix A has size m × n and matrix B has size n × p, the product AB is defined.

c

If matrix C is 4 × 2 and matrix D is 4 × 2, the product CD is defined.

d

If matrix M is 2 × 3, the product M × M is defined.

e

If matrix N is 3 × 3, the product N × N is defined.

Identify whether these matrices can be raised to a power: a

A=

b

A=

c

A=

d

A=

Calculate each matrix product using technology: a

4

2 1 Given M = , calculate M × M. 0 3

b

1 0 2 Given N = 0 1 1 , calculate N × N. 2 0 1

This map shows connections between Joondalup, Perth, and Fremantle. a

Complete the matrix, M, to represent the one-step paths between the three locations, J for Joondalup, P for Perth and F for Fremantle. J P F 0 J 0 M= P F 0 3

b

Joondalup

Complete M2, which represents the two-step paths between the three locations.

M2 =

J P F

J

P F 2 6

2

3

Perth

Fremantle

3

6.06 Powers of matrices mathspace.co

493


Practice

5

Consider the matrix

.

Ex 1a

Determine whether these matrices are equal to the given matrix:

Ex 1b

6

7

8

a

b

c

d

Determine A2: a

A=

b

A=

c

A=

d

A=

Consider A =

.

a

Determine A2.

b

Use the fact that A3 = A × A2 to determine A3.

Determine whether these matrices can be cubed:

a

9

494

b

Determine the following powers: a

A=

c

A=

e

A=

, determine A2.

, determine A20.

, determine A18.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

b

A=

d

A=

f

A=

, determine A7.

, determine A3.

, determine A17.


Ex 2

10

The map network shows connections between four towns:

B

a

Create the matrix, M, to represent the one-step paths between the four towns. For the rows and columns, put the towns in alphabetical order.

b

Determine the matrix, M 2, which represents the two-step paths between the four towns.

A

D

C Ex 3

11

Five friends are participating in a puzzle event. As part of the rules of the event, each person can only send messages to two other people. Let matrix A represent the possible communication pathways:

A=

12

a

Explain why the leading diagonal consists of zeros.

b

Determine A2, the matrix that represents all messages that can be sent via another person.

c

How many ways can Darrel message Bill via one other person?

The road connections between the three towns on this map are represented in Matrix A. Carraway

Arwick

Bogville

13

a

Determine A2, which represents the two-step paths between the three locations.

b

How many two-step paths can be taken from Bogville to Carraway?

The map network shows the roads that connect three towns. a

Create a 3 × 3 matrix, A, to show the number of one-step paths from each town to another town. For the rows and columns, use the order of Millen, Nowin then Oneslay.

Oneslay

Millen

2

b

Determine A .

c

How many ways are there to go from Millen to Nowin with one stop in between? Nowin

6.06 Powers of matrices mathspace.co

495


14

A school’s email system only allows students to send messages to their friends. As a result: • Jo can only email Bob and Ky. • Wes can only email Ky. • Bob can only email Jo and Ky. • Ky can only email Bob, Wes and Jo.

15

a

Create a matrix, A, that shows the number of direct connections from each student to another student. For the rows and columns, use the order of students as Wes, Bob, Jo then Ky.

b

How many ways are there for Jo to email Ky through a third party?

c

Is there anyone who cannot email another person directly or via a third person?

Consider these matrices: • Matrix A is a 2 × 3 matrix. • Matrix B is a 3 × 2 matrix. • Matrix C is a 2 × 2 matrix. Explain whether the matrix expressions involving A, B, and C are possible and justify your answer. a e

16

(AB)2

b

A2 + C 2

c

(C)4

d

B2C

2

2 (BC)

A particular website is to be designed so that all content is available to a user within three clicks. The matrix A represents the direct links available between different parts of the website.

Use the matrix B = A + A2 + A3 to determine if every webpage can be reached within three clicks. Explain your answer. 17

18

496

A city’s road network is represented by the matrix R: a

Calculate R + R2.

b

Compute R + R2 + R3. Identify any new connections that were not already possible through R + R2.

c

Explain why calculating R + R2 + R3 + R4 would be redundant.

Let B =

:

a

Calculate B2.

b

Use your answer from part (a) to determine B4 given B4 = (B2)2.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Extend your thinking 19

For each matrix A: i

Determine A20, rounding each element to three decimal places.

ii

Determine A21, rounding each element to three decimal places.

iii

What seems to be happening to the matrix A as it is raised to larger powers?

a

A=

b

A=

for y.

20

Solve the matrix equation

21

Five soccer teams, A, B, C, D and E play a tournament where no draws are allowed (if necessary, games are decided by penalty shoot outs).

22

This matrix represents the direct connections between nodes in a communication network:

These are the results: • E defeated B • C defeated D • A defeated C Considering both one and two-step dominance, rank the teams from • E defeated D highest to lowest dominance. • B defeated D • E defeated A • E defeated C • A defeated B • A defeated D • B defeated C

Each 1 indicates a direct communication link between two nodes, and a 0 indicates no direct link. Explain how this communication network can be optimised by reducing the number of communication links while maintaining full connectivity with either a one-step or two-step connection.

6.06 Powers of matrices mathspace.co

497


6.07   Applications of matrices After this lesson, you will be able to… • model real-world situations using matrices. • apply matrices to practical problems. • interpret matrix solutions in context of the original problem.

Further applications of matrices Matrices organise and process multiple data points simultaneously, making them effective for solving practical problems. Follow these steps to model and solve problems using matrices: 1. Set up the matrix: Arrange the given information in a matrix, ensuring rows and columns are correctly placed so that the required operations are defined. 2. Apply the operation: Perform the required matrix calculation (add, subtract, multiply). For multiplication, check the dimensions allows for multiplication and that the operation is appropriate for the problem context. 3. Verify the result: Make sure the final answer is reasonable for the situation.

Example 1 The table shows the amounts a second-hand bookstore paid for old textbooks during the past academic year. Semester 1

Semester 2

Business

$940

$980

Law

$1020

$1170

Mathematics

$930

$1160

Science

$1180

$1040

Engineering

$1150

$970

a Construct a 5 × 2 cost matrix, C, from the information in the table.

Create a strategy For a 5 × 2 matrix, each row will represent a subject, and each column will represent a semester.

498

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

Apply the idea


b The bookstore sells the textbooks at a mark-up of 50%. Represent the revenue that will be generated from the sale of all the textbooks in a 5 × 2 revenue matrix, R.

Create a strategy Multiply the cost matrix by a scalar to calculate the revenue based on a 50% mark-up.

Apply the idea A mark-up of 50% means that textbooks will be sold at 150% of the cost price.

Multiply the cost matrix by 1.5

Multiply each element by 1.5 and evaluate

c Determine the profit matrix, P.

Create a strategy Subtract the cost matrix, C, from the revenue matrix, R.

Apply the idea

P

1410 1530 1395 1770 1725

1470 1755 1740 1560 1455

470 510 465 590 575

490 585 580 520 485

940 1020 930 1180 1150

980 1170 1160 1040 970

Subtract C from R

Subtract the corresponding elements

6.07 Applications of matrices mathspace.co

499


Example 2 A local bakery was selling three different products yesterday: sandwich, pork roll and bread roll. The table shows the price that each product was sold for and the amount sold: Price

Quantity sold

Sandwich

$6

22

Pork roll

$3

17

Bread roll

$7

21

a Organise the prices of each product into a row matrix, A.

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Maintain the same order as the table, arranging the prices of sandwich, pork roll, and bread roll from left to right.

A = [6

3

7]

b Organise the quantity sold of each product into a column matrix, B.

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Maintain the same order as the table, arranging the quantity sold of sandwich, pork roll, and bread roll from top to bottom.

The matrix as given in the table: B

22 17 21

c Calculate the bakery’s total revenue for the day.

Create a strategy Use the matrices A and B from part (a) and (b) and perform matrix multiplication.

Apply the idea AB

22 6 3 7 17 21 = [330]

Write the equation with the matrices Multiply the matrices using technology or by hand

The bakery’s total revenue for the day is $330.

Reflect and check Check the matrix multiplication by considering the sum of individual revenues: (6 × 22) + (3 × 17) + (7 × 21) = 132 + 51 + 147 = 330 This matches the matrix multiplication result.

500

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 3 Consider these scenarios in a company’s resource allocation: • The company has three projects (Project X, Project Y, and Project Z). Full-time (F), part-time (P), and contractor (C) employees are needed to complete the projects. The company uses matrices to represent the allocation of team members to these projects. • Matrix A represents the labour hours required for each employee type per project. Matrix B represents the total labour hours allocated to each project. Matrix E represents the number of hours an employee can provide for the projects. Given the matrices: • Required labour hours, Matrix A:

A

• Allocated labour hours, Matrix B :

F P C X 4 0 15 Y 2 5 5 Z 0 8 5

B

X Y Z

320 180 150

• Hours provided, Matrix E: E

F 24 P 16 C 14

Which project has the highest priority based on the resource allocation? Use mathematical reasoning to justify your answer.

Create a strategy Multiply matrix A by matrix E, then subtract the result from matrix B.

Apply the idea The result of multiplying matrix A, which represents required labour hours for each project, by matrix E, which represents the required labour hours for each employee type, will give a new matrix that shows the total number of labour hours required for each project. A E

4 0 15 2 5 5 0 8 5

24 16 14

306 198 198

Subtracting the product from matrix B will show the labour hours over or short of the requirement. B ( A E)

320 180 150

306 198 198

14 22 52

The project with the highest priority is Project X, which was given an extra 14 labour hours to ensure that it will be finished.

6.07 Applications of matrices mathspace.co

501


Idea summary To model and solve problems using matrices: 1. Represent the given information as a matrix, carefully considering how data is organised into rows and columns to suit the problem. 2. Apply the appropriate matrix operation. 3. Check that the final answer is reasonable based on the context.

6.07 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

A movie complex offers three ticket packages: a large group package, a family package, and a couples package. Each package includes: • Large group package: 6 movie tickets, 6 drinks and 3 large boxes of popcorn • Family package: 4 movie tickets, 4 drinks and 2 large boxes of popcorn • Couples package: 2 movie tickets, no drinks and 1 large box of popcorn

2

a

Represent this information in a 3 × 3 matrix, M.

b

On a Saturday night, the movie complex sells 50 large group packages, 80 family packages and 100 couples packages. Express the matrix that is needed to multiply M by in order to determine the total number of movie tickets, drinks, and popcorn needed for all these packages.

For the given matrices, write a matrix calculation that will determine the total amount of money spent at the fish and chip shop. Do not evaluate the expression. 12 • Matrix A = 5 , shows the price of fish, chips, and drinks at a local fish and chip shop. 2 • Matrix B = [23 31

3

33], shows the number of each that were ordered yesterday.

The matrix A represents the number of wins, draws, and losses for the top five AFL teams at the end of a season, as shown in the table. 16 14 A = 15 18 13

5 4 7 3 7

1 4 0 1 2

The winner is the team with the highest number of points at the end of the season. Wins are worth 4 points, draws are worth 2 points and losses are worth no points.

502

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


4

Wins

Draws

Losses

Richmond

16

5

1

West Coast

14

4

4

Collingwood

15

7

0

Melbourne

18

3

1

Sydney

13

7

2

a

If AB represents the total points for each team at the end of the season, what size is B?

b

Organise the number of points for a Win, Draw and Loss into a matrix, B.

Frank owns two pizza stores, Panania Pizza and Penrith Pizza, at which he sells small pizzas for $7, medium-sized pizzas for $15 and large pizzas for $28. The table shows the number of pizzas sold at each store on a particular day: Small

Medium

Large

Panania Pizza

21

25

12

Penrith Pizza

26

11

22

a

Organise the prices into the column matrix A, in ascending size order.

b

Organise the number of pizzas sold into the matrix B, as given in the table.

c

Interpret the matrix BA.

d

Interpret the result of this matrix product: [1 1]

e

Interpret the result of this matrix product:

21 25 12 26 11 22

21 25 12 26 11 22

1 1 1

Practice Ex 1

5

A clothing store sells their clothes at a mark-up of 45%. The table shows the amount they paid for the clothes in their summer and winter range: Summer

Winter

Baby

$500

$400

Girls

$540

$430

Boys

$450

$320

Women

$750

$690

Men

$760

$680

a

Organise the cost prices into a 5 × 2 cost matrix.

b

Calculate the sales prices for each category and organise them into a 5 × 2 revenue matrix.

c

Calculate the profits for each category and organise them into a 5 × 2 profit matrix.

d

How much profit will the clothing store generate in total?

6.07 Applications of matrices mathspace.co

503


6

A bakery has three varieties of sausage rolls; meat, spinach, and mushroom. The bakery has two stores, which are both owned by the same person. One of the bakeries is near the beach and the other is in the city. The sales are split into morning and afternoon, and these sales are shown in the matrices: Beach location:

7

City location:

Meat

Spinach

Mushroom

Morning

10

9

6

Afternoon

18

12

7

Meat

Spinach

Mushroom

Morning

22

16

20

Afternoon

38

32

29

a

Express the data from the beach location into matrix B, where the rows are the times of day, and the columns are the types of sausage roll.

b

Express the data from the city location into matrix C, where the rows are the times of day, and the columns are the types of sausage roll.

c

Calculate the matrix sum B + C. What do the elements in this matrix represent?

d

The profit on each sausage roll sold is $2.80. Use matrix B + C to calculate the total profits.

In an acrobatic gymnastics competition, each team’s routine is given a score out of 30, with a maximum of 10 points each awarded for its artistic component, execution component and difficulty component. Each team performs three routines, with the winner being the team with the highest points total at the end. These tables show each team’s scores for the artistic, execution and difficulty components respectively for each of their routines: Artistic scores

a

Execution scores

First routine

Second routine

Third routine

First routine

Second routine

Third routine

Team 1

8.3

7.9

7.4

Team 1

7.3

8.9

6.4

Team 2

9.2

8.4

8.0

Team 2

8.2

9.0

8.9

Team 3

7.8

7.5

6.8

Team 3

6.8

6.9

7.2

First routine

Second routine

Third routine

Team 1

8.4

7.8

8.1

Team 2

9.6

9.5

9.0

Team 3

7.2

7.6

8.0

Use matrix arithmetic to determine the total scores for each team’s routines, for example, their total for their first routines across the three components.

Express your answer as a 3 × 3 matrix of the form:

504

Difficulty scores

b

Show how to use matrix multiplication to determine each team’s total score. Express your answer as a 3 × 1 matrix.

c

Which team won the competition?

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Ex 2

8

In the last cricket season, the Sydney Sickies had 13 wins, 2 ties, 5 draws and 8 losses. The table shows the points system used in the competition: a

Organise the team’s results in each cricket match into a row matrix A. Order the elements from left to right as the number of wins, ties, draws and losses.

b

Organise the points system into a column matrix B. Order the elements from top to bottom as the points for each win, tie, draw and loss.

c

9

10

Points Win

6

Tie

3

Draw

2

Loss

0

Calculate the team’s total points for the season using matrix multiplication.

The table shows the gross income of a married couple, Robert and Sarah, for the last year. The government charges an income tax of 12% for people earning $35 000 or more a year and 9% for people earning less than $35 000 a year. Summer

Autumn

Winter

Spring

Robert

$9800

$8700

$8800

$8400

Sarah

$9900

$8600

$7800

$7200

a

What was Robert’s annual income before tax?

b

What was Sarah’s annual income before tax?

c

Determine Robert and Sarah’s tax rates and write them as decimals in a 1 × 2 matrix, A.

d

Organise Robert and Sarah’s incomes for each season into a 2 × 4 matrix, B, with the rows representing Robert then Sarah, and the columns representing the seasons.

e

Calculate the matrix AB.

f

How much tax did the couple have to pay for their earnings in winter and spring?

Alexia and her family are heading off to dinner to celebrate her 12th birthday. Coming along with her are her parents, her two younger brothers and three younger sisters, and two of her grandparents. They are deciding between catching the bus or the train. The table shows the various ticket prices for a return trip: Bus

Train

Child

$4.50

$4.80

Adult

$6.40

$7.80

Pensioner

$3.50

$3.90

a

Organise this data into a 3 × 2 matrix, A.

b

Create a 1 × 3 matrix, B, that represents how many of each type of ticket (Child, Adult, Pensioner) needs to be bought.

c

Determine BA. What do the elements in the resulting matrix represent?

d

Which mode of transport is the cheaper option?

6.07 Applications of matrices mathspace.co

505


11

In a particular diving competition, each dive is scored by summing the scores given by the three judges and then multiplying this sum by the degree of difficulty of the dive. The first three tables show the scorecards of the three judges. The fourth table shows the degree of difficulty of the dive for each diver. First judge’s scorecard

Second judge’s scorecard

Dive 1

Dive 2

Dive 3

Dive 1

Dive 2

Dive 3

Caitlin

9

6

5

Caitlin

8

5

4.5

Ursula

7

4

6.5

Ursula

9

5

7

Judy

10

8

7

Judy

9.5

7

5.5

Caitlin

Ursula

Judy

Third judge’s scorecard

12

Degree of difficulty

Dive 1

Dive 2

Dive 3

Caitlin

10

5.5

6

Dive 1

1.6

2.8

2.0

Ursula

8

4.5

6

Dive 2

2.3

2.2

1.8

Judy

8.5

7.5

6

Dive 3

3.0

1.9

2.5

a

Determine the matrix A, which represents the sum of each judge’s scores for each person’s dive.

b

Create a matrix, D, representing the degree of difficulty of each dive where each row represents a dive, and each column represents a diver.

c

Calculate AD.

d

Which elements of AD contain each diver’s final score for the competition? Explain your answer.

e

Which diver won the competition?

Jack and John are planning a fishing trip. Jack needs 2 sinkers, 3 packs of hooks and 4 jigs, while John needs 1 sinker, 4 packs of hooks and 2 jigs. They can purchase the items at two local shops for these prices: • Fish Tackle: $1.20 per sinker, $4.00 for a pack of hooks, and $2.20 per jig • Tackle Bite: $1.90 per sinker, $4.50 for a pack of hooks, and $0.90 per jig

506

a

Create a 3 × 2 matrix, W, to show the required items for Jack and John.

b

Create a 2 × 3 matrix, P, to show the prices for these items at the two stores.

c

To determine where Jack and John should shop, what matrix multiplication should be performed?

d

Perform this matrix multiplication.

e

At which store should they each shop? Explain your answer.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Ex 3

13

Consider these scenarios in a company’s resource allocation: • The company needs to work on four art designs (Design W, Design X, Design Y, and Design Z). Full-time (F), part-time (P), and contractor (C) employees are needed to complete the projects. The company uses matrices to represent the allocation of team members to these projects. • Matrix A represents how labour hours for each employee type are required for each design. Matrix B represents the number of labour hours (total hours of all employees) available per type of employee. Matrix E represents the number of hours an employee of each type can provide for the designs. Given the matrices: • Required labour hours, Matrix A: W A= X Y Z

F 2 1 3 1

P 6 4 2 2

• Allocated labour hours, Matrix B:

C 3 8 0 10

W X B= Y Z

280 430 220 450

• Hours provided, Matrix E: F 40 E = P 20 C 40

Which design has the highest priority based on the resource allocation? Use mathematical reasoning to justify your answer. 14

Daniel’s Dishes sells three different meal packages: Mega Meal, Hungry Meal, and Crazy Meal. The table shows the number of items bundled into each type of meal: Hamburgers

Onion rings

Chicken nuggets

Pizzas

Soft drinks

Mega Meal

5

5

10

4

4

Hungry Meal

2

8

5

3

3

Crazy Meal

1

9

12

0

0

Last weekend, the restaurant sold these meals: • Saturday: 20 Mega Meals, 17 Hungry Meals, and 16 Crazy Meals • Sunday: 22 Mega Meals, 21 Hungry Meals, and 25 Crazy Meals Based on last weekend’s demand, the manager believes he needs to order 430 hamburgers, 900 onion rings, 1150 chicken nuggets, 210 pizzas, and 350 soft drinks for the upcoming weekend. a

Use matrix multiplication to create a matrix which shows the total number of each meal item sold on the previous weekend. Justify your answer with a matrix product.

b

Compare the manager’s belief about the quantities needed for the upcoming weekend with the results from part (a). Evaluate whether the manager’s estimates are reasonable based on the data.

6.07 Applications of matrices mathspace.co

507


15

A company is reviewing three key expense categories: Training, Equipment and Marketing, across two departments, Research and Development. The budgeted amounts and the actual expenses for the year are represented in matrix B and C, respectively.

Use matrix arithmetic to determine which areas are over or under budget and by how much. 16

At a national basketball tournament, five teams play against each other over 12 matches. Wins are worth 3 points, ties are worth 1 point, and losses are not worth any points. At the end of the tournament, the team with the most points wins. The table shows the results for the last tournament: Team

Wins

Ties

Losses

Tiger Titans

7

2

3

Panther Power

6

4

2

Rhino Runners

4

5

3

Elephant Elites

2

2

8

Lion Legends

5

3

4

• The coach of the Tiger Titans believes his team has won the competition because they have won more games. • The coach of the Panther Power believes his team has won because they have fewer losses.

17

a

Calculate each team’s total points using matrix multiplication.

b

Determine which team actually wins the tournament according to the points system, and identify whether the Tiger Titans’ coach or the Panther Power’s coach was correct.

In transportation logistics, matrices can be used to model and analyse different aspects such as speed, time, and distance for various routes. Suppose a company is analysing the transportation of goods between three routes. These matrices represent the speeds of vehicles (in km/h) on different routes and the time taken (in hours) for these routes: Let S be the speed matrix:

Let T be the time matrix:

Show a matrix equation to determine the distances covered by each vehicle on each route for two different days.

508

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Extend your thinking 18

Four different models of LED televisions are sold through two outlets. The stock on hand and corresponding wholesale and retail prices for each model and outlet are shown: Model A

Model B

Model C

Model D

KC Hi Fi

4

3

0

3

Good Gals

7

4

1

2

Wholesale price

$90

$180

$300

$410

Retail price

$169

$298

$598

$749

Show the matrix calculations required to determine how much profit KC Hi Fi makes if all its LED TVs are sold, and calculate the profit. 19

A bakery sells three types of pastries: croissants, danishes, and muffins. It operates in two locations, Uptown and Downtown, with sales data recorded for both morning and afternoon shifts.

Uptown location:

Downtown location:

Croissants

Muffins

Danishes

Croissants Muffins

Danishes

Morning

15

10

8

Morning

18

11

12

Afternoon

20

14

12

Afternoon

22

14

16

If the bakery sells each croissant for $3, each muffin for $2.50, and each danish for $4, calculate the total revenue for both locations combined. 20

A unit row or column matrix is a matrix where all elements are 1, used to sum the elements of another matrix. For example:

A = [1

1

1]

The matrix H shows the scores of three friends over four games played against each other: G1

G2 G3 G4

Show how a unit matrix can be used to determine the average number of points scored by each player and determine the player with the highest average. 21

A permutation matrix is a square matrix with exactly one 1 in each row and column and zeros everywhere else. Investigate the effect of multiplying a given matrix by a permutation matrix.

6.07 Applications of matrices mathspace.co

509


6.08   Inverse matrices After this lesson, you will be able to… • determine when a matrix has an inverse using the determinant. • calculate the inverse of a 2 × 2 matrix by hand. • calculate the inverse of larger matrices by technology. • verify inverse relationships using matrix multiplication.

Inverse matrices Exploration 1. What number, when multiplied by any real number A, gives A as the result? 2. What number, when multiplied by a real number M, gives a result of 1? 3. For a natural number n, what number multiplied by n results in 1? 1 4. For a real number D, what value(s) make undefined? D

The inverse of a number is the value that, when multiplied by the original number, results in 1. For a 1 1 non-zero real number A, the multiplicative inverse satisfies A × = 1. A A 1 1 For example, 6 × = 1, so is the multiplicative inverse of 6 (and vice versa). 6 6 Recall that the identity matrix, I, is a square matrix with 1’s in the leading diagonal and 0’s in all other entries. It has the property that for any matrix A: AI = A = IA For a square matrix A, the multiplicative inverse matrix, denoted A– 1, is a matrix such that when A is multiplied by A– 1, the identity matrix I is obtained. Therefore, the multiplicative inverse property is expressed as: AA– 1 = I = A– 1A 1 , as the division of matrices is not defined; instead, the inverse A–1 is used to A achieve a similar effect to division for matrices. Note that A–1 ≠

Invertible matrix A square matrix, A, such that A

Determinant –1

exists.

A single number associated with the matrix A that determines if the matrix is invertible. Denoted as det ( A) or | A|. If A =

510

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

a b , then det (A) = ad – bc c d


For matrices 3 × 3 or larger, the determinant can be calculated using technology by typing det (A) for a defined matrix A. • If det (A) = 0, then A cannot be inverted, and does not have an inverse. • If det (A) ≠ 0, then A can be inverted. It has an inverse. A matrix with no inverse is called a singular matrix. For a 2 × 2 matrix A =

a b , the multiplicative inverse is defined as: c d A– 1 =

d 1 det (A) c

b a

1 From this definition, it follows that if det (A) = 0, the scalar multiple would be undefined because 0 is undefined. Therefore, a determinant of zero implies a singular matrix. To calculate the inverse of matrices using technology, first, input the matrix and define it with a name like A. Then type: A

^

–1

Example 1 For each matrix, calculate its determinant and state if the matrix has an inverse: a A=

1 2 3 4

Create a strategy For a square matrix

a b , calculate the determinant using the formula det = ad – bc. Then, c d

determine if the matrix has an inverse: a matrix has an inverse if its determinant is not zero. A matrix has no inverse if its determinant is zero.

Apply the idea det (A) = ad – bc

Write the determinant formula

= (1 × 4) – (2 × 3)

Substitute the values a = 1, b = 2, c = 3, d = 4

=4–6

Evaluate the multiplication

= –2

Evaluate

Since det (A) = – 2, which is not zero, the matrix has an inverse.

6.08 Inverse matrices mathspace.co

511


b B=

3 6

4 8

Apply the idea det (B) = ad – bc

Write the determinant formula

= (– 3 × – 8) – (4 × 6)

Substitute the values a = – 3, b = 4, c = 6, d = – 8

= 24 – 24

Evaluate the multiplication

=0

Evaluate

Since det (B) = 0, the matrix has no inverse.

2 0 c C= 3 1 1 1

3 2 8

Create a strategy For a 3 × 3 matrix, calculating the determinant manually can be complex, so use technology, a calculator or software, to compute the determinant. Then, determine if the matrix has an inverse: a matrix has an inverse if its determinant is not zero.

Apply the idea Using technology to calculate the determinant of C =

2 0 3 1 1 1

3 2, 8

det (C) = 0 Since det (C) = 0, the matrix has no inverse.

Reflect and check To verify, a 3 × 3 matrix with determinant 0 has linearly dependent rows or columns. Using cofactor expansion along the first row manually: det (C) 2

1 1

2 8

0

3 1

This confirms det (C) = 0, but technology simplifies this.

512

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

2 8

( 3 )

3 1 1 1


Example 2 8 2 . 1 9

Consider the matrix A =

a Calculate the determinant of A.

Create a strategy The determinant of a 2 × 2 matrix is the difference between the products of the diagonals.

Apply the idea det (A) = ad – bc

Write the equation

= – 8 × 9 – [2 × (– 1)]

Substitute a = –8, b = 2, c = –1, d = 9

= – 72 – (– 2)

Evaluate the multiplication

= – 70

Evaluate

This means matrix A is invertible. b Determine the inverse A– 1.

Create a strategy For matrix A =

a c

b 1 , the multiplicative inverse is defined as: A–1 = d det (A)

d c

b a

Apply the idea From part (a), it was determined that det (A) = –70. A–1 =

1 det (A)

d c

=

1 9 70 1

2 8

1 70 1 70

9 = 1

b a

Write the equation

Substitute the values 2 8

1 70 1 70

Multiply the matrix by the scalar

=

9 70 1 70

2 70 8 70

Evaluate

=

9 70 1 70

1 35 4 35

Simplify

1 70

6.08 Inverse matrices mathspace.co

513


Reflect and check To verify the inverse, multiply A × A– 1: 9 1 8 2 70 35 A × A–1 = 1 9 1 4 70 35

Substitute each matrix

8

9 70

2

1 70

8

1 35

2

4 35

1

9 70

9

1 70

1

1 35

9

4 35

72 70 9 70

2 70 9 70

8 35 1 35

8 35 36 35

Compute each element

Evaluate the multiplication

70 0 70 35 0 35

Evaluate the addition and subtraction

1 0

Simplify

0 1

This is the 2 × 2 identity matrix, confirming that A– 1 is correct, as the inverse satisfies A × A– 1 = I.

Idea summary The multiplicative inverse matrix of a square matrix A, denoted as A–1, is the matrix that results in the identity matrix I when multiplied, such that AA–1 = A–1A = I. A matrix that has an inverse is called an invertible matrix. The determinant, det (A), determines if a matrix is invertible. For a 2 × 2 matrix a b A= , the determinant is det (A) = ad – bc. c d • If det (A) ≠ 0, the matrix is invertible. • If det (A) = 0, the matrix is a singular matrix and has no inverse. The formula for the inverse of an invertible 2 × 2 matrix is: A 1

514

1 det (A)

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

d c

b a


6.08 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

For identity matrices: a

2

Let I be a matrix. For a compatible matrix A, complete the statement: AI = ⬚ = ⬚A

b

Identify the 2 × 2 identity matrix and calculate its determinant.

c

Identify the 3 × 3 identity matrix and determine its determinant.

Consider a 2 × 2 matrix M = a

3 4 . 5 6

Complete the formula for the inverse of this matrix: M⬚ =

b

3

6

1 3

4

3

Complete the statement to make it true: “If M⬚ exists, then det (M) = 3 × ⬚ – 4 × ⬚ ≠ ⬚.”

Let A =

4 1 , B 3 1

1 1 . 3 4

a

Determine AB.

b

Explain whether B is the multiplicative inverse of A or not.

Practice 4 Ex 1a, 1b

Ex 1c

5

For each matrix: i

Calculate the determinant.

ii

Identify if the matrix has an inverse.

a

1 2 2 3

b

10 1 0 3

c

2 1 0 0 3 1 1 1 2

For each matrix: i

Calculate the determinant.

ii

Identify if the matrix has an inverse.

a

1 2 3 0 4 5 1 0 6

b

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

d

1 0 0 4

0 0 2 2 1 0 0 3 1 0 0 1

6.08 Inverse matrices mathspace.co

515


6

Ex 2

7

8

Consider the matrices A

10

1 2 . 2 5

a

Calculate det (A) × det (B).

b

Calculate det (AB).

c

Compare your results for parts (a) and (b). What do you notice?

For each matrix, determine: i

The value of the determinant.

ii

The multiplicative inverse.

a

2 3 1 6

c

1 3

e

3 6

g

1 2 3 0 4 1 0 3 1

b

Verify that AA– 1 = A– 1 A = I.

c

det (– A)

Let A a

9

4 1 and B 3 2

2 0

b

4 5

0 2

f

5 2

4 3

0 4

h

2 3 1 2 0 1 1 4 5

1 2 . Calculate: 3 4 det (2 A)

a

det (A)

e

What do you notice about the expression (A– 1)– 1?

a

Consider the matrix A

b

an inverse. b

7 1

d

1 3 . 1 2

Determine A– 1.

Let A

1 2

Consider the matrix A have no inverse? 3 4

3 2

d

(A–1)–1

4 . Using only the determinant, determine whether A has 6

3 x where x is a real number. For which values of x does A x 2

2 1 1 n is . Solve for n. 5 4 3 1

11

The inverse of A

12

Let A and B be matrices and assume that A– 1 exists. Oliver claims that ABA– 1 = AA– 1B = B. Explain if Oliver is correct, or if not, provide an example that shows the statement is false. k 1

2

. Determine the value(s) of k for which A–1 exists and determine A–1.

13

Let A

516

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

2

k

2 3


14

Consider a 2 × 2 matrix

a b . c d

a

Write down the formula for the inverse of this matrix. What condition on a, b, c, and d must be satisfied for the inverse to exist?

b

Show that the formula in part (a) is correct by performing the necessary calculations.

15

If A is any 2 × 2 matrix and k is a constant, show that det (kA) = k2 × det (A).

16

A matrix is called self-inverse if A = A–1. Show that if A = A–1, then A2 = I.

Extend your thinking 17

18

19

Consider the matrix A

1 0

1 . 0

0 0 . 0 0

a

Determine a matrix, B, such that AB

b

Eliza claims that B is the multiplicative inverse of A. Is Eliza correct? Explain your answer.

Consider the matrix A

1 1 . 0 0

a

Determine, in terms of the natural number n, the matrix An.

b

Calculate det (An).

c

Determine the values of x such that A

x 3 3 is singular. 2 x 2

The transpose of a matrix A, denoted as AT, is formed by swapping the rows and columns of a b a c . A. For example, if A , then AT c d b d For a 2 × 2 square matrix A, prove that det (A) = det (AT).

20

Let A and B be 2 × 2 matrices and have inverses. Prove that (AB)– 1 = B– 1 × A– 1.

21

Let A be any 2 × 2 invertible matrix and k a non-zero scalar. Prove that ( kA)

22

Let A be any 2 × 2 invertible matrix. Prove that (A– 1)– 1 = A.

1

1 A 1. k

6.08 Inverse matrices mathspace.co

517


6.09   Simultaneous equations with matrices After this lesson, you will be able to… • represent systems of linear equations using matrices. • solve simultaneous equations using inverse matrices. • interpret matrix solutions in terms of the original equations.

Simultaneous equations with matrices It is possible to solve system of simultaneous equations using inverse matrices. Remember that simultaneous equations or a system of equations are two or more equations that, when solved simultaneously (at the same time), provide a solution that is true for each of the equations. Matrix equation

Variable matrix

An equation in which a variable represents a matrix. Solving such equations requires matrix operations.

A column matrix containing the variables in a system of simultaneous equations. Denoted by X in AX = B.

Example: AX = B

Example: For the system 2x – y = 3

Coefficient matrix

7x – 6y = 1

A matrix containing the coefficients of the variables in a system of simultaneous equations. Denoted by A in AX = B.

X

Example: For the system

Constant matrix

2x – y = 3

A column matrix containing the constants in a system of simultaneous equations. Denoted by B in AX = B.

7x – 6y = 1 A

2 7

x y

1 6

Example: For the system 2x – y = 3 7x – 6y = 1 B

The simultaneous equations ax + by = m cx + dy = n can be written as the matrix equation: a b c d

518

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

x y

m n

3 1


In general, a system of simultaneous equations can be written as:

AX = B A is the coefficient matrix X is the variable matrix B is the constant matrix To solve the matrix equation AX = B, the inverse of A, A–1, can be used: AX = B –1

A AX = A–1 B Pre-multiply both sides of the equation by A–1 IX = A–1 B since A–1 A = I X = A–1 B since IX = X Recall that a matrix is singular if its inverse does not exist. A system of equations will only have a unique solution if the coefficient matrix (A) is not singular. If the coefficient matrix has a determinant of 0, then there is no unique solution, so there are either infinite or no solutions to the problem. It is not necessary to know which at this point. The steps to solve simultaneous equations using matrices are: 1. Declare variables for the context, if necessary. 2. Write two or more equations based on the context, if necessary. 3. Rearrange each equation to the form ax + by = c, if necessary. 4. Set up the simultaneous equations as a matrix equation, AX = B. 5. Solve the matrix equation using the inverse, X = A–1 B. 6. State the solution to the simultaneous equation. Interpret in terms of the context if necessary. For three or more simultaneous equations, technology can be used to solve the matrix equation.

Example 1 Given the linear equations: 4x + 6y = 23 8x + 12y = 61 a Express the simultaneous equations in matrix form.

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Write the simultaneous equations in the matrix form AX = B where: • A is the coefficient matrix. • X is the variable matrix. • B is the constant matrix.

Given: 4 6 , X A 8 12

x , B y

23 61

The simultaneous equations in matrix form are expressed as: 4 6 x 8 12 y

23 61

6.09 Simultaneous equations with matrices mathspace.co

519


b Calculate the determinant of the coefficient matrix.

Create a strategy If A

a b , then det (A) = ad – bc. c d

Apply the idea det (A) = ad – bc = (4 × 12) – (8 × 6)

Write the formula for determinant Substitute a = 4, b = 6, c = 8, d = 12

= 48 – 48

Evaluate the multiplication

=0

Evaluate

Reflect and check y 90 80 70 8x + 12y = 61 60 50 40 4x + 6y = 23 30 20 10 x −8 −6 −4 −2 2 4 6 8

Since the graphs of the two lines are parallel and do not intersect, this verifies that the inverse of the coefficient matrix would not exist as there is no solution to these simultaneous equations.

c Which statement is true based on the value of the determinant? A The coefficient matrix does not have an inverse and there are multiple solutions for the simultaneous equations. B The coefficient matrix has an inverse and there are multiple solutions for the simultaneous equations. C The coefficient matrix has an inverse and there are no solutions for the simultaneous equations. D The coefficient matrix does not have an inverse and there is no solution for the simultaneous equations.

Create a strategy Use the result found from part (b).

Apply the idea 1 is undefined. det (A) Since the determinant found from part (b) is equal to 0, this means the coefficient matrix does not have an inverse and there is no solution to the simultaneous equations. So, the correct answer is option D. By the definition of the inverse of a matrix, if det (A) = 0, then

520

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 2 At a school canteen, students can order the Healthy snack which contains 4 pieces of fruit and 2 savoury snacks, or they can order the Yummy snack which contains 1 piece of fruit and 3 savoury snacks. On a given day, the canteen used 260 pieces of fruit and 140 savoury snacks. a Construct equations for the total amount of fruit used and the total amount of savoury snacks used.

Create a strategy Define variables for the number of each type of snack and set up an equation based on the total fruit content per type of snack and for the savoury snacks.

Apply the idea Let h represent the number of Healthy snacks and y represent the number of Yummy snacks. Each Healthy snack contains 4 pieces of fruit, and each Yummy snack contains 1 piece of fruit. So the equation for the total amount of fruit used is: 4h + y = 260 For the total savoury snacks used, note that each Healthy snack contains 2 savoury snacks and each Yummy snack contains 3 savoury snacks. So the equation is: 2h + 3y = 140

b Express the simultaneous equations in matrix form.

Apply the idea Given: A

4 1 , X 2 3

h , B y

260 140

The simultaneous equations in matrix form are expressed as: 4 1 h 2 3 y

260 140

6.09 Simultaneous equations with matrices mathspace.co

521


c Use technology and matrix inverse methods to determine the number of Healthy snacks and Yummy snacks made that day.

Create a strategy Use matrix algebra to find the inverse of the coefficient matrix and multiply it by the constant matrix to solve for h and y.

Apply the idea Calculate the inverse of the coefficient matrix, which exists if the determinant is non-zero: Determinant = (4 × 3) – (1 × 2) = 10 Since the determinant is not zero, the inverse exists and is given by: A 1

3 2

1 10

1 4

Multiply the inverse matrix by the constant matrix to find X: h y

1 10

3 2

1 4

260 140

64 4

So, 64 Healthy snacks and 4 Yummy snacks were made that day.

Idea summary A system of simultaneous linear equations can be written as the matrix equation:

AX = B A is the coefficient matrix X is the variable matrix B is the constant matrix The variable matrix can be determined by pre-multiplying both sides of the matrix equation with the inverse of the coefficient matrix.

X = A–1 B A–1 is the inverse of the coefficient matrix

522

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


6.09 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

2

3

Determine the matrix that satisfies the each equation: a

6 1 5 9

c

3 2 8 6 7 3 4 3 8

6 1 5 9

1 9 9 2

1 0 0 1

d

2 5 1 3 2 7 7 5 3

1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1

Let A, B and C be matrices. Using matrix algebra, solve for matrix B in these equations: a

AB = C

b

BA = C

d

BA – C = 0

e

AB + CB = D

Let A

9 2 9

a 4

3 2 8 6 7 3 4 3 8

b

5 2 and B 9 4

2 7 4

c

AB + C = 0

1 1 . 3

Determine A– 1.

b

Determine X, if AX = B.

Determine the matrix X for the given matrices and equations, expressing elements as fractions when needed: a

P

13 3 , PX = P 7 11

c

M

10 9

e

A

10 3 and P 8 4

1 and N 4

7 5

6 , MX = N 9

5 , AX = P 6

b

N

2 1

9 and I 4

d

M

16 16

10 and N 2

f

A

5 7

8 5 6 2

1 0 , XN = I 0 1

7 8 and B 7

6 18

12 , MX = N 3 10 1 , AX = B 8

Practice 5

These matrix equations represent systems of linear equations: i

Write the system of two linear equations represented by the matrix equation.

ii

Solve the system of equations using an algebraic method.

a

x x

y y

5 7

b

x y 4x y

5 4

6.09 Simultaneous equations with matrices mathspace.co

523


6

Given the systems of equations: i

Express the system of equations in matrix form.

ii

Calculate the determinant of the coefficient matrix.

iii

Solve the system of equations using matrices, rounded to one decimal place when needed.

a

x + 3y = 23

d

b

7

c

12x + 16y = 32

4x + 5y = 101  3x + 28y = 20

3x + 4y = 24.9

5x + y = 13.33

e

6x + 7y = 45.9 Ex 1

4x + y = 49

4x + 2y = 32

f

x + y = 1

2x + 4y = 9.4

x + 3y = 5

Given the system of simultaneous linear equations:   4x + 6y = 23 8x + 12y = 61

8

a

Express the system of equations in matrix form.

b

Calculate the determinant of the coefficient matrix.

c

Explain what the value of the determinant indicates.

For each of these systems of equations: i

Express the system of equations in matrix form.

ii

Calculate the determinant of the coefficient matrix.

iii

Sketch the lines described by the two equations on the same axes.

iv

Comment on the number of solutions to the system of equations.

a

9

x y –2x + 3y = 2 b 4 –8x + 12y = 8 x 2y 2

Given the simultaneous equations: 3y = –6x + 42 4y = –2x + 2

10

524

a

Express the system of equations in matrix form.

b

Calculate the determinant of the coefficient matrix.

c

Solve the simultaneous equations using matrices.

Consider the lines 4x + 2y = 8 and 5x + 5y = 25: a

Express the system of equations in matrix form.

b

If A is the coefficient matrix in part (a), determine A– 1.

c

Solve the system of equations using matrices.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

2 0


11

Given this system of simultaneous linear equations: 2x + 4y + 5z = 45   5x + y + z = 37 x + 3y + 6z = 42

12

Ex 2

13

a

Express the system of equations in matrix form.

b

Solve the system of equations using matrix inverse methods and technology.

x and y are two numbers, where x > y. The sum of the numbers is 53, and the difference is 11. a

Write two equations that describe the relationship between x and y in the form ax + by = c.

b

Express the system of equations in matrix form.

c

Calculate the determinant of the coefficient matrix.

d

Solve the system of equations using matrices.

At a local café, customers can order the Nutritious meal which consists of 5 pieces of vegetables and 3 wholesome grains, or they can opt for the Tasty meal that features 2 pieces of vegetables and 4 wholesome grains. On a specific day, the café used 310 pieces of vegetables and 270 wholesome grains. a

14

15

Let x represent the number of Nutritious meals and y represent the number of Tasty meals. i

Construct an equation for the total amount of vegetables used.

ii

Construct an equation for the total wholesome grains used.

b

Express the system of equations in matrix form.

c

Use technology and matrix inverse methods to determine the number of Nutritious meals and Tasty meals prepared that day.

A company determines that they spend a total of 63 hours per week on various forms of advertising media. The amount of time spent on print media is 3 hours more than social and video media combined. 2 hours more is spent on video media than social media. a

Let s, v and p represent the hours spent on social, video and print media, respectively. Construct a set of linear equations to represent this information.

b

Express the system of equations in matrix form.

c

Use technology and matrix inverse methods to determine the number of hours each week spent on the three forms of advertising.

The angles in a triangle are such that the larger angle, z, is double the smaller angle, x. The third angle, y, is 30° less than the larger angle, z. a

Construct a system of three linear equations to represent this information.

b

Express the system of equations in matrix form.

c

Use technology and matrix inverse methods to determine the angles of the triangle.

6.09 Simultaneous equations with matrices mathspace.co

525


16

An investment fund offers two types of investments, the Blue Chip and the Strong Growth. The Blue Chip requires the purchase of 250 mining company shares and 80 speculative shares. The Strong Growth requires the purchase of 150 mining company shares and 600 speculative shares. The cost of investment in the Blue Chip is $13 170 and the cost of investment in the Strong Growth is $21 150. a

Let m represent the cost of mining company shares and s represent the cost of speculative shares. i

Construct an equation for the total cost of the Blue Chip investment.

ii

Construct an equation for the total cost of the Strong Growth investment.

b

Express the system of equations in matrix form.

c

Use technology and matrix inverse methods to determine the cost of the mining company shares and the cost of the speculative shares.

Extend your thinking 17

18

526

For each matrix equation: i

Write a matrix expression that could be used to solve for X.

ii

Determine the matrix X, expressing elements as fractions when needed.

a

M

1 5

5 and N 6

7 8 , XM = N 9 1

b

M

6 6

10 and P 4

4

c

M

3 3

5 ,N 0

5 0

2 and P 2

6 10

d

M

3

1 ,N 5

2 3

3 and P 5

6 10 , M–1 NX = P 5 5

4

6

10 , XP = M 1 10 , MNX = P 9

A farmer has two paddocks, one with area x m2, and another with area y m2. The total area x 2y 2 of both paddocks is 2600 m2. The farmer has planted m2 and m in corn and this adds 2 3 2 up to 1600 m of corn. a

Write two equations in terms of x and y in the form ax + by = c.

b

Express the system of equations in matrix form.

c

Calculate the determinant of the coefficient matrix.

d

Solve the system of equations using matrices.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


19

20

A quadratic function in the form y = ax2 + bx + c contains the points A ( – 1, 5), B (0, 10), and C (4, –10). a

Substitute the given points into y = ax2 + bx + c to form three equations in terms of a, b, and c.

b

Express the system of equations in matrix form.

c

Use technology and matrix inverse methods to determine the values of the coefficients a, b, and c.

A study determined that for the city of Fairview there is a relationship between the following three variables: • The annual window tinting revenue R (in thousands of dollars) • The number of cars registered C (in millions) • The annual amount spent on car insurance I (in thousands of dollars) The relationship found in the study is given by: R = a + bC + cI where a, b and c are constants. The given table shows the figures for the three variables in 2017, 2018 and 2019.

21

R

C

I

2017

10 150

113.5

890

2018

15 432

142

1210

2019

22 450

162.7

1494

a

Use the relationship found in the study to construct a system of three linear equations to represent the information given in the table.

b

Express the system of equations in matrix form.

c

Use technology and matrix inverse methods to determine the values of the coefficients a, b, and c. Round each coefficient to two decimal places.

Three different smart phone models, the Galactic 6S, 6V and 6P are produced at three different factories. The table given represents the number produced in each factory in November 2019. The total costs for factory A, B and C are $136 400, $137 200, and $186 600, respectively.

Factory A

6S

6V

6P

1000

1200

800

Factory B

800

900

1000

Factory C

1200

1500

1200

Use technology and matrix inverse methods to determine the cost of making each model.

Investigation: Is there always a solution?

Investigate online

mathspace.co

6.09 Simultaneous equations with matrices mathspace.co

527


6.10   Transition matrices After this lesson, you will be able to… • construct initial state and transition matrices for real-world contexts. • calculate and interpret successive powers of transition matrices. • predict long-term trends using transition matrices.

Transition matrices Exploration This week, 150 people bought Pad Thai and 50 people bought Mee Goreng. Research shows that each week, 20% of people who bought Pad Thai buy Mee Goreng the next week, while 30% of people who bought Mee Goreng change their purchase to Pad Thai. 1. How many of the 150 people stick with Pad Thai? 2. How many of the 50 people change to Pad Thai? 3. How many people buy Pad Thai the second week? 4. How many people buy Mee Goreng the second week? 5. Evaluate this matrix product. What do you notice about the result? From PT MG To

PT 0.8 0.3 MG 0.2 0.7

150 50

Suppose in a certain region on any given day, the chance of the weather changing depends only on what the weather was doing on the previous day. To keep things simple, suppose the weather has two states — either wet or dry. This is an example of a context that can be represented with transition matrices. Transition matrix

Initial state matrix

A square matrix that shows the probabilities of transitioning from one state to another in a single step.

A column matrix that shows the initial conditions, called S0.

State matrix A column matrix that shows the current conditions of a situation, called Sn.

528

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


The probability of being dry on any day depends only on the previous day’s weather. Specifically, assume that the probability of being dry on any day n + 1, given it was dry on day n, is 0.3. Using standard conditional probability notation, this can be written as • “Dry today given dry yesterday”: Pr (Dn + 1|Dn) = 0.3 • Since dry is the complement of wet, this means “wet today given dry yesterday”: Pr (Wn + 1|Dn) = 0.7 Furthermore, assume that the probability of being wet on any day n + 1, given it was wet on day n, is 0.6, which can be written as: • “Wet today given wet yesterday”: Pr (Wn + 1|Wn) = 0.6 • So, “dry today given wet yesterday”: Pr (Dn + 1|Wn) = 0.4 The situation is illustrated in what is known as a state diagram.

0.3

This is the corresponding transition matrix:

D

From D W

0.7 0.4 0.6

W

To D 0.3 0.4 W 0.7 0.6

The order in which the conditional probabilities are placed matters. The conventions are: • The complementary probabilities are written in columns, so columns add to 1. • The diagonal represents the probability of remaining in the same state. • The columns are considered “From” (n) and the rows are considered “To” (n + 1). • The transition matrix must be a square matrix. Verify the meaning of the matrix entries with this table: Given it is dry today…

Given it is wet today…

Probability of being dry tomorrow?

0.3

0.4

Probability of being wet tomorrow?

0.7

0.6

Transition matrices allow for finding the probabilities of future states. Suppose the process begins with a wet day. Since the order of the columns is dry, then wet. A wet 0 day can be written as a state matrix S0 , because there is a 100% = 1 probability of a wet day. 1

6.10 Transition matrices mathspace.co

529


To determine probabilities for the next state S1, multiply T by S0 using matrix multiplication as follows: T S0

0.3 0.4 0.7 0.6

0 1

0.4 0.6

This indicates a 40% chance of a dry day and a 60% chance of a wet day the next day. This second 0.4 . state is denoted as S1 0.6 What about the state after this? S2 can be found by reapplying T to S1, so that: S2

TS1

0.3 0.4 0.7 0.6

0.4 0.6

0.36 0.64

This means that the second day has a 36% chance of being dry and 64% chance of being wet, based on the previous day’s 40% chance of being dry and 60% chance of being wet. Observe the recursive pattern in the state transitions: Recall that S1 = T S0 and that S2 = T S1. This means S2 = T (S1) = T (TS0) = T2 S0. The pattern continues with S3 = T (S2) = T (T2 S0) = T3 S0. This pattern can be generalised to:

Sn = T nS0 Sn is the state matrix after n transitions T is the transition matrix S0 is the initial state matrix

Example 1 Digital only example

Explore in the online lesson

mathspace.co

Example 2 A website uploads two blog posts each day, one about social issues (S) and the other about environmental concerns (E). a Of the people who read a blog every day, 52% of those that read about social issues on one day will read about social issues the next day. Also, 83% of those that read about environmental concerns will also read about environmental concerns the next day. Which of these diagrams best represents this information?

530

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


A 48% 52% S

B

48% 83% S

E

E 52%

83% 17%

17%

C 17% 52% S

D

17% 83% S

E

E 52%

83% 48%

48%

Create a strategy Consider the direction of each arrow and the transition probabilities of each state to choose the best diagram that represents the given information.

Apply the idea If 52% of those that read blog S will read S the next day, then 100% – 52% = 48% of those that read S must read E the next day. Similarly, if 83% of those that read blog E will read E the next day, then the remaining 100% – 83% = 17% of those that read E will read S the next day. The diagram that represents these transition probabilities between each state is given by: 48% 52% S

E 83% 17%

So, option A is the diagram that represents the given information.

b Construct the transition matrix T that represents the transitional probabilities between each state.

Apply the idea Using the state diagram, the transition matrix representing the probabilities of moving between states E and S is: E T

S

0.83 0.48 E 0.17 0.52 S

6.10 Transition matrices mathspace.co

531


c On a certain day, the website records that 800 people read blog (S) while 550 people read (E). Use this information to predict the number of readers that will read blog (E) in 3 days’ time. Round your answer to the nearest whole number.

Create a strategy Use the formula on future state given by Sn = Tn × S0, where: • Sn is a column matrix whose entries are the number of people that read blog E and S, respectively, in n days’ time. • Tn is the transition matrix to the nth power. • S0 is a column matrix whose entries are the number of people that read blog E and S on this certain day. Use technology to solve for future state.

Apply the idea To predict the number of readers that will read blog (E) in 3 days’ time, means that n = 3. Sn = Tn × S0

Write the formula for future state 3

S3 =

0 83 0 48 0.17 0.52

S3 =

977.761 25 E 372.238 75 S

550 Substitute n = 3, transition matrices and 800 initial state matrices Evaluate

So, the predicted number of readers that will read an environmental concerns blog (E) in 3 days’ time is 978.

Idea summary A transition matrix (T ) uses conditional probability to show the likelihood of moving from one state to another. These transitions can be visualised with a state diagram. To find the state after n transitions, use the formula:

Sn = T nS0 Sn is the state matrix after n transitions T is the transition matrix S0 is the initial state matrix

532

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Steady state matrices Provided T is a regular transition matrix, it can be proven that as n becomes larger and larger, Sn = TnS0 converges to what is referred to as a steady state. Steady state A state, Sn, where for a transition matrix T, Sn = TSn, so for any additional transitions, the steady state does not change. Technology, such as CAS calculators, can be used to calculate Sn for large values of n. In particular, if Sn = Sn + 1, then that is the steady state.

Example 3 Consider the transition matrix T: T

0.758 0.153 0.242 0.847

a Investigate whether the system approaches a steady state by examining powers of T. Start by using technology to determine T50, giving each element rounded to four decimal places:

Apply the idea T 50

0.3873 0.3873 0.6127 0.6127

b Now use technology to determine T51, again giving each element rounded to four decimal places:

Apply the idea T 51

0.3873 0.3873 0.6127 0.6127

c Has a steady state been reached?

Create a strategy Compare the results found on parts (a) and (b).

Apply the idea Comparing the result between parts (a) and (b), T50 and T51 are the same matrix. This is because as n gets larger, it will converge to its steady state. So, a steady state has been reached

6.10 Transition matrices mathspace.co

533


Example 4 Three grocery stores A, B and C each have an initial customer base of 400 people. Every week, however, each store finds that they lose a certain percentage of their base to other stores. The percentage of people moving from one store to another (or staying loyal to a store) are summarised in this state diagram: 60%

20%

A 30%

10% 15% 15%

50% B 30%

C 70% a Construct the initial state and transition matrix.

Create a strategy Use the starting number of customers at each store to construct the initial state matrix.

Apply the idea If 60% of people who use store A in any one week stay with store A the following week. However, 10% shift to store B and 30% shift to store C. The same idea applies to the other stores. The transition matrix can be written down as T S0

400 400 . 400

0.60 0.20 0.15 0.10 0.50 0.15 and the initial state matrix as 0.30 0.30 0.70

b Calculate the state matrix for week 3.

Create a strategy Use the formula for the future state given by Sn = Tn × S0, where: • Sn is a column matrix whose entries are the number of customers at stores A, B, and C after n weeks. • Tn is the transition matrix raised to the nth power. • S0 is a column matrix whose entries are the initial number of customers at stores A, B, and C. Use technology to compute the future state.

534

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Apply the idea Using the transition matrix and the initial state matrix, the future state for week 3, n = 3, is: Sn = Tn × S0 0.60 0.20 0.15 = 0.10 0.50 0.15 0.30 0.30 0.70

Write the formula for future state 3

400 400 Substitute n = 3 and the transition and initial state matrices 400

0.349 0.285 0.261 = 0.183 0.247 0.207 0.468 0.468 0.532

400 400 400

358 = 254.8 587.2

Evaluate T3

Evaluate

c Calculate the state matrix for week 6.

Create a strategy Use the formula for the future state given by Sn = Tn × S0, where: • Sn is a column matrix whose entries are the number of customers at stores A, B, and C after n weeks. • Tn is the transition matrix raised to the nth power. • S0 is a column matrix whose entries are the initial number of customers at stores A, B, and C. Use technology to compute the future state.

Apply the idea Here is the state matrix determined for week 6: Sn = Tn × S0 0.60 0.20 0.15 S6 = 0.10 0.50 0.15 0.30 0.30 0.70 =

350.819 250 599.181

Write the formula for future state 6

400 400 400

Substitute n = 6, transition matrices and initial state matrices Evaluate

Reflect and check Comparing the state matrices for week 3 and week 6, notice that there is some evidence of convergence between the weeks.

6.10 Transition matrices mathspace.co

535


d Determine whether a steady state has been reached by week 20.

Create a strategy Use the formula on future state given by Sn = Tn × S0. Use technology to calculate S20 and S21.

Apply the idea Sn = Tn × S0 0.60 0.20 0.15 S20 = 0.10 0.50 0.15 0.30 0.30 0 70

Write the formula for future state 20

400 400 400

350 = 250 600

Substitute n = 20, transition matrices and initial state matrices

Evaluate

Evaluating week 21 to confirm steady state: 0 60 0 20 0 15 S21 = 0.10 0.50 0.15 0.30 0.30 0.70

21

400 400 400

350 = 250 600

Substitute n = 21, transition matrices and initial state matrices

Evaluate

Since S20 = S21, this indicates that a steady state has reached. In other words, week 21 shows the same matrix as week 20, so the numbers 350, 250 and 600 represent the long term customer base for each of stores A, B and C, respectively.

Idea summary As n becomes larger and larger, Sn = Tn S0 converges to a steady state. A system is said to be in a steady state when its state no longer changes after further applications of a transformation, so Sn = Sn + 1.

536

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


6.10 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

a 2

A2

b

A3

a

0.8 0.6 , B 0.2 0.4

A4

b

0.83 0.57 , C 0.17 0.43

0.1 0.3 0.6 0.6 0.1 0.3 0.3 0.6 0.1

B6

C40

c

The chance of the weather being rainy (R) or fine (F) tomorrow, given it was rainy or fine today, is displayed in the table below. Construct an appropriate transition matrix for this information.

4

A4

c

Calculate the powers for matrices A, B and C. Round the matrix elements to four decimal places. A

3

5 7 : 8 6

Calculate these matrix powers for A

Today (R)

Today (F )

Tomorrow (R)

0.8

0.25

Tomorrow (F )

0.2

0.75

Match the state diagrams to their corresponding transition matrix, T: 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.3 0.3 0.6 0.3 0.3 0.4 i T = 0.4 0.3 0 ii T = 0.3 0.3 0 iii T = 0.3 0.3 0 0.3 0.3 0.6 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.6 a

30% 30% B A 30%

B

A

40%

30% 40%

40%

30% 40%

C

C

60%

40% c

30% 30%

30%

60%

40%

b

40% 30% B

A 40% 30%

40%

30% 30%

C 60%

6.10 Transition matrices mathspace.co

537


Practice 5

Construct the transition matrix T for each state diagram:

a 0.26

Ex 1

b

0.74

31% 69% M

B

A

N 42%

0.82 0.18

c

58%

10% 30% X

Y 30%

40%

60%

50% 40%

Z 40%

6

Each summer, the families of children in a school either stay at home (H) or go away on vacation (V). The activities for the holidays change according to the transition matrix: Current year H V 0.4 H 0.5 Following year 0.6 V 0.5

7

a

If 100 families stay at home in 2024, how many of these 100 families are expected to stay at home in 2025?

b

How many of these 100 families are expected to go on vacation in 2025?

c

How many of the families who stay home in 2025 are expected to stay at home in 2026?

A factory has 3 warehouses A, B and C. Forklift trucks are used to transport goods between the 3 warehouses. They start the day in one warehouse and end the day at the same or a different warehouse. The matrix, T, represents the transition matrix for this situation: a b

538

Calculate the percentage of forklift trucks which start the day at factory A and end the day at factory A. There were 50 forklift trucks that started the day at factory B. Determine the number of forklift trucks expected to be parked at factory C at the end of the day. Round your answer to the nearest whole number.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

T

0.45 0.51 0.59 0.14 0.2 0.17 0.41 0.29 0.24


Ex 2

8

A website uploads two blog posts each day, one about social issues (S) and the other about environmental concerns (E). Of the people who read a blog every day, 87% of those that read about social issues on one day will read about social issues the next day. Also, 75% of those that read about environmental concerns will also read about environmental concerns the next day. This state diagram represents this information.

9

10

11

a

Construct the transition matrix T that represents the transitional probabilities between each state.

b

On a certain day, the website records that 600 people read blog (E) while 650 people read (S). Use this information to predict the number of readers that will read blog (E) in 3 days’ time. Round your answer to the nearest whole number.

13% 87% S

E 75% 25%

Students at an after school care program have two choices of activities to do in their free time, read a book (B) or play with an abacus (A). It was found that 25% of children who read books one afternoon will play with the abacus the next afternoon, and 30% of children who play with the abacus one afternoon will read books the next afternoon. a

Construct the transition matrix for the situation.

b

If in one afternoon, 20 students play with the abacus and another 30 students read a book, how many will be expected to play with the abacus the next afternoon? Round your answer to the nearest whole number.

c

Explain why this model is unrealistic.

Irene (I) and Larry (L) are playing chess. They each have an equal chance of winning the first game. If Irene wins, then she gains confidence and her chance of winning the next game becomes 70%. If Larry wins, his chance of winning the next game is 60%. a

Construct the initial probability matrix P0 for the situation.

b

Construct the transition matrix T representing the probability of winning the next game, based on who won the previous game.

c

Calculate P1, the probability matrix after one game has been played.

d

Calculate the probability that Larry wins the second game.

e

Determine P5, the probability matrix after five games have been played. Round elements to three decimal places when needed.

In the year 2024, there were 220 000 people living in Town A and 60 000 people in Town B. Each year, 5% of the people in Town A move to Town B, and 23% of the people in Town B move to Town A. a

Construct the initial population matrix P0.

b

Construct the transition matrix T that represents the shift in population.

c

Determine the prediction of the population in each town in 2025.

d

Determine the prediction of the population in each town in 2028.

e

Explain why this model is unrealistic.

6.10 Transition matrices mathspace.co

539


Ex 3

12

13

Ex 4

14

For transition matrix T: a

Calculate T50, rounding each element to four decimal places.

b

Calculate T51, rounding each element to four decimal places.

c

Determine whether a steady state has been reached.

T

0.871 0.415 0.129 0.585

T

0.07 0.03 0.95 0.04 0.20 0 0.88 0.77 0.05

For the transition matrix T: a

Calculate T20, rounding each element to four decimal places.

b

Calculate T21, rounding each element to four decimal places.

c

Determine whether a steady state has been reached.

In a town with three supermarkets, the information was gathered from a survey. The survey was conducted in October 2018. Assume that those customers that did not shop at a different store the following month, continued to shop at the same store. • 42% of Store 1 customers will shop at Store 2 the following month. • 45% of Store 1 customers will shop at Store 3 the following month. • 39% of Store 2 customers will shop at Store 1 the following month. • 45% of Store 2 customers will shop at Store 3 the following month. • 39% of Store 3 customers will shop at Store 1 the following month. • 6% of Store 3 customers will shop at Store 2 the following month. a

Construct a transition matrix for the given information.

b

The market share at the time of the survey showed that 1200 customers shopped at Store 1, 800 customers shopped at Store 2 and 1000 customers shopped at Store 3. Construct the initial state matrix.

c

Determine the state matrix for March 2019. Round your answers to the nearest whole number.

d

Determine whether a steady state has been reached by the 60th month.

Extend your thinking 15

540

Each year two stores, Supplies R Us (S) and The General (G), compete for business during the holiday period. They used surveys as a way of identifying how successful their marketing campaigns are. The surveys showed that 75% of customers will return to Supplies R Us if they purchased goods there in the previous year, and 70% of The General’s customers will return to them year to year. a

If both stores have 600 customers initially, determine S2, the matrix containing the expected number of customers that return to each store after two years.

b

Determine S7, the matrix containing the expected number of customers that return to each store after seven years.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


16

A computer system can operate in two different modes. Every hour, it either remains in the same mode or switches to the other mode, according to the following initial transition probability matrix P: Mode 1 Mode 2

Mode 1

Mode 2

0.2 0.8

0.5 05

If the system is in Mode 1 at 3:00 p.m. calculate the probability that it will be in Mode 1 at 8:00 p.m. Round your answer to three decimal places. 17

Consider the transition matrix T given below:

T

0 0.19 0 0.58 0.67 0 0.45 0 0 0.81 0 0.42 0.33 0 0.55 0

a

Calculate the matrix T2.

b

Explain why the powers of this matrix, T n, do not converge to a single steady state matrix as n increases.

Did you know?

Matrices power smartphone photo filters by adjusting pixels with a convolution kernel, creating effects like black and white or sharper images. The result is crisper, more stylised photos— processed in just seconds, right from your hand!

Chapter 6 review

Online review

mathspace.co

6.10 Transition matrices mathspace.co

541


Big ideas • Graphs and networks are mathematical structures used to model relationships, where vertices represent objects and edges represent the connections between them, with adjacency matrices providing a formal algebraic representation. • The traversal of networks is described by specific types of routes, such as walks, paths, and trails, with Eulerian paths and circuits defining the conditions under which a network can be traversed completely without repeating an edge. • Specialised types of graphs, such as planar graphs, weighted networks, and trees, are used to solve specific problems related to layout, optimisation, and efficient connectivity.

7 Graphs and networks Chapter outline 7.01 7.02 7.03 7.04 7.05 7.06 7.07

Introduction to graphs Degree and adjacency matrices Planar graphs and Euler’s formula Walks and paths Traverse connected graphs Weighted graphs and networks Trees Investigation: Networks and coding Chapter 7 review

544 556 569 583 600 612 627


There Thereare arenetworks networksin inyour yourveins, veins,your yourcity, city,your yourphone, phone,and and even evenyour yourfridge. fridge.You’re You’reliving livingin inaaworld worldof ofgraphs! graphs!


7.01

Introduction to graphs After this lesson, you will be able to… • identify valid networks. • identify key elements of graphs including vertices, edges, and loops. • classify graphs using their properties. • represent real-world situations using graphs.

Graphs and networks A graph describes a series of points and lines that represent connections. A point is called a vertex (or node). It is drawn as a dot or circle. The plural of vertex is vertices. A line called an edge (or arc or link) is a line segment that begins and ends at a vertex. An edge represents a relationship between the objects or ideas that it links together, and the kind of relationship depends on the context. Edge Vertex

Vertex

Vertex

An edge must be drawn between exactly two vertices (or connect a vertex to itself, forming a loop). Neither of these is valid edges. An edge must connect exactly two vertices (or one vertex to itself for a loop). It cannot be left with an unconnected end or join three or more vertices. The depicted examples show invalid edges: one is incomplete, and the other attempts to connect too many vertices with a single edge. Network A collection of vertices (points) and edges (lines) that represent connections between objects or ideas. It is often used interchangeably with the term ‘graph’ in this context. Here are four different networks. 7

8 9 4

544

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

3


Observe these features of networks: • Some edges have direction (they look like arrows), and some don’t. • Sometimes a vertex is connected to itself by an edge. • Sometimes vertices are connected to another vertex by more than one edge. Here are three more networks - these have letters or words for each vertex: B

Head

Chronos Rhea Coeus Phoebe

A Arm

Chest

C Stomach

E

Leg

D

Leto

Zeus Arm Leg

Artemis

Vertices in networks are often given vertex labels. These labels can be something specific, such as the name of a person, city, or animal, or they can be more abstract, like a capital letter. Capital letter labels, such as A, B, C, D, and E, are useful for identifying a particular vertex. The other two networks have labels that indicate what is being represented.

Example 1 Which two of the following are valid networks? A

B

C

D

Create a strategy To identify a valid network, ensure it has at least one vertex and that all edges connect two vertices (or one vertex to itself in the case of a loop).

Apply the idea A valid network must have vertices, and each edge must connect exactly two vertices (or one vertex to itself, forming a loop). Option A is not a valid network. The image shows an edge that is not connected to a vertex at one of its ends. An edge must connect exactly two vertices (or one vertex to itself). Option B is not a valid network because it also shows an edge that is not connected to a vertex at one of its ends. One edge is connected to a loop but not to a vertex. Options C and D are valid networks. All vertices are clearly defined, and all edges correctly connect pairs of vertices (or a vertex to itself in option D’s loop). So options C and D are the correct answers.

7.01 Introduction to graphs mathspace.co

545


Example 2 Digital only example

Explore in the online lesson

mathspace.co

Idea summary A network, also known as a graph, is a collection of points and lines that represent connections. The points are called vertices (singular: vertex) or nodes. They are often identified by vertex labels. The lines are called edges (or arcs or links) and each one connects two vertices.

Types of edges and networks Edges can be either directed or undirected. • Directed edges are represented by arrows and symbolise a one-way relationship. • Undirected edges are represented by lines and symbolise a two-way connection. Shark France eats

Fish

Spain

borders

The first network has a directed edge because sharks eat fish and not the other way around — a one-way relationship. The second network has an undirected edge because France and Spain share a border — a two-way relationship.

If there are directed edges in the network, it is called a directed network (or digraph). If there are no directed edges in a network, it is called an undirected network. Review the previously shown networks: those with arrows are directed, and the rest are undirected. A network is connected when no vertices or group of vertices are isolated from the rest of the network. When a part of the network is isolated, it is said to be disconnected.

The top two networks are connected, the bottom two are disconnected.

An edge that starts and ends at the same vertex is called a loop. A network is called a simple network if it has: 1. No loops 2. No two vertices connected by more than one edge 546

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Most networks encountered will be simple. Not Simple

Simple

Not Simple

The first network is not simple because it has loops. The second network is not simple because there are repeated or multiple edges between some vertices. The third network is simple — no vertex is connected to itself, and no vertex is connected to any other in more than one way.

Example 3 Consider these options. A

B

C

D

E

F

a Which of the networks are simple networks?

Create a strategy Identify networks that have no loops and no two vertices connected by more than one edge.

Apply the idea A network is simple if it has no loops and no multiple edges between the same pair of vertices. • A: Simple • B: Not simple (multiple directed edges between vertices) • C: Simple • D: Simple (directed, but contains no loops or multiple edges) • E: Not simple (loops) • F: Not simple (multiple edges) Therefore, options A, C, and D are simple networks.

7.01 Introduction to graphs mathspace.co

547


b Which of the networks are connected networks?

Create a strategy Identify networks where it is possible to get from any vertex to any other vertex by traversing edges.

Apply the idea A network is connected if there is a path between every pair of vertices. If any vertex or group of vertices is isolated, the network is disconnected. There are no isolated vertices in each network. Therefore, all options A, B, C, D, E, and F are connected networks. Note: For directed graphs, ‘connected’ typically refers to underlying connectedness (when edge directions are ignored). A stronger condition, ‘strongly connected’ (where a directed path exists from any vertex to any other), is a different property not assessed here.

c Which of the networks are directed networks?

Create a strategy Identify networks that contain at least one directed edge (indicated by an arrowhead).

Apply the idea A network is directed if any of its edges have a specified direction, indicated by an arrowhead. • A: All edges are undirected. Not directed. • B: Contains directed edges. Directed. • C: All edges are undirected. Not directed. • D: Contains directed edges. Directed. • E: All edges are undirected. Not directed. • F: All edges are undirected. Not directed. Therefore, options B and D are directed networks.

Idea summary Edges are either directed (one-way arrows) or undirected (two-way lines). A directed network (or digraph) has at least one directed edge. An undirected network has only undirected edges. A network is connected if there is a path between any two vertices. If any part is isolated, the network is disconnected. A loop is an edge that starts and ends at the same vertex. A simple network is one with no loops and no multiple edges between the same pair of vertices.

548

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


7.01 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

Identify the number of vertices and edges for each network: a

2

b

Identify whether each network is directed or undirected: a

b

c

d

e

f

g

h

7.01 Introduction to graphs mathspace.co

549


3

Determine the number of loops in each network: a

b

c

d

Practice Ex 1

4

550

Determine if each network is valid: a

b

c

d

e

f

g

h

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


5 Ex 2

For each network: i

Identify what the edges represent.

ii

Identify what the vertices represent.

iii

Determine the number of vertices.

iv

Determine the number of edges.

a

This network represents the internet fibre optics cables connecting several cities: City B City G City D City A

City F City E City C

b

This network represents an electrical circuit that includes a globe, resistors, and multiple switches: Switch

Battery

Resistor

Switch

Resistor

Resistor c

Globe

Switch

This mud map represents the roads between several towns: Town B

Town F

Town A Town E Town D Town C

6

Town G

Consider this network: a

Are there more vertices or more edges?

b

Is this property true for all networks?

7.01 Introduction to graphs mathspace.co

551


7

A small local library has a book-sharing program between different community centres: The Park Centre (P), The River Hub (R), The Mountain View (M), and The Downtown Spot (D). There are direct sharing routes between: • Park Centre and River Hub • Park Centre and Mountain View • River Hub and Downtown Spot • Mountain View and Downtown Spot • River Hub and Mountain View

8

a

What do the vertices represent in this scenario?

b

What do the edges represent in this scenario?

c

Draw an undirected network to represent this book-sharing program. Label the vertices P, R, M, and D.

d

How many vertices are there?

e

How many edges are there?

For this network, list the pairs of vertices that are connected by an edge.

D

A

B

E

C 9

Over a year students work in pairs to complete poster projects. Project

Pair who worked on it

Electricity

Aaron and Rochelle

Solar energy

Aaron and Bianca

Water cycle

Mario and Rochelle

Acid rain

Mario and Bianca

A group of 4 friends have already completed the following projects together:

10

a

Construct an undirected graph to represent the pairs of students who have completed projects together.

b

Identify the pairs of students that should work together on the next poster project so that all 4 friends have worked with each other.

A beach volleyball team of 5 players can use 3 players in any one game. The table shows the combinations that the coach has already used in the first three games:

552

Games

Players chosen

1

Ryan, Jimmy, Lucy

2

Lucy, Beth, Ellie

3

Ellie, Ryan, Jimmy

a

Construct a network to represent this information.

b

There is one more game left in the tournament. Which players should the coach choose so that every team member has played with every other team member at least once?

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


11

12

Determine whether the following statements are true or false: a

Every network must contain at least two vertices.

b

In any network, there must be at least one edge.

c

Each vertex in a network is required to connect to every other vertex.

d

It is possible for an edge to loop back to its originating vertex.

e

Edges must always start and end at vertices.

f

An edge can link more than two vertices simultaneously.

In this directed network, an edge is formed from A to B. List the remaining edges.

D

A C

E

B F 13

Five friends, Alex (A), Ben (B), Chloe (C ), David (D), and Emily (E), are on a social media platform. • Alex follows Ben and Chloe. • Ben follows Alex and David. • Chloe follows Alex, David, and Emily. • David follows Ben. • Emily follows Chloe and Alex.

14

a

Represent this ‘follows’ relationship as a directed network.

b

Is the drawn network connected? Explain your reasoning.

Identify whether each network contains a pair of vertices that have multiple edges between them: a

b

c

d

7.01 Introduction to graphs mathspace.co

553


Ex 3

15

16

Consider the following networks: A

B

C

D

a

Which of the networks are simple networks?

b

Which of the networks are connected networks?

c

Which of the networks are directed networks?

Consider these graphs: Graph A

Graph B

Explain why Graph A is a simple graph, but Graph B is not. 17

For each network: i

Determine the number of vertices.

ii

Determine the number of edges.

iii

Is the network connected?

a

B

b

B A

A

E

F

G C

C

554

D

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

D

E


18

Determine whether each relationship is best represented by an undirected or directed network: a

Which countries border each other

b

The results of an elimination-style sports tournament

c

The animals that different animals eat

d

Parents and their ancestors

e

Ways to get from one classroom to another at school

f

How parts of the body are connected

Extend your thinking 19

Identify the two changes required to make this network simple:

C

A B

D

F E 20

Deakin University has campuses in Geelong Waterfront, Waurn Ponds, Burwood, Warrnambool, and Melbourne CBD. The university is planning a shuttle service between these locations. They want to visualise their options using a network diagram. • Each campus is represented by a vertex. • A two-way service between campuses is shown by an undirected edge. • A one-way shuttle (only one direction) is shown with a directed edge. a

Draw a simple network diagram showing these services: • A two-way service between Geelong Waterfront and Waurn Ponds • A one-way shuttle from Burwood to the CBD • A two-way service between Burwood and Geelong Waterfront • A one-way shuttle from Warrnambool to Waurn Ponds

21

b

Is the network connected? Justify the answer.

c

Add an edge to make the network fully connected. Explain the meaning of this edge in this context.

Melbourne City Council is mapping scooter paths around key landmarks: Flinders Street Station (F ), Federation Square (S), Melbourne University (M), Queen Victorian Markets (Q), and Docklands (D). They notice that: • There’s a scooter loop around D. • Paths go from F to S and M. • There’s a shortcut from S to F. • Students often ride from M to Q, and from there to D. • Some people do a full circle: F – S – Q – D – F. a

Draw a directed network diagram to represent this information.

b

Does this network contain any loops? Identify them.

c

Is this a simple network? Explain the reasoning.

7.01 Introduction to graphs mathspace.co

555


7.02   Degree and adjacency matrices After this lesson, you will be able to… • calculate the degree of vertices in a graph. • construct adjacency matrices for given graphs. • represent real-world situations using adjacency matrices.

Degree of a vertex Degree of a vertex The number of edges that connect to the vertex. The degree of a vertex indicates the number of connections it has to other vertices (or to itself, in the case of a loop) within the network. The degree of a vertex is often written as deg (V), where V is the vertex label. A useful method involves making a small imaginary ring around the vertex. Count each edge crossing once, with loops counting twice, to find the degree:

Degree 3

Degree 5 Degree 6 Degree 5

Degree 3 Degree 4

Each vertex has a small ring placed around it, and the number of crossings is counted. Using this method ensures that loops are always counted twice.

556

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 1 Consider this network: A B

D C a What is the degree of vertex C?

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Count the number of edges going into or out of vertex C.

Vertex C is only connected by one edge. Therefore, deg(C) = 1

b What is the degree of vertex D?

Apply the idea Vertex D is connected to three edges (DA, DB, and DC). Therefore, deg(D) = 3

Idea summary The degree of a vertex is the number of edges that connect to the vertex. Loops are counted twice.

7.02 Degree and adjacency matrices mathspace.co

557


Adjacency matrices for undirected networks It is sometimes useful to use an adjacency matrix to represent a network. This is a square array of numbers, one row and one column for each vertex, which records how many connections there are between the vertices. For an undirected network, the entry for a particular row and column represents the number of edges connecting the matching vertices. B

A

C

D

Here is a simple network with 5 vertices.

E An adjacency matrix can be created, with one row and one column for each vertex: ABCDE A B C D E

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

The number of edges connecting two vertices is entered as the corresponding matrix entry. Start by filling out the first row. An entry of 1 is placed if vertex A is connected to the column vertex, and 0 if it is not. A B C D E A B C D E

0 . . . .

1 . . . .

1 . . . .

1 . . . .

1 . . . .

The entry for (A, A) is 0 because A is not connected to itself (no loop at A). Vertex A is connected to B, C, D, and E so a 1 is placed in the corresponding entries in that row. Since these edges are undirected, the first column will mirror the first row. If A is connected to B then B is connected to A and so on. This makes the adjacency matrix symmetrical. A B C D E A B C D E

558

0 1 1 1 1

1 . . . .

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

1 . . . .

1 . . . .

1 . . . .


To complete the adjacency matrix, consider each entry Aij, which represents the connection from vertex i (row) to vertex j (column). For a simple undirected graph (no loops or multiple edges), the rule is: • The entry Aij is 1 if there is an edge connecting vertex i and vertex j. • The entry Aij is 0 otherwise. Because the graph is undirected, the matrix will be symmetric Aij = Aji. This means that after determining the entries for the main diagonal and the upper triangle (where j > i), the lower triangle can be filled in by symmetry. For a simple graph, all entries on the main diagonal (Aii) will be 0. For vertex B, B is connected to A (this will later be reflected as ABA = 1 by symmetry), as well as C, D, and E. B is not connected to itself. So, row B (and column B by symmetry) will have 0 for ABB and 1s for connections to C, D, and E. Continuing this process for vertices C, D, and E based on their connections in the graph leads to the complete matrix: A B C D E A B C D E

0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0

This is the completed adjacency matrix. Notice that: • The diagonal running top-left to bottom-right (called the main diagonal) has only 0s. This represents how no vertex is connected to itself in the network - there are no loops. • The numbers not on the main diagonal are only 0s and 1s. This represents how no vertex is connected to any other by more than one edge. All adjacency matrices representing simple networks will have these features. The sum of the entries in a row (or column) of the adjacency matrix can be used to find the degree of the corresponding vertex. For the example matrix (which represents a simple graph with no loops), vertex E has degree 2, C and D have degree 3, and A and B have degree 4. If a network has loops, each loop contributes 2 to the degree of its vertex. An entry Aii on the main diagonal represents the number of loops at vertex i. Therefore, to calculate the degree of vertex i from the matrix, sum all entries in row i (or column i) and then add the value of the diagonal entry Aii again (effectively doubling the contribution of the loop entry in the sum). Alternatively, sum all off-diagonal entries in the row (or column) and add 2 × Aii.

7.02 Degree and adjacency matrices mathspace.co

559


Example 2 Fill in the adjacency matrix for this network: A B C a

A B C

D

D

A B C D

Create a strategy For each entry in the matrix, count the number of edges that connects the row vertex and the column vertex. Enter 1 if an edge exists and 0 if it does not.

Apply the idea The given network is an undirected network, so each edge connects in both directions. This means that the adjacency matrix is symmetric about the main diagonal. A B C D A Starting in the top left (entry for AA), 0 is written because A is not connected B to itself. Next, for (AB), 1 is written since A is connected to B. For (AC) and C (AD), 0 is written as A is not connected to C or D. D

0

1

0 0

A B C D Due to symmetry, the first column is filled with the same numbers as the first row.

A B C D

0 1 0 0

1

0 0

A B C D For the second row (vertex B): B is connected to A and C, but not to itself or to D. This gives the following entries for the second row (and by symmetry, the second column):

A B C D

0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0

The remaining connections for vertices C and D are recorded similarly to complete the adjacency matrix.

A B C D

0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0

A B C D

560

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


b What is the degree of vertex A?

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Count the number of edges connected to the indicated vertex.

The degree of vertex A is 1.

Reflect and check Since the given network is simple (no loops), the degree of A will be the sum of the numbers in the first row (or column) of the adjacency matrix. Degree of A = 0 + 1 + 0 + 0 =1

Sum the entries from the first row (or column) Evaluate

Idea summary The degree of a vertex is the number of edges connected to that vertex. Loops are counted twice. An adjacency matrix is a square array of numbers, a row and a column for each vertex, that records how many connections there are between the vertices. For undirected networks, the element for a particular row and column represents the number of edges connecting the matching vertices. The matrix will be symmetric. The degree of a vertex in an undirected graph can be found by summing the entries in its corresponding row (or column), ensuring that entries on the main diagonal (loops) are added twice to this sum.

Adjacency matrices for directed networks For a directed network, the entry in a particular row and column indicates the number of edges going from the corresponding row vertex to the corresponding column vertex. In a directed graph, the in-degree of a vertex is the number of edges directed into it. The out-degree of a vertex is the number of edges directed out of it. A loop at a vertex contributes 1 to its in-degree and 1 to its out-degree. From the adjacency matrix of a directed graph: • The in-degree of a vertex is the sum of the entries in its corresponding column. • The out-degree of a vertex is the sum of the entries in its corresponding row.

7.02 Degree and adjacency matrices mathspace.co

561


Here is a directed, non-simple network with 5 vertices and its corresponding adjacency matrix: To A

B

E

From

C

D

A

B

C

D

E

A

0

1

0

0

0

B

0

0

1

0

1

C

0

1

1

1

0

D

1

0

0

0

2

E

1

0

0

0

0

This adjacency matrix has different properties compared to one for an undirected simple graph. Notice that: • The matrix is not symmetrical across the main diagonal (for example, an edge from A to B might exist without one from B to A). • There is a 1 on the main diagonal (there is a loop at C). • There is a 2 in the matrix (there are two edges from D to E). While an asymmetrical matrix often indicates the network is directed, there can be directed networks that produce symmetrical adjacency matrices (e.g., if for every edge from X to Y, there is also an edge from Y to X). Previously, networks were used to create adjacency matrices. However, it is also possible to construct the network if the adjacency matrix and the type of graph (directed or undirected) are known. Consider the following adjacency matrix for an undirected network with 6 vertices. 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 2 1 1 1 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 The network represented by this matrix can be drawn as follows: 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 2 1 1 1 1 2 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0

562

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


To construct a graph from an adjacency matrix: • Start with the first row, representing connections from the first vertex. • Draw the edges from this vertex to other vertices based on the matrix entries. For an undirected graph, an entry Aij = 1 means one edge between vertex i and vertex j. For a directed graph, an entry Aij = 1 means one edge from vertex i to vertex j. • Proceed to the next row (next vertex). For an undirected graph, connections already drawn due to symmetry (i.e., Aji if Aij was processed) do not need to be redrawn. For a directed graph, all entries must be considered as they represent specific directed edges.

Example 3 A small start-up company has four main project teams: Pegasus (P), Griffin (G), Phoenix (X), and Hydra (H). The project manager has mapped out the primary one-way communication channels where one team is designated to send official updates directly to another. This is represented by the following adjacency matrix, where an entry in row i and column j indicates that team i sends updates to team j. P G X H P G X H

0 0 0 1

1 0 0 0

1 1 0 0

0 1 1 0

a Draw the directed graph representing these communication channels.

Create a strategy Represent each team as a vertex. For each ‘1’ in the adjacency matrix at position (row i, column j), draw a directed edge from vertex i to vertex j.

Apply the idea The vertices are P, G, X, and H. From the first row (Team P): • P sends updates to G (entry (PG) is 1), so draw an edge P → G. • P sends updates to X (entry (PX) is 1), so draw an edge P → X. From the second row (Team G): • G sends updates to X (entry (G, X) is 1), so draw an edge G → X. • G sends updates to H (entry (GH) is 1), so draw an edge G → H.

P

G

H

X

From the third row (Team X): • X sends updates to H (entry (XH) is 1), so draw an edge X → H. From the fourth row (Team H): • H sends updates to P (entry (HP) is 1), so draw an edge H → P.

7.02 Degree and adjacency matrices mathspace.co

563


b Determine the in-degree and out-degree of team G.

Create a strategy For team G, the in-degree is the sum of the entries in the column for G. The out-degree is the sum of the entries in the row for G. Alternatively, count the incoming and outgoing edges for vertex G on the drawn graph.

Apply the idea For team G: In-degree: Sum of entries in the second column (G): APG + AGG + AXG + AHG = 1 + 0 + 0 + 0 = 1. The in-degree of G is 1. (Team P sends updates to Team G). Out-degree: Sum of entries in the second row (G): AGP + AGG + AGX + AGH = 0 + 0 + 1 + 1 = 2 The out-degree of G is 2. (Team G sends updates to Team X and Team H).

Idea summary For directed networks, the entry Aij in an adjacency matrix indicates the number of edges from vertex i (row) to vertex j (column). The in-degree of a vertex is the sum of entries in its column. The out-degree is the sum of entries in its row. A loop at vertex i (an edge from i to i) is represented by a non-zero entry Aii on the main diagonal. It contributes 1 to the in-degree and 1 to the out-degree of vertex i. An adjacency matrix for a directed or undirected network provides sufficient information to draw the graph.

7.02 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

Match each term with its correct definition. Definition: A graph where edges have a direction, a indicating a one-way relationship.

564

i

Degree of a vertex

b

A square table used to represent the connections between vertices in a graph.

ii

Directed graph

c

The number of edges connected to a vertex, with loops counted twice.

iii

Undirected graph

d

A graph where edges have no direction, indicating a two-way relationship.

iv

Adjacency Matrix

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Ex 1

2

Consider these networks: a

C

b A

A

C B

B D

X

i

Determine the degree of vertex C.

i

Determine the degree of vertex X.

ii

Determine the degree of vertex D.

ii

Determine the degree of vertex C.

Practice 3

Create an adjacency matrix for each of these networks: a

b

X

c

A

X

Y B C

Z

Y Ex 2

4

i

Create an adjacency matrix for each network.

ii

Determine the degree of each vertex.

a

A

Q

b P

B D

R

S

C c

P

d

P

Q Q R S

S

R 7.02 Degree and adjacency matrices mathspace.co

565


5

Construct a network for each matrix: X a

X Y Z

Y Z

1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0

b

0 0 1 1 1

0 0 2 0 0

1 2 0 0 0

1 0 0 2 0

1 0 0 0 2

A B C D c

A B C D

P Q R S T A B C D d

Ex 3a

6

A B C D

1 1 0 0 1 0 2 0 0 2 0 1 0 0 1 1

e

P Q R S T

0 1 2 0 0

1 0 0 0 0

2 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0

0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 A B C D E

f

A B C D E

0 2 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0

0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 2 0

For each scenario or matrix, construct the corresponding network graph: a

A simplified predator-prey model involves three species: X, Y, Z. Species Y has two distinct methods to prey on X. Species Z preys on X, and X Species Z also preys on Y. There are no other predator-prey Y relationships where the first-named species preys on the second. The Z adjacency matrix (row preys on column) representing these relationships is:

X Y Z 0 0 0 2 0 0 1 1 0

Construct the network (food web) from this matrix. b

Four locations (A, B, C, D) in a park are connected by paths. Some locations also have a scenic loop path starting and ending at that location. • A is connected to B. • B has a scenic loop and is connected to A and D. • C has a scenic loop and is connected to D. • D is connected to B and C.

The adjacency matrix representing these connections (including loops) is:

A B C D A B C D

0 1 0 0

1 1 0 1

0 0 1 1

0 1 1 0

M1

0 1 0 1

1 0 2 0

0 2 0 1

1 0 1 1

M2

0 0 1 0

1 0 0 0

0 1 0 1

1 1 0 0

Construct the path network map from this matrix. 7

Ex 3b

8

566

Consider the adjacency matrix M1 for a graph with vertices A, B, C, D: a

Is the graph represented by M1 directed or undirected? Explain your reasoning.

b

Determine the degree of each vertex in the graph represented by M1.

Consider the adjacency matrix M2 for a graph with vertices P, Q, R, S: a

Is the graph represented by M2 directed or undirected? Explain your reasoning.

b

For the directed graph M2, determine the in-degree and outdegree of each vertex.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


9

A group of five friends: Alice (A), Bob (B), Charlie (C), Diana (D), and Edward (E), are working on a project. • Alice can ask Bob for help. • Bob can ask Alice and Charlie for help. • Charlie can ask Diana for help. • Diana can ask Charlie and Edward for help. • Edward can ask Alice for help. Assume these are one-way help channels.

10

a

Construct a directed graph to represent these help relationships.

b

Construct the adjacency matrix for this graph. Rows should represent who is asking for help, and columns should represent who can be asked for help. List vertices in alphabetical order.

c

Who can ask the most people for help (highest out-degree)? Who is asked for help by the most people (highest in-degree)?

For each real-world situation, construct the adjacency matrix that represents the connections. a

Four towns (T1, T2, T3, T4) are connected by direct, two-way roads. T1 is connected to T2 and T4. T2 is connected to T1, T3, and T4. T3 is connected to T2 and T4. T4 is connected to T1, T2, and T3. There is also a scenic loop road that starts and ends at T2.

b

A simple messaging system allows one-way messages between users: User A, User B, User C. User A can message User B. User B can message User C. User C can message User A. User A can also send messages to themselves.

c

Five locations in a park (Entrance (E), Fountain (F), Playground (P), Picnic Area (A), Gardens (G) have two-way paths between them: • Entrance to Fountain, Entrance to Playground. • Fountain to Playground, Fountain to Picnic Area. • Playground to Gardens. • Picnic Area to Gardens.

d

11

In a chess tournament with 4 players (P1, P2, P3, P4), the results were: P1 defeated P2, P1 defeated P3, P2 defeated P3, P3 defeated P4, and P4 defeated P1. Construct an adjacency matrix where an entry Mxy equals 1 if player X defeated player Y, and 0 otherwise.

The social network Bleeter allows people to share content (in the form of “Bleets”) online. Before anyone can share anything, two people must first make a connection, so one person “follows” the other. Whenever a person creates a Bleet, it is shared with everyone who follows them. These people are called “followers”. The given network represents the connections among a group of six users of Bleeter. An arrow from one vertex to another means that the first person follows the second. So DF follows BK. a

What kind of network, directed or undirected, represents the connections people form on Bleeter?

b

Which user has the most followers?

c

Which user follows the most people?

BK DF

MZ

SS

AR KJ

7.02 Degree and adjacency matrices mathspace.co

567


Extend your thinking 12

Construct a directed graph to represent each of the following food chain descriptions. Construct the arrows pointing from the animal that is eaten to the animal that eats it. a

The killer whale depends on tuna as a primary food source. In turn, the tuna feeds on fish called mackerel. For mackerel to survive, they depend on microscopic organisms collectively known as zooplankton.

b

Rabbits and squirrels both eat plants. Foxes and hawks eat both rabbits and squirrels.

c

Within a water system: • Tadpoles, water beetles and snails all survive by eating algae. • Small fish eat the tadpoles, whilst frogs survive on water beetles and snails. • The kingfisher, a skilful fishing bird, survives on eating small fish and frogs.

13

Consider the two graphs, G1 and G2, shown: Graph G1: A

Graph G2: P

B

S

D

14

C

Q

R

a

Construct the adjacency matrix for each graph.

b

Determine the degree of each vertex in G1 and G2.

c

Determine a mapping of the vertices that shows that the graphs are the same, just with different vertex names.

The City of Moreland is upgrading its bike lane network. Four key suburbs are being connected: Coburg (C), Brunswick (B), Pascoe Vale (P), and Fawkner (F). The current network connections are: • Coburg is connected to all three other suburbs. • Brunswick and Pascoe Vale are both connected to Coburg, but not each other. • Fawkner is only connected to Coburg.

568

a

Draw a simple, undirected network diagram to represent this situation.

b

Construct the adjacency matrix for this network.

c

What is the degree of each vertex?

d

If the council wants every suburb to be connected to at least two others, what is the minimum number of new edges they must add? Justify your answer.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


7.03   Planar graphs and Euler’s formula After this lesson, you will be able to… • identify isomorphisms. • identify planar graphs and their components (faces, vertices, edges). • apply Euler’s formula to solve problems involving planar graphs. • determine whether a graph can be drawn as a planar graph.

Isomorphic graphs There are many different but equivalent representations of a graph.

Interactive exploration

Discover this concept in action online

mathspace.co

Isomorphic graphs Two graphs that contain the same number of vertices connected in the same way. Rearranging vertices and edges while maintaining the same connectivity results in an isomorphic graph. Isomorphic graphs retain the same underlying structure. Two graphs are isomorphic if each of the following is true: 1. They have the same number of vertices. 2. They have the same number of edges. 3. They have a matching number of vertices of each degree. 4. Corresponding vertices connect in the same way. Determine if these two graphs are isomorphic.

7.03 Planar graphs and Euler’s formula mathspace.co

569


Both graphs have the same number of vertices and edges. However, the graph on the right has a vertex of degree 2, whereas the graph on the left has no vertex of degree 2. There cannot be a way to rearrange the two graphs to look like each other. So the two graphs are not isomorphic. If a mismatch in vertex degrees is not immediately obvious, list the degree for each vertex. Creating a list of degrees from largest to smallest, known as the degree sequence of the graph, allows for easy comparison. For example, the graph on the left has the degree sequence (4, 3, 3, 3, 3) and the graph on the right has degree sequence (4, 4, 3, 3, 2). By quick comparison, the sequences are not equal; therefore, the graphs are not isomorphic. If the degree sequences were equal, the vertex connections would then need to be checked for equivalence; this can be a complex task for large networks.

Example 1 Determine if Graph G and Graph H are isomorphic. Graph G

Graph H

1

2

A

B

4

3

C

D

Create a strategy To determine if two graphs are isomorphic: • Check if they have the same number of vertices. • Check if they have the same number of edges. • Compare their degree sequences. If they are different, the graphs are not isomorphic. • If the above match, attempt to map the vertices of one graph to the other such that all adjacency relationships are preserved. This can sometimes be done by redrawing one graph to look like the other.

570

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Apply the idea 1. Number of vertices: Graph G has 4 vertices. Graph H has 4 vertices. This matches. 2. Number of edges: Graph G has 5 edges (1-2, 2-3, 3-4, 4-1, 1-3). Graph H has 5 edges (AB, BC, CD, DA, AC). This matches. 3. Degree sequences: For Graph G: deg (1) is 3, deg(2) is 2, deg(3) is 3, deg(4) is 2. Degree sequence: (3, 3, 2, 2). For Graph H: deg(A) is 3, deg(B) is 2, deg(C) is 3, deg(D) is 2. Degree sequence: (3, 3, 2, 2). This matches. 4. Mapping vertices and preserving connections: Since the necessary conditions hold, an attempt can be made to map the vertices. Consider the following mapping from G to H: • Vertex 1 (degree 3 in G) → Vertex A (degree 3 in H) • Vertex 3 (degree 3 in G) → Vertex C (degree 3 in H) • Vertex 2 (degree 2 in G, connected to 1 and 3) → Vertex B (degree 2 in H, connected to A and C) • Vertex 4 (degree 2 in G, connected to 1 and 3) → Vertex D (degree 2 in H, connected to A and C) Check connections: In G: (1, 2), (2, 3), (3, 4), (4, 1), (1, 3). Mapped to H: (AB), (BC), (CD), (DA), (AC). These are precisely the edges in Graph H. Graph H can be redrawn to look like Graph G. Therefore, the graphs are isomorphic.

Idea summary Isomorphic graphs are graphs that have the same number of vertices connected in the same way, meaning they share an identical structure even if drawn differently. To determine if two graphs are isomorphic, all of the following conditions must be met: • They have the same number of vertices and edges. • They have an identical degree sequence, which is the list of vertex degrees arranged in descending order. • Their corresponding vertices are connected in the same way. If there is any difference in the number of vertices, number of edges, or the degree sequences, the graphs are not isomorphic.

7.03 Planar graphs and Euler’s formula mathspace.co

571


Planar networks Edges in a network can often cross. However, it may be possible to move the vertices into a configuration where no edges cross. A configuration without edge crossings is termed a planar representation, and networks that have one are called planar networks. No more crossings!

Crossings

Planar?

Move two vertices

Planar!

Determining if a network is planar or non-planar is not always obvious at first glance; sometimes, vertices must be moved extensively before a non-crossing configuration is found, if one exists. Rearranging vertices and edges while maintaining the same connectivity results in isomorphic (equivalent) graphs.

The top network is planar, and below it are three of its equivalent planar representations. All four graphs are isomorphic.

Interactive exploration

Discover this concept in action online

mathspace.co

Once a planar network is arranged into a planar representation, a face (or region) can be defined as an area of the plane bounded by edges. The part of the plane outside the network is also considered a face. In all three planar representations of the network from earlier, each face has been given a different colour – this network has 4 faces.

572

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


The octahedral graph below (which represents a 3-dimensional octahedron solid) has 8 faces.

Non-simple networks that are planar also have faces, though some of their faces are bounded by one or two edges:

The network on the left has 6 faces, with 4 of them bounded by only 1 edge (loops). The network on the right has 5 faces, with 2 of them bounded by only 2 edges. However, if a network is not planar, then there are no faces to define – the crossing of edges makes it impossible.

Idea summary A network is a planar network if it can be redrawn so no edges cross. Such a drawing is called a planar representation. A network that cannot be drawn without crossing edges is called non-planar. When a planar network is in a planar representation, a face is a region bounded by edges. The area outside the network is also counted as a face. Faces can only be defined for planar networks; it is impossible to define them for non-planar networks due to the crossing edges.

7.03 Planar graphs and Euler’s formula mathspace.co

573


Euler’s formula The Swiss mathematician Leonhard Euler (pronounced “OIL-er”) was a pioneer in the mathematics of networks in the 18th century. For any connected planar graph, a relationship exists between the number of vertices (V ), the number of faces (F ), and the number of edges (E). This relationship is given by the formula: V+F–E=2 This formula is a fundamental property of connected planar graphs. If a graph is drawn with faces and does not satisfy V + F – E = 2 it cannot be a planar graph. This formula is known as Euler’s formula. This is a planar network. It has 6 vertices, 5 faces, and 9 edges, applying Euler’s formula results in: 6+5–9=2

Consider the octahedral network, which is known to be planar:

r

The image shows two depictions of the octahedral graph. The depiction on the left has crossing edges, while the one on the right is a planar representation. For the planar representation of the octahedral graph, the number of vertices (V ), edges (E), and faces (F ) can be counted. These are V is 6, F is 8 (including the outer face), and E is 12. Applying these values to Euler’s formula for connected planar graphs: V+F–E=2 6 + 8 – 12 = 2 The formula V + F – E = 2 holds true for the planar representation of the octahedral graph, as expected for any connected planar graph. To apply Euler’s formula, a planar representation of the graph must be used to ensure the faces can be correctly identified.

574

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 2 Consider the graph shown: A

H

G

B

F

C

D

E

a Which graph is its equivalent planar representation? A

A

H

B

B

C

D

A H

H

F

C

E

D

B

F

D

E

D

G

A

C

G

B

F

C

A

G

E

H

G

B

F

C

D

E

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Redraw the edges that are crossing each other on the given graph. Ensure that the vertices connected by an edge on the original graph remain connected on the planar graph.

All the graphs among the options do not contain any intersecting edges. So they are all planar graphs. Only the graph in option A has the same edges, including HD and BF, as in the original graph. So, the correct answer is option A.

7.03 Planar graphs and Euler’s formula mathspace.co

575


b How many faces does this representation have?

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Use Euler’s formula for a connected planar graph given by:

The graph has V = 8 and E = 10.

V+F–E=2

V+F–E=2

Write Euler’s formula

8 + F – 10 = 2

Substitute V = 8 and E = 10

–2 + F = 2

Subtract the numerical terms

where V is the number of vertices, F is the number of faces, and E is the number of edges.

F=4

Add 2 to both sides

Example 3 Consider these graphs: Graph A

Graph B

Graph C

A

A

1

E

5

C

E

F

H

G

B

2

D

C

D

Graph D

B

B

E

A

4

3

D

C

a Complete the table for the graphs. Graph

Vertices (V)

Faces (F)

Edges (E)

V+F−E

Planar? (Y/N)

Number of vertices with odd degree

A

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

B C D

⬚ ⬚

Create a strategy

⬚ ⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚ ⬚

⬚ ⬚

Count the number of vertices and edges in each graph. If the graph appears planar, count the faces and verify Euler’s formula. For known non-planar graphs, identify them as such. Determine the number of vertices with odd degree for each graph. Region 1

Region 2 Region 3 Vertices

576

Edges

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

Faces (also called Regions)


Apply the idea For graph A, it is planar with V = 5, F = 5, and E = 8. Applying Euler’s formula: 5 + 5 – 8 = 2. This holds. Graph A has 2 vertices with odd degree. For graph B, it is planar with V = 5, F = 4, and E = 7. Applying Euler’s formula: 5 + 4 – 7 = 2. This holds. Graph B has 2 vertices with odd degree. Graph C is K5 (the complete graph with 5 vertices). It has V = 5 vertices and E = 10 edges (each of the 5 vertices connects to the other 4, so (5 × 4)/2 = 10 edges). K5 is a well-known non-planar graph. Therefore, Euler’s formula for planar graphs (V + F – E = 2) does not apply in the sense of yielding a consistent number of faces that would satisfy the formula for a planar drawing. For a non-planar graph, the concept of ‘faces’ as used in Euler’s formula for planar graphs is not welldefined. All 5 vertices in K5 have a degree of 4 (each connects to 4 other vertices), so there are 0 vertices with odd degree. For graph D, it is planar with V = 8, F = 7, and E = 13. Applying Euler’s formula: 8 + 7 – 13 = 2. This holds. Graph D has 6 vertices with odd degree. The completed table is: Graph

Vertices (V)

Faces (F)

Edges (E)

V+F−E

Planar? (Y/N)

Number of vertices with odd degree

A

5

5

8

2

Y

2

B

5

4

7

2

Y

2

C

5

N/A

10

N/A

N

0

D

8

7

13

2

Y

6

b Which of these statements is true? A Connected planar graphs can have any number of vertices with odd degrees. B Connected planar graphs have an even number of vertices that have odd degrees. C Connected planar graphs have an odd number of vertices that have odd degrees. D Connected planar graphs have two vertices with odd degrees.

Create a strategy Compare the results for the planar graphs from the table.

Apply the idea Based on the results from the table in part (a), graphs A, B, and D are planar and satisfy Euler’s formula. Graph C is non-planar. For the planar graphs: • Graph A has 2 odd degree vertices. • Graph B has 2 odd degree vertices. • Graph D has 6 odd degree vertices. Considering the planar graphs A, B, and D from the table, each has an even number of vertices with odd degrees. This observation aligns with the property that connected planar graphs (and indeed all graphs, due to the handshaking lemma) have an even number of vertices with odd degrees. So, the correct answer is option B.

7.03 Planar graphs and Euler’s formula mathspace.co

577


Example 4 Digital only example

Explore in the online lesson

mathspace.co

Idea summary A connected planar graph satisfies Euler’s formula:

V+F–E=2 V is the number of vertices F is the number of faces E is the number of edges If a connected graph does not satisfy V + F – E = 2, it is not planar.

7.03 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

2

3

Define these terms in the context of graph theory: a

Isomorphism

b

Planar graph

c

Euler’s formula (for planar graphs)

d

Face (or region)

Determine whether each statement is true or false. a

Two graphs are isomorphic if they have the same number of vertices and the same number of edges.

b

Euler’s formula (V + F – E = 2) applies to all types of graphs.

c

A graph is planar if it is drawn with no edges crossing.

d

The exterior region of a planar graph is not counted as one of its faces.

Identify whether each graph is planar or non-planar: a

578

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

b


4

Determine whether a connected planar graph could have the following parameters: a

V = 5, F = 6, and E = 9

b

V = 5, F = 5, and E = 10

c

V = 8, F = 6, and E = 13

d

V = 12, F = 10, and E = 20

Practice Ex 1

5

For each pair of graphs: i

Determine if the two graphs are isomorphic.

ii

If they are isomorphic, briefly explain why or redraw one to show the isomorphism. If they are not isomorphic, explain why.

a

Pair 1

b

Graph 1B: Graph 1A:

Ex 2

6

Draw an equivalent planar representation for this graph:

7

For each graph:

Pair 2 Graph 2A:

i

Draw an equivalent planar representation.

ii

Determine the number of faces F for the representation.

a

A D

B

Graph 2B:

b

C

7.03 Planar graphs and Euler’s formula mathspace.co

579


8

For each pair of graphs: a

Select the connected planar graph.

b

Determine the total number of edges, E, of the planar graph.

c

Calculate D, the sum of the degrees of the vertices of the planar graph.

d

Determine an algebraic equation relating the sum of degrees (D) and the number of edges (E)of the planar graph.

i

A

A E

B

A

F C

B

B

D C

ii

A

D

A B

C

B

D

E 9

E

F

For each graph: a

Determine V, the number of vertices.

b

Determine E, the number of edges.

c

Draw an equivalent planar representation of the graph.

d

Determine F, the number of faces of the planar graph.

e

Evaluate V + F – E for the planar graph.

i

A

ii

F

A

E B

F

D

C

580

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

B

C

D


Ex 3

10

Consider these graphs:

a

Graph A

Graph B

Graph C

Graph D

Complete the table: Graph A

Graph B

Graph C

Graph D

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

Vertices (V) Faces (F) Edges (E) V+F−E Planar? (Y/N) No. of vertices with odd degree b

Ex 4

11

12

13

14

⬚ ⬚

⬚ ⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚ ⬚ ⬚ ⬚

What is noticeable about the number of vertices with odd degree for these planar graphs?

For a connected planar graph with V vertices, E edges and F faces, determine: a

F given V = 7 and E = 14

b

E given V = 8 and F = 2

c

V given F = 3 and E = 12

d

E given V = 4 and F = 5

e

V given F = 8 and E = 11

f

F given V = 6 and E = 7

A connected planar graph has 3 edges and 1 vertex. a

Determine F, the number of faces.

b

Draw a planar graph with the given parameters.

A connected planar graph has 3 vertices and 3 faces. a

Determine the number of edges, E.

b

Draw a planar graph with the given parameters.

A connected planar graph has 3 edges and 3 faces. a

Determine the number of vertices, V.

b

Draw a planar graph with the given parameters.

7.03 Planar graphs and Euler’s formula mathspace.co

581


Extend your thinking 15

For these non-planar graphs, determine the minimum number of edges that can be removed to make them planar: a

16

b

A connected planar graph has 4 vertices of degrees 2, 2, 3, and 3. a

17

Determine the number of edges, E.

b

Determine the number of faces, F.

Two school sports teams - the Northern Eagles and the Southern Sharks - have slightly different-looking training buddy networks. Each player is partnered with one or more others to practise drills. Their connections are: • Eagles: Amy is paired with Ben and Chloe. Ben is also paired with Chloe and Diego. Diego is only paired with Ben. Chloe is paired with everyone except Diego. • Sharks: Alex is paired with Zara and Kai. Kai is paired with Zara and Max. Max is only paired with Kai. Zara is paired with everyone except Max.

18

a

Draw both networks as simple, undirected graphs.

b

Are these graphs isomorphic? Justify your answer using degrees and connections.

The Metro map of Melbourne’s City Loop has the following simplified layout: • 5 stations form a ring: Flinders St (F), Southern Cross (S), Flagstaff (L), Melbourne Central (M), Parliament (P). • Every station is connected to the two stations beside it on the ring. • An underground express line also connects Flinders St directly to Melbourne Central.

19

582

a

Sketch this network.

b

How many vertices and edges does the graph have?

c

Is the graph planar? Use Euler’s formula to verify the planarity, and state the number of faces if it is planar.

Taylah is creating a geometric sculpture in her backyard using wooden rods and metal joints. She ends up with a network that has 8 joints (vertices), and 12 rods (edges). When she lays it flat on the ground, she notices that it forms several enclosed spaces (faces). a

Assuming the sculpture forms a connected planar graph, use Euler’s formula to determine how many faces there are.

b

One of the joints comes loose, and the structure splits into two separate parts. Will Euler’s formula (V + F – E = 2) still hold for the entire structure considered as one graph? Explain why or why not.

c

Suppose she starts again with the original connected sculpture (V = 8, E = 12, F = 6). She then adds another rod (edge) without adding a new joint (vertex), and the structure remains planar and connected. How does this change the number of faces?

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


7.04

Walks and paths After this lesson, you will be able to… • distinguish between walks, trails, paths, and circuits in graphs. • identify walks, trails, paths, and circuits given start and end vertices. • explain the relationships between different types of graph traversals.

Walks Walk A sequence of vertices in a graph such that from each of its vertices there is an edge to the next vertex in the sequence. Both vertices and edges can be repeated. Example: In a graph with vertices A, B, C and edges AB, BC, CA, the sequence ABCAB is a walk. A walk describes the process of starting at a vertex and moving along an edge to a new vertex. The walk is continued by following another edge to a second vertex, a third edge to a third vertex, and so on. In a simple network, a walk is represented by a sequence of vertices.

Start A

Here is a simple, undirected network, with the green arrows representing a walk around the network.

C

B D End

F

E

This walk can be described as the sequence A - B - A - E - F - D - E.

G A walk that starts and ends at the same vertex is closed, and if it starts and ends at different vertices, it is open. The first walk shown is open. C

B

This walk has the sequence A - B - A - D - F - C - G - D - E - A.

D

Start A End E G

F

Since it starts and ends at the same vertex, it is closed. It can also be determined by looking at the sequence (without the diagram) that the walk is closed, as the sequence starts and ends with the same letter.

7.04 Walks and paths mathspace.co

583


Example 1 For each sequence of vertices in this graph, determine if it is a walk. If it is a walk, determine whether it is open or closed: B

A

D

C

E

a A-B-C-D-B-A-C

Create a strategy To determine if a sequence of vertices is a walk, check that every adjacent pair of vertices in the sequence is connected by an edge in the graph. If the walk starts and ends at different vertices, then it is open but if it starts and ends at the same vertex then it is closed.

Apply the idea • Check edge AB: This edge exists in the graph. • Check edge BC: This edge exists in the graph. • Check edge CD: This edge exists in the graph. • Check edge DB: This edge exists in the graph. • Check edge BA: This edge exists in the graph. • Check edge AC: This edge exists in the graph. Since all adjacent pairs of vertices in the sequence are connected by an edge, A - B - C - D - B - A - C is a walk. The walk starts at vertex A and ends at vertex C. As these are different vertices, the walk is open.

Reflect and check Visually trace the path on the graph: from A → B → C → D → B → A → C. All these connections correspond to valid edges in the provided graph. The start vertex ( A ) and end vertex ( C ) are different, confirming an open walk.

584

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


b A-B-C-D-A

Apply the idea • Check edge AB: This edge exists in the graph. • Check edge BC: This edge exists in the graph. • Check edge CD: This edge exists in the graph. • Check edge DA: Looking at the graph, there is no direct edge connecting vertex D to vertex A. Since there is no edge between D and A, the sequence A - B - C - D - A is not a walk.

Reflect and check Trace the proposed path on the graph: A → B is valid, B → C is valid, and C → D is valid. However, the final step from D → A does not correspond to an edge in the graph. Therefore, the entire sequence is not a walk.

c E-D-B-A-B-C-E

Apply the idea • Check edge ED: This edge exists in the graph. • Check edge DB: This edge exists in the graph. • Check edge BA: This edge exists in the graph. • Check edge AB: This edge exists in the graph. • Check edge BC: This edge exists in the graph. • Check edge CE: This edge exists in the graph. Since all adjacent pairs of vertices in the sequence are connected by an edge, E - D - B - A - B - C - E is a walk. The walk starts at vertex E and ends at vertex E. As these are the same vertex, the walk is closed.

Reflect and check Visually trace the path on the graph: from E → D → B → A → B → C → E. All these connections correspond to valid edges in the provided graph. The start vertex ( E ) and end vertex ( E ) are the same, confirming a closed walk.

7.04 Walks and paths mathspace.co

585


Idea summary A walk describes the process of starting at a vertex and moving along an edge to a new vertex. A walk is closed if it starts and ends at the same vertex, and open if it starts and ends at different vertices. A walk is recorded by listing the vertices in the order they are passed, for example H - X - Y - H.

Paths and cycles Path

Cycle

A walk in which no vertices are repeated. If a walk is a path, then no edges are repeated either.

A closed path where the only repeated vertex is the start/end vertex, and it has a length of at least 3 in a simple graph.

A walk is the most general definition of movement around a network. Sometimes a stricter condition is imposed - if a walk cannot use the same vertex more than once, it is called a path (the start/end vertex may be reused only if the path is closed, forming a cycle). If the path is closed, it is called a cycle. Here are two different paths on the same graph: C

B

End

D Start A End

C

B Start D

A F

E G

F

E G

The green walk D - G - C - F - E - A on the left is an open path, since no vertex is used more than once, and it starts and ends at different vertices. The orange walk B - C - F - D - E - A - B on the right is a closed path (cycle), since no vertex is used more than once, except for the vertex at the start/end.

Example 2 Digital only example

Explore in the online lesson

586

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

mathspace.co


Example 3 Consider the graph shown: B

A

D

E

C

F

G H

I

a Determine if the walk F - H - C - A - B - D is a path. Explain the reasoning.

Create a strategy 1. Verify it is a valid walk (all consecutive edges exist). 2. Check if any vertices are repeated. 3. Check if the walk is open (starts and ends at different vertices).

Apply the idea The given sequence is F - H - C - A - B - D. 1. Check for existing edges (is it a walk?): • Edge FH exists. • Edge HC exists. • Edge AB exists. • Edge BD exists.

• Edge CA exists.

Since all consecutive pairs of vertices are connected by an edge, it is a valid walk. 2. Check for repeated vertices: The vertices visited are F, H, C, A, B, D. No vertex is repeated. 3. Check if the walk is open: The walk starts at vertex F and ends at vertex D. Since F ≠ D, the walk is open. Conclusion: Since F - H - C - A - B - D is an open walk with no repeated vertices, it is a path.

Reflect and check Tracing the sequence on the graph confirms all connections are valid edges. The vertices F, H, C, A, B, D are distinct. The start (F) and end (D) are different. This meets all criteria for a path.

b Determine a cycle starting and ending at vertex E.

Create a strategy A cycle must have a length of at least 3. To find such a cycle, construct a sequence starting and ending at E, using existing edges, where intermediate vertices are distinct.

7.04 Walks and paths mathspace.co

587


Apply the idea Consider the sequence E - D - C - H - G - E. 1. Check for existing edges (is it a walk?): • Edge ED exists. • Edge DC exists. • Edge HG exists. • Edge GE exists.

• Edge CH exists.

Since all edges exist, it is a valid walk. 2. Check if it’s closed: The walk starts at E and ends at E. It is closed. 3. Check for repeated intermediate vertices: The intermediate vertices are D, C, H, G. These are all distinct from each other. Conclusion: The walk E - D - C - H - G - E is a cycle starting and ending at vertex E.

Reflect and check The sequence E - D - C - H - G - E forms a closed loop. All edges used are present in the graph, and the intermediate vertices D, C, H, G are distinct. This fulfills the definition of a cycle.

c Consider the sequence A - C - H - I - G. Is this sequence a walk? If it is a walk, classify it further as a path and determine if it is a cycle. Explain your reasoning.

Apply the idea The given sequence is A - C - H - I - G. 1. Check for existing edges (is it a walk?): • Edge AC exists in the graph. • Edge HI exists in the graph.

• Edge CH exists in the graph. • Edge IG exists in the graph.

Since all consecutive pairs of vertices in the sequence are connected by an edge, the sequence A - C - H - I - G is a valid walk. 2. Check if the walk is open or closed: The walk starts at vertex A and ends at vertex G. Since A ≠ G, the walk is open. 3. Check for repeated vertices (to determine if it is a path): The sequence of vertices is A, C, H, I, G. All vertices in this sequence are distinct. Since it is an open walk and no vertices are repeated, A - C - H - I - G is a path. 4. Determine if it is a cycle: A cycle must be a closed walk. Since the walk A - C - H - I - G is open, it cannot be a cycle. Conclusion: The sequence A - C - H - I - G is a walk and a path. It is not a cycle.

Reflect and check The sequence A - C - H - I - G uses existing edges AC, CH, HI, IG. All vertices A, C, H, I, G are distinct. The walk starts at A and ends at G, so it is open. Therefore, it is a path. Because it is an open walk, it cannot be a cycle. The classification is consistent.

588

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


d Consider the sequence I - H - G - E - D - C - H - F. Is this sequence a walk? If so, is it a path? Explain why or why not.

Apply the idea The given sequence is I - H - G - E - D - C - H - F. 1. Check for existing edges (is it a walk?): • Edge IH exists. • Edge HG exists. • Edge ED exists. • Edge DC exists. • Edge HF exists.

• Edge GE exists. • Edge CH exists.

Since all consecutive pairs of vertices are connected by an edge, the sequence I - H - G - E - D - C - H - F is a valid walk. 2. Check if the walk is open or closed: The walk starts at vertex I and ends at vertex F. Since I ≠ F, the walk is open. 3. Check for repeated vertices to determine if it is a path: The sequence of vertices is I, H, G, E, D, C, H, F. The vertex H is repeated (it appears as the second vertex and again as the seventh vertex, which is an intermediate repetition). Conclusion: The sequence I - H - G - E - D - C - H - F is an open walk. However, because the vertex H is repeated as an intermediate vertex, it is not a path.

Reflect and check The sequence I - H - G - E - D - C - H - F uses only existing edges in the graph, so it is a walk. It starts at I and ends at F, so it is open. A path is an open walk with no repeated vertices. In this sequence, vertex H is visited twice before the end of the walk. This repetition of an intermediate vertex means it cannot be a path.

Idea summary • A path is a walk where no vertex is repeated (which also means that no edges can be repeated). • An open path starts and ends on different vertices. • A closed path (cycle) starts and ends on the same vertex. All paths are walks, and all cycles are closed walks.

Trails and circuits Trail

Circuit

A walk in which no edges are repeated. Vertices can be repeated.

A closed trail; it starts and ends at the same vertex and no edges are repeated.

7.04 Walks and paths mathspace.co

589


If a walk cannot use the same edge more than once, it is a trail if it’s open and a circuit if it’s closed. Here is one of each on the same network: C

B

C

B

D

Start A

D A End

E

F

F E End

G

Start

G

The blue walk A - D - F - E - D - G - C - F on the left is a trail, since no edge is used more than once, and it is open. The red walk G - C - F - E - D - F - A - D - G on the right is a circuit, since no edge is used more than once, and it is closed. • All paths are trails • All cycles are circuits.

Example 4 Which of the following is a circuit in the network shown? Select all that apply. E

D

B

C A

A C - B - A - E - D - C

B

B-A-E-C-D-B

C B - C - A - E - D - C

D

D-C-B-A-E-D

Create a strategy Identify a trail that starts and ends on the same vertex and has no repeated edges.

Apply the idea Option A starts and ends on C. The edges covered are CB, BA, AE, ED, and DC. So no edges are repeated. So it is a circuit. Option B starts and ends on B. The edges covered are BA, AE, EC, CD, and DB. So no edges are repeated. So it is a circuit. Option C is not a circuit because it does not start and end on the same vertex. Option D starts and ends on D. The edges covered are DC, CB, BA, AE, and ED. So no edges are repeated. So it is a circuit. So the correct answers are options A, B, and D.

590

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 5 Consider the graph shown: A B

D

F

C E

For each sequence of vertices provided in the parts below, classify it fully as a walk, trail, path, circuit, and/or cycle. A sequence can be more than one type. Provide justification for the classification. a Classify the sequence A - B - C - E - F.

Create a strategy To classify the sequence, check it against the following definitions and apply a systematic approach: • Walk: A sequence of vertices in a graph such that from each of its vertices there is an edge to the next vertex in the sequence. Both vertices and edges can be repeated. • Trail: A walk where no edge is repeated. Vertices can be repeated. • Path: A trail where no vertex is repeated (except possibly the start and end vertices if it is closed). • Closed: A walk, trail, or path is closed if it starts and ends at the same vertex. Otherwise, it is open. • Circuit: A closed trail. • Cycle: A closed path. It must have a length of at least 3 for simple graphs.

Apply the idea The sequence is A - B - C - E - F. 1. Is it a walk? Check if the segments correspond to edges in the graph: • Edge AB exists. • Edge BC exists. • Edge CE exists. • Edge EF exists. All segments are edges in the graph. Thus, it is a walk. 2. Is it a trail? The edges traversed are AB, BC, CE, and EF. All these edges are distinct. Thus, it is a trail. 3. Is it a path? The vertices visited are A, B, C, E, F. All these vertices are distinct. Thus, it is a path. 4. Is it open or closed? The walk starts at A and ends at F. Since A ≠ F, it is open. 5. Is it a circuit? It is a trail, but it is open. Thus, it is not a circuit. 6. Is it a cycle? It is a path, but it is open. Thus, it is not a cycle. So the sequence is a walk, a trail, and a path.

Reflect and check The sequence A - B - C - E - F uses distinct edges AB, BC, CE, EF, and distinct vertices A, B, C, E, F. It starts at A and ends at F (open). This fits the definition of a path, which implies it is also a trail and a walk. Since it’s open, it cannot be a circuit or a cycle. The classification is consistent.

7.04 Walks and paths mathspace.co

591


b Classify the sequence A - B - E - A - D.

Apply the idea The sequence is A - B - E - A - D. 1. Is it a walk? Check if the segments correspond to edges in the graph: • Edge AB exists. • Edge BE exists. • Edge EA exists. • Edge AD exists. All segments are edges in the graph. Thus, it is a walk. 2. Is it a trail? The edges traversed are AB, BE, EA, and AD. All these edges are distinct. Thus, it is a trail. 3. Is it a path? The vertices visited are A, B, E, A, D. The vertex A is repeated as an intermediate vertex. Since an intermediate vertex is repeated, it is not a path. 4. Is it open or closed? The walk starts at A and ends at D. Since A ≠ D, it is open. 5. Is it a circuit? It is a trail, but it is open. Thus, it is not a circuit. 6. Is it a cycle? It is not a path. Thus, it is not a cycle. So the sequence is a walk and a trail.

Reflect and check The sequence A - B - E - A - D uses distinct edges, so it’s a trail (and therefore a walk). However, vertex A is revisited as an intermediate part of the sequence. This repetition of an intermediate vertex means it’s not a path. Since it’s open and not a path, it cannot be a circuit or a cycle. The classification is consistent.

c Classify the sequence A - C - D.

Apply the idea The sequence is A - C - D. 1. Is it a walk? Check if the segments correspond to edges in the graph: • Edge CD: Does not exist. Since the segment CD does not correspond to an edge, the sequence is not a walk. As the sequence is not a walk, it cannot be a trail, path, circuit, or cycle.

Reflect and check For a sequence to be a walk, every pair of consecutive vertices in the sequence must be directly connected by an edge in the graph. The provided graph does not have an edge between C and D. Therefore, the sequence is not a walk. This also means it cannot satisfy the definitions of trail, path, circuit, or cycle.

592

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


d Classify the sequence A - B - C - E - F - A.

Apply the idea The sequence is A - B - C - E - F - A. 1. Is it a walk? Check if the segments correspond to edges in the graph: • Edge AB exists. • Edge BC exists. • Edge CE exists. • Edge EF exists. • Edge FA exists. All segments are edges in the graph. Thus, it is a walk. 2. Is it a trail? The edges traversed are AB, BC, CE, EF, and FA. All these edges are distinct. Thus, it is a trail. 3. Is it a path? The vertices visited are A, B, C, E, F, A. The start vertex A is repeated only as the end vertex. The intermediate vertices B, C, E, F are all distinct from each other and from A. Thus, it is a path. 4. Is it open or closed? The walk starts at A and ends at A. Since it starts and ends at the same vertex, it is closed. 5. Is it a circuit? It is a trail AND it is closed. Thus, it is a circuit. 6. Is it a cycle? It is a path AND it is closed. The length of the sequence is 5 edges, which is ≥ 3. Thus, it is also a cycle. So the sequence is a walk, a trail, a path, a circuit, and a cycle.

Reflect and check The sequence A - B - C - E - F - A starts and ends at vertex A. All edges traversed are distinct, making it a trail. Since it’s a closed trail, it’s a circuit. All intermediate vertices (B, C, E, F) are distinct and also distinct from the start/end vertex when considered as intermediate points. This makes it a path. Since it’s a closed path with length 5 (which is ≥ 3), it’s also a cycle. All classifications are consistent with the definitions.

Idea summary Walks Open start ≠ end

Closed start = end

Trail no repeat edges

Circuit

Path

Cycle

no repeat vertices

A walk is defined by a sequence of alternately adjacent vertices and the edges connecting them. A walk can be open (start/end vertices different) or closed (start/end vertices same). If edges can’t repeat, the walk is a trail. A closed trail is a circuit. If vertices can’t repeat, the walk is a path. A closed path is a cycle. Walks, paths, trails, circuits, and cycles do not need to use every edge or every vertex in the graph.

7.04 Walks and paths mathspace.co

593


7.04 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

Define these terms in relation to graph theory: a

Path

b

Loop

d

Trail

e

Cycle

c

Connected graph

2

What is the difference between an open walk and a closed walk?

3

For the graph:

4

a

How many edges are connected to vertex A?

b

List the vertices adjacent to vertex E.

c

Identify the vertex that is directly connected to all other vertices.

d

Identify the vertex that is not directly connected to vertex A.

B

A

C

E

D

For this graph:

A

a

Which vertex is isolated?

b

How many edges are there in the network?

c

How many vertices are there?

d

Which vertex is the loop connected to?

C

B

D

E

Practice 5 Ex 1

Consider the given network:

F

Determine if it is a valid walk. If it is a walk, state whether it is open or closed: a

K-F-P-K

b

K-P-F-K-P

c

K-P-F-R-M

d

R-P-F-M-R

K R P

M 6 Ex 2

594

Determine whether each graph is connected: a

b

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

c

d


7 Ex 3

For each graph, determine whether each sequence of vertices defines a valid path: a

i E-D-C A C

B D

E b

ii

D-A-C

iii

E-F-C

iv

A-B-D

v

A-B-C

i

C-D-D

ii

D-C-D

iii

A-B-C

iv

B-C-A

v

A-D-C

i

A-B-C

ii

E-D-C

iii

B-C-C

iv

D-E-A

v

B-A-B

i

E-D-B

ii

A-E-C

iii

E-C-B

iv

A-D-C

v

B-A-E

F

A

D

C

B c

A

D

B

C E d

B

A

C

E D

7.04 Walks and paths mathspace.co

595


8

For each network, identify a path that visits every vertex exactly once: a

R

b

E

Q C S

P 9

B

T

A

List all valid paths: a

From A to D

b

From A to F

D

A

B

C D

E

10

F

Determine the number of unique paths from B to D: C

B A D

11

Determine the number of unique paths from A to D: B

A

C

E D

596

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


12

Identify a path that satisfies the given information for each network: a

The path starts at B and ends at X.

he path starts at H, goes through 4 T other vertices, and then ends at B.

b

B

B

X

Y

X

Y

W

W

Q

Q

H c

H

The path starts at Q, has length 3, and ends at P. P U

d

The path starts at P and ends at Q. U

S T

R

13

T

P

S

R

Q

Q

For each sequence of vertices, determine if it is a trail. If not, explain why: F

K R

M a

K-P-F-R-M

b

K-P-M-R-F-P-K

c

K-P-F-P-M

d

K-R-M-P

P

7.04 Walks and paths mathspace.co

597


14 Ex 4

For each network, determine if the listed vertices define a valid circuit: a

i

C-E-F-D-B-A-C-G

ii

C-E-F-G-H-D-C

iii

A-B-D-H-G-C-A

iv

E-F-G-H-D-B-E

A B

i

F-C-D-B-E-G-F

ii

E-B-A-C-D-G

C

iii

G-D-C-F-E-B-G

iv

A-B-D-C-F-A

H G F

E

D

C

B A b

D E F G 15 Ex 5

B

For each sequence of vertices, select all applicable classifications: walk, trail, path, circuit, cycle. a

Sequence: Y - B - H - W - X - Q - Y

b

Sequence: Y - B - H - W - X - Q

X Y

W Q H 16

Provide an example from the graph. If not possible, explain why. A

B

C D E F G

598

a

A walk that is not a trail

b

A trail that is not a path

c

A path that is not a cycle

d

A cycle

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Extend your thinking 17

For each list, select the odd one out and explain your choice: Walk a • b • Path • Path • Closed walk • Cycle • Cycle • Trail • Closed trail (Circuit)

18

Consider the graph shown and the vertex sequence X - Y - W - Q - B - Y - H:

X

Classify this traversal by stating all applicable terms. Explain your reasoning. • Walk • Trail • Path • Circuit • Cycle 19

Y H W

Q

B

Is it possible for a graph to have a circuit but no cycles? Provide an example or explain why not.

Did you know?

Walks and paths are essential for creating safe and accessible outdoor spaces, helping people move efficiently while reducing environmental impact! Urban planners design them by analysing pedestrian flow, terrain, and accessibility needs to create functional and inviting community spaces.

7.04 Walks and paths mathspace.co

599


7.05

Traverse connected graphs After this lesson, you will be able to… • determine whether a graph is traversable. • solve practical problems involving graph traversal. • analyse the existence of specific types of paths in connected graphs.

Eulerian and semi-Eulerian graphs Consider these graphs. Can a path be drawn that starts at one vertex and travels along each edge exactly once without lifting the pen from the paper?

Start

End

Both of the given graphs have a trail that uses every edge exactly once. The trail shown on the graph on the left is open and starts and finishes at different vertices. The trail on the graph on the right is closed, and any vertex can be the start/end. Graphs where a start can be made at a vertex and all edges drawn without the pen being lifted from the page or any edge being retraced are described as traversable. The two types of traversable graphs are Eulerian and semi-Eulerian. Eulerian graph

Semi-Eulerian graph

A connected graph that has a closed trail (Eulerian circuit) that uses every edge exactly once. A connected graph is Eulerian if and only if all its vertices have an even degree.

A connected graph that has an open trail (Eulerian trail) that uses every edge exactly once. A connected graph is semiEulerian if and only if it has exactly two vertices of odd degree.

• A closed trail is known as an Eulerian circuit. • An open trail is known as an Eulerian trail.

600

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


To determine whether a graph is Eulerian or semi-Eulerian, it is essential to examine the degrees of its vertices. The degree of a vertex is the number of edges incident to it. A loop at a vertex contributes 2 to the degree of that vertex.

Interactive exploration

Discover this concept in action online

mathspace.co

The following conditions for identifying Eulerian and semi-Eulerian graphs apply to connected graphs. A graph is considered connected if there is a path between every pair of distinct vertices. If a graph is not connected, it is impossible to traverse all its edges in a single trail. It is possible to determine if an undirected graph is Eulerian or semi-Eulerian without having to actually find the trail: • If a graph has exactly two vertices of odd degree, then the graph is semi-Eulerian. These two vertices will be the start and the end of the Eulerian trail. • If a graph has all even vertices, then the graph is Eulerian. The Eulerian circuit can start at any vertex. One even degree

Two odd degree

Example 1 Consider this network: A

B

C

D

G

F

E

a Is it possible to draw an Eulerian circuit on the diagram?

Create a strategy Check if every vertex of the network has an even degree.

7.05 Traverse connected graphs mathspace.co

601


Apply the idea Vertex

Degree

A

4

B

2

C

4

D

2

E

2

F

4

G

2

The table shows the degree of each vertex. Since the degree of each vertex is even, yes, it is possible to draw an Eulerian circuit on the network.

b Find an Eulerian circuit starting and ending with the vertex B.

Create a strategy Find a circuit that passes over all edges only once, starting and ending at vertex B.

Apply the idea

Reflect and check

Starting at B, a choice can be made to go either left or right. If A is chosen, the following circuit can be followed to cover every edge:

Trial and error may be needed to find a circuit that does not pass over the same edge twice.

Eulerian circuit: B-A-G-F-A-D-C-F-E-C-B

Eulerian circuit: B-A-G-F-E-C-D-A-F-C-B

Another solution is:

Example 2 Consider this network: A

B

C D

E

F

a Is the network Eulerian or semi-Eulerian? Select the correct statement. A B

The graph is Eulerian (it can be traversed and starts and ends at the same vertex). The graph is semi-Eulerian (it can be traversed but starts and ends at different vertices).

C

The graph is not Eulerian or semi-Eulerian

602

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Create a strategy Find the degree of every vertex.

Apply the idea The degree of each vertex is: • deg (A) = 2 • deg (B) = 3 • deg (C) = 3 • deg (D) = 4 • deg (E) = 2 • deg (F) = 2

Since exactly two vertices have an odd degree, the network is semi-Eulerian. Which means it can be traversed but starts and ends at different vertices.

So the correct answer is option B.

b Which vertex or vertices can the trail start at?

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Choose one of the two vertices of odd degree.

In part (a), the vertices of odd degree are B and C. So the trail can start at either B or C.

c Sarah has started to traverse through the graph, by moving along the vertices B, C, D. Which vertices are possible to travel to next along such a trail?

Create a strategy Draw the current trail on the graph.

Apply the idea A

Current Vertex

D

E

The dotted lines show the trail Sarah has already taken. From vertex D, she cannot return to C as that edge has been used.

C

B

Travelling to B would complete a circuit and leave other edges unvisited. Thus, the only possible next vertices are E and F.

F

7.05 Traverse connected graphs mathspace.co

603


d Determine an Eulerian trail for the network that completes Sarah’s journey.

Create a strategy Find a trail that passes over all edges only once, starting and ending at different vertices.

Apply the idea A C

B

From part (c) it is known that the trail starts with B, C, D, then can go to either E or F. A choice can be made to go to E, as shown in the diagram.

Current Vertex

Now the remaining solid edges are traversed to get the Eulerian trail:

D

B-C-D-E-F-D-B-A-C E

F

Idea summary A graph is traversable if a trail can begin at a vertex and all the edges traced without taking the pen off the page or retracing any edge. • If a graph has a closed trail that uses every edge, it is called Eulerian. A graph is Eulerian if all vertices have even degree. • If a graph has an open trail that uses every edge, it is described as semi-Eulerian. A graph is semi-Eulerian if it has exactly two vertices of odd degree.

Did you know?

Traversing connected graphs helps firefighters and emergency services plan the fastest routes during crises! By modelling roads and intersections as nodes and edges, algorithms can identify the quickest way to reach people in danger. This process saves time, resources, and, most importantly, lives.

604

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Applications of Eulerian graphs The Konigsberg bridge problem is a famous mathematical problem. Rivers broke a city into four areas and there were seven bridges that connected four regions as shown:

Euler was asked if it was possible to walk around the city crossing all of the bridges exactly once. A start or end can be made in any area.

Interactive exploration

Discover this concept in action online

mathspace.co

The Seven Bridges of Konigsberg is sometimes referred to as the start of networks as a field of mathematics. This problem of “can all of the bridges be crossed exactly once during a single trip?” is really asking “ls this network traversable?” or “does it have an Eulerian trail or circuit?” B

C

A

The Seven Bridges of Konigsberg can be represented using a network graph. The graph shows that the vertices have the following degrees: deg(A) = 5, deg(B) = 3, deg(C) = 3, deg(D) = 3. Since they all have odd degrees, there is no Eulerian trail or circuit, so the network is not traversable. This means that all of the seven bridges cannot be crossed exactly one time.

D

7.05 Traverse connected graphs mathspace.co

605


Example 3 What would happen if a new bridge was built between the northern region (B) and southern region (D) in the Seven Bridges of Konigsberg problem?

Create a strategy One edge would need to be added to the network between B and D.

Apply the idea B The Seven Bridges of Konigsberg can be represented using a network graph. The graph shows that the degrees of the vertices are: deg(A) = 5, deg(B) = 4, deg(C) = 3, deg(D) = 4. C

A

D

Since there are now exactly two vertices with odd degrees and two with even degrees, there is an Eulerian trail, so the network is traversable. This means that all eight bridges can be crossed exactly one time.

Example 4 A postman needs to deliver mail along all streets in a small neighbourhood, as shown in the network graph. The postman starts at the post office (P ) and wants to travel along each street exactly once. The vertices A and B represent street junctions. B

A

P a Can the postman travel along each street exactly once and return to the post office (P)? Explain why or why not.

Create a strategy To determine if such a route is possible, the network needs to be checked for the existence of an Eulerian circuit. This involves finding the degree of each vertex. If all vertices have an even degree, an Eulerian circuit exists, and the postman can complete the route as required.

606

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Apply the idea First, the degree of each vertex in the graph must be determined: • deg (P) = 2 • deg (A) = 4 • deg (B) = 2 All vertices have an even degree. Since all vertices in the graph have an even degree, the graph is Eulerian. This means an Eulerian circuit exists. Therefore, the postman can travel along each street exactly once and return to the post office (P).

b Suggest one possible route the postman could take, starting and ending at P.

Create a strategy Since an Eulerian circuit exists, any vertex can be a starting point. A route that traverses every edge exactly once needs to be found.

Apply the idea One possible Eulerian circuit starting and ending at P is: P → A → loop at A → B → P This can be written as the trail: P - A - A - B - P (where A - A represents traversing the loop at A). Other routes are also possible.

Idea summary Many real-world routing problems can be solved by modelling them as network graphs. A network’s traversability is determined by analysing the degree of its vertices—a technique pioneered to solve the famous Seven Bridges of Konigsberg problem.

7.05 Traverse connected graphs mathspace.co

607


7.05 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

Determine whether these networks are traversable: a

b

c

d

e

f

g

h

i

j

2

608

In each situation, decide whether the described network is: i

Eulerian (all degrees even — circuit possible)

ii

Semi-Eulerian (exactly two odd degrees — trail possible)

iii

Not traversable

a

A connected network with 6 vertices and 4 odd degrees

b

A network with 7 vertices, all with even degrees

c

A network with 8 vertices and only 2 odd degrees

d

A disconnected network, even though all degrees are even

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Practice 3

For each network, determine whether the network is traversable. Explain your reasoning. a

b

A E

D

A

B

c

D C

B

C

E

F

For each network: i

Identify which vertices can serve as starting points to traverse the network

ii

If a student starts traversing this network along the path A, B, E, list all possible next vertices to continue the Eulerian trail. Explain why other connected vertices are not suitable choices at this point.

a

A D F

B

b

A C

B E

C 5

A

B

D

4

C

E

D F

G

G

Consider the following network:

A

a

Determine if the network is traversable and explain why.

b

Which vertices can serve as starting points to traverse the network?

c

What sets apart the start and end vertices chosen in part (b) from other vertices in the network?

D

B

E

F

C 6 Ex 1

For the following traversable network:

B

A

a

ls it possible to draw an Eulerian circuit on the network? Explain your answer based on the degrees of the vertices.

b

Write an Eulerian trail starting at vertex B.

E

D

C

7.05 Traverse connected graphs mathspace.co

609


7 Ex 2

Wendy wishes to traverse the network shown. Is the network Eulerian or semi-Eulerian?

b

From which vertex or vertices can an Eulerian trail start?

c

Wendy starts to trace an Eulerian trail through the graph, by moving along the vertices D, C, B. Write the sequence of vertices that completes Wendy’s Eulerian trail.

C

B 8

D

A

a

F

E

A machine must print four different circuit boards connecting components A, B, C and D as shown. State whether each circuit board can be printed without the printer lifting from the board or retracting a path. Explain your answer. a

B

A

b

B

A

C

C

D c

B

A

C

D 9 Ex 3

d

B

A

C

D

A group of engineers is tasked with inspecting six bridges that cross a wide canal in town, as illustrated in the diagram:

After inspecting each bridge (which involves crossing it), the engineers must wait for 18 hours before the bridge can be crossed again. Starting from the car at the bottom-centre of the town, can the engineers complete inspections on all six bridges within one day without retracing over any bridge closed due to inspection?

610

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


10

A neighbourhood watch group wants to plan their security surveillance route using the network shown: a

b

11 Ex 4

A C

The route must be fuel efficient, and cover every street only once before moving to the next area. The group needs to determine if they can start at one point, cover all streets, and finish at a different point. Is such a route (an Eulerian trail) possible? Explain your reasoning by referring to the degrees of the vertices.

D

B

F

E

G

The group wants to start at Brian’s house, B, then pass Evan’s house, E, and finish at Colin’s house, C. Write an Eulerian trail for this, if possible, given the conditions in part (a).

H

A delivery driver must cover every road in a small town exactly once, starting and ending at the depot (D), as illustrated in the network diagram. The intersections are marked as X and Y.

Y

X

a

Is it possible for the delivery driver to travel along each road once and return to the Depot (D)? Explain your reasoning.

b

Determine one route for the delivery driver, starting and ending at D.

D

Extend your thinking 12

13

Jayden is training for a cross-country event and has mapped out a series of running trails through the Royal Botanic Gardens in Melbourne. He’s created a network where each vertex represents a key point (for example, entrance, statue, fountain, garden bed), and each edge represents a running trail between them.

A

B E D

F

a

Is this a trail, a path, a circuit, or a cycle? Explain your reasoning.

b

Jayden wants to design a route that begins and ends at the same location and uses every edge exactly once. Is this possible? Justify your answer using rules about traversable networks.

c

Suggest one such route for Jayden if he starts at vertex A, using vertex labels. Assume the network described has exactly two odd-degree vertices, A and C, and he wants to cover all 7 trails once, ending at C.

A postal worker in a local neighbourhood wants to walk through A a network of streets (edges) to deliver letters. Each street is only walked once, and they want to start and finish at the same location. a

Can the postal worker complete their delivery in a circuit? Why or why not?

b

What’s the minimum number of times a street would need to be walked more than once if they wanted to start and end at the same place?

c

If the postal worker must start at one of the odd-degree vertices, P, and finish at the other odd-degree vertex, Q suggest one such route using vertex labels.

D

C

C

B

F E J

G

H

I

7.05 Traverse connected graphs mathspace.co

611


7.06   Weighted graphs and networks After this lesson, you will be able to… • construct weighted graphs to represent real-world situations. • determine shortest paths in weighted graphs by inspection. • solve practical problems involving weighted networks.

Network weights Weight A number assigned to an edge in a network. It often represents a quantity such as distance, time, cost, or capacity associated with traversing that edge. Example: In a road network, the weight of an edge between two towns might be the distance in kilometres or the average travel time in minutes. Here are a few examples of how weights are assigned to network edges: • Approximate travel times, in hours, between some European capitals: Moscow

Copenhagen 7 Berlin

9

Amsterdam

9 6

9

10

Paris

10 10

6

7

6

14 Warsaw

Bern

Kiev

9 Budapest

15

10

12 15

Bucharest 13

12

10

15 Rome

14

Madrid

Ankara Athens

612

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

39

12


• Average length of bonds in acetic acid (CH3COOH), measured in angstrom:

1.10 1.23

1.34

1.10

1.43 1.10

0.96

• A simple circuit diagram, with resistances measured in ohms: Switch 220 0

0

440 560

Diode 900

Battery

LED

Sensor

220 0

0

120 Junction

LED

By assigning numerical values, or weights, to the edges of a network, more detailed information can be represented. This allows for a more insightful analysis of the relationships within the network. If a network has weights on its edges, a weight can be assigned to the whole network by summing all the edge weights. This also applies to subnetworks. Similarly, a weight can be assigned to any walk by summing the weights of the edges in the walk. The weight of a walk is sometimes called its length. 4 5

7

21

7

11 3

6 5

4 5 11 3

6

21 16

6 5

6

21

End 4 5 Start 7 11 3 6 6 5

16

16

• This network has a total weight of 4 + 5 + 7 + 3 + 6 + 6 + 11 + 5 + 16 + 21 = 84. • The subnetwork highlighted in orange has a weight of 4 + 5 + 7 + 3 + 6 = 25. • The red walk shown on the right has a weight of 3 + 5 + 16 + 11 = 35.

7.06 Weighted graphs and networks mathspace.co

613


Example 1 Consider this network: P

6 7

R

Q 2

9 4 S

5

T

a What is the weight of the edge connecting Q and S?

Create a strategy Identify the weight marked on the edge that connects vertex Q and vertex S.

Apply the idea The number 9 is written beside the edge connecting vertex Q and vertex S. So the weight is 9.

b What is the weight of the entire network?

Create a strategy Sum all the weights of the individual edges in the network.

Apply the idea Network weight = 6 + 7 + 2 + 9 + 4 + 5 = 33

Add the weights Evaluate

Idea summary A weight is a number assigned to an edge in a network, often representing quantities like distance, time, or cost. The total weight of a network (or subnetwork) is found by summing the weights of all its edges. The weight of a specific walk (its length) is the sum of the weights of the edges in that walk.

614

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Shortest path problems A common problem in networks is to find the path of lowest total weight between two specified vertices. This can involve finding the fastest, shortest, or cheapest route between two locations. Shortest path The path between two specified vertices in a weighted network that has the minimum possible total weight. Example: If path A, X, B has a total weight of 10, and path A, Y, B has a total weight of 8, and path A, Z, B has a total weight of 12, then A, Y, B is the shortest path from A to B. To find the shortest path by inspection in a small network: 1. Identify the starting and ending vertices. 2. Systematically list all distinct simple paths (paths that do not revisit any vertex) between these two vertices. 3. For each path, sum the weights of all edges along that path to find its total weight (or length). 4. Compare the total weights of all the paths found. The path with the smallest total weight is the shortest path. It is important to be systematic in listing paths to ensure no possibilities are missed. This method differs from simply picking the edge with the smallest weight at each step (a greedy approach), which does not guarantee finding the true shortest path between two specific points. Consider this network of towns: A 4 2 C

9

D

1 3

4 E

4

4

B A 4 2 9

C

D

1 4 4

B

The weights represent travel time in minutes. The objective is to travel from A to B via the optimal (fastest) path. Three possible paths are:

3 E 4

• The red path A, B takes 9 minutes. • The blue path A, C, E, B takes 2 + 4 + 4 = 10 minutes. • The orange path A, D, B takes 4 + 4 = 8 minutes. This last path is close, but town D can be reached from A even faster by taking a path through C.

7.06 Weighted graphs and networks mathspace.co

615


A 4 2 C

9

D

1

This path, A, C, D, B, takes 2 + 1 + 4 = 7 minutes, and is the quickest way to get from A to B.

3

4

E

4

4

B

The same systematic inspection strategy can be applied to directed networks. A

4

6

D

11 B

12

6 C

5

6 B

4

D

11 6

E

5

1 C

A 6

12

5

G

10

F

B

G

10

F A

Here is a directed graph. In this case, the connections are all one-way.

E

5

1

4

Further paths can be checked by considering variations of known paths. Starting from the path A, D, G, (the best found so far at 16 minutes), the trip from D to G can be improved by going through E.

D

11 5

1

6

12 E 5

C F

10

Consider a few paths from A to G: • The blue path A, F, G takes 10 + 11 = 21 minutes. • The orange path A, D, G takes 4 + 12 = 16 minutes. • The red path A, B, C, E, G takes 6 + 1 + 5 + 5 = 17 minutes.

G

Going along the path A, D, E, G takes 4 + 6 + 5 = 15 minutes, and by systematic inspection of all other simple paths, this is found to be the fastest route.

Using trial and error by listing paths is an appropriate method for solving shortest path problems by inspection. A systematic approach is crucial to ensure all relevant paths are considered and the true shortest path is found.

616

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 2 A rock band is planning a tour across several cities. The following table represents the routes and distance between the cities at which they will be performing. Starting city

Ending city

Distance

A

C

9

A

F

6

B

E

11

B

F

5

C

D

3

C

F

7

E

D

5

E

F

8

a Which of these graphs does the table represent? A

C

3

7

D

8

5

A

D

8

5 E

F 11

C

D

A 6 5

3

5

8 E

6 5 B

9 7

D B

F

A

11

E

9

7

5

8

B

9 3

D

C

3

7

9 11

5

E C

F

C

B

6

F 5

A 6 5 B

Create a strategy Compare the routes and distances in the table with each of the graphs, checking edge weights.

Apply the idea From the table, the route from A to C has a distance of 9. Thus, the edge AC must have a weight of 9. This eliminates option A. From the last row of the table, the route from E to F has a distance of 8. Option C is the only remaining graph where the edge EF has a weight of 8. So the correct answer is option C.

7.06 Weighted graphs and networks mathspace.co

617


b Using the correct graph or the table, determine the shortest path from city A to city D by inspection. Identify the path and its total distance.

Create a strategy To find the shortest path from city A to city D by inspection: 1. Identify all distinct simple paths from city A to city D. A simple path does not revisit any city. 2. For each path, sum the weights (distances) of its edges to find the total distance of the path. 3. Compare the total distances of all identified paths. The path with the smallest total distance is the shortest path.

Apply the idea From part (a), the correct graph is option C. The possible simple paths from city A to city D and their distances are: • Path A - C - D: Distance = w(AC ) + w(CD) = 9 + 3 = 12 • Path A - F - C - D: Distance = w(AF ) + w(FC ) + w(CD) = 6 + 7 + 3 = 16 • Path A - F - E - D: Distance = w(AF) + w(FE) + w(ED) = 6 + 8 + 5 = 19 • Path A - F - B - E - D: Distance = w(AF ) + w(FB) + w(BE) + w(ED) = 6 + 5 + 11 + 5 = 27 Comparing the total distances: 12, 16, 19, and 27. The smallest distance is 12. Therefore, the shortest path from city A to city D is A - C - D, with a total distance of 12.

Reflect and check The ‘solution by inspection’ method was used here to find the shortest path between two specific cities (A and D). This involved systematically listing all distinct simple paths between them, calculating the total distance for each, and then selecting the path with the minimum distance. This problem is different from finding a ‘shortest tour’ that visits all cities exactly once starting from city A. That type of problem is known as the Travelling Salesperson Problem (TSP) or finding a shortest Hamiltonian path. For such tour problems, simply choosing the next city with the lowest weight (a ‘greedy heuristic’ like the Nearest Neighbour algorithm) might seem like a good approach. However, this greedy heuristic is only an approximation and does not guarantee finding the absolute shortest tour. While greedy heuristics can provide a quick estimate for complex tour problems, finding the guaranteed shortest tour often requires more advanced algorithms. For determining the shortest path between two specified cities in a network of this size, direct inspection by listing and comparing paths is the appropriate method.

618

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Idea summary To determine the shortest path between two vertices in a weighted graph by inspection: 1. Systematically list all distinct simple paths connecting the start and end vertices. 2. Calculate the total weight (length) for each identified path by summing its edge weights. 3. The path with the smallest total weight is the shortest path. This systematic enumeration is crucial for finding the guaranteed shortest path by inspection. Relying on simpler heuristics, like always choosing the edge with the smallest immediate weight (a greedy approach), may not yield the true shortest path between two points and is not the “by inspection” method.

7.06 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

For each pair of networks, determine if Network 2 is a subnetwork of Network 1: a

Network 1

Network 2

b

Network 1

Network 2

Network 1

Network 2

c

Network 1

Network 2

d

7.06 Weighted graphs and networks mathspace.co

619


2

Determine whether each network is connected: a

b

d

e

c

Q

P

S T W g

3

f

R U V

h

i

For this network: a

Identify an edge that can be drawn to make this network connected.

b

After adding this edge, is there now a path from P to Q?

P S

Q R U

T W

V 4

For this network: a

Identify an edge that can be drawn to make this network connected.

b

After adding this edge, is there now a path from T to P?

S

U

620

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

Q

P

R

T

V

W


Practice Ex 1

5

For each network: i

Determine the weight of the edge from Q to S.

ii

Calculate the weight of the entire network.

a

P 6 R

b

13

7

Q

2

14

9 4 S

6

R

P

5

Q

6

S T

T

10

Calculate the weight of these paths in this network:

A

a

Path Y - E - D

b

Path A - B - Z - X

c

Path X - C - A - B - Z

9

7

4

U

C 1 B 3

3 3

Calculate the weight of these paths in this network: a

The path Y - W - X

b

The path Z - Y - D - C

c

The path A - W - X - Z

Z

8

W 4

6 C E 1 5 1

2

2

b

Path B - A - C - F

c

Path E - D - C - B - A

Y

3

3

2

D

Z

B

Calculate the weight of these paths: Path A - D - E - F

X

7

Consider this weighted network: a

Y

5 A

3

1 4

B 8

E

4

D

7

X

W

1

5 A 3

6 4 7 C

E

2 9

8 7

5 F

D

7.06 Weighted graphs and networks mathspace.co

621


9

Determine the weight of these subnetworks: a

Q, R, T, S

b

Edges QS, PS, ST, SU

Q R 5 7 P P

6

9

4 2

S 3

T

Q

5 6

4

9 2 T

S

8

8

3

U 10

R

7

For this network: a

Calculate the weight of the subnetwork that has only the vertices Q, T, W, and any edges between them.

b

Calculate the weight of the subnetwork formed by deleting vertices W, U, V, and S, along with all edges connected to these vertices.

U Q

9

P

6

12 S

7

13 T

8

R

14 U

11

V

5

W

11

Three friends, Sam, Tia, and Leo, live near each other. The cycling time between Sam and Tia is 8 minutes. The cycling time between Tia and Leo is 6 minutes. The cycling time directly between Sam and Leo is 12 minutes. Draw a weighted graph to represent this information.

12

A few colleagues decided to carpool on the way to work. This map displays the routes between their homes: a

Calculate the weight of the path A - B - D - E.

b

Calculate the weight of the path A - D - E.

c

Calculate the weight of the path A - D - C - E.

d

Determine the shortest path from house A to house E.

E

17

Calculate the weight of the path A - E - F - C.

b

Calculate the weight of the path A - E - C - D.

c

Calculate the weight of the path A - B - D - C.

d

Determine the shortest path from store A to store C.

17

12

A courier business has to make multiple pick-ups from several stores. The following map displays the routes between the stores: a

13

15

A

13

D

B

F 10

4 E

D

11 8

6

A Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

10

14

5 C 9

622

C

19

7

5 3 B


14

The firefighting department received an emergency call about a house fire across town. This graph shows the local town map: D

C 15

13

13

12

6

10 5

I

12 10

11 L

K

F

18

6

16

23

A 6

B

H

19

7

12 G

26

J

E

If the firefighting department is located at vertex L, and the house is at vertex A, identify the shortest route between L and A. 15

This map shows all possible routes in Mohamad’s town. Mohamad travels from his home to his friend’s house on a daily basis. C H 21 E 12

24

26 11

A 23

24

B

16

20

D

7

21

16 15 25

J

G 19

I

22

F

If Mohamad’s house is vertex C, and his friend’s house is vertex I, identify the shortest path between the two places. 16

The grocery store has to make a delivery across town. The store is known for its fast delivery. This graph represents a map of the town: B 23

15

A

21 16

11

24

D 24

21

E

13 25

C 22

7

J

26 12 20

9 F

I

G

19 H

If the store is at vertex A, and the delivery has to be made to vertex H, identify the shortest path between both vertices.

7.06 Weighted graphs and networks mathspace.co

623


17

A group is organising a tour in the park that ends with a picnic. The graph displays the map of the park: Since the tour is for the elderly, the group wants the distance from the start of the park (at vertex A), to the picnic area (at vertex J) to be as short as possible. Identify the shortest route between these two vertices.

D

19

25

6 13 7

B

If the grocery store is at vertex I, and the nearest police car is located at vertex D, identify the shortest route for the police to follow.

12

E

18

7

23

6

22

5

H

G H

13

G

26

27

10

D

F

25 13

I

7

10

12

29 11

C

J 12

29 16

C The police department receives a call about a robbery in progress at a grocery store. This graph shows the map of the town:

F 10

12

11

18

16

15

26

A

I

E

24

J

24 B

A 19

A school bus has to pick up students from a certain area. This map shows the routes connecting the students’ houses: The school bus driver wants to save as much time as possible on his route. If he starts his route at vertex D, identify the shortest path for him to take if passing by each house only once.

D

20

A logistics company needs to optimise its shipping routes between its major distribution hubs. The following table represents the available direct routes and the average shipping time in hours. a b

624

Construct a weighted graph that represents the table. Determine the shortest shipping route (in hours) from hub (S) to hub (A) by inspection. Identify the path and its total time.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

C

9

B

6

7 A

Ex 2

3

5

E

5

Start hub

End hub

Time (hours)

S

D

4

S

C

7

D

P

3

D

C

4

D

T

5

P

T

6

C

T

5

C

A

2

T

A

3


Extend your thinking 21

For each table, construct a network representing the given information: a

b

c

The amount of time it takes to queue up for three rides at an amusement park, and the amount of time it takes to travel between them: Carousel

Pirate ship

Haunted house

Carousel

3

5

4

Pirate ship

5

13

6

Haunted house

4

6

11

The number of termites observed to be moving within and between three sites in 1 hour: Nest

Plains

Forest

Nest

3570

325

1240

Plains

65

475

965

Forest

410

535

230

The number of likes that four friends give to each other’s social media posts over a week: Rick Rick

d

Fan

Zoya

Aarav

32

12

13

9

4

Fan

6

Zoya

41

53

Aarav

11

39

23 2

The fees (as a percentage) charged by a bank to convert between five types of currency: USD USD

AUS

NZD

EUR

YEN

2

5

4

4

3

5

4

7

6

AUS

2

NZD

5

3

EUR

4

5

7

YEN

4

4

6

3 3

7.06 Weighted graphs and networks mathspace.co

625


22

A local delivery service needs to plan routes between several towns. The table represents the routes and distances (in km) between the towns. Town 1

Town 2

Distance (km)

S

T

8

S

U

10

T

X

5

T

W

7

U

V

3

U

X

9

W

V

6

W

X

4

Construct a weighted graph to represent this information, and then determine the shortest route for a van to take if it starts at town S and must visit every other town exactly once. 23

A technician needs to visit several client sites. The table shows the estimated travel times (in minutes) between sites. Starting house

Ending house

Time (minutes)

A

B

11

A

F

9

A

G

3

B

F

5

B

C

10

C

E

8

C

G

6

D

E

5

D

G

5

E

G

7

Construct a weighted graph representing this information. Then, determine the quickest route for the technician if they start at site D, must make their first visit to site E, and then visit every other site exactly once.

626

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


7.07

Trees After this lesson, you will be able to… • identify trees as special types of graphs. • construct minimum spanning trees using greedy algorithms. • apply minimum spanning trees to solve practical problems.

Trees Tree A connected network that contains no cycles. These networks have a distinctly tree-like appearance:

Once a vertex is left on any of these networks, it cannot be returned to by a different path without repeating an edge, as they contain no cycles. Any connected network can have edges removed, taking care not to disconnect the network, until the result is a subnetwork that is a tree – this is then called a spanning tree. Spanning tree A subnetwork of a connected network that includes all the vertices of the original network and is also a tree (meaning it has no cycles). Here’s an example:

The network in the centre has its eight different spanning trees arranged around it. It is still possible to get from one vertex to any other, but a return path cannot be made without repeating an edge.

7.07 Trees mathspace.co

627


A connected network that isn’t already a tree can have multiple spanning trees. This network has 11 possible spanning trees: 6 4 10

5

This network has weight 4 + 6 + 5 + 2 + 3 + 10 = 30.

2 3

Here are all the spanning trees, with their weights. 6 5 10

3 Weight 24 4

5

10

3 Weight 22 6

2 10 3 Weight 21

4

6

3 Weight 18 6 4 10

3 Weight 23 6 4 10

2

2 10 3 Weight 20

6

5

10 Weight 25 6 4 2 3 Weight 15 4

5 2

10

Weight 22 5

4

5

Weight 21

4

5

2 3 Weight 14

The last spanning tree is special, since it has the lowest weight out of all of them. This is called the minimal spanning tree. Sometimes there can be two or more spanning trees with equal lowest weight, in which case they are all minimal spanning trees. Minimal spanning tree A spanning tree of a weighted, connected network that has the minimum possible total weight of all its edges.

628

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Here’s a network with two minimal spanning trees: 3

4

7 9

6 5

4

8 12

7

Finding both can be quite hard and may take a long time.

Example 1 Determine whether each graph is a tree. Justify the answer. a

A

B

C

D

E

F

Create a strategy Recall that a tree must be a connected graph and contain no cycles. Examine the graph for these properties.

Apply the idea A graph is a tree if it is connected and contains no cycles. This graph is not a tree for two reasons: 1. It is disconnected: There are pairs of vertices (for example, vertex A and vertex D) that are not connected by any path. 2. It contains a cycle: The component involving vertices D, E, and F forms a cycle. Therefore, this graph is not a tree.

7.07 Trees mathspace.co

629


b

D

A C

B

E

Apply the idea A graph is a tree if it is connected and contains no cycles. This graph is connected, as every vertex can be reached from every other vertex. However, it contains a cycle (for example, the central triangular cycle). Therefore, this graph is not a tree because it has a cycle.

c

A

C

D

B

Apply the idea This graph contains no cycles; there is no path that starts and ends at the same vertex without retracing edges. Therefore, this graph is a tree.

Idea summary Trees are connected networks that do not have cycles or loops. A spanning tree is a subnetwork of a connected network that is also a tree. It has no cycles or loops. A network has a spanning tree only if all the vertices are connected to the same network. A minimal spanning tree is a spanning tree with the lowest total weight of edges.

630

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Prim’s algorithm from a network For complex networks, it is often impractical to find a minimal spanning tree by inspection. This network, for example, represents a mycorrhizal nutrient transfer system: A 14 26

B

13

15 C

14

12

H

21

8 F 12 10 10 14 D E 33

7 G

These underground connections are created and maintained by the fungus to connect and nurture the roots of plants (represented here by the vertices) under the ground. The weights represent distance in metres.

A severe drought is affecting the area, so only the most essential connections can be sustained by the fungus. What is the shortest total distance that the mycorrhizal network needs to spread itself across, while still making sure that every plant is connected to every other one? The minimal spanning tree needs to be found. This particular network has 416 spanning trees. Determining which one is minimal by finding all of them and adding up all their weights would take a very long time. Greedy algorithm

Prim’s algorithm

A problem-solving approach that makes the locally optimal choice at each step with the hope of finding a global optimum. At each stage, the algorithm selects the best option available at that moment, without considering the overall future consequences beyond the immediate step.

A greedy algorithm used to find a minimal spanning tree for a weighted, connected graph. It builds the tree one vertex at a time, by adding the cheapest possible connection from the existing tree to a vertex not yet in the tree.

Prim’s algorithm is an example of a greedy algorithm. While this approach does not guarantee the best solution for all problems, it works effectively for finding minimal spanning trees. Another greedy algorithm for finding minimal spanning trees is Kruskal’s algorithm, though it is not covered here. Prim’s algorithm will be used to find the minimal spanning tree without having to find all the spanning trees. The algorithm was first created by Vojtech Jarník, a Czech mathematician, in 1930. Both Robert Prim (in 1957) and Edsger Dijkstra (in 1959) independently rediscovered it, though Prim’s work popularised its use. A B

13

15 C

14 26

14 12

21

F 12 10 10 14 D E 33

H 8

7 G

Begin by picking any vertex then select the edge with the lowest weight connected to that vertex. For instance, if F is picked, the lowest weight edge coming out of F is then highlighted. This edge, and the vertex on its other side, are then added to the spanning tree.

7.07 Trees mathspace.co

631


A 14 26

B

13

15 C

H

21

8

14

F 12 10 10 14 D E 33

12

The same process is repeated. Highlight the edge of lowest weight coming out of the current spanning tree. The vertex F was just a starting point; the lowest weight edge connected to the spanning tree now comes out of E.

7 G

That edge, and its vertex, are then added to the spanning tree.

A 14 26

B

13

15 C

14 12 D

12 10 33

H

21 F 10

8

7

Once again, the lowest weight edges coming out of the spanning tree are highlighted. This time, there are two candidates. Both DC and DF have weight 12.

G 14

E A

14 26

B

13

15 C

14

12 D

12 10 33

H

21

8

F 10

7

Edges connecting vertices already in the spanning tree will always be rejected.

G 14

E

However, DF cannot be used because that would create a cycle. So, the edge DC is included.

A 14 26

B

13

15 C

14 12

12 10

D

33

21 F 10 E

H 8

7

This edge does not create a cycle, so it is added into the growing spanning tree.

G

14

Next, highlight the next lowest weight edge connected to the spanning tree, which is BF.

A 14 26

B

13

15 C

14 12

10 D

632

12

33

21 F 10

14

H 8

7 G

E

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

The next lowest weight edges are all weight 14, so they are all highlighted.


A 14 26

B

13

15 C

14

12

12

7

Once again, the edge DB is rejected since it would create a cycle.

G

That leaves two choices.

8

F 10

10 D

H 21

14 E

33

A 14 26

B 15 C

14

F 10

12

12

10 D

H

21

13

8

7 G

14

Either of these can be picked. The selected edge and the vertex are added, growing the spanning tree by one vertex at each step.

E

33

A 14 26

B 15 C

14

12

21

12

F 10

10 D

H

13

8

7 G

14

Instead of returning to the edge EG of weight 14, an edge connected to the spanning tree with a lower weight, AG, is now available.

E

33

A 14 26

B

13

15 C

14

12

12

10 D

33

H 21

F 10

8

14

7

That edge is added in as before, and the lowest weight edge connecting the spanning tree to the final vertex is highlighted. This edge and vertex are added into the network, completing the procedure.

G

E A

14

B

13 C

12

10 D

H 8 F 10

7

The unused edges can be deleted for a clearer picture of the final result.

G

E

7.07 Trees mathspace.co

633


The fungus spanning tree, grown from vertex F to cover every plant in the area, covers 10 + 10 + 12 + 13 + 8 + 7 + 14 = 74 metres in total. This procedure is guaranteed to find the minimal spanning tree every time. Much easier than finding all the spanning trees and adding up all their weights. Here’s a summary of the procedure. Prim’s algorithm (from a network): 1. Pick any vertex to start the spanning tree. 2. Locate the lowest weight edge that connects a vertex currently in the spanning tree to a vertex not yet in the spanning tree. 3. Reject any edge that connects two vertices already in the spanning tree. 4. If there is more than one edge with the lowest weight, pick any of them. 5. Add this edge and the vertex at the other end to the spanning tree. If all vertices are part of the spanning tree, stop. Otherwise, repeat from step 2.

Example 2 B

7

7

C

4 8 6

A 7

E

To make a network of tracks in the shortest time, the rangers want to find a minimal spanning tree for the graph.

2 D 6

F

The rangers of a national park want to clear walking tracks to 6 landmarks in the area. The potential tracks between landmarks are shown in the graph, along with the number of days required to clear each track for use.

a Which two of the following are possible minimal spanning trees? A

B 7 7 C 4 8 6 A 7

F

634

4 6

A 7

D 6

E 2 D 6

F

B 7 7 C 4 8 A 7

7 8

E

6

B

7 C

2

F C

B

E 2 D 6

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

D

B

7

7

C

4 8 6

A 7 F

E 2 D 6


Create a strategy Use the Prim’s algorithm to test each option.

Apply the idea Applying Prim’s algorithm, starting from vertex A, allows a choice between edge AB or AF (both weight 7). Path 1 (choosing AB first): Select edge AB (weight 7). From A or B, the next shortest edge to an unvisited vertex is BE (weight 4). Then, ED (weight 2). Then, DC (weight 6). Finally, to connect F, edge EF (weight 6) is chosen over AF (weight 7). This tree (AB, BE, ED, DC, EF) corresponds to option C. Total weight: 7 + 4 + 2 + 6 + 6 = 25. Path 2 (choosing AF first): Select edge AF (weight 7). From A or F, the next shortest edge to an unvisited vertex is FE (weight 6). Then, ED (weight 2). Then, DC (weight 6). Finally, to connect B, edge EB (weight 4) is chosen over AB (weight 7), CB (weight 9) or DB (weight 8). This tree (AF, FE, ED, DC, EB) corresponds to option A. Total weight: 7 + 6 + 2 + 6 + 4 = 25. Both options A and C result in a minimal spanning tree of weight 25. So the possible minimal spanning trees are in options A and C.

b What is the minimum time taken to build a network of tracks that connect each landmark?

Create a strategy Add the weights of edges of the minimum spanning trees found in part (a).

Apply the idea In part (a), it was found that the total weight of both minimal spanning trees was 25. The minimum time taken to build a network of tracks is 25 days.

7.07 Trees mathspace.co

635


Idea summary Prim’s algorithm is a greedy algorithm that is guaranteed to find the minimal spanning tree for a weighted, connected graph. A greedy algorithm is a problemsolving approach that makes the locally optimal choice at each step to find a global optimum. Prim’s algorithm builds the tree one vertex at a time by adding the cheapest possible connection from the existing tree to a vertex not yet in the tree. The steps for Prim’s algorithm (from a network) are: 1. Pick any vertex to start the spanning tree. 2. Locate the lowest weight edge that connects a vertex currently in the spanning tree to a vertex not yet in the spanning tree. 3. Reject any edge that connects two vertices already in the spanning tree (as this would create a cycle). 4. If there is more than one edge with the lowest weight, pick any of them. 5. Add this edge and the vertex at the other end to the spanning tree. If all vertices are part of the spanning tree, stop. Otherwise, repeat from step 2.

7.07 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

2

636

In graph theory terms, define each term: a

A tree

b

A spanning tree

c

A minimum spanning tree

d

A bridge

e

A greedy algorithm

Determine whether these statements about trees are true or false: a

Adding one edge to any tree creates a new tree.

b

A tree has no Eulerian or Hamiltonian circuits.

c

If any edge is removed from a tree, it creates a disconnected graph.

d

A tree has at least one Hamiltonian circuit, but not necessarily an Eulerian circuit.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


3

Determine whether these networks have a spanning tree: a

A

b

A

D

B

B

G C

F C E

E 4

D

Draw three different graphs, each with five vertices and four edges, that are trees.

Practice 5 Ex 1

Determine whether each graph is a tree. If it is not a tree, explain why. A

A

B

D

C

A

A

B C 6

B D

B

C

A

C

B

D

Sarah has three children: Kate, Matt and Tom. Kate has four children: Lisa, Sandy, Amy and Robert. Matt has two sons: Joseph and Chris. Both Tom and Lisa have one child each: Barbara and Alex, respectively. If the starting vertex represents Sarah, create a tree to represent the parent-child relationships in this family.

7

Mitchell is tracing his family lineage back three generations: • His mother’s name is Rebecca, and his father’s name is Connor. • Rebecca’s parents are Mabel and Patrick, and Connor’s parents are Juliet and Mark. • Mitchell does not know Mabel’s parents’ names, but he knows that Patrick’s parents are April and Todd. • On the other side, Mitchell knows that Juliet’s parents are Daisy and Leonard, and Mark’s dad is called Richard. • Mitchell does not know the name of Mark’s mother, however. If the initial vertex represents Mitchell, create a family tree of the last three generations from the given information. Make sure to include any ancestors that he doesn’t know the name of using the word “Unknown”.

7.07 Trees mathspace.co

637


8

Construct a minimal spanning tree for each weighted network: a

B C 10 6

3

A

b

C A

6 7

9

1

7

5 F

8 B 3

D 4

E G

6

3

4 2

10

D

6 9

E

F 9

This weighted network shows possible connections (and associated costs, in millions of dollars) for connecting rural towns to a common cabled internet service: A

12 9 C

12

D 5

9

3

2 7

B

E 2

6 F

To minimise the cost of connecting each town to the network, determine the minimal spanning tree.

Ex 2

10

a

How many edges will be required for the minimal spanning tree?

b

Construct the minimum spanning tree.

c

Determine the minimum cost of connecting all of the towns to the service.

The direct flight routes between 5 major cities of the same country are shown in the graph. Each edge is marked with the distance (in km) travelled on each route: B 720

740

C

500

640

A

520 720 E

560

D

To optimise the investment placed into these routes, the operating airline wants to determine the minimum spanning tree for the graph.

638

a

How many edges will be a part of a spanning tree for this graph?

b

Construct the minimum spanning tree.

c

Using these flight routes, find the minimum distance connecting these major cities.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


11

At a university, there is a new plan to connect all the campus buildings using underground fibre optic cables. The network given was suggested by the engineer: G 12 F

3

7

4

E

2

5

H 3

C

B

10 A

8

11

9

K 2 4

4

D

The project accountant wants to minimise the cost of the project. He realises that there are unnecessary cables that can be removed to minimise cable length. Draw the network that connects all the buildings using the minimum possible total length of cable. 12

Water pipes need to be laid down in a new area that is undergoing construction. This pipe map was suggested: To minimise the cost, the council wants to connect every house to water, minimising the total length of water pipes used. Draw the network of pipes that connects all the houses using the minimum total length.

F D

13

9 15 11 16

17 H B 22 19 24

14

A

C 13

E

G

21

K

The bus company decided to redesign its travel routes after some new roads were built. The map shows the routes connecting the towns and the respective times (in minutes) taken to cover the route: I

19

F

51

26

48

D

17

34

29 60

A

E

21 15

10 H

33

10 G

45

C

31

43 B

The bus company wants to connect all towns with the most time-efficient route. To be as time-efficient as possible, the company needs to connect all towns using the minimum total travel time. Draw the network of routes that achieves this.

7.07 Trees mathspace.co

639


Extend your thinking 14

Urban planners are designing a new subdivision with 5 key locations (A, B, C, D, E). The possible direct road connections and their lengths (in metres) are: • A – B : 120 m • A – C : 150 m • A – D : 200 m • B – C : 90 m • B – E : 180 m • C – D : 100 m • C – E : 220 m • D – E : 130 m The urban planners wish to create roads that are most distance efficient, and allow them to connect each location. Represent this information as a weighted graph. Then, construct the minimum spanning tree that is the most distance efficient and state its total length.

15

A telecommunications company is planning to lay new fibre optic cables to connect 5 remote data centres (P, Q, R, S, T ). The costs (in thousands of units) for laying cable directly between certain pairs of centres are as follows: Connection

Cost (thousands)

P−Q

50

P−R

70

P−T

120

Q−R

40

Q−S

90

R−S

60

R−T

80

S−T

30

Note: Some pairs like P − S and Q − T have no direct link listed, meaning the cost is prohibitive or not feasible for a direct connection. To make a network of cables in the most cost-effective way, the company wants to find a minimal spanning tree.

640

a

Represent this information as a weighted graph. Then, construct the minimal spanning tree to connect all data centres.

b

Calculate the minimum cost to connect all data centres.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


16

Two park rangers, Alex and Ben, are planning a network of walking trails to connect 6 key landmarks (A, B, C, D, E, F) in a national park. They want to find a minimum spanning tree (MST) to ensure all landmarks are connected with the minimum total length of cleared trails. The available potential trails and their lengths (in km) are given in the table: Both rangers decide to use Prim’s algorithm as described in their training materials. a

b

Alex starts Prim’s algorithm from landmark A. List the trails (edges) Alex selects in the order he adds them to form his MST. What is the total length of Alex’s MST? Ben starts Prim’s algorithm from landmark F. List the trails (edges) Ben selects in the order he adds them to form his MST. What is the total length of Ben’s MST?

Trail

Length (km)

A–B

4

A–C

6

A–F

10

B–C

3

B–D

7

C–D

5

C–E

8

C–F

9

D–E

2

E–F

5

c

Compare the final set of trails selected by Alex and Ben. Are their MSTs identical in terms of the trails included? Explain why this might or might not always be the case when Prim’s algorithm is applied from different starting vertices on the same graph.

d

After their initial planning, a new survey reveals an additional potential trail between landmarks D and F, with a length of 6 km. If Alex were to re-run Prim’s algorithm (still starting from landmark A) including this new D − F trail option, would the D − F trail be part of his new MST? Justify your answer by describing the state of Alex’s MST construction at the point the D − F trail would be considered.

e

Considering the original graph (without the D − F trail from part d), suppose the cost to clear trail D − F (originally 9 km) is uncertain. What is the maximum possible length for trail C − F such that it could be included in an MST constructed by Prim’s algorithm (for example, starting from A)? Explain your reasoning, detailing how Prim’s algorithm would make its selection.

Investigation: Networks and coding

Investigate online

mathspace.co

Chapter 7 review

Online review

mathspace.co

7.07 Trees mathspace.co

641


Big ideas • The relationship between two numerical variables can be visualised and described using scatterplots, which reveal the form, direction, and strength of the association. • A strong statistical association between two variables does not by itself imply that a change in one variable causes a change in the other. • Linear models, specifically a line of good fit, can be used to approximate the trend in a scatterplot, allowing for interpretation of the relationship and for making predictions.

8 Compare numerical variables Chapter outline 8.01 8.02 8.03 8.04

Explanatory and response variables Scatterplots and correlation Association and causation Line of good fit Investigation: Answer questions with data Chapter 8 review

644 652 666 675


Two-variable statistics can show relationships between data, like the connection between temperature and ice cream sales.


8.01   Explanatory and response variables After this lesson, you will be able to… • determine whether univariate or bivariate data is required. • distinguish between explanatory and response variables in a given context. • identify appropriate variables for investigating relationships in real-world situations.

Univariate and bivariate data In statistics, data is collected to answer questions and understand patterns. The number of variables examined at a time determines the type of data and the kind of analysis that can be performed. Two fundamental types are univariate and bivariate data. Univariate data Information gathered about a single characteristic. This data can be numerical or categorical. Displays include: bar graphs, dot plots, stem-and-leaf plots, and histograms Example:

Number of students

Scores on assessments, time spent looking at social media, hours spent on an activity

12 This histogram displays numerical data of the heights of students in a class.

10 8 6 4 2 0 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 Height (cm)

There is only one characteristic (or attribute), height, that is being explored. The axes represent the attribute and the frequencies. Only the heights of different groups/bins within the data set can be compared.

Bivariate data Data represented by two variables. This data is typically numerical. It needs to be collected in a table to ensure that the two attributes are compared for the same member of the population. Example: Time versus distance, age versus height

644

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Person

Age (years)

Bone density (g/cm3)

Alia

30

1.35

Boyd

40

1.28

Cato

50

1.22

Daria

60

1.10

Eve

70

0.97

For a study about bone health, a person’s bone density is measured against their age. Each person’s age and bone density make a pair of values in the bivariate data set.

Example 1 Which of these questions can be answered by collecting univariate data? A What is the median house price in Geelong? B Do I need to file taxes every year as a part-time employee? C What is the relationship between reaction time and hours of sleep the previous night? D What is the distribution of salaries of professional rugby players in Australia?

Create a strategy For univariate data, each member of the sample or population would have one characteristic recorded.

Apply the idea Going through the options: • Option A: The characteristic that would be collected for each house in the sample would be its selling price or value. This is a single characteristic and would be different for different houses. This could be answered by collecting univariate data. • Option B: There is no characteristic being collected here. This is a fact with a single answer, univariate data would not be collected to answer it. • Option C: The characteristics being collected from each member of the sample would be reaction time and amount of sleep. There are two characteristics being compared, so this is bivariate data, not univariate. • Option D: The characteristic that would be collected for each Australian professional rugby player in the sample would be their salary. This is a single characteristic and would be different for different players. This could be answered by collecting univariate data. The correct answers are options A and D.

8.01 Explanatory and response variables mathspace.co

645


Idea summary Data can be classified by the number of variables involved: • Univariate data: Involves observations on a single variable. Its analysis focuses on describing the characteristics of that variable (e.g., its centre, spread, shape of distribution). • Bivariate data: Involves observations on two variables for each item or subject. Its analysis focuses on exploring the relationship or association between these two variables. Determining whether data is univariate or bivariate is essential for selecting appropriate methods of graphical display and statistical analysis.

Explanatory and response variables The goal of bivariate data analysis is to determine if two variables are associated in some way. The two variables studied in bivariate statistics are called the explanatory variable and the response variable. Explanatory variable

Response variable

The variable expected to explain or predict the value of the response variable.

The variable expected to respond to the value of the explanatory variable.

Amount of healthy coral

Response variable

y When displaying bivariate data graphically, with a scatterplot, the explanatory variable is plotted on the horizontal axis (the x-axis), and the response variable on the vertical axis (the y-axis).

x 0

Sea temperature

A single coordinate point in a bivariate data set might be written in the form (x, y), and it would be understood that x is the explanatory variable and y is the response variable.

Explanatory variable

646

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 2 Consider these variables: • Temperature (°C) • Number of ice cream cones sold a Which statement makes sense? A

A change in temperature affects the number of ice cream cones sold.

B

A change in the number of ice cream cones sold affects the temperature.

Create a strategy Identify which variable has an effect on the other.

Apply the idea When the temperature increases, more ice cream will be sold. So it makes sense to say that a change in temperature affects the number of ice cream cones sold. The answer is option A.

b Which is the explanatory variable, and which is the response variable? A

Explanatory variable: Number of ice cream cones sold, Response variable: Temperature

B

Explanatory variable: Temperature, Response variable: Number of ice cream cones sold

Create a strategy Use the fact that an explanatory variable is independent of the other variable; while the response variable is affected or changed by the other variable.

Apply the idea It was found in part (a) that temperature affects the number of ice cream cones sold. So, the explanatory variable would be the temperature and the response variable would be the number of ice cream cones sold. The answer is option B.

Example 3 Digital only example

Explore in the online lesson

mathspace.co

Idea summary Explanatory variable is the variable expected to explain or predict the value of the response variable. It is plotted on the horizontal x-axis. Response variable is the variable expected to respond to the value of the explanatory variable. It is plotted on the vertical y-axis.

8.01 Explanatory and response variables mathspace.co

647


8.01 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

2

3

Match each term to its correct definition by writing the corresponding letter. The variable expected to explain or a i Univariate data predict the value of another variable. b

Information gathered about a single characteristic.

ii

Bivariate data

c

The variable expected to respond to the value of the explanatory variable.

iii

Explanatory variable

d

Data represented by two variables collected in pairs for each subject.

iv

Response variable

Determine if the given statements are true or false: a

Univariate data is used to explore the relationship between two variables.

b

In a scatterplot, the response variable is conventionally plotted on the vertical (y) axis.

c

A study measuring the age and bone density of individuals collects univariate data.

d

The explanatory variable is sometimes referred to as the independent variable.

The graph shows the height of a ball after it is dropped off the side of a building: a

Which variable is the response variable?

b

Which variable is the explanatory variable?

Height

Time

Practice Ex 1

4

648

Is each an example of univariate data or bivariate data? a

How heavy are poodle dogs?

b

How many zucchinis can a single plant make in a season? Does it vary based on soil type?

c

Does the iron level in the soil impact the growth rate of dandelions?

d

Does the number of hours of natural sunlight a person gets impact their test scores?

e

How does enrollment compare between all of the different math courses that are offered?

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


6

For the given sets of variables, determine if one variable has an effect on the other: a

Arm length (cm) and weight (kg)

b

Temperature (°C) and distance from the equator (km)

c

Weekly income ($) and number of friends

d

Time of travel (minutes) and distance covered (m)

e

Age (years) and time spent watching television (hours)

f

Time spent working (hours) and wages earned ($)

g

Time spent to finish a novel (hours) and number of pages

h

Marital status and film preference

i

Height (cm) and number of children

j

Hair length and gender

k

Number of pets and time spent caring for pets (hours)

l

Time spent training (hours) and athletic performance

A group of Year 11 students was surveyed regarding their height, and the results are shown in the graph.

15

Determine whether the histogram displays univariate or bivariate data.

10

Frequency

5

5 0

Ex 2

7

Year 11 heights

135 145 155165 175 185 195 Height (cm)

Consider the variables: • Monthly advertising spend (in dollars) • Number of product units sold per month

8

a

Does the monthly advertising spend likely affect the number of product units sold per month?

b

Identify the explanatory variable and the response variable.

Consider the variables: • Ticket sales • Revenue from a show

9

a

Does the ticket sales affect the revenue made from a show?

b

Identify the explanatory variable and the response variable.

A study was performed to determine the relationship between the number of soft drinks consumed per week and the waist size of students. a

Which variable is the explanatory variable?

b

Which variable is the response variable?

c

Which variable should be put on the x-axis?

d

Which variable should be put on the y-axis?

8.01 Explanatory and response variables mathspace.co

649


10

Let the x-axis represent the time spent exercising in hours while the y-axis represents the time spent reading in 6 hours: 5 Identify the response variable from the given scatterplot. 4

y

3 2 1 0 11

x 1

2

3

4

5

6

Several young children were observed, and the number of words known was recorded in the table: Number of words known

51

29

50

10

14

24

58

Age (in months)

26

21

25

18

17

19

26

Which variable is the response variable? 12

An equation to predict the population P of a suburb, based on the area A (in km2), is: P = 6100 + 2400A Which variable is the response variable?

13

In a study on basketball players, it was found that the response variable is the number of 3-point shots scored. Which variable is most likely to be the explanatory variable?

14

15

650

A

Points scored in each game

B

Number of games won

C

Number of teams playing

D

Time spent training (hours)

A café owner wants to determine the most popular coffee type sold on a typical Monday. a

What type of data does the owner need to collect to find out the most popular coffee type on a typical Monday?

b

What variable(s) should the owner record to determine the most popular coffee type?

A school sports coordinator collects data on student athletes, including their main sport, hours of training per week, and their resting heart rate. a

If the coordinator wants to find the average resting heart rate of all student athletes, what type of data analysis (univariate or bivariate) is needed for this specific goal, and which variable(s) would be used?

b

If the coordinator wants to see if there is a connection between hours of training per week and resting heart rate, what type of data analysis (univariate or bivariate) is needed, and which variable(s) would be used?

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


16

A person’s hand span can be predicted from their height using the equation: 2.78 + 0.45 × Height = Hand span Which variable is the explanatory variable?

17

A kite can rise to a height of 40 m when the wind is blowing at 18 km per hour and to a height of 80 m when the wind is blowing at 36 km per hour. Identify the response and explanatory variables.

18 Ex 3

A teacher wants to investigate the relationship between the number of hours spent watching TV and the results of a mathematics test for the students in her class. The results will be displayed in a scatterplot. Determine if each set of axes shows the correct set-up for the explanatory and response variables: a

b 100 TV watched (hours)

Test score (%)

10 8 6 4 2 0

19

2 4 6 8 10 TV watched (hours)

80 60 40 20 0

20 40 60 80 100 Test score (%)

The drama department is making costumes for their school’s upcoming musical. The amount of materials needed for costumes will be determined by the number of performers in the musical. Determine if the given statements are true or false: a

The explanatory variable cannot be determined without further information.

b

The number of performers is the explanatory variable.

c

The time spent making costumes is the explanatory variable.

d

The amount of materials needed is the explanatory variable.

Extend your thinking 20

In a study on houses, it was found that an explanatory variable was the amount of money spent on renovations. Give an example of a possible response variable.

21

For each scenario, identify the response variable and the explanatory variable: a

A proposed area of research has the title “Can a person’s age be used to predict how much time they spend exercising each day?”

b

A group of students is investigating how effective different bacterial soaps are at killing germs.

c

A student observes a relationship between petrol prices and the day of the week.

8.01 Explanatory and response variables mathspace.co

651


22

The sale of ice cream at a grocery store was recorded each day during summer and winter. A parallel box plot was constructed, with no labels:

0

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30

Is the response variable or explanatory variable shown on the horizontal axis? Explain your answer. The back-to-back stem-and-leaf plot shows the speed (km/h) of car drivers and motorcycle riders, as recorded on a road with a 60 km/h speed limit.

23

Identify the response variable and the explanatory variable. Explain your answer.

Car drivers

Motorcycle riders

8

4

864

5

89

5400

6

03568

7

3

Key 4|5 = 45

Key 5|8 = 58

8.02   Scatterplots and correlation After this lesson, you will be able to… • construct scatterplots to display relationships between numerical variables. • describe associations in terms of direction, form, and strength.

Scatterplots and correlation An association between two variables refers to any relationship or pattern observed between them. A correlation is a specific type of association that describes the strength and direction of a linear relationship. Scatterplots are used to display relationships and patterns between two variables.

652

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Scatterplot A visual representation of bivariate numerical data. One numerical variable (the explanatory variable) is measured along the x-axis, the other (the response variable) along the y-axis. Each data point is represented as a coordinate in the plane, representing the values for each of the two variables.

Interactive exploration

Discover this concept in action online

mathspace.co

There are three things to focus on when analysing a scatterplot: • Form • Strength • Direction The form of a scatterplot refers to the type or shape of relationship that appears between two variables. This can be identified by the overall pattern of the data points. • A linear form occurs when the points lie roughly along a straight line. This suggests a constant rate of change between the two variables and is the most common form studied in early statistics. y

Linear

x 0 • A non-linear form occurs when the points follow a curved or other non-straight pattern. Some simple examples include: y

Quadratic

y

x

x 0 A quadratic form (U-shaped or inverted U-shaped).

Exponential

0

An exponential form, where the data points show rapid increase or decrease.

8.02 Scatterplots and correlation mathspace.co

653


Logarithmic

Reciprocal

y

y

x

0

x

0 A logarithmic form, where the rate of change slows down as one variable increases.

A reciprocal relationship decreases very quickly and then flattens out.

The direction of the scatterplot refers to the pattern shown by the data points. The direction of the pattern can be described as having positive correlation, negative correlation, or no correlation: • Positive correlation • A positive correlation occurs when the response variable increases as the explanatory variable increases. • From a graphical perspective, this is similar to a line with a positive gradient. • Negative correlation • A negative correlation occurs when the response variable decreases as the explanatory variable increases. • From a graphical perspective, this is similar to a line with a negative gradient. • No correlation • No correlation describes a data set that has no relationship between the variables. • This can be totally unrelated data, or data that indicates no change of response variable as the explanatory variable changes (like a horizontal straight line, which has zero gradient). The strength of a linear correlation relates to how closely the points resemble a straight line. • If the points lie exactly on a straight line, then there is said to be a perfect correlation. • If the points are scattered randomly, it can be said that there is no correlation. Most scatterplots will fall somewhere in between these two extremes and will display a weak, moderate or strong correlation. y

Perfect positive correlation

y

x

x 0

654

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

Perfect negative correlation

0


y

Strong positive correlation

Strong negative correlation

y

x

x 0

0 y

Weak positive correlation

y

Weak negative correlation

x

x

0

0 No correlation

No correlation

y

y

x

x

0

0

Test score

65 The strength of the correlation can be determined by how closely packed the points are to each other on the graph shown. Points that end up far outside the general cluster of points are known as outliers.

60 55

0

1

2 3 4 Hours studied

5

8.02 Scatterplots and correlation mathspace.co

655


Example 1 Digital only example

Explore in the online lesson

mathspace.co

Example 2

Amount of healthy coral

The scatterplot shows the relationship between sea temperature and the amount of healthy coral:

8 6 4 2 0

2 4 6 8 Sea temperature

a Describe the correlation between sea temperature and the amount of healthy coral. Create a strategy Describe what happens to the coral (response variable) as the sea temperature (explanatory variable) increases.

Apply the idea The sea temperature increases from left to right. The graph shows that the amount of healthy coral decreases (falls) from left to right. So, as the sea temperature increases, the amount of healthy coral decreases. This indicates a negative linear relationship between the variables.

b Which variable is the response variable? A

Amount of healthy coral

B

Sea temperature

Create a strategy The response variable is placed on the vertical axis and is affected by the explanatory variable.

Apply the idea The amount of healthy coral is determined by sea temperature and is on the vertical axis, making it the response variable. So, the correct answer is option A.

656

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


c Which variable is the explanatory variable? A

Amount of healthy coral

B

Sea temperature

Create a strategy An explanatory variable is a variable that stands alone and is not changed by the other variables being measured.

Apply the idea From the previous part, it is known that the amount of healthy coral is the response variable. Therefore, the sea temperature is the explanatory variable. The correct answer is option B.

Example 3 The table shows the number of traffic accidents associated with a sample of drivers of different age groups: Age

20

25

30

35

40

45

50

55

60

65

Accidents

41

44

39

34

30

25

22

18

19

17

a Construct a scatterplot to represent the given data. Create a strategy Draw the scatterplot by plotting each point from the table.

Apply the idea 45

Accidents

40 35

Age is the explanatory variable, so it is plotted on the horizontal axis. So ‘Accidents’ should be put on the vertical axis.

30 25

So, the first row from the table corresponds to the point (20, 41) on the graph.

20 0

20 25 30 35 40 4550 55 60 65 70 Age

8.02 Scatterplots and correlation mathspace.co

657


b Is the correlation between a person’s age and the number of accidents they are involved in positive or negative? Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Check the trend of the data on the scatterplot.

Based on the scatterplot, as one variable increases, the other decreases. So, the correlation between a person’s age and the number of accidents is negative.

c Is the correlation between a person’s age and the number of accidents they are involved in strong or weak? Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Check how closely clustered the data points are.

Since the points on a scatterplot tend to follow a single line, the correlation is strong.

d Which age group’s data represent an outlier? A

30-years-olds B   None of them

C

65-years-olds D  20-years-olds

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Check on the scatterplot if any points are positioned away from the rest of the data.

Based on the scatterplot, there is outlier. So, the correct answer is option B.

Idea summary An association is any relationship observed between two variables. A correlation is a specific type of linear association. A scatterplot is used to visualise the relationship between two numerical variables. When analysing a scatterplot, consider its: • Form: The shape of the relationship (e.g., linear or non-linear). • Direction: Whether the association is positive, negative, or there is no clear direction. • Strength: How closely the points follow the form (e.g., perfect, strong, moderate, weak). For linear relationships: • A positive correlation exists when one variable tends to increase as the other increases. • A negative correlation exists when one variable tends to decrease as the other increases. • There is no correlation when there is no apparent relationship between the variables. Points that lie far outside the general pattern of the data are known as outliers.

658

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


8.02 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

For each scatterplot, describe the correlation as positive or negative: a

y 1.2

b

1.2

1

1

0.8

0.8

0.6

0.6

0.4

0.4

0.2

0.2 x

0 c

x

0

5 10 15 20 25 30 35

y 1.2

y

d

1.2

1

1

0.8

0.8

0.6

0.6

0.4

0.4

5 10 15 20 25 30 35 y

0.2

0.2 x 0 2

x 0

5 10 15 20 25 30 35

5 10 15 20 25 30 35

For each scatterplot, describe the correlation as perfect, strong, weak, or no correlation: a

y

b

y

x

x 0

0 c

y

d

y

x 0

0

x

8.02 Scatterplots and correlation mathspace.co

659


3

Describe the form of the association shown in each scatterplot. Is the relationship linear or non-linear or no relationship? a

y

b

y

4

6

2 –1.5–1.0–0.50

4

x

2

0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0

–2

x –3 –2 –1 0

–4 c

y

d

2

3

y

2 x

–2

2

4

1 –1 0 –1

6

1

1

x

0

2

1

–2

2

3

4

5

6

–4

–2

–6

4

Consider these three scatterplots: A

y

x

0 C

B

y

x 0

y

0

x

All of them show a positive relationship between two variables, but the strength of the correlation varies. Arrange the scatterplots (A, B, C) from weakest to strongest positive correlation. Justify the ordering by explaining how closely the data points cluster around a straight line in each plot.

660

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Practice 5 Ex 1

Jack is tracking the growth of his new plant. He measures the height of the plant each week and records it in a table. Construct a scatterplot for the set of data in the table to show the plant’s growth over time:

6

1

2

3

4

5

Height in cm (y)

4

7

9

11

14

For each pair of variables: i

Is there likely a relationship between the two variables?

ii

If applicable, determine whether there is a positive or negative correlation between the two variables.

a

Typing speed and dancing ability

b

Temperature and ice cream sales

c

Time spent studying and exam grade

d

Eye colour and IQ

e

Temperature and soup sales

f

Rainfall and traffic accidents

g

Height and weight

h

Age and hearing ability

According to the scatterplot shown, describe the relationship between someone’s vision and their height in cm.

10 y

Vision

7

Week (x)

0 140

8

x 160 180 200 Height

Scientists conducted a study where each person was asked to read a paragraph and then recount as much information as they could remember. They found that the longer the paragraph, the less information each person could retain. If the length of the paragraph were plotted (on the horizontal axis) against the amount of information retained (on the vertical axis), would the graph show a positive or negative relationship?

9

The scatterplot shows the relationship between air and sea temperature: a

Describe the correlation between air and sea temperature.

b

Which variable is the response variable?

c

Which variable is the explanatory variable?

y Sea temperature

Ex 2

35 30 25 x 0

25 30 35 40 Air temperature

8.02 Scatterplots and correlation mathspace.co

661


10

The land size of a sample of properties and their selling price were graphed on the scatterplot:

Price (dollars)

1 200 000

y

1 000 000 800 000 600 000 400 000 200 000 x 0

a

b

Ex 3

11

12

662

1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 Size (square metres)

Which size range contains the most properties? A

4500 − 5500 m2

B

1500 − 2500 m2

C

2500 − 3500 m2

Another property that is not represented in the scatterplot sold for $704 000 and measured 3600 m2 in size. Is this consistent with the relationship shown in the graph?

The table shows the average hours of exercise per week and the resting heart rate (beats per minute) for a sample of individuals: Hours of exercise per week

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Resting heart rate

78

75

70

66

62

60

57

54

70

50

a

Construct a scatterplot for this data.

b

Describe the correlation between the hours of exercise per week and resting heart rate based on the scatterplot.

c

Does this data set appear to contain any outliers? If so, identify the data point.

The table shows the average IQ of a random group of people against their height: Height (cm)

140

145

150

155

160

165

170

175

180

185

IQ

103

95

98

111

85

89

108

145

110

93

a

Construct a scatterplot using the data from the table.

b

Is IQ and height negatively correlated, positively correlated, or not correlated?

c

How tall is the person who appears to be an outlier?

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


13

14

15

16

Scientists were looking for a relationship between the number of hours of sleep individuals receive and the effect it has on motor and process skills. Some subjects were asked to sleep for different amounts of time, and were all asked to undergo the same driving challenge in which their reaction time was measured. The data are recorded in the table: Amount of sleep (hours)

9

6

4

10

3

7

2

5

Reaction time (seconds)

3

3.3

3.5

3

3.7

3.2

3.85

3.55

a

Construct a scatterplot using the data from the table.

b

Is amount of sleep and reaction time negatively correlated, positively correlated, or not correlated?

c

According to the results, does an increased amount of sleep generally lead to improved reaction times?

A researcher is studying the relationship between the number of passers-by present in a situation and the time taken, in seconds, until a stranger in an emergency receives help from a passer-by. The data are recorded in the table shown: Number of passers-by (n)

1

2

3

4

5

6

Time until help is offered (t)

8

19

26

37

51

65

a

Construct a scatterplot using the data from the table.

b

As more passers-by are present what happens to the time taken until help is offered?

c

Describe the correlation between the number of passers-by and the time until assistance is offered.

d

Does the scatterplot contain any outliers?

The table shows the marks of 12 students in Maths and Sports: Student

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Maths

63

92

60

79

88

81

61

91

72

42

66

92

Sports

44

74

52

70

67

60

73

86

84

93

57

92

a

Construct a scatterplot for the students’ marks in Maths vs their marks in Sports.

b

Describe the correlation between students’ marks in Maths and marks in Sports.

c

Which student’s scores appear to represent an outlier?

The table lists the time taken to sprint 400 m by runners who all ran in different temperatures as part of a study: Temperature (°C)

5

2

10

8

1

7

6

4

3

9

Time (s)

60

67

48

69

65

49

57

53

59

52

a

Construct a scatterplot to represent the data in the table.

b

How many runners were tested in the study?

c

Describe the correlation between temperature and sprint time for the data.

d

Which data point represents an outlier?

8.02 Scatterplots and correlation mathspace.co

663


17

18

To determine whether the presence of sharks in a coastal region is influenced by cage diving, the number of nearby cage diving operations and the number of nearby shark sightings was recorded each month over several months. The results are shown in the table: Cage diving operations

10

2

4

7

8

5

1

9

6

3

Shark sightings

4

3

5

4

1

4

5

7

10

8

a

Construct a scatterplot using the data from the table.

b

Describe the correlation between the number of shark sightings and the number of cage diving operations.

c

According to the data, is it possible to determine whether cage diving operations encourage more sharks to come near the shoreline?

The market price of bananas varies throughout the year. Each month, a consumer group compared the average quantity of bananas supplied by each producer to the average market price (per unit): Supply (kg)

550

600

650

700

Price (dollars)

15.25

14.75

14.75

14.75 14.25 14.00 13.75 13.25 13.50 13.25

750

800

850

900

950

1000

a

Construct a scatterplot using the data from the table.

b

Describe the correlation between the supply quantity and the market price of bananas.

c

According to this data, when will a supplier of bananas receive a higher price per banana?

Extend your thinking Yvonne has a high income but does not like her job. Which dot is most likely to represent Yvonne?

y Job satisfaction

19

2

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

3

1

x 0

664

4

Income


20

21

2

1

% that got Q10 correct 3

4

x 0 % that got Q7 correct

According to the graph, who is correct: Lachlan or the teacher?

b

Assume that Lachlan performed exceptionally well in every other question. If a whole class of students had the same result as Lachlan, where could this class’s results appear on the scatterplot: region 1, 2, 3 or 4?

Consider the scatterplot: a

Explain why the correlation between the variables is weak.

b

Determine whether the following pairs of variables could be represented by the data set:

y

i

arks in an English examination and distance travelled M from home to school.

ii

Cost of cars and cost of petrol.

iii

Distance travelled in a car and the cost of a driver’s license. 0

x

Lousia is interning at a health insurance company and sees that medical expenses vary a lot by person. With permission, she uses anonymised data (to protect privacy) to create a model for annual medical expenses at different ages. 36 000 y 32 000 28 000 24 000 20 000 16 000 12 000 8000 4000 0

23

y

a

Annual medical expenses

22

After a mathematics exam, Lachlan commented that he left out Question 10 because it was not relevant to the topics that were assessed, but that the other questions were fine. The teacher felt that Question 10 and Question 7 were assessing the same skills, so she decided to look at the results of students across all 8 classes. She plotted the percentage of students who answered Question 10 correct against the percentage who answered Question 7 correct:

x 10

20

30

40 50 60 Age Male Female

70

80

90

a

Compare the trends of medical expenses for males and females based on the given data. Include a discussion of whether the trends are the same for the whole data set or if different age brackets tell a different story.

b

Identify at least one outlier and give a possible explanation.

Construct a scenario with data that suggests a weak positive relationship between two variables. Justify why the relationship may be weak.

8.02 Scatterplots and correlation mathspace.co

665


8.03   Association and causation After this lesson, you will be able to… • explain the difference between correlation and causation. • identify examples of correlations that do and do not indicate causation. • evaluate claims about relationships between variables in real-world contexts.

Correlation and causation Association

Causation

A relationship between two variables. Two variables are associated if one variable tends to vary in a particular and predictable way as the other changes.

A relationship between two variables in which a change in one variable directly produces a change in the other. Randomised controlled trial (RCT)

Confounding variable The third factor (variable C) that influences both variable A and variable B, potentially creating a false impression of a direct relationship between them.

An experiment that uses random assignment to test whether a treatment causes an outcome, helping distinguish causation from mere correlation.

Correlation A statistical measure that describes the strength and direction of a relationship between two variables.

Did you know?

Students who play musical instruments often get better marks in maths! Practising music helps build focus and problem-solving skills, which can improve learning in many subjects.

666

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Exploration Consider this scatterplot which shows the amount of chocolate consumed per capita in a particular country versus the number of Nobel Prizes awarded to that particular country per 10 million people:

Nobel laureates per 10 million population

y 40 r = 0.791

35

Switzerland

Sweden

30

Denmark Norway

Austria

25

United Kingdom

20 The Netherlands 15 Belgium Portugal Canada Poland 10 Japan 5 China Greece 0

1

2

3

United States France

Ireland

Germany

Finland

Australia Italy Spain Brazil

x

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Chocolate consumption (kg/yr/capita)

13

14

15

The graph suggests a strong association between higher chocolate consumption and a larger number of Nobel Prizes. Consider these questions: 1. Does this mean eating chocolate before every exam will lead to improved marks? 2. Is this likely a causal relationship? 3. Based on the graph, describe the relationship observed between per capita chocolate consumption and the number of Nobel laureates per 10 million population. 4. If a country decided to massively increase its chocolate consumption, would this graph alone be enough evidence to predict an increase in their Nobel Prize count? Explain the reasoning. 5. Besides chocolate consumption directly causing Nobel Prizes, brainstorm at least two other possible explanations for why these two variables might be strongly associated as shown in the graph.

As shown in the example of chocolate consumption and the number of Nobel Prize Laureates, just because two variables are correlated does not mean one causes the other. The essential message is that correlation does not imply causation.

8.03 Association and causation mathspace.co

667


Often, an apparent link is caused by a third factor, known as a confounding variable. For instance, ice cream sales and drownings are correlated because both increase during hot weather. This is why media reports claiming a “link” between two variables should be viewed with scepticism. To move from correlation to proving causation, a more rigorous approach is needed. Scientists often use a randomised controlled trial (RCT), where participants are randomly assigned to different groups to test if a specific change in one variable directly causes a change in another.

Example 1 A study found a strong correlation between the approximate number of pirates out at sea and the average world temperature. a Does this mean that the number of pirates out at sea has an impact on world temperature?

Apply the idea Just because there is a correlation does not mean there is causation. It would not make sense that pirates being out to sea would affect world temperature. The answer is no.

b Which is the most likely explanation for the strong correlation? A

ontributing variables: There are other causal relationships and variables that come in C to play and these may lead to an indirect positive association between the approximate number of pirates out at sea and the average world temperature.

B

oincidence: There are no other contributing factors or reasonable arguments to be made C for the strong positive association between the approximate number of pirates out at sea and the average world temperature.

Create a strategy Think about whether there are any common factors between the variables.

Apply the idea There does not seem to be any common factors that have a direct relationship with both the number of pirates out at sea and the average world temperature. It is more reasonable to put it down to coincidence. The answer is option B.

c Which is demonstrated by the strong correlation between the approximate number of pirates out at sea and the average world temperature? A

If there is correlation between two variables, then there must be causation.

B

If there is correlation between two variables, there is not necessarily causation.

C

If there is correlation between two variables, then there is no causation.

Apply the idea Option B is demonstrated: if there is correlation between two variables, there is not necessarily causation. The answer is option B.

668

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 2 Which option best describes each context? A Causation: A causes B B Causation: B causes A C Confounding variable C causes A and B D Correlation only: A and B are associated E No association Nobel prizes per 10 mil people

a y

SWE CHE

30

20 10

0

USA

DEU

FRA FIN CAN BEL AUS ESP JPN GRC CHN

AUT NOR GBR IRL NLD

DNK

x

20 40 Prevalence of luxury cars per 1000

60

Create a strategy Look for whether the plot shows mere association or suggests a plausible causal link, and consider if a third variable might explain both variables being compared.

Apply the idea The link between the prevalence of luxury cars and Nobel Prizes is most likely a case where C causes both A and B. The variable C in this case is wealth — richer countries have more citizens who can afford luxury cars, and these countries also have more money to spend on high-level education and research. In this case, the apparent link between luxury cars and Nobel Prizes is explained by the fact that wealthier countries tend to have more of both, compared to poorer countries. The correct answer is option C.

8.03 Association and causation mathspace.co

669


Global average temperature (°C)

b y

Global average temperature vs. Number of pirates

16.5 16 15.5

1980

15

2000

1940

14.5 14

1820

1880

1860

1920

13.5

x

0 35 000

45 000

20 000

15 000

5000

400

17

Number of pirates (approximate)

Create a strategy Determine whether there is any logical or scientific basis for one variable causing the other, or if the association is likely spurious or coincidental.

Apply the idea The graph shows a strong inverse correlation between the number of pirates and global average temperature over time, but there is clearly no causal link between piracy and climate change. This is a classic example of a spurious correlation where both variables happen to change over time due to unrelated reasons. The correct answer is option E.

Idea summary An association or correlation between two variables indicates a relationship, but it does not automatically imply causation. This is a critical principle in statistics: correlation does not imply causation. Often, a strong correlation can be explained by a third, unobserved factor known as a confounding variable. This variable influences both of the observed variables, creating the illusion of a direct link. For example, ice cream sales and drownings are correlated because both increase in hot weather (the confounding variable). To establish that a change in one variable directly causes a change in another, a more rigorous scientific method is needed. The gold standard for proving causation is the randomised controlled trial (RCT).

670

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


8.03 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

2

3

4

Determine if each statement about correlation and causation is true or false: a

If two variables are correlated, it means that one variable directly causes a change in the other variable.

b

Causation implies that there will be an observable correlation between the two variables.

c

A strong positive correlation between variable A and variable B means that an increase in variable A causes an increase in variable B.

d

It is possible for two variables to have no correlation but still have a causal relationship.

e

“Correlation does not imply causation” means that if two variables are correlated, they can never have a causal relationship.

Match each term on the left with its correct definition. a

Causation

i

statistical association that indicates A the extent to which two variables tend to change together.

b

Confounding (third) variable

ii

n unobserved factor that affects both A variables being studied, making them appear related.

c

Correlation

iii

relationship where a change in one A variable is directly responsible for a change in another variable.

Determine whether these are examples of variables with no correlation: a

The age of a child and their shoe size

b

The age of a child and their height

c

The daily rainfall in Melbourne and the price of bread in London

d

The age of a child and the number of adjectives learned

Determine if each statement is true or false: a

There is a causal relationship between the number of times a coin lands on heads and the likelihood that it lands on heads on the next flip.

b

There is a causal relationship between the amount of weight training a person does and their strength.

8.03 Association and causation mathspace.co

671


The scatterplot shows the relationship between the number of hours a student spent studying for a mathematics test and the score (%) they achieved on that test. Describe the association shown in the scatterplot in terms of its strength, direction, and form.

Test score (%)

5

100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Hours studied

Practice 6

7

8

Ex 1

9

672

The table shows the number of fans sold at a store during days of various temperatures: Temperature (°C)

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

Number of fans sold

12

13

14

17

18

19

21

23

a

Describe the correlation between the temperature and the number of fans sold (positive, negative, or no correlation).

b

Is there a causal relationship between the variables? Explain your answer.

Determine whether each describes a relationship that is just an association, or is causation: a

The sales of ice cream and sales of fans

b

The number of hours worked and how much money is made for a given person

c

The amount of showers had in a day and the amount of the water bill

d

The amount of rainfall received and level of water in a lake

e

The larger the dimensions of a rectangular verandah, the larger the area

f

The season of the year and the number of water-related injuries

g

Increase in temperature and the level of mercury in a thermometer

For each scenario, does the first variable described directly cause a change in the second variable described? a

An individual’s decision to work in construction and his diagnosis of skin cancer

b

The number of minutes spent exercising and the amount of calories burned

c

A decrease in temperature and the increase in attendance at an ice skating rink

d

A child’s weight and their vocabulary

A market research firm reported a strong positive correlation between the annual global sales of athletic footwear and the number of new satellites successfully launched into orbit each year. a

Does this mean that increased sales of athletic footwear cause more satellites to be launched?

b

Is the strong correlation found likely a coincidence, or could there be another explanation? Explain your answer.

c

If a strong correlation is observed between two variables, does it automatically imply that one variable causes the other?

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


10

It is discovered that the number of crimes recorded in a city in a given week correlates with the percentage of a city’s population that is homeless. The correlation is strong and positive. Is there a causal relationship between the two variables? Explain your answer.

11

For each scenario presented, identify the option that best describes the relationship between variable A and variable B:

a

b

12

Number of babies born (B)

• Causation: A causes B • Causation: B causes A • Confounding variable C causes A and B • Correlation only: A and B are associated • No association

Crop growth (cm/week) (B)

Ex 2

500 400 300 200 100 0

60 20 80 40 Number of storks observed (A)

100

20 40 10 30 Average weekly rainfall (mm) (A)

50

10 8 6 4 2 0

The scatterplot shows the relationship between the height of water (H) in a lake measured after an amount of rainfall (R) in the area:

6

a

Describe the correlation between the variables.

5

b

Is there a causal relationship between the variables? Explain your answer.

4

7

H (m)

3 2 1

R (m3)

0

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

8.03 Association and causation mathspace.co

673


13

14

15

16

674

The table shows the concentration of H+ ions in a chemical solution and the pH of the solution: Concentration

0.0001

0.0005

0.001

0.005

0.01

0.05

pH

4

3.3

3

2.3

2

1.3

a

Describe the correlation between the variables.

b

Given that the pH is calculated using the concentration of H+ ions, determine whether there is a causal non-linear relationship between these two variables.

The table shows the estimated per capita consumption of flat white coffees in Australia and the corresponding number of students enrolled in creative arts university courses in Australia each year: 2010

2011

2012

2013

2014

2015

2016

2017

2018 2019

Flat white consumption (per capita)

1.5

1.7

1.8

2.0

2.2

2.3

2.5

2.7

2.8

3.0

Creative arts enrolment

45

48

50

53

55

57

60

63

65

68

a

Describe the correlation between the two variables.

b

Is there a causal relationship between the two variables? Explain your reasoning.

The table of values describes the estimated number of active household landline phone connections (in millions) in a country and the estimated annual per capita consumption of smashed avocado on toast servings in its cafés: 2012

2013

2014

2015

2016

2017

2018

2019

Landline connections (millions)

10.2

9.5

8.7

7.8

7.0

6.1

5.5

5.1

Avocado servings (per capita)

8

10

13

17

20

24

27

30

a

Describe the correlation between the two variables.

b

Is there a causal relationship between the two variables? Explain your reasoning.

The table shows the number of hours of sunlight per day and the average mood score reported by a group of people: Hours of sunlight

6

7

8

9

10

11

Average mood score

50

55

60

65

70

75

a

Describe the correlation between the hours of sunlight and the average mood score.

b

Is there a causal relationship between the two variables? Explain your answer.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Extend your thinking 17

Consider two observed relationships: • Relationship A: A strong positive correlation between the dosage of a specific medicine and the reduction in a patient’s blood pressure. • Relationship B: A strong positive correlation between a city’s number of public parks and its average air quality. Which of these relationships is more likely to involve direct causation? Justify your reasoning by explaining the potential for confounding variables in the other relationship.

18

19

Create your own realistic example of a scenario where two variables are correlated due to a confounding variable: a

Name two variables that are correlated and determine the direction of the correlation.

b

Identify the confounding variable and explain how it influences both chosen variables.

Data from a high school shows a negative correlation between the number of hours spent on social media and a student’s science test scores: a

Propose a direct causal explanation.

b

Propose a reverse causation explanation.

c

Propose a confounding variable explanation.

8.04

Line of good fit

After this lesson, you will be able to… • draw a line of good fit by eye on a scatterplot. • determine the equation of a line of good fit using technology. • calculate and interpret the slope and intercept of the line of good fit. • make predictions using the line of good fit, considering the appropriateness of interpolation and extrapolation.

Line of good fit A line of good fit (or “trend” line) is a straight line that well represents linear trend in the data on a scatterplot. The slope of the line can be used to determine whether there is a positive, negative or no linear relationship between the two variables. Lines of good fit can help to identify the strength of the relationship and can be used to make predictions. When drawing a line of good fit by eye, the aim is to position the line so that it represents the general trend of the data. Note that different individuals might draw slightly different lines of good fit by eye, which is acceptable as long as the line reasonably reflects the data’s trend.

8.04 Line of good fit mathspace.co

675


To draw a line by eye: • Balance the number of points above and below the line. • Try to minimise the overall vertical distances from each point to the line. • The line should appear to pass through the centre of the data points. To find the equation of the line of good fit by eye: 1. Choose two points: Carefully select two distinct points that lie directly on the line of good fit that was drawn. For best results, choose points that are reasonably far apart and whose coordinates can be read as accurately as possible from the graph’s scales. These points do not need to be original data points; they must be points on the drawn line. Let these points be (x1, y1) and (x2, y2). 2. Calculate the slope (b): Use the coordinates of the two chosen points to calculate the slope. The slope represents the rate of change of y with respect to x. b

Rise Run

y2 x2

y1 x1

3. Find the y-intercept (a): Substitute the calculated slope and the coordinates of one of the chosen points (e.g., (x1, y1) ) into the equation of a straight line, y = a + bx. Then, solve this equation for a. 4. Write the equation: Substitute the calculated values of the slope, y-intercept, and relevant variables into the general form y = a + bx to state the equation of the line of good fit. Since the initial line is drawn by eye, the points selected from it and the resulting equation may vary slightly between individuals. This variation is a natural aspect of fitting a line by eye. The key is that the derived equation should provide a reasonable model for the observed data trend. Using technology will typically result in a unique line of good fit or linear regression model.

Example 1 The scatterplot shows the data for two variables, x and y: 11 y 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

x 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

a Sketch a line of good fit for the data.

Create a strategy Draw a straight line that follows the general trend of the points, aiming to have a similar number of points above and below the line.

676

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Apply the idea 11 y 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Here is an example of a line of good fit. This line passes through the points (2, 4) and (6, 8) and it represents the general trend of the data. x 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

b Determine the equation of the line of good fit from part (a).

Create a strategy To determine the equation of the line, select two points that lie on the line, calculate the slope (b), and then solve for the y-intercept (a).

Apply the idea 1. Select two integer points on the line drawn in part (a). The line passes through the points (2, 4) and (6, 8). 2. Calculate the slope, b. b=

y2 y1 x2 x1

Write the formula for slope

=

8 4 6 2

Substitute x1 = 2, y1 = 4, x2 = 6, y2 = 8

=

4 4

Simplify the numerator and denominator

=1

Simplify

3. Find the y-intercept, a, by substituting b = 1 and a point on the line, like (2, 4), into y = a + bx. 4 = a + 1 (2)

Substitute x = 2, y = 4, b = 1

4=a+2

Evaluate the multiplication

a=2

Subtract 2 from both sides

4. The equation for the line drawn by eye is y = 2 + x.

8.04 Line of good fit mathspace.co

677


c Use technology to find the equation for the line of good fit and compare it to the equation found by eye.

Create a strategy Enter the original data points into a statistical software to find the least-squares regression line. Then, compare the resulting equation to the one found manually in the previous part.

Apply the idea Entering the original data points (1, 4), (2, 3), (3, 5), (4, 7), (5, 8), (6, 7), (7, 9), (8, 9) into technology and performing a linear regression gives the following values, rounded to two decimal places: • a ≈ 2.64 • b ≈ 0.86 The equation of the least-squares regression line is approximately y = 2.64 + 0.86x. Comparing the two equations: • Line by eye: y = 2 + x • Line by technology: y = 2.64 + 0.86x The values for the slope ( 1 vs 0.86) and the y-intercept (2 vs 2.64) are reasonably similar. This demonstrates that a carefully drawn line by eye can be a good approximation of the line of good fit calculated by technology.

Idea summary A line of good fit is a straight line drawn on a scatterplot to represent the general linear trend of the data. It provides a visual model of the relationship between two numerical variables. When drawing a line of good fit by eye: • • • •

Aim for the line to pass through the “centre” of the data points. Try to visually balance the number of data points above and below the line. Attempt to minimise the overall vertical distances from the points to the line. The line does not necessarily have to pass through any of the actual data points.

Determine the slope and y-intercept of the line to write its equation in the form y = a + bx. Different lines drawn by eye can result in slightly different equations, but they should all reasonably model the data’s linear trend.

678

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Predictions from lines of good fit The line of good fit for a data set can be used to understand the relationship between the variables and make predictions about other possible ordered pairs that fit this relationship. In the context of a line of good fit, the slope-intercept form represents:

y = a + bx a b

is the starting value of y when x is 0 is the rate of change for y with respect to x

To interpret the slope and y-intercept: • A positive slope means that as the explanatory variable increases, so does the response variable. • A negative slope means that as the explanatory variable increases, the response variable decreases. • The y-intercept is the predicted value of the response variable when the explanatory variable is 0. • When interpreting the y-intercept, consider if a value of 0 for the explanatory variable is realistic. These terms describe the range in which predictions are made: • Interpolation: Prediction within the range of x-values in the data • Extrapolation: Prediction outside the range of x-values in the data y

0

y

Interpolation

x

0

Extrapolation

x

The reliability of predictions depends on the strength of the relationship, whether the data is interpolated or extrapolated, and the number of points in the data set. • A larger sample size increases reliability. • Interpolation with a strong correlation implies a reliable prediction. • Interpolation with a moderate or weak correlation leads to a less reliable prediction. • Extrapolation generally leads to an unreliable prediction. The further outside the range of known values, the less reliable it is.

8.04 Line of good fit mathspace.co

679


Example 2

Stopping distance (m)

Several cars underwent a brake test and their age, x, was measured against their stopping distance, y. The scatterplot shows the results and a line of good fit that approximates the positive correlation:

50 40 30 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Age of cars (years)

a According to the line, what is the stopping distance of a car that is 2 years old?

Create a strategy Refer to the graph and determine the y-coordinate on the line of good fit when the x-coordinate is 2.

Stopping distance (m)

Apply the idea

50 40 30

Using the line of good fit, when x = 2, the y-value is equal to 34 m.

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Age of cars (years)

b Using two clear points on the line, such as (2, 34) and (10, 54), determine and interpret the slope of the line of good fit.

Create a strategy The slope of a line is the ratio of the change in y to the change in x between any two points on the line.

680

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Apply the idea y2 x2

Use the formula b

b= =

y1 with the points (2, 34) and (10, 54). x1

54 34 10 2

Substitute x1 = 2, y1 = 34, x2 = 10, y2 = 54

20 8

Simplify the numerator and denominator

= 2.5

Evaluate

The slope is b = 2.5. This means for every 1 year increase in age, the stopping distance is predicted to increase by 2.5 metres.

c Determine and interpret the value of the vertical intercept of the line.

Create a strategy Substitute the slope found in the previous part and the coordinates of one of the points into y = a + bx to determine the y-intercept, a.

Apply the idea Substitute b = 2.5 and the point (2, 34) into the formula y = a + bx. 34 = a + 2.5 (2)

Substitute b = 2.5, x = 2, y = 34

34 = a + 5

Evaluate the multiplication

29 = a

Subtract 5 from both sides

The y-intercept is a = 29. This predicts that a brand new car (0 years old) has a stopping distance of 29 metres.

d Use the line of good fit to estimate the stopping distance of a car that is 6.5 years old.

Create a strategy Substitute x = 6.5 into the equation of the line of good fit, y = 29 + 2.5x.

Apply the idea Substitute x = 6.5 into y = 29 + 2.5x to solve for y. y = 29 + 2.5(6.5)

Substitute x = 6.5

= 29 + 16.25

Evaluate the multiplication

= 45.25

Evaluate

The stopping distance of a car that is 6.5 years old is predicted to be 45.25 metres.

8.04 Line of good fit mathspace.co

681


e Which is true about the prediction in part (d)? A

Reliable as the prediction made was within the original set

B

Reliable as the prediction made was outside of the original data set

C

Unreliable as the prediction made was within the original set

D

Unreliable as the prediction made was outside of the original data set

Create a strategy Check if the prediction made is within or outside the observed data set.

Apply the idea The prediction is within the data set and the data set has a strong correlation. The prediction is reliable, so option A is correct.

Example 3 The table shows the number of people (in thousands) who went to watch a movie x weeks after it was released: Weeks (x)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Number of people (y)

37

37

33

33

29

29

25

a Construct a scatterplot of this data. Does a linear model appear appropriate?

Create a strategy Plot each x-value along with its corresponding y-value.

Apply the idea y 40 35 The points from the table have the coordinates (1, 37), (2, 37), (3, 33), (4, 33), (5, 29), (6, 29), (7, 25).

30 25 x 0

682

1

2 3 4

5 6 7

8

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


b Use technology to determine the equation of the line of good fit for this data. Write the equation in the form y = a + bx, rounding a and b to two decimal places if necessary.

Create a strategy Enter the data for ‘Weeks’ (x) and ‘Number of people’ (y) into lists or a spreadsheet in the technology. Then, use the linear regression function (often denoted as LinReg (a + bx.) or similar) to find the values of a (y-intercept) and b (slope).

Apply the idea Inputting the data into technology and performing a linear regression yields: The slope (b) is found to be exactly − 2.00. The y-intercept (a) is found to be approximately 39.86. Therefore, the equation of the line of good fit is approximately: y = 39.86 − 2.00x

c Interpret the slope and y-intercept of the line of good fit found in part (b) in the context of this problem.

Create a strategy The slope (b) represents the predicted rate of change in the response variable (y) for each one-unit increase in the explanatory variable (x). The y-intercept (a) represents the predicted value of the response variable when the explanatory variable is zero.

Apply the idea For the equation y = 39.86 – 2.00x: • Slope (b = − 2.00): For each additional week after the movie’s release, the number of people attending is predicted to decrease by exactly 2.00 thousand (or 2000 people). • y-intercept (a ≈ 39.86): This model predicts that at Week 0 (i.e., at the time of release, or just before the first week recorded), approximately 39.86 thousand people (or 39 860 people) would have attended. This is an extrapolation as the data starts at Week 1, but it provides a starting point for the model.

8.04 Line of good fit mathspace.co

683


d Use the equation of the line of good fit found using technology to predict the number of people who went to watch the movie 12 weeks after it was released. Comment on the reliability of this prediction.

Create a strategy Substitute x = 12 into the equation found in part (b). Consider if this value of x is within or outside the range of the original data.

Apply the idea y = 39.86 − 2.00x

Write the equation

= 39.86 − 2.00 (12)

Substitute x = 12

= 39.86 − 24.00

Evaluate the multiplication

= 15.86

Evaluate

The model predicts that approximately 15.86 thousand people (or 15 860 people) would attend in the 12th week. The original data for weeks (x) ranged from 1 to 7. Predicting for x = 12 is an extrapolation because it is outside the range of the collected data. Therefore, this prediction is less reliable. The trend might not continue linearly so far into the future (e.g., attendance might drop to zero or plateau).

Idea summary The parameters of the equation of the line of good fit can be interpreted as:

y = a + bx a b

the starting or initial value of y when x is 0 the rate of change for y with respect to x

A prediction made within the observed data is called an interpolation. A prediction made outside the observed data is called an extrapolation. Generally, extrapolation is less reliable than interpolation since the model makes assumptions about the relationship outside the observed data set.

684

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


8.04 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

The equation for the line of good fit is given by P = − 4t + 116, where t is time. Over time, is the value of P constant, increasing, or decreasing? Determine whether each graph shows a positive relationship between the two variables: Temperature (°C)

a

b Sea temperature (°C)

2

30

20

0 4 2 6 8 10 Distance from equator (1000 km)

30

25

0 25 30 35 40 Distance from equator (km)

Vision

c

5

0

3

150 170 Height (m)

190

Which is the line of good fit for this scatterplot?

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

y

x 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Line 1 Line 2 Line 3

8.04 Line of good fit mathspace.co

685


4

The equation for the line of good fit of a scatter plot is given by y = − 7.26x + 4.35: a

Determine the gradient of the line.

b

Does the gradient of the line indicate that the bivariate dataset has a positive or negative correlation?

c

As x increases by 1 unit, how does the value of y change?

d

Identify the value of the vertical intercept.

Practice

6

The equation d = − 0.66h + 55 represents the line of good fit relating the air humidity, h, and the depth, d metres, of snow in an area. a

Use the equation to determine the snow depth when the air humidity is 0.6

b

Solve for h, the level of air humidity expected to achieve a snow depth of 54.472 m.

The average monthly temperature and the average wind speed, in knots, in a particular location were plotted over several months. The graph shows the points for each month’s data and their line of good fit: Use the line of good fit to approximate the wind speed on a day when the temperature is 5°C.

Speed

5

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7

Determine the equation of the line of good fit shown: 25 20 15 10 5 0 −5 −10 −15

8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Temperature (°C)

y

x 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

The table shows the hours a student studied for a test and the score they received. Hours studied (x)

1

2

3

Test score (y)

65

72

78 85 92

5

6

Use technology to determine the equation of the line of good fit. Write your equation in the form y = a + bx, rounding the values of a and b to two decimal places where necessary.

686

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


10

a

Sketch the line of good fit for this data.

b

Determine the equation of the line of good fit from part (a).

c

Use technology to determine the equation for the line of good fit and compare it to the equation found by eye.

The scatterplot shows data collected on the number of hours a student spends practising a musical instrument per week and their achieved skill level score (out of 50): a

Sketch a line of good fit for this data.

b

Use the line of good fit to estimate the skill level score when a student practises for: i

3.5 hours per week

ii

7.5 hours per week

Temperature (°C)

The scatterplot graphs data for the number of people in a room and the room temperature collected by a researcher:

Skill level score

9

36 34 32 30 28 26 24 22 20 0 10 20 3040 50 607080 90 Number of people 45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0

11

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Hours practising per week

The scatterplot graphs data for the number of ice blocks sold at a shop on days with different temperatures:

140 120

Ice blocks

Ex 1

100 80 60 40 20 0

14 16 18 2022242628 3032 34 363840 Temperature (°C)

a

Sketch the line of good fit for this data.

b

Use the line of good fit drawn for part (a) to estimate the number of ice blocks that will be sold on a: i

c

31°C day

ii

42°C day

Does the number of ice blocks sold increase or decrease as the temperature increases? 8.04 Line of good fit mathspace.co

687


12

Consider the given scatterplot: y

27 24 21 18 15 12 9 6 3

x

0

13

a

Is the relationship between the x and y variables positive or negative?

b

Sketch the line of good fit for this data.

c

Which could be the equation for the line of good fit? A

y = 2 − 3x

B

y = 3x + 2

C

y = − 3x − 2

D

y = 3x − 2

A number of people were asked how many hours each week they spend on the internet. Their results were graphed against their age in the scatterplot and a strong negative correlation was observed. A line of good fit has been drawn:

Hours

Ex 2

60 55 50 45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0

688

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

y

x 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 Age

a

Determine the x and y-intercepts of the line of good fit.

b

Using the intercepts, what is the slope of the line of good fit?

c

Determine the equation for the line of good fit.

d

Consider the outlier on the graph. According to the line of good fit, what should its usage be?

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


14

The depth a diver has descended below the surface of the water is plotted against her lung capacity: 105

Capacity

100 95 90 85 80 0

15

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Depth (m)

a

Does the line of good fit have a positive or negative slope?

b

Determine the equation of the line of good fit.

c

Interpret the slope and y-intercept in the context of this problem.

d

Use the line of good fit to estimate the lung capacity, y, at a depth of 4 m.

A study into world health wanted to identify the factors that impact life expectancy among countries. In the study, they chose a few countries and measured the amount spent on healthcare per person per year against the average life expectancy in that country. They discovered a strong positive correlation between the amount spent on healthcare and the life expectancy in the country, and wanted to determine a line of good fit for the data. The table shows the data from the five countries: Healthcare per person ($A)

100

400

1100

1500

2100

Life expectancy (L)

27.5

44

52.5

71.5

74.5

a

To find one point on the line of good fit, they took the average of the values they had for each variable. Determine the coordinates of this point using the table of values.

b

Another point that was determined on the line of good fit is (700, 45.5). Determine the slope of the line of good fit.

c

Determine the value of the vertical intercept of the line.

d

Determine the equation of the line of good fit that relates A and L.

e

A country is currently spending $30 on healthcare per person each year. According to the line of good fit, by how much would the life expectancy of the country increase if healthcare spending is increased to $57 per person each year?

8.04 Line of good fit mathspace.co

689


Ex 3

16

17

18

690

The table shows the number of people (in thousands) who went to watch a movie x weeks after it was released: Weeks (x)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Number of people (y)

17

17

13

13

9

9

5

a

Plot the points from the table on a Cartesian plane. Does a linear model appear appropriate?

b

Use technology to determine the equation of the line of good fit. Write the equation in the form y = a + bx, rounding a and b to two decimal places if necessary.

c

Interpret the slope and y-intercept of the line of good fit in the context of this problem.

d

Use the equation to predict the number of people who will watch the movie 10 weeks after it was released. Comment on the reliability of this prediction.

Consider the following table showing the number of eggs lain versus the number of ducks: Ducks

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Eggs

4

11

14

21

24

31

34

41

a

Plot the points from the table on a Cartesian plane.

b

Sketch a line of good fit for the data.

c

Determine the slope of the line of good fit, given that the line passes through the origin and (5, 25).

d

Determine the y-intercept of the line of good fit.

e

Determine the equation of the line of good fit.

f

Use the equation to find the number of eggs laid by 30 ducks.

A PE teacher recorded the number of hours a group of students spent practising basketball each week and the average number of points they scored per game. The results are shown in the table: Hours of practice (h)

1

2

4

5

7

8

Points per game (p)

6

7

12

13

18

21

a

Use technology to determine the equation of the line of good fit that models this data.

b

Interpret the value of the slope in the context of this problem.

c

Use the equation to predict the average points per game for a student who practises for 6 hours a week.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


19

Determine if these predictions are extrapolations or interpolations: A prediction for the y-value when x = 5 is made from the given data set:

a

x

4

7

8

11

12

13

17

18

19

20

y

0

2

4

7

6

4

8

8

11

8

A prediction for the y-value when x = 33 is made from the given data set:

b

x

37

54

58

59

43

55

60

38

64

35

y

72

53

26

21

73

47

12

102

10

112

A prediction of y = 95.69 is made from the data set using the line of good fit y = − 0.07x + 96.18 for the given data set:

c x

19

10

1

7

14

11

2

5

17

8

y

94

94.4

97

96.4

94.4

97.8

94.9

95.9

96

94.4

A prediction of y = 72.77 is made from the data set using the line of good fit y = 1.26x − 57.01 for the given data:

d x

93

57

86

97

78

96

68

69

54

92

y

51.2

25.4

38.9

58.6

38.2

60.8

26.3

28.5

5.4

92

Extend your thinking 20

The data has a strong correlation and a line of good fit y = 0.84x + 2.66: x

10

7

14

1

6

13

19

5

20

9

y

9

10

14

3

6

10

19

9

21

13

a

Predict the value of y when x = 15.

b

Comment on the reliability of the prediction in part (a).

8.04 Line of good fit mathspace.co

691


21

A car company looked at the relationship between how much it had spent on advertising, A, and the amount of sales (in thousands of dollars) each month, S, over several months. The data has been plotted on the scatter graph and a line of good fit drawn. Two points on the line are (2000, 300) and (3500, 450). S

900 800 700 600 500 400 300 200 100

A 50 0 10 00 15 00 20 0 25 0 00 30 00 35 00 40 00 45 00 50 00 55 00 60 0 65 0 00 70 00 75 00 80 00 85 00 90 0 95 0 00

0

Using the two given points, determine the slope of the line of good fit.

b

Determine the equation of the line of good fit.

c

Interpret the slope and y-intercept in the context of this problem.

d

Use the line of good fit to estimate the number of sales next month if $3900 is to be spent on advertising.

e

Comment on the reliability of the prediction in part (d), giving reasons.

A line of good fit has been drawn to approximate the relationship between sea temperature (°C), T, and the area of healthy coral, A (in hectares), in a particular location. Two particular points, (1, 435) and (23, 105), lie on the line.

Area (A)

22

a

450 400 350 300 250 200 150 100 50 0

692

3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 Sea temperature (T )

a

Calculate the slope of the line.

b

Determine the equation of the line of good fit in the form A = c + mT.

c

Using the line of good fit, predict the amount of healthy coral A in hectares when the sea temperature is 30°C.

d

Comment on the reliability of the prediction in part (c), giving reasons.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


23

In a laboratory experiment, a scientist measures the time T (in seconds) that it takes for a chemical reaction to finish, after adding acids of different strengths P (measured as pH). The pH scale, which is used to measure the strength of an acid, allows values from − 7 (a strong acid) to + 7 (a very strong base). The results are shown in the table: pH

−4

−3

−2

−1

0

1

2

3

4

Reaction times

187

176

137

155

153

125

103

124

101

The equation for the line of good fit of the given data is T = − 10P + 140. a

Use the line of good fit equation to predict the reaction time when the acidity is 7 pH.

b

Use the line of good fit equation to predict the reaction time when the acidity is 1.5 pH.

c

Comment on the reliability of the prediction in part (a), giving reasons.

d

Comment on the reliability of the prediction in part (b), giving reasons.

Investigation: Answer questions with data

Investigate online

mathspace.co

Chapter 8 review

Online review

mathspace.co

Did you know?

Researchers use lines of best fit to explore whether more daily screen time is linked to fewer hours of sleep among teenagers! By analysing these patterns, they can better understand how lifestyle habits affect health. These insights help schools, parents, and health organisations promote better sleep hygiene. They might use this evidence to create guidelines or campaigns about limiting screen time before bed.

8.04 Line of good fit mathspace.co

693


Big ideas • Variation describes proportional relationships between variables, with direct and inverse variation forming foundational models for how quantities change in relation to each other. • Logarithms and orders of magnitude provide a framework for managing and comparing numbers that span vast scales, from microscopic to astronomical. • When a relationship between variables is non-linear, data transformations can be used to straighten the data, allowing for the application of linear regression techniques to create predictive models.

9 Variation Chapter outline 9.01 9.02 9.03 9.04 9.05

Direct and inverse variation Orders of magnitude and logarithms Investigation: Represent Australian populations Log scales Data transformations Data models Chapter 9 review

696 707 717 725 746


Trees don’t grow forever—the taller they get, the slower they rise.


9.01   Direct and inverse variation After this lesson, you will be able to… • explain the difference between direct and inverse variation. • identify real-world examples of direct and inverse relationships. • solve problems involving direct and inverse variation using numerical, graphical and algebraic approaches.

Direct variation Direct variation A relationship between two variables where one variable increases or decreases in direct proportion to the other. A direct variation represents a proportional relationship between two quantities. This means that one variable is always a constant multiple of the other. For example, if earnings are $18 per hour, the earnings are directly proportional to the number of hours worked because Earnings = 18 × Hours worked. Hours worked and money earned are said to be directly proportional. The constant of proportionality (k), is the ratio of the dependent variable to the independent y variable. So k . This can also be referred to as the constant of variation. In the hourly earnings x example, the constant would be 18. A direct variation can be written in the form:

y = kx k

is the constant of proportionality (k ≠ 0)

A common misconception is that two variables are directly proportional if one increases as the other increases. This is not the case. Two variables can only be described as directly proportional if the ratio between the variables stays constant. In other words, both variables increase or decrease at a constant rate.

696

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Graphing a direct variation will show a linear graph (straight line) that passes through the origin, (0, 0).

5

A

4 The graph shows a direct variation. This creates a linear graph, where A is directly proportional to B.

3 2 1 0

B 1

2

3

4

5

Sometimes, the notation y ∝ x is used to signify “y is proportional to x”.

Example 1 Determine the equation relating a and b given the table of values: a

0

1

2

3

b

0

2

4

6

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Determine the constant rate between b and a.

Observe that b is increasing by the same amount of 2 for each 1 unit change in a. So the equation relating a and b is: b = 2a

Example 2 If y varies directly with x, and y

1 when x = 4: 5

a Determine the variation constant k using the equation y = kx.

Create a strategy Substitute the given values into the equation.

Apply the idea y = kx 1 =k×4 5 1 k= 5 4 =

1 20

Write the equation Substitute y

1 and x = 4 5

Divide both sides by 4 Evaluate

9.01 Direct and inverse variation mathspace.co

697


b Determine the equation of variation of y in terms of y = kx.

Create a strategy Substitute k into the equation y = kx.

Apply the idea y = kx

Write the equation

1 x y= 20 1 x. The equation of variation is y 20

Substitute k

1 20

Idea summary A direct variation describes a proportional relationship in which two quantities are directly proportional. This means one variable is always a constant multiple of the other, as shown in the equation:

y = kx k  is the constant of proportionality (or constant of variation), where k ≠ 0 The graph of a direct variation is a straight line that passes through the origin.

Inverse variation Inverse variation A relationship between two variables where one variable increases as the other decreases in such a way that their product remains constant. Some quantities have what is called an inverse relationship. As one of the quantities increases, the other decreases, and vice versa. An example of this is the relationship between speed and time. Imagine a truck driver needs to drive 1000 km to deliver a load. The faster the driver travels, the less time it will take to cover this distance. In the given table, the formula Time 1000 km at different average speeds:

698

Distance is used to determine the time it would take to drive Speed

Speed (km/h)

60

70

80

90

100

110

120

Time (hours)

16.67

14.3

12.3

11.1

10

9.1

8.3

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Plotting these values gives a hyperbola: 35

Time (hours)

30 25 20 15

T=

(60, 16.7) (100, 10)

10 5

Each point on the curve corresponds to a different combination of speed and time, and all the points on the curve satisfy the equation 1000 T , or TS = 1000, where T is the time S taken and S is the speed travelled.

1000 S

Speed (km/h) 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160

These kinds of inverse relationships are generally expressed in the form:

y k

k x

is the constant of proportionality (k ≠ 0)

This relationship can also be expressed as: xy = k This form highlights that the product of the two variables is always constant in an inverse variation. While the graph of a direct variation is linear, the graph of an inverse variation is nonlinear: 20 15 10 5 −20 −15 −10 −5 −5 −10 −15 −20

y

x 5 10 15 20

20 15 10 5 −20−15−10 −5 −5 −10 −15

y

x 5 10 15 20

−20

The graph of direct variation is linear.

The graph of inverse variation is nonlinear.

1 Inverse variation is a subset of the rational function family with parent function y . Different x constants of proportionality represent dilations. A negative constant of proportionality applies a reflection. Sometimes, the notation y

1 is used to signify “y is inversely proportional to x”. x

9.01 Direct and inverse variation mathspace.co

699


Example 3 18 , y varies inversely with x: x a Solve for y when x = 2. In the equation y

Create a strategy Substitute the given value of x into the equation.

Apply the idea 18 x 18 = 2 =9

y=

Write the equation Substitute x = 2 Evaluate

So, when x = 2, y = 9.

b For an ordered pair (x, y), satisfying this inverse variation, calculate the value of the product xy.

Create a strategy Use an ordered pair satisfying the equation, such as the one from part (a), to calculate the product xy. Alternatively, rearrange the given equation to calculate the product xy.

Apply the idea From part (a), the ordered pair (2, 9) satisfies the equation. For this pair: xy = 2 × 9 = 18 Alternatively, starting from the given equation: y=

18 x

xy = 18

Write the equation Multiply both sides by x

So the product xy is always 18. This is the constant of proportionality, k.

700

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 4 The time, t, in hours, taken to complete a job varies inversely with the number of workers, n. If 3 workers can complete the job in 8 hours: a Determine the constant of proportionality, k.

Create a strategy k Since t varies inversely with n, the relationship is of the form t or tn = k. Substitute the given n values of t and n to calculate the value of k.

Apply the idea The equation for inverse variation is t

k . n

k 3

Substitute t = 8 and n = 3

k=8×3

Multiply both sides by 3

8=

= 24

Evaluate

The constant of proportionality is k = 24.

b Write the equation relating t and n.

Create a strategy Substitute the value of k from part (a) into the general form of the inverse variation equation.

Apply the idea Using k = 24, the equation is: t

24 n

c How long would it take for 4 workers to complete the same job?

Create a strategy Substitute n = 4 into the equation from part (b) and solve for t.

Apply the idea 24 n 24 = 4 =6

t=

Write the equation from part (b) Substitute n = 4 Evaluate

It would take 6 hours for 4 workers to complete the job.

9.01 Direct and inverse variation mathspace.co

701


Idea summary An inverse variation describes an inverse relationship between two variables. As one variable increases, the other decreases so that their product is always a constant (k). The equation can be written in two forms:

y

k x

or xy = k

k is the constant of proportionality, where k ≠ 0 The graph of an inverse variation is a hyperbola.

Did you know?

In chemistry, gas pressure varies directly with temperature when volume is constant — meaning a hot air balloon only rises because of variation laws discovered centuries ago! This principle, known as Gay-Lussac’s law, explains why heating the air inside the balloon increases pressure and makes it expand. As the air becomes less dense than the surrounding atmosphere, the balloon lifts off, showing how mathematical relationships can quite literally make things soar.

702

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


9.01 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

2

Suppose the constant of proportionality, k, is positive: a

If y varies directly with x, describe how y changes as x increases and decreases.

b

If y varies inversely with x, describe how y changes as x increases and decreases.

Identify the constant of proportionality: a

3

y = 90x

xy = 40

b

c

y = − 3x

d

y

3 2x

Determine whether each representation is direct variation, inverse variation, or neither: 5 a y = 5x b y x c y = 6x + 8 d y = 2x2 – 7x – 4 e

xy = – 7

f

g

y 8 6 4 2

h

−8 −6 −4 −2 −2 −4 −6 −8 i

y

8 x2 y

2 x

x

2 4 6 8

−2 −2

y

j

y

4

8

3

6

2

4 2

1 x 0

2

1

2

3

4

x −2 −1

1

2

3

4

9.01 Direct and inverse variation mathspace.co

703


4

Determine whether each statement is an example of direct or inverse variation: a

The variation relating the distance between two locations on a map and the actual distance between the two locations

b

The variation relating the number of workers hired to build a house and the time required to build the house

c

The variation relating the time it takes an ice cube to melt in water and the temperature of the water

Practice 5

Ex 1

Ex 2

6

7

8

In the equation y = 3x, y varies directly as x: a

Calculate the value of y when x = 10.

b

Calculate the value of y when x = 5.

c

For these two ordered pairs, what is the result when the y value is divided by the x value?

Determine the equation relating m and n given the table of values: m

2

3

5

8

n

10

15

25

40

Suppose y varies directly with x. If y = 20, when x = 4: a

Determine the constant of proportionality, k.

b

Express the equation relating y and x.

c

Calculate the value of y when x = 7.

1 s , where d is the approximate distance (in kilometres) from a storm, and s is the 5 number of seconds between seeing lightning and hearing thunder, describe the relationship If d

between the distance and the number of seconds.

Ex 3

d , where r is the speed when d kilometres in t hours, describe the relationship t between the speed and the distance in kilometres, assuming time is constant.

9

If r

10

If r varies inversely with a, write an equation that uses k as the constant of proportionality.

11

In the equation y a b

704

36 , y varies inversely with x: x Calculate for y when x = 3. For these two ordered pairs, (9, 4) and (3, 12), what is the result when the y-value is multiplied by the x-value?

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


12

Consider the inverse variation equation y a

Complete the table:

b

Plot the data from the table of values on a Cartesian plane.

6 : x

y 13

14

a

Determine the constant of proportionality, k.

b

Express y in terms of x.

c

Determine the value of y when x = 5.

C

x 1 2 3 4

19

1.5

1

3

B

0.75 D

75 108 300

p 3 6 9 12 q

Ex 4

2

4

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

x

1

2

3

4

y

36

18

12

9

x

1

2

3

4

y

4

5

6

7

Determine an equation which relates the two variables in each table: a

18

3

x 1 5 6 10 y

17

1

Which table(s) could represent an inversely proportional relationship between x and y? y

16

1 2

If y is inversely proportional to x, and y = 20 when x = 10:

A

15

1 4

x

11

17

23

b

29

Determine the equation relating n and r given the table of values:

a

375 : t Identify the constant of proportionality.

c

Determine the value of s when t = 12.

s

1

2

3

4

t

48

24

16

12

n

1

2

3

4

r

5

5 2

5 3

5 4

Consider the equation s

b

Determine the value of s when t = 6.

The cost of apples (C in dollars) varies directly with their weight (w in kilograms). If 2 kg of apples cost $5.00: a

Determine the constant of proportionality, k.

b

Express the equation that relates C and w.

c

Calculate the cost of 5 kg of apples.

The time (t in hours) it takes to travel a fixed distance varies inversely with the speed (s in kilometres per hour). If a journey takes 2 hours at an average speed of 60 km/h. a

Determine the constant of proportionality, k.

b

Express the equation that relates t and s.

c

How long will the journey take at an average speed of 80 km/h?

9.01 Direct and inverse variation mathspace.co

705


20

The time, t, taken by a typist to type up a document is inversely proportional to his typing speed, s. That is, the quicker the typing speed, the less time it will take. If it takes a typist 20 minutes to type a particular document, typing at a speed of 61 words per minute: a

Determine the constant of proportionality, k.

b

How long (in minutes) will it take a typist with a typing speed of 30.5 words per minute to type up the document?

Extend your thinking 21

22

23

The number of identical pipes (n) needed to fill a swimming pool varies inversely with the square of the radius (r in centimetres) of each pipe. If 10 pipes with a radius of 4 cm are needed: a

Determine the constant of proportionality, k.

b

Express the equation that relates n and r.

c

How many pipes with a radius of 2 cm would be needed?

The number of eggs, n, used in a recipe for a particular cake varies directly with the square of the diameter of the tin, d, for tins with constant depth. 2 eggs are used in a recipe for a tin with a diameter of 17 cm. a

Calculate the exact value of the constant of proportionality, k.

b

How many eggs, n, would be used for a tin with a diameter of 39 cm? Round your answer to the nearest whole egg.

The mass in grams, M, of a cube of cork varies directly with the cube of the side length in centimetres, x. If a cubic centimetre of cork has a mass of 0.29 g (meaning when x = 1, M = 0.29): a

Determine the constant of proportionality, k.

b

Express M in terms of x.

c

Calculate the mass of a cube of cork with a side length of 8 centimetres, rounded to two decimal places.

24

The period of a pendulum varies directly with the square root of its length. If the length is quadrupled, what happens to the period?

25

If f

26

Suppose that y varies inversely as the square of x, and that y = 0.0023 when x = 0.4:

706

mv2 , where f is the centripetal force of an object of mass m moving along a circle of r radius r at velocity v, describe the relationship between the centripetal force and the mass, assuming other quantities are constant.

a

Determine the constant of proportionality, k. Round your answer to six decimal places.

b

Determine the variation equation for y in terms of x.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


9.02   Orders of magnitude and logarithms After this lesson, you will be able to… • explain the concept of orders of magnitude. • convert between standard notation and scientific notation. • compare quantities that differ by orders of magnitude.

Scientific notation (standard form) Scientific notation, or standard form, is a way of writing very big or very small numbers in a compact way. For example, the mass of the Sun is 1 988 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 kg. This is a very big number, and it would be easy to accidentally leave off a zero. Using scientific notation, the number can be written as 1.988 × 1030 kg. Scientific notation uses the form a × 10b, where a is a number greater than or equal to 1 and less than 10 and b is an integer (positive or negative) that is expressed as an index of 10. To convert a number to scientific notation (a × 10b): • To determine a, move the decimal point so it is positioned after the first non-zero digit of the original number. • To determine b, count how many places the decimal point was moved. • If the decimal point was moved to the left, b is positive (used for large numbers). • If the decimal point was moved to the right, b is negative (used for small numbers). To convert a number from scientific notation back to standard notation, move the decimal point b places. Move it to the right if b is positive, and to the left if b is negative. Add zeros as needed. • A negative power indicates a small number. • A positive power indicates a large number. • A zero power indicates that the number will not change because 100 = 1. Significant figures in scientific notation: • 6.531 26 × 107 to 4 significant figures = 6.531 × 107 • 6.000 02 × 108 to 3 significant figures = 6.00 × 108

Example 1 Express 0.07 in scientific notation.

Create a strategy The decimal number 0.07 is a small number less than 1. Move the decimal point to the right so it is positioned after the first non-zero digit, 7.

9.02 Orders of magnitude and logarithms mathspace.co

707


Apply the idea To express 0.07 in the form a × 10b, the decimal point is moved 2 places to the right. So b = − 2. 0.07 in scientific notation is 7 × 10– 2.

Reflect and check Alternatively, 0.07 as a decimal can be converted into a fraction: 0.07 = =

7 100

Convert the decimal into a fraction

7

Convert 100 as a power of 10

102

Use the negative exponent rule 10 n

= 7 × 10– 2

1 10n

Example 2 Express 6 × 107 as a basic numeral.

Create a strategy Use the fact that 107 = 10 000 000. Alternatively, move the decimal point after 6 by seven places to the right, adding zeros as placeholders.

Apply the idea 6 × 107 = 6 × 10 000 000 = 60 000 000

Evaluate 107 Evaluate

Example 3 When rounded to one significant figure, sound travels at a speed of approximately 0.3 km/s while light travels at a speed of approximately 300 000 km/s. a Express the speed of sound in kilometres per second in scientific notation.

Apply the idea 0.3 = 3 × 10− 1 km/s

b Express the speed of light in kilometres per second in scientific notation.

Apply the idea 300 0000 = 3 × 105 km/s

708

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


c How many times faster does light travel than sound?

Create a strategy Divide the speed of light from part (b) by the speed of sound from part (a).

Apply the idea Number of times faster = =

3 105 3 10 1 105 10 1

Write the equation Cancel out like terms

= 105–(– 1)

Simplify using index rules

6

= 10

Evaluate the subtraction

= 1 000 000

Evaluate the power

Idea summary Scientific notation, or standard form uses the form:

a × 10b a  is a number greater than or equal to 1 and less than 10 b  is an integer (positive or negative) that is expressed as an index of 10 To convert to scientific notation, move the decimal point after the first non-zero digit for a. The number of places moved determines b (positive if original number was large, negative if small). • A negative power indicates a small number. • A positive power indicates a large number. • A zero power indicates that the number will not change because 100 = 1.

Orders of magnitude The order of magnitude is a way of describing and comparing very large or very small numbers using powers of 10. For example, 4000 can be written using scientific notation as 4 × 1000 = 4 × 103. • The order of magnitude of this number is 3 as it is written using 103. • To increase this by a factor of 10 000 would be to increase it by four orders of magnitude or 104 resulting in 4 × 107. • Alternatively, to decrease this by a factor of 100 would be to decrease it by two orders of magnitude or 102 resulting in 4 × 101 or 40. That means this number is 100 times smaller than the original number. Orders of magnitude are used to estimate the size of a number, which is useful for comparison.

9.02 Orders of magnitude and logarithms mathspace.co

709


If orders of magnitude are used to compare quantities such as the weight of a mouse (19 g) with that of a cat (3.6 kg), they are first expressed in the same unit of measure, then estimated by writing them in scientific notation. This table outlines the steps for each animal: Steps

Cat

Mouse

Original information

3.6 kg

19 g

Convert to same units

3.6 kg

Write using scientific notation

0.019 kg

3.6 × 10

1.9 × 10− 2

0

−2

0

Orders of magnitude

The two animals differ by 2 orders of magnitude. That would mean the mouse is roughly 100 times smaller than the cat. Alternatively, consider the case if grams are used: Steps

Cat

Mouse

Original information

3.6 kg

19 g

Convert to same units

3600 g

19 g

Write using scientific notation

3.6 × 103

1.9 × 101

3

1

Orders of magnitude The difference between the two powers is still 2.

The table shows a comparison between the basic numbers, powers of 10, and order of magnitude: Basic number

Order of magnitude

10

6

6

10

5

5

10 000

10

4

4

1000

103

3

100

10

2

2

10

1

1

10

0

0

10

–1

–1

10

–2

–2

10

–3

–3

0.0001

10

–4

–4

0.000 01

10– 5

–5

0.000 001

10– 6

–6

1 000 000 100 000

10 1 0.1 0.01 0.001

710

Power of 10

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

Increasing order of magnitude

Decreasing order of magnitude


Example 4 The diameter of a typical human hair is approximately 1 × 10− 4 metres. The diameter of a typical bacterium is approximately 1 × 10− 6 metres. By how many orders of magnitude is the human hair wider than the bacterium?

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Both quantities are already expressed in scientific notation. The order of magnitude for each quantity is its power of 10. To determine how many orders of magnitude the hair is wider than the bacterium, calculate the difference between their orders of magnitude.

Order of magnitude of hair diameter: – 4 Order of magnitude of bacterium diameter: – 6 Difference in orders of magnitude: – 4 – (– 6) = – 4 + 6 = 2 The human hair is 2 orders of magnitude wider than the bacterium. This means it is approximately 102 = 100 times wider.

Example 5 A bakery sells 450 cupcakes per week. Determine the order of magnitude of the total number of cupcakes sold over 8 weeks.

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Multiply 450 by 8 and write the product in scientific notation.

Total = 450 × 8 = 3600

Write the equation Evaluate

3

= 3.6 × 10

Express in scientific notation

The order of magnitude is 3.

Idea summary For 1 order of magnitude increase, a number is 10 times larger. For 1 order of magnitude decrease, a number is 10 times smaller. If a number is written in scientific notation, the order of magnitude is the exponent of 10. When comparing two quantities, the difference in their orders of magnitude indicates how many powers of 10 one quantity is larger or smaller than the other.

Logarithms The order of magnitude (power of base 10) of basic numbers form what are called logarithms. These are used to write numbers as powers of 10 and are referred to as logarithms to the base 10 or log10. For example, 1000 can be written as 1 × 1000 = 1 × 103. The order of magnitude of this number is 3 so the logarithm of 1000 is log10 (1000) = log10 (103) = 3.

9.02 Orders of magnitude and logarithms mathspace.co

711


The relationship between a number, its power of 10 representation, and its base 10 logarithm is shown: Basic number

Power of 10

Logarithm

10

6

6

10

5

5

10

4

4

10

3

3

10

2

2

10

1

1

10

0

0

0.1

10

–1

–1

0.01

10– 2

–2

0.001

10

–3

–3

10

–4

–4

10

–5

–5

10

–6

–6

1 000 000 100 000 10 000 1000 100 10 1

0.0001 0.000 01 0.000 001

For values which lie between integer powers of 10, their logarithms will lie between those integers. For example, 55 is between 10 (101) and 100 (102), so log10 (55) ≈ 1.740, which is between 1 and 2. Notice that even though 55 is close to halfway between 10 and 100, log10 (55) is not halfway between 1 and 2 because logarithms operate on a multiplicative scale, not an additive one.

Example 6 Consider the expression log10 (80 000): a Determine the two integers that log10 (80 000) lies between.

Create a strategy To determine the integers that log10 (80 000) lies between, identify the powers of 10 that 80 000 is between. The exponents of these powers of 10 will be the integers.

Apply the idea Consider powers of 10: • 101 = 10 • 102 = 100 • 103 = 1000 • 104 = 10 000 • 105 = 100 000 The number 80 000 lies between 10 000 (104) and 100 000 (105). So, 104 < 80 000 < 105. Therefore, log10 (104) < log10 (80 000) < log10 (105), which means 4 < log10 (80 000) < 5. The two integers that log10 (80 000) lies between are 4 and 5.

712

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


b Calculate log10 (80 000) using technology. Round your answer to four decimal places.

Apply the idea log10 (80 000) = 4.903 089… ≈ 4.9031

Evaluate using technology Round to four decimal places

Example 7 Determine the number such that the base ten logarithm of the number is 2.5. Round your answer to two decimal places.

Create a strategy The definition of a base ten logarithm states that if log10 (N) = x, then N = 10x. In this case, x = 2.5. So, to determine the number N, calculate 102.5.

Apply the idea Let the number be N. Given log10 (N) = 2.5 Using the definition of logarithms: N = 102.5 N = 102.5

Write the equation

= 316.227 766…

Evaluate using technology

≈ 316.23

Round to two decimal places

The number is approximately 316.23

Idea summary The base 10 logarithm of a number N is the power x to which 10 must be raised to determine N. This is written as log10 (N) = x, which is equivalent to N = 10x. Logarithms are related to orders of magnitude. For numbers that are exact powers of 10 (e.g., 1000 = 103), the logarithm is the integer exponent (e.g., log10 ( 1000) = 3).

9.02 Orders of magnitude and logarithms mathspace.co

713


9.02 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

2

Complete this statement: In scientific notation, numbers are written in the form a × 10b, where: A

a is any decimal number and b is any integer.

B

a is a decimal number such that 1 ≤ a < 10 and b is any integer.

C

a is a decimal number such that 1 ≤ a < 10 and b is a positive integer.

D

a is an integer such that 1 ≤ a < 10 and b is any decimal.

Complete each equation: a c

300 = ⬚ × 102

b

⬚

0.000 04 = 4 × 10

d

0.005 = ⬚ × 10−3 7200 = ⬚ × 103

3

What is the order of magnitude in the number 6 × 10−7?

4

For each number: i

Express the number as a power of 10.

ii

Determine the base ten logarithm of the number.

a

1 000 000

b

0.000 001

c

1

Practice 5 Ex 1

Express each number in scientific notation: a

0.07

b

1200

c

605

d

30

e

0.008

f

304 000

g

0.973

h

5 870 000

6

Express nine hundred and five thousand and nine point one in scientific notation.

7

Express the given numbers in standard decimal notation (as a basic numeral):

Ex 2

8

a

3 × 105

b

8.2 × 103

c

1.05 × 106

d

7 × 101

e

5 × 10− 4

f

2.75 × 10− 2

g

9.01 × 10− 5

h

4.6 × 100

For each set of numbers, determine which one is the largest: a

9

b

• 8.99 × 10−3

• 1.19 × 101

• 1.99 × 10−6

• 1.19 × 10− 6

• 8.99 × 10−6

For each set of numbers, determine which one is the smallest: a

714

• 4.61 × 101

• 1.19 × 10−6

b

• 1.99 × 10− 6

• 4.61 × 101

• 8.99 × 10−6

• 1.19 × 101

• 8.99 × 10−3

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


10

Ex 3

11

The distance from Melbourne to Darwin is approximately 3742 km: a

Convert 3742 km in millimetres.

b

Determine this distance in millimetres when written using scientific notation.

The mass of the Earth is approximately 5.97 × 1024 kg. The mass of the Moon is approximately 7.34 × 1022 kg. How many times more massive is the Earth than the Moon? Round your answer to one decimal place.

12

Ex 4

13

For each number: i

Express the number in scientific form.

a

8000

b

ii

Identify the order of magnitude.

964 400

c

0.0008

Consider the quantities: • Quantity A: The diameter of a typical virus, 5 × 10−8 m. • Quantity B: The width of a standard human hair, 0.000 07 m. a

Write the width of the standard human hair (Quantity B) in scientific notation.

b

What is the order of magnitude of the diameter of the virus (Quantity A)?

c

What is the order of magnitude of the width of the human hair (Quantity B)?

d

By how many orders of magnitude is the width of the human hair larger than the diameter of the virus?

14

One university has 6000 students enrolled, while another university has 7000 students enrolled. Determine the order of magnitude of the total number of students enrolled at both universities.

Ex 5

15

A factory produces 720 microchips per hour. Determine the order of magnitude of the total number of microchips produced in a 24-hour day.

Ex 6

16

For each expression:

Ex 7

i

Determine the two integers that the logarithm lies between.

ii

Calculate the value of the logarithm using technology, rounded to four decimal places.

a

log10 (95 000)

b

log10 (500)

c

log10 (0.025)

d

log10 (7)

e

log10 (1 200 000)

f

log10 (0.000 68)

17

Determine the number if the logarithm of the number to base 10 is 0.

18

Determine the number N such that log10 (N) = x for the given values of x. Round your answers to four decimal places when necessary:

19

a

x = 2.2

b

x = − 1.2

c

x = 3.7

d

x = 0.5

e

x = − 0.8

f

x = 5.0

g

x = − 2.9

h

x = 1.65

The average distance of Mercury to the Sun is 5.791 × 107 km while the average distance of Uranus to the Sun is 2.871 × 109 km. By how many orders of magnitude do the distances of these planets from the Sun differ?

9.02 Orders of magnitude and logarithms mathspace.co

715


20

A human strand of DNA is about 2.5 × 10− 9 m wide, while the diameter of a hydrogen nucleus is about 1.8 × 10− 15 m. By how many orders of magnitude do the sizes of these objects differ?

21

The mass of an adult African elephant is approximately 6 × 103 kg. The mass of a field mouse is approximately 2.5 × 10−2 kg. a

What is the order of magnitude for the mass of the elephant?

b

What is the order of magnitude for the mass of the mouse?

c

How many times heavier is the elephant than the mouse, based on the difference in their orders of magnitude? Explain what it means in this context.

Extend your thinking 22

23

The volume of Earth is approximately 1.08 × 1012 km3. A large raindrop has a volume of approximately 0.1 cm3: a

Express the volume of the raindrop in km3 using scientific notation. (Recall that 1 km = 100 000 cm).

b

Using your result from part (a), determine how many orders of magnitude larger the volume of Earth is than the volume of a raindrop.

A scientist observes that a sample of bacteria, Sample A, contains 8.4 × 107 bacteria. A second sample, Sample B, is 3 orders of magnitude smaller than Sample A. Calculate the number of bacteria in Sample B.

24

25

The density of gold is 19.3 g/cm3. A gold atom has a mass of approximately 3.27 × 10− 22 g: Mass , estimate the number of gold atoms in a solid gold Volume cube with side length 2 cm. Express your answer in scientific notation, rounded to two significant figures.

a

Using the formula Density =

b

A single sheet of gold leaf is so thin that it has an approximate thickness of 1 × 10− 7 m. If the gold cube from part (a) was hammered into a single square sheet of this thickness, what would be the side length of the square in metres?

An astronomer estimates the distance to Star A as 4.5 × 1013 km and the distance to Star B as 9.0 × 1015 km: a

By how many orders of magnitude is Star B further away than Star A?

b

The astronomer’s colleague points out an error in the calculation for Star A. The correct distance is 5.0 × 1012 km. The estimate for Star B was correct. Did the astronomer’s error cause them to overestimate or underestimate the number of times further Star B is from Star A? Justify your answer with calculations.

Investigation: Represent Australian populations

Investigate online

716

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

mathspace.co


9.03   Log scales After this lesson, you will be able to… • interpret data presented on logarithmic scales. • represent quantities that range over several orders of magnitude using log scales. • solve problems involving logarithmic scales in real-world contexts.

Interpret logarithmic scales A logarithmic scale is a scale of measurement where the position of a numerical value is marked using the logarithm of that value, typically base 10, instead of the value itself. This means that a constant distance on the scale corresponds to a constant multiplicative factor (or ratio) of the actual value. Logarithmic scales are particularly useful when comparing numbers that span a very large range. If the distances of the planets from the Sun are being compared, a logarithmic scale can be used to simplify the numbers and make comparisons more manageable. Planet

Distance from the Sun, d (km)

log10 (d)

Mercury

57 910 000

7.76

Venus

108 200 000

8.03

Earth

149 600 000

8.17

Mars

227 900 000

8.36

Jupiter

778 500 000

8.89

Examine the distance difference between Mercury and Jupiter from the Sun. By observation, it is seen that the difference in the log10 (d) values is a little bit more than 1. This implies Jupiter’s distance from the Sun is a little more than 10 times the distance of Mercury. To find a more exact answer: 8.89 − 7.76 = 1.13 101.13 ≈ 13.49

Subtract the log values for Jupiter and Mercury Express 1.13 as a power of 10 and evaluate

Thus, it can be said that Jupiter is approximately 13.49 times the distance of Mercury from the Sun. A key characteristic of a base 10 logarithmic scale is its relationship with order of magnitude. A difference of 1 on this scale represents a tenfold change (a factor of 10), or one order of magnitude, in the actual quantity. Similarly, a difference of 2 corresponds to a hundredfold change (a factor of 102 = 100), or two orders of magnitude, and so on. On a log scale, each unit increase signifies an increase by a factor of 10 (for base 10). An increase of 2 units signifies an increase by a factor of 102 = 100.

9.03 Log scales mathspace.co

717


Example 1 The Richter scale is a base 10 logarithmic scale used to measure the magnitude of an earthquake, given by R = log10 (x), where x is the relative strength of the quake. This means an earthquake that measures 4.0 on the Richter scale will be 10 times stronger than one that measures 3.0 The aftershock of an earthquake measured 6.7 on the Richter scale, and the main quake was 4 times stronger. Determine the magnitude of the main quake on the Richter scale, rounded to one decimal place.

Create a strategy To determine the magnitude of the main quake: 1.  Convert the multiplicative factor (4 times stronger) into its equivalent value on the logarithmic (Richter) scale using log10 (factor). 2. Add this logarithmic difference to the magnitude of the aftershock.

Apply the idea The main quake was 4 times stronger than the aftershock. Convert this multiplicative factor to the logarithmic scale: log10 (4) ≈ 0.6021 Evaluate the base 10 logarithm of the strength factor This means the main quake is 0.6021 units higher on the Richter scale than the aftershock. To determine the magnitude of the main quake: Magnitude of main quake = 6.7 + 0.6021

Write the equation

= 7.3021

Evaluate

≈ 7.3

Round to one decimal place

The magnitude of the main quake on the Richter scale is approximately 7.3

Example 2 The decibel scale, which is used to record the intensity level of sound, is a logarithmic scale. • In the decibel scale, the lowest audible sound, with intensity 10− 12 watts/m2, is assigned the value of 0. • A sound that is 10 times more intense is assigned a decibel value of 10. • A sound 100 (102) times more intense is assigned a decibel value of 20. • A sound 1000 (103) times more intense is assigned a decibel value of 30. If the sound of a normal speaking voice is 50 decibels, and the sound in a bus terminal is 80 decibels, how many times more intense is the bus terminal compared to the speaking voice?

718

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Create a strategy To find how many times more intense the bus terminal is: 1. Calculate the difference in decibel values. 2. U se the definition of the decibel scale (a difference of 10 dB means 10 times more intense, 20 dB means 100 times more intense, etc.) to convert this difference back to a multiplicative factor.

Apply the idea The difference in decibel levels is calculated by subtracting the decibel level of the speaking voice from that of the bus terminal: Difference in dB = 80 – 50

Write the equation

= 30

Evaluate

The pattern in the data shows that a difference of 10 dB corresponds to a factor of 101, 20 dB corresponds to a factor of 102, and so on. Therefore, a difference of 30 dB corresponds to a multiplicative factor of 103 = 1000. So, the bus terminal sound is 1000 times more intense than the speaking voice.

Idea summary ogarithmic scales can be applied to real-life situations where very large or very L small numbers are involved, such as measuring earthquake sizes (Richter scale) and sound levels (decibel scale). Differences on a logarithmic scale correspond to multiplicative factors in the actual quantities.

Create logarithmic scale plots Logarithmic scales are often used in graphs when there is a large range of values for one or more variables. Plotting the logarithm of a variable (often called a semi-log plot if only one axis is logarithmic, or a log-log plot if both are) can make trends in the data more apparent. Consider an example to illustrate the creation and utility of plotting data using a logarithmic scale for one axis. The set of five ordered pairs shown in the table: x

1

2

3

4

5

y

20

200

3631

52 481

250 000

9.03 Log scales mathspace.co

719


A plot of these five points on standard linear axes can be difficult to interpret because of the large range of the y-values. Much of the detail for smaller y-values is lost. (5, 5.40)

(5, 250 000)

250 000

(4, 4.72)

5

200 000

4

150 000

3

100 000

2 (4, 52 481)

50 000

(3, 3.56) (2, 2.30) (1, 1.30)

1 (1, 20) (2, 200) (3, .3631)

0

1

2

4

3

0

5

1

2

3

4

5

Plot of log10 ( y) vs. x (Semi-log plot)

Plot of y vs. x (Linear scales)

To create the semi-log plot, the base 10 logarithm of each y-value is plotted against the original x. The transformed values are shown in the table: x

1

2

3

4

5

log10 ( y)

1.301

2.301

3.560

4.720

5.398

Even though the log10 ( y) values are far more manageable in this form, it must be remembered that the actual data points are those in the first table. That is to say, the actual y-values are given by 101.301, 102.301, 103.560, 104.720, and 105.398. Using the logarithm of the y-values provides a clearer visual representation of the relationship between x and y when y spans several orders of magnitude. To construct a plot where one axis (e.g., the y-axis) uses a logarithmic scale (often called a semi-log plot): 1. Create a table of values for the original data (x and y). 2. Convert the y-value of each ordered pair from y to log10 ( y). This can often be done using spreadsheet formulas. The new data set will be x vs log10 ( y). 3. Draw an appropriate set of axes. The x-axis will be scaled linearly as usual. The y-axis will also be scaled linearly, but its tick marks will represent the log10 ( y) values. Label this axis accordingly (e.g., as log10 ( y)). 4. Graph the data for x vs log10 ( y) on these axes. Alternatively, specialised logarithmic graph paper can be used where the y-axis is pre-scaled logarithmically, allowing direct plotting of the original y-values.

720

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 3

Number of countries

The histogram shows the area (in km2) for 12 countries, plotted using a log scale on the horizontal axis. The labels on the horizontal axis represent log10 (Area). 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1

2

3 4 5 6 log10 of area

7

How many countries have an area of between 10 000 km2 and 1 00 000 km2?

Create a strategy To determine the number of countries: 1. Convert the given area boundaries (10 000 km2 and 100 000 km2) to their logarithmic (base 10) values, as this is how the horizontal axis is scaled. 2. Identify the bar on the histogram that corresponds to this range of logarithmic values. 3. Read the height of this bar from the vertical axis (Number of countries).

Apply the idea The area is between 10 000 km2 and 100 000 km2. Convert these to their log10 values: log10 (10 000) = log10 (104) = 4 log10 (100 000) = log10 (105) = 5 The question asks for countries with an area corresponding to log10 (Area) values between 4 and 5. From the histogram, the bar that spans the horizontal axis range from 4 to 5 has a height corresponding to 3 on the vertical axis (Number of countries). Therefore, there are 3 countries with an area between 10 000 km2 and 100 000 km2.

Idea summary hen data spans several orders of magnitude, plotting the logarithm of one or W more variables (creating a semi-log or log-log plot) can reveal underlying trends more clearly. Creating a semi-log plot involves plotting the transformed values of log₁₀ ( y) against the original x-values on a standard linear grid. The vertical axis must be labelled appropriately as log₁₀ ( y).

9.03 Log scales mathspace.co

721


9.03 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

a

Convert the number 75 000 to a value on a log10 scale, rounded to two decimal places.

b

A quantity is represented as 4.2 on a log10 scale. What is the original number, rounded to the nearest whole number?

Practice 2

Ex 1

3

A financial planner has clients with a large range of annual incomes. To manage the data more easily, the income (in dollars) of each client is first converted to a log10 scale. a

What income would result in 4.9 on a log10 scale?

b

What range of incomes corresponds to a range of 5 to 6 on the log10 scale?

The Richter scale is a base 10 logarithmic scale used to measure the magnitude of an x earthquake, given by R = log10 , where x is the intensity of the quake and a is the a intensity of a minimal quake that can barely be detected. An earthquake that registers 4.0 on the Richter scale is 10 times stronger than an earthquake that measures 3.0. Some past earthquakes and their Richter scale ratings are shown in the table: a

4

How many times stronger was the earthquake in Sumatra compared to the earthquake in China? Round your answer to the nearest whole number.

Earthquake

Richter scale rating

Sumatra 2004

9.1

China 2008

7.9

Haiti 2010

7.0

b

How many times stronger is a quake of 7.6 than one of 5.2? Round your answer to the nearest whole number.

c

The aftershock of an earthquake measured 6.5 Italy 2009 6.3 on the Richter scale, and the main quake was 5 times stronger. Determine the magnitude of the main quake on the Richter scale, rounded to one decimal place.

The Richter scale is used to measure the intensity of earthquakes. The formula for the x Richter scale rating of a quake is given by R = log10 , where a is the intensity of a a minimal quake that can barely be detected, and x is a multiple of the minimal quake’s intensity. The table shows how quakes are categorised according to their Richter scale rating:

Richter rating

722

Minor

Light

Moderate

Strong

2 − 3.9

4 − 4.9

5 − 5.9

6 − 6.9

a

A seismograph measures the intensity of a quake to be x = 5711a. Determine the Richter scale rating R of this quake, rounded to one decimal place.

b

In which category does the quake fall?

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Ex 2

5

The decibel scale, which is used to record the intensity level of sound, is a logarithmic scale: • In the decibel scale, the lowest audible sound is assigned the value of 0. • A sound that is 10 times more intense than 0 is assigned a decibel value of 10. • A sound 100 (102) times more intense than 0 is assigned a decibel value of 20. In general, an increase of 10 decibels corresponds to an increase in magnitude of 10. The table shows the decibel value for various types of noise:

6

Type of noise

Decibel value

Jet plane

150 120

a

How many times more intense is the sound of industrial noise than the sound of a wind turbine?

Pneumatic drill Industrial

110

b

If the sound of a library is 40 decibels, and a busy restaurant is 80 decibels, how many times more intense is the busy restaurant compared to the library?

Stereo music

100

Inside a car

90

Office

70

Household

60

Wind turbine

50

Bedroom

30

Falling leaves

20

In the given histogram, the horizontal axis has been plotted using a log10 scale: Frequency 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 log10 value –2

–1

0

1

2

3

a

What is the total frequency of scores between 1 and 100?

b

What is the total frequency of scores larger than 0.1?

c

What is the total frequency of scores smaller than 10?

4

9.03 Log scales mathspace.co

723


Ex 3

7

The table shows the distribution of 12 countries according to the log10 of their area (in km2): log10 of area

Number of countries

3−4

1

4−5

3

5−6

7

6−7

1

a

How many countries have an area between 1000 km2 and 100 000 km2?

b

How many countries have an area between 10 000 km2 and 1 000 000 km2?

Extend your thinking 8

The lifespans of various animals and insects are shown in the table: Animal/Insect Ant

Lifespan in a log10 scale

20

African elephant

25 500

Bowhead whale

71 400

Bumblebee

4.41

21

1.32

Chicken

2920

3.47

Dog

5110

Emperor penguin

8500

Fly Giraffe

724

Lifespan (days)

3.93

18 10 120

Hamster

780

Ladybug

365

Little penguin

2190

Monkey

7300

Shark

10 980

2.89 3.34 4.04

a

Complete the table by converting the lifespans to a log10 scale, rounding each value to two decimal places.

b

Create a histogram to represent this data on a log10 scale.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


9.04   Data transformations After this lesson, you will be able to… • identify when data transformations are appropriate. • transform non-linear relationships into linear form. • select appropriate transformations for approximately quadratic, reciprocal and logarithmic data.

Linear and non-linear functions Sometimes, data is non-linear, but still follows a pattern. However, to find a line of good fit, it is helpful for the data to be linear. Non-linear bivariate data sets can be transformed into linear data sets by manipulating the x- or y-values. The key types of functions that are used to transform are quadratic, reciprocal, or logarithmic. Quadratic function

Logarithmic function

A polynomial function of degree 2, with parent function of y = x2.

A function that can be written in the form y = logb (x). y

y

x x

Reciprocal function A function that can be written in the form 1 y where x ≠ 0. x y x

9.04 Data transformations mathspace.co

725


These functions can be stretched, compressed, reflected and translated horizontally or vertically, so the position may be different, but the basic shape will be the same. For example, here are the graphs of: y

y

30

30

25

25

20

20

15

15

10

10

5

5

x 0

1

2

3

4

5

x 0

6

Quadratic shifted down slightly

1

2

3

4

Classify each graphed function as linear, quadratic, logarithmic, or reciprocal: 6 5 4 3 2 1 −6−5−4−3−2−1 −1 −2 −3 −4 −5 −6

y

x 1 2 3 4 5 6

Create a strategy Use the characteristics and shape of the graph to determine the type of function.

Apply the idea This function is logarithmic.

726

6

Reciprocal reflected, stretched, and shifted to the right

Example 1

a

5

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


b

6 5 4 3 2 1

y

x −6−5−4−3−2−1 1 2 3 4 5 6 −1 −2 −3

Apply the idea This function is quadratic.

c

6 5 4 3 2 1 −6−5−4−3−2−1 −1 −2 −3 −4 −5 −6

y

x 1 2 3 4 5 6

Apply the idea This function is linear.

9.04 Data transformations mathspace.co

727


d

6 5 4 3 2 1

y

x 1 2 3 4 5 6

−6−5−4−3−2−1−1 −2 −3 −4 −5 −6

Apply the idea This function is reciprocal.

Idea summary 5 4 3 2 1

y

x

−5 −4 −3 −2 −1 −1 −2 −3 −4 −5

−5 −4 −3 −2 −1 −1 −2 −3 −4 −5

x

Reciprocal function

728

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

x 1 2 3 4 5

Quadratic function

y

1 2 3 4 5

y

−5 −4 −3 −2 −1 −1 −2 −3 −4 −5

1 2 3 4 5

Linear 5 4 3 2 1

5 4 3 2 1

5 4 3 2 1 −5 −4 −3 −2 −1 −1 −2 −3 −4 −5

y

x 1 2 3 4 5

Logarithmic function


Choice of data transformation When a scatterplot shows a non-linear relationship between two variables, using linear regression to create a model for the data is not possible. However, applying a transformation to one variable can make the relationship appear linear. This process is called data transformation or linearisation. The process for transforming data is: 1. Identify which type of transformation is most appropriate. 2. Transform non-linear relationship into linear data using a spreadsheet. 3. Draw the transformed data. 4. Optional: Draw a line of good fit for the transformed data. Write the equation with the transformation. The three most common types of transformations are the square transformation, the reciprocal transformation, and the logarithmic transformation. One of these transformations can be applied to x or y. Square transformation If the scatterplot of y vs x shows a curved relationship that resembles part of a parabola (a quadratic relationship), a square transformation might be appropriate. • To stretch the x-values away from the y-axis, the transformation x → x2 can linearise the data when graphing x2 vs y. y

y

35

35

30

30

25

25

20

20

15

15

10

10

5 0

x 1

2

3

4

5

y vs x (Quadratic)

6

7

5 0

x² 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 y vs x2 (Linearised)

After applying an x2 transformation, the new linear model would be y = a + b (x2).

9.04 Data transformations mathspace.co

729


Reciprocal transformation • If the scatterplot shows inverse variation, a reciprocal transformation can be effective. 2 7 4 3 2 5 4 1 3 4 1 2 1 4

0

y

2 7 4 3 2 5 4 1 3 4 1 2 1 4

x 1 2

1 4

3 4

1

5 4

3 2

7 4

0

2

y

1 x 1

2

y vs

y vs x (Reciprocal) After applying a

3

1 transformation, the new linear model would be y x

4

5

6

7

8

1 (Linearised) x 1 a b . x

Logarithmic transformation • Logarithmic transformations are useful for relationships that involve exponential growth/ decay or power functions. The base 10 logarithm (log10) will be used. A logarithmic transformation may be a good choice if the data is very steep vertically and then flattens out. y

y

7

7

6

6

5

5

4

4

3

3

2

2

1

1 x 0

100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000

y vs x (Logarithmic)

log10 (x) 0

1

2

3

y vs log10 (x) (Linearised)

After applying a log (x) transformation, the new linear model would be y = a + b log10 (x). Logarithmic transformations can only be applied if all data values for the variable being transformed are positive, since the logarithm of a non-positive number is undefined. The choice of transformation depends on the shape of the original scatterplot. The “circle of transformations” can be a helpful guide, but often it involves some trial and error. Always check the linearised data to assess if linearity has been achieved.

730

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


The circle of transformations can help with choosing an appropriate transformation: Possible Transformations

Possible Transformations

y2 y2

log x

x2

1 x Possible Transformations

Possible Transformations

log y

log y

1 y log x

1 y

1 x

x2

Example 2 List all appropriate data transformation for each scatterplot: y

a 5 4 3 2 1

x 0

1

2

3

4

5

Create a strategy Observe the shape of the data points on the scatterplot. Compare this shape to the shapes shown on the circle of transformations to identify appropriate transformations.

Apply the idea The scatterplot shows a curve that starts high and decreases, then flattens out. This shape corresponds to the bottom-left quadrant of the circle of transformations. 1 1 Appropriate data transformations to linearise this data could be y vs , vs x, y vs log (x), or x y log (y) vs x.

9.04 Data transformations mathspace.co

731


y

b 25 20 15 10 5

x 0

1

2

3

4

5

Apply the idea The scatterplot shows a curve that starts low and increases, with the rate of increase itself increasing. This shape corresponds to the bottom-right quadrant of the circle of transformations. Appropriate data transformations to linearise this data could be y vs x2, y2 vs x, log ( y) vs x, or log ( y), log ( x).

Reflect and check Choosing the most effective transformation often involves trying a few options and seeing which one produces the most linear result.

c y 5 4 3 2 1 x 0

5

10

15

20

25

Apply the idea The scatterplot shows a curve that starts low and increases, but the rate of increase is slowing down. This shape corresponds to the top-left quadrant of the circle of transformations. Appropriate data transformations to linearise this data could be y vs log ( x), log ( y) vs x, y vs x , or y2 vs x.

732

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Idea summary Data transformation (or linearisation) is the process of applying a transformation to non-linear data to make it linear. This allows linear regression techniques to be used. Common types of transformations include: • A square transformation (x2) • A reciprocal transformation

1 x

• A logarithmic transformation (log10 (x)) The circle of transformations can help determine which transformation to apply based on the shape of the original data. Possible Transformations

Possible Transformations

y2 y2

log x

x2

1 x Possible Transformations

Possible Transformations

log y 1 y

log y

log x

1 y

1 x

x2

Perform data transformations To transform data, use technology to: 1. Input the explanatory and response variables into two columns in a spreadsheet (list). 2. Draw a scatterplot and decide whether the data are linear or non-linear. 3. If it is non-linear, use the circle of transformations to determine an appropriate transformation. 4. Add another column to the spreadsheet with an appropriate label, like xsq for the x2 transformation. 5. Use the formula to autofill the column in terms of one of the existing columns using the chosen transformation. 6. Plot a new scatterplot using transformed data, verify it is linear. 7. Find the line of good fit of the transformed data and write the equation. (Optional)

9.04 Data transformations mathspace.co

733


Example 3 Consider the points shown: y

12 10 8 6 4 2 0 −2 −4

(6,13)

(4, 3) x 1

2

3 4 (2, −3)

5

6

7

(0, −5)

a Complete the data transformation by filling in the table of values for the points shown on the graph: x

0

2

4

6

2

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

x

y

−5

−3

3

13

Create a strategy Consider the x-coordinate of each point on the graph, then square it.

Apply the idea From the graph, the points are (0, – 5), (2, – 3), (4, 3), and (6, 13). For x = 0, x2 = 02 = 0. The point is (0, – 5). For x = 2, x2 = 22 = 4. The point is (2, – 3). For x = 4, x2 = 42 = 16. The point is (4, 3). For x = 6, x2 = 62 = 36. The point is (6, 13). The completed table is:

734

x

0

2

4

6

x

2

0

4

16

36

y

−5

−3

3

13

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


b Plot the y-values against the x2-values.

Create a strategy Plot the points (x2, y) from the completed table in part (a).

Apply the idea 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 0 −2 −4 −6

y

x2

The ordered pairs of points to be plotted on the Cartesian plane are: (0, – 5), (4, – 3), (16, 3), and (36, 13), which are plotted on the graph.

4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36

c Draw the line that passes through the points.

Create a strategy Draw a line through the plotted points on the Cartesian plane from part (b).

Apply the idea 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 0 −2 −4 −6

Reflect and check x2 The equation of the line is y 5 or 2 1 2 y 5 x . The line happens to pass 2 through all four points, though this is not

y

always the case. x2

4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36

9.04 Data transformations mathspace.co

735


Example 4 A biologist is studying the relationship between the concentration of a pollutant in a lake and the observed biodiversity score (a measure of the variety of species). The data collected is shown in the table: Pollutant concentration (ppm, x)

1

2

5

10

20

50

100

Biodiversity score (y)

30.5

36.8

44.5

50.9

57.2

65.1

70.3

a Draw the scatterplot that represents the data (Biodiversity score vs Pollutant concentration).

Create a strategy Plot the points from the table with Pollutant concentration (x) on the x-axis and Biodiversity score (y) on the y-axis.

Apply the idea y

Biodiversity score

70 60 50 40 30 0

x 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Pollutant in ppm

b Which data transformation involving the explanatory variable (x) is most appropriate for this scatterplot? Explain this choice.

Create a strategy 1 Observe the shape of the scatterplot compared to the shapes of y = x2, y and y = log10 (x) and x see which is most resembles.

Apply the idea The data shows a pattern where the biodiversity score increases with pollutant concentration, but the increase becomes less steep at higher concentrations. This is characteristic of a logarithmic relationship. Therefore, plotting y vs log10 (x) is most appropriate.

736

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


c Complete this table of values using the chosen transformation from part (b). Round the values to two decimal places. Pollutant concentration (x)

1

2

5

10

20

50

100

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

Biodiversity score (y)

30.5

36.8

44.5

50.9

57.2

65.1

70.3

Create a strategy The chosen transformation from part (b) is y vs log10 (x). For each value of Pollutant concentration (x) in the original table, calculate log10 (x) and record it in the new row, rounding to two decimal places.

Apply the idea Calculating log10 (x) for each concentration value: • log10 (1) = 0.00 • log10 (2) ≈ 0.30 • log10 (5) ≈ 0.70 • log10 (10) = 1.00 • log10 (20) ≈ 1.30 • log10 (50) ≈ 1.70 • log10 (100) = 2.00 The completed table is: Pollutant concentration (x)

1

2

5

10

20

50

100

log10 (x)

0.00

0.30

0.70

1.00

1.30

1.70

2.00

Biodiversity score (y)

30.5

36.8

44.5

50.9

57.2

65.1

70.3

Reflect and check This new log10 (x) row will be the new explanatory variable for plotting against the original response variable (y).

d Draw a scatterplot for the transformed data.

Create a strategy Plot the points using the log10 (x) values as the x-coordinates and the Biodiversity score (y) values as the y-coordinates.

9.04 Data transformations mathspace.co

737


Apply the idea

Reflect and check The transformed data points should now appear to follow a much more linear trend compared to the original scatterplot.

Biodiversity score

y 70 60 50 40 30

log10 (x) 0.5 1 1.5 2 Pollutant in ppm

0

e Draw a line of good fit for the transformed data.

Create a strategy Visually estimate a straight line that best represents the trend of the points on the y vs log10 (x) scatterplot.

Apply the idea

Reflect and check The equation of this line would be of the form y = a + b log10 (x).

Biodiversity score

y 70

Using technology, the line of good fit for the transformed data is approximately y = 30.3 + 20.0 log10 (x). This linear model for the transformed linear model can now be used for predictions.

60 50 40 30 0

log10 (x) 0.5 1 1.5 2 Pollutant in ppm

Idea summary To perform data transformation: 1. Plot original data and identify non-linear pattern. 2. Choose an appropriate transformation based on the shape or circle of transformations. 3. Calculate the transformed variable values. 4. Plot the transformed data; it should appear more linear. 5. A line of good fit can be drawn on the transformed scatterplot. Technology can find the equation of the line for the transformed data.

738

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


9.04 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

2

3

Consider the table of values: a

Is revenue changing at a constant rate?

b

Is the relationship between time and revenue linear or non-linear?

Time

1

2

3

4

5

Revenue

5

14

25

36

47

Complete the missing values in the table of values for y = 2x2: x

−3

−2

−1

0

1

2

3

y

18

⬚

2

0

2

⬚

18

Explain why a data analyst might choose to perform a transformation on a bivariate dataset.

Practice Ex 1

4

Determine whether the graphs represent a linear or non-linear relationship between x and y. If non-linear, identify the type of function that is shown: a

y

b 4 3 2 1

5 x −8 −6 −4 −2

2 4 6 8

−5

−1 −2 −3 −4

−15

y 4 3 2 1 −4 −3 −2 −1 −1 −2 −3 −4

x

−4 −3 −2 −1

−10

c

y

1

d

x

2 3 4

4 3 2 1 −4 −3 −2 −1 −1 −2 −3 −4

1

2 3 4

1

2 3 4

y

x

9.04 Data transformations mathspace.co

739


Ex 2

5

For each scatterplot: i

Describe the pattern of the data.

ii

1 List one or more transformation(s), y vs x2, y vs log10 (x), y vs , that might be appropriate x to try to achieve linearity.

a

y

b

y

25

5

20

4

15

3

10

2

5

1 x

0 c

1

2

3

4

x 0

5

1

2

3

4

5

y 5 4 3 2 1 x 0

Ex 3

6

5

10

15

20

25

Consider the points shown: a

Complete the data transformation by filling in the table of values for the points shown on the graph: x2 y

⬚ 1

⬚ 4

⬚ 13

⬚

28

y 25 20 15

b

Plot the y-values against the x2-values.

10

c

Draw the line that passes through the points.

5 x 0

740

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

1

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9


7

Consider the table of values: a b c

x

Complete the data transformation by filling in the table of values. 1 Plot the y-values against the -values. x Draw the line that passes through the points.

1 x y

8

1 4

1 2

1

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

–5

–4

–3

2

1 2

For each table of values: i

Complete the data transformation by filling in the table of values.

ii

Determine if the transformation linearises the data.

a

x 1 3 7 2

x

⬚

y

9

1 6

1

⬚

27

b

9

⬚

x

⬚

343

1 x

729

y

1

2

4

5

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

1

0.25

0.0625

0.04

For each table of values: i

Complete the two different data transformations by filling in the table. Round the answers to three decimal places where necessary.

ii

Determine which transformation linearises the data.

a

x 1 2 4 2

x

1 x

b

⬚

⬚

⬚

– 7.75

–7

–4

1

⬚

⬚

⬚

x

10

20

30

40

2

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

x

y

⬚

−2

⬚

− 1.398

⬚

− 1.046

− 0.796

x

1

2

4

5

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

log10 (x)

c

⬚ ⬚

y

6

1 x log10 (x) y

⬚

− 5.75

⬚

⬚

− 5.875 − 5.9375

⬚

⬚

− 5.95

9.04 Data transformations mathspace.co

741


10

For each non-linear function: i a

Complete the table of values.

1 2 1 x b y 2 4x x x −3 −2 −1 −2 −1 0 1 2

12

⬚

⬚

y

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

1

2

3

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

1

10

100

⬚

⬚

⬚

x

0

1

2

3

4

2

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

a

Complete the data transformation by filling in the table of values for x2.

b

Plot the y-values against the x2-values.

c

Draw the line that passes through these points.

x

y

0

1

4

9

16

For each graph, draw the graph of y against x2: 13 y 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 x 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

b 10 8 6 4 2 0 −2 −4 −6 −8

Consider the points shown: a

Complete the data transformation by filling in the table of values: x 1 x y

b c

742

⬚

Consider the table of values:

a

13

⬚

2 y d y = log10 x x x 0.1 1 1 x −2 −1 1 2 2 2 y ⬚ y

11

Sketch a graph of the function.

y

y c

ii

1

2

5

10

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

10

5

2

1

1 -values. x Draw the line that passes through these points. Plot the y-values against the

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

y

x 1

2 3 4 5 6 7

11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

8 9

y

x 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11


14

Consider the given graph:

18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2

1 Draw the graph of y against . x

y

0

15

Consider the given table of values: 1 Draw the graph of y against . x

16

1 ,9 3 (1, 3) x 1 1 1 2 5 1 7 4 3 5 11 6 3 2 3 6 6 3 2 3 6

x

1 8​

1 4

1 2

y

6

2

0

Consider the table of values: x

1

10

100

1000

log10 (x)

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

y

17

1 , 18 6

0

5

10

15

a

Complete the data transformation by filling in the table of values.

b

Plot the y-values against the log10 (x)-values.

c

Draw the line that passes through the points.

Consider the points shown: a

Complete the data transformation by filling in the y table of values: 18 log10 (x) y

⬚

−3

⬚ 7

⬚ 17

b

Plot the y-values against the log10 (x)-values.

c

Draw the line that passes through the points.

(100, 17)

16 14 12 10 8

(10, 7)

6 4 2 0 −2

x 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100 (1, −3)

9.04 Data transformations mathspace.co

743


18

Ex 4

19

20

For the given table of values, draw the graph of y against log10 (x): 1

10

100

1000

y

−8

−5

−2

1

A biologist is studying the growth of a particular type of plant under special lighting conditions. She records the height of the plant (H, in centimetres) over several days (t, in days): a

Plot the data of height (H) against time (t).

b

Based on the shape of the scatterplot, which type of transformation is most likely to linearise this data? Explain this choice.

1

3

4

5

Height (H, cm)

2.0 2.8 4.0

5.7

8.08

t

1

2

3

4

5

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

H

2

2.0

2.8

4.0

5.7

8.0

Complete this table of values using the chosen transformation from part (b). Round the values to two decimal places.

d

Plot the transformed data. Does this transformation appear to have linearised the data?

A ball is dropped from rest at a certain height and the data was recorded:

b

t (Time in seconds)

1

2

4

6

d (Distance travelled in metres)

4.9

19.6

78.4

176.4

Complete the following three data transformation by filling in the table of values (round to two decimal places where necessary):

t

1

2

4

6

2

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

t

1 t

Which transformation linearises the data (i.e. makes distance d linear with the transformed time)?

⬚

log10 (t) d

⬚

4.9

⬚

19.6

78.4

⬚ 176.4

The concentration of hydrogen ions in a solution varies according to the concentration of hydroxide ions as shown in the table:

a

Concentration of hydroxide (Molarity)

10− 3

10− 4

10− 5

10− 6

10− 7

Concentration of hydrogen ions (Molarity)

10− 11

10− 10

10− 9

10− 8

10− 7

Complete the two data transformations by filling in the table of values: 10− 8

10− 10

1 Concentration of hydroxide

⬚

103

104

Concentration of hydrogen ions

10− 11

10− 10

⬚

(Concentration of hydroxide)2

b

744

Time (t, days)

c

a

21

x

Which transformation linearises the data?

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

10− 9

⬚

10− 14

10− 8

10− 7

⬚

107


22

For the given graph, draw the graph of log10 ( y) against x: y 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 (0, 0.01) 0

(4, 100)

(3, 10)

(2, 1)

(1, 0.1)

x

2

1

3

4

Extend your thinking 23

24

25

1 A researcher linearised a set of non-linear data by plotting y vs . The resulting line of good x fit for the transformed data was found to have the equation y = 5 − 2x, where y represents 1 the original y-values and x represents the transformed x-values . x a Write the equation for the non-linear model that relates the original variables x and y. b

Using the non-linear model, predict the value of y when x = 0.5.

c

Describe the shape of the original scatterplot of y vs x based on the non-linear equation.

A researcher linearised a set of non-linear data by plotting y vs x2. The resulting line of good fit for the transformed data was found to have the equation y = 3x − 5, where y represents the original y-values and x represents the transformed x-values (x2). a

Write the equation for the non-linear model that relates the original variables x and y.

b

Using the non-linear model, predict the value of y when x = − 4.

The stopping distance, d (in metres), of a car is related to its initial speed, v (in km/h.) The data collected is shown in the table: Speed (v)

20

30

40

50

60

Distance (d)

6

13.5

24

37.5

54

a

A physics model suggests the relationship is quadratic, of the form d = kv2. By transforming the data accordingly, show that this model is appropriate.

b

Determine the equation relating d and v. Then, use this equation to predict the stopping distance for a car travelling at 80 km/h.

9.04 Data transformations mathspace.co

745


9.05   Data models After this lesson, you will be able to… • model non-linear data using appropriate functions. • determine the parameters of fitted models. • evaluate the appropriateness of different models for given datasets.

Data models Data model A mathematical equation or function that describes the relationship between variables in a data set. It can be used to understand trends, make predictions, or test hypotheses. Example: If transformed data follows y = a + b(x2), the data model for the original variables is y = a + bx2. When raw data from experiments or observations results in a non-linear scatterplot. It can be challenging to determine the underlying mathematical relationship directly. By transforming one or both variables, it is often possible to produce a linear scatterplot (a process called linearisation). Once the data is linearised, a linear equation can be determined, which can then be transformed back to model the original non-linear relationship. This data model allows for interpolation and extrapolation. Steps for modelling data by linearisation 1. Plot the original data (x, y) and observe the shape of the scatterplot to identify potential non-linear patterns. 2. Based on the observed shape (e.g., parabolic, logarithmic growth), select an appropriate 1 data transformation for the independent variable x (or sometimes y), such as X = x2, X , x or X = log10 (x). 3. Create a new table of values using the transformed variable X and the original y-values. 4. Plot the transformed data (X, y). If this plot of transformed data appears linear, the chosen transformation was appropriate. If not, reconsider the transformation. Different transformations can be compared by visually assessing which produces the most linear plot. 5. Determine the equation of the line of good fit for the now linearised data (the plot of X versus y), typically in the form y = a + bX. This is achieved by: • • • •

746

Drawing a line of good fit by eye on the scatterplot of the transformed data. Selecting two distinct points from this drawn line. Calculating the gradient (b) using these two points. Substituting one point and the gradient into the equation y = a + bX to find the y-intercept (a).

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


6. Substitute the expression for the transformed variable X back into the linear equation y = a + bX to obtain the non-linear model in terms of the original variables x and y. For example, if the transformation used was X = x2, the model becomes y = a + bx2. 7. Assess the goodness of fit of the model, primarily by visually inspecting how well the graph of the derived non-linear model (from Step 6) overlays the original data points (x, y). A model whose curve passes closely through the original data points is considered a good fit. The more linear the plot of the transformed data (from Step 4) appeared, the better the resulting non-linear model is likely to fit the original data. 8. Use the derived non-linear model to make predictions or analyse the relationship, keeping in mind the usual considerations for interpolation and extrapolation based on the original data’s range.

Interactive exploration

Discover this concept in action online

mathspace.co

Example 1 Consider the data: x

0

1

2

3

4

5

y

1

3

9

19

33

51

a Plot the original data and identify a potentially appropriate transformation to linearise it.

Create a strategy Plot the points (x, y) from the table of values. Observe the shape of the curve passing through the points to determine a suitable linearising transformation.

Apply the idea 55 y 50 45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0

The curve that passes through each of the plotted points appears parabolic (part of a U-shape), suggesting that the relationship might be quadratic. Therefore, a square transformation (X = x2) is potentially appropriate. x 1

2

3

4

5

6

9.05 Data models mathspace.co

747


b Apply the x2 transformation and plot the linearised data.

Create a strategy Create a new table with values for X = x2 and the corresponding y-values. Plot y against X.

Apply the idea x

0

1

2

3

4

5

X = x2

0

1

4

9

16

25

y

1

3

9

19

33

51

55 y 50 45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0

x2 5

10

15 20 25 30

The plot of y against X = x2 appears strongly linear.

c Evaluate the appropriateness of the x2 transformation by comparing it with a log10 (x) transformation.

Create a strategy Apply a log10 (x) transformation to the original x data (excluding x = 0 as log10 (0) is undefined). Plot y against X ′ = log10 (x). Compare the linearity of this plot to the plot from the x2 transformation.

Apply the idea Consider the transformation X ′ = log10 (x): x

1

2

3

4

5

X ′ = log10 (x)

0.000

0.301

0.477

0.602

0.699

y

3

9

19

33

51

55 y 50 45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 log10 (x) 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.40.5 0.60.7 0.8 The plot of y against X ′ = log10 (x) shows a clear curve and is not linear.

Comparing the two transformed plots, the x2 transformation clearly results in a more linear scatterplot than the log10 (x) transformation. Therefore, the x2 transformation is the more appropriate choice for modelling this data set. A calculation of the correlation coefficient for y vs x2 would likely be very close to 1, while for y vs log10 (x), it would be lower.

748

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


d Determine an equation to model the data using the x2 transformation, in the form y = a + bx2.

Create a strategy For the linearised data (X = x2, y), determine the equation of the line y = a + bX. The y-intercept (a) can be read from the table where X = 0. The slope (b) can be found using two points from the transformed data. Then substitute X = x2 back.

Apply the idea The linearised equation is y = a + bX, where X = x2. From the table of transformed values (X = x2, y), when X = 0 (since x = 0), y = 1. So, the y-intercept is a = 1. To find the slope b, use two points from the transformed table, for example, (X1, y1) = (1, 3) and (X2, y2) = (4, 9). b

y2 X2

y1 X1

9 3 4 1

6 3

2

So the equation for the transformed data is y = 1 + 2X. Substituting X = x2 back into the equation to obtain the model: y = 1 + 2x2

e Use the model to predict the value of y when x = 2.5

Create a strategy Substitute x = 2.5 into the derived model equation y = 1 + 2x2.

Apply the idea y = 1 + 2x2

Write the equation 2

= 1 + 2(2.5)

Substitute x = 2.5

= 13.5

Evaluate

The predicted value of y when x = 2.5 is 13.5

9.05 Data models mathspace.co

749


Example 2 The height (H in centimetres) of a particular species of plant is measured over several months (t). The data are shown in the table. It is believed that the growth follows a logarithmic model. t (months)

1

2

4

8

12

H (cm)

5.0

8.9

12.8

16.7

19.0

a Determine an appropriate model based on the information provided.

Create a strategy The problem states that the growth is believed to follow a logarithmic model. A common logarithmic model for such data is of the form H = a + b log10 (t).

Apply the idea An appropriate model is H = a + b log10 (t). To linearise this, let X = log10 (t). The equation then becomes H = a + bX, which is linear in X.

b Linearise the data by applying the transformation from part (a). Round the values to three decimal places where necessary.

Create a strategy Calculate log10 (t) for each value of t and create a new table for X and H.

Apply the idea Calculating X = log10 (t) for each t-value: • log10 (1) = 0.000 • log10 (2) ≈ 0.301 • log10 (4) ≈ 0.602 • log10 (8) ≈ 0.903 • log10 (12) ≈ 1.079 The table of transformed data is:

750

X = log10 (t)

0.000

0.301

0.602

0.903

1.079

H (cm)

5.0

8.9

12.8

16.7

19.0

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


c Determine an equation to model the data in the form H = a + b log10 (t).

Create a strategy Using the linearised data (X, H), determine the equation of the line H = a + bX. The parameter a is the H-intercept. The parameter b (slope) can be found using two points.

Apply the idea The linearised equation is H = a + bX. From the transformed table, when X = 0.000, H = 5.0. So, the intercept is a = 5.0. To find the slope b, use two points from the transformed table, e.g., (X1, H1) = (0.301, 8.9) and (X2, H2) = (1.079, 19.0). b

H2 X2

H1 X1

19.0 8.9 1.079 0.301

10.1 12.98 0.778

13.0

So, the equation for the transformed data is approximately H = 5.0 + 13.0X. Substituting X = log10 (t) back, the model is: H = 5.0 + 13.0 log10 (t)

d Use the model to predict the height of the plant after 6 months, rounded to one decimal place.

Create a strategy Substitute t = 6 into the model equation H = 5.0 + 13.0 log10 (t). Calculate log10 (6) first.

Apply the idea First, log10 (6) ≈ 0.778. H = 5.0 + 13.0 log10 (t)

Write the equation

= 5.0 + 13.0 log10 (6)

Substitute t = 6

= 5.0 + 13.0 (0.778)

Substitute log10 (6) = 0.778

= 15.114

Evaluate

= 15.1

Round to one decimal place

The predicted height of the plant after 6 months is approximately 15.1 cm.

9.05 Data models mathspace.co

751


Example 3 The time (T in hours) taken for a remote-controlled car to complete a fixed racetrack of length 20 km is recorded for different average speeds (s in km/h): s (km/h)

5

10

15

20

25

T (hours)

4.00

2.00

1.33

1.00

0.80

a Determine an appropriate model type for this data.

Create a strategy Consider the relationship between speed and time for a fixed distance. As speed increases, time taken should decrease. This suggests an inverse or reciprocal relationship.

Apply the idea Since Distance = Speed × Time, for a fixed distance, Time relationship. An appropriate model is T

Fixed distance . This is a reciprocal Speed

1 k or, if linearised, T = kX where X . s s

b Linearise the data. Round the values to three decimal places where necessary.

Create a strategy 1 Apply the transformation X . Create a new table for X and T. s

Apply the idea Calculating X = 1 for each s value: s 1 • = 0.200 5 1 • = 0.100 10 1 • ≈ 0.067 15 1 • = 0.050 20 1 • = 0.040 25 The table of transformed data is: X T

752

1 s

0.200

0.100

0.067 0.050

0.040

4.00

2.00

1.33

0.80

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

1.00


c Determine an equation to model the data by determining the constant of proportionality, k, in k the model T . s

Create a strategy k If the model is T , then k = T × s. Calculate the product for each data pair. If these products are s approximately constant, their average can be used as the value for k.

Apply the idea Calculate k = Ts for each pair: • For (s, T ) = (5, 4.00), k = 5 × 4.00 = 20.00 • For (s, T ) = (10, 2.00), k = 10 × 2.00 = 20.00 • For (s, T ) = (15, 1.33), k = 15 × 1.33 = 19.95 • For (s, T ) = (20, 1.00), k = 20 × 1.00 = 20.00 • For (s, T ) = (25, 0.80), k = 25 × 0.80 = 20.00 4 to 1.33. 3 Thus, k = 20 can be taken as the constant of proportionality, which also matches the fixed track length. The values of k are very close to 20. The slight variation for s = 15 is due to rounding

The model is: T

20 s

1 should yield a straight line through the origin with slope k. s Using points (X1, T1) = (0.200, 4.00) and (X2, T2) = (0.040, 0.80): Alternatively, plotting T vs X

k

Slope

4.00 0.80 0.200 0.040

The intercept is 0, so T = 20X, which means T

3.20 0.160

20

20 . s

9.05 Data models mathspace.co

753


d Use the model to predict the time taken if the car travels at an average speed of 12 km/h. Round your answer to two decimal places.

Create a strategy Substitute s = 12 into the model equation T

20 . s

Apply the idea 20 s 20 = 12 5 = 3

T=

Write the equation Substitute s = 12 Simplify

= 1.67 Convert to decimal and round to two decimal places The predicted time taken is approximately 1.67 hours.

Idea summary To model non-linear data, a common strategy is to linearise the data by applying a 1 data transformation (e.g., x2, , log10 (x)). The appropriateness of a transformation x is evaluated by how well it linearises the data, often confirmed visually or using technology. Once linearised, the equation of the straight line (y = a + bX) can be found. Substituting the transformation back into this linear equation provides the data model for the original data, which can then be used for predictions.

9.05 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

754

In the context of statistical analysis, what is the primary purpose of applying a data transformation to a non-linear set of bivariate data? A

To make the data points easier to plot on a graph

B

To convert the data into a linear form so that a linear model (line of good fit) can be determined

C

To calculate the correlation coefficient of the original curved data

D

To eliminate outliers from the dataset

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


2

3

4

5

Match each non-linear scatterplot shape with the most appropriate transformation to achieve linearity: 1 A curve that increases and becomes a i y vs x steeper (like half a ‘U’ shape) b

A curve that increases but flattens out over time

ii

y vs x2

c

A curve that decreases sharply at first and then flattens out (hyperbolic shape)

iii

y vs log10 (x)

A student has linearised a dataset by plotting y vs x2 and found the equation of the line of good fit to be y = 5 + 3x2: a

Identify the explanatory variable and the response variable for the linearised model.

b

Express the equation for the data model in terms of the original variables, x and y.

Determine whether each statement about data transformation is true or false. Justify your answer: a

A logarithmic transformation can be applied to any dataset with an x-variable.

b

If a plot of y vs x2 is linear, the original relationship between y and x was quadratic.

c

“Linearisation” is the process of finding the gradient for a curved scatterplot.

Given a table of bivariate data (x, y), what is the essential first step you should take before deciding on a data transformation to create a data model?

Practice 6

Consider the data set: x

1

1.8

2.2

3

4

4.5

5.8

6.2

7

9

y

5

9.5

12.7

21

35

43.5

70.3

79.9

101

165

a

Use technology to create a scatterplot of this data. Does the shape of the data appear to be logarithmic, reciprocal, or parabolic?

b

Which transformation should be performed to linearise the data? A

Square the x-values (x2).

B

Determine the reciprocal of the x-values

C c

1 . x Determine the logarithm of the x-values (log10 (x)).

Complete the transformation of the x-values of the data: x2 y

⬚ 5

⬚

9.5

⬚

12.7

⬚

21

⬚

35

⬚

⬚

⬚

43.5 70.3 79.9

⬚

101

⬚

165

9.05 Data models mathspace.co

755


7

Consider the data set: x

1 10

1

10

100

1000

y

− 12

−2

8

18

28

a

Use technology to create a scatterplot of this data. Does the shape of the data appear to be logarithmic, reciprocal, or parabolic?

b

Which transformation should be performed to linearise the data? A

Square the x-values (x2).

B

Determine the logarithm of the x-values (log10 (x)). 1 Determine the reciprocal of the x-values . x

C c

Complete the transformation of the x-values of the data: ⬚

log10 (x) y

8

− 12

⬚

−2

⬚

8

18

Consider the data set, which models a relationship y

⬚

28

3 : x

x

1 10

1 5

4 5

1

2

3

4

8

10

y

30

15

15 4

3

3 2

1

3 4

3 8

3 10

a

Use technology to create a scatterplot of this data. Does the shape of the data appear to be logarithmic, reciprocal, or parabolic?

b

Which transformation should be performed to linearise the data? 1 A Determine the reciprocal of the x-values . x B Determine the logarithm of the x-values (log10 (x)). C

c

Square the x-values (x2).

Complete the transformation of the x-values of the data: 1 x y

756

⬚

⬚

⬚

30

15

⬚

15 4

⬚ 3

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

⬚ 3 2

⬚ 1

⬚ 3 4

⬚ 3 8

⬚

3 10


Ex 1

9

The height (y, in metres) of a ball thrown upwards is recorded at different times (x, in seconds) after being thrown. The data is recorded: x

1

2

2.8

4

5.5

y

4

−5

− 16.52

− 41

− 83.75

x

8.5

10.8

15.2

20

39.4

y

− 209.75

− 342.92

− 686.12

− 1193

− 4650.08

a

Use technology to create a scatterplot of this data. Does the shape of the data appear to be logarithmic, reciprocal, or parabolic?

b

Which transformation should be performed to linearise the data?

c

A

Determine the logarithm of the x-values (log10 (x)).

B

Determine the reciprocal of the x-values

C

Square the x-values (x2).

Complete the transformation of the x-values of the data: x2

⬚

y

4

x2 y

Ex 2

10

1 . x

⬚

− 16.52

− 209.75

⬚

−5 ⬚

⬚

− 342.92

⬚

− 41

⬚

− 83.75 ⬚

− 686.12

⬚

⬚

− 1193

d

Determine the non-linear equation in the form y = kx2 + c.

e

Determine the value for y when x = 30.

− 4650.08

The perceived loudness (y, in arbitrary units) of a sound source is measured at different distances (x, in metres). The data is recorded: x (Distance in m)

1 10

1

10

100

1000

y (Loudness units)

4.8

5

5.2

5.4

5.6

a

Use technology to create a scatterplot of this data. Does the shape of the data appear to be logarithmic, reciprocal, or parabolic?

b

Which transformation should be performed to linearise the data? A

Square the x-values (x2).

Determine the logarithm of the x-values (log10 (x)). 1 C Determine the reciprocal of the x-values . x Complete the transformation of the x-values log10 (x) of the data: y Determine the non-linear equation in the form y = k log10 (x) + c. B

c d e

⬚

4.8

⬚ 5

⬚

5.2

⬚

5.4

⬚

5.6

Use the new model to predict the loudness when the distance is x = 15. Round your answer to two decimal places.

9.05 Data models mathspace.co

757


Ex 3

11

The time saved (y, in hours) for a chemical reaction to reach a certain point depends on the concentration (x, in mol/L) of a catalyst. The data is recorded: x (Concentration in mol/L)

1 10

3 10

3 5

9 10

y (Time in hours)

1 2

13 6

31 12

11 4

23 8

3 35 12

4 47 16

5

59 20

Use technology to create a scatterplot of this data. Does the shape of the data appear to be logarithmic, reciprocal, or parabolic?

b

Which transformation should be performed to linearise the data? 1 A Determine the reciprocal of the x-values . x 2 B Square the x-values (x ).

c

Determine the logarithm of the x-values (log10 (x)).

Complete the transformation of the x-values of the data: 1 x y

d e

⬚

1 2

⬚

⬚

13 6

⬚

31 12

49 18

⬚

⬚

11 4

⬚

23 8

35 12

⬚

47 16

⬚

59 20

k c. x Use the new model to determine the time saved when the concentration is x = 10. Determine the non-linear equation in the form y

The cost (y, in dollars) of producing x units of a specialised component includes a fixed setup cost and a variable cost that increases with the number of units. The data is recorded: x (Units)

1

0.9

1.5

2

3.5

4

5

6.2

9

10

y (Cost, $)

6.5

6.4

7.1

8

12.1

14

18.5

25.2

46.5

56

a

Use technology to create a scatterplot of this data. Does the shape of the data appear to be logarithmic, reciprocal, or parabolic?

b

Which transformation should be performed to linearise the data? A

Square the x-values (x2).

B

Determine the reciprocal of the x-values

C c

1 . x Determine the logarithm of the x-values (log10 (x)).

Complete the transformation of the x-values of the data: x2 y

758

49 18

2

a

C

12

1

⬚

6.5

⬚

6.4

⬚ 7.1

⬚ 8

⬚

12.1

⬚ 14

⬚

18.5

⬚

25.2

d

Determine the non-linear equation in the form y = kx2 + c.

e

Use the new model to predict the value for y when x = 50.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

⬚

46.5

⬚

56


Extend your thinking 13

14

The energy consumption (y, in kWh) of a machine is observed to increase with its operational speed (x, in revolutions per minute, rpm). The fixed energy consumption when idle is also a factor. Data collected is shown: Operational speed, x (rpm)

1

2

3

4

5

Energy consumption, y (kWh)

12

18

28

42

60

a

Determine an appropriate model for the given data and its equation.

b

Predict the energy consumption when the operational speed is 7 rpm.

c

If the energy consumption is 138 kWh, what is the operational speed? Assume speed is positive.

The Richter scale reading (y) for earthquakes is related to the energy released (x, in joules, scaled for simplicity). Data from several earthquakes is shown: Scaled energy, x

1

10

100

500

1000

Richter reading, y

2

7

12

15.5

17

a

Determine an appropriate model for the given data and its equation.

b

Predict the Richter reading if the scaled energy released is 2000. Round to one decimal place.

c

If the Richter reading is 27, what is the scaled energy released?

Chapter 9 review

Online review

mathspace.co

9.05 Data models mathspace.co

759


Big ideas • The principles of measurement, including precision and unit conversion, provide the foundation for calculating the geometric properties of two-dimensional shapes. • The principles of area and perimeter extend to three-dimensional solids for the calculation of total surface area and volume. • The concept of similarity provides a framework for scaling geometric properties, where changes in length, area, and volume are related by powers of the linear scale factor.

10 Shape and measurement Chapter outline 10.01 10.02 10.03 10.04 10.05 10.06 10.07 10.08 10.09 10.10 10.11 10.12

Significant figures Measurement units Pythagoras’ theorem Perimeter Investigation: Circumference Arc length and perimeter of sectors Area Area of composite shapes Total surface area Volume Composite solids Similarity and scale factors Investigation: Scale diagrams Area and volume in similar figures Chapter 10 review

762 770 781 793 803 814 823 835 851 863 877 890


The Leaning Tower of Pisa is a cylinder that stands 56 metres tall and leans at an angle of 3.97 degrees!


10.01   Significant figures After this lesson, you will be able to… • distinguish between exact and approximate answers in measurement contexts. • round measurements to a specified number of significant figures.

Approximation and rounding Approximating a number simplifies calculations or measurements when an exact value is impractical or unnecessary, such as in engineering or other practical applications. For example, engineers will often decide whether to use exact values or approximated values. When calculating a length of metal, an engineer may decide 2130 cm is needed. It may be impractical to measure or cut to such a precise irrational length, so a drawing may specify that the metal must be cut to 46 cm. This is an approximation of the exact value that has been rounded to the nearest whole number. Rounding a decimal number to a specified number of decimal places produces an approximation. For example, consider rounding 0.0537 to two decimal places. Units

.

Tenths

Hundredths

Thousandths

Ten-thousandths

0

.

0

5

3

7

To round to the hundredths place, examine the thousandths place digit, which is 3. Since 3 is less than 5, keep the hundredths digit (5) unchanged, then discard digits to the right, yielding 0.05. To round a decimal number to a target decimal place, identify the target decimal place and the digit immediately to its right. • If this digit is less than 5, keep the target digit unchanged and discard all digits to the right. • If the digit to the right is greater than or equal to 5, increase the target digit by 1 and discard all digits to the right. When performing calculations, use exact values (e.g., fractions or unrounded decimals) throughout and round only at the final step to minimise rounding errors.

Example 1 Determine whether each statement is true or false: a

530 is an exact answer.

Create a strategy Consider whether any rounding has taken place. An exact value should not involve rounding.

762

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Apply the idea If a value has been rounded, then it is not an exact answer. If no rounding or estimation has taken place, then it is an exact answer. The value 530 is an exact answer as it has not been rounded or approximated.

b A calculator displays 530 as 23.021728866. Is this an exact answer?

Create a strategy Determine if 530 is a perfect square to assess whether 530 is a rational number (exact) or irrational (approximate). Alternatively, square 23.021728866 and check if the result exactly equals 530. If it does not, the calculator’s value is an approximation.

Apply the idea From part (a), it is found that the nearest perfect squares are 232 = 529 and 242 = 576. Since 530 is not an integer square, 530 is irrational and cannot be expressed exactly as a finite decimal. The calculator’s value, 23.021 728 866, is a finite decimal, so it must be an approximation of the irrational 530. To confirm, squaring 23.021728866 yields approximately 529.999 999 98, which is very close to but not exactly 530. Therefore, 23.021 728 866 is not an exact value. Since the calculator provides only a rounded value, it is not considered an exact value.

Example 2 Round each number as specified. a Round 85.1446 to the nearest hundredth.

Create a strategy Use a place value table to identify the hundredths and thousandths digits. Compare the thousandths digit to 5 to determine whether to keep the hundredths digit unchanged or increased by 1.

Apply the idea Tens

Units

.

Tenths

Hundredths

Thousandths

Ten-thousandths

8

5

.

1

4

4

6

To round 85.1446 to the nearest hundredth, examine the thousandths digit, which is 4. Since 4 is less than 5, keep the hundredths digit (4) unchanged and discard the digits to the right. So, the rounded answer is 85.14.

10.01 Significant figures mathspace.co

763


b Round 7.034 500 to four decimal places.

Create a strategy Use a place value table to identify the digits up to the fourth decimal place (ten-thousandths).

Apply the idea Units

.

Tenths

Hundredths

Thousandths

Tenthousandths

Hundredthousandths

Millionths

7

.

0

3

4

5

0

0

To round 7.034500 to four decimal places, identify the fourth decimal place (ten-thousandths), which is 5, and examine the fifth decimal place (hundred-thousandths), which is 0. Since 0 is less than 5, keep the ten-thousandths digit (5) unchanged and discard all digits to the right. Thus, the rounded answer is 7.0345.

Idea summary An approximation simplifies a number when an exact value is impractical or unnecessary. To round a decimal number to a specified number of decimal places, identify the target decimal place and examine the digit immediately to its right. • If the digit is less than 5, keep the target digit unchanged and discard all digits to the right. • If the digit is greater than or equal to 5, increase the target digit by 1 and discard all digits to the right. When performing calculations, use exact values throughout and round only at the final step to minimise rounding errors.

Significant figures Significant figure An approximation of a number to a specific degree of accuracy, applicable to both large and small numbers. Consider a crowd of 95 446 people at the football game. A newspaper may report 95 000 attended the game. In this case, the number has been rounded to 2 significant figures (or to the nearest thousand). Rounding to 3 significant figures would be 95 400.

764

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Leading zeros are not significant

Zero between non-zeros are significant

007004.040200 All non-zero digits are significant

Trailing zeros to the right of the decimal point are significant

Significant figures are: • All non-zero digits • Zeros appearing between two non-zero digits • Trailing zeros to the right of a non-zero digit in a number containing a decimal point. Non-significant figures are: • Leading zeros, like in 0.00134 • Trailing zeros in whole numbers without a decimal point, like in 134 000

When approximating numbers less than 1 using significant figures, leading zeros are not counted. The width of a human hair is approximately 0.023 cm. Rounding this to 1 significant figure, it would be 0.02 (two decimal places). Rounding to 2 significant figures, it would be 0.023 (three decimal places). Examples: • 10 432 to 3 significant figures = 10 400; the zero between the 1 and the 4 is counted as significant. • 1.040052 to 3 significant figures = 1.04; the zero between the 1 and 4 is counted as significant. If a numerical value is expressed in scientific notation (standard form) a × 10n, where 1 ≤ a < 10 and n is an integer, then all the digits in a are significant. For example, 1.567 000 × 106 has 7 significant figures and 0.000034 = 3.4 × 10– 5 has 2 significant figures.

Example 3 For 461 585: a Express in scientific notation.

Create a strategy Write the number as a × 10n, where 1 ≤ a < 10 and n is an integer. Move the decimal point in the original number to the right of the first non-zero digit, counting the number of places moved to determine n.

Apply the idea

Reflect and check

For 461 585, write it as 461 585.0. Move the decimal point five places left to get 4.61 585 (between 4 and 6). Since the decimal moved five places left, n = 5.

Verify by calculating 4.61585 × 105: 4.61585 × 100 000 = 461 585 matches the original number. Alternatively, use a device’s scientific notation mode to confirm.

Thus, 461 585 = 4.61 585 × 105.

10.01 Significant figures mathspace.co

765


b Determine the number of significant figures.

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Significant figures include all non-zero digits, zeros between non-zero digits, and trailing zeros in a decimal number. For a whole number like 461 585, count all digits, as there are no leading or trailing zeros.

The number 461 585 has digits 4, 6, 1, 5, 8, 5. All six digits are significant, as there are no leading or trailing zeros. Thus, there are six significant figures.

c Round to three significant figures.

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Identify the first three significant figures starting from the first non-zero digit. Check the next digit: if it is greater than or equal to 5, increase the third significant digit by 1; if less than 5, keep it unchanged. Replace remaining digits with zeros to maintain the number’s magnitude.

For 461 585, the first three significant figures are 4, 6, 1, corresponding to 461. The next digit is 5. Since 5 is greater than or equal to 5, increase the third significant digit (1) to 2, yielding 462. Replace the remaining digits with zeros to maintain the magnitude. 461 585 ≈ 462 000

Example 4 Round 0.004 039 531 to two significant figures.

Create a strategy Identify the first two significant figures starting from the first non-zero digit. Check the next digit: if it is greater than or equal to 5, increase the second significant digit by 1; if less than 5, keep it unchanged. Discard all digits after the second significant figure and maintain the decimal point’s position, using a trailing zero if necessary to indicate precision.

Apply the idea For 0.004 039 531, the first non-zero digit is 4. The first two significant figures are 4 and 0 (from 0.0040). The next digit is 3. Since 3 is less than 5, keep the second significant digit (0) unchanged. Discard all digits after the second significant figure and retain the leading zeros to maintain the decimal point’s position, resulting in 0.0040. Alternatively, express the result in scientific notation for clarity: 4.0 × 10– 3, which shows two significant figures. 0.004039531 ≈ 0.0040

766

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Reflect and check When rounding decimal numbers, digits to the right of the final significant figure are discarded. These discarded digits are not replaced with zeros (as might be done for whole numbers to maintain magnitude), because any trailing zero after a decimal point would itself be considered significant.

Idea summary Significant figures are: • All non-zero digits • Zeros appearing between two non-zero digits • Trailing zeros after a decimal point and after a non-zero digit

Leading zeros are not significant

Zero between non-zeros are significant

007004.040200

Non-significant figures are: All non-zero digits are significant

• Leading zeros, like in 0.000 325 • Trailing zeros in whole numbers without a decimal point, like in 325 000

Trailing zeros to the right of the decimal point are significant

10.01 Practice questions What do you remember? Ex 1a

1

Determine whether these statements are true or false: 901 is in exact form.

a Ex 1b

Ex 2a

Ex 2b

b

324 is written in simplest exact form.

2

A calculator gives the value of 745 as 27.294688128. Is this an exact value?

3

Use technology to determine the approximate value of 772 to the nearest tenth.

4

Round each number as specified:

5

a

0.0829 to the nearest hundredth

c

$35.0486 to the nearest cent

b

$723.817 to the nearest dollar

c

5.678912

Round each number to four decimal places: a

9.876543

b

12.304958

d

0.432199

Practice 6

Evaluate and round to the required number of decimal places: a

56 to one decimal place

c

82 to three decimal places

b

18 41 to two decimal places

10.01 Significant figures mathspace.co

767


7

Determine the value of these expressions, rounded to three decimal places: a

Ex 3

Ex 4

(– 4.3)6

b

– (8.4)4

8

A satellite orbits the earth 10 times in 99 hours. How many hours does it take to complete 1 orbit? Write your answer as a decimal.

9

A farmer wants to have a square paddock with an area of 1000 m2. What would be the length of one side? Round your answer to two decimal places.

10

Identify the number of significant figures in these numbers:

11

a

10.20

b

0.004 58

c

50.73

d

8200

e

0.5090

f

1060

g

52 500

h

1 080 050

b

State the number of significant figures.

For 72310.108: a

Write in scientific notation.

c

Round to five significant figures.

12

Round 0.006 037 736 to two significant figures.

13

Consider the number 1083:

14

a

Round it to one significant figure.

c

What is the difference between these two rounded values?

b

Round it to two significant figures.

Consider the following expression: 418 mL × 5.7 ÷ 934.5 a

How many significant figures does the least precise measurement have?

b

Calculate the result in millilitres, rounding the answer to the least number of significant figures from part (a).

Extend your thinking 15

The density of pure gold is approximately 19.3 g/cm3. A jeweller creates a small rectangular pendant from pure gold with these dimensions: length 2.55 cm, width 1.20 cm, and thickness 0.15 cm. a

Calculate the volume of the gold pendant, in cm3, using the formula: Volume = Length × Width × Thickness

b

Using the calculated volume and the given density, calculate the mass of the pendant using the formula Mass = Density × Volume

c

768

Considering the number of significant figures in the measurements and the density provided, what is the most appropriate way to report the calculated mass? Round your answer from part (b) accordingly, and state the number of significant figures used.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


16

Bone marrow in a person’s body produces 2.3 × 106 red blood cells each second.

a

Which of these is the closest rounded value for this number? • 20 million each second • 2 million each second • 2 hundred thousand each second

b 17

Estimate the number of red blood cells produced each minute.

The tiny tubes in our kidneys measure about 1.2 × 10– 5 metres in diameter.

a

Which of the following would be the closest rounded value for this number? • 1 ten-thousandth of a metre • 1 millionth of a metre • 1 hundred-thousandth of a metre

b

Estimate the diameter of the tubes in millimetres.

18

The mass of a single hydrogen atom is approximately 1.67 × 10– 27 kilograms. Express the mass in grams.

19

A nanometre (nm) is defined as being a billionth of a metre. This means that 1 nm = 0.000 000 001 m. A germ has an approximate size of 1000 nm. How many germs would fit in a 9 cm sample?

10.01 Significant figures mathspace.co

769


10.02   Measurement units After this lesson, you will be able to… • convert between units of length, area, volume and capacity. • select appropriate units for different measurement contexts. • solve problems involving unit conversions in practical situations.

Units of length If two lengths are expressed in different units, one unit must be converted to match the other before calculations are done. Metric system A decimal system of measurement with the metre (length), gram (mass), and litre (volume) as some of the fundamental units. Australia primarily uses the metric system for units. The units metre, gram, and litre are related by powers of 10. This means that the conversions only involve moving the decimal point, so it can be done without a calculator if necessary. Determining whether to multiply or divide depends on whether the conversion moves to a larger or smaller unit. Use this conversion chart to convert between units of measurement. ×100

×1000

km

m

×10

cm

mm

÷1000

÷100

÷10

1000 m = 1 km

100 cm = 1 m

10 mm = 1 cm

• When converting from a larger unit to a smaller unit, multiply by the specified conversion factor, which will move the decimal point to the right. • When converting from a smaller unit to a larger unit, divide by the specified conversion factor, which will move the decimal point to the left. A single-step conversion can be used when moving between two units directly. For example, to convert from km to cm, use the direct conversion factor: 1 km = 1000 m, 1 m = 100 cm So, 1 km = 1000 × 100 = 100 000 cm An alternative approach is breaking the conversion into smaller sequential steps or converting between intermediate units before reaching the final unit (for example, km → m → cm).

770

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 1 Perform each conversion: a Convert 6.52 cm to millimetres.

Create a strategy Based on the chart, the conversion is 1 cm = 10 mm, so multiplication by 10 is required. ×100

×1000

km

m

÷1000 1000 m = 1 km

×10

cm

÷100

mm

÷10

100 cm = 1 m 10 mm = 1 cm

Apply the idea Since 1 cm = 10 mm, multiply the length in centimetres by 10 to convert from cm to mm. 6.52 cm = 6.52 × 10

Multiply by 10

= 65.2 mm

Evaluate

Reflect and check Showing the unit calculus gives: 6.52 cm = 6.52 cm

10 mm 1 cm

Multiply by the conversion factor 10 mm = 1 cm

= 6.52 cm

10 mm 1 cm

Simplify the units

= 65.2 mm

Evaluate

When converting from one unit to another, ensure that the units of the given quantity cancel with those in the denominator of the conversion factor.

b Convert 25.83 millimetres to metres. Express the answer as a decimal.

Create a strategy The conversion is 1 m = 1000 mm, indicating that division by 1000 is necessary.

Apply the idea 25.83 mm = 25.83 mm

1000 mm 1m

Divide by the conversion factor

= 25.83 mm

1m 1000 mm

Rewrite as multiplication and simplify units

= 0.025 83 m

Evaluate

10.02 Measurement units mathspace.co

771


c Convert 512 200 cm to kilometres. Express the answer as a decimal.

Apply the idea Convert 512 200 cm to metres first by dividing by 100. 512 200 cm = 512 200 cm

100 cm 1m

Divide by the conversion factor

= 512 200 cm

1m 100 cm

Rewrite as multiplication and simplify units

= 5122 m

Evaluate

Then convert this to kilometres by dividing by 1000. 5122 m = 5122 m

1000 m 1 km

km 1000 m = 5.122 km = 5122 m

Divide by the conversion factor Rewrite as multiplication and simplify units Evaluate

Therefore: 512 200 cm = 5.122 km

Reflect and check Since 1 m = 100 cm and 1000 m = 1 km, 1 km = 100 × 1000 cm. 512 200 cm can be converted directly to kilometres by using the conversion 1 km = 100 000 cm, which means dividing by 100 000. 512 200 cm = 512 200 cm ÷

100000 cm 1 km

Divide by conversion factor

1 km 100 000 cm = 5.122 km = 512 200 cm

Rewrite as multiplication and simplify units Evaluate

Idea summary To convert between units in the metric system: • Multiply when converting from a larger unit to a smaller unit. • Divide when converting from a smaller unit to a larger unit. ×100

×1000

km

m

÷1000 1000 m = 1 km

772

×10

cm

mm

÷100 ÷10 100 cm = 1 m 10 mm = 1 cm

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Units of area Since area is measured in square units, converting between different area units follows the same method as length conversions, but the conversion factor must be squared. For example, when converting from square metres (m2) to square centimetres (cm2), first determine the conversion factor for length: 1 m = 100 cm This factor is then squared: 1 m2 = 1002 cm2 So, to convert an area from (m2) to square centimetres (cm2), multiply by 1002 (or 10 000). A common unit for area of land is hectares (ha), and 1 ha = 10 000 m2.

Example 2 Perform each conversion: a Convert 6 m2 to cm2.

Create a strategy Use the conversion 1 m2 = 1002 cm2, so 1 m2 = 10 000 cm2.

Apply the idea 6 m2 = 6 × 1002 cm2

Multiply by the square of the conversion factor

2

= 6 × 10 000 cm

Evaluate the power

2

= 60 000 cm

Evaluate

b Convert 0.56 km2 into m2.

Create a strategy Use the conversion 1 km2 = 10002 m2, so 1 km2 = 1 000 000 m2.

Apply the idea 0.56 km2 = 0.56 × 10002 m2

Multiply by the square of the conversion factor 2

= 0.56 × 1 000 000 m 2

= 560 000 m

Evaluate the power Evaluate

10.02 Measurement units mathspace.co

773


Example 3 A yard has an area of 790 000 000 cm2. a Explain which unit of area would be the most appropriate.

Create a strategy There are two significant figures and seven non-significant digits in this number. Choosing a larger standard metric unit will result in a smaller, more manageable numerical value. Common units in Australia for large areas include square metres or square kilometres.

Apply the idea The unit square centimetres (cm2) is generally used for measuring small areas. However, given the large value of 790 000 000 cm2, this unit may be impractical for everyday use, particularly in contexts such as land measurement, construction, or real estate. Converting to square metres (m2) provides a more comprehensible and manageable figure for practical applications. Square metres (m2) is the standard unit in architectural, engineering, and real estate settings, making it easier for professionals and the public to visualise and work with area measurements. This conversion enhances clarity and usability, ensuring that the area is communicated effectively in relevant fields.

b Convert to the more appropriate unit.

Create a strategy Remember that there are 10 000 cm2 in a m2. When converting from a smaller unit to a larger unit, divide by the specified conversion factor.

Apply the idea Convert 790 000 000 cm2 to m2 by dividing by 10 000. 790000000 10000 = 79 000 m2

790 000 000 cm2 =

Divide by 10 000 Evaluate

Reflect and check Another unit of measurement for area is hectare (ha). 1 ha = 10 000 m2. In hectares: 79000 10000 = 7.9 ha

79 000 m2 =

The yard’s area is 7.9 ha.

774

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

Divide by 10 000 Evaluate


Idea summary Area is measured in square units. So, when converting between units of measure for area, use the same system as for length, except the conversion factor must be squared.

Units of volume and capacity Volume The measure of the amount of space occupied by a substance, such as a 3D solid or liquid, typically expressed in cubic units (such as cubic metres, cubic centimetres) or capacity units (such as litres, millilitres). Volume of 3D objects is measured in cubic units, so converting between different volume units follows the same method as length conversions, but the conversion factor must be cubed. For example, to convert a volume from (m3) to (cm3), multiply by 1003 (or 1 000 000). Capacity The measure of the amount of substance a container can hold. It is often used in relation to the volume of fluids. The units of volume and capacity are related, and conversions between them are possible and straightforward. For example, to determine the capacity of a swimming pool, it is easier to measure the dimensions of the pool in metres, then convert the result to litres to find the amount of water it can hold. 1 cm3 is equivalent to 1 mL and 1 m3 is equivalent to 1000 L. ÷1000

mL

=

cm3

m3

L

×1000 Conversions may also be needed between these measurements: ÷1000

÷1000

mL

L

×1000

÷1000

kL

×1000

ML

×1000

10.02 Measurement units mathspace.co

775


Example 4 Consider these conversion problems: a Convert 6750 cubic centimetres (cm3) to litres (L).

Create a strategy Use the fact that 1 cm3 = 1 mL and then convert mL to L.

Apply the idea Since 1 cm3 = 1 mL: 6750 cm3 = 6750 mL

Convert cm3 to mL

To convert mL to L, divide by 1000: 1000 mL 1 L = 6.75 L

Capacity (L) = 6750 mL ÷

Convert mL to L Evaluate

b A small pond contains 3900 L of water. What is the volume of the pond in m3?

Create a strategy Use the fact that 1000 L = 1 m3.

Apply the idea Capacity (m3) = 3900 L ÷

1000 L 1 m3

= 3.9 m3

776

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

Divide by the conversion factor Evaluate


Idea summary Volume is the amount of space a solid or liquid takes up. Capacity is the space inside an empty 3D object. Volume is generally measured in cubic units such as cm³ and m³. While capacity is also a measure of volume, it is frequently expressed using units like millilitres (mL) and litres (L), especially for fluids, which directly correspond to cubic measures. Volume and capacity are related as follows: ÷1000

=

mL

cm3

m3

L

×1000 ÷1000

÷1000

mL

÷1000

L

×1000

kL

ML

×1000

×1000

10.02 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

Using the units from the list, identify the appropriate unit of measurement for each: • km • m a c

2

The height of a building = 50 ⬚

• cm • mm b

The distance to a nearby town = 25 ⬚

The thickness of a laptop = 1.8 ⬚

d

The length of a pencil = 7.5 ⬚

The area of a football field = 5000 ⬚

i

km2

ii

m2

The area of a smartphone screen = 15 ⬚ iii

cm2

The area of a postage stamp = 30 ⬚

iv

Match each area measurement with its most appropriate unit of measurement: a b c d

The area of a national park = 150 ⬚

mm2

10.02 Measurement units mathspace.co

777


3

Fill in the boxes to show relationships between these units: a

4

5

⬚ m = ⬚ km

b

⬚ cm = ⬚ m

c

⬚ cm = ⬚ mm

d

Determine the operation required to convert these units: a

Cubic centimetres to cubic metres

b

Metres to centimetres

c

Litres to millilitres

d

Square millimetres to square centimetres

⬚ mm = ⬚ m

Complete the conversions: a b c d e f

1 km = ⬚ m, therefore to convert from km3 to m3 multiply by ⬚3 which is ⬚. 1 m = ⬚ cm, therefore to convert from m3 to cm3 multiply by ⬚3 which is ⬚.

1 cm = ⬚ mm, therefore to convert from cm3 to mm3 multiply by ⬚3 which is ⬚. 34.2 mm ⬚ 10 = ⬚ cm 0.85 m2 × ⬚ = ⬚ cm2 256 mL = ⬚ cm3

Practice Ex 1a

6

Convert these measurements to millimetres: a

7

Ex 1c

8

9

10

Ex 2a

11

12

778

6.52cm

c

6.54 m

d

7 m and 32 cm

7.2 m

b

6.22 km

c

25.97 mm

d

59 m and 12 cm

Convert these measurements to metres: a

1.85 km

b

5147 mm

c

7665 cm

d

42 km and 1300 mm

Convert these measurements to kilometres: a

18 445 m

b

6 035 400 mm

c

512 200 cm

d

9420 m and 2500 cm

The Qinghai-Tibet railway in China includes the Tanggula Pass. At 5072 m high, it is the world’s highest railway track. a

How many centimetres high is the track?

b

How many kilometres high is the track?

Convert these measurements to square centimetres (cm2): a

Ex 2b

b

Convert these measurements to centimetres: a

Ex 1b

6 cm

7 m2

b

810 mm2

c

64.8 m2

Convert these measurements to square metres (m2): a

0.56 km2

b

34 000 cm2

c

10.4 hectares

d

56 000 000 mm2

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

d

0.003 km2


13

Convert these measurements to hectares: a c

2

3 km

b

20 000 square metres

d

40 000 square kilometres

14

Convert 790 000 000 cm2 to km2.

15

What is the most appropriate unit for measuring each item’s volume? a

Ex 3

54 800 m2

16

Sand pit

Wardrobe

c

b

Square kilometres

B

Square metres

Hectares

C

For these areas, choose the most appropriate unit of measure from the list: • Square centimetres • Square kilometres

a

Postage stamp

b

Bathroom wall

c

Paper

d

Cabinet

e

City

f

Television

g

Kitchen

h

Farm

i

Netball court

j

Table

k

National park

l

Door

What is the most appropriate unit for measuring each item’s capacity? a

Water jug

b

Bucket

19

Convert 0.4 L to millilitres.

20

Convert these measurements to litres:

21

Air in a hall

Convert to the more appropriate unit.

• Hectares • Square metres

Ex 4a

d

What unit would be more appropriate for measuring the area of the garden? Explain your reasoning. A

18

Water glass

A garden has an area of 8 500 000 cm2. a

17

b

a

1. 67 kL

b

240 mL

c

Swimming pool

d

Garden pond

c

4.25 m3

d

450 cm3

Convert 6000 L to cubic metres (m3).

Ex 4b

22

Convert 9 L to cubic centimetres.

23

Convert 84.6 L to kL.

24

This water bottle has a volume of 700 cm3.

25

a

Determine its capacity in millilitres.

b

Determine its capacity in litres.

How many 150 millilitre jugs of soda water will be needed to fill a 2.4 litre container?

10.02 Measurement units mathspace.co

779


Extend your thinking 26

Plant 1 grows 4.8 cm in a week. Plant 2 grows 50 mm in the same week. Which plant grows more in a week? If this growth rate remains constant, after 2 weeks, how much taller will the faster-growing plant be compared to the other?

27

The wingspan of a jumbo jet is 6000 cm: If 26 jumbo jets are lined up wing-to-wing, for how many kilometres would the jets stretch? 6000 cm

28

Twelve plants are to be planted in a square planter box with a side length of 1 m. Determine the area available for each of the twelve plants, in square centimetres, if they are evenly spaced. Round your answer to two decimal places.

29

30

Rectangular farms around Australia were measured and their dimensions were recorded in this table: a

Determine the area of each farm.

b

Which farms have an area of more than 1 ha?

c

Which farms have an area of less than 1 ha?

d

Which farm has an area of exactly 1 ha?

Farm

Length (m) Width (m)

1

200

100

2

350

21

3

100

24

4

400

40

5

100

100

A tap is dripping at the rate of 4 millilitres of water per minute. How many litres of water will be lost in one day?

31

This popper contains 1600 mL of juice. Calculate the length of the popper if it is 8 cm tall and 5 cm wide.

780

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

Area (m2)


10.03   Pythagoras’ theorem After this lesson, you will be able to… • state and apply Pythagoras’ theorem to find unknown sides. • solve practical problems using Pythagoras’ theorem. • verify whether a triangle is right-angled using the converse of Pythagoras’ theorem.

Pythagoras’ theorem Pythagoras’ theorem A rule in geometry that states that in a right-angled triangle, the square of the hypotenuse (the side opposite the right angle) is equal to the sum of the squares of the other two sides. Hypotenuse In a right-angled triangle, the largest angle is the right angle, 90°. The side opposite the right angle is the longest side, called the hypotenuse. The two shorter sides, also called legs, are perpendicular to each other, forming the right angle. Right angle

c a

c2 = a2 + b2

All three sides of a right-angled triangle are related by the equation c2 = a2 + b2, where a and b are the lengths of the two perpendicular sides, and c is the length of the hypotenuse.

b This relationship between sides in a right-angled triangle is called Pythagoras’ theorem. This theorem can be used to: • Check whether a triangle is a right-angled triangle or not, given all three sides. •   The converse of Pythagoras’ theorem says “If c2 = a2 + b2 for a triangle with longest side c, then the triangle is a right-angled triangle.” • Determine the length of the hypotenuse, given the perpendicular sides. • Determine the length of one of the perpendicular sides, given the hypotenuse and one perpendicular side.

10.03 Pythagoras’ theorem mathspace.co

781


Interactive exploration

Discover this concept in action online

mathspace.co

Example 1 Consider this triangle: 16

9

18

a Let a and b represent the two shorter side lengths. Determine the value of a2 + b2.

Create a strategy Substitute the lengths of the two perpendicular sides, a and b and then square and add them.

Apply the idea a2 + b2 = 92 + 162

Write the equation

= 81 + 256

Evaluate the squares

= 337

Evaluate the sum

b Let c represent the length of the longest side. Determine the value of c2.

Create a strategy Substitute the length of the longest side, c.

Apply the idea c2 = 182 = 324

Write the equation Evaluate

c Is the triangle a right-angled triangle?

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Compare the results from parts (a) and (b) to determine if c2 = a2 + b2. Use the converse of Pythagoras’ theorem.

By the converse of Pythagoras’ theorem, since

782

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

324 ≠ 337 The triangle is not a right-angled triangle because c2 ≠ a2 + b2.


Example 2 Determine the exact length of side x in this triangle:

10

x

6

Create a strategy The triangle is a right-angled triangle, so Pythagoras’ theorem can be applied: c2 = a2 + b2

Apply the idea a = x, b = 6 and c = 10 can be substituted into the formula: a2 + b2 = c2 2

2

x + 6 = 10

Start with the Pythagoras’ theorem 2

2

x + 36 = 100

Substitute a = x, b = 6 and c = 10 Evaluate the squares

2

x = 64

Subtract 36 from both sides

x = 64 x=8

Take the square root of both sides Evaluate

Reflect and check When using Pythagoras’ theorem, it is crucial to determine the hypotenuse correctly and substitute into the formula correctly. Incorrect substitutions can result in errors, such as taking the square root of a negative number or determining a side length that is longer than the hypotenuse, which is not possible in a right-angled triangle.

10.03 Pythagoras’ theorem mathspace.co

783


Example 3 A movie director wants to shoot a scene where the hero fires a grappling hook from the roof of one building to the roof of another, as shown in the diagram. What is the minimum length, l, in metres, of rope needed for the grappling hook? Round the answer to two decimal places.

l 54 m 37 m

10 m

Create a strategy Form a right-angled triangle in the diagram and use Pythagoras’ theorem: c2 = a2 + b2

Apply the idea Notice that with the two buildings at different heights, a right-angled triangle is formed, and the hook’s rope serves as the hypotenuse. The lengths of the two perpendicular sides are the width of the street, 10, and the difference in heights between the two buildings, 54 – 37. a = 10, b = (54 – 37) and c = l, can be substituted into the formula: c2 = a2 + b2 Write the Pythagoras’ theorem l2 = 102 + (54 – 37)2 2

2

Substitute c = l, a = 10 and b = (54 – 37)

2

l = 10 + 17 Evaluate the subtraction inside the brackets l2 = 100 + 289

Evaluate the squares

2

l = 389

Evaluate the sum

2

l = 389

Take the square root of both sides

l = 19.72 m

Evaluate and round two decimal places

Therefore, the minimum length of rope needed for the grappling hook is 19.72 m.

Idea summary

c

a

c2 = a2 + b2

b

784

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

Pythagoras’ theorem relates the three sides of a right-angled triangle by the equation c2 = a2 + b2, where a and b are the lengths of the two perpendicular sides, and c is the length of the hypotenuse, the longest side. The converse of Pythagoras’ theorem says “If c2 = a2 + b2 for a triangle with longest side c, then the triangle is a right-angled triangle.”


10.03 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

Express the equation for Pythagoras’ theorem.

2

Identify the hypotenuse in each triangle: a

A

b X

Z

Y

B

C 3

For each of the right-angled triangles, write an equation involving the side lengths. a

b

9 12

b

c

26

10 c

d

c cm

9 cm

17

3 cm

14

x 4

Calculate the value of the positive number x, rounded to two decimal places: a

x

152 92

b

x2 = 62 + 82

c

142 = 102 + x2

d

13 = 32 x2

10.03 Pythagoras’ theorem mathspace.co

785


Practice Ex 1

5

Use Pythagoras’ theorem to determine whether these triangles are right-angled: a

13 cm

b 5 cm

6 cm

3 cm

16 cm 4 cm c

d 16 cm

15 cm 12 cm 11.5 cm

8.5 cm

9 cm

Ex 2

6

Can a triangle with sides of lengths 5 cm, 12 cm, and 13 cm be a right-angled triangle? Use Pythagoras’ theorem to justify your answer.

7

Determine the value of c, rounded to two decimal places where necessary: a

c cm

b

15 cm 8 cm

c cm

48 cm

14 cm c

d

c cm

cm 3m

9 cm 3 cm

6m

786

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


8

Ex 3

9

Determine the length of the hypotenuse of a right-angled triangle, rounded to two decimal places, given the lengths of the other two sides: a

13.6 mm and 1.2 mm

b

7 m and 9 m

c

Both 17.9 m

d

15 m and 20 m

Determine the value of a, rounded to two decimal places where necessary: a

b 10 mm

17 cm

a mm

a cm

8 mm

15 cm c

14 m

am

11 m

17 m

10

am

d

13 m

Determine the value of b, rounded to two decimal places where necessary: a

10 m

b

bm

bm 20 m

26 m

c

bm

d

29 m

9m

24 m bm 13 m

10 m 10.03 Pythagoras’ theorem mathspace.co

787


11

Determine the length of the diagonal of each shape, rounded to three significant figures. a

12 mm

b

14 cm 6 cm

9 mm 20 cm 12

For this figure:

7

10 5

x

13

y

a

Determine the value of x, rounded to two decimal places.

b

Determine the value of y, rounded to two decimal places.

c

Determine the length of the base of the triangle, rounded to two decimal places.

The screen on a handheld device has dimensions 9 cm by 5 cm, and a diagonal of length x cm: Determine the value of x, rounded to two decimal places.

x cm

5 cm

9 cm 14

William and Kenneth are playing football together. At one point in the game, they are near the same corner of the field. William is on the goal line, 11 m away from the corner, while Kenneth is on the sideline, 17 m away from the corner:

11 m

17 m

Determine the shortest distance between William and Kenneth. Round the answer to two decimal places.

788

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


15

Calculate the value of x, rounded to one decimal place. a

b

7m

xm

3x cm

5 cm

xm 16

x cm

Two flagpoles of height 14 m and 19 m are 22 m apart. A length of string is connected to the tops of the two flagpoles and pulled taut: Determine the length of the string, rounded to one decimal place.

19 m 14 m

22 m 17

Determine the direct distance between the points P and Q in each of these figures, rounded to three significant figures: a

3 cm 3 cm 7 cm

b

21 mm

P

Q 9 mm 3 cm

19 mm Q

7 mm

P 6 mm Ex 4

18

Two buildings, one 320 m tall and the other 480 m tall, stand apart on level ground. If a cable connecting the tops of the buildings is 210 m long, determine the distance between the buildings, rounded to the nearest metre. 210 m

480 m 320 m

10.03 Pythagoras’ theorem mathspace.co

789


19

Determine the value of the variables in these diagrams. Round your answers to one decimal place: a

b

9

7 x

x

11

12 13 c

d

5 cm

x 20 cm

12

15 cm

x cm

6 y cm

8

Extend your thinking 20

A city council plans to build a seawall and boardwalk along a local coastline. According to safety regulations, the seawall needs to be 5.25 m high and 7.66 m deep and will be built at the bottom of a 14.78 m long sloped section of shoreline. This means that the boardwalk will need to be built 2.43 m above the seawall, so that it is level with the public area near the beach. This information is shown in the diagram: xm 2.43 m 7.66 m 5.25 m

14.78 m

Determine the width of the boardwalk, x m, rounded to three significant figures.

790

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


21

Jordan’s residence features the outer dimensions illustrated in the accompanying diagram: A rain gutter downspout is required to extend from the peak of the roof, represented by point A in the diagram, going straight down until it measures 25 cm off the ground.

A 8.5 m

8.5 m

4.2 m

Calculate the length of vertical gutter downspout required in metres, rounded to three significant figures.

4.2 m

12.4 m

22

If AB = 14 cm, AD = 10 cm and ∠ADB is a right angle, verify that D is the midpoint of BC. A

B 23

C

D

Determine the exact length, x, in centimetres. Justify your answer.

C

40 cm A

O

9 cm B 16 cm

x cm D 24

Consider this triangular prism: 10 cm z cm

4 cm

15 cm X Determine the value of z in centimetres, rounded to two decimal places.

10.03 Pythagoras’ theorem mathspace.co

791


25

Consider this rectangular prism:

y cm

4 cm

3 cm 11 cm a

Determine the value of y in centimetres, rounded to four significant figures.

A new diagonal has been added as shown, with length z cm: a cm

y cm

4 cm z cm 3 cm

11 cm b 26

Determine the area of the triangle bounded by the lengths a, y and z.

This diagram shows four squares. The outer square has side lengths of 20 cm. The next square is formed by joining the midpoints of the outer square, the third square by joining the midpoints of the second square and the fourth square by joining the midpoints of the third square. Tamara is using wire to construct the shape in this diagram:

Determine the length of wire she requires, rounded to the nearest centimetre.

792

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


10.04   Perimeter After this lesson, you will be able to… • calculate perimeters of polygons. • solve practical problems involving perimeters of composite polygons.

Perimeter Perimeter The total length of the sides that form the edge of a 2D shape. Calculated by adding together the lengths of all the sides along the border of the shape. When some side lengths are not given, further calculations, such as Pythagoras’ theorem, may be required to determine the missing lengths before calculating the perimeter.

Interactive exploration

Discover this concept in action online

mathspace.co

When given the perimeter of a shape, the dimensions such as width and length can be found by subtracting the known side lengths from the total perimeter to determine the unknown side length. For regular shapes with equal sides (e.g., equilateral triangles, squares), divide the perimeter by the number of sides to find one side’s length. Contexts such as fencing, borders, and framing are common practical applications of perimeter. To solve practical problems involving perimeter: 1. Identify the relevant measurements and shapes involved. 2. Determine any unknown side lengths needed for the perimeter calculation using properties of the shape, given information, or Pythagoras’ theorem. 3. Calculate the perimeter by adding the length of all sides of the figure or using formulas. 4. Interpret the result in the context of the problem, ensuring that the answer makes sense. 5. Apply any additional calculations (e.g. costs).

10.04 Perimeter mathspace.co

793


Example 1 This shape has a perimeter of 64 cm. What is the length of each side?

P = 64 cm

Create a strategy Divide the perimeter by the number of sides. Use the fact that the shape shown is a regular octagon which has 8 sides of equal length.

Apply the idea P = 8 × Length of one side Write the formula for perimeter of a regular octagon 64 = 8 × Length of one side 64 8

Substitute P = 64

8 Length of one side 8

Divide both sides by 8

Length of one side = 8 cm

Evaluate

Example 2 A carpenter is calculating the amount of timber required to build a roof truss frame as shown by triangle ABC in the diagram: A

B

C

The carpenter knows that the base BC is 12 m and the perpendicular height is 4 m. Calculate the amount of timber required for the roof truss frame, rounded to four significant figures.

794

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Create a strategy Triangle ABC appears to be an isosceles triangle. The perpendicular height from vertex A to base BC divides triangle ABC into two congruent right-angled triangles. Each of these right-angled triangles will have the height as one leg and half the base BC as the other leg. Pythagoras’ theorem can be used on one of these right-angled triangles to determine the length of its hypotenuse, which corresponds to side AB (or AC).

Apply the idea The base BC of 12 metres is divided into two equal parts of 6 metres. Each right triangle formed by the height has a base of 6 metres and a height of 4 metres. c2 = a2 + b2 2

2

Write the Pythagoras’ theorem

2

AB = 4 + 6 Substitute c = AB, a = 4, and b = 6 AB2 = 16 + 36 2

AB = 52

Evaluate the squares Evaluate the addition

AB ≈ 7.21 Take the square root and round to two decimal places Since triangle ABC is an isosceles triangle, then AB = AC. So AC ≈ 7.21 m. Total length = AB + BC + AC

Add each individual lengths

= 7.21 + 12 + 7.21

Substitute the values

= 26.42 m

Evaluate

The amount of timber required for the roof truss frame is 26.42 metres.

Idea summary To calculate the perimeter, find the sum of all of the side lengths that form the edge of a 2D shape. To solve practical problems involving perimeter: 1. Identify the relevant measurements and shapes involved. 2. Determine any unknown side lengths needed for the perimeter calculation using properties of the shape, given information, or Pythagoras’ theorem. 3. Calculate the perimeter by adding the length of all sides of the figure or using formulas. 4. Interpret the result in the context of the problem, ensuring that the answer makes sense. 5. Apply any additional calculations (e.g. costs).

10.04 Perimeter mathspace.co

795


Perimeter of composite shapes Composite shape A shape that is formed by combining other plane shapes. For composite shapes, such as those shown in the diagram, the perimeter can be calculated by adding the lengths of all straight line segments and arc lengths, if present. It is useful to add up the lengths in a consistent order. Tracing or following the shape’s outline systematically (e.g., clockwise or anticlockwise) ensures no sides are missed and guarantees an accurate calculation of the total perimeter.

There are instances where not all side lengths of a shape are known. In many applications, such as surveying the dimensions of a block of land, taking direct measurements can be time-consuming. Therefore, calculating certain side lengths using logical reasoning or formulas like Pythagoras’ theorem can be a more efficient approach.

Example 3 For this figure: 7m x 5m

y 2m

17 m a Determine the length x.

Create a strategy The side length x will be equal to the difference between the other two vertical side lengths. Use the fact that the vertical side on the left has the same length as the two vertical sides on the right added together.

Apply the idea 5=x+2 5–2=x+2–2 x=3m

796

Write the equation relating the side lengths Subtract 2 from both sides Evaluate

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


b Determine the length y.

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

The side length y will be equal to the difference between the other two horizontal side lengths. Use the fact that the horizontal side on the bottom has the same length as the two horizontal sides on the top added together.

17 = y + 7 Write the equation relating the side lengths 17 – 7 = y + 7 – 7 y = 10 m

Subtract 7 from both sides Evaluate

c Calculate the perimeter of the figure.

Create a strategy Trace the composite shape’s boundary clockwise, summing all side lengths, using x and y from parts (a) and (b).

Apply the idea Perimeter = 7 + x + y + 2 + 17 + 5 Write the equation for the perimeter of the figure = 7 + 3 + 10 + 2 + 17 + 5

Substitute x = 3 and y = 10

= 44 m

Evaluate

Reflect and check The perimeter of this shape can also be found without the calculation of x and y. The vertical side on the left is 5 m, which is equal to the total length of the vertical edges on the right. The horizontal length on the bottom is 17 m, which is equal to the total length of the horizontal edges on the top. This means that the total perimeter is the same as that of a 17 m by 5 m rectangle, because the sum of the segmented sides matches the full length of the corresponding opposite sides. Perimeter = (2 × l) + (2 × w) Write the formula for perimeter of a rectangle = (2 × 17) + (2 × 5)

Substitute l = 17 and w = 5

= 34 + 10

Evaluate the multiplication

= 44 m

Evaluate

Idea summary Composite shapes consist of combinations of sectors and polygons. The perimeter of composite shapes can be calculated by adding the lengths of all straight line segments and arc lengths if present.

10.04 Perimeter mathspace.co

797


10.04 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

2

3

Explain how to find the perimeter of each shape: a

A square

b

A rectangle

d

An equilateral triangle

e

A composite shape

c

A regular octagon

Determine if each scenario involves the use of perimeter: a

Determining the amount of border needed to frame a rectangular artwork.

b

Calculating the distance around a rectangular running track.

c

Finding the amount of paint to cover a wall.

d

Finding the amount of soil required to fill a garden bed.

Consider this composite shape: a

How many sides form the perimeter?

b

True or False? To find the perimeter of the composite shape we add all the perimeters of all triangles forming the shape.

7 cm

1 cm

Practice 4

Determine the perimeter of the shapes: a

b

c

5m

10 m

A

10 cm

9 cm 10 m

C

11 cm

10 m B

3m

d

5m e

A

77 cm

19 cm C

48 cm

23 cm

f

94 cm x+p

x+q

22 cm B

798

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

x


5

Calculate the perimeter of a rectangle given the dimensions: a

6

Ex 1

7

8

Length = 35 m, Width = 7 m

b

Length = 15.5 m, Width = 12.5 m

Determine the perimeter: a

An equilateral triangle with a side length of 15 m

b

A scalene triangle with side lengths 18 mm, 25 mm and 32 mm

c

An isosceles triangle where the two equal side lengths are 25 mm and the third side measures 5 cm

Determine the perimeter: a

5 mm

b

c

A regular hexagon where the length of each side is 9 cm

d

16 mm

A regular pentagon where the length of each side is 12 m

Determine the unknown side length in these figures: a

b ym P = 29 m

c P = 22 m

y cm

7m

7m

ym

P = 35 cm

10 m 7 cm d

e P = 20 mm

f xm

3 mm

4 cm P = 26 cm

P = 20 m

d cm

y mm

g

h 16 cm

i

10 cm 3 cm P = 38 cm

6 cm

x cm 5 cm

P = 44 cm

P = 23 cm s cm

17 cm y cm

4 cm 10.04 Perimeter mathspace.co

799


9

Use Pythagoras’ theorem to determine: i

The length of the missing side, rounded to two decimal places.

ii

The perimeter of the triangle, rounded to two decimal places.

a

b c

5 10

8 9 y

10

11 m

An outline of a garden is pictured: a

Determine the value of x.

b

Determine the perimeter of the garden.

xm

6m 19 m

11

Each pair of rectangles has the same perimeter. Determine the value of x. a

b

3 cm

4 cm 8 cm 6 cm x 3 cm 6 cm x

12

A square has the same perimeter as an equilateral triangle. If the triangle has sides of length 55 mm each, determine the side length of the square, rounded to four significant figures.

13

Given the perimeter, P, of the shape, determine the value of the variables: a

P = 53 cm

b

P = 86 m 4y + 8

a

17

4y + 3

26

800

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


14

Express the perimeter in terms of x: a

x² – 8x + 2

b 2.3x + 7

5.2 + 1.24x

x² + 3x – 1

x² + 3x – 1

4.03x − 3.52 x² – 8x + 2

15

Determine if each statement is true or false. Justify your answer: a

Ex 2

16

The perimeter of a square with side length 6 cm is equal to the perimeter of a rectangle with length 9 cm and width 3 cm.

b

If the perimeter of a regular hexagon is 48 cm then the length of each side is 8 cm.

c

The perimeter of a rectangle can never be equal to the perimeter of a square.

d

The perimeter of a triangle is always less than the perimeter of a rectangle with the same base and height.

A builder is estimating the quantity of wood needed to construct a roof truss structure represented by triangle X Y Z in the diagram. The builder knows that the base Y Z is 15 m and the perpendicular height is 5 m. X

Y

Z

Calculate the amount of wood required for the roof truss structure, rounded to four significant figures. 17

Ellie is fencing a paddock. The maximum length across the paddock is 90 m: a

Calculate the value of x, rounded to two decimal places.

b

What length of fencing does Ellie need in total?

c

If the cost of fencing is $20.21 per metre, how much will the fencing cost be?

xm 90 m

100 m

40 m Ex 3

18

Consider this shape: a

Determine the value of x.

b

Determine the value of y.

c

Calculate the perimeter of the shape.

4m x 9m

y 2m 12 m

10.04 Perimeter mathspace.co

801


Extend your thinking 19

A path surrounds a swimming pool.

x

Calculate the value of x, if the perimeter of the outside of the path is 68 m.

x

6m

x

16 m x 20

A rectangular piece of astroturf is placed inside a rectangular area of lawn as shown: a

If both the astroturf and the grass area are to be fully fenced, calculate the total amount of fencing required.

b

If the fencing costs $25.60 per metre, calculate the total cost of the fencing.

20 m

16 m 26 m 30 m

21

A rectangular garden is being built with a perimeter of 80 metres. The width of the garden is 75% of its length. Calculate the length of the garden, rounded to four significant figures.

22

A regular octagonal fountain is being constructed in an amusement park. Each side of the octagon is 80% of the length of one of the sides of a square garden with a perimeter of 40 metres. Determine the perimeter of the octagonal fountain.

23

A rectangular field has a perimeter of 120 m. A new design proposes to decrease the length by 10% and increase the width by 20%. The perimeter of the newly designed field is 124 m. Let the original length be L metres and the original width be W metres.

24

a

Determine an expression for the perimeter of the original field in terms of L and W.

b

Determine an expression for the perimeter of the new field in terms of L and W.

c

Determine the original length (L) and original width (W) of the field.

A triangle has side lengths, x2 + 3x, 3x – 10 and 30 – x. If the perimeter of the triangle is 70 metres, determine the value of x. Explain why there is only one solution to x.

Investigation: Circumference

Investigate online

802

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

mathspace.co


10.05   Arc length and perimeter of sectors After this lesson, you will be able to… • calculate arc lengths using angle measures. • determine perimeters of shapes containing circular parts. • solve problems involving composite shapes with both straight and curved boundaries.

Arc length and perimeter of sectors Sectors are portions of a circle that have been sliced out from the centre, like the ones provided here:

Arc length The length of the curved edge of a sector. The arc length of a sector is given by the formula:

l= l θ r

× πr 180

is the arc length is the measure of the angle in degrees is the radius of the circle

1 × 2πr. 4 A quarter circle has a central angle of 90° out of a total possible 360°, resulting in a corresponding 90 1 . proportion of one-fourth: 360 4 The arc length of a quarter circle is one-fourth of the circumference of the entire circle:

10.05 Arc length and perimeter of sectors mathspace.co

803


If instead there is a sector with a central angle of 30°, out of a total possible 360°, then the fraction of 1 1 30 1 the circle would be and the arc length will be × 2πr, which can be simplified to × πr. 6 12 360 12 This is the idea behind the arc length formula. A sector with central angle θ corresponds to a fraction of a full circle. The arc length formula 360 derives from l = × 2πr, simplified to l = × πr 360 180

l r

θ r

by dividing 360 by 2.

Interactive exploration

Discover this concept in action online

mathspace.co

Since the perimeter of a 2D shape is the total distance around its boundary, for a sector, the boundary comprises a curved portion and two straight edges, each with a length equal to the radius of the circle. When calculating the perimeter of a sector, it is essential to include the lengths of the straight line segments (r + r) along with the arc length, l. The perimeter of a sector can be calculated using the formula:

P = 2r + θ r

πr 180

is the central angle is the radius

Example 1 Digital only example

Explore in the online lesson

804

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

mathspace.co


Example 2 A sector has a radius of 6 cm and an angle of 55°:

6 cm 55º

Determine the perimeter of the sector, rounded to four significant figures.

Create a strategy Use the perimeter of a sector formula: P = 2r +

πr 180

Apply the idea πr 180 55 =2×6+ ×π×6 180

Perimeter = 2r +

= 17.76 cm

Write the formula for perimeter of a sector Substitute θ = 55 and r = 6 Evaluate and round to four significant figures

10.05 Arc length and perimeter of sectors mathspace.co

805


Example 3 Emma’s backyard is made up of a semicircle and rectangle as shown in the diagram: 5m

14 m

She wants to put a new fence up along the boundary. The fencing costs $45 per metre. Calculate the total cost of the fencing.

Create a strategy Calculate the perimeter of the garden by adding the three straight edges and curve.

Apply the idea To calculate the length of the curve, determine half of the circumference of a circle with a radius of 7 m. Circumference = =

1 × 2πr 2

1 ×2×π×7 2

= 7π m

Write the formula for half of the circumference Substitute r = 7 Simplify as an exact value

To calculate the total perimeter: Perimeter = 14 + 5 + 5 + 7π Add the lengths along the border of the garden = 45.991 13 m

Evaluate using technology

= 46 m

Round to the nearest metre

To calculate the cost of the fence: Total cost = Cost per meter of fence × Perimeter Write the formula for total cost of fence =

$45 46 m m

= $2070

Substitute the values Evaluate

Therefore, the total cost of the fencing is $2070.

Reflect and check Often, building materials need to be purchased in particular quantities, such as 2 m lengths. This needs to be considered when pricing materials, and unfortunately can lead to extra costs and wasted materials.

806

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Idea summary A sector is a portion of a circle cut from the centre. The arc length, l, is the curved length of a sector given by the formula:

× πr 180 The perimeter of a sector includes two radii and the arc length: l=

P = 2r + where θ is the central angle and r is the radius.

πr 180

10.05 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

a

Express the diameter of this circle in terms of x.

b

Express the circumference of the circle in terms of π and x. x

2

3

a

Express the diameter of the semicircle in terms of r.

b

Express the length of the semicircular arc in terms of π and r.

c

Express the perimeter of the semicircle in terms of π and r.

r

Calculate the exact value of the circumference, when: a

x = 7 cm

b

x = 15 m

c

x = 12.5 mm

d

x = 2.25 km

x

10.05 Arc length and perimeter of sectors mathspace.co

807


4

5

6

Calculate the circumference of the circle, rounded to two decimal places, when: a

d = 10 m

b

d = 3.4 mm

c

d = 17.5 cm

d

d = 0.68 km

d

Calculate the radius of the following circles, rounded to two decimal places: a

A circle with circumference of 20 cm

b

A circle with circumference of 11 cm

c

A circle with circumference of 25 cm

d

A circle with circumference of 100 cm

Calculate the diameter of the following circles, rounded to two decimal places, when the: a

Circumference = 44 cm

b

Circumference = 6 cm

c

Circumference = 55 cm

d

Circumference = 200 cm

Practice 7

For each of these sectors, determine the exact length of the arc: a

b

180° 15° 4

c

14

d

290° 6.5 m 55°

8

808

7

Determine the exact length of the arc if: a

A sector of a circle of radius 29 m is formed from an angle of size 131°.

b

A sector of a circle of radius 5 units is formed from an angle of size 318°.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


9

Determine the length of these arcs, rounded to two decimal places: a

b

14.2 mm 4

235°

135°

c

10 Ex 1

Ex 2

11

A sector of a circle of radius 7 cm is formed from an angle of size 41°.

d

A sector of a circle of radius 9.5 cm is formed from an angle of size 315°.

Consider this quadrant:

3 cm

a

Determine the length of the arc in exact form.

b

Determine the total perimeter of the quadrant in exact form.

Determine the perimeter of each sector, rounded to four significant figures: a

b

6 cm

3.6 m

295°

230°

c

d

A sector of radius 3.2 m and angle of 145°.

36 cm 130°

10.05 Arc length and perimeter of sectors mathspace.co

809


12

Determine the radius of these sectors, rounded to two decimal places: a

23 cm

c

b

8 cm

115°

22 cm

d

sector has a central angle of 50° and an A arc length of 13 cm.

263°

13

Determine the size of the angle of these sectors in degrees, rounded two decimal places: a

3.3 cm

b

7 cm

4.2 cm

c

14

A sector with radius 4.2 cm and an arc length 14 cm.

1.2 cm

d

A sector with radius 10.2 cm and an arc length 45 cm.

The diagram shows the sectors of two concentric circles with common centre O, where ∠O = 45°, OR = 8 cm and OQ = 12 cm:

Q

R

Calculate the perimeter of the shaded region, rounded to one decimal place. O

810

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


15

The perimeter of the semicircle is 50 m. Determine the radius of the semicircle, rounded to three significant figures. r

16

Determine the perimeter of the shaded region, rounded to two decimal places. 10 cm

15 cm

17

Determine the perimeter of the shaded region, rounded to two decimal places.

18

Calculate the perimeter of each shape, rounded to one decimal place: a

b

3m

3m 5 cm c

34 cm

d

46 cm 20 cm

26 cm

17 cm

10.05 Arc length and perimeter of sectors mathspace.co

811


Ex 3

19

Liam is building two sections for a model garden, shown in the diagrams: a

b

6 cm

7 cm 7 cm

Liam plans to put a decorative miniature fence only around the outer boundary of each model garden. The fencing costs $0.45 per centimetre. Calculate the total cost of the fencing for each of the model garden sections rounded to two decimal places.

Extend your thinking 20

A landscape architect designs a pond for his backyard, surrounded by a brick wall composed of a straight section and a circular arc with a radius of 5 m. The wall costs $210 per metre to build.

5m

Calculate the total cost of the wall. 21

Kiki trains on a circular track with 8 lanes, seven days per week. The inner lane has a radius of 20 m and each lane is 1 m further out than the previous one. One week, Kiki’s training each day consists of running 80 laps in the inside lane. The next week, Kiki decides to run 10 laps in each of the 8 lanes each day. How much further does she run in the second week compared to the first week? Round your answer to the nearest metre.

812

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


22

You are a city planner tasked with designing a circular park. The perimeter (circumference) of the park is measured to be 314 metres. There is a debate among your team about the accuracy of the measurement. Some team members argue that the measurement might be off, while others believe it is correct. Check the validity of each statement that satisfies the measured value of the circumference of the park:

23

a

If the measured perimeter is accurate, the radius of the park is approximately 50 metres.

b

If the actual radius of the park is between 48 metres and 52 metres, the perimeter would range from approximately 301 metres to 327 metres.

c

If the measurement is 5% off, the actual perimeter could range from 298.3 metres to 329.7 metres.

A city planner is designing a unique recreational area that includes two concentric circular paths and a square garden. The design is as follows: • A square garden with a side length of 40 metres is inscribed within a larger circular path (Circle B). • Another smaller circular path (Circle A) is inscribed within the square garden. • The square garden is centred within both circular paths, meaning Circle A just fits inside the square, and Circle B just encloses the square. The planner needs to verify the measurements and ensure the perimeters of the garden and paths are correctly calculated. Use the information to answer these questions:

24

a

Calculate the circumference of Circle A.

b

Calculate the circumference of Circle B.

c

If a rectangular walkway with a uniform width of 5 metres runs around the perimeter of Circle B, calculate the total length of the outer boundary of this walkway.

Jacob is preparing for a competitive archery event and needs to ensure his understanding of the target dimensions and scoring zones. The target he will be using is a FITA Compound Target, which is designed for use with compound bows. The target consists of 10 evenly spaced concentric rings. The radius of the innermost (10th) ring is 4 cm and each ring increases in radius by 4 cm. The overall diameter of the target is 80 cm. Compare the circumference of the innermost (10th) ring with the circumference of the outermost (1st) ring. What is the ratio of the circumference of the outermost ring to the innermost ring?

10.05 Arc length and perimeter of sectors mathspace.co

813


10.06   Area After this lesson, you will be able to… • calculate areas of basic shapes. • determine areas of circles and sectors. • solve practical problems involving areas of basic shapes.

Area of simple shapes The formulas for the areas of various geometric shapes, including triangles, quadrilaterals (squares, rectangles, parallelograms and trapezia), and circles are summarised in the table:

Triangle

h b

Square

h

h b

A

b

s

1 bh 2

A = s2

w

Rectangle

A = lw

l h

Parallelogram

A = bh

b b h

Trapezium

A

1 ( a b) h 2

a

Circle

r

A = πr2

It is important to be familiar with the variables used for each formula and understand which measurement they refer to in the shape. 814

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 1 Digital only example

Explore in the online lesson

mathspace.co

Example 2 A rectangular swimming pool measures 12 metres by 8 metres. a What is the area of the pool in square metres?

Create a strategy

Apply the idea A = lw Write the formula for area of a rectangle = 12 × 8 Substitute l = 12 and w = 8 = 96 m2 Evaluate

The pool is in the shape of a rectangle and has a length of 12 m and a width of 8 m. Use the correct formula to determine the area.

b If the pool deck surrounding the pool is 2 metres wide, what is the total area of the pool and deck in square metres?

Create a strategy Calculate the dimensions of the larger rectangle formed by adding the 2 m-deck to all sides of the pool, then find its area.

Apply the idea The deck adds 2 metres on all sides, so the total length and width become: Total length = 12 + 2 × 2 = 16 m Total width = 8 + 2 × 2 = 12 m Total area = Total length × Total width Write the equation for total area = 16 × 12

Substitute the values

= 192 m2

Evaluate

Idea summary Area formula Triangle

A 1 bh 2

Square Rectangle Parallelogram

A = s2 A = lw A = bh

Trapezium Circle

A

1 ( a b) h 2

A = πr2

Where: b (base), h (height) s (side length) l (length), w (width) b (base), h (height) a and b (parallel lengths), h (height) r (radius)

10.06 Area mathspace.co

815


Area of sectors A sector is a portion of a circle; therefore, as mentioned previously, the arc length will be a fraction of the circumference. The same principle applies to area: the area of a sector is a fraction of the total area of the circle. For example, the area of a semicircle is half the area of the entire circle.

Area of semicircle

r

1 r2 2

A formula can be derived for the area of any sector based on the angle that subtends the arc at the centre.

θ r

θ

r

A sector with central angle θ, corresponds to a fraction of a full circle; and therefore, its area is 360 given by: A

360°

r2

where θ is the central angle in degrees and r is the radius.

Example 3 Determine the area of this sector, rounded to four significant figures. 13 cm 121°

Apply the idea r2 360° 121° 132 = 360° = 178.5 cm2

A=

816

Write the formula for area of a sector Substitute r = 13 and θ = 121° Evaluate and round to four significant figures

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 4 A pizza has a radius of 13 cm. Javier cuts himself a slice that is one quarter of the pizza as shown in the diagram. What area of pizza, to the nearest whole number, is remaining?

Create a strategy Subtract the area of the quarter circle from the total area of the circle.

Apply the idea 1 4

A = r2 =

132

1 4

r 2 Write the equation relating the total area and the area of the quarter circle 132

= 398 cm2

Substitute r = 13 Evaluate and round to the nearest whole number

Reflect and check The area of the figure is also equivalent to three-quarters the area of the circle. 3 2 Write the formula for three-quarters r 4 the area of circle 3 2 = ( 13) Substitute r = 13 4

A=

= 398 cm2

Evaluate, rounded to the nearest whole number

Idea summary The area of the sector with central angle θ can be found using the formula: A

360°

r2

where θ is the central angle in degrees and r is the radius.

10.06 Area mathspace.co

817


10.06 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

2

Determine if these situations involve area: a

Calculating the amount of paint needed to cover a wall.

b

Measuring the distance around a park.

c

Finding the amount of carpet needed to cover a floor.

Determine whether each statement is true or false: a

The area of a circle is measured in cubic units.

b

The formula for the area of a triangle is the same as that for a rectangle.

c

The area of a sector of a circle can be found if the circle’s radius and the angle of the sector are known.

d

Increasing the length of a rectangle while keeping the width constant will increase its area.

3

Explain the difference between the area and the perimeter of a shape.

4

Convert these measurements to square centimetres (cm2): a

5 m2

b

250 mm2

c

80.5 m2

d

0.005 km2

Practice 5

Calculate the area of each shape: a

Ex 1a

43 m

b 5m

8m

13 m c

10 mm

d

11 mm

3 mm

2 mm

3 mm 6

Calculate the area of this triangle: 8m

10 m

818

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


7

Calculate the area of each circle, rounded to five significant figures. a

Ex 1b

b 14 cm

8 cm

8

9

10

Ex 2

Ex 3

11

12

A circle has a radius of 12 mm: a

Calculate the exact area of the circle.

b

Calculate the area of the circle, rounded to two decimal places.

A circle has a diameter of 22 mm: a

Calculate the exact area of the circle.

b

Calculate the area of the circle, rounded to two decimal places.

a

Determine the length of a rectangle that has an area of 40 cm2 and a width of 5 cm.

b

Determine the width of a rectangle that has an area of 27 mm2 and a length of 9 mm.

c

Determine the length of each side of the square which has an area of 64 cm2.

d

Determine the radius of the circle with an area of 64.5 cm2, rounded to two decimal places.

e

Determine the height of a trapezium with parallel sides of 5 cm and 7 cm and area of 72 cm2.

f

Determine the base of a parallelogram with a height of 4 cm and an area of 24 cm2.

A rectangular garden measures 15 metres by 10 metres. a

What is the area of the garden in square metres?

b

If the pathway surrounding the garden is 3 metres wide, what is the total area of the garden and pathway in square metres?

Determine the exact area: a

b

5 mm

3 cm

c

11 m

d

13 mm

240°

10.06 Area mathspace.co

819


13

Determine the area in square centimetres, rounded to one decimal place: a

19 cm 115°

b

300° 6.6 cm

c

d

36 cm 74°

22.1 m

130°

Ex 4

14

A circular garden has a radius of 13 m. A section of the garden is covered with concrete to create a bike parking area, covering one-third of the total garden. What is the remaining area of the garden, rounded to the nearest whole number?

15

Calculate the value of the variable: a

A = 42 mm2 a mm

b

A = 24 cm2 5 cm

7 mm

h cm

8 mm 16

17

7 cm

A circle has an area of 81 mm2: a

Calculate the radius, rounded to two decimal places.

b

Calculate the diameter, rounded to one decimal place.

Determine the radius of these sectors, given their angle and area, rounded to two significant figures. a

Area of 30 m2 and angle of 64°

b

Area of 140 m2 and angle of 230°

230° 64˚

820

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


18

Determine the value of θ, rounded to the nearest degree: a

Area of 25.6 mm2 and radius of 8 mm

b

Area of 42π m2 and radius of 14 m

14 m 8 mm

θ

θ

19

John is tiling a room floor that has a total area of 9 m2. The tiles he is using are squares, measuring 25 cm by 25 cm: a

Calculate the area of a single tile in m2.

b

Calculate the number of tiles John will require to cover the entire floor area.

20

A rectangle and parallelogram each have sides of a cm and b cm. Which shape would have the greater area? Explain.

21

Two right triangles have the same area. If one triangle has a base of 7 cm and a height of 9 cm, what are the possible dimensions of the other triangle given the base and height are whole numbers?

22

This rhombus is formed into a rectangle: a

Determine the length of the rectangle in terms of y.

b

Determine the width of the rectangle in terms of x.

c

Calculate the area of the rectangle in terms of x and y.

d

Calculate the area of the rhombus in terms of x and y.

x

y

Width Length

Extend your thinking 23

A rectangular garden bed measures 430 cm by 250 cm. A bag of fertiliser covers an area of 2 m2: a

Calculate the number of whole bags of fertiliser needed to cover the total area of the garden bed.

b

Calculate the area in m2 that the left-over fertiliser will be able to cover.

10.06 Area mathspace.co

821


24

25

26

A security light shines on an adjacent fence at a distance of 10 metres from the light bulb. a

Determine the area on which this security light shines, rounded to two decimal places.

b

The light bulb is replaced with a new one that shines twice as bright. Explain how this change would affect the area on which the security light shines, assuming the distance to the fence remains the same.

a

What happens to the area of a circle if its circumference is tripled?

b

What happens to the area of a circle if the radius is increased by a factor of q?

c

What happens to the radius of a circle if the area is increased by a factor of q?

87°

Determine the area of the shaded region for each of the figures: x cm y cm a b

x cm

A = 16 cm²

A = 25 cm²

15 cm A = 100 cm²

27

Use the image to show that the area of the parallelogram is equivalent to twice the area of the trapezium. 10 mm

7 mm

2 mm

10 mm

822

y cm

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

7 mm


10.07   Area of composite shapes After this lesson, you will be able to… • break down composite shapes into basic components. • calculate areas of shapes involving circular sectors. • solve problems involving irregular shapes in practical contexts.

Areas of composite shapes Composite shape A figure that consists of multiple basic shapes such as circles, semicircles, sectors or polygons, either combined or with parts removed from one another.

There are two main methods for finding the area of a composite shape: the addition method and the subtraction method. For both methods, the first steps are: 1. Identify the basic shapes that make up the figure 2. Calculate the area of the basic shapes The addition method involves adding the areas of all the smaller basic shapes together to find the total area of the composite shape. The subtraction method involves subtracting the area of the smaller shape(s) (that were cut out) from the area of the larger shape to find the total area. Use the addition method when shapes are patched together without overlap; use subtraction when smaller shapes are cut out from a larger shape.

Interactive exploration

Discover this concept in action online

mathspace.co

10.07 Area of composite shapes mathspace.co

823


Example 1 Calculate the total area of this shape: 8m

13 m 13 m

4m 16 m

Create a strategy Break the figure into shapes for which area formulas are known, then add the areas.

Apply the idea The shape can be broken up into a parallelogram and a triangle, as shown. Comparing this to the original diagram, the base of the parallelogram measures 13 m and the height measures 8 m.

1

The base of the triangle measures 16 m, and the height measures 4 m. 2

For the parallelogram: Aparallelogram = bh

Start with the formula for area of a parallelogram

= 13 × 8

Substitute b = 13 and h = 8 2

= 104 m

Evaluate

For the triangle: Atriangle

1 bh 2 1 16 4 2

= 32 m2 Total area = 104 + 32 2

= 136 m

Start with the formula for area of a triangle Substitute b = 16 and h = 4 Evaluate Add the areas Evaluate

Therefore, the total area of the shape is 136 m2.

824

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Reflect and check

The shape could also be broken down into a trapezium and triangle by using a vertical line to split the shapes. 1

However, the parallelogram and triangle may be slightly easier to solve as their area formulas are shorter than a trapezium.

2 Acomposite shape = Atrapezium + Atriangle

Write the formula as the sum of basic shapes

1 1 = (a + b) h + bh 2 2 1 1 ( 13 17 ) 8 8 2 2 = 120 + 16 2

= 136 m

Write the formula for each area 4

Substitute the values Evaluate the multiplication Evaluate

Did you know?

Chefs use shape and measurement when baking to get perfect results! Measuring ingredients accurately and shaping dough evenly ensures that cakes rise properly and pastries cook evenly. Even the size of a baking tin can change how heat is distributed in the oven.

10.07 Area of composite shapes mathspace.co

825


Example 2 Digital only example

Explore in the online lesson

mathspace.co

Example 3 Calculate the total area of the composite figure, rounded to two decimal places.

30°

4m

5.5 m

Create a strategy Add the area of the rectangle and the area of the sector.

Apply the idea Arectangle = lw

Write the formula for area of a rectangle

= 5.5 × 4

Substitute l = 5.5 and w = 4

2

= 22 m Asector r 2 360° 30° 5.52 360° = 7.91 m2

Evaluate Start with the formula for area of a sector Substitute r = 5.5 and θ = 30° Evaluate and round

Acomposite shape = Arectangle + Asector Write the formula for areas of the composite shape as the sum of the areas of rectangle and sector = 22 + 7.91 2

= 29.91 m

826

Substitute the values Evaluate

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Idea summary Areas of composite shapes can be determined by adding or subtracting areas of simple shapes.

10.07 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

For each composite shape: i

Determine the individual geometric shapes that make up the composite shape.

ii

Determine whether the addition method or subtraction method can be used to find the area of the composite shape or the shaded region.

iii

Explain how to find the area of the composite shape or the shaded region.

a

b

c

d

e

f

10.07 Area of composite shapes mathspace.co

827


2

Complete each formula: a

Pythagoras’ theorem: 2

2

b

2

Area of a rectangle:

⬚ + ⬚ = ⬚

A=l⬚w w

c

a

l

b c

Area of a parallelogram:

d

A = ⬚ × ⬚

Area of a triangle: A= 1 ×b⬚h

h

h

b e

b

Area of a circle:

f

A = π × ⬚2

Area of a trapezium: 1 (a b) A 2

b h

r a

3

828

For this shape: a

Calculate the length of the diameter of the semicircle, rounded to two decimal places.

b

Determine the radius of the semicircle.

c

Determine the area of the semicircle, rounded to two decimal places.

d

Determine the area of the triangle.

e

Calculate the area of the shape, rounded to one decimal place.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

7 cm


Practice Ex 1

4

Calculate the area of each shape: a

13 m

b

4m

8 cm 19 cm 6 cm

12 m 14 cm 5m c

12 cm

d 6 cm 19 cm

14 cm 18 cm

15 cm

17 cm

6 cm 40 cm

5

Calculate the area of this shape:

9 cm 6 cm 16 cm 6

For this shape: 9 cm x cm

9 cm 13 cm a

Calculate the value of x.

b

Calculate the area of the shaded region.

10.07 Area of composite shapes mathspace.co

829


7

Calculate the area of each shape, rounded to three decimal places where appropriate: a

10 cm

b

7 cm 5 cm

5 cm 7 cm

14 cm

9 cm

8 cm

14 cm

10 cm

6 cm c

d 0.35 m

0.25 m 1m

1m 8

Calculate the area of the shaded region: a

18 m

b

12 m 12 cm

5m 4 cm

c

d 12 m

4m

17 m 5m

5m 15 m

e

4m 9m 10 m 20 m

f

15 3

6 cm

7

3 cm 11 14 cm

4 5

830

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


9 Ex 2

Calculate the area of the shaded region, rounded to one decimal place: a

b

16 cm

16 cm

20 cm c

4 cm

d

10 cm 20 cm e

f

11 cm

26 13 cm 5 cm 6 cm 12 g

6 cm

18 cm

h

11

10

5

55

50

10.07 Area of composite shapes mathspace.co

831


Ex 3

10

Calculate the total area of the composite shape, rounded to two decimal places.: a

9m

b

15 m

5 cm 5 cm

66°

2 cm

4.5 cm

4.5 cm

5 cm 9 cm

c

d

8 cm 30° 8 cm 14 cm

9 cm 11

Lachlan designs a plot of land which contains his house and garden as shown in the diagram: a

Calculate the total area of the plot of land.

b

Calculate the area of the garden.

18 m

11 m

Garden 23 m House

5m 12

5m

A piece of origami paper, originally in the shape of a parallelogram, is folded along its shortest diagonal as shown: Calculate the total area covered by the folded paper. 17 cm

6 cm

832

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


13

The figure shows a chord that cuts across a circle: Calculate the shaded area, rounded to four significant figures.

7 cm 14

This diagram shows the back cover of a mobile phone. The rounded corners are quadrants: Calculate the area of the back cover, excluding the circular camera lens. Round your answer to four significant figures.

15

5 cm

10 cm 0.5 cm 0.2 cm

A circular metal plate with a diameter of 2 m has 65 holes of diameter 5 cm drilled into it. Calculate the remaining area of the metal plate in square metres. Round your answer to three significant figures.

Extend your thinking 16

The figure shows a plan of a dining room floor, which is to be tiled with slate tiles: a b

Calculate the area to be tiled. Round your answer to the nearest square metre. If the cost of tiling is $10/m2, calculate the cost to tile the dining room floor.

9m 6m 8m

7m 17

This diagram shows a landscaping plan with the garden at the top bordered by a circular arc and the property boundary: a b

5m Garden

If roll-on lawn costs $12 per square metre, how much will it cost to cover the lawn and the garden? Paving costs $100 per square metre. Calculate the cost to pave the paved area.

Paved Area 7m Lawn

12 m

House

10 m

10.07 Area of composite shapes mathspace.co

833


18

A farmer is going to fertilise his paddock, which has this shape: a

Calculate the area of the paddock.

b

If it takes 150 kg of fertiliser to fertilise 100 square metres, how many kilograms of fertiliser should the farmer purchase?

52 m 47 m

201 m

19

A simple t-shirt pattern has the dimensions as shown in the diagram, with a semicircular neck hole on the front piece only: 20 cm 25 cm

15 cm

70 cm

10 cm

50 cm Front

20

a

If the front and back pieces are both cut from two rectangular pieces of fabric with dimensions 90 cm by 80 cm, calculate the amount of fabric that is wasted. Round your answer to the nearest square centimetre.

b

The fabric costs $8 per metre length, where one-metre length is a piece of fabric with width 80 cm and length 100 cm. If the t-shirt pieces are cut out of two 0.9-metre lengths, how much will the fabric cost for 100 t-shirts?

The diagram shows a parallelogram-shaped area of lawn. A There are sprinklers placed at points A and B, which are configured to water the indicated sectors of the lawn. The sprinklers are situated at the centre of their 5 m corresponding sectors. If each sprinkler uses 2 L of water per square metre in one hour, calculate the total amount of water the sprinklers use in an hour, rounded to one decimal place.

21

B

8m

70° 1.71 m

Luke made a square mosaic with side lengths of 3 m. He decided to add a border to his mosaic, and now the mosaic has side lengths of 3.2 m. Calculate the increase in the area of the mosaic.

834

Back

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


10.08   Total surface area After this lesson, you will be able to… • calculate surface areas of prisms, cylinders, pyramids and spheres. • solve practical problems involving surface area calculations.

Surface area of prisms, pyramids, and cylinders Surface area The measure of the total area of the surface(s) of a three-dimensional shape or object. It is the sum of the areas of all the external faces or surfaces of the object. The units for surface area will be in square units such as mm2, cm2 and m2. Prism A convex three-dimensional solid that has two congruent and parallel polygonal faces and all its remaining faces are parallelograms. In a right prism, where the lateral edges are perpendicular to the bases, all lateral faces are rectangles. The surface area of a prism is the total area of all its faces, including the two bases and the lateral faces. To find the surface area of a prism, the basic shape of each face must first be identified. This is made easier by visualising the net of the prism, which shows all the faces as flat, two-dimensional shapes. Once the areas of these faces are calculated, they are summed to find the total surface area.

Cylinder A three-dimensional object that has parallel circular discs of equal radius at the ends.

10.08 Total surface area mathspace.co

835


A cylinder has three faces: two identical circular bases and a curved surface that joins the two bases. The surface area of a cylinder is the sum of the areas of these three faces.

The area of a circle is A = πr2, while the area of the curved face that connects the two circles needs to be determined. When unrolled, the curved surface is a rectangle. One side length is equal to the height of the cylinder h, while the other side length is the circumference of the base circle, 2π r. Surface area of a cylinder = 2 × (Area of circular base) + Area of curved face = 2 (πr2) + 2πrh

SAcylinder = 2πr2 + 2πrh = 2πr (r + h) r is the radius of the cylinder h is the height of the cylinder Pyramid A convex polyhedron with a polygonal base and triangular sides that meet at a point called the vertex.

Vertex

Perpendicular height

Slant height

If the vertex is directly above the centre of the base, the pyramid is called a right pyramid. The line connecting the vertex to the centre of the base is perpendicular to the base, and the distance between them is referred to as the perpendicular height. The length of the triangular-shaped sides that slope towards the vertex of the pyramid is called the slant height (or slope length).

When a pyramid is unfolded to create its net, it can be seen that the pyramid consists of one base face and a number of triangular faces.

The surface area, SA, of a pyramid is calculated by adding the area of all faces: the base and a number of triangular faces.

836

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Finding the area of the triangular faces is not always straightforward. Since the triangular faces are tilted to meet at the vertex, the height of each triangle corresponds to the slope length (or slant height) of that face, not the height of the pyramid. B If the base side lengths and the height of a pyramid are known, the slant heights of each triangular face can be found using Pythagoras’ theorem: BC2 = AB2 + AC2 A

C

Example 1 Calculate the surface area of this triangular prism: 4 cm 3 cm 5 cm

19 cm

Create a strategy Add the areas of these five faces, where the top and bottom face are identical:

10.08 Total surface area mathspace.co

837


Apply the idea Atop and bottom =

1 b h 2

=

1 3 4 2

2 Write the formula for the area of a triangle, multiplied by 2 Substitute b = 3 and h = 4

2

= 12 cm2

Evaluate

Arectangle = lw

Write the formula for the area of a rectangle

Aleft = 19 × 3

Substitute l = 19 and w = 3 2

= 57 cm

Evaluate

Afront = 19 × 5

Substitute l = 19 and w = 5 2

= 95 cm

Evaluate

Aback = 19 × 4 = 76 cm

Substitute l = 19 and w = 4 2

Evaluate

SAprism = Atop and bottom + Aleft + Afront + Aback = 12 + 57 + 95 + 76

Substitute the values

= 240 cm2

Evaluate

Therefore, the surface area of the triangular prism is 240 cm2.

Example 2 A birthday gift is placed inside the box shown. Determine the minimum amount of wrapping paper needed to wrap this gift. 6 cm 9 cm

20 cm

Create a strategy In a rectangular prism there are 6 rectangular faces. Two faces that are 6 cm × 20 cm, two faces that are 20 cm × 9 cm and two faces that are 6 cm × 9 cm.

838

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Apply the idea Find the area of all six faces, then add them all up. Area of a rectangle = lw

Write the formula for the area of a rectangle

Atop = 20 × 6

Substitute l = 20 and w = 6 2

= 120 cm Afront = 20 × 9

Evaluate Substitute l = 20 and w = 9

2

= 180 cm Aside = 9 × 6

Evaluate Substitute l = 9 and w = 6

2

= 54 cm

Evaluate

SA = 2 × Atop + 2 × Afront + 2 × Aside Write the equation to add all the areas of the rectangular prism’s faces = 2 × 120 + 2 × 180 + 2 × 54

Substitute the values

= 240 + 360 + 108

Evaluate the multiplication

2

= 708 cm

Evaluate

Reflect and check A formula can also be used in this case: SA = 2 (lw + lh + wh) Write the formula for the surface area of a rectangular prism = 2 (20 × 6 + 20 × 9 + 6 × 9) 2

= 708 cm

Substitute l = 20, w = 6, and h = 9 Evaluate

This matches what was found by adding up the area of all faces.

Example 3 Consider the rectangular-based pyramid with rectangular base measuring 4 cm by 10 cm and a perpendicular height of 7 cm: y cm x cm

4 cm 7 cm 10 cm

10.08 Total surface area mathspace.co

839


a Calculate the length of the slant height labelled x cm, rounded to three significant figures.

Create a strategy Form a right-angled triangle inside the pyramid and use Pythagoras’ theorem.

Apply the idea Observe that the slant height corresponds to the hypotenuse of a right-angled triangle formed inside the pyramid. The legs of this triangle are the perpendicular height of the pyramid and the line segment on the base extending from its centre to the midpoint of the edge where the slant height meets the base. Let a = 7, b =

4 = 2 and c = x 2 c2 = a2 + b2

Write the Pythagoras’ theorem

2

Substitute c = x, a = 7 and b = 2

2

x =7 +2

2

2

x = 53

Evaluate operations on the right-hand side

x = 53

Take the square root of both sides

x = 7.28 cm

Evaluate and round to three significant figures

b Calculate the length of the other slant height, labelled y cm, rounded to three significant figures.

Apply the idea Let a = 7, b =

10 = 5 and c = y 2 c2 = a2 + b2

Write the Pythagoras’ theorem

2

Substitute c = y, a = 7 and b = 5

2

y =7 +5

2

y2 = 74

Evaluate the operations on the right-hand side

y = 74 y = 8.60 cm

Take the square root of both sides Evaluate and round to three significant figures

c Calculate the surface area of the pyramid, rounded to four significant figures.

Create a strategy The surface area of the pyramid is equal to the sum of the areas of the rectangle and the four triangles.

840

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Apply the idea Based on the diagram, two of the triangles have a base of 10 cm and a height of 7.28 cm, and the other two triangles have a base of 4 cm and a height of 8.60 cm. The rectangle has a width of 4 cm and length of 10 cm. Area of the rectangle = lw Write the formula for the area of a rectangle = 10 × 4

Substitute l = 10 and w = 4 2

= 40 cm

Evaluate

1 bh 2 1 = 2 × × 4 × 8.60 2 = 34.4 cm2

Area of the two side triangles = 2 ×

1 bh 2 1 = 2 × × 10 × 7.28 2 = 72.8 cm2

Area of the front and back triangles = 2 ×

Surface area = 40 + 34.4 + 72.8

Multiply the triangle area formula by 2 Substitute b = 4 and h = 8.60 Evaluate Multiply the triangle area formula by 2 Substitute b = 10 and h = 7.28 Evaluate Add all the areas

2

= 147.2 cm Evaluate and round to four significant figures Therefore, the surface area of the pyramid is 147.2 cm2.

Reflect and check The slant heights calculated in parts (a) and (b) have been used in the calculation for the surface area. Rounding at this step can result in an inaccurate final answer, so it is more common to express the slant heights as an exact answer.

Example 4 Digital only example

Explore in the online lesson

mathspace.co

10.08 Total surface area mathspace.co

841


Idea summary Surface area refers to the measure of the total area of the surface(s) of a three-dimensional shape or object. It is the sum of the areas of all the external faces or surfaces of the object. A prism is a three-dimensional solid with two identical and parallel bases connected by rectangular faces. A pyramid is a solid figure that has a polygon as its base. The surface area of a prism or pyramid can be found by systematically determining the area of each face and then summing the areas together. A cylinder is a three-dimensional solid that has two parallel circular bases of equal radius. The surface area of a cylinder can be calculated using the formula:

SAcylinder = 2π r2 + 2π rh r is the radius of the circular base h is the height of the cylinder

Surface area of a cone Cone A three-dimensional shape with a circular base and a single curved surface connecting the base to a vertex (apex). A cone is a circle-based pyramid. As with other pyramids, if the apex is directly above the centre of the base, forming a perpendicular line to the base, the cone is referred to as a right cone. The slant height can be denoted by l, and the radius of the base by r.

Interactive exploration

Discover this concept in action online

mathspace.co

As with other 3D shapes, calculating surface areas involves summing the areas of all faces. For right cones, this includes the base and a sector of a circle. The base is a circle, with an area of πr2, where r is the radius of the cone’s base.

842

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


The other part is the sector, which is a portion of a larger circle with a radius, s, equal to the slant height of the cone. r s

h

s

r

Before calculating the area of the sector, first consider the entire circle from which the sector originates. The area of this large circle is πs2, while its circumference is 2πs. Since the sector must wrap around the circular base to form the cone, the arc length of the sector is equal to the circumference of the base, which is 2πr, where r is the radius of the cone’s base. The ratio of the area of the shaded sector to the area of the whole circle is equal to:

2 r 2 s

r . s

The surface area of the right cone is equal to the sum of the base area and the area of the sector: • The base is a circle with radius r, therefore its area is πr2. r • The sector is a fraction of the circle: . The area of the sector with radius s, therefore is s r s2 rs. s The surface area of a cone is: Surface area of cone = Area of sector + Area of circular base

SAcone = π rs + π r2 r is the radius of the circular base s is the slant height

Example 5 Calculate the surface area of the cone, rounded to two decimal places.

8 cm

3 cm

10.08 Total surface area mathspace.co

843


Create a strategy Use the surface area of a cone formula: SAcone = πrs + πr2

Apply the idea The radius is r = 3 cm, and the slant height is s = 8 cm. SAcone = πrs + πr2

Write the surface area formula for cone 2

=π×3×8+π×3 2

= 103.67 cm

Substitute r = 3 and s = 8 Evaluate and round

Reflect and check If the perpendicular height is provided instead of the slant height, the slant height must first be calculated using Pythagoras’ theorem.

Idea summary A cone is circle-based pyramid. The surface area of a cone is:

SAcone = πrs + πr2 r s

is the radius of the circular base is the slant height

Surface area of a sphere Sphere A solid where all points of the surface are at a fixed distance from a central point, known as its centre. The distance from the centre to any point on the surface of the sphere is called the radius, similar to that of a circle. Unlike the solids encountered so far, a sphere cannot be unwrapped into a 2D net to calculate its surface area, so the surface area of a sphere is approached differently.

844

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Archimedes discovered that the area of the curved surface of a cylinder is equal to the surface area of the inscribed sphere.

r

h = 2r

The curved surface of a cylinder can be flattened into a rectangle. The height of this cylinder is twice the radius of the inscribed sphere, which is also the radius of the circular ends of the cylinder. The area of the resulting rectangle can be calculated as: 2π r × 2r = 4πr2

Thus, the formula for the surface area of a sphere is:

SAsphere = 4πr2 r is the radius of the sphere

Example 6 Calculate the surface area of the sphere, rounded to two decimal places.

9 cm

Create a strategy Use the formula for the surface area of a sphere: SAsphere = 4πr2

Apply the idea The radius of the sphere is r = 9 cm. SAsphere = 4πr2

Start with the surface area formula for sphere 2

= 4π (9)

Substitute r = 9 2

= 1017.88 cm

Evaluate and round to two decimal places

10.08 Total surface area mathspace.co

845


Idea summary A sphere is a solid where all points of the surface of the solid is a fixed distance from a centre. The formula for the surface area of a sphere is:

SAsphere = 4πr2 r

is the radius of the sphere

10.08 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

2

Identify the solid being described: a

Composed of two circular bases and a rectangular lateral face.

b

Composed of a single circular base and a curved lateral surface that converges to a point.

c

Composed of a polygonal base and triangular faces that converge to a single point.

d

Composed of two congruent, parallel polygonal bases connected by rectangular faces.

e

Has no edges or vertices, completely symmetrical around its centre.

Draw the net of these solids: a

3

Cylinder

b

Cube

c

Square pyramid

d

Cone

Determine whether these statements are true or false regarding the surface area of various solids. a

The surface area of a rectangular prism can be calculated by adding the areas of all its faces.

b

The surface area of a cylinder includes the area of one of the bases and the curved surface area.

c

The surface area of a pyramid includes the base area and the area of all its triangular faces.

d

A sphere has a smaller surface area than a cone with the same radius and height.

e

The lateral surface area of a cone is calculated using the formula for the area of a circle.

Practice 4

Calculate the surface area of a cube with a side length of 4 cm.

5

Calculate the surface area of this rectangular prism: 3 mm 5 mm 13 mm

846

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Ex 1

6

Calculate the surface area of a rectangular prism with dimensions: 4 cm by 9 cm by 8 cm

7

Calculate the surface area of each triangular prism: a

b

10 cm

8 cm 6 cm

10 cm

24 cm

18 cm

12 cm

8 cm 8

For each triangular prism: i

Determine the value of x.

ii

a

b

8 cm

Calculate the surface area.

x cm

x cm

5 cm 18 cm

16 cm 6 cm 6 cm

9

Calculate the surface area of the trapezoidal prism. 7 cm 5 cm 4 cm

6 cm

13 cm 10

Ex 2

11

Consider this trapezoidal prism: a

Calculate the value of y, rounded to two decimal places.

b

Calculate the surface area, rounded to one decimal place.

y cm 12 cm

A birthday gift is placed inside the box shown, which has the shape of a rectangular prism:

5 cm 14 cm

11 cm

5 cm

Determine the minimum amount of wrapping paper needed to cover this box.

13 cm

19 cm 12

A regular hexagonal pyramid has a base area of 36 cm2, and each triangular face has an area of 14 cm2. Calculate the surface area of the pyramid.

10.08 Total surface area mathspace.co

847


13

Calculate the surface area of these pyramids: a

b

8 cm

8 cm 7 cm

4 cm

14

Ex 3

15

10 cm

8 cm

Consider this square pyramid: a

Show that the height of the triangular faces, rounded to two decimal places, is 7.81 cm.

b

Calculate the surface area of the square pyramid, rounded to one decimal place.

6 cm 10 cm

Calculate the surface area of these pyramids, rounded to five significant figures where necessary: a

b

6 cm 5 cm 10 cm

8 cm 12 cm

16 Ex 4

c

A square pyramid with a base edge of 10 cm and a perpendicular height of 5 cm.

d

A rectangular pyramid with a base of 10 cm by 5 cm, and a perpendicular height of 4 cm.

Calculate the surface area of each cylinder, rounded to two decimal places: a

10

b 98 80

35

848

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


17

Ex 5

18

Calculate the surface area of these cylinders using the provided measurements, rounded to two decimal places: a

A radius of 11 m and a height of 8 m.

b

A diameter of 11.2 cm and a height of 21.8 cm.

Calculate the surface area of these cones, rounded to two decimal places: a

b 10 cm

7 cm

3 cm

2 cm

19

Ex 6

20

For each cone, use the given measurements to: i

Calculate the slant height.

ii

Calculate the surface area, rounded to two decimal places.

a

Radius of 5 cm and a perpendicular height of 12 cm.

b

Radius of 15 cm and a perpendicular height of 8 cm.

Determine the surface area of these spheres, rounded to five significant figures: a

b

4 cm

6 cm

21

Calculate the surface area of a softball with a radius of 9.6 cm, rounded to two decimal places.

22

Determine the surface area of this hemisphere, rounded to three decimal places. 11

23

Calculate the side length of a cube that has a surface area of 726 cm2.

10.08 Total surface area mathspace.co

849


24

A rectangular box has a surface area of 312 m2. If the width and length of the box are 8 m and 2 m respectively, calculate the height of the box.

25

The diagram shows a water trough in the shape of a half cylinder. Express, in terms of π, the exact surface area of the outside of this water trough.

3.15 m

1.21 m

Extend your thinking 26

A rectangular prism has a length of 4x metres, width of 3x metres and height of 2x metres. If the dimensions of this prism are increased by a factor of 2, express the increase in the surface area in terms of x.

27

The two identical spherical balls with radii of 1.8 m fit exactly inside a cylinder. Calculate the surface area of the closed cylinder, rounded to one decimal place.

28

The diagram shows a high rise building: a

Calculate the surface area of the external walls of the building.

b

If 2% of the surface area is taken up by metal frames and the rest is glass, how many square metres of glass are used on the walls? Round your answer to one decimal place.

19 m

18 m

45 m

15 m 29

A paint roller is cylindrical in shape. It has a diameter of 6.2 cm and a width of 38.1 cm: Calculate the area painted by the roller when it makes one revolution, rounded to five significant figures.

850

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

15 m


10.09   Volume After this lesson, you will be able to… • calculate volumes of prisms, cylinders, pyramids and spheres. • determine volumes of composite 3D objects. • solve practical problems involving volume calculations.

Volume of prisms and cylinders Prisms and cylinders are three-dimensional shapes with two identical ends. The ends are known as bases or cross-sections, and the height is the distance between them. Prisms and cylinders have a uniform cross-section parallel to their bases, maintaining the same size and shape along the height. The volume of any prism, measured in cubed units, is given by: Volume of prism = Area of base × Height V = Ah where A is the base area and h is perpendicular height between the bases.

Height

Base area

Height Base area

Rectangular prism

Triangular prism

Height

Height Base area

Base area Irregular prism

Trapezoidal prism

This formula applies to all prisms, even those with irregularly shaped bases. It is applicable to any 3D object that has a uniform cross-section. Height

Base

In particular, if the uniform cross-section is a circle, the shape is a cylinder, and the volume of a cylinder is given by: Volume of cylinder = Area of base × Height V = πr2h where r is the radius and h is the perpendicular height.

10.09 Volume mathspace.co

851


Example 1 Determine the volume of this triangular prism:

4 mm 11 mm 4 mm

Create a strategy Determine the area of the base triangle, then use the formula for volume of a prism.

Apply the idea A

1 bh 2

Write the formula for area of a triangle

1 4 4 2 = 8 mm2 V = Ah

Substitute b = 4 and h = 4 Evaluate Write the formula for volume of a prism

= 8 × 11

Substitute A = 8 and h = 11

= 88 mm3

Evaluate

Example 2 Calculate the volume of this can of cat food, rounded to one decimal place: 19 mm

102 mm

Create a strategy Use the cylinder volume formula: V = πr2 h

Apply the idea V = πr2h

Write the formula for volume of a cylinder 2

= π × 19 × 102

Substitute r = 19 and h = 102 3

≈ 115 680.0 mm

852

Evaluate and round to one decimal place

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Idea summary The volume of a solid is the amount of space it occupies. The volume of any prism, measured in cubed units, is given by:

V = Ah A is the base area h is the perpendicular height between the bases The volume formula for a cylinder is:

V = πr2h r is the radius h is the perpendicular height

Volume of pyramids and cones Interactive exploration

Discover this concept in action online

The volume of any pyramid is

mathspace.co

1 of the volume of the prism with the same base and perpendicular 3

height as the pyramid. The volume of a pyramid is calculated using the formula: V

1 Ah 3

where A is the base area and h is the perpendicular height. The volume of a cone is related to the volume of a cylinder in the same way that the volume of a pyramid is related to the volume of a prism. Thus, the volume of a cone can be calculated using the formula: V

1 2 r h 3

where r is the radius of the cone’s base and h is the perpendicular height of the cone.

10.09 Volume mathspace.co

853


Example 3 Calculate the volume of this square-based pyramid:

3 cm 9 cm

Create a strategy 1 Use the formula for the volume of a pyramid, V = Ah, where the area of a square is given by A = s2. 3

Apply the idea Let s = 9 and h = 3. 1 V = Ah 3 1 2 s h 3 1 92 3 3 = 81 cm3

Write the formula for the volume of a pyramid Substitute the area of the base A = s2 Substitute s = 9 and h = 3 Evaluate

Example 4 Consider this cone:

34 m

32 m a Calculate the perpendicular height, h, of the cone.

Create a strategy The perpendicular height is one of the legs of a right-angled triangle formed with the cone’s slant height and radius. Apply Pythagoras’ theorem to calculate the perpendicular height.

854

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Apply the idea 32 Based on the diagram, a = h, c = 34, and b = = 16. 2 2 2 2 c =a +b Write the Pythagoras’ theorem 342 = h2 + 162

Substitute the values of a, b, and c

1156 = h2 + 256

Evaluate the squares

2

900 = h

Subtract 256 from both sides

h = 900

Take the square root of both sides

h = 30 m

Evaluate

b Determine the volume of the cone, rounded to the nearest cubic metre.

Create a strategy Use the volume of the cone given by: V =

1 2 πr h 3

Apply the idea 1 2 πr h 3 1 = × π × 162 × 30 3

V=

= 8042 m3

Write the formula for the volume of a cone Substitute r = 16 and h = 30 Evaluate and round to the nearest whole number

Idea summary The volume of a pyramid is given by:

V = 1 Ah 3 A is the base area h is the perpendicular height The volume of a cone is given by:

V = 1 πr2h 3 r is the radius of the cone’s base h is the perpendicular height of the cone

10.09 Volume mathspace.co

855


Volume of spheres The volume of a sphere is calculated using the formula: V=

4 3 πr 3

where r is the radius of the sphere.

Radius = r

Example 5 Calculate the volume of this sphere, rounded to five significant figures.

4 cm

Create a strategy Use the formula for the volume of the sphere: V =

4 3 πr 3

Apply the idea 4 3 πr 3 4 = × π × 43 3

V=

≈ 268.08 cm3

856

Write the formula for the volume of a sphere Substitute r = 4 Evaluate and round to five significant figures

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 6 The radius of a spherical bowling ball is 10.9 cm. Determine the volume of the ball, rounded to three decimal places.

Apply the idea 4 3 πr 3 4 = × π × 10.93 3

V=

Write the formula for the volume of a sphere Substitute r = 10.9

≈ 5424.605 cm3

Evaluate and round to three decimal places

Idea summary The volume of a sphere is calculated using the formula:

V = 4 πr3 3 r

is the radius of the sphere

10.09 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

Identify the information needed to find the volume of each shape: a

Cylinder

b

Sphere

d

Pyramid

e

Cone

c

Prism

10.09 Volume mathspace.co

857


2

Identify the base shape and the height of each solid: a

b

3m

14 cm 4 cm

7m 5m

6 cm c

d

6 cm

11 cm 10 cm

10 cm e

3 cm

8 mm

f

22 mm

6 cm

2 cm

3

Determine whether these statements about the volume of prisms and cylinders are true or false. a

The volume of a prism is calculated by multiplying the area of its base by its height.

b

Cylinders have a uniform rectangular cross-section.

c

A pyramid’s volume is one-half of the volume of a prism with the same base and height.

d

The volume of a cone is related to the volume of a cylinder.

Practice 4

858

Calculate the volume in cm3 of each: a

A rectangular prism that is 4 m long, 5 cm high and 30 cm wide.

b

A rectangular prism that is 2 m long, 40 cm high and 50 cm wide.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Ex 1

5

Calculate the volume of each prism, rounding to one decimal place when needed: a

b 3 cm

A = 21 cm2

4 cm

8 cm 2 cm

c

d

11 cm

2 cm 8 cm 10 cm

4 cm 6

Calculate the volume of a cylinder with a diameter of 12 cm and a height of 18 cm, rounded to five significant figures.

7

Express, in terms of π, the exact volume of a cylinder having:

8

a

A radius of 2 cm and a height of 7 cm

b

A radius of 6 cm and a height of 5 cm

c

A diameter of 2 mm and a height of 7 mm d

A diameter of 2 m and a height of 7 m

Calculate the volume of these solids, rounded to one decimal place: a

4 cm

13 cm

Ex 2

3 cm

9

b

5 cm

11 cm

The diameter and height of a cylindrical container are shown. The container is filled completely with tomato sauce. Calculate the volume of this container, rounded to one decimal place:

10

46 cm 21 cm

Calculate the volume of a pyramid with these dimensions: a

A base area of 10 cm2 and a perpendicular height of 9 cm

b

A base area of 15 m2 and a perpendicular height of 8 m

c

A base area of 16 cm2 and a perpendicular height of 12 cm

d

A base area of 130 mm2 and a perpendicular height of 7 mm

10.09 Volume mathspace.co

859


Ex 3

11

Calculate the volume of these pyramids, rounded to two decimal places where necessary: a

b

12 cm 18 cm

6 cm 10 cm 24 cm c

d

8 cm

9 cm

5 cm 4 cm Ex 4

12

7 cm

3 cm

8 cm

For this cone: a

Calculate the perpendicular height.

b

Calculate the volume of the cone. Round your answer to three significant figures.

26 m

20 m 13

Ex 5

14

Calculate the exact volumes of these cones using the given measurements: a

Radius of 3 cm and a perpendicular height of 8 cm.

b

Radius of 12 cm and a perpendicular height of 15 cm.

c

Radius of 5 cm and a perpendicular height of 4 cm.

Determine the volume of these spheres. Round your answers to two decimal places: a

b

3 cm

c

30.04 mm

860

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

10.3 cm

d

4 cm


Ex 6

15

The diameter of a basketball is 65.1 cm. Determine the volume of the ball, rounded to two decimal places.

16

Determine the exact volume of the spheres with the following radii: a

17

8 cm

b

4 cm

c

5 cm

d

12 cm

Determine the volume of this hemisphere. Round your answer to three decimal places.

6

18

A square-based pyramid has a height of 24 cm and a volume of 2592 cm3. Determine the base side length of the pyramid.

19

A cone has a volume of 26 640.97 cm3 and radius of 31.9 cm. Determine the height of the cone. Round your answer to the nearest centimetre.

20

Determine the radius, r, of these spheres, rounded to two decimal places:

21

a

A sphere with a volume of 72π cm3.

b

A sphere with a volume of 24 449.024 units3.

A sample perfume bottle is shaped like a cone, as shown in the figure. It has a height and radius of 8 cm and 3 cm, respectively. How much perfume can the cone hold if it is completely filled? Round your answer to three significant figures.

8 cm

3 cm

22

A medical refrigerator used to store containers has dimensions 65 cm × 52cm × 26 cm. The containers have dimensions 50 mm × 40 mm × 20 mm. Assuming both the refrigerator and the containers are rectangular prisms: a

Determine the volume of the refrigerator in cubic millimetres.

b

How many containers can fit in the refrigerator?

10.09 Volume mathspace.co

861


Extend your thinking 23

A podium was formed by sawing off the top of a cone. Calculate the volume of the podium, rounded to four significant figures.

6m

2m 6m 4m

24

Three spheres of radius 4 cm fit perfectly inside a cylindrical tube so that the height of the three spheres is equal to the height of the tube, and the width of each sphere equals the width of the tube: a

Determine the total volume of the three spheres, rounded to one decimal place.

b

Determine the volume of the tube, rounded to one decimal place.

c

Calculate the percentage of the space inside the tube that is not taken up by the spheres, expressed in two significant figures.

25

There are two types of cylindrical juice cans available for Lyn to purchase at her local store. One has a diameter of 16 cm and a height of 18 cm, and the other has twice the diameter and height of the smaller can. Lyn believes the volume will double. Is she correct? Justify your answer.

26

A baby bottle holds 100 mL of milk:

27

a

Show that the bottle has an equivalent volume to a rectangular prism with height of 10 cm, width of 2 cm and length of 5 cm.

b

Determine the dimensions of another rectangular prism with the same volume.

The roof of a house is flat and measures 16 m by 15 m in the shape of a rectangle. How many millimetres of rain need to fall on the roof in total to fill a water tank with a capacity of 24 000 L?

862

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


10.10   Composite solids After this lesson, you will be able to… • determine surface area of a composite 3D solid. • determine volume of a composite 3D solid. • solve practical problems involving composite solids.

Surface area of composite solids A composite solid is made up of a combination of other 3D solids. To determine the surface area of a composite solid: 1. Identify the shape of each external face. Some of these may be simple shapes or composite shapes. 2. Calculate the area of each external face using the area formulas or surface area formulas where necessary. 3. Add the areas of the external faces together. If the composite solid is made up of a cylinder, a cone or a sphere, use specific parts of surface area formulas (e.g., curved surface for cylinders, sector for cones) based on external faces. The surface area of a sphere with radius r is: SAsphere = 4πr2 The surface area of a cylinder with radius r and height h is: SAcylinder = Area of two circular ends + Area of curved surface = 2πr2 + 2πrh The surface area of a right cone with radius r, perpendicular height h, and slant height s is: SAcone = Area of circular base + Area of sector = πr2 + πrs

Example 1 The ice cream cones sold at an ice creamery have the dimensions indicated in this diagram: 8 cm

15 cm

10.10 Composite solids mathspace.co

863


a Calculate the slant height of the cone, expressing your answer in exact form.

Create a strategy

Apply the idea c2 = a2 + b2 Write the Pythagoras’ theorem

The slant height is the hypotenuse of a right-angled triangle formed by the cone’s perpendicular height and radius. Apply Pythagoras’ theorem to calculate the slant height.

s2 = 42 + 152 Substitute c = s, a = 4 and b = 15

4 cm

= 16 + 225

Evaluate the squares

= 241

Evaluate the addition

s = 241 Take the square root of both sides to solve for s The slant height of the cone is 241 cm.

s

15 cm

b Calculate the exact surface area of the cone.

Create a strategy The surface area of a cone is SAcone = πr2 + πrs. Since the cone meets the hemisphere at its circular face, the cone’s circular base is internal, covered by the hemisphere. So, only the curved sector area is included.

Apply the idea Asector = πrs Write the formula for the area of the cone as the area of the sector =

4

Substitute r = 4 and s = 241

241 2

= 4 241 cm

Simplify

c Calculate the exact surface area of the hemisphere.

Create a strategy Use the formula for the surface area of a sphere, and divide it by 2.

Apply the idea 1 × 4πr2 Write the formula for half the surface 2 area of a sphere 1 2 = × 4π × 4 Substitute r = 4 2 = 32π cm2 Simplify

SAhemisphere =

864

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


d Calculate the total surface area of the ice cream cone, rounded to the nearest square centimetre.

Create a strategy Add the surface area of the cone and the hemisphere.

Apply the idea SAcomposite solid = SAcone + SAhemisphere Write the formula for the total surface area of the composite solid = 4π 241 + 32π 2

= 296 cm

Substitute SAcone = 4π 241 and Ahemisphere = 32p Evaluate and round

Reflect and check Note that in parts b and c, the answers were left as exact values. Evaluating too early can introduce rounding errors to the calculation of the total surface area.

Idea summary To determine the surface area of a composite solid, calculate the area of each face and add these together. Ensure understanding of which formula parts correspond to each face.

Volume of composite solids Composite solids can be made out of several solids such as prisms, pyramids, spheres, hemispheres, cylinders.

5 cm

4 cm 10 cm 5 cm 8 cm

To determine the volume of a composite solid: 1. Identify the simple solids by breaking down the composite solid into its individual simple shapes, such as spheres, hemispheres, prisms, cylinders, or pyramids. 2. Calculate the volume of each solid by using the appropriate formula for each solid to determine its volume. 3. Add the volumes together if the solids are joined to form the composite, or subtract if one solid is removed from the other.

10.10 Composite solids mathspace.co

865


Example 2 Determine the volume of the composite figure shown, which consists of a cone and a hemisphere, joined at their bases. Round your answer to two decimal places.

10 cm 4 cm

Create a strategy Add the volume of the cone and the volume of the hemisphere.

Apply the idea Use the formula of the volume of the cone, V = 1 2 πr h 3 1 = π (4)2 (10) 3 160 = π cm3 3

Vcone =

1 2 πr h, where r = 4 cm and h = 10 cm. 3

Write the formula for volume of a cone Substitute r = 4 and h = 10 Evaluate

Use the formula of the volume of the hemisphere, V = Vhemisphere = =

Add these volumes:

1 4 3 r , where r = 4 cm. 2 3

1 4 3 r 2 3

Write the formula for volume of a hemisphere

1 4 ( 4 )3 2 3

Substitute r = 4

128 = π cm3 3

Evaluate

Vcomposite solid = Vcone + Vhemisphere Write the formula for the volume of the given composite solid

866

160 128 = π+ π 3 3

160 128 Substitute Vcone = p and Vhemisphere = p 3 3

= 301.59 cm3

Evaluate and round to two decimal places

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 3 This solid is a truncated pyramid, formed by cutting off a pyramid-shaped section from the top of a larger, original square-based pyramid.

9 cm 4 cm 3 cm

6 cm a What was the volume of the pyramid section that was cut off? Give your answer as an exact value.

Create a strategy 1 Bh, where B is the area of the base. 3 1 Since the base is a square with side length s, the formula becomes V = s2h. 3 Use the formula for the volume of a pyramid, given by V =

Apply the idea For the cut-off pyramid, the side length of the base is s1 = 4 and the height is h1 = 6. 1 2 s1 h1 3 1 = × 42 × 6 3 1 = × 16 × 6 3

Vcut-off =

= 32 cm3

Write the formula for the volume of a square-based pyramid Substitute s1 = 4 and h1 = 6 Evaluate the power Evaluate the product

10.10 Composite solids mathspace.co

867


b What was the volume of the original pyramid? Give your answer as an exact value.

Create a strategy Use the formula for the volume of a square pyramid, V =

1 2 s h. 3

Apply the idea For the original pyramid, the side length of the base is s2 = 6 and the height is h2 = 9. 1 2 s2 h2 3 1 = × 62 × 9 3 1 = × 36 × 9 3 = 108 cm3

Voriginal =

Write the formula for the volume of a square-based pyramid Substitute s2 = 6 and h2 = 9 Evaluate the square Evaluate

The volume of the original pyramid is 108 cubic centimetres.

c Determine the volume of the truncated pyramid. Give your answer as an exact value.

Create a strategy Subtract the volume of the cut-off pyramid from the volume of the original pyramid.

Apply the idea Vtruncated = Voriginal – Vcut-off = 108 – 32 3

= 76 cm

Write the relationship between the volumes Substitute the calculated volumes Evaluate the subtraction

The volume of the truncated pyramid is 76 cubic centimetres.

Idea summary The volume of composite solids made of prisms, pyramids, cones, spheres and cylinders is calculated by adding or subtracting the volume of each of the smaller component solids. Add volumes for joined solids; subtract for solids removed from a larger shape.

868

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


10.10 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

Identify the basic solids used to make up each of these composite solids: a

b

3m

6m 12 m

11 m

6m

5m c

d

6.5 m 6.5 m

7 cm

19 m

3 cm 16 m 2

Determine the formula for the area of each region: 2πr

A

h

B

3

A

b

h

r C

r a

2πr

B

c

C

Determine the formula for the area of each region:

s

h

B r

a

A

b

Ar

s

B

10.10 Composite solids mathspace.co

869


4

Complete the missing part of the volume formula for the given solid: a

b hcone

h

r hcylinder r

Volume = c

1 2 1 πr h + ⬚ Volume = πr2hcone + ⬚ 3 3

d

r h

hpyramid

hcone

w l

Volume = ⬚ – 5

870

s

1 lwhpyramid Volume = s3 – ⬚ 3

Are these statements true or false about the surface area and volume of composite solids? a

Composite solids are formed by combining two or more basic geometric solids.

b

The surface area of a composite solid is the sum of the surface areas of all its non-overlapping individual parts.

c

The volume of a composite solid is always equal to the sum of the volumes of its non-overlapping individual parts.

d

When calculating the surface area of a composite solid, overlapping areas should be subtracted.

e

For a composite solid, the value of the volume cannot be greater than the value of its total surface area.

f

The volume of a composite solid can sometimes be found by using the displacement method.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Practice Ex 1

6

7

The solid shown is made up of a cone and a hemisphere: a

Calculate the slant height of the cone, giving your answer in surd form.

b

Calculate the surface area of the cone, rounded to two decimal places.

c

Calculate the surface area of the hemisphere, rounded to two decimal places.

d

Calculate the total surface area of the solid, rounded to the nearest square centimetre.

6 cm

13 cm

Determine the surface area of these composite solids, rounded to two decimal places: a

b 0.2 cm

4 cm

8 mm

3 cm 9 cm

c

d

6m 33.1 mm 4.5 m 4m 8

4m

10.5 mm

A pyramid has been removed from inside a rectangular prism, as shown in the figure:

5 cm

10 cm 12 cm a

Determine the slant height of the triangle side with base length 12 cm. Round your answer to two decimal places.

b

Determine the slant height of the triangle side with base length 10 cm. Round your answer to two decimal places.

c

Determine the total surface area of the composite solid, rounded to two decimal places.

10.10 Composite solids mathspace.co

871


Ex 2

9

Determine the volume of the solids, rounded to two decimal places where necessary: a

b

4 cm

12 cm

3 cm

14 cm c

11 cm

d

4 cm

8 cm

9 cm 15 cm e

f 16 cm

8m

48 cm 3m 5m 6m 14 cm 10

The figure shows a cylinder of radius 3 cm, and its height is double the radius. On the top and bottom of the cylinder are cones with radii and height both also equal to 3 cm. a

Describe the steps involved in calculating the surface area of this composite solid.

b

Calculate the surface area of the solid. Round your answer to two decimal places.

3 cm

6 cm 3 cm

872

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Ex 3

11

Determine the volume of the solids, rounded to five significant figures: a

b 5 cm

12 m

6m

3 cm 4m

5 cm

6 cm

8m c

d 3m

4m 5m 4m

7m

5m

9m

12

17 m

The solid shown is constructed by cutting out a quarter of a sphere from a cube:

14.2 cm

Determine its surface area if the side length is 14.2 cm and the radius of the sphere is half the side length. Round your answer to two decimal places. 13

Calculate the volume of this solid, rounded to two decimal places:

5 cm

4 cm

3 cm

4.5 cm

10.10 Composite solids mathspace.co

873


14

An hourglass-like solid is constructed from two identical truncated cones. Each truncated cone is half the height of the original cone.

7

Determine the volume of the solid, rounded to two decimal places. 7

5 15

16

17

A weight is constructed by removing the top 38 cm from a 57 cm tall pyramid with a square base of side length 45 cm. a

Determine the volume of the original pyramid.

b

Calculate the side length of the square on top of the weight.

c

Calculate the volume of the removed part of the pyramid.

d

Calculate the volume of the weight.

45 cm

For the solid shown: a

Calculate the perpendicular height of the cone, rounded to two decimal place.

b

Calculate the area or surface area of each of these faces, rounded to two decimal places: i

The hemisphere.

ii

The exposed part of the circular face (torus).

iii

The curved surface of the cone.

c

Calculate the total surface area of the solid, rounded to the nearest square centimetre.

d

Calculate the volume of the solid, rounded to the nearest cubic centimetre.

6 cm

16.7 cm

14.8 cm

A pedestal for an action figurine is the shape of the solid made by removing the top section from a cone. a

Calculate the surface area of the pedestal.

b

Calculate its volume, rounded to four significant figures.

8 cm

2 cm

8 cm

4 cm

18

874

A square slab measures 40 cm by 40 cm with a thickness of 5 cm. A total of 25 cylindrical holes, each with a diameter of 2 mm, are drilled through the entire thickness of the slab: a

Calculate the volume of the slab, rounded to two decimal places.

b

Calculate the total surface area of the slab, including the inner surfaces of the holes. Round your answer to two decimal places.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Extend your thinking 19

The ice cream cones at an ice creamery have the dimensions indicated in the diagram. a

How many millilitres of ice cream can fit in each cone, including the hemisphere scoop on top? Round your answer to the nearest millilitre.

b

The ice cream is bought in 10 L tubs. How many whole cones can be made with a single tub of ice cream?

c

20

8 cm

15 cm

Double cones are served with a second hemispherical scoop, with the same dimensions as the first scoop. How many whole double cones can be made with from a 10 L tub?

The base of a water feature is made of a rectangular prism of stone from which a hemisphere has been removed. The entire surface of the solid, except the underside which will sit on the ground, must be polished. 2m 1.5 m

3m

21

a

Determine the surface area of the solid, excluding the underside. Round your answer to two decimal places.

b

Calculate the volume of the solid. Round your answer to two decimal places.

c

The cost of polishing the stone is $214/m2. Determine the total cost of polishing the water feature base.

A spire is an architectural feature which originated in the 12th century in Germany and can be seen throughout Europe in Gothic and Baroque architecture. It has the shape of a cone or a pyramid. a

A castle has two spires with square bases. The width of the base is 4 m and the slant height of each side of the spire is 35 m. Determine how much paint is required to cover both spires.

b

Another castle has two spires with the same slant height as in part (a), but the base of the spires is a hexagon with side length 2 m. Will this building require more or less paint than the previous building? Explain.

c

Assuming they have equal slant heights, determine the side length that the spires with a hexagonal base need to have in order to require the same amount of paint as the spires with a square base in part (a).

10.10 Composite solids mathspace.co

875


22

23

Lucy makes a truncated cone by cutting off a smaller cone halfway from the top, as shown: a

Determine an expression for the exact volume of the original cone.

b

Determine an expression for the exact volume of the cone section that was cut from the original cone.

c

What fraction of the original cone did Lucy cut off?

d

If the original cone had a volume of 184 cm3, calculate the exact volume of Lucy’s truncated cone.

x

x

2y

An ice creamery sells their ice cream in two different types of waffle cones. One type is a pointy cone while the other type has a flat base and is made up of two cylinders. Both cones are made with the same thickness of waffle: 6 cm 3 cm 3 cm 1 cm 8 cm

5 cm

6 cm

24

6 cm

a

Which type should a customer buy if they want the most waffle? Explain your answer.

b

Which type can hold more volume? Explain your reasoning

Flora has three wooden blocks that started as cubes of the same size. Two of the blocks have had the same cube section cut out of them, but in different places.

Block A

Block B

Compare the surface area and volume of the three blocks.

876

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

Block C


10.11   Similarity and scale factors After this lesson, you will be able to… • determine surface area of a composite 3D solid. • determine volume of a composite 3D solid. • solve practical problems involving composite solids.

Similar shapes Two shapes are congruent if all their corresponding sides and corresponding angles are equal: • Angles: Each shape contains the exact same angles. • Sides: The sides of each shape have the exact same measurements. One shape may be a rotation or reflection of the other, but they still have exactly the same angles and side lengths. c

b

b

b 50° 130° 100° d 80° a

c 130° 100° a 80° 50° d

c

100° 50° 130° d a 80°

Similar shapes Two shapes are similar if they have the same shape but different sizes, with proportional sides and equal angles. To get from one similar figure to another, it could be: • Enlarged (stretched) • Compressed (shrunk) • Rotated • Reflected • Translated (moved) Thus, the measurements of one shape will have all increased or decreased by the same ratio to produce the new similar shape. So, congruent shapes are similar shapes that have a ratio of one. Therefore, the conditions of similarity for any shape are: 1. Corresponding sides are proportional. 2. Corresponding angles have equal measure. B 8 A

119°

45°

77° 8

14

119° D

14

C

M

7 119° L 77° 45° 119° 7 4 O 4

N

10.11 Similarity and scale factors mathspace.co

877


The mathematical symbol used to show similarity between two shapes is “∼”. For the similar quadrilaterals shown, it can be written as ABCD ∼ LMNO, meaning the shape ABCD is similar to LMNO. This is called a similarity statement. Notice the letters representing the corresponding vertices appear in the same order. Since ABCD ∼ LMNO, implies the following: 1. Corresponding sides are proportional. •

AB BC CD DA LM MN NO OL

• If even one of the ratios was not the same, then the figures would not be similar. 2. Corresponding angles have equal measure. • ∠ A = ∠L, ∠B = ∠M, ∠C = ∠ N, and ∠D = ∠O • If even one of the corresponding angle pairs was not the same, then the figures would not be similar. • Since the sum of the interior angles for convex polygon with n sides is (n − 2) × 180°, if there are (n − 1) pairs of equal corresponding angles between two shapes, then that is sufficient to prove similarity for the two shapes.

Example 1 Are the two shapes similar? 125°

110°

125°

110° 60°

55°

105° 95°

110°

110° 60°

55°

Create a strategy Check the figure for the conditions of similarity: 1. Corresponding sides are proportional. 2. Corresponding angles are congruent equal measures.

Apply the idea Both conditions for similarity should be met for the shapes to be considered similar: 1. Corresponding sides are proportional. However, no side lengths are provided, so this condition cannot be used to assess similarity. 2. Corresponding angles are equal. From the diagram, it can be seen that three angle pairs do not have equal measures, meaning this condition has not been met. Therefore, the shapes are not similar.

878

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Idea summary Two shapes are considered congruent if they are exactly the same shape and size. Two shapes are considered similar if they are exactly the same shape but can be different sizes.

Scale factor Scale factor The ratio of a length on the image to a corresponding length on the object when two figures are similar.

Interactive exploration

Discover this concept in action online

mathspace.co

Enlargement

Reduction

A transformation that increases the size of an object to produce an image, where the resulting scale factor is greater than 1.

A transformation that decreases the size of an object to produce an image, where the resulting scale factor is between 0 and 1.

For any shape that undergoes an enlargement or a reduction, the original shape is referred to as the object and the enlarged or reduced shape is referred to as the image. This means that: • If the scale factor is 1, then the image is congruent (the same) as the original. • If the scale factor is greater than 1, then the image is larger than the original. • If the scale factor is less than 1, but greater than 0, then the image is smaller than the original. The scale factor between two shapes is calculated using the corresponding lengths in the formula: Scale factor

Image length Object length

Sometimes, finding a pair of corresponding lengths may not be straightforward as the orientation of the shapes may differ. It is important to check that a pair of lengths are corresponding before applying the scale factor formula.

10.11 Similarity and scale factors mathspace.co

879


Example 2 These two shapes are similar:

18

61° 16

68° 12

104° 127°

6 x° 7

9 8

14

a What is the scale factor from the larger to the smaller quadrilateral?

Create a strategy The object is the larger shape and the image is the smaller shape. Identify a pair of corresponding lengths and use the formula: Scale factor

Image length Object length

Apply the idea Since the shapes are given as similar, only one pair of corresponding lengths needs to be used to determine the scale factor. Although only one pair of corresponding lengths is needed, all four pairs are shown here for verification: 6 12 1 = 2 7 Second shortest sides = 14 1 = 2 8 Second longest sides = 16 1 = 2 9 Longest sides = 18 1 = 2 Shortest sides =

Image length divided by object length Simplify Image length divided by object length Simplify Image length divided by object length Simplify Image length divided by object length Simplify

1 The scale factor for the reduction is . 2

Reflect and check If any of the scale factors were not equivalent, then the shapes would not be similar.

880

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


b What is the size of the angle marked x?

Create a strategy Identify the sides that correspond to the sides marked 6 and 7, and determine the measure of the angle between those sides.

Apply the idea The sides in the large shape that correspond to the sides of length 6 and 7 in the small shape are 12 and 14. The angle between them is 127°. x = 127°

Idea summary The scale factor is the ratio of a length on the image to a corresponding length on the object when two figures are similar. An enlargement will have a scale factor greater than 1. A reduction will have a scale factor between 0 and 1. The original shape is referred to as the object and the enlarged or reduced shape is referred to as the image. The scale factor between two shapes is calculated using the corresponding lengths in the formula: Scale factor

Image length Object length

Lengths in similar figures If the scale factor is known between two similar figures, then any length in one figure can be used to calculate the corresponding length in the other figure by rearranging the scale factor formula as shown: Image length = Object length × Scale factor Object length = Image length ÷ Scale factor This relationship is also shown in the following conversion chart: × Scale factor

Object length

Image length

÷ Scale factor

10.11 Similarity and scale factors mathspace.co

881


Example 3 Consider this diagram:

z

Y

X

65° C y

18

11 30° 12

30° 85° A 6

B

Z

a Is △ABC similar to △XYZ?

Create a strategy Since two of the three angles are given for each of the triangles, find the third angle for each triangle. If all corresponding angles are equal, the triangles are similar, otherwise, they are not.

Apply the idea The interior angles of ABC are C = 30°, A = 85° and B = 180 – 30 – 85 = 65°. The interior angles of XYZ are Z = 30°, Y = 65° and X = 180 – 30 – 65 = 85°. Since all corresponding angles are equal, △ ABC ∼ △ XYZ.

b What is the scale factor from △ ABC to △ XYZ?

Create a strategy The object is the △ABC and the image is the △XYZ. Use a pair of corresponding lengths in the formula: Scale factor

Image length Object length

Apply the idea YZ BC 18 = 12 = 1.5

Scale factor =

Image length divided by object length Substitute YZ = 18, BC = 12 Simplify

Reflect and check The scale factor should be greater than 1 since it is an enlargement.

882

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


c What is the value of z?

Create a strategy The unknown value is in the image, therefore, use the formula: Image length = Object length × Scale factor

Apply the idea Image length = Object length × Scale factor

Write the formula

z = 6 × 1.5

Substitute the values

z=9

Evaluate

Reflect and check Since z is on the larger triangle, it is expected that it is longer than the corresponding side on the smaller triangle.

Example 4 A 4.9 m high flagpole casts a shadow of 4.5 m. At the same time, the shadow of a nearby building falls at the same point, S. The shadow cast by the building measures 13.5 m:

4.9 m 4.5 m

S

13.5 m Determine h, the height of the building.

Create a strategy Let the smaller triangle be the object and the larger triangle be the image. Determine the scale factor using the formula: Scale factor

Image length Object length

Then use the formula: Image length = Object length × Scale factor to determine the height.

10.11 Similarity and scale factors mathspace.co

883


Apply the idea Use the corresponding sides 4.5 m and 13.5 m to calculate the scale factor: Image length Write the formula Object length 13.5 = Substitute values 4 .5 = 3 Evaluate

Scale factor =

To determine the height of the building: Image length = Object length × Scale factor

Write the formula

h = 4.9 × 3 Substitute the values = 14.7 m

Evaluate

The height of the building is 14.7 m.

Idea summary Rearrangements of the scale factor formula can be used to determine missing lengths in the object or image: Image length = Object length × Scale factor Object length = Image length ÷ Scale factor × Scale factor

Object length

Image length

÷ Scale factor

10.11 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

If two shapes are congruent, are they also similar? Explain your answer.

2

Consider quadrilateral ABCD and quadrilateral LMNO. If ABCD ∼ NOLM is known, which of these ratios must be equal to AB ? NO A

884

AB LM

B

DA MN

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

C

BC MN

D

CD OL


3

4

5

6

Consider these two shapes: a

Are the two shapes similar?

b

Determine whether these statements are true or false: i

One of the shapes is an enlargement of the other.

ii

If one of the shapes was rotated, it would change whether they are similar or not.

iii

If one of the shapes was translated, it would change whether they are similar or not.

Determine whether each statement is true or false: a

All rectangles are similar.

b

All squares are similar.

c

All equilateral triangles are similar.

d

All isosceles triangles are similar.

2 If a shape is dilated by a scale factor of , will the new shape be larger or smaller than the 3 original?

For the similar figures given, the scale factor used to enlarge the smaller quadrilateral is 4.5: a

Which shape is the object?

b

Which shape is the image?

c

Determine the length of FG.

d

Determine the length of EF.

B

7 cm

A

5 cm

1 cm D

3 cm

C

F

E

G H 7

Given two quadrilaterals, JKLM ∼ TVUS is known. Complete the statement to express two more similarity statements for these quadrilaterals. a

LMJK ∼ ⬚

b

⬚ ∼ UVTS

Practice Ex 1

8

Are these shapes similar? Explain your answer. a

X 45°

B 45° 11

15

90° C 105° 120° 4 D A 8

b

90° Y 120° 40

105° W

5

150

110

80

9

5

10

Z

10.11 Similarity and scale factors mathspace.co

885


9

Complete the statement to show that the two quadrilaterals are similar: In similar figures, the ratios between corresponding side lengths are ⬚. QR 18 2 BA 9 RS ⬚ 2 AD ⬚ ST 8 ⬚ 4 ⬚

B

6

C

9 A

4 Q

D

12

18 12

R

T

TQ ⬚ 2 CB 6

24

Therefore, ABCD ∼ ⬚.

Ex 2

8 S

10

Given that three angles in a quadrilateral match three of the angles in another quadrilateral, are the two quadrilaterals similar? Explain your answer.

11

For the given similar figures, determine the scale factor from the larger figure to the smaller figure.

4 5

16

20 Ex 3

12

These two figures are similar: a

Determine the scale factor from the larger figure to the smaller figure.

b

Determine the value of m.

A P 28

C 13

8

14

B

m R

Q

An equilateral triangle of side length 6 cm is to be enlarged by a factor of 5: a

Determine the side length of the resulting triangle.

b

Determine the size of each angle in the resulting triangle.

14

A figure was enlarged by a scale factor of 3. What scale factor could be used to get it back its original size? Explain your answer.

886

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Ex 4

15

A stick of height 1.1 m casts a shadow of length 2.2 m. At the same time, a tree casts a shadow of 6.2 m.

h

1.1 m

6.2 m

2.2 m

If the tree has a height of h metres, determine the value of h. 16

James is 1.7 m tall and casts a shadow 2 m long. At the same time, a tower casts a shadow 13 m long.

hm 1.7 m 2m 13 m If the tower is h metres high, calculate h, rounded to one decimal place. 17

A 1.1 m high fence casts a shadow of length 1.5 m. At the same time, a lamp post of height 3.9 metres casts a shadow of length L metres. Determine the value of L, rounded to one decimal place.

18

A surveyor needs to measure the distance across a river. There are two trees on the opposite bank that are 34 m apart. She stands 5 m from the bank, directly opposite the first tree. Her assistant has to move 7.7 m along the bank to place a stick directly in her line of sight to the second tree.

River dm 7.7 m A

P 5m S

34 m Determine the width, d, of the river, rounded to the nearest metre.

10.11 Similarity and scale factors mathspace.co

887


19

20

Council has designed plans for a triangular courtyard in the town square. Their drawing shows the courtyard to have dimensions of 4 cm, 6 cm and 9 cm. The shortest side of the actual courtyard is to be 80 m long: a

Determine the longest side length, in metres, of the actual courtyard.

b

Determine the middle side length, in metres, of the actual courtyard.

A 5.6 m ladder has a strut 190 cm long placed 2.3 m from the top. If the feet of the ladder are d m apart, determine the value of d, rounded to two decimal places.

2.3 m 5.6 m

190 cm

dm 21

Sharon wants to measure the height of a flagpole. She places a mirror facing up on the ground between herself and the flagpole such that the mirror is 7.2 m from the flagpole’s base. She then backs away until a reflection of the top of the flagpole appears in the mirror. If she stops moving backwards at a point that is 2.5 m from the mirror and if her eye level is 1.54 m above the ground, determine the height of the flagpole in metres.

2.5 m

7.2 m

Extend your thinking 22

D

Consider this diagram: a

Explain why △ ABE ∼ △ ACD?

b

Calculate the value of f.

E f 5 C

6

B

4

23

Using the digits 0–9, at most one time each, fill in the boxes so that the two rectangles are similar.

888

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

A


24

If shape A is similar to shape B and shape B is similar to shape C. Are shapes A and C similar?

25

In the diagram, △ABD and △ECD are similar right-angled triangles, with AE = 10, AB = 6 and EC = 1.2

B

a

Determine the exact length of x.

b

Determine the radius of the circle. Round your answer to one decimal place.

C 1.2 D

26

Engineers want to determine the distance for a bridge to be built between points A and B. The diagram is an aerial view of their measurements. Point C is chosen so that AC is perpendicular to AB. DE is parrallel to AB.

x

E

• CA = 300 m • CD = 140 m • CE = 150 m

A

10

C E

D

These measurements are taken:

6

B

A

Engineers determine that the maximum length of the bridge cannot exceed 400 metres. Calculate whether the bridge can be built. 27

Determine the height of the roof, rounded to two decimal places. 8.2 m

5.1 m

9.66 m

Investigation: Scale diagrams

Investigate online

mathspace.co

10.11 Similarity and scale factors mathspace.co

889


10.12   Area and volume in similar figures After this lesson, you will be able to… • interpret and use scale factors in maps and scale drawings. • explain the relationship between linear and area scale factors. • solve problems involving areas in real-world similar shapes.

Area in similar figures Area is a two-dimensional measurement. The calculation of area always involves two lengths multiplied together. For example, length × width for a rectangle or A = pr2 = pr × r for a circle.

Interactive exploration

Discover this concept in action online

mathspace.co

When two lengths are added, the unit does not change, but when two lengths are multiplied, the units are squared. If the side lengths of a shape are multiplied by a scale factor, the area of that shape will be multiplied by that scale factor twice (once for each dimension in the formula). Therefore, the ratio of areas in similar figures is equal to the square of the scale factor. These formulas can be applied to calculate the area of similar figures: Area of image = Area of object × (Scale factor)2 Area of object = Area of image ÷ (Scale factor)2 × (Scale factor)2

Area of object

Area of image

÷ (Scale factor)2 Similarly, the ratio of surface area in similar three-dimensional figures is also equal to the square of the scale factor, since surface area is another type of area.

890

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 1 The two rectangles shown in the diagram are similar:

x cm2 15 cm2 6 cm

12 cm Calculate the value of x.

Create a strategy Define the smaller rectangle as the object and the larger rectangle as the image. Calculate the scale factor, then multiply the area of the smaller rectangle by the scale factor squared.

Apply the idea To calculate the scale factor: Scale factor = =

Image length Object length

Write the scale factor formula

12 Substitute the corresponding lengths of 6 the object and image

=2

Evaluate

To calculate the area: Area of image = Area of object × (Scale factor)2 Write the formula for the area of the image x = 15 × 22

Substitute the values

2

= 60 cm

Evaluate

Reflect and check The result will be the same if the roles are reversed, with the larger rectangle defined as the object and the smaller rectangle as the image: Object length Image length 6 = 12 1 = 2 Area of object = Area of image ÷ (Scale factor)2 Scale factor =

x = 15

1 2

= 60 cm2

Write the scale factor formula Substitute the values Evaluate Write the formula for the area of object

2

Substitute the values Evaluate

10.12 Area and volume in similar figures mathspace.co

891


Example 2 Two cylinders are similar, and their surface areas are given: 102.15 cm2 45.4 cm2

Figure II

Figure I

a Calculate the surface area scale factor from Figure I to Figure II.

Create a strategy Figure I is the object and Figure II is the image, the area scale factor can be determined by dividing the image area by the object area.

Apply the idea 102.15 Divide the image area by object area 45.4 = 2.25 Evaluate

Area scale factor =

b Identify the length scale factor from Figure I to Figure II.

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Take the square root of the area scale factor.

Length scale factor = 2.25 Take the square root = 1.5

Evaluate

c Calculate the height of Figure II, if Figure I is 17 cm high.

Create a strategy The unknown value is in the image, therefore use the formula: Image length = Object length × Scale factor

Apply the idea Image length = Object length × Scale factor

892

Write the image length formula

= 17 × 1.5

Substitute the values

= 25.5 cm

Evaluate

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Idea summary The ratio of areas or surface areas between two similar figures is equal to the square of the scale factor. To calculate the area or surface area of similar figures:  Area of image = Area of object × (Scale factor)2 Area of object = Area of image ÷ (Scale factor)2

× (Scale factor)2

Area of object

Area of image

÷ (Scale factor)2

Volume and capacity in similar solids Volume is a three-dimensional measurement. The calculation of volume always involves three lengths multiplied together, or the same length multiple times. For example, for a rectangle prism 4 4 the volume is V = l × w × h, while for a sphere it is V = πr3 = πr × r × r. 3 3

Exploration

×2

×2

×2

Each side length of the cube in the image has been scaled by a factor of 2. 1. If the original volume was 1 unit3, what is the volume of the new cube? 2. Did the volume also double? If not, how did it change? 3. If the original volume was 7 units3, what would the volume of the new cube be?

This means that if the dimensions of an object are multiplied by a scale factor, the volume of that object will be multiplied by that scale factor three times (once for each dimension in the formula). Therefore, the ratio of volumes in similar objects is equal to the cube of the scale factor.

10.12 Area and volume in similar figures mathspace.co

893


These formulas can be applied to calculate the volume of similar figures: Volume of image = Volume of object × (Scale factor)3 Volume of object = Volume of image ÷ (Scale factor)3 × (Scale factor)3

Volume of object

Volume of image

÷ (Scale factor)3 The same formulas apply to capacity, as capacity is also a measure of space occupied by a three-dimensional object.

Example 3 The two rectangular prisms shown in the diagram are similar: V = x cm3 V = 11 cm3

8 cm 2 cm

Determine the value of x.

Create a strategy Let the smaller rectangular prism be the object and the larger rectangular prism the image. Calculate the scale factor, then multiply the volume of the smaller rectangular prism by the scale factor cubed.

Apply the idea To calculate the scale factor: Image length Scale factor = Write the scale factor formula Object length 8 = Substitute the corresponding lengths of the 2 object and image =4

Evaluate

To calculate the volume: Volume of image = Volume of object × (Scale factor)3 Write the formula for the Volume of image = 11 × 43

Substitute the values 3

= 704 cm

894

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

Evaluate


Example 4 Spheres are always similar since they have only one defining measurement (the radius). Two spheres have volumes of 40 cm2 and 625 cm3. Determine the scale factor between the two spheres.

Create a strategy Determine the volume scale factor, then take the cube root.

Apply the idea To calculate the volume scale factor, divide the volume of the image by the volume of object: 625 Volume scale factor Determine the ratio of the volumes 40 = 15.625

Evaluate

To calculate the length scale factor, take the cube root of the volume scale factor: Scale factor 3 15.625 = 2.5

Write the equation Evaluate

Example 5 Two cylindrical water tanks are similar in shape, with one being an enlargement of the other. The smaller tank has a height of 1.5 metres and a capacity of 400 litres. The larger tank has a height of 2 metres. Calculate the capacity of the larger tank, rounded to two decimal places.

Create a strategy Calculate the scale factor using the two corresponding side lengths, then use the formula: Volume of image = Volume of object × (Scale factor)3

Apply the idea The smaller tank can be defined as the object and the larger tank as the image. To calculate the scale factor: Image length Write the scale factor formula Object length 2 = Substitute the corresponding lengths of the 1.5 object and image 4 = Evaluate 3 To calculate the capacity of the larger tank: Scale factor =

Volume of image = Volume of object × (Scale factor)3 Write the formula for the Volume of image = 400 L = 948.15 L

4 3

3

Substitute the values Evaluate and round

10.12 Area and volume in similar figures mathspace.co

895


Idea summary The ratio of volumes or capacity in similar objects is equal to the cube of the scale factor. These formulas can be applied to calculate the volume or capacity of similar figures: Volume of image = Volume of object × (Scale factor)3 Volume of object = Volume of image ÷ (Scale factor)3 × (Scale factor)3

Volume of object

Volume of image

÷ (Scale factor)3

10.12 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

The corresponding sides of two similar figures are in the ratio 7 : 3: a b

2

3

Determine the length scale factor from the left figure to the right figure.

7 cm 20 cm

28 cm

Determine the area scale factor from the left figure to the right figure.

6 cm

12 cm 21 cm

9 cm

A rectangular prism has dimensions of 2 cm, 4 cm, and 5 cm: a

Calculate the surface area of the prism.

b

If the prism is scaled up by a factor of 3, give the dimensions of the enlarged prism.

c

Calculate the surface area of the enlarged prism.

d

By what factor has the surface area increased by?

e

If a three-dimensional shape is enlarged with a scale factor of k, by what factor will the surface area increase by?

Consider the two similar trapezoidal prisms shown: a

Determine the length scale factor from the smaller prism to the larger prism.

b

Determine the volume scale factor from the smaller prism to the larger prism. 20 cm

896

3 cm

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

5 cm


4

Consider the two rectangular prisms: a

Are the two rectangular prisms similar?

b

Determine the length scale factor.

c

2.3 cm 1.9 cm 5.1 cm

Determine the volume scale factor.

3.22 cm 2.66 cm 7.14 cm 5

Determine if each statement is true or false? a

Volume calculations involve the multiplication of four lengths.

b

If the side lengths of a shape are multiplied by a scale factor, the volume of that shape will be multiplied by that scale factor three times.

c

The ratio of volumes in similar objects is equal to the cube root of the scale factor.

Practice Ex 1

6

Determine the value of x in each figure: a

x cm2

b x cm2

675 cm2

126 cm2

9 cm

14 cm

7 cm

45 cm c

531 cm2 236 cm2 x cm

d 65 cm2 8 cm

8 cm 19.5 cm2

7

x cm

A triangle has side lengths of 7 cm, 10 cm, and 16 cm. A similar triangle has an area that is 16 times the area of the first triangle. a

Determine the length scale factor between the two triangles.

b

Determine the side lengths of the second triangle.

c

Describe the relationship between the perimeters of the two triangles.

10.12 Area and volume in similar figures mathspace.co

897


Ex 2

8

Two pentagonal prisms are similar. The areas of their cross-sectional faces are given: a

Calculate the surface area scale factor from Figure I to Figure II.

b

Identify the length scale factor from Figure I to Figure II.

c

Calculate the height of Figure II, if Figure I is 13 mm high.

A = 196 mm2 A = 49 mm2

Figure II

Figure I 9

Ex 3

A rectangular billboard has a length of 1.2 m. The corresponding length on the designer’s computer screen is 20 cm: a

Determine the length enlargement factor.

b

Determine the area enlargement factor.

c

Determine the area of the computer screen image of the billboard, if the area of the actual board is 86.4 m2.

10

A square has a side length of 8 cm. Another square is created by scaling it up by a factor of 7. Determine the area of the larger square.

11

Determine the value of x for each pair of similar objects: a

V = 20 cm3

b

3 cm 3.5 m 1.4 m

V = x cm3 V = 62.5 m3

12 cm

c

V = x mm3 V = 36 mm3

4 cm

V = x m3

d V = x cm3 3 cm

4 mm V = 405 cm3 9 cm

898

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


12

The two solids are similar. If the volume of the smaller solid is 193.7 cm3 and the volume of the second is 24 212.5 cm3, determine the value of x.

41 cm x cm

V = 24 212.5 cm3

V = 193.7 cm3 Ex 4

13

Consider the two similar spheres shown. The smaller sphere has radius 3 cm while the larger sphere has a radius of 12 cm: a

Determine the exact volume of Sphere A.

b

Determine the exact volume of Sphere B.

c

Determine the ratio of the volume of Sphere A to Sphere B.

d

14

Sphere B Sphere A 12 cm

3 cm

If the matching dimensions of two similar figures are in the ratio m : n, what ratio are their volumes in?

Two similar cylinders have volumes of 5760 cm3 and 90 cm3: a

Determine the scale factor of the height of the larger cylinder to the height of the smaller cylinder.

b

Determine the value of h.

h cm 20 cm V = 5760 cm3

Ex 5

15

16

V = 90 cm3

Two rectangular storage boxes are similar in shape. The smaller box has a length of 50 cm and a capacity of 30 L. The larger box has a length of 100 cm: a

What is the scale factor between the lengths of the two boxes?

b

Using this scale factor, calculate the capacity of the larger box.

A beehive consists of hexagonal prisms each with side length of 3.2 mm and depth of 3.8 mm. A plastic container is built which is modelled on these hexagonal prisms, and has a side length of 6.4 cm: a

Determine the ratio of the side length of the hexagonal prisms in the beehive to the side length of the plastic container.

b

Determine the ratio of the volume of the hexagonal prisms in the beehive to the volume of the modelled plastic container.

10.12 Area and volume in similar figures mathspace.co

899


17

Two similar cones have bases with radius 7 cm and 28 cm respectively: a

Determine the scale factor of the height of the smaller cone to the height of the larger cone.

b

Determine the scale factor of the volume of the smaller cone to the volume of the larger cone.

c

Calculate the volume of the larger cone, if the volume of the smaller cone is 852 cm3.

18

Two similar prisms have volumes of 24 cm3 and 3000 cm3. Determine the length scale factor between the two prisms.

19

Consider two similar ceilings: the first with dimensions 5 m by 4 m, and the second with dimensions 20 m by 16 m:

20

a

The smaller ceiling took 1.5 L of paint to cover it. How many litres of paint would be required to paint the second ceiling?

b

Describe why the amount of paint needed for the second ceiling is not simply four times the amount needed for the first ceiling.

A model of the Eiffel tower with the ratio 1 : 12 960 is made. a

The height of the Eiffel tower is 324 m. Determine the height of the model in centimetres.

b

The model requires 15 mL of paint to cover its entire surface area. How much paint, in litres, would be required to cover the entire surface area of the real Eiffel tower?

Extend your thinking 21

22

Consider the formula A = pr2. a

If the value of r was tripled, what effect would this have on the value of A?

b

If r was divided by 4, what effect would this have on the value of A?

A marine biologist is studying two similar hexagonal coral reefs. The larger reef has a side length of 50 m and an area of 6495.19 m2. The smaller reef has a side length of 30 m. If the larger reef supports 10 000 marine species, estimate the number of species the smaller reef supports.

23

The Dominican Republic is shown on the map: According to the scale given, estimate the actual area of the Dominican Republic. Dominican Republic Santo Domingo 0 40 80 km

900

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


24

The radii of two spherical balloons are 12 cm and 6 cm, respectively. Determine the ratio of their volumes, if half the air is released from the smaller balloon.

25

Basili’s old esky has a capacity of 20 L. Basili wants a new one with a capacity of 160 L, so he plans to buy one with dimensions 8 times the old one’s dimensions. Explain why Basili does not need to buy such a large esky.

26

Prism A and Prism B are mathematically similar:

25 cm2

10 cm

8 cm Prism A

24 cm Prism B

Prism A has a cross-sectional area of 25 cm2. Determine the volume of Prism B. 27

Jeremy bought a toy dinosaur that grows when placed in water. The packaging claims the toy dinosaur “grows 20 times larger”. Before placing the toy in water, the height of the dinosaur was 3 cm tall. After placing the toy in water, it grew to a similarly shaped toy that was 8 cm tall. Is the claim on the packaging reasonable?

Chapter 10 review

Online review

mathspace.co

10.12 Area and volume in similar figures mathspace.co

901


Big ideas • Trigonometric ratios provide a fundamental framework for relating angles and side lengths, enabling the calculation of unknown dimensions in right-angled triangles within both two and three-dimensional contexts. • The sine and cosine rules extend the application of trigonometry beyond right-angled triangles, providing the tools to solve for unknown sides and angles in any triangle. • The trigonometric area formula completes the toolkit for analysing any triangle, enabling the resolution of complex, multi-step problems involving sides, angles, and area.

11 Applications of trigonometry Chapter outline 11.01 11.02 11.03 11.04 11.05 11.06 11.07 11.08

Trigonometric ratios 2D Applications of trigonometry Trigonometry in 3D Trigonometry of obtuse angles Sine rule Cosine rule Area of non-right angled triangles Mixed applications Investigation: Triangle inequality Chapter 11 review

904 920 933 944 950 966 977 990


Did you know? Trigonometry is used in architecture to design structures that withstand forces like wind and earthquakes.


11.01

Trigonometric ratios

After this lesson, you will be able to… • define the trigonometric ratios sine, cosine, and tangent. • calculate unknown sides and angles in right-angled triangles. • select appropriate trigonometric ratios for different problems.

Trigonometric ratios The three primary trigonometric ratios are: Opposite    cosine (θ ) Hypotenuse

sine (θ )

Adjacent Hypotenuse

tangent (θ ) =

Opposite Adjacent

The ratios are often abbreviated to sin ( )

O cos ( ) H

A H

tan ( )

O A

where H is the hypotenuse, O is the opposite side, and A is the adjacent side. Note that sine, cosine, and tangent are commonly abbreviated sin, cos, and tan.

H

O

A helpful technique to remember these ratios is to use the mnemonic SOH-CAH-TOA.

θ A

Interactive exploration

Discover this concept in action online

mathspace.co

For any acute angle θ in a right-angled triangle, sin (θ ) and cos (θ ) can take on values between 0 and 1, inclusive. While tan (θ ) can take on any positive real number, it is not defined for θ = 90°.

904

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 1 Determine the expressions for the sine, cosine and tangent ratios for the angle θ. A 25

B

24

θ 7 C

Create a strategy Label the triangle with the hypotenuse, opposite and adjacent sides. Identify the ratios.

Apply the idea A

Hypotenuse B

Opposite 24

θ

7 Adjacent

With respect to the given angle θ, the opposite side is AC, the adjacent side is BC, and the hypotenuse is AB.

25

That is O = 24, A = 7 and H = 25. C sin (θ ) =

O H

Use the sine ratio

=

24 25

Substitute the values

cos (θ ) =

A H

Use the cosine ratio

=

7 25

Substitute the values

tan (θ ) =

O A

Use the tangent ratio

=

24 7

Substitute the values

Reflect and check Note that it is standard in trigonometry to leave fractions as simplified improper fractions.

11.01 Trigonometric ratios mathspace.co

905


Idea summary For a right-angled triangle, the trigonometric ratios are given by:

Opposite

C

Hypotenuse

θ A

Adjacent

B

sin (θ ) =

Opposite Hypotenuse

cos (θ ) =

Adjacent Hypotenuse

tan (θ ) =

Opposite Adjacent

A helpful technique to remember these ratios is to use the mnemonic SOH-CAH-TOA.

Find the unknown side

Hypotenuse

Trigonometric ratios for a right-angled triangle:

Opposite

C

θ A

Adjacent

sin (θ ) =

Opposite Hypotenuse

cos (θ ) =

Adjacent Hypotenuse

tan (θ ) =

Opposite Adjacent

B

To determine an unknown side in a right-angled triangle: 1. Label the sides of the triangle as hypotenuse, opposite, and adjacent. 2. Select the appropriate trigonometric ratio based on the known side and the required side: • Sine: Opposite and hypotenuse • Cosine: Adjacent and hypotenuse • Tangent: Opposite and adjacent 3. Substitute the values into the chosen ratio. 4. Solve for the unknown side. Make sure that the device is in degrees mode.

906

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 2 Determine the value of f, rounded to three significant figures. f 53°

12

Create a strategy Identify the correct trigonometric ratio by labelling the known side and the required side. Substitute the values into the ratio and solve for the required side.

Apply the idea f Adjacent 53° 12 Hypotenuse

Opposite

The known side, 12, is the hypotenuse and the required side, f, is the adjacent side. Therefore, use the cosine ratio.

Adjacent Hypotenuse f cos (53°) = 12 cos (θ ) =

12 cos (53°) = f

Write the cosine ratio Substitute Adjacent = f , Hypotenuse = 12 and θ = 53° Multiply both sides by 12

f ≈ 7.22 Evaluate and round

11.01 Trigonometric ratios mathspace.co

907


Example 3 Determine the value of h, rounded to two decimal places.

21°

hm

16 m

Create a strategy Identify the correct trigonometric ratio by labelling the known side and the required side. Substitute the values into the ratio and solve for the required side.

Apply the idea The known side, 16 m, is the opposite side and the required side, h, is the hypotenuse. Therefore, using the sine ratio: Opposite Hypotenuse 16 sin (21°) = h sin (θ ) =

h sin (21°) = 16 h=

16 sin (21° )

= 44.65 m

Write the sine ratio Substitute Opposite = 16, Hypotenuse = h and θ = 21° Multiply both sides by h Divide both sides by sin (21°) Evaluate

Idea summary To determine an unknown side in a right-angled triangle: 1. Label the sides of the triangle as hypotenuse, opposite and adjacent. 2. Select the appropriate trigonometric ratio based on the known side and the required side: • Sine: Opposite and hypotenuse • Cosine: Adjacent and hypotenuse • Tangent: Opposite and adjacent 3. Substitute the values into the appropriate trigonometric ratio. 4. Solve for the unknown side.

908

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Use trigonometric ratios to find angles If two sides of a right-angled triangle are known, it is possible to calculate the measure of its acute angles. Inverse trigonometric ratios Operations which “undo” the primary trigonometric ratios. The input is a ratio and the output is an angle measure. For a given angle θ : sin (θ )

Opposite    cos (θ ) Hypotenuse

Adjacent Hypotenuse

tan (θ ) =

Opposite Adjacent

So the three inverse trigonometric functions are: sin 1

Opposite Hypotenuse

cos 1

Adjacent Hypotenuse

tan 1

Opposite Adjacent

As these inverse functions “undo” the original functions, this means: sin– 1 (sin (θ )) = θ  cos– 1 (cos (θ )) = θ  tan– 1 (tan (θ )) = θ Technology is used to evaluate expressions involving inverse trigonometric functions. When evaluating inverse trigonometric functions, make sure the device is in degrees mode. While the inverse trigonometric functions can be represented using an index of – 1, they are not 1 reciprocals of the original functions. Note that sin– ¹ (x) does not mean , where x is a ratio. The sin (x) inverse trigonometric function buttons must be used on the device. To determine an unknown angle: 1. Label the known sides as opposite, adjacent or hypotenuse. 2. Write an equation using the appropriate trigonometric ratio that relates to the unknown angle and the two known sides. 3. Solve for the angle using the inverse trigonometric function.

Example 4 If cos (θ ) = 0.256, determine θ, rounded to the nearest degree.

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Use the inverse cosine to find the angle θ.

cos (θ ) = 0.256 Write the equation

θ = cos– 1 (0.256) Use the inverse cosine to solve for θ = 75°

Evaluate and round

Reflect and check This can be verified by evaluating cos (75°). Using technology, cos (75°) ≈ 0.258819. . .— slightly different due to rounding — but it confirms that the angle is correct.

11.01 Trigonometric ratios mathspace.co

909


Example 5 Calculate the value of θ, rounded to the nearest degree. A

10

8

θ

C

B

Create a strategy Label the sides of the triangle, then apply the appropriate trigonometric ratio to find the angle.

Apply the idea With respect to the given angle θ, the side AC = 8 is the opposite side, and the side AB = 10 is the hypotenuse. Therefore, the sine ratio should be used. Opposite Hypotenuse 8 sin (θ ) = 10 8 sin– 1 (sin (θ )) = sin 1 10 θ = 53° sin (θ ) =

Write the sine ratio Substitute Opposite = 8 and Hypotenuse = 10 Use the inverse sine to solve for θ Evaluate and round

Reflect and check Verify the reasonableness of the answer by checking the length of the side opposite the calculated angle. In a right-angled triangle, the longest side is always opposite the right angle, while the shortest side is opposite the smallest angle (which is less than 45°). Using Pythagoras’ theorem, it can be determined that side BC measures 6 cm, indicating that angle BAC is the smallest angle (less than 45°). Therefore, the calculated angle of 53° is appropriate given its position in the triangle.

910

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Idea summary Use inverse trigonometric ratios to find an unknown angle in a right-angled triangle: 1. Label the known sides as opposite, adjacent or hypotenuse. 2. Write an equation using the appropriate trigonometric ratio that relates to the unknown angle and the two known sides. 3. Solve for the angle using the inverse trigonometric function.

11.01 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

For each triangle, identify the following sides: i

Hypotenuse

a

ii

Opposite

iii

Adjacent

b Y

Z

X

Z

θ

θ

Y X

2

3

4

Fill in the blanks for these trigonometric ratios: O a sin (θ ) = b cos (θ ) = H

c

Evaluate each expression, rounded to two decimal places: sin (71°) a 9 sin (63°) b 8 tan (28°) c 7

⬚ (θ ) =

d

O A

cos (7 °) 9

Determine the value of each expression, rounded to the nearest degree: a

cos– 1 (0.6484)

b

tan– 1 (8.1519)

c

sin– 1 (0.8176)

d

cos– 1 (0.7035)

11.01 Trigonometric ratios mathspace.co

911


Practice 5

Identify the trigonometric ratio that relates the given sides and the angle θ : a

b

A

24 48

θ

θ B

12 c

9

C

14

d

θ

θ 9 31

12

6 Ex 1

Identify the trigonometric ratios for each triangle: i

sin (θ )

ii

cos (θ )

a

A

tan (θ )

iii b

A

5

61 11

4

θ

θ

B c

B

C

60

A

d

θ

C

16 B

912

24

B

C

34

30

3

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

40

32

θ A

C


7

a

15 : 8 Determine which angle is represented by (θ ).

b

Determine cos (θ ).

c

Determine sin (θ ).

B

For the triangle shown, tan ( )

C 8

a

4 for the triangle shown: 5 Determine which angle is represented by (θ ).

b

Determine the value of x.

c

Use the value found in part (b) to determine cos (θ ) and tan (θ ).

15

8

A

Given sin (θ ) =

B

5

C 9

17

4

A

x

Using the diagram: T 56.64 m

57 m

H 28.32 m 19 m B

42 m

C

A 21 m

a

Using the triangle created by the building, express the ratio of the opposite side to the adjacent side of ∠TAB.

b

The tree has a height of 19 metres. For the smaller triangle created by the tree, express the ratio of the opposite side to the adjacent side of ∠HAC.

c

Using the triangle created by the tree, express the ratio of the adjacent side to the hypotenuse for ∠HAC.

d

Using the triangle created by the building, express the ratio of the opposite side to the hypotenuse for ∠TAB.

11.01 Trigonometric ratios mathspace.co

913


10

Ex 2

11

Using the diagram:

B

a

Determine sin (θ ).

b

Determine cos (α).

c

Is the value of the ratio for sin (θ ) and cos (α) the same?

d

Is the answer to part (c) true for all right-angled triangles? Explain your answer.

5

θ

α 4 3 C

Determine the value of the variable, rounded to two decimal places: a

a mm

b

37 cm

65° 15 mm

f cm 25°

c

d

35° x cm b mm

45° 2 cm

15 mm Ex 3

12

Determine the value of the variable in each triangle, rounded to two decimal places: a

f mm

b

x ft 56° 25°

914

11 mm

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

11 ft

A


c

d

43 in

33° 6 cm

y cm

x in

32°

13

a

Determine the value of a, rounded to the nearest centimetre.

b

What methods can be used to calculate a?

12 cm

44°

16.68 cm a cm

14

Determine the value of the variable, rounded to four significant figures: a

54°

b

16 cm 42°

26 mm

f cm h mm 15

Solve for all missing sides and angles. Round your answers to the nearest integer value. a

b

2300 m

29° 14 cm

55°

cm a cm

θ

am

θ b cm

11.01 Trigonometric ratios mathspace.co

915


16

Allan’s home is located at point A, and Allan is standing at point B.

A

2313 m

If d is the distance between Allan and his home, determine the value of d, rounded to six significant figures.

55°

d

B Ex 4

17

Determine θ, rounded to the nearest degree: a

18

sin (θ ) = 0.5

tan (θ ) = 1

b

c

tan (θ ) = 2.2

d

sin (θ ) =

43 47

For each right-angled triangle: i

Determine whether sine, cosine or tangent relates the given angle and sides.

ii

Write the trigonometric ratio.

iii

Solve for the angle, rounded to the nearest degree.

a

b

θ

6 19 14

13

θ c

d 7.5 17.7

26

Ex 5

19

θ

θ

34

Determine the value of each variable, rounded to the nearest degree: a

A

b 23 in

7 C 25

x° B

916

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

18 in

x°


c

d

A

10

C

12

8

x° B e

C

x°

A f

A

B

5 8 3

θ

26

12

x° B 20

10

C

The person in the figure sights a drone above him: If the person is looking up at an angle of θ above horizontal, determine θ, rounded to four significant figures.

17 m θ

12 m

21

Consider this isosceles triangle that has equal side lengths of 10 cm and a base of 8 cm:

10 cm

10 cm

A°

A° 8 cm

a

Calculate the size of angle A°, rounded to one decimal place.

b

Explain why the cosine function is the most appropriate choice in this case.

11.01 Trigonometric ratios mathspace.co

917


22

Determine the size of the angles x, y and z, rounded to two decimal places.

y

10

15

z x 30

Extend your thinking 23

Given cos (θ ) = a

24

30 for some right-angled triangle: 34

Determine sin (θ ).

Determine tan (θ ).

b

Using the diagram shown, show that: sin ( ) cos ( )

A

α

tan ( ) 13

B

25

θ 5

12

C

Consider the given figure: I H E D

F G

C

θ A

B

The area of the square FEIH is 100 m2. If DE = 8 m and ABCDFG is a regular hexagon, determine sin (θ ).

918

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


26

Given the value of tan (θ ), determine the value of b in each diagram. Round your answers to one decimal place if necessary. 2 a tan (θ ) = 0.4 b tan (θ ) = 3 θ b cm bm 21.32 cm

θ

7.9 cm

27

12 m

A safety fence is constructed to protect tourists from the danger of a 9-metre tall eroding castle toppling down. A surveyor measures the angle to the top of the castle from a distance, finding it to be 10°. She then walks toward the fence and takes a second measurement, which shows the angle to the top of the tower as 22°.

9m 10°

22°

Calculate the distance she walked between the two measurements, rounded to the nearest metre.

Did you know?

Tools that measure mountain heights and plan safe climbing routes use trigonometry! Also, when rescue teams plan helicopter landings in tough terrain trigonometry is involved, from Global Positioning Systems (GPS) to descent path calculations. Trigonometry makes it possible to navigate and respond safely in high-risk environments!

11.01 Trigonometric ratios mathspace.co

919


11.02   2D Applications of trigonometry After this lesson, you will be able to… • solve practical problems involving angles of elevation and depression. • use trigonometric ratios to find distances and heights. • apply bearings to solve navigation problems.

Angles of elevation and depression Angle of elevation The angle formed between the horizontal line at the observer’s position and the line of sight to an object above the horizontal.

B The angle of elevation from point A to B is the angle between the horizontal line at A and the line connecting the two points.

θ A Angle of depression

The angle formed between the horizontal line at the observer’s position and the line of sight to an object below the horizontal. B

θ

The angle of depression from point B to A is the angle between the horizontal line at B and the line connecting the two points. A

Both angles are measured with respect to the horizontal. B

θ θ A

920

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

Notice that the angle of elevation between two points will always be equal to the angle of depression between those two points. This is because they are alternate angles on parallel lines (since all horizontal planes are parallel to each other).


In practical problems with angles of elevation and depression, there are three distances between two objects: horizontal distance, vertical distance and direct distance. These will represent the adjacent, opposite and hypotenuse sides of a right-angled triangle, respectively.

ect

Vertical

Horizontal

B

Dir

dis

θ Dir

tan

ect

ce

θ Horizontal

A

dis

tan

Vertical

B

ce

A

When given two of the three sides, the last one can be found using the Pythagoras’ theorem. Pythagoras’ theorem The relationship between the side lengths of a right-angled triangle. The square of the hypotenuse of a right-angled triangle equals the sum of the squares of the lengths of the other two sides.

a2 + b2 = c2 a, b are the lengths of the shorter sides c is the length of the hypotenuse

Example 1 From the top of a rocky ledge 188 m high, the angle of depression to a boat is 13°. If the boat is d m from the foot of the cliff, determine d, rounded to five significant figures.

Create a strategy Draw a diagram to determine the trigonometric ratio that can be used.

Apply the idea Illustrating the situation gives this diagram. 13°

The angle opposite to 188 is the alternate angle of the angle of depression 13°; that means the opposite angle is 13°. Since the opposite side 188 and adjacent side d are given, the Opposite ratio tan (θ ) = , where θ = 13° can be used. Adjacent Opposite Adjacent 188 tan (13°) = d d tan (13°) = 188 188 d= tan (13°) d = 814.32 tan (θ ) =

188 13° d

Write the tangent ratio O 188 d A Multiply both sides by d Substitute θ = 13°,

Divide both sides by tan (13°) Evaluate and round

The boat is 814.32 m from the foot of the cliff.

11.02 2D Applications of trigonometry mathspace.co

921


Idea summary rigonometric ratios can be used to determine T the angles of elevation or angles of depression in practical problems.

Angle of elevation

Additionally, the angles of elevation and depression with one given length can be used to determine the length of an unknown side.

Horizontal Angle of depression

True bearings Bearings are a measure of direction, expressed as an angle in degrees, measured clockwise from the north direction (0°) to a line or point of interest. They are typically used in navigation and geometry to describe the orientation of one location relative to another. A true bearing is: • Measured from north (N) • Measured in a clockwise direction • Written using three figures T is often, but not always, used to describe a true bearing. If the angle measure is less than 100°, such as 40°, it would be written as 040° or 040°T. To use true bearings to describe the location of a point B from some point A: • Place the centre of a compass on the starting point. • Starting at north, measure the angle of the line AB. • Write the angle as the true bearing of point B. North

West

A

127° East B

South

922

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

The true bearing of B from A is 127° or 127°T.


Example 2 Determine the true bearing of point A from point O: a N A

35° O

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Measure the bearing clockwise from north, and write it using three digits.

The angle between the north direction and the line OA measured clockwise is 35°. So, the true bearing is 035°T.

b N A 42° O

Create a strategy

Apply the idea

Subtract the given angle from 360°, as the true bearing is measured clockwise from north.

The angle between the north direction and the line OA measured clockwise is 360° – 42° = 318°. So, the true bearing is 318°T.

11.02 2D Applications of trigonometry mathspace.co

923


Idea summary Bearings are a measure of direction, expressed as an angle in degrees, measured clockwise from north. A true bearing is: • Measured from north (N) • Measured in a clockwise direction • Written using three figures

Compass bearings In surveying and navigation, bearings are used to help identify the location of an object. The four main directions of a compass are known as cardinal directions. They are north (N), east (E), south (S) and west (W).

N NW

NE

NNE

NNW

WNW

ENE

W

E ESE

WSW SW

SSE

SSW

SE

In between each of these cardinal directions are intermediate directions of northeast (NE), southeast (SE), southwest (SW), and northwest (NW) that are 45° from the two cardinal directions closest. There are smaller divisions shown on the compass as well.

S

A compass bearing describes the location of a point using: • The starting direction of either north or south • The acute angle needed to rotate • The direction to rotate, east or west Starting direction

Direction of rotation

N

E

S

W Angle rotated by

North

West

A

East 53°

B

South

924

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

To describe the position of point B from A, the description would be: “Starting at south, then rotate 53° towards east.” Mathematically, this is written as S 53°E.


Compass and true bearings are widely used in navigation and surveying, including search and rescue, mining and tunnel engineering. To solve problems involving bearings: • Draw a diagram, if one is not provided. • Label lengths and angles carefully. For true bearings, ensure that the point from which the angle is measured is positioned at the centre of a compass (with north pointing upwards). • Apply right-angle trigonometry (SOH-CAH-TOA) or non-right-angle trigonometry (sine rule or cosine rule) to solve for unknown lengths or angles. Apply area formulas to calculate the area bounded by given lengths.

Interactive exploration

Discover this concept in action online

mathspace.co

Example 3 Consider this compass shown: N A

35° O

Determine the compass bearing of point A from O.

Create a strategy First, consider whether point A is closer to the north or south directions. Then, write the angle measure shown in the figure.

Apply the idea Since A is closer to north, the rotation starts at north and moves towards the east direction. So, the letters that should be written are N ⬚ E. Then, adding the given angle:

N 35°E

11.02 2D Applications of trigonometry mathspace.co

925


Example 4 A hiker H is located 50 kilometres from P, on a true bearing of 021°T: N x y

021°

H

50 km

P

The position of the hiker can also be given by its (x, y) coordinates. Determine the hiker’s coordinates, rounded to one decimal place.

Create a strategy Identify the sides and angles of the right triangle formed by the hiker, then select the sine and cosine ratios based on the distance and bearing to calculate the hiker’s east (x) and north (y) coordinates, respectively.

Apply the idea The hypotenuse of 50 km is given, the unknown length, x, is opposite the angle of 21°. sin (θ ) =

Opposite Hypotenuse

x 50 50 × sin (21°) = x sin (21°) =

x = 17.9

Write the sine ratio Substitute θ = 21° and

x O H 50

Multiply both sides by 50 Evaluate and round

The hypotenuse of 50 km is given, the unknown length, y, is adjacent to the angle of 21°. cos (θ ) =

Adjacent Hypotenuse

y 50 50 × cos (21°) = y cos (21°) =

y = 46.7

Write the cosine ratio Substitute θ = 21° and

Multiply both sides by 50 Evaluate and round

The hiker’s coordinates are (17.9, 46.7).

926

y A 50 H

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Idea summary Starting direction

Direction of rotation

N

E

S

W Angle rotated by

A compass bearing describes the location of a point using: • The starting direction of either north or south • The acute angle needed to rotate • The direction to rotate, east or west

11.02 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

Determine whether each statement is true or false based on the given diagram: a

The angle of elevation from W to Y is θ.

b

The angle of depression from Y to W is α.

c

The angle of depression from Y to W is equal in magnitude to the angle of elevation from W to Y.

Y

Z σ

α

θ W 2

X

Using the given diagram: B

D

α σ

θ A

C

a

Identify the angle of depression from B to C.

b

Which angle in the diagram is the same size as the angle of depression from B to C?

11.02 2D Applications of trigonometry mathspace.co

927


3

Complete the blanks with the direction:

N NW

NE

W

E

SW

SE S

4

What is the equivalent true bearing for these compass bearings? a

East

b

Northwest

c

West-Northwest

d

East-Southeast

e

Northeast

f

Southeast

Practice 5

Let x be the angle of elevation from point Z to point X. a

Determine x, rounded to two decimal places.

b

Determine y, rounded to two decimal places.

X

10 y x 16 6

Z

A person sights a helicopter in the air, as shown in the diagram: Determine θ, the angle of elevation from his eye level to the helicopter, rounded to four significant figures.

150 m

θ 115 m

928

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


7

The final approach of an aeroplane when landing requires the pilot to adjust the angle of depression to 4°, as shown in this diagram:

4° 18 m

d m If the plane is 18 m above runway, determine d, the horizontal distance between the plane and the runway, rounded to the nearest metre. Ex 1

8

9

Alice is hiking in a mountainous region and spots a tall watchtower on a hill. The base of the hill is 500 m away from Alice’s position. The angle of elevation from Alice to the top of the watchtower is 40°. a

If the top of the watchtower is y metres above Alice’s position, calculate y, rounded to the nearest metre.

b

Given that the watchtower is 50 metres tall, determine the height of the hill that the watchtower is built on, rounded to the nearest metre.

An aeroplane is located 200 m away from its landing pad and x m above the ground. The angle of depression to the landing pad is 28°. a

Create an illustration showing the distance of the aeroplane from the landing pad, angle of depression and height above the ground.

b

Determine x, the height of the aeroplane above the ground, rounded to the nearest metre.

10

At a particular time in the afternoon, a 7 m flagpole casts a shadow of 6.3 m. Determine θ, the angle of elevation of the sun at that moment, rounded to four significant figures.

11

A ramp of length 280 cm must ascend at an angle less than 20° to ensure safe usage: 280 cm

a

If the height of the ramp is 140 cm, determine the angle of elevation of the ramp, rounded to two decimal places.

b

If the height of the ramp is 95 cm, determine the angle of elevation of the ramp, rounded to two decimal places.

c

If the height of the ramp is 25 cm, determine the angle of elevation of the ramp, rounded to two decimal places.

d

At which height(s) is the ramp safe?

11.02 2D Applications of trigonometry mathspace.co

929


12

A man stands at point A looking at the top of two poles. Pole 1 has a height of 9 m and an angle of elevation of 29° from point A. Pole 2 has a height of 28 m and an angle of elevation of 52° from point A. a

Determine x, the distance from A to B, rounded to two decimal places.

b

Determine y, the distance from A to C, rounded to two decimal places.

c

13

Ex 2

Pole 1 A

B y

Determine BC, the distance between the two poles in metres. Round your answer to one decimal place.

Determine the direct distance between the two kites, rounded to the nearest metre.

Determine the true bearing of point A from O: a

N

b

N A

A 45°

50° O

O

c

N

d

N

A

36° O

O 5° A

930

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

28 m

9m

x

Two kites are flying in the air, each held by a person standing at different locations on the ground. The distance between the two people on the ground is 50 m. One person measures the angle of elevation to the other person’s kite as 54.46°, and the other person measures the angle of elevation to the first person’s kite as 38.66°. 54.46° a Calculate the difference in height between the two 38.66° 50 m kites, rounded to the nearest metre. b

14

Pole 2

C


15 Ex 3

Determine the compass bearing of P from point O: a

N

b

N P 30°

W P

65°

W

E

O

O

S c

E

S

N

d

N P

P W

30° O

E

40°

W

O

E

S

S 16

A ship departs on a bearing of 150°T. After travelling for a while, it needs to reverse direction and return to its starting point. What true bearing must it follow to reach its original location?

17

Determine the true bearing of the Park from the City, rounded to the nearest degree. N 4.5 km

Park

3.1 km O City

11.02 2D Applications of trigonometry mathspace.co

931


18

Sarah travelled for 134 km on a bearing of 215°.

N

Calculate w, the distance in kilometres she has sailed west from her starting point, rounded to one decimal place. w 215° 134 km

19

Shortly after departure, an aircraft is 35 km south and 48 km west of the airport in Melbourne that it departed from. a

Determine the size of the angle marked b, rounded to one decimal place.

b

Determine the compass bearing of the plane from the airport.

c

Determine the true bearing of the plane from the airport.

N

Aircraft Ex 4

20

Calculate the ship’s x-coordinate, rounded to one decimal place.

b

Calculate the ship’s y-coordinate, rounded to one decimal place.

Melbourne

b°

35 km

48 km

The location of a boat B is described as 30 km away from A, on a true bearing of 035°T. The position of the boat can also be represented by its (x, y) coordinates. a

O

N x

B

y 035º 30 km A

Extend your thinking 21

Marcus is standing at point P and observes two poles, AB and CD, of different heights. P, B, and D are on horizontal ground:

A

C

From P, the angles of elevation to the top of the poles at A and C are 35° and 22°, respectively. Marcus is 14 m from the base of pole AB. The height of pole CD is 10 m. a

932

Calculate the distance from Marcus to the top of pole CD, rounded to two decimal places.

10 m B 14 m

b

Calculate the distance from Marcus to the top of pole AB, rounded to two decimal places.

c

Determine the direct distance between the base of the two poles if ∠BPD is 90°. Round your answer to the nearest metre.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

22˚

35˚ P

D


22

An air traffic controller is communicating with a plane, which is flying at an angle of elevation of θ ° from the control tower. The plane is 8200 m above the ground and is 19 600 m from the runway. Karen claims that the angle of depression that the pilot should fly is equal to 90° – θ °. Explain why Karen is incorrect and correctly calculate the angle of depression that must be flown. The angle of elevation of the sun, which causes a tree’s shadow to measure 12 m, is 50°:

23

24

a

What happens to the length of the shadow when the angle of elevation of the sun is low, such as early in the morning and late in the afternoon?

b

What happens to the length of the shadow when the sun is directly overhead?

c

Determine tan (90°) using technology. How does this relate to your answer to part (b)?

Jamie and Alex are standing on the same side of a 10 m wide river bank and notice a large tree on the opposite side. Jamie is standing directly opposite the tree and measures the angle of elevation to the top of the tree as 35°. Alex, who is standing further along the river, measures the angle of elevation as 20°. a

Determine h, the height of the tree, rounded to two decimal places.

b

Determine the distance between Jamie and Alex, rounded to two decimal places.

11.03

h 50˚ 12 m

h 35˚ 10

20˚

Jamie Alex

Trigonometry in 3D

After this lesson, you will be able to… • apply trigonometric ratios or Pythagoras’ theorem to find lengths and angles in three dimensions. • solve practical problems involving 3D structures.

Pythagoras in 3D Right-angled triangles in 3-dimensional (3D) space can be identified, as in 2-dimensional (2D) space, by locating a right angle. In 3D space, right angles occur between lines that are perpendicular in the same 2D plane. In other words, if two lines meet at a right angle in a 2D slice, the triangle formed with these two lines is a right-angled triangle.

11.03 Trigonometry in 3D mathspace.co

933


F

E H

G

C

D A

2D slices of this cube can be examined to identify such triangles.

B D

C

A

If a slice is taken through the vertices A, B, C and D, it can be seen that any triangle determined by three of these vertices will be a right-angled triangle, as this slice results in a square.

B

In fact, any of the 2D slices that correspond to a face of the cube will produce multiple possible right-angled triangles. F

H

D

B F

G

E H C

D A

Taking a 2D slice through the vertices F, H, B and D results in a rectangle, which means that a right-angled triangle can still be formed from any three of these vertices.

Returning to 3D space, the right-angled triangles can be seen.

B

A similar approach can be taken with other 3D solids like cones and prisms to identify right-angled triangles in 3D space:

In most straight-edged solids, the diagonals formed by joining two non-adjacent vertices will often serve as the hypotenuse of some right-angled triangle within that solid.

Interactive exploration

Discover this concept in action online

934

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

mathspace.co


Lengths in 3D solids can be determined using these steps as guidance: 1. For the desired length, draw a 2D right-angled triangle involving that length, using as many vertices as possible. 2. Identify the other two lengths of the 2D right-angled triangle. This may involve drawing another triangle and applying Pythagoras’ theorem. 3. Use Pythagoras’ theorem to calculate the desired length.

Example 1 Consider this square prism that has side lengths of 9 cm, 9 cm and 16 cm, and diagonal lengths of y cm and z cm: A D

y cm

E

C z cm

H

9 cm B 9 cm F

16 cm

G a Calculate the exact length of HF.

Create a strategy HF is the hypotenuse of the right-angled triangle △FGH. Pythagoras’ theorem can be used to calculate the length of HF.

Apply the idea E

F

Start by drawing the 2D slice and labelling the right-angled triangle that can be used to calculate the length of HF. c2 = a2 + b2

z cm

H

9 cm

2

16 cm

Write the Pythagoras’ theorem 2

HF = HG + GF 2

G

So, the exact length of HF is

2

2

2

Identify the lengths

z = 9 + 16

Substitute HG = 9, GF = 16

2

z = 337

Evaluate the squares and the sum

z =

Take the square root of both sides

cm.

Reflect and check If the exact length is required, the answer is left in surd form.

11.03 Trigonometry in 3D mathspace.co

935


b Determine the length of the diagonal DF, rounded to two decimal places.

Create a strategy Pythagoras’ theorem can be used to determine the length of DF in △DHF.

Apply the idea D

B y cm

9 cm H

337 cm

Draw the 2D slice that includes DF and label the right-angled triangle. F c2 = a2 + b2 2

2

Write the Pythagoras’ theorem 2

DF = DH + HF y2 = 92 +

337

Identify the lengths

2

Substitute DH = 9, HF = 337

2

y = 418

Evaluate the squares and the sum

y =

Take the square root of both sides

418

y = 20.45

Evaluate and round

Therefore, the length of DF, rounded to two decimal places, is 20.45 cm.

Reflect and check If asked to determine the length of DF directly, there are multiple methods to determine the length of DF. However, all approaches require solving for one additional length that is not provided in the diagram.

Example 2 A soft drink can has a height of 13 cm and a radius of 5 cm: 5 cm

L

13 cm

Determine L, the length of the longest straw that can fit into the can (so that the straw is not bent and fits entirely inside the can), rounded to the nearest centimetre.

936

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Create a strategy The height and diameter of the can form a right-angled triangle with L as its hypotenuse. Use Pythagoras’ theorem to determine the length, L.

Apply the idea 10 cm By taking a 2D slice, it can be seen that L is the length of the hypotenuse of the right-angled triangle. 13 cm

L

The other sides are the height of 13 cm and the diameter of the can with length of 2 × 5 cm = 10 cm.

c2 = a2 + b2 2

2

L = 13 + 10

Write the Pythagoras’ theorem 2

Substitute a = 13, b = 10, c = L

2

L = 269

Evaluate the squares and the sum

L =

Take the square root of both sides

L = 16

Evaluate and round

The length of the longest straw that can fit inside the can to the nearest centimetre is 16 cm.

Idea summary Right-angled triangles in a 3D solid can be found by taking 2D slices. Once right-angled triangles are identified, Pythagoras’ theorem can be used to determine unknown lengths within the solids. Some problems require applying Pythagoras’ theorem and solving for one additional length that is not provided in the diagram before arriving at the required length.

Trigonometry in 3D Just like Pythagoras’ theorem, trigonometry can be applied to right-angled triangles drawn in 3D space. Once a right-angled triangle has been identified in the 3D space, the primary trigonometric ratios can be used. That is, for a given reference angle θ, the ratios are: sin (θ )

Opposite    Hypotenuse

cos (θ )

Adjacent Hypotenuse

tan (θ ) =

Opposite Adjacent

11.03 Trigonometry in 3D mathspace.co

937


Example 3 A square prism has sides of length 3 cm, 3 cm, and 14 cm as shown: A

3 cm B

D

θ° z cm

H

3 cm

E

C

F

14 cm

G a If the diagonal HF has a length of z cm, calculate z, rounded to two decimal places.

Create a strategy Use Pythagoras’ theorem on the right-angled △FGH.

Apply the idea HG is the same length as AB. So let c = z, a = 3, and b = 14. c2 = a2 + b2

Write the Pythagoras’ theorem

2

z = 3 + 14

Substitute a = 3, b = 14, c = z

2

z = 205

Evaluate

z = 14.32 cm

Take the square root of both sides and round

2

2

b If the size of ∠DFH is θ °, determine theta, rounded to two decimal places.

Create a strategy Determine the sides using the reference angle, then use the appropriate ratio.

Apply the idea With respect to the angle θ °, the opposite side is 3, and the adjacent side is 14.32, found in part (a). The tangent ratio can be used. tan (θ ) =

Opposite Adjacent

Write the tangent ratio

tan (θ ) =

3 14.32

Substitute

θ = tan 1 = 11.83°

938

3 14.32

3 O A 14.32

Apply inverse tangent on both sides Evaluate and round

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Idea summary Trigonometry, similar to Pythagoras’ theorem, can be applied to right-angled triangles in 3D space. Use the mnemonic SOH-CAH-TOA, for consistency to recall trigonometric ratios.

11.03 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

Consider a cone with slant height 13 m and perpendicular height 12 m: a

Determine the length of the radius, r, of the base of this cone.

b

Determine the diameter of the base of the cone. 13 m 12 m

rm 2

For this rectangular prism: a

Calculate the length of the diagonal AC on the base of the prism.

b

Determine the measure of angle θ.

H

G F

E

D

θ A 3

B

8 cm

C 6 cm

Consider this triangular prism: a

b

For triangle CEF: i

Determine the length of EF.

ii

Determine the length of CF

iii

Is CE a hypotenuse or a shorter side of triangle CEF ?

iv

Determine the length of CE, rounded to two decimal places.

10

A

B 3

D

C 15

E

X

F

For triangle CXF: i

Determine the length of XF.

ii

Is CX a hypotenuse or a shorter side of triangle CXF ?

iii

Determine the length of CX, rounded to two decimal places.

11.03 Trigonometry in 3D mathspace.co

939


Practice 4

This solid is a right pyramid with a square base. The pyramid has its apex, V, aligned directly above the centre of its base, W. a b

Calculate the length of AW, rounded to two decimal places.

V

26 cm D

Determine the length of VW, rounded to two decimal places. A

W B

Ex 1

5

A square prism has dimensions of 12 cm by 12 cm by 15 cm as shown: D

A B

C H G

Ex 2

6

F

15 cm

E 12 cm

a

Calculate the length of HF, rounded to two decimal places.

b

Calculate the length of DF, rounded to two decimal places.

A soft drink can has a height of 11 cm and a radius of 4 cm. Determine L, the length of the longest straw that can fit into the can. Round your answer down to the nearest centimetre, to ensure it fits inside the can.

4 cm

L cm

7

For the rectangular prism shown, determine these lengths in surd form: A D

H

940

C 16 cm

B 5

C

E

F 4 G

9

a

The length of EG

b

The length of AG

c

The length of DG

d

The area of △ADG

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

11 cm


8

A juice container has the shape of a rectangular prism. It needs a straw that must extend 20 mm beyond the container while touching the furthest corner of the base.

110 mm

x 65 mm

9

30 mm

a

Determine the exact length of the diagonal of the base, x.

b

Determine the length of the long diagonal of the juice container, z. Round your answer to two decimal places.

c

Calculate the length of the straw needed. Round your answer to the nearest millimetre.

z

110 mm

x

A right-angled triangular divider has been placed inside a box, as shown in the diagram: D 12 cm C 12 cm 17 cm Calculate the area of the triangular divider, rounded to two decimal places.

Ex 3

10

A rectangular prism has sides of length 4 cm, 3 cm and 10 cm as shown: Calculate these side and angle, rounded to two decimal places: a

z

b

A

4 cm B

D

θ

θ° z cm

H

3 cm

E

C

F

10 cm

G 11

For a right pyramid on a square base with its dimensions shown, calculate these side and angle, rounded to two decimal places: a

z

b

θ

V

23 cm

θ° A

D z cm

C 12 cm

W B

11.03 Trigonometry in 3D mathspace.co

941


12

All edges of this cube are 7 cm long. a

i b

13

A

Determine the length of these diagonals as a simplified surd: EG

ii

AG

i

∠EGH

ii

∠EGA

iii

∠AHG

iv

∠AGH

C

D

Determine the measurement of these angles, rounded to two decimal places:

B

F

E G

H

A rectangular prism has dimensions as shown: A D

B C

E

F

G

H

5

6

9 a

Determine these lengths in surd form: i

EG

ii

AG

iii

b

Determine the area of △ ADG, in surd form.

c

Determine the size of ∠DAG, rounded to two decimal places.

d

A trianglular wedge has been inserted into the box as shown: B

A x

D

DG

C

E

F

H

G

Determine the size of angle x, rounded to two decimal places. e

A different triangular wedge has been inserted into the box as shown: B

A y

D

C

E H

F G

Determine the size of angle y, rounded to two decimal places. 14

942

D

This box is to have a divider placed inside it as shown: a

If the diagonal AC has a length of z cm, calculate the value of z, rounded to two decimal places.

b

Calculate the area of the divider, rounded to two decimal places.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

7 cm

A

z cm B 19 cm

C 10 cm


Extend your thinking 15

All edges of the base of the square pyramid are 8 cm long, while all the sloping edges are 12 cm long: a

Determine the length of MD in surd form.

b

Determine the size of ∠PDM, rounded to two decimal places.

c

Determine PM, the height of the pyramid, in surd form.

d

Determine the length of MN.

e

Determine the length of PN in surd form.

f

Determine the size of ∠PNM, rounded to two decimal places.

g

16

12

B

C N

M A

D

8

Determine the size of ∠PDC, rounded to two decimal places.

A cockroach starts at point B and crawls towards point C at 10 cm/min on a 3.4 m high ceiling. Sally is standing at point A: D a

b

c

17

P

Calculate the distance, in centimetres, the cockroach will have crawled in the 3 minutes it takes to reach point C.

B

C

45°

The cockroach is now at point C. Calculate y, the distance in centimetres Sally will be from the point directly below the cockroach. Round your answer to two decimal places. Calculate θ, the angle of elevation from Sally to the cockroach at point C.

3.4 m A 40 cm

θ° y

A builder needs to carry lengths of timber along a corridor in order to get them to where he is working. There is a right-angled bend in the corridor along the way. The corridor is 2 m wide and the ceiling is 2.5 m above the floor. a

Calculate the maximum length of timber, in surd form, that would fit in the corridor when held parallel to the ground.

2m

Since the corridor has a height of 2.5 m, he can fit a longer piece of timber around the corner by angling it so that it reaches from the floor to the ceiling. 2.5 m Determine the maximum length of timber that is able to fit through the corridor, rounded to two decimal places. b

11.03 Trigonometry in 3D mathspace.co

943


11.04   Trigonometry of obtuse angles After this lesson, you will be able to… • define sine and cosine for angles up to 180°. • calculate trigonometric ratios for obtuse angles. • solve mathematical problems involving triangles with obtuse angles.

Define sine and cosine for angles up to 180° Acute angle

Obtuse angle

An angle with a measure between 0° and 90°.

An angle with a measure between 90° and 180°.

Trigonometric ratios, such as sine and cosine, are not limited to acute angles. They can be defined for angles up to 180°, including obtuse angles, using their relationship to acute angles.

Interactive exploration

Discover this concept in action online

mathspace.co

For an obtuse angle θ, where 90° < θ < 180°, the sine and cosine ratios can be expressed using the supplementary acute angle (180° – θ ):

sin (θ ) = sin (180° – θ ) θ

is an obtuse angle between 90° and 180°

cos (θ ) = – cos (180° – θ ) θ

is an obtuse angle between 90° and 180° y 1 (x, y)

(−x, y) 0.5 sin (α )

α −1

−0.5 cos (α )

θ

sin (α ) x

α 0.5 cos (α )

1

This semicircle shows an obtuse angle θ and its supplementary acute angle α, where θ + α = 180°. The sine remains positive, while the cosine becomes negative for obtuse angles.

944

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


This relationship can be verified using technology. However, when evaluating inverse ratios using technology, it will always give the acute angle.

Example 1 Express sin (147°) using an acute angle.

Create a strategy Use the identity sin (θ ) = sin (180° – θ ) to express the sine of an obtuse angle in terms of its supplementary acute angle.

Apply the idea sin (147°) = sin (180° – 147°) = sin (33°)

Apply the sine identity for obtuse angles Evaluate the subtraction

Example 2 Without using technology, evaluate cos (126°), given that cos (54°) ≈ 0.59

Create a strategy Use the identity cos (θ ) = – cos (180° – θ ) and substitute the cosine of the supplementary acute angle.

Apply the idea cos (126°) = – cos (180° – 126°)

Apply the cosine identity for obtuse angles

= – cos (54°)

Evaluate the subtraction

≈ – 0.59

Substitute cos (54°) ≈ 0.59

Reflect and check This can be verified by evaluating cos (126°) using technology.

Idea summary For an obtuse angle θ, its trigonometric ratios are related to its supplementary acute angle (180° – θ ): • sin (θ ) = sin (180° – θ ) (positive) • cos (θ ) = – cos (180° – θ ) (negative)

11.04 Trigonometry of obtuse angles mathspace.co

945


Solve for obtuse angles To solve problems involving obtuse angles, it is important to consider the sign of the ratio and other information about the angle.

Exploration Use technology to explore these questions: 1. Evaluate sin (150°). 2. Does sin– 1 (0.5) = 150°? If yes, explain how this works. If no, explain how the answer is related to 150°. 3. Evaluate cos (120°). 4. Does cos– 1 (– 0.5) = 120°? If yes, explain how this works. If no, explain how the answer is related to 120°.

When calculating inverse trigonometric ratios, a scientific calculator will by default give the smallest positive angle for the given value. For inverse cosine, the range is [0°, 180°]. This is very useful, as it covers all possible angles in a triangle. The calculator will correctly return the acute angle if cos (θ ) is positive, and the obtuse angle if cos (θ ) is negative. For any valid cosine value, cos–¹ provides the unique solution within the 0° to 180° range. For inverse sine, the range is typically [–90°, 90°]. Therefore, if sin (θ ) is positive, the calculator will always return the acute angle θ. The supplementary obtuse angle 180° – θ, which has the same sine value, must be considered as another possible solution based on the problem’s context.

Example 3 Determine the solution(s) to each equation for 0° < θ < 180°. Round your answer(s) to the nearest degree: a sin (θ ) = 0.65

Create a strategy Use the inverse trigonometric ratio function using technology.

Apply the idea sin (θ ) = 0.65 –1

θ = sin = 41°

Write the value of sine (0.65)

Apply the inverse sine to both sides Evaluate

Using the identity sin (θ ) = sin (180° – θ ), the acute angle solution θ ≈ 41° implies a second, obtuse solution. This second solution is 180° – 41° = 139°. Therefore, the two possible solutions for θ are approximately 41° and 139°.

946

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Reflect and check This can be verified by evaluating sin (41°) and sin (139°) using technology.

b cos (θ ) = – 0.22

Apply the idea cos (θ ) = – 0.22 –1

θ = cos

(– 0.22)

≈ 103°

Write the value of cosine Apply the inverse cosine to both sides Evaluate

Since the ratio is negative, there will only be one obtuse angle solution to consider between 0° and 180°. Therefore θ has one possible solution:

θ = 103°

Idea summary When using the inverse trigonometric ratios, it is important to verify that all possible solutions are listed. In particular, the inverse sine of a positive value will always give the acute angle, but the related obtuse angle should also be considered.

11.04 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

Classify each angle as: • Acute • Obtuse • Right-angled a

2

b

c

d

Determine whether each statement is true or false: a

Trigonometric ratios can also be defined for obtuse angles.

b

In the second quadrant of the unit circle, x-values are positive and y-values are negative.

c

The sine of an obtuse angle is a negative trigonometric ratio.

d

The cosine of an obtuse angle is a negative trigonometric ratio.

11.04 Trigonometry of obtuse angles mathspace.co

947


3

4

Which of these statements is correct? Opposite Opposite A sin (θ ) = B cos (θ ) = Hypotenuse Adjacent

θ

sin (θ )

cos (θ )

30°

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

⬚

120° 150°

Practice 5

Hypotenuse tan (θ ) = Adjacent

Complete the table by identifying whether sine or cosine is positive or negative for these angles:

60°

Ex 1

C

⬚

Express the following trigonometric ratios using an acute angle: a

sin (147°)

b

cos (165°)

c

sin (125°)

d

cos (160°)

e

sin (91°)

f

cos (120°)

g

sin (178°)

h

cos (132°)

6

a

Given that cos (40°) ≈ 0.766, evaluate cos (140°).

Ex 2

b

Given that sin (34°) ≈ 0.56, evaluate sin (146°).

c

Given that sin (70°) ≈ 0.94, evaluate sin (110°).

d

Given that cos (25°) ≈ 0.906, evaluate cos (155°).

e

Given that sin (50°) ≈ 0.766, evaluate sin (130°).

f

Given that cos (60°) ≈ 0.5, evaluate cos (120°).

7

Consider the unit semicircle shown: a

y

Evaluate: i

sin (45°)

ii

cos (45°)

b

Identify the coordinates of point B.

c

Evaluate: i

sin (135°)

ii

135°

cos (135°) −1

8 Ex 3

948

1 A (0.707, 0.707)

B

45°

x

45° 1

Determine the solution(s) for each equation for 0° ≤ θ < 180°. Round your answers to the nearest degree: a

sin (θ ) = 0.5

b

sin (θ ) = 0.7071

c

sin (θ ) = 0.37

d

cos (θ ) = 0.67

e

cos (θ ) = – 0.48

f

cos (θ ) = – 0.866

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


9

10

Determine the value of 0° ≤ θ < 180°, given that: a

sin (θ ) = 0.9063 and cos (θ ) = – 0.4226

b

sin (θ ) = 0.5 and cos (θ ) = 0.866

c

sin (θ ) = 0.7071 and cos (θ ) = – 0.7071

d

sin (θ ) = 0.342 and cos (θ ) = 0.9397

e

sin (θ ) = 0.866 and cos (θ ) = – 0.5

f

sin (θ ) = 0.9848 and cos (θ ) = 0.1736

b

Determine cos (α).

If sin (α) = 0.5 and 0° ≤ α < 180°: a

11

Determine the two possible values of α.

For this triangle that is drawn to scale, Asha is solving for angle A and finds that sin (A) = 0.9397: C 15 cm 10 cm 39° B

A

Determine ∠ A. 12

For this triangle, Trina is solving for angle C and finds that cos (C) = – 0.105 B 13.6 cm 8.2 cm 37° A

C

Determine ∠C.

Extend your thinking 13

If sin (α) = 0.8 and α can either be an acute angle or obtuse angle, determine the possible values of cos (α).

14

Consider an angle θ = 210°. Determine the quadrant in which this angle lies and explain how this affects the sign of sin (θ ) and cos (θ ).

15

A drone is navigating from point A to point B along a straight path that forms an angle of 145° with the positive x-axis. Evaluate the impact of changing the path angle to 160° on the drone’s horizontal displacement and vertical ascent.

11.04 Trigonometry of obtuse angles mathspace.co

949


11.05

Sine rule

After this lesson, you will be able to… • state and apply the sine rule to find unknown sides and angles. • identify situations where the ambiguous case occurs. • solve practical problems requiring the sine rule.

Sine rule to find a side Interactive exploration

Discover this concept in action online

mathspace.co

Sine rule This rule is used in non-right-angled triangles involving two sides and two angles to determine an unknown side or angle. The sine rule states that:

a b c sin(A ) sin(B) sin(C ) A, B, C are the measures of the angles in the triangle a, b, c   are the side lengths of the triangle B a

c

A

b

C

In words, the rule states the ratio of a side length to the sine of its opposite angle is the same for all three angles of a triangle. Practically, the formula can be simplified to: a b sin (A ) sin (B) This is because, in most problems, the third side and angle might not be given or needed to solve the problem. To use the sine rule: • One pair consisting of an angle and its opposite side must be known. • To calculate an unknown length, a second angle is required. • To verify, use the property that the smallest angle is opposite the shortest side and the largest angle is opposite the largest side.

950

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 1 Determine the side length, a, using the sine rule, rounded to two decimal places. a 69° 18

33°

Create a strategy One pair consisting of an angle and its opposite side are given. Therefore, the sine rule can be applied. Use the sine rule:

a b sin (A ) sin (B)

Apply the idea a b sin (A ) sin ( B)

Write the sine rule

a 18 sin ( 33° ) sin (69° ) 18 a sin ( 33° ) sin (69° ) ≈ 10.50

Substitute b = 18, A = 33° and B = 69° Multiply both sides by sin (33°) Evaluate and round

Reflect and check Recall the smallest angle in the triangle will be opposite the smallest side length. Since 33° is the smallest angle, expect side a to be smaller than 18.

Idea summary The sine rule to determine a side:

a b c sin(B) sin(C )    sin(A ) A is the angle opposite side a B is the angle opposite side b C is the angle opposite side c

11.05 Sine rule mathspace.co

951


Sine rule to find an angle The sine rule can be used to determine an unknown angle. One pair consisting of an angle and its opposite side must be known. Additionally, to determine an unknown angle, a second side must also be known. When using the sine rule to determine an unknown angle, it is common to see the formula in the form:

sin (A) sin (B) sin (C) a b c A is the angle opposite side a B is the angle opposite side b C is the angle opposite side c The inverted form is mathematically equivalent to the standard form and is often used for convenience when solving for an angle.

Example 2 Calculate the value of the acute angle, x, using the sine rule, rounded to one decimal place. B

9

A 56º

17 x C

Create a strategy One pair consisting of an angle and its opposite side are given. Therefore, the sine rule can be applied. Use the sine rule:

sin (A ) sin (C ) a c

Apply the idea sin (A ) sin (C ) a c

Write the inverted sine rule

sin (56° ) sin (x ) 17 9

Substitute A = 56°, a = 17, c = 9 and C = x

sin (x )

sin (56° ) 9 17

sin (x) = 0.4389. . . = sin

–1

= 26.0°

952

(0.4389. . .)

Multiply both sides by 9 Evaluate Take the inverse sine of both sides Evaluate and round

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 3 Solve for θ in degrees, rounded to two decimal places. 15 cm 62°

80° 42°

θ 35 cm

Create a strategy Use the sine rule twice to determine the side opposite of θ, then the value of θ.

Apply the idea To calculate θ, an angle-side pair and a second side must be known. To determine the second side, use the sine rule on the triangle on the right. Let a be the side opposite the 62° angle. a b sin (A ) sin (B) a 15 sin (62° ) sin ( 42° ) a

15 sin ( 42° )

Write the sine rule Substitute A = 62°, B = 42° and b = 15 sin (62° )

= 19.7932

Multiply both sides by sin (62°) Evaluate

Solve for θ by using the sine rule for angles on the left triangle. sin (A ) sin (B) a b sin ( ) sin (80° ) 19.7932 35 sin ( )

sin (80° ) 35 sin 1

Write the inverted sine rule Substitute a = 19.7932, b = 35, A = θ and B = 80° 19.7932

sin (80° ) 19.7932 35

≈ 33.84°

Multiply both sides by 19.7932 Take the inverse sine of both sides Evaluate and round

11.05 Sine rule mathspace.co

953


Idea summary The sine rule can be inverted to determine an angle:

sin (A) sin (B) sin (C) a c b

A is the angle opposite side a B is the angle opposite side b C is the angle opposite side c

Ambiguous case of the sine rule When solving for angles using the sine rule, there may be two possible solutions due to the fact that sin (θ ) = sin (180° – θ ).

Interactive exploration

Discover this concept in action online

mathspace.co

The ambiguous case occurs in the SSA configuration when the known side (a) (opposite the given acute angle (α)) satisfies a ≥ b sin (α) and a < b, and the given angle is acute, potentially leading to two possible triangles.

954

α

Condition (h = b sin α)

Number of triangles

Acute

0<a<h

0

b α

h

Acute

a–h

1

b α

h a

Acute

h<a<b

2

Acute

a≥b

1

Obtuse

0<a≤b

0

Obtuse

a>b

1

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

Figure a

b

a

b α a

α

b b

α

a

h

a

Ambiguous case a


The ambiguous case occurs when it is possible to have multiple solutions with the information given. When using the sine rule, it is possible to have no solution, one solution, or two solutions: • Case 1: No triangle exists • This is the case when an error occurs in the calculator while solving for the unknown angle. This means that no such triangle with the given side lengths and angle exists. • Case 2: Exactly one triangle exists • This is the case when the calculated angle B is valid, and the supplementary angle 180° − B results in a triangle where the sum of angles exceeds 180°, or when the side a opposite the given angle is at least as long as the other given side (a ≥ b). • Case 3: Two possible triangles exist • This is the case when the sum of the given angle and the supplement to the solution are less than 180°. Then, the possible triangles are as follows: • A triangle that includes the calculated solution. • A triangle that includes the supplement to the calculated solution. C1 b A

C2 b

a c1

B1

A

Possibility 1

a

c2 B2 = 180° − B1 Possibility 2

To determine the second possible solution, subtract the first value of B from 180°.

Example 4 Determine the value of x in degrees, given that x is obtuse. Round your answer to two decimal places. B

25° 18.8 x

A

12.6 C

Create a strategy Use the sine rule: sin (A ) sin (B) a b

11.05 Sine rule mathspace.co

955


Apply the idea sin (A) sin (B) a b

Write the inverted sine rule

sin (x ) sin (25 ° ) 18.8 12.6

Substitute A = x, a = 18.8, b = 12.6, B = 25°

sin (x )

sin (25° ) 18.8 12.6

Multiply both sides by 18.8

sin (x) = 0.630 573…

Evaluate

–1

x = sin (0.630 573. . .) = 39.09°

Take the inverse sine of both sides Evaluate and round

To determine the obtuse angle x, subtract the acute angle from 180°: x = 180 – 39.09

Subtract 39.09 from 180

= 140.91°

Evaluate

Example 5 For a triangle ABC, with a = 85, b = 93, and ∠A = 61°, calculate all missing sides and angles, rounded to two decimal places.

Create a strategy Draw and label a diagram of the triangle; it does not need to be drawn to scale. B From this diagram, two sides and their nonincluded angle are given. This is an example of the ambiguous case, where solving it may result in one, two, or no solutions.

85 61º A

93

C

A pair of opposite sides and angles is given with side a and angle A in addition to side b. The equation will be set up as: sin (A ) sin (B) a b to find ∠B.

956

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Apply the idea 1. Find the acute angle using the sine rule. sin (A ) sin (B) a b

Write the inverted sine rule

sin (61° ) sin (B) 85 93

Substitute a = 85, b = 93 and A = 61°

sin (61° ) 85 sin (61° ) sin 1 93 85 93

sin (B)

Multiply both sides by 93

B

Apply the inverse sine to both sides

73.12° = B

Evaluate and round

2. Find the supplementary angle to see if a second solution is valid. ∠B2 = 180° – ∠B1

The supplement of ∠B1

= 180° – 73.12°

Substitute ∠B1 = 73.12°

= 106.88°

Evaluate the subtraction

Adding ∠A and ∠B2 together gives 61° + 106.88° = 167.88°, which does not exceed the maximum 180° possible in a triangle. That means this triangle has two solutions: ∠B1 = 73.12° and ∠B2 = 106.88° 3. Solve the acute triangle. Solution 1: ∠B1 = 73.12° The known information is a = 85, b = 93, ∠A = 61° and ∠B1 = 73.12°. Use the triangle angle sum to solve for the missing angle: ∠C1 = 180° – (61° + 73.12°) = 45.88° Use the sine rule to find the missing side, c1: c1 a sin (A ) sin (C1 )

Write the sine rule

c1 85 sin (61° ) sin ( 45.88° ) 85 sin (45.88°) c1 sin (61° ) 69.77 = c1

Substitute a = 85, A = 61°, C1 = 45.88° Multiply both sides by sin (45.88°) Evaluate and round

The three side lengths and angles measures are: a = 85, b = 93, c1 = 69.77 and ∠A = 61°, ∠B1 = 73.12°, ∠C1 = 45.88°

11.05 Sine rule mathspace.co

957


4. Solve the obtuse triangle. Solution 2: ∠B2 = 106.88° The known information is a = 85, b = 93, ∠A = 61° and ∠B2 = 106.88°. Use the triangle angle sum to solve for the missing angle: ∠C2 = 180° – (61° + 106.88°) = 12.12° Use the sine rule to find the missing side, c2: c2 a sin ( A ) sin (C2 )

sin ( 12.12° )

Write the sine rule

c2 85 sin (61° ) sin ( 12.12° )

Substitute a = 85, A = 61° and C2 = 12.12°

85 sin (61° )

Multiply both sides by sin (12.12°)

c2

20.40 = c2

Evaluate and round

The three side lengths and angles measures are: a = 85, b = 93, c2 = 20.40 and ∠A = 61°, ∠B2 = 106.88°, ∠C2 = 12.12° The diagram shows a visual of both solutions: B1

c1

B2

85 c2

61º A

93

C1

A

85 61° 93

C2

Reflect and check There will be no solution or a calculator error if the inverse sine of a value greater than 1 is attempted. There will be exactly one solution if the solved angle is acute, but its supplement is too large to create a second valid triangle.

958

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Idea summary When determining an angle using the sine rule (with two known sides and a known angle), use the following rule to find one value of B: sin (B) sin (A ) b a If the given angle is acute and the side opposite it is shorter than the other given side, then the ambiguous case applies. Subtract the acute value of ∠B from 180° to find another possible solution. Check that the second solution is a valid solution using the sum of angles in a triangle.

11.05 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

Determine an equation relating the sides and angles using the sine rule: p Q R r q

P

2

Solve for x, rounded to two decimal places: x 50 a sin ( 78° ) sin ( 43° ) c

sin ( 78° ) sin (x ) 20 13

b

11 x sin (66° ) sin ( 34° )

d

5 7 sin (x ) sin ( 70° )

11.05 Sine rule mathspace.co

959


3

For each triangle, determine if there is enough information to find all the remaining sides and angles in the triangle using sine rule: Three sides are known.

a

b

wo of the angles and the side T included between them are known. B

a

b

c

A

c Two of the angles and a side not included between them are known.

c

d

wo of the sides and an angle T included between them are known.

C

B

a

b A b

Practice 4

For the given triangle, use the sine rule to determine the value of h, rounded to four significant figures. C

14.7

A Ex 1

5

125°

8° B

h

For each triangle, determine the side length a, rounded to two decimal places: a

a 64° 21

b a

4.5 39° 25°

35°

960

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


c

a

d

17

27°

a

45° 28°

18.3

6

48°

For each triangle, calculate the missing angle and then use the sine rule to determine the length of side x, rounded to one decimal place: a

20 D

C

b

E 47°

41°

x

x

39° 64°

A

20

B

F 7

Consider this triangle:

K

a

Determine the length of side HK, rounded to two decimal places.

b

Determine the length of side KJ, rounded to two decimal places.

46° H

37°

531.36 km

97° J

8

Calculate the length of y, using the sine rule. Round your answer to one decimal place. A

20

B

11°

60° y

C

D

11.05 Sine rule mathspace.co

961


Ex 2

9

For each triangle, determine the value of the acute angle x using the sine rule, rounded to three significant figures: a

B 9

b A

68°

39° x

11

9 cm 11.2 cm x

C c

C

A

d

58

93

41°

x

34°

x

287

275

B 10

A

Consider the given triangle: a

Determine the size of ∠BAC.

b

Determine the value of c, rounded to two decimal places. c

88°

63° B

11

Calculate the value of angle x, rounded to two decimal places.

C

18

3.52 cm

x

110° 5.52 cm

12

Consider the triangle with ∠ABC = 58°, ∠ACB = 29° and a = 36 cm. Determine each value, rounding the answer to two decimal places where necessary: a

962

∠BAC

b

b

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

c

c


13

Consider the triangle with ∠ABC = 82.94°, ∠ACB = 60.25° and c = 19.84 cm. Determine each value, rounding the answer to two decimal places where necessary: a

14

15

∠BAC

b

a

c

b

Consider the given triangle with two interior angles A = 45.32° and B = 64.18°, and one side length c = 7.452 m: a

Determine the size of angle C, rounded to two decimal places.

b

Determine the value of side a, rounded to three decimal places.

c

Determine the value of side b, rounded to three decimal places.

A c b

B a C

Dave is standing on a hill and can see two buildings in the distance. The buildings are 20 km apart. Dave is 13 km from one building and the angle between the two lines of sight to the buildings is 35°. Calculate the distance from Dave to the building at B, rounded to three significant figures.

20 km B

C 35°

16

Ex 3

17

13 km A

For each scenario described: i

Draw a possible illustration of the triangle being described.

ii

Determine whether there is enough information to calculate all the remaining sides and angles in the triangle using only the sine rule.

a

Three sides are known.

b

Two of the angles and the side included between them are known.

c

Two of the angles and a side not included between them are known.

d

Two of the sides and an angle included between them are known.

For the quadrilateral shown, determine the value of θ, rounded to two decimal places. 18 cm 75°

58°

47°

θ 42 cm

11.05 Sine rule mathspace.co

963


Ex 4

18

For each triangle, determine the angle using the sine rule, given that x is obtuse. Round your answers to one decimal place. a

B

b

A 14

x 28° 19 x

25°

B

C

17

A

14 C c

B

d 25° x

30° x

19.9

12.3

18.1 A

12.4 C Ex 5

19

For each triangle, calculate all missing sides and angles, rounding angles to the nearest degree and sides to two decimal places: i

∠B

a

△ABC where ∠A = 57°, side a = 156 cm and side b = 179 cm

b

△ABC where ∠A = 48°, side a = 2.7 cm and side b = 1.9 cm

ii

∠C

c

iii

Extend your thinking 20

Mae observes a tower at an angle of elevation of 12°. The tower is perpendicular to the ground. Walking 67 m towards the tower, she finds that the angle of elevation increases to 35°. a

Determine the length of the side a, rounded to two decimal places.

b

Determine the height, h, of the tower, rounded to one decimal place.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

h a 35°

12° A

964

D

67

B

C


21

To calculate the height of each block of flats, a surveyor measures the angles of depression from A and B, to C.

31°

From A the angle of depression is 31°, and from B the angle of depression is 47°. a

Determine the direct distance between A and C, rounded to two decimal places.

b

Determine h, the height of the buildings, rounded to the nearest metre.

303 m

A

B

47°

h

C 22

A radio signal is sent from a transmitter at tower T, via a satellite S, to a town W, as shown in the diagram: S

26°

18° T

526 km

W

The town is 526 km from the transmitter tower. The signal is sent out from the transmitter tower at an angle of 18°, and the town receives the signal at an angle of 26°. If the satellite is h km above the ground, determine the value of h, rounded to five significant figures. 23

During football training, the coach marks out the perimeter of a triangular course that players need to run around. The diagram shows some measurements taken of the course, where side length a = 14 m: Each player must sprint one lap and then jog one lap around the triangle. This process is to be repeated 3 times by each player.

A

b

c

If Tara can run 280 m/min, and can jog at half the speed she runs, calculate the time this exercise will take her, rounded to one decimal place.

55° B

87°

a = 14 m

11.05 Sine rule mathspace.co

C

965


11.06

Cosine rule

After this lesson, you will be able to… • state and apply the cosine rule to find unknown sides and angles. • solve practical problems requiring the cosine rule.

Cosine rule to find a side Cosine rule A formula used for non-right angled triangles that involves three sides and one angle. Two situations where the cosine rule is used are: Two side lengths and the angle between them are known, to find the side opposite this angle.

Three side lengths are known to find an unknown angle.

x°

x

10

6

7

9

32° 4

Interactive exploration

Discover this concept in action online

mathspace.co

The cosine rule:

c2 = a2 + b2 – 2ab cos (C) c a, b

is the side length opposite angle C are the side lengths adjacent the given angle B a

c

A

966

b

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

C


Note: The formula can be written in terms of any of the sides or angles. If a triangle is labelled differently, the rule can be adapted. The cosine rule forms are: a2 = b2 + c2 – 2bc cos (A) b2 = a2 + c2 – 2ac cos (B) c2 = a2 + b2 – 2ab cos (C)

Example 1 Determine the length of a using the cosine rule, rounded to two decimal places. C a

13 33°

A

30

B

Create a strategy Two sides and the included angle are given, the third side is to be determined. Therefore, the cosine rule can be applied. Use the cosine rule: a2 = b2 + c2 – 2bc cos (A)

Apply the idea a2 = b2 + c2 – 2bc cos (A) 2

2

2

a

132

302

Write the cosine rule

a = 13 + 30 – 2 × 13 × 30 cos (33°) 2

13

30 cos(33°)

= 20.37

Substitute b = 13, c = 30 and A = 33° Take the square root of both sides Evaluate and round

Idea summary The cosine rule to find a side:

c2 = a2 + b2 – 2ab cos (C) c is the side length opposite angle C a, b are the side lengths adjacent the given angle

11.06 Cosine rule mathspace.co

967


Cosine rule to find an angle To solve for an unknown angle, the cosine rule can be rearranged and written as:

a2

cos(C)

b2 c2 2ab

c is the side length opposite angle C a, b are the other two side lengths To find a missing angle using the cosine rule, all three side lengths need to be provided. There is no ambiguous case for the cosine rule because when calculating the inverse cosine of a value, there is one unique answer. The inverse cosine of a positive value means it is an acute angle. The inverse cosine of a negative value means it is an obtuse angle.

Example 2 Determine the value of w using the cosine rule, rounded to two decimal places.

32 25 w° 19

Create a strategy Three sides are given, an angle is to be determined. Therefore, the cosine rule can be applied. Use the cosine rule for angles: cos (C)

a2

b2 c2 2ab

Apply the idea cos (C) =

a2 b2 c2 2ab

Write the cosine rule

cos (w) =

322 192 252 2 32 19

Substitute a = 32, b = 19, c = 25 and C = w

cos (w) =

5 8

Evaluate

w = cos 1 = 51.32°

5 8

Take the inverse cosine of both sides Evaluate and round

Reflect and check Side c needs to be the opposite side to the unknown angle. The order of sides a and b is not important. This substitution could have also been used in the cosine rule: a = 19, b = 32, c = 25 and C = w

968

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 3 Consider this rhombus with a side of length 10 cm and has a diagonal of length 16 cm: θ° 16 cm

10 cm d x°

a Solve for θ, the obtuse angle in the rhombus, rounded to one decimal place.

Create a strategy Use the properties of a rhombus and the cosine rule for angles.

Apply the idea All sides of a rhombus are equal, therefore, the other side next to angle θ is also equal to 10 cm. a2 b2 c2 2ab 2 10 102 162 cos (θ ) = 2 10 10 7 cos (θ ) = 25 7 θ = cos 1 25

cos (C) =

Write the cosine rule Substitute a = 10, b = 10, c = 16 and C = θ Evaluate

Take the inverse cosine of both sides

= 106.3°

Evaluate and round

b Solve for angle x, rounded to one decimal place.

Create a strategy Use the cosine rule for angles: cos (C)

a2

b2 c2 2ab

11.06 Cosine rule mathspace.co

969


Apply the idea The angle x is in the right half of the rhombus, which is a triangle with sides 10 cm, 10 cm, and 16 cm. The opposite side length to x is 10 cm. cos (C ) =

a2 b2 c2 2ab

102 162 102 2 10 16 4 cos (x) = 5 1 4 x = cos 5 cos (x) =

= 36.9°

Write the cosine rule Substitute a = 10, b = 16, c = 10 and C = x Evaluate Take the inverse cosine of both sides Evaluate and round

Reflect and check The angle x can also be calculated using the properties of rhombuses and triangles. The diagonal of the rhombus forms two isosceles triangles. An isosceles triangle has two identical angles, in this case x, and the sum of angles in any triangle is 180°. The angle found in part (a) can be subtracted from 180° and the remaining amount can be halved to determine x. x= =

180

106.3 2

73.7 2

= 36.9°

Write the equation Evaluate the subtraction Evaluate and round

c Calculate d, the length of the shorter diagonal of the rhombus, rounded to one decimal place.

Create a strategy First, determine the angle opposite of d and then use the cosine rule, c = a2 + b2 – 2ab cos (C), to solve for d.

Apply the idea Diagonals of a rhombus bisect the angles, so the angle opposite d is 2x = 2 × 36.9 = 73.8°. Solve for d using the cosine rule: c2 = a2 + b2 – 2ab cos (C)

Write the cosine rule

2

2

Substitute c = d, a = 10, b = 10 and C = 73.8°

d

102 102 2 10 10 cos (73.8°)

2

d = 10 + 10 – 2 × 10 × 10 × cos (73.8°)

= 12.0 cm

970

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

Take the square root of both sides Evaluate and round


Idea summary The cosine rule to find an angle:

cos (C) =

a2

b2 c2 2ab

c  is the side length opposite angle C a, b are the other two side lengths

11.06 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

Which strategy would be used to find the unknown: Pythagoras’ theorem, trigonometric ratios, sine rule or cosine rule? a

a

b 69°

18 19

r 33°

11 c

d

32 25 w

fm 27°

19 8m

11.06 Cosine rule mathspace.co

971


2

To use the cosine rule to find the length of AC, which angle must be provided? B 31.05 cm 38.44 cm A

C 3

Write the cosine rule for the given triangles used to find side a: a

a

b 72° 14

c b

12

A° a

Practice Ex 1

4

For each triangle, use the cosine rule to calculate the length of side a, rounded to two decimal places: a

C a

17

A c

C

b

26°

B

23

a

19.4

C

25°

A

B

23.3

d

C a

131

21 a A

972

42° 14

B

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

A

54° 261

B


5

For each triangle, use the cosine rule to calculate the value of the variable, rounded to two decimal places: a

q

b 16

24° 26

23

53° 24 c c

y

d

w 9

12.3

7 46°

54° 15.2

6

Ex 2

7

3 In △QUV, q = 5, u = 6 and cos (V ) = . Determine the value of v. 5 For each triangle, calculate the value of the variable in degrees, rounded to two decimal places: a

25

b 19 11.2

w°

7

35 A°

c

5.2

d

35

4 25

B 15

8 C° 6

11.06 Cosine rule mathspace.co

973


8

Determine the size of angle θ in this triangle. Round your answer to four significant figures.

26.5 cm 19.8 cm θ 16.5 cm 9

Determine θ, rounded to the nearest degree: a

7 cm

b

43.7 cm θ

60.5 cm

4 cm

θ

99.8 cm

5 cm

Ex 3

10

In △QUV, v = 6, q = 10 and u = 12. Calculate the value of cos (U).

11

A rhombus of side length 12 cm has a longer diagonal of length 20 cm.

θ°

Calculate these values, rounded to one decimal place: a b c

θ, the obtuse angle x° d, the length of the shorter diagonal

20 cm

12 cm d x°

12

Determine the length of the diagonal, x, in parallelogram ABCD, rounded to four significant figures. 18 C

13

35

D

A

130°

x B

Mae rode her bike from Point A to Point B, with a distance of 18 km. She then made a 126° turn and continued from Point B to Point C, covering 21 km. Calculate x, the direct distance from Point A to Point C, rounded to two decimal places.

21 km

B 18 km

126°

x km A

974

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

C


14

A pendulum of length 82 cm swings a horizontal distance of 31 cm. Determine the angle x of the pendulum’s movement, rounded to the nearest degree.

x 82 cm

31 cm 15

A triangle has sides of length 13 cm, 15 cm and 5 cm. The largest angle has a size of x°. Calculate the value of x, rounded to the nearest degree.

16

The sides of a triangle are in the ratio 4 : 5 : 8. Determine θ, the smallest angle in the triangle, rounded to the nearest degree.

17

A garden, in the shape of a quadrilateral, is represented in the diagram. Determine these measurements, rounded to two decimal places: a

The length of BD

b

The length of CD

c

The perimeter of the garden

d

The area of the garden

7m

B

19 m

A 127°

82°

14 m

D

C

Extend your thinking 18

A teacher is writing an exam question for her maths class. She draws a triangle, labels the vertices A, B and C and labels the opposite sides a = 5, b = 8 and c = 15, respectively. She asks the students to find the size of ∠ A. Explain why there is an error with her question.

19

Two boats, Boat A and Boat B, leave a harbour at the same time. Boat A travels due north at a speed of 15 km/h, while Boat B travels at a speed of 20 km/h in a direction 60° east of north. After two hours, they spot a distress signal from a point C directly east of the harbour. Determine the distance between the two boats after two hours.

11.06 Cosine rule mathspace.co

975


20

In a rectangular box, the vertices P, Q and R form a triangle. The dimensions of the box are: • The length PQ is 10 cm. • The width QR is 8 cm. • The height from P to R is 6 cm.

Q

P

Determine the measure of ∠PQR.

R 21

The diagram shows five straight roads. PQ = 4.5 km, QR = 4 km, and PR = 7 km: R

4 km

Q

7 km 4.5 km 85° S

40° P

22

a

Calculate ∠PQR.

b

Calculate the area of the quadrilateral, rounded to two decimal places.

Prove the cosine rule, a2 = b2 + c2 – 2bc cos (A), using these steps: C b

A

h

a

D c−x

x

B

c

976

a

Identify an expression for a2 in terms of c, x and h by using Pythagoras’ theorem in △CDB.

b

Identify an expression for h2 by using Pythagoras’ theorem in △ACD.

c

Identify an expression for x in terms of cos (A).

d

Substitute the expressions for h2 and x into the expression for a2 to prove the cosine rule.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


11.07   Area of non-right angled triangles After this lesson, you will be able to… 1 • calculate areas using the formula A = ab sin (C). 2 • apply Heron’s formula to find areas of triangles. • solve practical problems involving triangular areas.

Base and perpendicular height There are several different ways to determine the area of a triangle. The situation and the information presented will determine which formula to use.

h

h

h

b

b

b

Area of a triangle when the base and height are known is given by:

Area

1 bh 2

b is the length of the base h is the perpendicular height

Example 1 Calculate the area of this triangle:

6 cm 9 cm

Create a strategy Use the area of a triangle formula: Area

1 bh 2

11.07 Area of non-right angled triangles mathspace.co

977


Apply the idea 1 b h 2 1 9 6 2

Area

Write the formula for the area of a triangle Substitute b = 9 and h = 6

= 27 cm2

Evaluate

Idea summary To determine the area of a triangle given the base and perpendicular height, use the formula:

Area 1 bh 2 b is the length of the base h is the perpendicular height

Two sides and the included angle The area of a triangle can be found when two sides and the angle between them are known.

b

As the height is unknown, the formula 1 Area bh cannot be used. 2

C° a

The height, h, of the larger triangle can be drawn on to form two smaller right-angled triangles.

b h

The height can be solved for using trigonometric ratios.

C° a sin (C )

Opposite Hypotenuse

Write the sine ratio

sin (C )

h b

Substitute Opposite = h and Hypotenuse = b h b

Multiply both sides by b

h = b × sin (C)

Simplify and swap sides

b sin (C )

978

b

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


1 Substituting h = b sin (C) in the formula, Area bh, the area formula, given two sides and the 2 angle between them, is derived:

Area

1 ab sin (C) 2

a, b are the side lengths C is the angle between these sides Note: The naming of the sides does not matter as long as two sides and the angle between them are known. It is worth noting that the sides are often labelled with lowercase letters, while the angles directly opposite the sides are labelled with the corresponding capital letters.

Example 2 Calculate the area of this triangle, rounded to two decimal places:

44° 3m

5.7 m

Create a strategy Two side lengths and the angle between them are given, so use the formula: Area

1 ab sin (C) 2

Apply the idea Area

1 ab sin (C) 2 1 3 5.7 sin (44°) 2

= 5.94 m2

Write the area formula Substitute a = 3, b = 5.7, and C = 44° Evaluate and round

11.07 Area of non-right angled triangles mathspace.co

979


Idea summary To determine the area of a triangle given two sides and the angle between them, use the formula:

Area 1 ab sin (C) 2 a, b are the side lengths C is the angle between these sides

Heron’s formula When the length of all three sides of a triangle are known, Heron’s formula can be used to calculate the area. a C B b c

A

Heron’s formula:

Area

s(s

a)( s b)(s c)

s is the semi-perimeter of the triangle To calculate the semi-perimeter, s:

s a, b, c

980

a b c 2

represent the side lengths of the triangle

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Example 3 A triangular field has side lengths of 18 m, 20 m, and 34 m: a Determine the area of the field.

Create a strategy Calculate s, the semi-perimeter, then use Heron’s formula: Area

s s a s b s c

Apply the idea Calculate the value of the semi-perimeter, s: a b c 2 18 20 34 = 2 72 = 2

s=

Write semi-perimeter formula Substitute a = 18, b = 20 and c = 34 Evaluate the numerator

= 36

Simplify

Use the value of s to calculate the area using Heron’s formula: Area = s(s a)(s b)(s c)

Write Heron’s formula for triangle area

= 36(36 – 18)(36 – 20)(36 – 34)

Substitute a = 18, b = 20, c = 34 and s = 36

= 36 18 16 2

Evaluate the subtraction

= 20 736

Evaluate the multiplication

= 144 m2

Take the square root 2

Therefore the field has an area of 144 m .

b It costs $0.06 per square metre for grass seed. How much would it cost to buy grass seed for the whole field?

Create a strategy Multiply the cost per square metre by the number of square metres.

Apply the idea Cost = Unit cost × Number of units =

$0.06 m2

144 m2

= $8.64

Write the formula Substitute the values Evaluate

The cost for grass seed for the whole field is $8.64

11.07 Area of non-right angled triangles mathspace.co

981


Idea summary To determine the area of a triangle when the lengths of all 3 sides are known, use Heron’s formula:

Area

s s a s b s c

s is the semi-perimeter of the triangle To calculate the semi-perimeter, s, use the equation:

s a, b, c

a b c 2

represent the side lengths of the triangle

Further applications Many shapes can be divided into triangles, allowing triangle area formulas to solve area problems when sufficient information is available. Alternatively, if the area of the triangle is known, unknown side lengths or angles can be determined using algebra and inverse operations.

Example 4 Determine the area of a trapezium with parallel sides of length 19 cm and 28 cm, and non-parallel sides of length 10 cm and 17 cm. a Divide the trapezium into a parallelogram and a triangle, where the parallelogram has sides of length 10 cm and 19 cm.

Create a strategy Draw the shape based on the description provided and use composite area to find the total area.

Apply the idea 19 cm 10 cm

17 cm

10 cm b 28 cm

The base of the triangle can be calculated by subtracting the base of the parallelogram, formed after the dissection, from the original base of the trapezium. b = Base 1 – Base 2

982

Write the formula

= 28 – 19

Substitute the values

= 9 cm

Evaluate

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Determine the value of the semi-perimeter, s: s

a b c 2 10 17 9 2 36 2

Write the semi-perimeter formula Substitute a = 10, b = 17 and c = 9 Simplify

= 18

Evaluate

Use the value of s to calculate the area using Heron’s formula: Area

s s a s b s c

Write the Heron’s formula for area of triangle

18 18 10 18 17 18 9

Substitute a = 10, b = 17, c = 9 and s = 18

18 8 1 9

Evaluate the subtraction

1296

Evaluate the multiplication

= 36 cm2

Evaluate

b Solve for h, the height (in centimetres) of the trapezium.

Create a strategy Form an equation in terms of h.

Apply the idea The height of the trapezium (and parallelogram) is equal to the length of the perpendicular height in the triangle. To calculate the length of the perpendicular height, form an equation in terms of h using the fact that the area of a triangle is equal to half its base times its height. 19 cm 10 cm

10 cm

h

17 cm

b 28 cm From part (a), the area of the triangle was calculated to be 36 cm2. Area 36

1 bh 2 1 9 h 2

Write the formula for the area of triangle Substitute Area = 36 and b = 9

72 = 9h

Multiply both sides by 2

8=h

Divide both sides by 9

11.07 Area of non-right angled triangles mathspace.co

983


c Calculate the area of the trapezium.

Create a strategy Determine the area of the parallelogram and add it to the area of the triangle.

Apply the idea The area of the trapezium is equal to the sum of the areas of the parallelogram and the triangle. To determine the area of the parallelogram, use the fact that the area of a parallelogram is equal to its base times its height. The base of the parallelogram is 19 cm and from part (b), the height of the parallelogram is 8 cm. Area of a parallelogram: Area = Base × Height Write the formula for the area of parallelogram = 19 × 8 Substitute Base = 19 and Height = 8 = 152 cm2

Evaluate 2

From part (a), the area of the triangle was calculated to be 36 cm . Area of trapezium = Area of parallelogram + Area of triangle Write the formula for area of trapezium = 152 + 36

Substitute the values

2

= 188 cm

Evaluate 2

Therefore, the area of the trapezium is 188 cm .

Reflect and check The trapezium formula could also have been used to calculate the area. 1 ( a b) h Write the formula for the area 2 of a trapezium 1 ( 19 28) 8 = Substitute a = 19, b = 28, and 2 h=8

Area =

=

1 47 8 2

= 188 cm2

Evaluate the sum Evaluate

Idea summary The area of other shapes can be determined by dividing them into triangles and applying various formulas to determine the area depending on the information given.

984

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


11.07 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

Complete each formula for the area of a triangle a

Area =

1

b

b

Area =

1

ab sin (

h

)

b

c

C° a b c

Area =

1

ab sin (

)

d

( s a)( s

Area

where s =

c

b

)( s

),

a

b

A c

2

Determine which area of a triangle formula would be used based on the given information: a

5

b 7

10

5 3

61°

11.07 Area of non-right angled triangles mathspace.co

985


Ex 1

3

Calculate the area of these triangles: a

b 5m

4 cm

13 m 8 cm c

8m

10 m

Practice Ex 2

4

Calculate the area of each triangle, rounded to two decimal places: a

b

50°

52° 13.1 m

12 m

c

5

7.4 m 4m 123°

17 m

d 5.5 m

101°

9m

Calculate the area of each triangle, rounded to the nearest square centimetre: a

39° 22 cm

b

23.2 cm

25° 33 cm

986

32.25 m

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

46° 11.6 cm

79°


6

Determine the area of this triangular paddock, rounded to the nearest square metre:

50° 685 m

575 m

7

8

Determine the area of these triangles, rounded to one decimal place: a

Side lengths of 9.5 cm and 10 cm, with an enclosed angle of 47°

b

Side lengths of 18.4 cm and 20.5 cm, with an enclosed angle of 99°

A triangular plot of land is being replaced by a park. Two sides of the park are 250 m and 350 m in length and the angle between them is 60°. Determine the area of the park, rounded to two decimal places.

9

The roads between Jaime, Jenna and Jill’s homes form a triangle. There is 2 km between Jaime and Jenna’s house and 3.5 km between Jaime and Jill’s house. The angle between these two roads is 85°. Determine the area enclosed by the roads between all three houses, rounded to three significant figures.

10

An industrial site in the shape of a triangle is located at the intersection of three roads: Calculate the area of the site, rounded to two decimal places.

44°

50 m 80 m

11

The Bermuda triangle is an area in the Atlantic Ocean where many planes and ships have mysteriously disappeared. Its vertices are at Bermuda, Miami and Puerto Rico. Calculate the area of the Bermuda triangle, rounded to the nearest square kilometre.

Bermuda 1789 km Miami

64° 1548 km Puerto Rico

11.07 Area of non-right angled triangles mathspace.co

987


12

Calculate the area of each triangle, rounded to one decimal place: a

b

9 cm

8 cm

15 cm

13 cm

5 cm 14 cm c

7.5 cm

5 cm

d

8 cm

7 cm

6 cm

2.5 cm Ex 3

13

Determine the area of the triangles with these side lengths, rounded to one decimal place: a

14

5 cm, 5 cm, and 8 cm

b

3.9 cm, 1.7 cm, and 4.4 cm

Calculate the area of this quadrilateral:

27 cm

45 cm

42 cm

36 cm

39 cm 15

Calculate the exact area of an equilateral triangle with a side length of 6 cm.

16

Suppose a rhombus has a perimeter of 80 cm and one of its diagonals is 24 cm.

17

a

Determine the length of each side of the rhombus.

b

Calculate the area of the rhombus.

△ ABC has an area of 520 cm2. The side length is BC = 48 cm with ∠ ACB = 35°,

A b cm

Determine the value of b, rounded to the nearest whole number. B

988

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

35° 48 cm

C


Ex 4

18

The area of a rhombus is 17.37 cm2, while its acute angle is 44°. Determine its side length, a cm, rounded to the nearest whole number.

19

Calculate the area of a parallelogram with side lengths 4.6 cm, 6.8 cm, and one internal angle of 42°, rounded to four significant figures.

20

An isosceles triangle has a perimeter of 50 cm and its equal sides are of length 17 cm.

21

a

Determine the length of the third side.

b

Calculate the area of the triangle.

For a trapezium with parallel sides of length 21 cm and 29 cm, and non-parallel sides of length 12 cm and 18 cm: a

Determine the perpendicular height of the trapezium.

b

Calculate the area of the trapezium.

Extend your thinking 22

A regular pentagonal garden plot has centre of symmetry O and an area of 86 m2: A

O

Determine the distance OA, rounded to the nearest whole number.

24

The area of a rhombus is 44 cm2, while its side length is 8 cm. Determine the acute angle θ of this rhombus, rounded to the nearest degree.

25

A regular n-sided polygon is inscribed in a circle of radius r cm.

23

A triangle and a parallelogram share a common base of 21 cm and have the same area. The other sides of the triangle are 17 cm and 10 cm. Determine the height of the parallelogram.

Determine the formula for the area of the n-sided polygon, in terms of n and r.

11.07 Area of non-right angled triangles mathspace.co

989


11.08

Mixed applications

After this lesson, you will be able to… • select appropriate trigonometric methods based on the type of triangle and unknowns. • choose between the sine rule and cosine rule appropriately. • combine different trigonometric rules to solve problems. • apply trigonometry to solve real-world problems.

Further problem solving with trigonometry When solving problems involving triangles, it is important to choose an appropriate strategy based on the given and needed information. First recall the strategies for non-right triangles: For a triangle with sides a, b, and c, with corresponding angles A, B, and C: The sine rule: a b c sin(A ) sin (B) sin(C ) Alternatively, for finding an unknown angle: sin(A ) sin(B) sin(C ) a b c The cosine rule: c2 = a2 + b2 – 2ab cos (C) Alternatively, for finding an unknown angle: a2 b2 c2 2ab

cos (C )

This flowchart shows when each strategy can be used to find side lengths and angles. Is your triangle a right-angled triangle?

Yes What are you finding? Angle θ = sin−1 ( HO ) θ = cos−1 ( HA ) θ = tan−1 ( AO ) No Pythagoras’ Theorem a2 + b2 = c2

990

Side Do you have an angle?

Sine rule a b C sin (A) sin (B) sin (C) Cosine rule c2 = a2 + b2 − 2ab cos (C)

No What are you finding? Angle Do you have another angle?

Side Do you have a “pair”? (angle and opposite side)

No Cosine rule

No Cosine rule

Yes Sine rule

Yes Sine rule

Yes sin (θ ) = HO cos (θ ) = HA tan (θ ) = AO

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


For a triangle with side lengths a and b and an included angle C, the area of the triangle is given by: Area

1 ab sin (C) 2

For a triangle with side lengths a, b, and c the area of the triangle is given by: Area = s ( s a) (s b) ( s c) , where s

a b c 2

Example 1 Calculate the length of y in metres. Round your answer to one decimal place. A

6° 14

143° B

y

C

D

Create a strategy Since two angles and a non-included side are known, use the sine rule:

a b sin (A ) sin (B)

Apply the idea a b sin (A ) sin (B) 14 y sin( 143°) sin(6°) 14 y sin ( 143° ) = 2.4 m

Write the sine rule Substitute a = 14, A = 143°, b = y, and B = 6° sin (6° )

Multiply both sides of the equation by sin (6°) Evaluate and round

11.08 Mixed applications mathspace.co

991


Example 2 Consider this diagram: P 33 km 62°

O

40° 20 km Q a Calculate the direct distance, x km, from P to Q. Round your answer to two decimal places.

Create a strategy Identify whether the triangle is right-angled or not and examine the information given about its sides and angles. Since two sides and the included angle are known, use the cosine rule: c2 = a2 + b2 – 2ab cos (C)

Apply the idea The △POQ is non-right-angled, so either the sine or cosine rule must be used. In △POQ, two sides are known, and the included angle can be found, so the cosine rule should be used. ∠POQ + 62° + 40° = 180° Write the equation of angles on a straight line ∠POQ = 180° – 62° – 40°

Subtract 62° and 40° from both sides

= 78°

Evaluate

c2 = a2 + b2 – 2ab cos (C) 2

2

x

332 20 2 2 33 20

Write the equation for the cosine rule

2

x = 33 + 20 – 2 × 33 × 20 × cos (78°) Substitute c = x, a = 33, b = 20 and C = 78° cos (78˚ ) Take the square root of both sides

≈ 34.85 km

Evaluate and round

b Calculate the area A, in km2, enclosed by triangle POQ. Round your answer to two decimal places.

Create a strategy A triangle with known side lengths and the included angle is given, so use the area rule: Area

992

1 ab sin (C) 2

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Apply the idea Area

1 ab sin (C) 2

Write the sine area formula

1 33 20 sin (78˚) 2

Substitute a = 33, b = 20, and C = 78°

= 322.79 km2

Evaluate and round

c Calculate the bearing, α, of Q from P. Round your answer to the nearest degree.

Create a strategy Add the bearing of point O from P and ∠OPQ.

Apply the idea N P

α 33 km 62°

O

40° 20 km

The bearing of Q from P is labelled as α on the diagram. It is made up of the angle ∠OPQ and the bearing of O from P. The bearing of O from P forms a co-interior angle with the 62° angle, so the two angles add up to 180°. Therefore, the bearing of O from P is 180° – 62° = 118°.

Q To find ∠OPQ, either the sine rule or the cosine rule can be applied, as all three sides and two angle-side pairs are known. In this case, the cosine rule is the most suitable and will be used. cos (C ) cos ( OPQ)

a2 b2 c2 2 a b 332 34.852 202 2 33 34.85

= 0.827582 ∠OPQ = cos −1 (0.827582) ≈ 34°

Write the cosine rule Substitute a = 33, b = 34.85, c = 20, C = ∠OPQ Evaluate the right-hand side Take the inverse cosine Evaluate and round

Find α by adding ∠OPQ and the bearing of O from P.

α = 118 + 34° = 152°

Add the angles Evaluate

11.08 Mixed applications mathspace.co

993


Example 3 Farmer Joe has a trapezoidal shaped paddock. He is trying to calculate the area and has some of the measurements of the paddock. a What is the area of his paddock? Round your answer to the nearest square metre. 44 m 82 m

34° 68 m

13.7°

68 m

70 m

Create a strategy Dissect the trapezoid into rectangles and triangles and find each of their areas using the area of a rectangle and sine area formula.

Apply the idea The diagram shows a rectangle and two right-angled triangles. The sine area formula will be used to solve for the area of the triangles. All the areas of the resulting rectangles and triangles need to be added to determine the area of the trapezium. Atrapezium = Arectangle + Atriangle 1 + Atriangle 2 Write the equation for area of trapezium 1 1 ab sin (C) ab sin (C) Substitute the formulas for 2 2 the areas of each shape 1 1 68 44 82 68 sin( 34° ) 70 68 sin( 13.7°) Substitute the values 2 2 = 5115 m2 Evaluate and round = Length × Width

b For the neighbouring paddock, Farmer Joe’s son Jack decides he can determine the area with fewer measurements. He measures the following: 90 m 70 m

85°

100°

65 m

What is the area of the neighbouring paddock? Round your answer to two decimal places.

Create a strategy Find the diagonal length first using the cosine rule, then add all the areas of the triangle using the sine area formula.

994

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Apply the idea Solving for the diagonal length, c, using the top-right triangle: c2 = a2 + b2 – 2ab cos (C) 2

Write the cosine rule

2

= 90 + 65 – 2 × 90 × 65 × cos (100°)

Substitute a = 90, b = 65, C = 100°

902 652 2 90 65 cos ( 100 )

Take the square root of both sides

cc =

= 119.8194 m

Evaluate

The area of the paddock can now be determined by adding the areas of the two triangles. Atotal = Atriangle 1 + Atriangle 2

Write the equation for total area

1 1 = ab sin (C) + ab sin (C) Substitute the area formulas into the 2 2 equation 1 1 = × 90 ×65 × sin (100°) + × 70 × 119.8194 × sin (85°) Substitute the values 2 2 = 7058.28 m2

Evaluate and round

Idea summary he sine rule is used when an opposite side-angle pair and one other side or angle T is known: a b c sin (A ) sin (B) sin (C )

Used to find a side

sin ( A ) sin ( B) sin (C ) a b c

Used to find an angle

The cosine rule is used when two sides and an included angle or all three sides are known: c2 = a2 + b2 – 2ab cos (C) cos ( C )

2

a

2

Used to find a side

2

b c 2ab

Used to find an angle

The sine area formula is used when side lengths a and b are given and ∠C is between the two sides: Area

1 ab sin (C) 2

Heron’s formula is used to find the area when all sides are given: Area

s (s a) (s b) ( s c) , where s

a

b 2

c

11.08 Mixed applications mathspace.co

995


11.08 Practice questions What do you remember? 1

For each triangle, identify the type of information provided from these options: • SSA: Two sides and an adjacent angle • SAS: Two sides and the angle between them • SAA: Two angles and a non-included side • ASA: Two angles and the side between them • SSS: Three sides a

25 cm 22 cm

b

c

120°

8.5 m

40 cm 68°

5m

d

20

32

105°

33° 40 2

For each triangle, suggest if the sine, cosine or both rules could be used to find all remaining sides and angles in the triangle: a

Three sides are known.

b

Two of the angles and the side included between them are known.

a

b

B

c A

c c

Two of the angles and a side not included between them are known.

d

Two of the sides and an angle included between them are known. C

B b

a

A b 3

996

Determine whether sine rule or cosine rule is more appropriate to use to solve for a missing side or angle given these conditions: a

Two sides and a non-included angle

b

Two angles and one side

c

Two sides and the included angle

d

All three sides

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


4

Determine the most appropriate formula to use from the list: • Pythagoras’ theorem • Sine rule

5

• Cosine rule • Sine area formula

• Bearings

a

A triangle has side lengths of 7 cm and 10 cm with the included angle of 65°. Determine the length of the third side.

b

In a right-angled triangle, the hypotenuse is 13 cm, and one side is 5 cm. Determine the length of the other side.

c

A triangle has ∠A = 47°, side a = 12 cm, and ∠B = 59°. Determine the length of side b.

d

Two sides of a triangle are 9 cm and 11 cm with an included angle of 60°. Determine the area of the triangle.

e

A ship is located 15 km from a port, P, on a true bearing of 120°. The ship then sails 8 km on a bearing of 210°. Determine the distance from the ship to the port.

△ABC consists of angles A, B and C which appear opposite sides a, b and c respectively. If the measures of a, c and A are given, which rule should be used to calculate the measure of ∠C, the sine rule or the cosine rule?

Practice 6

For each triangle: i

Identify the type of information provided from these options: • SSA: Two sides and an adjacent angle • SAS: Two sides and the angle between them • SAA: Two angles and a non-included side • ASA: Two angles and the side between them • SSS: Three sides

ii

Determine which rule — the sine rule, cosine rule, or both — can be used to start solving the problem.

iii

Determine the value of x, rounded to the nearest whole number.

a

x 8 cm

b

16 47°

41°

9 cm x km

5 cm c

54° x mm 155 mm

d 50° 575 m

685 m

70° x

11.08 Mixed applications mathspace.co

997


7

Glenda is riding her bike up a hill, from the beach, that has an incline of 5°. If she rides her bike 817 m up the hill, starting from 10 m above sea level, find h, the height above sea level Glenda reaches at the top of the hill, rounded to the nearest metre.

8

A forest ranger at point A sights a fire directly north. A second ranger at a point B, 8.4 km east of A, sights the same fire at a bearing N31°W. How far from A is the fire? Round your answer to two decimal places.

N

b 31°

W

E

8.4 km A

9

B

A wooden plank of the greatest possible length is placed in a garden shed. Calculate the length of the plank of wood, rounded to one decimal place. 1.8 m

0.93 m 3.4 m

10

A student created a scale model of Australia and drew a triangle between Alice Springs, Brisbane and Adelaide: a

b

11

Determine the area taken up by the triangle. Round your answer to two decimal places.

Alice Springs

θ°

23.4 cm

Brisbane

14.7 cm 18.6 cm Adelaide

Neil is standing 160 cm from a mirror. He notices that the angle of depression from his eyes to the bottom of the mirror is 14°, while the angle of elevation to the top of the mirror is 13°. a

998

Determine the angle θ, between Brisbane and Adelaide from Alice Springs. Round your answer to one decimal place.

Calculate the value of x. Round your answer to two decimal places.

b

Calculate the value of y. Round your answer to two decimal places.

c

Determine the vertical height of the mirror.

Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

13° 14°

x y


12

A boat passes by a marker, M, which is known to be 3000 m from island, I. The boat is going to the west along line ML and ∠IML = 27°. After 10 minutes, the boat is at S and∠ISL = 64°. a

b

Determine the direct distance of the boat from the island when it is at S. Round your answer to one decimal place.

I 3000 m

Determine the distance of the boat to the island from point L. Round your answer to one decimal place.

The horizontal distance between the cockpit at the first sighting and the point directly above the airport is x m. Determine the value of x. Round your answer to one decimal place.

b

x y 57°

The horizontal distance between the cockpit at the second sighting and the point directly above the airport is y m.

67° 3000 m

Determine the value of y. Round your answer to one decimal place. 14

M

From the cockpit of an aeroplane flying at an altitude of 3000 m, the angle of depression to the airport is 57°. The aeroplane continues to fly in the same straight line, and after a few minutes the angle of depression to the airport becomes 67°. a

Ex 1

27°

S

L 13

θ

64°

Airport

For this diagram: a b

θ

Determine the value of θ. Round your answer to two decimal places. Determine the value of d. Round your answer to one decimal place.

d 12.4 cm 49°

7.5 cm 15

A fighter jet, flying in a straight line at an altitude of 2000 m is approaching an airport. The pilot measures the angle of depression to the airport to be 13°. One minute later, the pilot measures the angle of depression again and finds it to be 16°. Determine the distance covered by the jet in that one minute, rounded to the nearest metre.

11.08 Mixed applications mathspace.co

999


16

An aeroplane flies 160 km from an airport in a direction 150°. How far south of the airport is the plane then? Round your answer to two decimal places. B

150°

160 km

C

Ex 2

17

For this diagram: a

60° A

P

Calculate the direct distance from P to Q. Round your answer to two decimal places.

b

Calculate the area enclosed by triangle POQ. Round your answer to two decimal places.

c

Calculate the true bearing of Q from P, rounded to two decimal places.

36 km 54° O 34° 28 km

Q Ex 3

18

Farmer Alex has a trapezoidal shaped orchard. He is trying to calculate the area and has some of the measurements of the orchard as shown on the diagram: 50 m 20.76° 90 m

36.87° 72 m

77 m 72 m

100 m 98°

75 m

62 m

82°

a

Determine the area of his orchard as illustrated on the first diagram. Round your answer to the nearest square metre.

b

For the adjacent orchard, Farmer Alex’s daughter Mia decides she can determine the area with fewer measurements. Determine the area of the adjacent orchard as indicated in the second diagram. Round your answer to the nearest square metre.

19

Jim and Bob both cycle from their house. Jim travels 120 m on a bearing of 120° while Bob travels 200 m on a bearing of 60°. a

Determine the distance, x m, between Jim and Bob. Round your answer to one decimal place.

b

Determine the bearing of Jim from Bob. Round your answer to one decimal place.

1000 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Extend your thinking 20

21

Two hikers, Alice and Ben, start at a campsite C. Alice hikes 8 km on a bearing of 030°, arriving at point A, while Ben hikes 12 km on a bearing of 110°, arriving at point B. A ranger at a lookout tower T, located 15 km from the campsite on a bearing of 340°, spots both hikers. a

Construct a solution to find the straight-line distance between Alice and Ben, rounded to one decimal place.

b

Investigate whether the ranger can determine the bearing of Alice from Ben using only the given distances and bearings from the campsite. If possible, calculate this bearing, rounded to the nearest degree; if not, explain what additional information is needed and why.

A yacht departs from port A and travels on a bearing of 120° at a speed of 15 km/h for 3 hours, reaching point B. The yacht then changes course and sails on a bearing of 040° for 2 hours at the same speed, reaching point C. A small boat is at point D on a bearing of 050°, 50 km away from A. The boat is notified of a distress signal from the yacht at point C. On what bearing should the boat travel to get to the yacht?

22

An architect is designing a triangular support frame for a bridge. The frame has a base of 12 m. One side rises from the left end of the base at an angle of 50°, and the other side rises from the right end at an angle of 65°. a

Construct a solution to find the lengths of the two slanted sides of the frame, rounded to two decimal places.

b

Determine the height of the peak above the base, rounded to two decimal places.

c

Investigate whether the architect could adjust the angles to increase the frame’s area by at least 15% while keeping the base length and horizontal peak position fixed. Provide one possible pair of angles and justify your reasoning.

Investigation: Triangle inequality

Investigate online

mathspace.co

Chapter 11 review

Online review

mathspace.co

11.08 Mixed applications 1001 mathspace.co


Answers

9 a Ratio

1.01 Types of data What do you remember? 1 a Categorical

b Numerical

c Variable

d Interval

2 a True

b False

c True

d False

b Interval

c Nominal

d Ordinal

10 a i Yes

ii Yes

iii Yes

iv No

b i Yes c i Yes

ii Yes

iii No

iv No

ii No

iii No

d i Yes

iv No

ii Yes

iii Yes

iv Yes

11 a Continuous, because it is a measurement. b Discrete, the values are obtained from counting.

e True 3 a Categorical

b Numerical

c Numerical

d Categorical

e Numerical

f Categorical

g Numerical

h Numerical

i Categorical

j Categorical

k Categorical

l Numerical

Practice 4 a Discrete

b Continuous

c Continuous

d Continuous

e Continuous

f Discrete

g Discrete

h Continuous

i Continuous 5 a Nominal

b Ordinal

c Ordinal

d Nominal

e Nominal

f Ordinal

6 a Categorical nominal b Numerical continuous c Numerical continuous d Categorical nominal

Extend your thinking 12 Vera is incorrect, the pain rating data has an ordinal scale. While the data is numerical, the difference between ratings is not clearly defined and forms a subjective scale rather than a scale of equal intervals. The difference between ratings of 9 and 8 cannot be meaningfully compared to the difference between ratings of 2 and 3. 13 The distance between towns can be measured to varying degrees of accuracy and recorded to certain decimal places. It can take on any value depending on the measuring device used, and the value recorded by the observer. The distances on road signs are just rounded for convenience. 14 Whilst discrete data can only take distinct values, these values do not need to be whole numbers. Money is restricted to the nearest cent, 2 decimal places. There are no values ‘in between’ $245.10 and $245.11 15 Whilst data from both data types involve numbers, ‘postcodes’ hold no mathematical meaning unlike ‘the number of houses in a postcode’. A postcode is just a label for a particular location, hence why it is categorical data. The number of houses in a postcode is collected by counting the number of houses and therefore is numerical data.

e Numerical discrete f Numerical discrete g Numerical continuous h Numerical discrete 7 a Categorical b Numerical continuous c Categorical d Numerical continuous e Numerical discrete 8 a Ratio

b Interval

d Ratio

e Ratio

c Nominal f Ordinal

g Interval

h Ordinal

i Interval

1002 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


10 a Ordinal

1.02 Categorical data displays

b 1 a False

b True

d True

e False

Satisfaction level

What do you remember? c True

2 a A-football, B-volleyball, C-basketball, D-tennis

Customer satisfaction Very satisfied Satisfied Neutral Unsatisfied Very unsatisfied 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 Frequency

b A-beach, B-skiing, C-fun park, D-camping c iii

11 a Nominal

d i

b Practice

Gourmet Quick meals Italian Baking

4 a Fruit Frequency

Apples

Bananas

Grapes

Pears

10

15

6

3

b Number of siblings

0

1

2

3

Frequency

12

15

3

5

1

2 3 4 Frequency

5

12 a 45

Cars

Planes

7

13

Balls Video games 6

c Frequency

Frequency

0

b Black

c Toy

Grandparents’ cookbooks

Type of cookbook

b iv

15

d Mode of transport

Car

Frequency

9

Plane Boat

5 a 82

13

20 15 10 5 0

5

Black Brown Blue

b Football

6 a Hockey is the mode, which means it is the most popular sport. b 6 students c 38 students 7 a BMW is the mode, indicating that BMW cars are the most commonly fixed by the mechanic. b Toyota and Mitsubishi 8 a Wednesday b Tuesday and Friday 1 c 2 9 a Birds is the mode, indicating that birds are the most preferred animal among Edward’s students.

Red Yellow

Colour 13 a 39 b On-time c

25 20 Number of people

3 a ii

15 10 5 0 Early

On-time Time

Late

b Hamsters and dogs 5 c 20

Answers 1003 mathspace.co


14 a 42

ii

Languages spoken

b 2 min c

15

Number of people

Number of people

20 15 10

10

5

5 0 0

Type of holiday

3

Extend your thinking

Number of friends

Beach

4

Camping

2

Caravan

5

Snow

1

Total

12

ii

16 a

58

61

71

81

93

Frequency

3

4

5

5

4

b 21

c

d 4

e 19.05%

17

Holidays 5 4 3 2

ow

n va

Sn

m Ca

ra

pi

ac Be

Ca

h

0

a

Number of people

1

13

2

4

3

3

Total

20

Points

Number of languages

60 55 50 45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0

b Green c Red

1004 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

5

Disneyland visitors

2008 2009 2010 2011 Year

2012

18

Type of holiday b i

165 150 135 120 105 90 75 60 45 30 15 0

1 ng

Number of friends

Score

Number of people (in hundred thousand)

15 a i

2 Minutes

1

2 3 1 Number of languages

Swimming carnival results

Yellow

Blue Red House

Green


19 a Product D b 46 000 units c $300 000 20 a Yes, the tallest person is Kate from the height graph and she is also the oldest person from the age graph.

e Without class intervals. The number of pets owned is discrete and usually doesn’t vary widely, so an ungrouped frequency table suffices. 3 a 16

b 6

4 a True

b False

b No, the heaviest person is John and he is not the oldest. The oldest is Kate.

5 a 6

b 10 hours

c No, the heaviest person is John and he is not the tallest. The tallest is Kate.

6 a 14

b 51

d No, the youngest person is Tom and the lightest person is Kate.

Practice

e Yes, based on the data, Kate which is 10 years old is lighter than John who is 8 years old. John weighs 45 kg while Kate weighs 20 kg.

7 a

Score (x)

c False

d True

c 127

d

Frequency

10 → 19

3

20 → 29

4

30 → 39

2

1.03 Numerical data displays

40 → 49

1

What do you remember?

50 → 59

1

1 a Data that has very few different data values, each with a high frequency.

b

b A large data set that has a wide spread of varied data values. c A small to medium-sized data set of discrete or rounded continuous data with a large range. d A small to medium-sized data set that has very few different data values, each with a high frequency. e A large data that has a wide spread of varied continuous or rounded continuous data values.

Score (x)

Frequency

30 → 39

5

40 → 49

4

50 → 59

2

60 → 69

8

70 → 79

3

80 → 89

3

8 a In theory, 194.999. . . cm, but realistically 194.9. . . cm b 11 c

Year 11 heights

2 a With class intervals. Income data, which can vary widely, is best presented in class intervals to simplify analysis.

c Without class intervals, since the number of books read is discrete and typically not a large range, an ungrouped frequency table provides clear information. d With class intervals, instead of listing each score, use class intervals to better understand performance distribution.

15

Frequency

b Without class intervals. Preferred hobbies are categorical, and each category is distinct.

127 281

10

5

0

135 145 155 165 175 185 195 Heights (cm)

Answers 1005 mathspace.co


9 a 10 → 19, 20 → 29, 30 → 39, 40 → 49, 50 → 59, 60 → 69, and 70 → 79 b

Score (x)

Frequency

10 → 19

7

20 → 29

3

30 → 39

2

40 → 49

3

50 → 59

6

60 → 69

4

70 → 79

4

c

47 14

48

49

50

51

52

Goals scored

0

1

2

3

4

5

Frequency

1

9

8

7

9

3

Frequency

Score distribution 8

15 a

6 4 2 0

10 a

13

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 Score

10

20

30

40

50

Frequency

9

8

8

6

6

b 20

c 17

16 a 21

b 4

17 a

Leaf

Frequency

1

1 233 44667

0≤t<2

0

2

02499

2≤t<4

1

3

2555

4≤t<6

3

4

6≤t<8

8

5

8 ≤ t < 10

10

10 ≤ t < 12

3

Total:

25

b 25 students

c 13 students

d 4

e 16%

11 a 96 people

b 51 people

c 40 people

3 Key 1|2 = 12

b

Stem

Leaf

2

456

3

67 778

4

1 69

5

6 37 789

x

f

cf

6

1→5

16

16

7

5

6 → 10

28

44

8

00

11 → 15

19

63

16 → 20

17

80

21 → 25

5

85

26 → 30

3

88

b 88

c 10

Stem

Number of hours

12 a

Score

c 5

Key 1|2 = 12

d 10

1006 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

d

11 21


c

Stem

Extend your thinking

Leaf

0

7

1

8

2

002

3

4

4

39

5

0

21 T he dot plot is a better choice than a stem plot for this data because it clearly shows the frequency of each temperature, making it easier to spot clusters, gaps, and outliers. Since the values are rounded and fall within a small range, the dot plot provides a simpler and more effective way to visualise the distribution.

6

7 78

22 a

7

89

8

1 29

9

0028 Key 1|8 = 1.8

d

Stem

Leaf

f

0 ≤ x < 20

7

7

D

20 ≤ x < 40

16

23

C

40 ≤ x < 60

35

58

B

60 ≤ x < 80

102

160

A

80 ≤ x < 100

72

232

b 232

c 20

d 60

589

12

1 36

Weight (kg)

Frequency

13

078

15 < x ≤ 16

1

14

2469

16 < x ≤ 17

2

23 a

15

27

17 < x ≤ 18

2

16

27

18 < x ≤ 19

1

17

356

19 < x ≤ 20

3

18

0

20 < x ≤ 21

4

21 < x ≤ 22

2

18 a 28

b 99

c 71

d 28

cf

E

11

Key 12|3 = 123

19

x

Grade

b 9

c $12.00

24 a 75 cars

b 17 drivers

Score

Frequency

10 − 19

4

20 − 29

6

25 There are 795 total number of cars. Therefore, they did meet the target.

30 − 39

3

40 − 49

26 a 126

5

50 − 59

2

20 a Histogram. This is a very large data set that could have a fairly large spread. b Dot plot. This is a small data set that will likely have a very small spread, which is best displayed with a dot plot. c Stem plot. This is a small-medium data set that will likely have a wide spread of one and two digit numbers, which is best displayed with a stem plot as it is possible to keep the original data values and organise it for analysis.

c i $4620

ii 45

b 17

c 105

d 37.5%

1.04 Measures of centre What do you remember? 1 a i 5

ii 20

iii 4

b i 5

ii 15

iii 3

c i 5

ii 18

iii 3.6

d i 5

ii 25

iii 5

e i 8

ii 618

iii 77.25

f i 8

ii – 58

iii – 7.25

Answers 1007 mathspace.co


2 a i 6, 8, 9, 11, 17, 18

17 a 32

ii 10

b i 46.6, 52.8, 63.9, 66.7, 69.4, 76.6, 80.6 ii 66.7 c i – 77.6, – 54.8, – 42.6, 40.6, 44.9, 45.6, 67.9, 74.7 ii 42.75 3 $1.64 Practice

c 36.5

The typical age is best represented by the median age of 32, as it accounts for the middle value in the distribution and aligns with the mode, reflecting the most common age in the company. 18 a False

b False

d False

e False

19 a 8, 14

b 26

c True c 30

d 71

4 a 18

b 732

5 a i 67.5

ii 60 ≤ x < 80

20 a 74.07 hours b 73 hours

c 67 hours

ii 30 − 34

21 a 41 games

b 107 goals

c 2.61

22 a 27.73

b 30

c 30, 35

b i 32.0

c 40.67

b 32

d 32

6 a Class

Class centre, cc

Frequency, f

f × cc

22 − 24

23

5

115

25 − 27

26

6

156

28 − 30

29

8

232

31 − 33

32

5

160

34 − 36

35

4

140

Total:

28

803

b 28 − 30

b i 7.88 h

ii 9 h

c 8 h ≤ Time < 10 h 24 a 135.00 – 139.9

b 33.33%

Extend your thinking 25 19.87 26 78 27 37, 39, 41, 43

c 28.68 7 a

23 a 25 students

28 Mode, median and mean

Score (x)

Frequency ( f )

fx

4

11

44

5

7

35

30 300

10

16

160

31 a 15

14

9

126

Total

43

365

b 8.49

c 10

d 18

8 16 9 x=1

b False

c True

b 13.29

What do you remember? b 8.75

c 2.92

1 a iii: Negative skew

12 35

b ii: Uniform

13 76 and 77

c vi: No clear shape, multimodal

14 a 643.5

b 13

15 a 34

b 48

16 a 90 minutes

b 25%

d v: Bimodal e i: Symmetrical f iv: Positive skew c $80 000

1008 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

d False

c Median, because the one score of 2 does not reflect the overall trend and can be considered an outlier, and drags down the mean. The median better reflects the overall trend in the data set.

1.05 Data distribution

10 Higher 11 a 105

29 a False


2 a True

b True

c False

d True

e False

f True

11 3 12 a 5 kg

g False 3 a Symmetrical

b Positively skewed

c Negatively skewed

d Negatively skewed

4 Positively skewed 5 a i Symmetrical

13 Median, because the data is negatively skewed. 14 a 20 seconds

b 20 seconds

c Second attempt, because there are no outliers.

ii None

iii

Yes

b i Asymmetrical

ii 91

iii

No

Extend your thinking

c i Asymmetrical

ii 32 and 48 iii

No

15 6, 7, 11, 11 16 The heavy right skew in the sales data suggests that most salespeople have low sales numbers, while a few have very high sales numbers.

Practice 6 a

Novel genres 20

17 The teacher might consider that the symmetrical distribution indicates a more consistent performance across students, while the positively skewed distribution suggests that most students scored lower, with a few high achievers. The teacher should also consider using measures of centre and spread to compare the two classes more accurately.

Frequency

15 10 5 0

5 10 15 20 25 30 35 Price

b Symmetrical 7 a 18

b 21.74

8 a i No

ii 26, 36

iii Symmetrical b i No

18 Week 1, because there are no outliers. 19 Morning flight, because the positive skew will affect the median less than the mean.

1.06 Quartiles and spread

c Positively skewed

ii 15 and 21

What do you remember? 1 a False

b True

c True

d False

e True

f True

b 31

c 2.2981

iii Symmetrical

2 a 13

9 a Uniform distribution b Clusters and gaps

3 a One person in the group

10 a

c Median = 5

b 5.86 kg

c 16 names

b 15 people

d 10 names

e 6

Score

Frequency

40 − 49

3

4 10.5

50 − 59

3

5 a 5, 7, 12, 13, 15, 16, 20

60 − 69

5

b 7

c 13

d 15

70 − 79

7

e 7

f 16

g 9

80 − 89

8

90 − 99

6

100 − 109

8

110 − 119

4

Practice 6 23 7 23

b Symmetrical c i No

ii Yes

iii No

8 a 78 hours

b 79 hours

c 72 hours

d 29 hours

Answers 1009 mathspace.co


9 a i Q1 = 1

Q1 = 24

17 50

ii Q3 = 32

18 70

b i

ii Q3 = 9 c i Q1 = 15

d i

ii Q3 = 26.5

Q1 = 16

ii Q3 = 24.5

10 a i 7

b i

7

ii 38

ii 1

iii 33

iii − 3

iv 48

iv 9

v 15

d i

ii 28

iii 27

iii 13

iv 40

iv 38

v 13

v 25 b 20

c 36.5

d 9.5

e 4

f 5

g 13.5

h 17.5

x

f

fx

cf

7

4

28

4

8

8

64

12

9

18

162

30

10

24

240

54

Total

54

494

13 a 75

b 8

d 10

Range

Interquartile range

18

14

18

7

Median

Mode

Range

Interquartile range

36

24

54

21

20 The missing data value is 3.0 and the interquartile range is 0.35.

11 a 18

c 9

Mode

19

ii 35

b 9

Median

b

v 12

c i 15

12 a

19 a

21 a For Group 1, the range is 39, the interquartile range is 23 (116.5 – 93.5), the median is 99 and the mean is approximately 104.24 For Group 2, the range is 30, the interquartile range is 18 (105 – 87), the median is 100 and the mean is approximately 97.48 b The mean of Group 1 is higher than that of Group 2, which suggests that Group 1, on average, scored higher on the EQ test. c The spread of Group 1 is larger than that of Group 2, indicating that there is a greater variability in EQ scores within Group 1 than within Group 2.

e 1

c 3 The interquartile range (IQR) of 3 means that the middle 50% of the fishing trips had between 23 and 26 fish caught. This indicates a moderate spread in the central portion of the data. 14 a 11 b 3 The interquartile range of 3 indicates that the middle 50% of the temperatures fall within 3 degrees. c Half of the data has a spread of 33 degrees, so this statement is an exaggeration. There is certainly some variation, but not a ‘huge’ amount. Extend your thinking 15 a 36 beats per minute b 360 seconds longer 16 8.8

1010 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

1.07 Box plots What do you remember? 1

26

33

41

44

45

2 a iv: Minimum - Lowest value b v: Lower quartile, Q1 - At most 25% of the data is below this value c ii: Median - 50% of the data lies on either side of this value d iii: Upper quartile, Q3 - At most 25% of the data is above this value e i: Maximum - Highest value 3 a i 19

ii 11

b i 34

ii 15


4 a True

b True

d False

e True

5 a 3

b 18

d 10

e 7

6 a iv

b iii

c True

9 a i

c 15 c i

d ii

Practice 7 a

Minimum

2

Lower quartile

7

Median

13

Upper quartile

15

Maximum

16

Interquartile range

8

ii

Data

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 b

0 b i

0 8 a

20

10

30

Minimum

4

Lower quartile

18

Median

28

Upper quartile

46

Maximum

56

40

5

10

15

Minimum

4

Lower quartile

18

Median

28

Upper quartile

46

Maximum

56

Interquartile range

28

ii

20

Data

b

0 c i 0

10

20

30

40

50

60

10

20

30

40

Minimum

10

Lower quartile

11.5

Median

14

Upper quartile

17.5

Maximum

19

Interquartile range

6

50

60

Answers 1011 mathspace.co


ii

13 a Many possible answers, such as “How many hours do most students study per week?” and “What is the variation in the number of study hours among students?”

Data

b C

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 d i

c The typical student in this group studied for 12 hours per week. The middle half of students studied between 8 and 18 hours per week, giving an interquartile range of 10 hours. The total range of study hours for the group is 24 hours, with the fewest hours being 4 and the most being 28 hours per week.

Minimum

71

Lower quartile

74.5

14 • Box Plot 1/Histogram E

Median

79

• Box Plot 2/Histogram A

Upper quartile

82.5

• Box Plot 3/Histogram B

Maximum

89

Interquartile range

8

ii

• Box Plot 4/Histogram D • Box Plot 5/Histogram F • Box Plot 6/Histogram C Extend your thinking

Data

15 a 11.10 mm c

b 0.3 mm Glass width

70 72 74 76 78 80 82 84 86 88 90 10.7 10.8 10.9 11.0 11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4

10 a i 2

ii 8

iii 12

iv 18

v 32

vi 10

d 78.95%

b i 3

ii 8

iii 10

f i No

iv 15

v 18

vi 7

c i 2

ii 5

iii 6.5

c Athletes

d 14

iv 7

v 9.5

vi 2

e 24

f Athletes

d i 43

ii 48

iii 52

iv 55

v 58

vi 7

11 a i 50%

ii 25%

iii 50%

iv 75%

v 75%

d 7

ii No

iii Yes

iv Yes

16 a 50 beats per minute b 62 beats per minute

17 At least 75% of the time, he blacks out for less than 4.5 seconds, he will occasionally black out for longer than 7 seconds. 18 a 30

b 42.5

c 26.5

d

b 2nd 12 a 31 years

e 2nd

b 17 years

c 25%

e 1st

f 5 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80

1012 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


19 a The box plot has a long tail to the right which indicates positive skew, while the histogram does not appear to be skewed. The median for the histogram is roughly in the middle, while the median of the box plot is located further to the left.

v

b The box plot indicates that the data is widely spread, while the histogram indicates that most of the data occurs near the median.

b i

0

1

1 a i 11

b i

ii – 10.5

ii – 9

iii 33.5

iii 31

4

5 2

Q1

11.5

Median

16

Q3

20

Maximum

38

ii – 1.25

10

3

Minimum

1.08 Outliers What do you remember?

2

iii 32.75

6

7

8

9

iv 36, 38

v

2 a The mode does not change. b The range always decreases.

0

c Usually no impact 3 a Larger

b Smaller c Larger

d Smaller

5

10

15 20 25 30 35

40

9 a 9 b 61 and 101 are outliers because the lower fence is 63.5 and the upper fence is 99.5. 61 < 63.5 and 101 > 99.5, so since these are outside of the fences they are outliers.

4 6 Practice 5 a

Minimum

2

Q1

3

Median

6

Q3

9

Maximum

10

b 6

c –6

e No

f No

6 a 131

b 47

c

60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 d 18

10 a

c 25, 30

7 2002 8 a i

ii 1.1

Minimum

1.6

Q1

3.5

Median

3.75

Q3

5.1

Maximum

7.6

iii 7.5

100 120 140 160 180 200 220

iv 7.6

Answers 1013 mathspace.co


ii 4.7

b

iii

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

1.61

Median

1.5

Mode

0.9

Range

1.9

iv The mean, median and range decreased, but the mode stayed the same. c i

c

Mean

Mean

4540

Median

4750

Mode

4700

Range

3800

ii 1500 60

70

80

90

100

110

iii

d

Mean

4877.78

Median

4800

Mode

4700

Range

800

iv The mean and median increased, the range decreased, but the mode stayed the same. 20

26

32

38

44

50

56

62

14 a $816 000

b $760 000

c $725 000

d $760 000

e Median, because the outlier does not affect it.

11 44.56 12 17 Mean

45

15 Median because it is less affected by the unusually high score (the outlier).

Median

39

16 a

Mode

27

Range

102

13 a i

ii 126 iii

Mean

36

Median

37

Mode

27

Range

26

Minimum

150

Q1

190

Median

195

Q3

215

Maximum

280

b 150 and 280 are outside the lower and upper fences of 152.5 and 252.5 c

iv The mean, median and range of the data decreased, but the mode stayed the same. b i

Mean

1.92

Median

1.7

Mode

0.9

Range

3.8

1014 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 d The low outlier may be someone with a lot of exposure or training to situations that need fast reflexes such as baseball batter or some


computer games, it may also be caused by the participant anticipating the sound and clicking shortly after it by chance. The high outlier is possibly caused by a lapse in concentration of the participant. 17 a 21, 21, 21, 24, 25, 26, 26, 26, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 30, 32, 41, 41, 46, 46, 47, 76

2 a Never true

b Sometimes true

c Never true

d Always true

e Sometimes true 3 a 5.16

b 9.57

4 D 5 a Within 1 standard deviation of the mean

b 28

c 41

b Within 2 standard deviations of the mean

d 25.5

e 23.25

c Within 3 standard deviations of the mean

f 76 Practice

g

20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 h The majority of this group of people is likely to do none to moderate amounts of exercise.

6 a i 79.7809

ii 8.93

b i 34.1

ii 5.84

7 a i 2.01

ii 2.02

b i 1.61

ii 1.66

8 a

18 a If the outlier removed was the largest value then the mean will decrease. If the outlier removed was the smallest value then the mean will increase. b If the outlier removed was the largest value then the median may decrease or remain the same. If the outlier removed was the smallest value then the median may increase or remain the same.

Class

Class centre

Frequency

fx

1−9

5

8

40

10 − 18

14

6

84

19 − 27

23

4

92

28 − 36

32

6

192

37 − 45

41

8

328

32

736

Total b 23.00 c 13.87

d Higher standard deviation, as the actual scores would be more varied than the set of class centres.

Extend your thinking 19 n = 24 20 n = 21

9 a Distribution B

b Distribution B

21 13.3 kilograms

10 a 64%

b 100%

11 a 53.1%

b 100%

22 a 11.2 mm

b 11.15 mm

23 She should use the mean as it is the higher measure of average as it is affected by the outlier.

12 a 47.07

b 25.94

c 60%

d 100%

24 Median, because it is the least affected by the outlier.

13 a 3 games

b 3.5

c 2.95

d 1.75

e 55%

f 100%

1.09 Standard deviation

14 a 12.1 – 32.9

What do you remember? 1 a iii

b v

d i

e ii

c 1.7 – 43.3 c iv

16.48 66% 25 24.32 d 97% 25 b

15 B 16 a 84%

b 50%

c 95%

d 1 and 13

17 Country A

Answers 1015 mathspace.co


18 a

26

30

b 97.59%

34

38

Height of step

Data

Slow

Medium

Fast

Tall step

Average heart rate

98.0

127.0

129.5

Standard deviation of heart rate

2.0

2.0

2.5

42

c 50 931

Extend your thinking 19 Standard deviation measures the variability of the data or how far the values deviate from the mean. Therefore, the higher the standard deviation, the more spread out the values in the histogram are. Observing the four classes, Class X would likely have the highest standard deviation since there are only two columns, and they are far apart, indicating a significant distance between the data values and the mean which would be somewhere in the middle. Next would be Class Z, as the columns are all the same height, suggesting that the data values are spread out from the mean. Class W would have a lower standard deviation, because the data is closer to the mean. Since Class Y has its data values tightly clustered due to the single column, Class Y would have the lowest standard deviation. Arranged by rank: X, Z, W and Y. 20 a $3911 million

b Higher

c Unchanged

d Higher

21 a The Red class, because their mean was 56.4 which was higher than the Blue class’s mean of 56.3 b The Blue class, because their standard deviation was 3.74 which was lower than the Red class’s standard deviation of 4.98

b A short step at a fast stepping rate c A tall step at a fast stepping rate

1.10 Compare sets of data What do you remember? 1 a 6.5 beans

b 6.7 beans

c 7 beans

d 4 beans

e Plant B, because it has a higher mean. f Plant B, because it has a lower range. 2 a Manufacturer A

Manufacturer B

Median

4000

5000

Lower quartile

2500

3500

Upper quartile

4500

6000

Range

4000

6500

Interquartile range

2000

2500

b Manufacturer B, because 50% of their light bulbs last longer than all of Manufacturer A’s light bulbs. 3 a Their medians are the same, so they tended to have similar scores. b Class 8Q

22 a Decreased by 12

b Increased by 4.57

c Neither

c Decreased by 8

d Increased by 20

d Interquartile range e Class 8Q, other than the outlier

23 a Height of step Short step

4 a 75.5

b 79

c 26

e 11

f 18.5

Data

Slow

Medium

Fast

d 35

Average heart rate

90.0

105.5

126.0

Practice

Standard deviation of heart rate

5 a Block A 1.0

0.5

2.0

d Positively skewed

e 4

f Block B

g No

1016 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

b 0 or 1

c 1−3


6 a Both data sets have relatively similar spread, as shown by the range and interquartile range being within one point of one another. The students’ data set has a lower standard deviation of 4.3 compared to the teachers’ data set with a standard deviation of 5.0. The slightly higher IQR and standard deviation for teachers show that they have slightly less consistent heart rates, while the higher range for students means that it may have an outlier. There are many factors such as age, environment, fitness level, and genetic factors that influence heart rate, so all we can conclude is that overall teachers have less consistent heart rates than students, but we cannot make another further conclusions about why. b The heart rates of students are generally lower than those of the teachers. We can see this with the lower mean of 55.7 compared to 58.4 for teachers and the lower median of 56 compared to 58 for teachers. Similarly, we cannot make any conclusions as to why, other than possibly the age difference, so would need to formulate further questions to make any conclusions as to why these differences exist. 7 a 77.69

b 75.69

c 9.98

d 7.63

e 28

f 27

g Group 1

10

Drama German 50

60

70 80 Scores

11 a Bookstore A

9 a i 7.6

ii 7

iii 7

iv 5

b i 7.4

ii 7.5

iii 7

iv 1

c Person A has an IQR of 9.5 – 6 = 3.5 which is higher compared to Person B’s IQR of 8 − 7 = 1, suggesting that Person A has less consistent sleep habits. Person A also has the higher range. d They both got a similar amount of sleep over the 14 nights. Person A’s mean was slightly higher, but Person B’s median was slightly higher.

100

b $10

c True

d True

12 a Matt

b Matt

c Matt

d Matt

13 a Upmarket restaurant

b $22

c Upmarket restaurant

d $36

e 26 14 a Both groups median is 24 b University students’ range is 66 which is higher than the High schools’ students range of 31. c University students read more books, as they have more values in the higher end. However the number of books is less consistent. 15 a 34.3

b 32.5

d 33

e Tricia

c 35.7

16 a Three desserts were ordered at Hotel A on a particular day. b Hotel B

c No

17 a

8 Humbleton, because the mean is higher than the median, so most house prices are higher than $950 000

90

Tim

Odi

Minimum

29.8

26.0

Q1

33.2

34.8

Median

35.0

38.4

Q3

37.4

40.0

Maximum

39.6

42.8

Mean (1 d.p.)

35.1

37.2

Sample standard deviation (2 d.p.)

2.93

4.47

Range

9.8

16.8

Interquartile range

4.2

5.2

b Tim throws more consistently, his range, interquartile range and standard deviation are all significantly smaller.

Answers 1017 mathspace.co


c All of Tim’s scores are within 1.5 × IQR of the median, so no outliers for his data. Odi has an outlier of 26, which is below his lower fence of 27.

b Cooper has an outlier of 66.6, which is above his upper fence of 65.725. All of Marion’s scores are within 1.5 × IQR of the median, so there are no outliers for Marion’s data.

d

c

Tim x

x Cooper Marion

Odi 30

25

40 35 Distance (m)

45

e Odi appears to be the better hammer thrower. His mean is higher and other than the outlier the other values of the five-number summary are all larger for Odi. In particular, his top 25% of throws are larger than any throw from Tim. Odi’s median is also significantly higher (3.4 m) than Tim’s. f A s the next lowest throw is more than 6 m larger than his outlier it appears this throw may have been a misadventure and it would be reasonable to remove it when looking at his mean. Including the outlier would distort how high he usually throws and what he would likely achieve in a competition.

18 a Positively skewed b Berger’s Burgers c Fry’s Fries, because the range is smaller. d Fry’s Fries, because it has a higher median, which is relevant due to the spread of the data. 19 a 69.8 kg

50 55 60 65 Time (seconds)

70

d Cooper e No, a high outlier does not change what the minimum score is, hence it would not alter the selection for pole position. 22 a Negatively skewed b Positively skewed c Yes. The group that got treatment had a lower median and most people had symptoms for less than 9 days. Whereas the control group had half the people having symptoms for more than 9 days. 23 a Weightlifter A, because they have a smaller range and interquartile range.

2.01 Solve linear equations What do you remember? 1 a Add 4 to both sides b Divide both sides by 4

b 58.65 kg c The Men because their mean and maximum values are higher. 20 a Film C, because all the ages are 18 or older. b Film B, because the median age is 16. c Film A, the ages include teenagers and adults with a median of 38.

Minimum

45

b Weightlifter B, because their upper quartile and maximum number of repetitions are both higher than Weightlifter A’s maximum.

Extend your thinking

21 a

40

Cooper

Marion

44.8

47.1

Q1

49.1

54.7

Median

52.5

60.45

Q3

55.75

65.25

Maximum

66.6

68.5

1018 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

c Multiply both sides by 5 1 d Subtract from both sides 5 2 a i 4 (x + 6) ii Divide by 4 then subtract 6 b i – 3x – 7 ii Add 7 then divide by – 3 x 9 c i 3 ii Multiply by 3 then add 9 x d i 8 11 ii Subtract 8 then multiply by 11


3 a i Subtract 5 from both sides

b

ii y = 4

b i Divide both sides by 9 ii p = 4

4 4

c i Add 3 to both sides ii t = – 42

3y 3 3

3y 3 3

2y 4 = 2y – 10 4

Write the given

3 2y 4 = 2y – 10 3 4

C reate common

equation

denominators

6 y 24 = 2y – 10   Combine like 12

d i Multiply both sides by – 9 ii n = –36

terms

6y + 24 = (2y – 10) × 12   Multiply both

Practice 4 a x = 14

sides by 12

b x=6 1 f t= 3 b x = –2

g t=8 c k=5

d m=7

66 5

b x = –5

c m = 23

d n = – 14

144 = 18y     Add 120 to both

7 a q = –1

b q = –9

c p = –1

d n = –19

8 = y      Divide both sides

8 a y = 12

b x=8

c b = 14

9 a x=2

b x = 37

c x = 50

31 8 d x = 125

10 a x = – 3

b x=5

c x = –9

d x=5

e x = –3

f x = –4

g x=1

h x=2

e t = 15 5 a x = –2 6 a x=

11 a y = 0

c n = – 16 d n = 22 h v = – 25

d p=

b No Solution

c No solution

d m=3

12 a

6y + 24 = 24y – 120 E valuate the multiplication

24 = 18y – 120  Subtract 6y from both sides sides by 18

c 2x =

5x 2 + 8 Write the given 3 equation

2x – 8 =

5x 2 Subtract 8 from 3 both sides

3 × (2x – 8) = 5x – 2 Multiply both sides by 3

6x – 24 = 5x – 2 Evaluate the multiplication

14 k 76 – 2 = 2k      Write the given 2 equation

x – 24 = –2 Subtract 5x from

14 k 76 = 2k + 2 Add 2 to both 2

x = 22 Add 24 to both

both sides

sides

14k – 76 = (2k + 2) × 2 Multiply both sides by 2

14k – 76 = 4k + 4 Evaluate the multiplication

14k = 4k + 80 Add 76 to both sides

10k = 80 Subtract 4k from both sides

k = 8 Divide both sides by 10

sides

d 3.9 k 28 – 5 = 0.6k Write the given 4 equation 3.9 k 28 = 0.6k + 5 Add 5 to both 4 sides 3.9k – 28 = (0.6k + 5) × 4   Multiply both sides by 4

3.9k – 28 = 2.4k + 20 Evaluate the multiplication

3.9k = 2.4k + 48 Add 28 to both sides

1.5k = 48 Subtract 2.4k from both sides

k = 32

Divide both sides by 1.5

Answers 1019 mathspace.co


13 Step 2 should have been to add 8 to both sides, not subtract from both sides.

Extend your thinking

14 a He divided the left-hand side of the equation by 9 but subtracted 9 from the right-hand side.

c y = 6.36

b x=2 15 a x + 1 represents the original number of pencils x plus one she found. This is then divided by 2 because she gave half the pencils away. The +5 represents the 5 pencils her sister gave her. The 7 on the right is the number of pencils she had left at the end. b x=3

13 a x = y + 1.36

b 8x + 9y = 119 d x = $7 . 72

14 a x = 7y

b x + 2 = 5 (y + 2)

c y=4

d x = 28 years old

15 28 16 a x = 17 b 17, 18, 19 c No, because the equation used to solve for x in part (a) has only one unknown, x, to the power of one. Therefore, there is only one solution.

2.03 Graphs from tables

Extend your thinking 16 x = 10

What do you remember?

17 120 kilometres

1 a True

18 b = 12 cm, h = 4 cm

b True

2 a i 9 6

What do you remember?

3

b x = 60

2 (4 + 16n) cm

x

−4 −3 −2 −1 −3

3 15b m 4 a x=7

b x=5

d False

y

2.02 Linear equation applications

1 a x=4

c False

c x=5

1

2

3

4

−6

d x=3

−9 Practice 5 a 2x – 5 = x + 7 c 8x + 6(x + 11) = 25 9 e =x 2 x 6 a (21x + 105) cm

b 2x + 15 = x – 1 25 d 7x = 2x + 3 x 4 f 3 3

ii Yes b i 4 3

b x=4

2 1

7 x=6 8 a x=7

b x=3

−6

9 a Equation: 2p + 272 = 600, p = 164

−3

−1 −2

b $436 10 a 403 = m + 71

y

−3 b m = 332

−4

11 a x = 9 centimetres b 15 centimetres 12 7

1020 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

ii Yes

x 3

6


3

x

−1

0

2

4

y

−5

−3

1

5

b i

x

−1

0

1

2

y

4

0

−4

−8

ii 8

Practice 4 a No

b Yes

c Yes

d No

e No

f No

g No

h No

6 4 2

5 a Linear b Non-linear c Linear (vertical line)

d

Non-linear

e Linear (horizontal line)

f

Linear

−4 −3 −2 −1

7 a i

−8

0

1

2

y

−4

0

4

8

ii 8

iii

y

8

6

6

4

4

2 1

2

3

−4 −3 −2 −1

4

c i y

2

−8

2

3

x

−1

0

1

2

y

−2

1

4

7

8

4

−6

1

−2

ii

6

−4

x 4

−8

−8

−4 −3 −2 −1 −2

y

−6

−6

8

4

−4

−4

iii

3

2

x

−4 −3 −2 −1 −2

2

−4 −6

−1

x 1

−2

6 a No b Yes x

y

x 1

2

3

4

y

6 4 2 −4 −3 −2 −1 −2

x 1

2

3

4

−4 −6 −8

Answers 1021 mathspace.co


iii 8

8 a

y

6

x

−6

−3

0

3

y

8

6

4

2

b

4

y

8

2

x

−4 −3 −2 −1 −2

1

2

3

6

4

4

−4

2

−6

−8 −6 −4 −2 −2

−8

x 2

4

6

8

−4 −6

d i

x

−1

0

1

2

y

3

1

−1

−3

ii 4

−8

c Yes

y

9 a

3 2 1

x

−4 −3 −2 −1 −1

1

2

3

x

− 10

−5

0

5

y

2

1

0

−1

b 4

4

3

−2

2

−3

1

−4

iii 4

y

−10

−5

x

−1

5

10

5

10

−2

y

−3 −4

3 2 1 −4 −3 −2 −1

−1

x 1

2

3

c 4

4

3

−2

2

−3

1

−4

−10

−5

−1 −2 −3 −4

1022 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

y

x


10 a

x

−4

−2

0

2

y

3

4

5

6

b

c 6

y

4

6

2

4

−8 −6 −4 −2 −2

2 1

2

3

x 2

4

6

8

−4

x −4 −3 −2 −1

y

8

−6

4

−2

−8

−4 −6

c

12 a i

x

−1

0

1

y

−8

0

8

ii

y

8

6

6

4

4

2

2

x −4 −3 −2 −1

1

2

3

−8

−4

0

4

y

7

6

5

4

b i

y

x

−1

0

1

y

−8

1

10

ii 10 8

6 4

4

2

3

4

y

6

2

−4

3

–8

x

−8 −6 −4 −2 −2

2

–6

−6

8

1

–4

−4

b

x

–4 –3 –2 –1 –2

4

−2

11 a

y

x 2

4

6

8

4 2 −4 −3 −2 −1 −2

−6

−4

−8

−6 −8

x 1

Answers 1023 mathspace.co


c i

x y

−1

0

1 3

–

f i

1

4 3

−3

x

−1

0

1

y

−3

6

15

ii

y 15

ii

y

5 4 3 2 1

9 6 x

−5 −4 −3 −2 −1 −1 −2 −3 −4 −5 d i

12

1

3 −3

−1

0

1

y

7

0

−7

6 4

b

2

x

−4 −3 −2 −1 −2

1

2

3

4

−4 −6

3

x

−7

−3

1

5

9

y

−8

−3

2

7

12

x

−1

0

1

y

4

−3

− 10

5 4 3 2 1

y

x

−5 −4 −3 −2 −1 −1 −2 −3 −4 −5

−8

y

14 a 4

4

1

2 3 4 5

y

3

2 −4 −3 −2 −1 −2

2

The x-values chosen will make the numerator 3 + 5x divisible by the denominator 4. This choice of x-values means that the resulting ordered pairs will all be integers, making it easier to plot them.

y

8

6

1

13 a Answers may vary. Possible answer:

x

ii

−2 −1 −3

ii

e i

x

2 3 4 5

x 1

2

3

4

−4 −6 −8 −10

1024 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

2 1 −5 −4 −3 −2 −1 −1 −2 −3 −4

x 1 2 3 4 5


b

b

y

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

2 1 x −8 −6 −4 −2

2

4

6

8

−1 −2

c 1 −6 −4

−2

y

−5 −4 −3 −2 −1 −1

t 1

2 3 4 5

c 0≤t≤4

y x 2

−1

4

16 a

6

−2

Time (t)

0

1

2

3

Volume of water (V)

0

5

10

15

b

−3

14

−4

12

−5

10

−6

8

−7

6

V

4 d 1 −4 −3 −2 −1 −1

2

y x 1

2

3

−1

1

2

3

4

4 c 0≤t≤3

−2

17 a t = 2 and h = 12

−3

b

−4 −5 −6 −7

Extend your thinking 15 a

t

t

0

1

2

3

y

8

6

4

2

20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 0

h

t 1

2

3

4

5

6

Answers 1025 mathspace.co


c First leg rate: –4 m/min. Second leg rate: 2 m/min. Rates differ. A single linear equation requires a constant rate, impossible here due to the change from decreasing to increasing height. Thus, two equations over the two intervals are needed.

9 a i

y 6 5 4 3

2.04 Slopes and intercepts

2

What do you remember?

1

1 a ii and C

b iii and A

2 a Slope

b y-intercept

4 3 b i b = –4

3 a i b

c i and B

–5 –4 –3 –2 –1

ii a = – 2

ii 3

ii a = 4

b i

y

4 No 5 A

–1

Practice

–2

2

–3

y 16 B

–4

12

–5

8 4 –5 –4 –3 –2 –1 –4

x 1

–1

6

x 1 2 3 4 5

1

A 2 3 4 5

x ii — 5 c i

–8

y 3

–12

2

–16

1 Slope = – 4 2 7 a b 3 c b

5 2

1 b b 5 d b

–2 –1 –1 –2

5 7

8 a Positive

b Negative

c Negative

d Positive

–3

ii

1026 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

1 2

x 1

2 3 4 5 6 7 8


d i

6 5 4 3 2 1 –6–5–4–3–2–1 –1 –2 –3 –4 –5 –6

ii

15 a Explanatory variable: Phones Sold

y

Response variable: Weekly earnings b 10 x 1 2 3 4 5 6

b b=1

c b

1 2 11 a (4, – 3) and (1, 3), slope = – 2 d b = –1

d 340 e The y-intercept, 340, means that the salesman earns a base salary of $340 per week, even if he sells no phones. 16 a The explanatory variable is time in years, t, and the response variable is the number of fish, F.

2 3

10 a b = – 3

c The slope, 10, means that the salesman earns an additional $10 for each phone he sells.

3 7

e b

b The slope is –200, which means that the number of fish decreases by 200 each year. c The y-intercept is F = 4800, indicating that initially, there are 4800 fish in the river. Extend your thinking

b (5, 3) and (2, 15), slope = –4 c (5, 3) and (20, 63), slope = 4 4 12 d 11, and (– 20, 16), slope = 7 7 5 5 12 a b 3 3 c Yes, the points A, B, and C lie on a straight line because the slopes of AB and BC are 5 the same. Since both slopes are equal to , 3 the points A, B, and C do indeed lie on a straight line.

17 t = 13 12 7 19 a 0.9 18 c

b No

20 a –0.72

b –0.35

c Run A

21 $29.50 22 30 minutes

2.05 Sketch linear functions

13 a i x = 0

ii y = 0

b i x=2

ii y = 3

c i x = –2

ii y = – 2

d i x = 4.5

ii y = – 3.5

1 b represents the slope of the line and a represents the y-intercept of the line.

ii y = – 2

2 To graph y

4

3 a ii

b i

14 a i x = 1

What do you remember?

b i x = –1

ii y = – 3

c i x=2

ii y = – 8 3 ii y 2 ii y = 0

d i x = –3 e i x=0 f i x=2 1 g i x 3

ii y = 2

h i x=2

ii y

ii y

1 5 10 3

2 x, plot 4 on the y-axis, then 3 rise 2 units up and run 3 units to the right, which gives the point (3, 6), then draw a line passing through the points (0, 4) and (3, 6). c iv

d iii

4 a Read it from the equation. It is the coefficient of x. b Set x = 0, and evaluate to determine y. It is also the constant term in the equation of the form y = a + bx. c Set y = 0, and solve to determine x.

Answers 1027 mathspace.co


Practice

b

5 a

5 4 3 2 1

y 3 2 1 −2

1

x

−5 −4 −3 −2 −1 −1 −2 −3 −4 −5

x

−1

y

2

−1 −2

1

2 3 4 5

1

2 3 4 5

−3

c b

y 4 3 2 1 1

2

3

y

x

−5 −4 −3 −2 −1 −1 −2 −3 −4 −5

x

−2 −1

5 4 3 2 1

4

−1 −2 d 6 a 4

2 1

y

−4 −3 −2 −1 −1 −2

3 2 1 −4 −3 −2 −1 −1

x 1

2

3

4

−2 −3 −4

1028 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

−3 −4 −5 −6 −7

y x 1

2

3

4


e

7 a i x=1

y

4

ii y = 4

iii

6 5 4 3 2 1

3 2 1

x

−4 −3 −2 −1 −1

1

2

3

4

−2

−6 −5 −4 −3 −2 −1−1

−3

−2 −3 −4 −5 −6

−4 f 2 1

y x

−4 −3 −2 −1 −1 −2

1

2

3

b i x

4

2 3

iii 4

1 −4 −3 −2 −1

−4 −3 −2 −1

−1 −2

x 1

−1

2

3

4

−2

y

−3 −4

x

−5 −4 −3 −2 −1 −1 −2 −3 −4 −5

2 1

y

3

−6 −7

h

1 2 3 4 5 6

2

−5

5 4 3 2 1

x

ii y = –2

−3 −4

g

y

1

2 3 4 5

c i x = –4 iii

ii y = 6 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

−4 −3 −2 −1−1

y x 1

2

3

4

y

x 1

2

3

4

−2 −3 −4

−3 −4 −5 −6 −7

Answers 1029 mathspace.co


d i x = –5

ii y = 3

iii

8 a y=0

y

4

b x=0

d 4

3

3

2

2

1

x

−7 −6 −5 −4 −3 −2 −1 −1

c y = –4

y

1

1 2 3 4

x

−4 −3 −2 −1 −1

−2

1

2

3

4

−2

−3

−3

−4

−4 e i x = –3

ii y = 5

iii

6 5 4 3 2 1 −6 −5 −4 −3 −2 −1 −1 −2 −3 −4 −5 −6

f i x=5

9 a

y

12 10 8 x 1

10 8 6 4 2 −3−2−1 −2 −4 −6 −8

6

2 3

4 2 x −4 −3 −2 −1 b

ii y = 10

iii

y

1

2

3

4

y 5

y

4 3 2 x

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1030 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

1 −2 −1 −1 −2

x 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9


c 4

b

y

y 8

3 2

4

1 −2 −1 −1

x 1

2

3

4

5

x −4 −3 −2 −1

6

−3

d 4

c

y

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

3 2 1

x 1

−1

2

3

−2 −3 −4 −3 −2 −1

−4 10 a x = 8

b y=3

c x = –4

d x=0

11 a All of the points have x-coordinates of 3. c x=3

b A vertical line

4

1

2

3

4

c y=2

b A horizontal line 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 −6 −5 −4 −3 −2 −1 −1

y

x

−1

d 4

y

3

12 a All of the points have y-coordinates of 2.

13 a

3

−8

−4

−2 −1

2

−4

−2

−3

1

2 1

y

−4 −3 −2 −1 −1

x 1

2

3

4

−2 −3 −4

x 1 2 3 4 5 6

Answers 1031 mathspace.co


e 4

h

y

4

3

3

2

2

1 −7 −6 −5 −4 −3 −2 −1 −1

f 4

1

x 1 2 3 4

−2

−3

−3

−4

−4

i

y

8

3

6

2

4

1

2

3

4

−4

−3

−6

−4

−8

4

j

y

8

3

6

2

4

1 −4 −3 −2 −1 −1

x 1

2

3

4

3

4

1

2

3

4

x

y

2 −4 −3 −2 −1 −2

−2

−4

−3

−6

−4

−8

1032 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

2

y

−4 −3 −2 −1 −2

−2

g

1

2

x

−4 −3 −2 −1 −1

x

−4 −3 −2 −1 −1

−2

1

y

x 1

2

3

4


k

10 8 6 4 2

4

4 2 1

x 1

2 3 4 5

c

y

5 4 3 2 1

x 2 4 6 8 10

4

1

2 3 4 5

−3 −4

d

y

4

3

3

2

2

1

x 1

2

3

4

y

x

−5 −4 −3 −2 −1 −1 −2 −3 −4 −5

−2

−2

3

−4

−10 −8 −6 −4 −2 −1

−1

2

−3

1

−4 −3 −2 −1

1

−2

2

4

x

−4 −3 −2 −1 −1

3

14 a

y

3

−5 −4 −3 −2 −1 −2 −4 −6 −8 −10

l

b

y

y

1 −4 −3 −2 −1 −1

x 1

2

3

4

−2

−3

−3

−4

−4

Answers 1033 mathspace.co


Extend your thinking 15 Elisabeth was correct. She remembered to go downhill for her rise, as the slope was negative. 16 a k = 3

b x=5

c y=5

17 a x = –5, y = 250 1 b x , y 50 2 c

b y = –19 + 5x

3 a i b=3

b i

d y = –7 – 3x 1 2 ii a = –2

ii a = 4 4 a False

b True

d True

e False

5 a y = –9 – 8x

y

b y = –2 – 3x 3

400

2 x 3

300

e y = –8 – 3x

f y

3 4

2x

y = 100x + 50

Practice

x

6 a 5

100 −7−6−5−4−3−2−1 100 y = 50x + 250 200

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

d x = 4, y = 450 e Renting either studio A or B for 4 hours costs the same amount, $450. 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 y = 2x + 10 −6 −5 −4 −3 −2 −1 −2

1

b y = 1 + 3x 3 2 x d y 5

8 a i a = –15

ii y = –15 – 2x

b i a = –14

ii y = –14 + 2x

9 a y = –33 – 9x 98 9

7x

10 a i 7

y = 4x

x 1 2 3 4 5 6

e i 0

ii y = 1 + 0x

f i –5

ii y = –24 – 5x

11 a y

40 3

2x

12 a x = –5 13 a x = 4

b y = 16 – 4x

What do you remember?

15 a Undefined

1034 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

b 6x + 3y = – 40 40 20 , 0 , y-intercept: 0, 3 3 b 5x – 6y = –25

14 a x + 2y = 2 d 2x + 3y = 6

d Standard form

19

ii y = –6 – 7x 1 ii y 4 x 2 1 ii y 3 x 4

2.06 Equations of straight lines

b Slope-intercept form

5 x 2 7 x d y 19 2 ii y = –3 + 7x b y

b i –7 1 c i 2 1 d i 4

c x-intercept:

c Non-members and members pay the same amount per month for taking 5 classes, namely $20.

c y = 5 – 2x

b –2

7 a y = 5 – 2x 5 c y 3 x 2

c y

y

b x = 5, y = 20

c Neither

c True

d y

c y

200

1 a Standard form

b

3 x 4

500

18 a

2 a y = 5 – 4x 3 c y 2 x 2

b 3x – y = 4 e x – 4y = 4 b x=0

c 2x – y = –3 f 4x + y = –2


3.01 Linear models

Extend your thinking 16 a A scenario where a rate of change (slope) and both variables at a particular moment (point) are given. For example, if it is told how much someone deposits into their savings account per week and the amount in their bank account after a certain number of weeks. b A scenario where the rate of change (slope) and the initial value (y-intercept) are given. For example, if it is told how much a plumber charges as their flat callout fee (y-intercept) and how much they charge per hour (slope). c A scenario where the unit rates are given for two items from which a mixture is being created to get a certain total. For example, if the cost of almonds per pound (A) and the cost of peanuts per pound (B) are told, and the total amount to be spent (C) is told. 17 a a = 3 18 a k = 3

b 3x + 4y = 12 b x=5

c y=5

19 Line A. Writing both equations in the form 5 5 x and Line B is y = a + bx: Line A is y 3 3 1 7 y x. The slope of Line A is 2 6 5 10 bA , and the slope of Line B is 3 6 bB

7 . Since 6

10 6

7 , Line A is steeper. 6

What do you remember? 1 a Explanatory variable: Time in minutes Response variable: Temperature in °C b 5°C c 3°C 2 a 25 3 a

b 85

1 4

b 24

c 20°C

Practice 4 a The cost for the taxi to stop (flag fee) is $3 and the cost per minute is $5.50. b 14 minutes 5 a T

1

1 t 5

1 b . The temperature rises by 1°C every 5 5 minutes. c 1. The initial temperature of the room was 1°C. d 100 minutes e 0 ≤ t ≤ 100 6 a $20 per hour

b $80

c 6 hours

d y = 0 + 20x

e $640

f 13 hours

7 a y = 49 + 3x b 0

2

4

6

8

10

12

b y = 25 + 8x

Number of minutes passed (x)

c Sally is initially paid $25 for the order.

Heart rate (y)

49

55

61

67

73

79

85

d This equation is only valid for 50 ≤ x ≤ 100, since 10 is outside of this interval, so it cannot be used to predict the amount paid for 10 key chains.

8 a Number of minutes passed (x)

0

5

10

15

20

150

125

100

75

50

20 a (y – 665) = 8 (x – 80)

21 In point-slope form, it is easy to see the slope, or cost per meal, as well as the total cost for 10 meals. In slope-intercept form, it is easy to see the slope, or cost per meal, as well as the y-intercept, or cost to hire the caterer before ordering meals.

Amount of fuel left in the tank (y) b y = 150 – 5x c 30 minutes

Answers 1035 mathspace.co


9 a $428

14 a

Weekly sales ($)

0

10 000

20 000

30 000

Weekly pay ($)

300

700

1100

1500

700 600 500 400

c P = 300 + 0.04S

300

d The slope (0.04) represents her 4% commission rate, and the y-intercept ($300) is her fixed base pay.

200

e

Wages

800

b

100

0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45

Pay ($)

1800 1600 1400 1200 1000 800 600 400 200

Hours

b 17.40

c y = 0 + 17.40x

d $435.00

e 40 hours

15 a

y 4000 3500 3000 2500 2000

Sales (thousands of $) 0

5

10

15

1500

20 25 30

1000

10 a D = 0 + 75t

500

b The speed of the car (75 km/h). d 0 ≤ t ≤ 6.2 e D = 15 + 75t 11 a F = 4000 – 200t

t 0

c 6.2 hours

10

20

30

b 110

c y = 0 + 110t

d $2860

e 36 hours

16 a C = 150 + 45t

b The rate of decline of the number of fish (200 fish per year).

b The hourly rate the carpenter charges ($45/hour).

c 20 years

c 3 hours

d 0 ≤ t ≤ 20 e F = 2400 – 200t 12 a D = 50 + 60t b The speed of the car down the highway (60 km/h). c 1.5 hours d 0 ≤ t ≤ 1.5 e D = 90 + 60t 13 a D = 0 + 9t b Glen’s average speed during the ultramarathon (9 km/h). c 10 hours d 0 ≤ t ≤ 20 e D = 90 + 9t

1036 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

d 0≤t≤3 e C = 60 + 45t 17 a

750 Income 700 650 600 550 500 450 400 350 300 250 200 150 100 50

Hours worked 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45


b $25 per hour

c y = 0 + 25x

d $625

e 5 hours

e

Extend your thinking 18 Variables may vary: Let t represent the time in years since 2004. Let N represent the number of students. N = 12 000 + 128t 19 a Cost: C = 120 + 0.5n. Revenue: R = 4.50n. b Slope (0.5) is the cost per coffee sold. y-intercept (120) is the fixed weekly lease fee. c Minimum: n = 31 coffees. Domain: 0 ≤ n ≤ 2000.

14 m 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1

r 2 3

4

5 6 7

8 9

3.02 Graphical simultaneous equations

20 a Van A: CA = 80 + 0.30d. Van B: CB = 50 + 0.40d. Revenue: R = 2d.

What do you remember? 1 It is the point of intersection of two lines.

b Van A cheaper for d > 300 km. Domain: 0 ≤ d ≤ 500. c Profit: $345. Slope (2) is the revenue per kilometre. 21 a Cost: C = 25l + 25w. The coefficient of l, 25, represents the combined cost of fencing one standard length ($10) and one premium length ($15). The same applies to the width w.” b Budget: w = 100 – l: Domain: 0 < l < 100, 0 < w < 100. c Width: 40 m Area: 2400 m2 Perimeter: 200 m, which satisfies 200 ≥ 100 22 a 12m + 21r = 150

2 The x- and y-coordinates at the point of intersection satisfy both equations. 3 None, because the lines are parallel and do not intersect. 4 a 1

b 0

c 1

d Infinite

5 A Practice 6 a 1

b (– 4, – 2)

7 a (5, – 1)

b (– 6, 4)

c (2, – 4)

d (3, – 6)

8 a x = 6, y = 4

b x = 0, y = – 2

c x = 4, y = 0

b No c Yes d 14 m 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1

r 2 3

4

5 6 7

8 9

Answers 1037 mathspace.co


9 a

c i

y 7 6 5 y = 4 – 3x 4 3 2 1 −4 −3 −2 −1

1 2 −1 −2 −3 −4 −5 −6 −7 y = 4x – 3

b (1, 1)

10 8 y=–x+3 6 4 2

4

ii (0, 3) d i 10 8 6 4 2

c (1, 1)

10 a i 10 8 6 4 2 −10 −8 −6 −4 −2 −2 −4 −6 −8 −10

y y = 4x – 4

x 2 4 6 8 10

y 10 y=x+9 8 6 4 2

x −10 −8 −6 −4 −2 2 4 6 8 10 −2 −4 −6 −8 y=–x–9 −10 ii (− 9, 0)

1038 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

y

x 2 4 6 8 10

−10 −8 −6 −4 −2 −2 – 4x + 2y = – 8 2x – 4y = – 8 −4 −6 −8 −10

y = 8 – 2x

ii (2, 4) b i

x 2 4 6 8 10

−10 −8 −6 −4 −2 −2 −4 −6 y=x+3 −8 −10

x 3

y

ii (4, 4) e i

y 10 8 6 y = 3x + 6 4 2 y = –x + 2 x −10 −8 −6 −4 −2 2 4 6 8 10 −2 −4 −6 −8 −10

ii (− 1, 3)


f i

10 8 6 4 2

y = –x – 3

−10 −8 −6 −4 −2 −2 y = –1 −4 −6 −8 −10

Extend your thinking

y

15 a Yes, a = 3. b No, it requires another point to find the value of b. x 2 4 6 8 10

ii (− 2, − 1) 11 a Mia’s savings over time is y = 450 + 150x. The cost of the laptop is a constant y = 1200. b y

Mia’s Gaming Laptop Savings

1350 1200 1050 900 750 600 450 300 150

3.03 Algebraic simultaneous equations What do you remember? 1 The x- and y-coordinates at the point of intersection satisfy both equations. 2 a (2, 4)

b (– 4, 5)

c (4, – 4)

d (2, – 3)

3 a True

b True

d True

e False

c True

4 a Yes, it is a solution. b Yes, it is a solution. x 0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

c Yes, since Mia will have saved $1350, which is more than the price of the laptop, $1200. 12 a i Infinitely many ii The second equation is a multiple of the first, so they are equivalent equations. b i 1 ii The equations have different gradients. c i 0 ii The equations have the same gradient but different y-intercept so they are parallel and will never meet. 13 a x = – 1, y = 3 c x

16 The point of intersection on the graph has negative x and y values. In terms of the height of a plant over time, only positive values make sense. Since the two lines do not intersect in the first quadrant, they will never reach the same height on the same day. 51 , b = – 24 17 a 7

b x = 3, y = 12

39 33 ,y= 2 4

14 a (– 3, 3)

b (0, 6)

d x = 4.07, y = 0.20 c (7, 8)

7y 4 3 b Infinitely many solutions

5 a x

Practice 6 a 3

b x = –1

7 a x = 7, y = 4

c y=3

b x = – 6, y = 5

c x = 6, y = – 5

d x = 2, y = 3

e f = 0.4, g = 1.2

f a = 1.5, b = 2.5

8 To determine the solution, make y the subject of the first equation and then substitute it into the second equation. This approach results in an equation expressed in terms of x, allowing for the solution of x. The obtained value of x can then be substituted back to solve for y using either equation. Finally, the values of x and y can be substituted into both original equations to verify the solution. This method avoids fractions and unnecessary rearrangements.

Answers 1039 mathspace.co


9 a x = 4, y = 2

b x = – 5, y = 9

c x = 7, y = 8

d x = 3, y = – 6

e x = – 7, y = – 8

f x = 5, y = 8

10 a Answers may vary. Possible answer: Liam will get 3 (10 – y) – y = 5, which simplifies to y = 30 – 3y – 5, then finally 4y = 25. This approach is efficient as it results in a simple equation where y can be solved directly. b Answers may vary. Possible answer: Olivia will get x + 3x – 5 = 10, which simplifies to 4x – 5 = 10, then finally 4x = 15. This approach is also efficient because it results in a simple equation where x can be solved directly. c Answers may vary. Possible answer: Ethan will get 3x – (10 – x) = 5, which simplifies to 4x – 10 = 5, then finally 4x = 15. This approach is efficient because it results in a simple equation where x can be solved directly. d Answers may vary. Possible answer: y 5 y 10, which simplifies Sophia will get 3 to y + 5 + 3y = 30, then finally 4y = 25. This approach is slightly less efficient because the equation involves a fractional coefficient, which can be a bit harder to work with. Once the fraction is handled the resulting equation is also simple. Extend your thinking 11 a 2a + b = 4

b a = − 2, b = 8

5a + b = − 2 c y = – 2x + 8 12 a If the process of substitution leads to a false statement, it indicates that the simultaneous equations have no solutions. In other words, the lines represented by the equations do not intersect at any point. b If the process leads to an always true statement, it indicates that the simultaneous equations have infinitely many solutions. This could mean that the equations represent the same line.

3.04 Applications of simultaneous equations What do you remember? 1 a Let x and y represent the two numbers. Equation 1: y + x = 4 Equation 2: y – x = –2 b Let x = Mohamad’s age and y = Rochelle’s age. Equation 1: y + x = 21 Equation 2: y = 4x + 11 2 Kang did 6 parts of the assignment and Elvia did 3 parts. 3 a This method involves plotting the equations on a Cartesian plane to visually identify the point of intersection, which represents the solution. It is applicable when you need a visual representation of the system and the solution, especially for simple linear equations with integer coefficients, or when the exact solution is not necessary. b This method involves solving one equation for one variable and then substituting that expression into the other equation to find the solution. It is applicable when one of the equations is easy to manipulate or isolate a variable, and the system is relatively simple and straightforward to solve. c This method involves adding or subtracting equations to eliminate one variable, making it easier to solve for the other variable. It is applicable when the coefficients of one variable can be easily manipulated to cancel each other out, often used when both equations are in standard form. d This method uses graphing calculators, computer software, or online tools to quickly solve systems of equations. It is applicable when dealing with complex systems, large sets of equations, or when you need a fast and precise solution without manual calculations. Practice 4 a x + y = 150 x – y = 18 c y = 66

1040 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

b x = 84


5 a x + y = 18

Extend your thinking

b x = 8, y = 10

4x – 2y = 12 6 Each notebook is $20 and each pen is $20. 7 a The fixed charge is $5 and the charge per kilometre is $10.

13 a If the process of substitution leads to a false statement, it indicates that the simultaneous equations have no solutions. In other words, the lines represented by the equations do not intersect at any point.

b $255

b If the process leads to a true statement, it indicates that the simultaneous equations have infinitely many solutions. This could mean that the equations represent the same line.

8 The price of one coffee is $2.40 and the price of one sandwich is $4.40 9 35 sausages and 52 soft drinks 10 a The fixed service fee is $30 and the hourly charge is $20. b The cost is $190.

14 Product A: 60 and Product B: 120 15 a x + y = 200 3x + 2y = 450

11 a • Hall A: y = 75x + 400

b The farmer should plant 50 acres of wheat and 150 acres of corn.

• Hall B: y = 125x + 200 b 800

c The total profit will be $85 000.

y

3.05 Piecewise functions

600 y = 75x + 400 400 200 y = 125x + 200 x −5 −4 −3 −2 −1 1 2 3 4 5 −200 −400

What do you remember? 1 y

x, for 0 x 4 x 3, for x 4

2

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

−600 −800 c (4, 700) d Renting either Hall A or B for 4 hours costs the same amount, $700. 12 a y = x + 6, 2x + 2y = 24 b 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 y=x+6 4 2 −8 −6 −4 −2 −2

y

−4 −3 −2 −1

2x +2y = 24

y

−1

x 1

2

3

3 a i y=5

ii Yes

b i y=5

ii No

c i y=5

ii Yes

d i y = –2

ii No

4

4 a Linear function x 2 4 6 8 10

b Piecewise function c Piecewise function d Piecewise function

c The length is 9 m and the width is 3 m.

Answers 1041 mathspace.co


Practice 5 a i

6 a y

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

−4 −3 −2 −1

x 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1

b

ii The function is defined and continuous at x = 4. b i

6 5 4 3 2 1

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 −1

y

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 −1

1

−1 −2 −3 −4

2

3

4

x 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

c 7

y

6

ii The function is defined at x = 4 but is not continuous at x = 4. c i

x

9 y 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 −4 −3−2 −1 −1 −2 −3 −4

x 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

y

5 4

y

3 2 1 −4 −3 −2 −1

x 1

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

ii The function is defined at x = 4 but is not continuous at x = 4.

1042 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

−1

x 1

2

3

4


d

c y

2 x 2, x 2 5 x 4, 2 x 1 3 x 6, x 1

d y

3 x 1 7, 6 x 10, 3 x 1, 2 4 x 12,

y

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

x

−4 −3 −2 −1

1

2

3

4

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

b 150 km e 0 km g 500 km

2 3 4 5 6

0.5

3 2 x 1

−1

2

3

4 11

4 4

10 x 3, x 7 0 3 x, 2x 6, 3

0 x x

3 5

3 1 , 6 x 2 x 4 2 2 x 5 x 1,

iv 22 km

Time (hours)

1

1.5

2

c The slopes of each segment represent the speed of the runner during each time period. The slope of the first segment is 10, corresponding to a speed of 10 km/h, and the slope of the second segment is 14, corresponding to a speed of 14 km/h. 10t, 0 t 1.5 d d(t) 1.5 t 2 14 t 6,

4

1

iii 15 km

22 Distance (km) 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2

y

5

b y

x 2

f 250 km

x 1

6

8 a f (x)

2

d 50 km/h

b

7

2, x x, x

2 x

10 a i 5 km ii 10 km

f

7 y

2

c Ben decreased his speed at 11:00.

y

−4 −3 −2 −1 −1

−4 −3 −2 −1

3 x

3

9 a 09:00

−1

e

x

20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2

Water

1

2

3

4

5

6

Time 7

Answers 1043 mathspace.co


12 a $1200 b $600 000 c Total: $9000 d Increase: $1300 Extend your thinking 13 a i $2288

ii $15 388

0 x 18 200 18 200 x 45 000 45 000 x 135 000 135 000 x 190 000 x 190 000

0, 0.16 ( x 18 200), 4288 0.30 ( x 45 000), 31 288 0.37 ( x 135 000), 51 638 0.45 ( x 190 000 ),

b T

14 72 units2 4, 0 0, 4 15 a y 3, 6 b

iii $51 638

4 a C x x x

4 6 7

b $2000

c 1 hour

5 a It indicates that the point is not included in that particular step or segment of the graph. b $7 c The cost per t-shirt generally decreases as more t-shirts are purchased.

Rate of flow (L/min) 4

d The cost per t-shirt is $5 when purchasing more than 15 t-shirts, up to and including 40 t-shirts (that is, for the interval 15 < x ≤ 40).

3

e A and C 2 Practice 6 a 10 km

1 Time (min) 0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

c 4 L/min d The rate of flow is 0 L/min for 4 ≤ x < 6 minutes. 16 a a = – 1

b y = –2

3.06 Step graphs What do you remember? 1 a True

b False

c True

d False

2 a i

b iii

c iv

3 a False

b True

c False

d False

d ii

1044 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

b 12 km

c 5 hours

7 a i 10 mg

ii 12 mg

iii 6 mg

iv 14 mg

b Any weight less than 2 kg c i 1 kg

ii 1 kg

iii 0.5 kg

iv 4 kg

8 a $10

b 4.75 hours

c $6

9 a $2.10

b $6

c $51


10 a y

b

140

13

x ⬚ 0 x 30 30 x 60 60 x 90 90 x 120

20, 50, 80, 110, 140,

8 7 6 5 4

Charge ($)

3

120

2

100

1

80

1

2

14 a $112.17

40

c $6178.56

20

Minutes

0

30

60

c $80 45 40

Weight (kg)

0

60

11

Charge ($)

90

120

d 60 minutes

Cost ($)

35 30 25 20

15

200 180 160 140 120 100 80 60 40 20

3

4

5

b 55 d $276.12

Rate ($)

0

Time (hours) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

15 10

Extend your thinking

5

Hours

0

12

1

2

3

4

5

Fare ($) 3

b If the customer cancels after 9 months, they save $350 compared to continuing the subscription until the end of the 15th month. However, the decision to cancel or continue depends on whether the customer values the service enough to justify the additional $350 cost over the next 6 months. 17 a $74

2

b The flat rate plan is more cost-effective for the user for the first seven hours as it is $4 cheaper.

1

0

16 a $630

Zones 1

2

3

4

5

18 a $24 500 b The rent for 14 months is $17 700. The net rent for 18 months is $24 500. By leaving after 14 months, the tenant pays $6800 less overall. The average cost for staying the additional 4 months would have been $1700 per month.

Answers 1045 mathspace.co


4.01 Percentages

15 a

Fraction

Decimal

Percentage

1 2

0.5

50%

3 4

0.75

75%

3 10

0.3

30%

Fraction

Decimal

Percentage

5 8

0.625

62.5%

1 25

0.04

4%

1 8

1.125

112.5%

What do you remember? 1 a To convert from fractions to percentages, multiply the fraction by 100% and evaluate. b To convert from percentages to fractions, divide the percentage by 100% and simplify. c To convert from decimals to percentages, multiply the decimal by 100%.

b

d To convert from percentages to decimals, divide the percentage by 100%. 2 a 6%

b 10%

c 35%

d 50%

3 a No

b Yes

c Yes

d No

7 4 a 100

27 b 100

47 c 100

d 1

5 a 0.13

b 0.29

c 0.85

d 1

6 a 11%

b 55%

c 99%

d 101%

7 a 10% = 0.1 3 c 12% 25 1 e 120% 1 5 g 5% = 0.05

b 8.3% = 0.083 9 d 90% 10

1

16 66.67% 36 100 18 a 360 17 a

b 36% b 3.6

c 20

f 205% = 2.05

e 6.9 L

f 140 m

g 0.64 hrs h 810 m

h 230% = 2.3

19 a 443.22

b 4.16 kg

c $6.69

e 44.73 kg f 8.57 L

8 25%

d 460 d $965.97

g 1.65 hrs h 10.89 mL

20 12.5%

Practice

21 75%

9 a 90%

b 40%

c 8%

d 25%

e 35%

f 100%

g 44%

h 75%

22 a 16

b 31.25%

c 68.75%

2 25

1 10 3 f 4 36 b 125

1 4 9 g 10

1 2 24 h 25 17 d 400

23 a 0.12

b 0.082

c 0.0714

24 a 90%

b 70%

25 a 0.27

b 0.73

10 a

13 20 3 11 a 250 e

e

1897 10 000

12 a 0.05

b

c

c

301 1000

871 2000

g 41 2

b 0.52

f

d

h

1 1000

c 0.8

d 1.72

e 0.0065 f 0.25

g 1

h 3.21

i 5.91

k 0.0069 l 0.7508

j 0.097

13 0.3876

26

51 200

27 a

47 50

28 a 22%

b

b 1980 flights

29 $1100 Extend your thinking

14 a 24%

b 3%

c 70%

d 0.4%

e 104%

f 55%

g 217%

h 90%

i 13%

j

90%

k 834%

l 5.1%

1046 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

30 $32.10 31 66

3 50


32 1650

11 a 66 000 m/h

b 18.33 m/s

33 24 marks

12 a 10 km/min

b 5 mL/min

c 0.6 dollars/min

34 55% 35 a • Total emissions for manufacturing sector: 376 648 metric tonnes • Total emissions for transportation sector: 148 444.8 metric tonnes b

Percentage contribution

Initial contribution

Manufacturing sector

71.73%

71.43%

Transportation sector

28.27%

28.57%

b 30 mL/min

c 0.5 mL/s

14 a 11 880 m/h

b 11.88 km/h

15 a 38.78 g/dollar

b 141.80 mL/dollar

c 1.80 m/dollar

d 7.19 g/dollar

e 3.81 mL/dollar

f 64.22 m/dollar

16 a 1.87 goals/match for Lina, 1.81 goals/match for Toby b Lina

The policies resulted in a reduction of emissions in both sectors. The manufacturing sector’s contribution slightly increased, while the transportation sector’s contribution decreased, indicating the policies had a more significant impact on the transportation sector, particularly due to the public transportation initiative in the third year.

c Lina: 280.5 goals, Toby 271.5 goals 17 a 8.25 km/L

b 9.19 km/L

c Car B

d 3216.5 km

18 65 cents 19 $1.40 20 a 0.12 metres per hour b Yes 21 18.5 mL/s Extend your thinking

4.02 Rates and ratios

22 Susana

What do you remember? 1 Answers may vary. For example: Hotdogs/ minute or seconds/hotdog 2 a Litres/hour Amount of water 240 L b 60 L per hour 4h Time 3 a 80 toys/h b 80 toys 4 a 2 hours

13 a 0.03 L/min

d 4 L/h

23 8 seconds 24 B arry’s Bargain Bins, because she would save $27. 25 $40.85 26 a One day on the ISS equals approximately 91.3 days of natural background radiation on Earth.

b 3 kilometres

b 0.0114 Gy = 0.0114 Sv

c 240 seconds

d 5000 millilitres

5 a 1 km/h = 1000 m/h

b 1 L/h = 1000 mL/h

c The satellite will last 20 years before reaching its radiation limit.

c 1 h/km = 60 min/km

d 1 m/s = 60 m/min

Practice

4.03 Unit cost comparisons What do you remember?

6 10 pages/h

1 $16.00 per kilogram

7 80 calories/km

2 a $0.14/g c $0.25/kg e $0.03/mL

b $0.08/mL d $0.11/g f $0.65/m

3 a $7 per 100 g

b $5.71 per 100 g

c $8 per 100 g

d $3.5 per 100 g

8 23 km/L 9 30 frames per second 2 10 a mL/plastic bag 5

b 2 mL

Answers 1047 mathspace.co


Practice 4 a 50 cents/egg

b 30 cents/egg

c Sunny Side Up 5 a $2.25

b $1.45

c Chocovelve bar

6 Greenery 7 Grape juice 8 Fruit World 9 a Brand C

b Brand B

10 a Charlie’s Cheery Chocs b Marge’s Material c Honest Anne’s Soda 11 a $1857.14 per square metre b $1633.99 per square metre c The second property 12 a $1.50 per litre

b $0.85 per litre

c 4 L milk d No. The family will not drink even half of the 4 L bottle in two days, so they will end up paying more for less milk. 13 a $13.33 per plank

b $10 per plank

c Pack of 10 d No. She only needs 2, so she will pay more for a lot of planks that she does not need. 14 a $2.52

b Fresh Mart

c $2.39

15 a 2.33 cents per gram

19 1. Total components needed for 7 kits: • Rods: 7 × 3 = 21 rods • Gears: 7 × 5 = 35 gears • Panels: 7 × 2 = 14 panels 2. Cost-effective purchasing for each component: • Rods (need 21): • Supplier A: 3 packs (30 rods) for 3 × $5.00 = $15.00 • Supplier B: 2 packs (26 rods) for 2 × $7.00 = $14.00 • Choice: 2 packs from Supplier B ($14.00) • Gears (need 35): • Supplier A: 2 packs (40 gears) for 2 × $8.00 = $16.00 • Supplier B: 3 packs (45 gears) for 3 × $6.50 = $19.50 • Choice: 2 packs from Supplier A ($16.00) • Panels (need 14): • Supplier A: 3 packs (15 panels) for 3 × $3.00 = $9.00 • Supplier B: 2 packs (20 panels) for 2 × $5.50 = $11.00 • Choice: 3 packs from Supplier A ($9.00) 3. Optimal Purchasing Plan: • Rods: Buy 2 packs from Supplier B. • Gears: Buy 2 packs from Supplier A. • Panels: Buy 3 packs from Supplier A. 4. Total Minimum Cost: $14.00 + $16.00 + $9.00 = $39.00

Extend your thinking

Justification: This plan meets the minimum component requirements for all 7 kits at the lowest total expenditure, by comparing the total cost to acquire at least the needed quantity of each item from each supplier, considering their respective pack sizes.

16 Krispy Krunchers

4.04 Percentage change and GST

17 M aria will save $0.52 per litre by buying 5 litres of dish soap from Brand A instead of Brand B.

What do you remember?

b 4.48 cents per gram c The 500 g bag of almonds d 2.15 cents per gram

18 B rand A offers the best value at $2.70 per kilogram of detergent after discount.

1 a True

b False

c True

d False

e True

f True

2 770 3 a $4.50 4 $337.00

1048 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

b $25.50


5 A 6 a $8.00

33 $84.80 b $3.95

c $3.50

d $7.78

4.05 Simple interest

Practice 7 a $2.50

34 $42.73

b $22.50 c $22.50 d Yes

What do you remember?

8 a $9

b $27

1 a True

9 a $36.00

b $144.00

2 a The total amount of interest earned over the time period

10 a 1480

b $296

c $1184

11 a $720

b $1620

c $3600

d $1146

12 $47.20 13 $300

b False

c False

d True

b The principal, which is the initial amount invested or loaned c The interest rate, as a decimal d The time period of the investment or loan, must be the same unit as R, typically in years.

14 a $200

b $3800

15 a $112

b 48.28%

16 a $45.00

b 15%

c I = 1000 × 0.03 × 0.5 = $15 1 $2.50 d I 1000 0.03 12 4 a $300 b $5670.25

b $9.08

5 a $2388

17 30% 18 44.7% 19 a $100.92 20 $582.35 21 a $60.11

b I = 1000 × 0.03 × 10 = $300

b $199

Practice b $6011

22 $1851.85

6 a $832

b $5180

7 $3120

23 $39 000.00

8 $121 000

24 $22.00 25 a $3.64

3 a I = 1000 × 0.03 × 1 = $30

9 a $6000 b $7.63

26 $72.73

b $900

10 5.6% 11 a $360

27 $2.59

c $9900

b 6%

12 10 years

Extend your thinking

13 a $254.00

b 8 years

28 a $26.00

b $104.00

14 a $4000

b Every 3 months

c $25

d $105.00

15 a $800

b 5%

e Honest Anne 29 a Offer A

b Offer A

30 9% 31 a 105.00%

b 51.22%

32 a $23 559.32

b $9659.32

16 7 quarters 17 a $2133

b $7416

c $12 825 d $3276

Extend your thinking 18 a $960

b $3960

c 48

d $82.50

19 Option 1

Answers 1049 mathspace.co


20 T he interest from Option 1 will be 0.5 × 2 × 12 = 12% of the principal, while the interest from 42 Option 2 will be 2.5 8.75% of the 12 principal, so Option 1 will earn Ariella the most interest.

Extend your thinking 14 $472.21 15 $7197.96 16 $7104.33 17 a i $700

21 $28 800

ii $737.62

b Simple interest

4.06 Compound interest

18 $39 222.92 19 $49 909.03

What do you remember? 1 a

Total balance

Interest earned

4.07 Financial applications

First year

$3900

$390

What do you remember?

Second year

$4290

$429

1 a Flat-rate

Third year

$4719

$471.9

c Neither

d Reducing balance

–

e Flat-rate

f Reducing balance

Fourth year

$5190.90

b Flat-rate

g Flat-rate b $1290.90

2 a P = $4790, r = 9% = 0.09, n = 10

2 a

b $11 339.67

Balance at beginning of year

Interest earned

3 a An = P (1 – r)n

First year

$3700

$259

4 a P = $1330, r = 11% = 0.11, n = 7

Second year

$3959

$277.13

Third year

$4236.13

$296.53

Fourth year

$4532.66

–

b $18 470

b $2761.29 Practice 5 a

Year

Price (dollars)

0

45 000

1

39 500

b $832.66 3 $1338.79

2

34 000

Practice

3

28 500

4 $1124.86

4

23 000

5 $1411.58

5

17 500

6 $9779.97

b Yes

7 $3376.53

c Flat-rate depreciation

8 $14 929.92

6 a $800

9 $8034.12

b $120

10 a $3121.20

b $3090.45

11 a $800

b $873.61

c $3152.26

12 $64 134.13 13 $6701.76

1050 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

c 4 years d In the graph, the y-value corresponding to 5 years is $200. 7 a $245 100

b $198 100


8 a $100

21 a • $20 000 b

b 100 000 99 000 98 000 97 000 96 000 95 000 94 000 93 000

Value ($)

40 000 35 000 25 000 20 000 15 000 10 000 5000

Time (months) 12 24 36 48 60 72

d The monthly depreciation e $99 800 f The initial purchase value of the shares g V = $99 800 – 100n 9 a $14 000

40 000

Value ($)

35 000 30 000 20 000

b $4 357 000

15 000 10 000

10 $639.17

5000

11 $390.94

Years 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

12 $742 805 13 9 years 14 $9743.91 15 $4.70 16 $346.14 Extend your thinking 17 a $14 665 000

Years

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

25 000

h $93 200

b $16 855 598

c $20 293 656 18 a 2520

b 7 months

19 a P = $25.60

b P = $13 072

20 a An = 1 50000 × (1 – 0.075)n c 15 years

Value ($)

30 000

c – 100/month

b $68 787.35

• $23 619.60

c Flat-rate depreciation decreases the asset’s value by the same amount each year, leading to a linear decline. This method doesn’t reflect assets that lose value quickly in the early years. In contrast, reducing balance depreciation applies a percentage to the remaining value, resulting in faster depreciation initially and slower depreciation over time, which better matches the actual depreciation of many assets. d Reducing balance depreciation is more suitable for assets that lose value quickly in their early years, as it allows for a higher depreciation rate early on. Flat-rate depreciation, with its constant depreciation amount, doesn’t reflect the rapid loss of value these assets typically experience in the beginning.

Answers 1051 mathspace.co


11 a $12.14

b $43.33

12 a $47

b 2.4%

13 a $28.33

b $340

4.08 Purchase options What do you remember? 1 a True

b False

c True

d True

e False

f False

14 a $5044

b $960

c 12.22%

15 Plan 2

2 $1227 3 a $149.00

b $384.56

4 a $1650

b t=

5 a $58 764.22

3 4 b $12 064.22

16 Plan 1

c $121.5 c $86.63

17 a $88.67

b $62.07

18 a i 6.7% ii 7.4%

b Hire purchase

19 a i 7.09%

ii 6.87%

b Either purchase option could be preferable, depending on the customer’s situation.

Practice 6 a $5095

b $1290.05

c $5143.56

20 $286.44

d $143.56

7 a $368

b $368.92

Extend your thinking

c $18.45

d $350.47

21 a r = 26.73%

8 $172

22 a $317

9 12 weeks

23 a $373

b $485.91 b $804.65

c $4.65

b n = 102

10 3 months

24 a $480 c

b $280 Balance (before interest) Balance (after interest) Payment

Balance (owing)

Month 1

$1685

$1710.91

$825

$885.91

Month 2

$885.91

$899.53

$825.00

$74.53

Month 3

$74.53

$75.68

$75.68

$0

d $2205.68

e $1965.00

25

Item A

Item B

Item C

Item D

Deposit paid for the item

$42.12

$79.86

$117.00

$1714.00

Balance owing (after deposit)

$659.88

$646.14

$858.00

$34 939.00

Total payments in instalment

$756.00

$780.00

$1040.00

$39 246.00

Total payment for the item

$798.12

$859.86

$1157.00

$40 960.00

Interest charged to the item

$96.12

$133.86

$182.00

$4307.00

Interest charged as a percentage to the item

13.69%

18.44%

18.67%

11.75%

Anual rate of simple interest

4.86%

6.91%

5.30%

4.00%

1052 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


26 a i $1100

ii $900

iii $1050

iv $1051.16

b 1. Lay-by option 2. Payment plan option

5.01 Number patterns and sequences What do you remember? 1 a Neither

b Decreasing

3. Personal loan option

c Increasing

d Neither

4. Cash payment option

e Decreasing

f Neither

c • Lay-by option Pros: Allows Jazelle to pay in smaller weekly instalments Cons: More expensive than the cash payment option, and no immediate ownership of the laptop • Cash payment option Pros: Cheapest option due to the 10% discount. Immediate ownership of the laptop Cons: Requires the full payment upfront, which may not be financially feasible for everyone • Payment plan option Pros: Allows Jazelle to make monthly payments over 9 months Cons: More expensive than the cash payment option and still requires an initial deposit • Personal loan option Pros: Monthly payments over a year and the flexibility to make a purchase without paying upfront Cons: Interest paid on top of the principal, making it more expensive than other options d Cash payment option, as it offers the cheapest total cost at $900 due to the 10% discount for paying upfront. This option also gives immediate ownership of the laptop, which is beneficial for Jazelle. Although it requires paying the full amount upfront, it saves her from paying additional interest or fees.

2 a i Increasing

ii 0.2

b i Decreasing

ii 0.6

c i Decreasing

ii 6

3 6 4 a5 5 a Finite

b Infinite

c Finite

d Infinite

6 Finite Practice 7 a 10

b 37

c 4

8 a 2, 6, 10, 14, 18 b – 2, – 4, – 8, – 16, – 32 c 1, 3, 9, 27, 81 d – 6, 24, – 72, 192, – 480 e 1, 0.7071, 0.5774, 0.5, 0.4472 f 2, 2.25, 2.3704, 2.4414, 2.4883 9 a

Starting number (N)

4

5

6

7

Answer (A)

65

70

75

80

b A = (N + 9) × 5 10 a i Step number (t)

1

2

3

4

5

10

Number of matchsticks (m)

4

8

12

16

20

40

Step number (t)

1

2

3

4

5

10

Number of matchsticks (m)

3

6

9

12

15

30

ii m = 4t b i

ii m = 3t

Answers 1053 mathspace.co


c i

16 a Step number (t)

1

2

3

4

5

10

Number of matchsticks (m)

4

7

10

13

16

31

ii m = 3t + 1 d i

Month (n)

1

2

3

4

5

Population (P)

2

4

8

16

32

b 4096 rabbits

5.02 First-order linear recurrence relations What do you remember?

Step number (t)

1

2

3

4

5

10

Number of matchsticks (m)

3

5

7

9

11

21

1 • An initial value (e.g., u0) • A rule that defines the next term in the sequence using only the immediately preceding term (e.g., un + 1 = un + d)

ii m = 2t + 1

2 a Valid

11 a 2

3 a arithmetic

b

1

2

3

4

5

6

Number of tiles (T )

4 Tn + 1 = Tn – 6, T0 = 10

3

5

7

9

11

13

5 Tn + 1 = 4Tn, T0 = 30

ii T = 2n + 1

d 41

b geometric

b x4 = – 19

c The sequence of xn is decreasing as n increases.

12 a $1, $3, $7, $15 b $38, $43, $48, $53 c Day 6 Extend your thinking 13 a Year 1: P1 = 35 predators, V1 = 1950 preys Year 2: P2 = 37 predators, V2 = 3865 preys b After two years, the prey population (Vn) is increasing significantly (from 1000 to 3865). The predator population (Pn) first decreased (from 50 to 35) and then slightly increased (to 37), showing a more complex trend.

7 a The previous value is divided by 2. 1 b a2 = 16 c The sequence of an is decreasing as n increases. 8 a a0 = 7, a1 = 12, a2 = 17, a3 = 22, a4 = 27 b a0 = 2, a1 = 8, a2 = 32, a3 = 128, a4 = 512 c a0 = 3, a1 = 6, a2 = 15, a3 = 42, a4 = 123 2 d a0 = 54, a1 = 18, a2 = 6, a3 = 2, a4 3 e a0 = 2, a1 = – 6, a2 = – 10, a3 = – 12, a4 = – 13

14 a 1, 3, 6, 10, 15, . . . b This rule is inefficient for finding a term far into the sequence because there is a need to calculate every single term that comes before it. To find t100, it is necessary to calculate t2, t3, t4, . . . all the way up to t99. n ( n 1) c a = 1 and b = 2. The rule is tn . 2 1

d Valid

Practice 6 a x10 = – 43

n ( n 1) 2

c Invalid

c previous

Sequence number (n)

c i T = 3 + 2(n – 1)

15 a t

b Invalid

b t = 35

9 a an + 1 = an + 10, a0 = – 4 b an + 1 = an + 6, a0 = 7 c an + 1 = an + 2, a0 = – 6 d an + 1 = 3an, a0 = – 9 e an + 1 = – 3an, a0 = 10 1 f an 1 an, a0 = – 405 3 g an + 1 = 3an + 1, a0 = – 5 h an + 1 = an + 5, a0 = 4 10 an + 1 = an – 7, a0 = 21

1054 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


11 Tn 1

1 Tn, T0 = 3000 5

12 a

16 a P0 = 200, 1, P1 = 670, P2 = 1234, P3 = 1910.80, P4 = 2722.96 b

y

Pn (Koala population)

12

2500

10

2000

8

1500

6

1000

4

500 n (Number of years)

2 0

x 0

1

2

3

4

2

3

4

5

b Arithmetic c tn + 1 = tn + 2, t0 = 4 13 a i 4, 6, 8, 10, 12

1

ii Tn + 1 = Tn + 2, T0 = 4

b i 2, 4, 8, 16, 32

ii Tn + 1 = 2Tn, T0 = 2

c i 1, – 2, 4, – 8, 16

ii Tn + 1 = – 2Tn, T0 = 1

14 a First five terms: t0 = 15, t1 = 11, t2 = 7, t3 = 3, t4 = – 1 Sequence: 15, 11, 7, 3, – 1, . . . Behaviour: The sequence is decreasing. b First five terms: t0 = 10, t1 = 10, t2 = 10, t3 = 10, t4 = 10 Sequence: 10, 10, 10, 10, 10, . . . Behaviour: The sequence is constant. c First five terms: t0 = 1, t1 = 3, t2 = – 1, t3 = 7, t4 = – 9

c Shape of the graph: The points on the graph do not form a straight line. The vertical distance between consecutive points increases each year, creating a curve that bends upwards. This indicates non-linear, exponential growth. Long-term behaviour: The recurrence relation is of the form Pn+1 = RPn + d, with R = 1.2. Since R > 1, the sequence shows divergent growth. This means the koala population will continue to increase at an accelerating rate and will not approach a steady or limiting value. Extend your thinking 17 a0 = 13 18 a B3 = 120

b B = 120

c

B1 = 1.25B0 – 40 = 110

Behaviour: The sequence is oscillating.

B2 = 1.25B1 – 40 = 97.5

d First five terms: t0 = 100, t1 = 30, t2 = 16, t3 = 13.2, t4 = 12.64

B3 = 1.25B2 – 40 = 81.875

Sequence: 1, 3, – 1, 7, – 9, . . .

Sequence: 100, 30, 16, 13.2, 12.64, . . . Behaviour: The sequence is decreasing and approaches a limiting value of 12.5 15 a After Year 1: P1 = 930 fish After Year 2: P2 = 1073 fish After Year 3: P3 = 1230 fish b At the end of the fifth year, the population will be approximately 1594 fish, exceeding the goal of 1500.

As seen, the population is decreasing. Since R = 1.25 > 1, the sequence will not stabilise at a positive population; it will continue to decrease (and would eventually become negative if the model continued, implying extinction). 19 a Pn + 1 = 1.20Pn – 15, P0 = 50 b P4 = 23

c Tn + 1 = 1.2Tn – 20

20 An + 1 = 2An + 2, A0 = 2

Answers 1055 mathspace.co


5.03 Arithmetic sequences

c

What do you remember?

un 20

1 a 20, 24

b 8, 9.5 20 19 d , 3 3

c – 10, – 14 3 7 3 a i 11, 14, 17, 20

n

0

5

10

15

20

b d = – 50

2 a d

–20

ii d = 3 ii d = 10

b i 11, 21, 31, 41

c i – 7, – 10, – 13, – 16 ii d = – 3 d Straight line

4 a – 10, – 6, – 2, 2

15 a

b – 8, – 10, – 12, – 14 c a, a + d, a + 2d, a + 3d

n

1

2

3

4

un

1

5

9

13

5 a 8, 12, 16, 20, 24

b − 5, 0, 5, 10, 15

b d=4

6 a d = 0.9

b n = 11

d u14 = 53 Extend your thinking

Practice 7 a i u0 = 15

ii d = 5

iii u9 = 60

16 x = – 7

b i u0 = 28

ii d = –8

iii u5 = – 12

17 a d = 5

ii un = 7n – 2 iii u10 = 68

c m=5

8 a i d=7 b i d = – 0.8

ii un = – 0.8n + 17.8

c i d = –7

ii un = – 7n + 17 3 n 4

17 4

19 a 50 m

b

200 m

c dn + 1 = dn + 50, d1 = 50

d

500 m

20 a

59 4

n

1

2

3

4

18

T

230

260

290

320

740

1

2

3

4

b 30

9 − 6, 0, 6, 12, 18

c

n

1

2

3

4

10

320 T 310 300 290 280 270 260 250 240 230 220 210

un

15

10

5

0

− 30

0

10 a n = 37

b un = – 1 + 3n

c uk = 1 – 3k

iii u9 = – 46 3 d i d ii un 4 iii u14

b un = – 9 + 5n

18 a d = 3

iii u13 = 7.4

b n = 27

11 a u5 = 32 + 4d

c n = 117

d n = 57

b u9 = 32 + 8d

c d = – 12 12 a d = 4

b u0 = 1

c un = 4n + 1

d u11 = 45

13 n = 31 14 a

c un = – 3 + 4n

b –5

1056 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

n

d Straight line


9 a $41.08

5.04 A pplications of arithmetic sequences

b Vn + 1 = Vn – 1.55, V0 = 48.83 10 a $300

What do you remember?

b $2200

c $1900

1 a Simple interest

d Vn + 1 = Vn + 300, V0 = 1900

b Flat-rate depreciation

11 a an + 1 = an + 7, a0 = 3

c Simple interest

c 52 animals

d Flat-rate depreciation 2 a $4800

b Tn + 1 = Tn – 2.5, T0 = 156

12 a 136°C

b $700

c 75°C

3 a V0 = 3000

d 52 minutes b Tn + 1 = Tn + 3, T0 = 10

13 a $31

b d = –3

c November

c Vn + 1 = Vn + (– 3) or Vn + 1 = Vn – 3, with V0 = 3000 4 a $30 000 r c d V0 100

b an = 3 + 7n

14 a 90 words

b $2310

b Tn + 1 = Tn + 10, T0 = 30

d r = 7.7%

c n = 47 d Wn + 1 = Wn + 70, W0 = 30 15

Practice 5 a $3000

2000

b $220

c Vn = 3000 + 220n

Vn

d V12 = $5640

6 a An + 1 = An + 150, A0 = 5000 b $5600

1500 1000

c An = 5000 + 150n d 10 years

500

7 a $15 000

b 8%

c Vn = 15 000 – 1200n

n

d $4200

0

1

2

3

4

5

8 a $29 000 b 29 000

16 a $180

Value

b $10

c Vn + 1 = Vn – 10, V0 = 180

28 000 27 000 26 000 25 000 24 000 23 000 22 000 21 000 0

n 1

2

c Vn = 29 000 – 1000n

3

4

d 15 years

Answers 1057 mathspace.co


Extend your thinking 17 a

Month

Distance travelled

Total distance travelled

Depreciation

Car value

1

2000 km

2000

340

51 660

2

4000 km

6000

680

50 980

3

3000 km

9000

510

50 470

4

5000 km

14 000

850

49 620

b Vn + 1 = Vn – 170, V0 = 52 000 c Month 8 18 a Tn + 1 = Tn + 12, T0 = 50 b T8 = 146 c T13 = 206, 13 weeks d 100 m2 19 a 4-week depreciation = $1200 b Vn + 1 = Vn – 1200, V0 = 60 000 c 36 weeks d 44 weeks 20 a Let Vn + 1 = Vn – 80, V0 = 12 000, where n = number of 1000s of cups b 37 500 cups

5.05 Geometric sequences What do you remember? 1 By choosing any term after the first and dividing it by the previous term. 2 a –8

b i A rithmetic as terms are generated by adding a constant.

d Answers may vary. Possible answer:

4 a 108, 324

Assumptions:

• Café’s weekly usage stays at 900 cups. • Depreciation is smooth and doesn’t change over time.

c

• Cheaper machines that may have nonlinear depreciation or fail unexpectedly • Machines with maintenance that affects resale value • Businesses using value-based replacement (e.g. based on output quality, not price)

1058 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

b – 768, 3072

27 81 , 64 256

d

81 243 , 4 8

5 a 6, 24, 96, 384 b 7, – 14, 28, – 56 c 700 000, 728 000, 757 120, 787 404.8 d – 2, – 6, – 18, – 54 e 1.3, – 5.2, 20.8, – 83.2 6 a

n

0

1

2

3

un

4

8

16

32

7 a i 3, 12, 48, 192

ii

R=4

b i − 4, 12, − 36, 108

ii

R = −3

Model may not apply to: • Cafés with seasonal variation or irregular usage

1 4

ii R = – 9

ii d = 4

• Machine value only depends on usage, not time, wear-and-tear, or breakdown risk.

c

3 a i G eometric as terms are formed by multiplying by a constant ratio.

c 42 weeks

• Every 1000 cups = exactly $80 depreciation (linear model).

b – 0.9

b u6 = 256 Practice

8 a i Tn = − 2 × 6n ii b i Tn = − 0.3 × 5n ii

− 20 155 392 − 585 937.5


9 T4 = 750

5.06 Applications of geometric sequences

10 un + 1 = 0.5un, u0 = 24 11 a R = 2 12 a

c Tn = 3 × 2n

b T0 = 3

n

0

1

2

3

5

Tn

4

6

9

13.5

30.4

What do you remember? 1 a

Day

Mass of radioactive element D (g)

0

800

b 1.5

1

400

2

200

30

3

100

25

4

50

20

b Exponential

15

2 a un = u0 × Rn

b 1

r 100

d u0

c

Tn

10 c 1

5

n 0

1

2

3

4

5

3 a u0 = 8000 c R

d Curved line 13 a

n

0

1

2

3

Tn

3

6

12

24

b R=2

c

c Geometric decay, R = 0.5 d Geometric growth, R = 2 Practice

14 a Pn + 1 = 1.04Pn, P0 = 500

5 a 8.48 cm c

d 672 15 a Vn + 1 = 1.06Vn, V0 = 5000 b $6691.13 c 9 years d 10 years 16 a Mn + 1 = 0.97Mn, M0 = 1000 c 17 hours d 543.79 g

1.015

b Geometric growth, R = 1.025

Tn = 3 × 2n

Extend your thinking

b 737.42 g

1 .5 100

6% = 1.5% 4

4 a Geometric decay, R = 0.85

d T9 = 1536

b 658 people

1

b

r 100

12 years

b 10.10 cm

c Hn + 1 = 1.06Hn, H0 = 8 6 a n

0

1

2

3

Vn​ 24 000 25 440 26 966 28 584 b 1.06

4 30 299

c Vn = 24 000 × 1.06n

7 a P (n) = 800 × 0.92n b It will take 9 years. 8 a $51 600

b $38 163.36

c Vn + 1 = 0.86Vn, V0 = 60 000 9 a hn + 1 = 0.7hn, h0 = 9 b hn = 9 × 0.7n

c 2.1609 m

Answers 1059 mathspace.co


18 a Mn + 1 = 1.06Mn, M0 = 620

10 $486 349.91 b an + 1 = 0.8an, a0 = 1

11 a 0.8 c 26.21%

d 79.03%

e n=7 12 a 12%

b 19 994

13 a 1.2

b 51.84 mm

14 a $65 536

b $268 435 456

c 21st day b an = 13 × 0.5n

15 a an + 1 = 0.5an, a0 = 13 c 0.81 m

b $1047.48 c Membership cost: $1047.48, cost of 12 games = $504, the membership cost more than double the amount to purchase individual tickets. 19 a Let V0 be the initial term and Vn be the value after n years. Vn + 1 = 0.75Vn, V0 = 360 b V4 = $113.91 c 31.6% 20 a Vn + 1 = 0.85Vn, V0 = 2000

Extend your thinking

b V3 = $1228.25

16 a Let V0 = principal, and Vn = value after n years.

c The offer of $1400 is higher than the bike’s depreciated value of $1228.25. Therefore, it is a very good offer for Priya.

Vn + 1 = 0.82Vn, V0 = 25 000 b $9268.50

6.01 Introduction to matrices

c $15 950 d Car depreciated value lost: $25 000 – $9268.50 = $15 731.50 Train cost over 5 years: $15 950 Car is more cost effective.

What do you remember? 1 a A rectangular array of real numbers, symbols, and expressions.

Other factors to consider:

b A matrix that contains the same number of rows as columns.

• Car: petrol, rego, insurance, maintenance, parking

c A matrix that consists of exactly one row and any number of columns.

• Train: consistent cost, time to relax, reliability

d A square matrix where the diagonal consists of all ones and all other entries are zeros.

• General: environmental impact, convenience, personal preference 17 a $2760

b $879.60

c Total cost (A) = (Phone outright) – (Resale value) + (Data plan cost) = $2199 – $879.60 + (24 × $25) = $1319.40 + $600

2 a True

b False

d True

e True

c False

3 a 4

b 3

4 a 3

b 2

Practice 5 a 3×2

b 1×5

c 4×1

d 4×2

Option B total cost = $2760

e 3×3

f 4×5

g 2×4

h 2×2

Difference in cost: $2760 – $1919.40 = $840.60

i 1×3

j 1×4

k 4×1

l 3×2

m3×4

n 3×6

= $1919.40

Option A (buying the phone outright and getting a separate data plan) is better value by $840.60 over two years.

1060 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

6 a 10

b 0

c −2

d 12

7 a a33

b a13

c a23

d a21

8 a B

b C

c A

d D


9 a [− 4

1

4]

The region ‘Only identity matrix’ is not possible because, by definition, all identity matrices are square matrices. Therefore, any identity matrix must lie in the intersection of the ‘Identity’ and ‘Square’ circles.

b

c

d

10 a Row

b Square

c Column d Square

11 a 20

b 7

c 4

d 25

12 6 13 a − 3

b 2

14 a False

b True

c False

d False

15 a No, not square. b No, leading diagonal should be all 1 ’s. c Yes d No, leading diagonal should be all 1 ’s. 16 a False. A matrix with size m × n and n × m have the same number of elements, but different sizes. b True. The number of elements in a square matrix with n rows is n2 and the number of elements in a column matrix with n rows is n. When n ≥ 2, n2 > n. c False. If n > m, then adding a new row will add more elements than adding another column and if n < m, then adding a new row will add less elements than adding another column. Extend your thinking 17 A: K

2 3 4 3 4 5

0 –1 3 2 19 Answers may vary. Possible answer: Square matrix 23 51

21 a 1 × 36, 2 × 18, 3 × 12, 4 × 9, 6 × 6. Since each order can be flipped, the matrix also have the order 36 × 1, 18 × 2, 12 × 3, 9 × 4. b 1 × 20, 2 × 10, 4 × 5 Since each order can be flipped, the matrix also have the order 20 × 1, 10 × 2, 5 × 4. c 6×9 22 A 1 × 1 matrix is the only matrix that can be simultaneously a row matrix, a column matrix, and a square matrix. • As a row matrix, it has one row, so m must be 1 and its size will be 1 × n. • For it to also be a column matrix, n must be 1, making the size of the matrix 1 × 1. • A square matrix has equal numbers of rows and columns, which in this case is satisfied because 1 = 1. Ask your teacher for worked solutions. 24 a t = − 1

b u=7

e x=2

f y=0

c v=3

d w=8

6.02 Represent information in matrices What do you remember?

10 01

00 00 00 Zero matrix

b The matrix with order 10 × 12 or 12 × 10 will have the least number of rows and columns combined.

23 nij = 3j + 5i − 3

18 M

00 00

20 a All the factor pairs of 120 can be used as the order of a matrix with 120 elements. The factor pairs are: 1 × 120, 2 × 60, 3 × 40, 4 × 30, 5 × 24, 6 × 20, 8 × 15, and 10 × 12. Since each order can be flipped, the matrix has 16 possible orders.

1 a

b 2×3

2 a Season

b 4×2

c t32 = 15, representing 15°C in Melbourne during winter. Identity matrix

3 a $250

b Week 1

c $1430

Answers 1061 mathspace.co


4 a 6 hours

b Both Dana and Ethan

c 39 hours

The matrix is given by:

d Dana

Practice 5 a

630 650

185 450

b If a21 is changed from 420 to 320, it means that the amount of butter used in the ‘Scrumptious Surprise’ recipe is reduced by 100 g, from 420 g to 320 g.

11 a

6

7 a b 2

c Jamie

d

b A person cannot be friends with themselves. 8 12 a 610 km b Los Angeles and San Diego c 730 km 13 9

14

A B C A B C

10 The towns in alphabetical order are:

15 a

1. Boorowa (B) 2. Cootamundra (C) 3. Harden (H) 4. Junee (J ) 5. Temora (T ) 6. Yass (A) 7. Young (O)

1062 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

A A B C D E

b

2 2 A

A B C D E

B C D E

B C D E


16 a The train stations, in order from left to right, are:   1. Hillsboro (H)   2. Beaverton (B)   3. Pioneer Square (P )   4. PSU (U)

19 Each game must have a clear winner and a clear loser, meaning that for any pair of players, if tij = 1 (indicating Player i defeated Player j), then tij must equal 0 (indicating Player j lost to Player i) For example, if A defeats B, then t12 = 1 and t21 = 0.

5. Expo Centre (E)   6. Rose Quarter (R)

The error in the matrix involves the game between Dana (D) and Fiona (F). The matrix indicated that t46 = 0 and t64 = 0 meaning both Dana and Fiona lost to each other. In a chess tournament, each game must have a winner, therefore this scenario is impossible. One of the elements should be a 1.

7. Airport (A)   8. Gateway (G)   9. Clackamas Town Centre (C)  10. Gresham (M ) The matrix is given by: U

20 Represent the games as a matrix to track whether two players have played together: U

b Airport - Gateway - Rose Quarter - Pioneer Square - PSU 17 a i $5000

ii $6000

b Since the actual expenses ($6000) exceed the budgeted expenses ($5000), Marketing Research is over budget by $1000. c c21 represents the actual expenses for Training in the Development department, which is $6700. Extend your thinking 18 a

C A

b i False

The coach should choose Ryan, Jimmy, and Beth for the last game. This ensures that every player has played with every other player at least once. 21 A, B, D, C, E = 56

6.03 Addition and subtraction of matrices What do you remember?

D

B

From the matrix, • Ryan (R) has not played with Beth (B). • Jimmy (J) has not played with Beth (B). • Lucy (L) has not played with Ellie (E).

1 a i 2×2

ii 2 × 2

iii Yes

b i 3×2

ii 2 × 3

iii No

2 a 2×2

b 2×1

e No

f No

3 a 3×3

b 3×3

e No

f Yes

c 1×2

d No

c 2×2

d Yes

E ii True

iii True

iv False

c If one road is washed away, the values need to decrease by 1 on elements nAC and nCA.

Answers 1063 mathspace.co


Practice 11 a 4 a A+B=

b

c

b A+B= 12 a X =

c A+B=

d A+B=

b X=

13 u = 10, v = 4, w = − 3, x = 7, y = 2 14 Angelita’s error in calculating A − B for

e A+B=

5 a A−B=

c A−B=

A=

b A−B=

computed B − A instead of A − B. She got 1 3 2 1 4 3 C= , which is B – A = , 1 1 5 6 7 8

d A−B=

e A−B=

f A−B=

when she should have calculated: 2–3 4–1 –1 3 A–B= = 6–5 8–7 1 1 To correct it, she needs to subtract B’s elements from A’s in the specified order, 1 3 yielding C = . 1 1 15 When these two matrices are added:

6 a b Operation not possible due to mismatched size c d [5

2 4 3 1 and B = was that she 6 8 5 7

f A + B = [3 −2 −2]

6

A 0

A

This result shows that adding a zero matrix to A leaves A unchanged.

11]

g

General rule: When you add a zero matrix to any matrix A (of the same size), the result is the matrix A itself. Mathematically, this can be expressed as: A+0=A

h [2 − 5 − 6]

Extend your thinking

e Operation not possible due to mismatched size f

16 a This statement is true. When two matrices are added, the operation is performed element by element. If the matrices A and B have the same size, the resulting matrix C will also be the same size.

7 a A−B+C= b B+C−A= c C−A+B= 8 a x=5

b x = −1

9 a

b Smith

10 Branch X: 3 shoes and 4 bags Branch Y: 4 shoes and 1 bag Branch Z: 2 shoes and 6 bags

1064 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

b This statement is false. Even if two matrices have the same number of elements, they cannot be added together unless they have the same size (i.e., the same number of rows and columns). c This statement is true. When a matrix is subtracted from itself, each element in the matrix is subtracted from itself, resulting in a zero for each element.


17 Lucas’s assumption is correct. Matrix addition is commutative. The reason is that the operation of adding corresponding elements in two matrices mirrors the commutative property of integer addition. Therefore, for any two matrices A and B of the same size: A + B = B + A. 18 A + B =

4 a The scalar is 3. b c 5 a y=2

b y=7

6 a 0T = Multiplying by zero results in a zero matrix. b 1T =

19 Visitors =

Multiplying by one leaves the matrix unchanged.

Now, add all these differences together: 12 + 32 + 9 + 13 + 4 = 70 visitors 20 D =

6.04 Scalar multiplication

c

b 1.01

c 1.25

d 1.72

e 3

f 1.10

g 2.50

h 1.03

8 a 0.95

b 0.90

c 0.55

d 0.92

e 0.10

f 0.80

g 0.47

h 0.98

Practice 9 a 4A + B =

What do you remember? 1 a 2A =

7 a 1.05

b 2A − B =

b − 4A =

c 5A + 3B =

A=

d

2 a 3A = b −A =

10 a 4A + 2B =

c 10A =

b 2A − 2B =

A=

c 3A + 5B =

d

d 0.3A + 2.5B = 3 a

b 11

c

d

12 a 1.12 11.20 13.44 12.32 b 16.80 17.92 15.68 14.56 15.68 16.80

Answers 1065 mathspace.co


13 a 0.95 190 171 209 b 237.5 218.5 199.5 256.5 247 228

Extend your thinking 22 Answers may vary. Sample answer: Matrix addition and subtraction involve adding or subtracting corresponding elements from two matrices. For these operations to be possible, both matrices must have the same size. If the matrices have different sizes, there would be elements in one matrix that do not have corresponding elements in the other, making the operation undefined.

14

15 16 a True

b False

17 a [30% b [90

50% 150

15%

45

c True

d True

5%]

15]

Scalar multiplication involves multiplying every element of a matrix by a single number (scalar). This operation does not depend on the matrix’s dimensions because it applies uniformly to each element, regardless of the size of the matrix.

18 n = 4 19 a n = 10 20 a A =

b n = 16

c n=2 b A=

21 First scalar multiplication:

23

24 Profit = 0.90S − C 22.95 15.30 32.22 20.50 27.54 22.10 = 20.16 12.80 27.63 18.40 26.55 19.90

This was calculated correctly by Mia but not by Ethan. 3 × 3 = 9, but Ethan writes 6.

=

Second scalar multiplication: 25

This was calculated correctly by both Mia and Ethan.

26 T = [1.75 2.1

Subtraction:

6.05 Matrix multiplication

1.4

2.55

1.95]

What do you remember? Mia’s error: 15 − (− 2) = 17 but Mia incorrectly calculated this as 13. Ethan’s subtraction is impacted by his error in the first multiplication. So he calculated 6 − 0 = 6 instead of 9 − 0 = 9. Both Mia and Ethan made mistakes, so neither is correct. The correct answer is:

1 a The product AB is possible and the resulting matrix is of size 1 × 1. The product BA is also possible and the resulting matrix is of size 1 × 1. b The product AB is not possible. The product BA is also not possible. c The product AB is possible and the resulting matrix is of size 2 × 3. The product BA is not possible. d The product AB is possible and the resulting matrix is of size 3 × 1. The product BA is not possible.

1066 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


e The product AB is possible and the resulting matrix is of size 2 × 3. The product BA is not possible. f The product AB is not possible. The product BA is also not possible. g The product AB is possible and the resulting matrix is of size 3 × 2. The product BA is not possible. 2 a Not possible

b Not possible

c Not possible

d Possible. 3 × 3

e Possible. 2 × 3

f Possible. 3 × 2

g Possible. 2 × 2

h Possible. 2 × 1

3 a Not possible

b Not possible

c Not possible

d Not possible

e Not possible

f Not possible

g Not possible

h Possible. 2 × 1

4 A 5 a i 3×1 ii AB = b i 2×2 ii AB = c i 2×3 ii AB = d i 4×3 ii AB =

e i 3×3

Practice 6 a 2×2 b AB = c 3×3 d BA = e No 7 a [32]

b

8 a AI = b IA = c The identity matrix, I, acts as the multiplicative identity in matrix multiplication, similar to how the number 1 acts in scalar multiplication. This means that multiplying any matrix by I (provided size is appropriate) results in the original matrix, demonstrating that I preserves the elements of the matrix it multiplies. 9 a EF = b When any matrix is multiplied by a zero matrix (provided size is appropriate), the result is always a zero matrix. This occurs because each element in the product is formed by multiplying elements of the original matrix by the corresponding zero elements in the zero matrix, leading to sums of zeros. 10 3 × 1

ii AB = f i 3×2 ii AB =

11 2 × 5 12 2 × 3 13 a 2 × 1 b An example of matrix G is

. FG = [59]

g i 3×2 ii AB =

Answers 1067 mathspace.co


14 a No. Addition is only possible for matrices of the same size. Since P is 2 × 4 and Q is 4 × 2, their sizes do not match.

19

b No. Subtraction is only possible for matrices of the same size. Since P is 2 × 4 and Q is 4 × 2, their sizes do not match. c Yes. The number of columns in P (4) matches the number of rows in Q (4), allowing for multiplication. The resulting matrix will be 2 × 2. d Yes. The number of columns in Q (2) matches the number of rows in P (2), allowing for multiplication. The resulting matrix will be 4 × 4. 15 a n = 4

b n=5

c n = −3

16 a A × B =

As shown, A (B + C) and AB + AC are equal, confirming the distributive property.

b B×C=

20 c (A × B) × C = 21

d A × (B × C) =

1 1 1 1 1

e Yes 17 a A

c BA

5 11 18

b B

26 11 28 19 24 35

755 989

Extend your thinking 18 Scalar multiplication involves multiplying every element of a matrix by a single number, while matrix multiplication involves combining two matrices to produce a new matrix. Scalar multiplication is always possible, regardless of the matrix’s size, and the resulting matrix retains the same size as the original matrix. In contrast, matrix multiplication is only possible when the number of columns in the first matrix matches the number of rows in the second matrix. The resulting matrix from this operation will have the same number of rows as the first matrix and the same number of columns as the second matrix.

1068 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

5 1 8 1 3 or 1 2 1 6 1

5 8 3 2 6

22 x + 2y = 5 and 3x + 4y = 11 The matrix format corresponds to these equations by encoding the coefficients of x and y in the first matrix, the variables in a column matrix, and the constants in the result matrix. Each row of the coefficient matrix, when multiplied by the variable matrix, generates one of the linear equations, making the matrix equation a concise representation of the system. 23 a = 9 and b = 10 24 D

370 490 395 535

D is a 2 × 2 matrix where rows represent Vehicle 1 and Vehicle 2, and columns represent Day 1 and Day 2. Each element is the total distance (in kilometres) covered by a vehicle across three routes on a specific day, calculated by summing the products of speeds (S) and times (T) over the routes. For example, Vehicle 1 covered a total distance of 370 km across all routes in Day 1.


6.06 Powers of matrices

9 a A2 =

What do you remember? 1 a False. The size is rows × columns, which is 3 × 2. b True. The inner dimensions (n and n) match. c False. The inner dimensions (columns of C = 2, rows of D = 4) do not match.

b A7 = c A20 =

d A3 =

d False. The inner dimensions (columns of M = 3, rows of M = 2) do not match. e True. The inner dimensions (columns of N = 3, rows of N = 3) match. 2 a Yes

b No

3 a M M

2 1 0 3

b N

4 a M

b M2

N

c No 2 1 0 3

d Yes

4 5 0 9

1 0 2 1 0 2 0 1 1 0 1 1 2 0 1 2 0 1

f A17 = 5 0 4 2 1 2 4 0 5

J P F J 0 2 0 P 2 1 3 F 0 3 0 J J 4

P 2

F 6

P 2

14

3

F 6

3

9

b No

A 2 B b M = C D

c No

6 a A2 = b A2 =

c A2 =

d No

d A =

A B C D

11 a The leading diagonal in the matrix represents instances where the sender and the receiver are the same individual. Since communication requires an exchange of information between different individuals, these selfconnections are not considered communication and are therefore represented by zeros. Aaron Bill Clara Darrel Eve

b A2

2

2

A B C D

A B 10 a M = C D

Practice 5 a Yes

e A18 =

Aaron

0

0

1

2

1

Bill

1

0

0

1

2

Clara

2

1

0

0

1

Darrel

1

2

1

0

0

Eve

0

1

2

1

0

3

7 a A =

b A =

8 a Yes

b No

c 2 12 a A2 =

b 2

Answers 1069 mathspace.co


13 a A =

b A2 = b

4

c 1

4 14 a A =

b 1

c Yes, because there are zero entries in A. 15 a • Defined: Yes • Justification: AB is a 2 × 2 matrix because the number of columns in A matches the number of rows in B. Since AB is square, (AB)2 is defined resulting in a 2 × 2 matrix.

c Since R + R2 + R3 already provides a comprehensive view of the network’s connectivity, adding R4 primarily adds more indirect paths without contributing to new direct connections. 18 a B2 =

b B4 =

Extend your thinking

b • Defined: No • Justification: C2 is defined and results in a 2 × 2 matrix since C is square. However, A2 is not defined because A is not a square matrix, it is a 2 × 3. Therefore, A2 + C2 is not defined.

19 a i A20 =

ii A21 =

c • Defined: Yes • Justification: C is a 2 × 2 square matrix. Power of square matrices are always defined, so C4 is defined, resulting in a 2 × 2 matrix. d • Defined: No • Justification: B2 is not defined because B is a 3 × 2 matrix. For B2 to be defined, B would need to be a square matrix. Therefore, B2 C is not defined.

iii The rows of A have reached fixed values that will not change with larger powers. b i A20 =

ii A21 =

e • Defined: No • Justification: BC is not defined because B is 3 × 2 and C is 2 × 2, resulting in a 3 × 2 matrix. However, the expression (BC)2 is not defined because BC is not a square matrix. The operation (BC)2 requires BC to be square. Therefore, 2 (BC)2 is not defined. 16 Yes

17 a

1070 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

iii The elements of A are changing between even and odd powers. The values seem to be switching positions. 20 y = − 3 21 E(10), A(6), B(3), C(1), D(0) 22 The connection between Node 1 and Node 3 can be removed because Node 1 is already connected to Node 3 through Node 2. The connection between Node 3 and Node 4 can be removed because Nod 3 is already connected to Node 4 through Node 2.


After removing these links, the network remains fully connected, ensuring that all nodes can still communicate either directly or indirectly. The new adjacency matrix after removing these redundant links is: A′ =

Summer Winter 225 180 243 193.50 202.50 144 337.50 310.50 342 306

Baby Girls c Boys Women Men d $2484

Morning Afternoon

Me Sp Mu 10 9 6 18 12 7

b C Morning Afternoon

Me Sp Mu 22 16 20 38 32 29

6 a B

6.07 Applications of matrices What do you remember? 1 a M

6 6 3 4 4 2 2 0 1

b [50

2 BA 3 a 3×1

4 a A

7 15 28

80

100]

b B

4 2 0

b B

21 25 12 26 11 22

c Frank’s total revenue for each store. d The total number of each size of pizza across Frank’s two stores. e The total number of pizzas sold at each of Frank’s two stores. Practice Baby Girls 5 a Boys Women Men

Summer Winter 500 400 540 430 450 320 750 690 760 680

Baby Girls b Boys Women Men

Summer Winter 725 580 783 623.50 652.50 464 1087.50 1000.50 1102 986

c B C Morning Afternoon

Me Sp Mu 32 25 26 56 44 36

The elements in the matrix B + C represent the total sales of three varieties of sausage rolls at both locations. d $613.20

7 a

1st 2nd 3rd 24 24.6 21.9 27 26.9 25.9 21.8 22 22

Team 1 Team 2 Team 3

70.5 b 79.8 65.8 c Team 2 8 a A

b B

Win Tie Draw Loss Pts 13 2 5 8 Win Tie Draw Loss

Pts 6 3 2 0

9 a $35 700

c AB = [94]

b $33 500

c A = [0.12 0.09] d B R S

Su Au Wi Sp 9800 8700 8800 8400 9900 8600 7800 7200

e [2067 1818 1758 1656] f $3414

Answers 1071 mathspace.co


10 a A

Ch Ad Pe

c BA

Bus Train 4.5 4.8 b B 6.4 7.8 3.5 3.9

Ch Ad Pe 6 2 2

12 a W

46.8 52.2

b P

Total cost of ticket bought for each type of ticket.

d PW

D1 D2 D3 C 27 16.5 15.5 U 24 13.5 19.5 J 28 22.5 18.5

b D

1 .6 2 .8 2 . 0 2 .3 2 .2 1 .8 3 .0 1 .9 2 .5

c AD

127.65 141.35 122.45 127.95 133.95 121.05 152.05 163.05 142.75

Jack John 2 1 3 4 2 4

Fish Tackle Tackle Bite

Si Ho Ji 1.2 4 2.2 1.9 4.5 0.9

c PW

d Bus

11 a A

Si Ho Ji

23.2 21.6 20.9 21.7

e The lowest total price in the first column is $20.90, so Jack should shop at Tackle Bite in order to save $2.30. The lowest total price in the second column is $21.60, so John should shop at Fish Tackle - though he only saves 10 cents, so it might be more efficient for them to both visit the same store and save on time/fuel instead.

d The leading diagonal of AD contains each diver’s final score for the competition. This entry is the sum of each diver’s dive score multiplied by its respective difficulty. Other entries in the matrix mismatch the divers and difficulty ratings. e Judy

13 • • • •

40 labour hours short for Design W 10 labour hours short for Design X 60 labour hours over for Design Y 30 labour hours short for Design Z

This allocation shows that Design Y receives the highest resource distribution, signifying its priority in comparison to the other designs.

14 a Let A represent the number of each type of meal sold each day: MM HM CM A Saturday sales 20 17 16 Sunday sales 22 21 25 Let B represent the number of each item type in each meal: H O C Mega Meal items 5 5 10 B Hungry Meal items 2 8 5 Crazy Meal items 1 9 12

P 4 3 0

S 4 3 0

The matrix product AB represents the number of each product sold on each day of the weekend: H O C P S AB Total items sold on Saturday 150 380 477 131 131 Total items sold on Sunday 177 503 625 151 151 Let S be a matrix which adds the columns of AB: S = [1

1]

The matrix product SAB represents the number of each product sold in total the previous weekend: H O C P S 2 282 SAB Total items sold on previous weekend 327 883 1102 282

1072 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


b Required quantities • Hamburgers: 327 • Onion rings: 883 • Chicken nuggets: 1102 • Pizzas: 282 • Soft drinks: 282

Over budget • Research • Equipment: $20 • Marketing: $1000

Manager’s belief • Hamburgers: 430 (103 more than required) • Onion rings: 900 (17 more than required) • Chicken nuggets: 1150 (48 more than required) • Pizzas: 210 (72 less than required) • Soft drinks: 350 (68 more than required)

• Development • Training: $1200 • Marketing: $500

16 a AB

7 6 4 2

2 4 5 2

3 2 3 8

3 1 0

5 3 4

23 22 17 8 18

The manager is overestimating the need for hamburgers, onion rings,chicken nuggets, and soft drinks, while underestimating the need for pizzas by 72 units. The manager’s estimates are not entirely aligned with the previous weekend’s sales data. It’s advisable for the manager to adjust the order quantities.

b Total points: • Tiger Titans: 23 points • Panther Power: 22 points • Rhino Runners: 17 points • Lion Legends: 18 points • Elephant Elites: 8 points

15 Under budget • Research - Training: $2000 • Development - Equipment: $50

Correct coach: The Tiger Titan’s coach

Winner: The Tiger Titans win the tournament with 23 points.

17 D

S T

370 490 395 535

Extend your thinking

18 Inventory

A B C D KC 4 3 0 3 , price GG 7 4 1 2

Inventory Price KC GG

A B C D

WS RP 90 169 180 298 300 598 410 749

summing matrix

1 1

WS RP 2130 3817 2470 4417

KC 1687 Inventory Price Summing matrix GG 2001 The profit KC Hi Fi is $1687 19 • Total revenue for Uptown location: $245 • Total revenue for Downtown location: $294.50 • Total combined revenue: $539.50

Answers 1073 mathspace.co


20 T o determine the average number of points scored by each player and identify the player with the highest average using a summing matrix, start by defining a summing matrix S (a column vector of ones) that corresponds to the number of games played. For the given score matrix H, multiply H by S to obtain the total points scored by each player. Then, divide these totals by the number of games to compute the average score for each player. Finally, compare the average scores to determine that the player with the highest average is Max, who scored an average of 15 points. 21 Let P be a permutation matrix and A be a matrix to be multiplied by P.

The multiplication of a matrix by a permutation matrix results in the reordering of its rows or columns, depending whether the permutation matrix is on the left (affecting rows) or on the right (affecting columns).

6.08 Inverse matrices What do you remember? 1 a AI = A = IA 1 0 b I and det (I) = 1 0 1 c I

1 0 0 0 1 0 and det (I) = 1 0 0 1

Given P: P

0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0

2 a M 1

a b c d e f g h i

3 a AB

Multiplying P × A (Row permutation): PA

0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0

a b c d e f g h i

d e f g h i a b c

Effect: The multiplication PA results in the rows of A being reordered. The first row of A moves to the third position, the second row moves to the first, and the third row moves to the second position. Multiplying P × A (Row permutation): AP

a b c d e f g h i

0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0

4 3

b “If M–1 exists, then det (M) = 3 × 6 – 4 × 5 ≠ 0.”

And A : A

6 1 3 6 4 5 5

c f i

a b d e g h

Effect: The multiplication AP results in the columns of A being reordered. The first column of A moves to the third position, the second column moves to the first, and the third column moves to the second position.

1074 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

I

1 0 0 1

b B is indeed the multiplicative inverse of A, since the product AB yields the multiplicative identity. Practice 4 a i –1

ii Has an inverse

b i 30

ii Has an inverse

5 a i 22

ii Has an inverse

b i 0

ii No inverse

c i 15

ii Has an inverse

d i – 42

ii Has an inverse

6 a det (A) × det (B) = 5 b det (AB) = 5 c The answers to parts (a) and (b) are the same: both equal to 5. Therefore, det (AB) = det (A) × det (B).


7 a i 15

b i –8

ii

1 6 –3 15 1 2

ii

1 4 5 8

0 ii

e i 12

3 4 7 7 ii 2 5 7 7 1 11 14 ii 0 1 1 0 3 4 4 19 3 1 ii 11 9 4 49 8 11 6

f i 7

g i 1

h i 49

8 a A 1

1 2

1 6 1 4

1 2 –3 5 1 1

1 2

1 2 3 5 1 1

1 1 3 5 1 2

2 –3 1 1

1 2 3 5 2 2

3 3 3 2

1

3

1 0 0 1

1 3 1 2 3 3 3 2

1 0 0 1

Identity matrix, I

Therefore, proved. 9 a –2 d A

b –8 1 2 3 4

c –2

–1 –1

e (A ) = A

10 a A matrix has an inverse if and only if its determinant is non-zero. In this case, compute the determinant of A as 3 × 6 – 2 × 4 = 10 ≠ 0. Therefore, A has an inverse. b Calculate det (A) = 6 – x2. Hence, x det (A) = 0 6. So, if x 6, then A has no inverse. 11 n = 2 12 O liver is not correct. In general, it is known that multiplication of matrices is not commutative. It cannot be assumed that BA–1 = A–1B. A counter example is when: 2 1 1 1 and B A 1 1 3 0 3 then: 2 1 1 1 2 5 and A 1B 1 3 0 3 1 10

b For A A–1: A A–1

1 2 3 5 1 1 1 2 3 5 2 2

1 2

7 1 1 ii 28 4 0

d i 28

A–1 A

0

ii 1 2 1 5 3 1

c i 5

For A–1 A:

BA 1

Identity matrix, I

1 1 2 1 0 3 1 3

3 4 3 9

13 The values of k for which A–1 exists are all k, 1 except k and k = 1. 2 Therefore, the inverse matrix is: 3 2 1 A 1 2 2k2 3k 1 ( k 2 ) k 1

Answers 1075 mathspace.co


d 1 ad bc c

14 a The formula is

a b c d

1

d ad bc c

b a

Substitute the matrices

1 ad bc

ad bc cd cd

ab ab bc ad

Expand multiplication of

b A × A–1 = =

b provided that ad – bc ≠ 0. a

ad ad = cd ad

bc bc cd bc

ab ab ad bc ad bc ad bc

Multiply each element by

1 0 0 1

=

Substitute I

ka kb kc kd

det (kA) = det

= k (ad – bc)

19

= k2 × det(A)

1

0

ince AA–1 = I by multiplicative S inverse property

Therefore, A2 = I.

a b c d = ad – bc a c b d = ad – cb

Therefore, det (A) = det (AT). 20

(AB)(B–1 A–1) = A(BB–1) A–1 = AIA–1

Extend your thinking 17 a B

b 1

det (AT ) = det

Multiply both sides by A

A2 = I

1 n 0 1

det (A) = det

Write the formula

A × A = A × A–1

1 ad – bc

c x = 4 and x = –3

2

A = A–1

–c a

0 1

18 a A n

= (ka)(kd) – (kb)(kc)

16

d –b

c d

Simplify

=I

15

a b

= AA–1

1 0 1 0

=I

b No, AB is equal to the additive identity, not the multiplicative identity.

(B–1 A–1) (AB) = B–1 (A–1 A)B = B–1 IB = B–1 B =I Therefore, (AB) –1 = B–1 × A–1.

21

(kA)

1 A 1 k

k

1 k

A A 1

Apply the properties of scalar multiplication and matrix multiplication

= 1 × A × A–1

Simplify

=I

Since AA–1 = I, the identity matrix

The expression ( kA) 1

1 1 A 1 is correct because multiplying kA and A 1 results in the identity matrix I. k k

1076 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


(A–1)–1 = A

22 –1

–1 –1

Practice

Write the formula –1

A × (A ) = A × A Write the inverse formula for both sides

I = I By definition of the inverse matrix

Since both expressions result in the identity matrix, (A–1)–1 = A.

6.09  Simultaneous equations with matrices

5 a i x+y=5

4x + y = –4 6 a i

1 0 0 c 0 1 0 0 0 1

2 5 1 d 3 2 7 7 5 3

2 a B = A–1C

b B = CA–1

–1

d B = CA–1

c B = –A C

3 a A 1

4 a X=

20 99 4 11

1 0 0 1

c i

33 31 c X= 113 31 1 8 e X= 5 4

33 31 144 31

34 297 20 33

4 17 1 17

9 17 2 17

1 d X= 1

f X=

x y

12 16 3 28

9 32 3 4

55 1143 1037 1143 955 1143

d i

x y

3 4 6 7

x y

5 1 2 4

x y

1 1 1 3

x y

iii

x y

9 13

iii

x y

2 0.5

iii

x y

3.1 3.9

iii

x y

2 .4 1 .1

iii

x y

1 2

13.33 9 .4

1 5

ii 2

4 6 7 a 8 12

5 6

24.9 45.9

ii 18 f i

x y

32 20

ii –3 e i

iii 49 101

ii 288

1 99 b X= 9 11

b X=

x y

4 1 4 5

ii 16

e B = (A + C)–1D 2 11 8 11

23 32

ii –10

b i

1 9 b 9 2

x y

1 3 4 2

24 5

1 ii x , y 5

b i x–y=5

What do you remember? 1 0 1 a 0 1

ii x = 6, y = –1

x – y = 7

23 61

b 0

c A zero determinant indicates the coefficient matrix does not have an inverse and either the system has no solutions or infinitely many. In this case, there is no solution for the system of equations.

Answers 1077 mathspace.co


–2 3 –8 12

8 a i

x y

iii

2 8

8 6 4 2

ii

13 a i 5x + 2y = 310

0

y

c

x y

4 2 10 a 5 5 c

x y

x y

x y

8 25

b

y

c –2

x y

63 3 2

42 20

z – 2x = 0

15 a

z – y = 30 x + y + z = 180 2 0 1 b 0 1 1 1 1 1

0 30 180

16 a i 250m + 80s = 13 170 x 2 4 6 8

c

m s

Extend your thinking

17 a X

82 43 – 19 19 –59 –46 19 19

b X

23 60 – 17 17 5 18 – 17 17

c X

2 16 – 75 25 1 8 5 10

d X

212 220 137 135

–

b 18

b A

45 24

1 5 –2 10 –5 4

1

18 a x + y = 2600, 45 37 42

x y z

ii 150m + 600s = 21 150 250 80 m 13 170 b 150 600 s 21 150

b

x y z

6 2 5

b

1 1 1 2 2 3

c

1 6

d

x y

12 a x + y = 53, x – y = 11 1 1 1 1

s v p

1 1 1 1 1 0

c x = 42°, y = 54°, z = 84°

–1 6 x y z

50 30

c Social = 14 hours, Video = 16 hours, Print = 33 hours

6 2

2 4 5 11 a 5 1 1 1 3 6

b

1 1 1

2 4 6 8

iv There are no solutions. 6 3 2 4

x y

v–s=2

x

−8 −6 −4 −2 −2 −4 −6 −8

9 a

c

p–s–v=3

iv There is an infinite number of solutions. 1 –1 x –2 4 b i ii 0 y 1 0 –2 2 8 6 4 2

ii 3x + 4y = 270

310 270

14 a s + v + p = 63

−8 −6 −4 −2 −2 −4 −6 −8

iii

x y

5 2 b 3 4

53 11 d

x y

32 21

1078 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

x y

800 1800

1 x 2

–

2 y 3

2600 1600

1600


a–b+c=5

19 a

c = 10 16a + 4b + c = –10 a b c

1 1 1 b 0 0 1 16 4 1

5 10 10

a + 113.5b + 890c = 10 150 a + 142b + 1210c = 15 432 a + 162.7b + 1494c = 22 450

1 113.5 890 b 1 142 1210 1 162.7 1494

a b c

0.75 0.13 0.25 0.87

b 469 readers

9 a T=

0.75 0.3 0.25 0.7

b 22 students

c The model is unrealistic, as it assumes students currently attending after school care will attend every day, and no one else is allowed to attend who is not currently. The proportion of students changing activity must also remain the same each day.

c a = –2, b = 3, c = 10 20 a

8 a T=

10 150 15 432 22 450

c a = 12 825.16, b = –507.26, c = 61.68 21 Cost of 6S = $18, 6V = $42, 6P = $85

6.10 Transition matrices

10 a P0 = 0.5 0.5

11 20 c P1 = 9 20 e P5 ≈

b T=

d

9 20

0.571 0.429

What do you remember? 81 77 1 a A = 88 92 2

1021 1029 b A = 1176 1168 3

c A4 =

13 337 13 321 15 224 15 240

2 a A4 =

0.7504 0.7488 0.2496 0.2512

b B6 =

0.7703 0.7700 0.2297 0.2300

c C

3 T=

40

0.8 0.25 0.2 0.75 b iii

c i

Practice 5 a T=

0.74 0 .18 0.26 0.82

b T=

0.69 0.58 0.31 0.42

c Town A: 222 800

b T=

0.95 0.23 0.05 0.77

d Town A: 226 268

e It is unrealistic, as the model assumes people currently in these two towns will never leave, and no one else can enter these towns from elsewhere. The proportion of people moving to each town must also remain the same each year. 12 a T50 =

0.7629 0.7629 0.2371 0.2371

b T51 =

0.7629 0.7629 0.2371 0.2371

c Yes 0.4617 0.4631 0.4327 13 a T20 = 0.0219 0.0223 0.0232 0.5164 0.5146 0.5441

0.4316 0.4396 0.4602 b T21 = 0.0228 0.0230 0.0219

0.3 0.1 0.6 c T = 0.3 0.5 0 0.4 0.4 0.4 6 a 50 families

11 a P0 = 220 000 60 000

Town B: 57 200 Town B: 53 732

0.3333 0.3333 0.3333 = 0.3333 0.3333 0.3333 0.3333 0.3333 0.3333

4 a ii

0.7 0.4 0.3 0.6

0.5456 0.5374 b 50 families

0.5179

c No

c 25 families 7 a 45%

b 15

Answers 1079 mathspace.co


0.13 0.39 0.39 14 a T = 0.42 0.16 0.06 0.45 0.45 0.55 b S0 =

c S5 =

5 a i The fibre optic cables.

ii

iii V = 7

iv E = 11

The cities

b i The wires.

1200 800 1000

ii The electrical components

928 572 1500

iii V = 7

iv E = 10

6 a More vertices

b No

iii V = 8

iv E = 9

c i The roads

d A steady state been reached because 929 S60 = S61 = 571 1500

ii The towns

7 a The community centres (Park Centre, River Hub, Mountain View, Downtown Spot). b The direct book-sharing routes between the community centres. c

D

Extend your thinking 15 a S2 =

644 557

b S7 =

654 546

R P

16 0.383 0.3187 0 0.4045 0 0 0.4918 0 0.5776 17 a T2 = 0.6813 0 0.5955 0 0 0.5082 0 0.4224 b Large powers of the matrix oscillate between two solutions, so the matrix has no single steady state solution.

M d 4

e 5

8 • B and C • A and C • D and E 9 a

7.01 Introduction to graphs

Aaron

Rochelle

Mario

Bianca

What do you remember? 1 a V = 5, E = 3

b V = 6, E = 9

2 a Directed

b Directed

c Directed

d Undirected

e Undirected

f Undirected

g Undirected

h Undirected

3 a 0

b 0

c 2

d 2

b Rochelle and Bianca, Aaron and Mario 10 a

Lucy Ryan

Practice 4 a No

b No

c Yes

d Yes

e Yes

f Yes

g Yes

h Yes

Beth Jimmy Ellie b Beth, Jimmy, Ryan

1080 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


11 a False

b False

c False

18 a Undirected

b Directed

d True

e True

f False

c Directed

d Directed

e Undirected

f Undirected

12 • B to C • C to A

Extend your thinking

• C to D

19 Remove the loop at B and remove one of the multiple edges between C and A.

• D to F • E to C

20 a

• F to B 13 a

B

A

C GW

B

WP

C W

b No, as Warrnambool (W) only connects to Waurn Ponds (WP) with a directed edge. Since there is no return path from WP to W, W cannot be reached from the rest of the network.

E

D

b Yes, the network is connected. It is possible to trace a path between any two friends. All friends are part of a single component. 14 a Yes

b No

15 a A, and C

c Yes

c

B C GW

d No

b A, B, C, and D

c B

WP

16 Graph A is a simple graph because it meets both conditions for a simple graph: 1. It has no loops (no edge starts and ends at the same vertex). 2. It has no multiple edges between any pair of vertices (no two vertices are connected by more than one edge).

W An additional one-way shuttle bus has been added between campuses in CBD and Warrnambool. 21 a

M

Graph B is not a simple graph because it has two loops. 17 a i 5

ii 7

iii Yes

b i 7

ii 7

iii No

Q WP D

F

S

b D–D c No, as the network contains a loop.

Answers 1081 mathspace.co


7.02 Degree and adjacency matrices

5 a

Y

What do you remember? 1 a ii

b iv

c i

2 a i 3

ii 2

b i 1

ii 2

X

d iii

Z

Practice A B C 3 a X Y X c Y Z

A 4 a i B C D

X

Y

A

1 0

1 1

b B C

X

Y

b

0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

Z

0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 A B C

D

0 1 0 0

0 0 1 0

1 0 1 0

0 1 0 1

c

A B

ii A : 1, B : 2, C : 2, D : 1 P Q R S P b i Q R S

0 1 1 0

1 0 0 0

1 0 0 0

0 0 0 0

C D d B

ii P : 2, Q : 1, R : 1, S : 0 P c i Q R S

P Q

R S

0 0 1 1

1 2 0 1

0 0 2 0

1 0 1 0

C

A

D

e

Q R

ii P : 2, Q : 2, R : 4, S : 2 P d i Q R S

P Q

R S

1 1 1 0

1 0 0 1

1 0 0 0

0 0 1 1

ii P : 4, Q : 1, R : 2, S : 3

1082 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

P S T


f

9 a

A B C

A E

B

D C

D E

A B C D E

6 a

Z X

0 1 0 0 1

1 0 0 0 0

0 1 0 1 0

0 0 1 0 0

0 0 0 1 0

c Out-degrees: A : 1, B : 2, C : 1, D : 2, E : 1. Bob and Diana can ask the most people (2).

Y b

A B b C D E

In-degrees: A : 2, B : 1, C : 2, D : 1, E : 1. Alice and Charlie are asked by the most people (2).

A

10 a Undirected, T1, T2, T3, T4 B

Matrix: T1 T2 T3 T4 T1 T2 T3 T4

D C

0 1 0 1

0 1 0 1

1 1 1 1

1 1 1 0

b Directed, A, B, C 7 a Undirected, because the matrix is symmetrical about the main diagonal (the entry in row i, column j is the same as the entry in row j, column i).

Matrix: A B C A B C

b deg(A) = 2 deg(B) = 3 deg(C) = 3 deg(D) = 4 8 a Directed, because the matrix is not symmetrical (e.g., the entry for P to Q is 1, but Q to P is 0). b P: In-degree is 1, Out-degree is 1. Q: In-degree is 1, Out-degree is 2. R: In-degree is 2, Out-degree is 1. S: In-degree is 1, Out-degree is 1.

1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0

c Undirected, A, E, F, G, P Matrix: A E F G P

A E

F G P

0 0 1 1 0

1 1 0 0 1

0 0 1 0 1

1 0 0 0 1

0 1 1 1 0

Answers 1083 mathspace.co


Matrix for G2:

d P1 P2 P3 P4 P1 0 1 1 0 P2 0 0 1 0 P3 0 0 0 1 P4 1 0 0 0 b AR

11 a Directed

P Q P Q R S c DF

Killer Whale Tuna

Mackerel Zooplankton b

b G1: deg(A) is 3, deg(B) is 2, deg(C) is 3, deg(D) is 2. G2: deg(P) is 3, deg(Q) is 2, deg(R) is 3, deg(S) is 2. (Degree sequence for both is (3, 3, 2, 2))

Extend your thinking 12 a

Foxes

Hawks

Rabbits

Squirrels

c One possible mapping: A maps to P, B maps to Q, C maps to R, D maps to S. Explanation: Vertices with the same degree were matched. For instance, A (degree 3) in G1 can map to P (degree 3) in G2. C (degree 3) in G1 can map to R (degree 3) in G2. B (degree 2) in G1 can map to Q (degree 2) in G2. D (degree 2) in G1 can map to S (degree 2) in G2. Connections must be checked: AB in G1 corresponds to PQ in G2. AC in G1 corresponds to PR in G2, etc. All connections are preserved with this mapping. 14 a

B

Plants c

R S

0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0

C

Kingfisher Frog

Small fish Water beetle

Snail

Tadpole

F

0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 b 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 c Coburg (C): 3 Brunswick (B): 1 Pascoe Vale (P): 1 Fawkner (F): 1

Algae

d Currently:

13 a Matrix for G1:

• B:1 → needs 2 → + 1 connection A B C

A B C D

P

D

• P:1 → needs 2 → + 1 connection

0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0

• F:1 → needs 2 → + 1 connection A minimum of 3 new edges must be added: • Connect Brunswick to Pascoe Vale • Connect Pascoe Vale to Fawkner • Connect Fawkner to Brunswick

1084 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


7.03 Planar graphs and Euler’s formula What do you remember? 1 a Two graphs are isomorphic if they have the same structure, meaning there is a one-toone correspondence between their vertices and between their edges that preserves adjacency (i.e., if two vertices are connected in one graph, their corresponding vertices are connected in the other). b A graph that can be drawn in a plane such that no two edges intersect (cross) each other, except possibly at their endpoints.

3 a Planar 4 a 5 + 6 − 9 = 2 (Yes)

b 5 + 5 − 10 = 0 ≠ 2 (No) c 8 + 6 − 13 = 1 ≠ 2 (No) d 12 + 10 − 20 = 2 (Yes) Practice 5 a Isomorphic. Both graphs are a cycle of 4 vertices. Graph 1B can be redrawn (e.g., by ‘straightening’ the sides) to look identical to Graph 1A. Both have 4 vertices, 4 edges, and all vertices have a degree of 2. b Not isomorphic. Both graphs have 4 vertices and 3 edges. However, their degree sequences are different. Graph 2A has degree sequence (3, 1, 1, 1). Graph 2B has degree sequence (2, 2, 1, 1). Since their degree sequences are not the same, the graphs cannot be isomorphic.

c A formula, V + F – E = 2, that relates the number of vertices (V), faces (F), and edges (E) of a connected planar graph. d An area of the plane bounded by edges when a planar graph is drawn in a planar representation. The area outside the graph is also counted as one face. 2 a False. While isomorphic graphs must have the same number of vertices and edges, these conditions alone are not sufficient. They must also have the same connectivity structure, including identical vertex degree sequences and corresponding adjacencies. For example, a path graph P4 (which has 4 vertices, 3 edges, and degree sequence (2, 2, 1, 1)) and a star graph K1,3 (which also has 4 vertices, 3 edges, but degree sequence (3, 1, 1, 1)) are not isomorphic because their degree sequences differ.

6

7 a i

b False. Euler’s formula V + F – E = 2 specifically applies to connected planar graphs. c True. More precisely, a graph is planar if it can be drawn with no edges crossing. If a graph is already drawn with no edges crossing, it is a planar representation, and thus the graph itself is planar.

b Non-planar

A

D

B

C

ii F = 4 b i

d False. The exterior region (the unbounded region surrounding the graph) is always counted as one face in a planar representation. ii F = 4

Answers 1085 mathspace.co


b E=7

8 i a A

11 a F = 9

b E = 8

c V = 11

e V = 5

f F = 3

c D = 14

d D = 2E

d E = 7

ii a A

b E = 12

12 a F = 4

c D = 24

d D = 2E

b

9 i a V=5

b E=6

c

A

A

13 a E = 4 B

D

F

b Answers may vary. Possible answer:

C d F = 3

e 2

ii a V = 6

b E=6

c

14 a V = 2

F

A

b Answers may vary. Possible answer: E A

B

C

B

D

d F = 2

e 2

10 a

Graph A

Graph B

Graph C

Graph D

Vertices (V)

8

5

6

6

Faces (F)

6

5

3

5

Edges (E)

12

8

7

9

V+F−E

2

2

2

2

Planar? (Y/N)

Y

Y

Y

Y

No. of vertices with odd degree

8

4

2

6

b The number of vertices with odd degree is always even.

1086 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


Extend your thinking

18 a

15 a 1 edge

b 1 edge

16 a E = 5

b F=3

P

17 a Eagles Network: Amy (A): connected to Ben (B), Chloe (C) Ben (B): connected to Amy (A), Chloe (C), Diego (D) Chloe (C): connected to Amy (A), Ben (B) Diego (D): connected to Ben (B) Sharks Network: Alex (A): connected to Zara (Z), Kai (K) Kai (K): connected to Alex (A), Zara (Z), Max (M) Zara (Z): connected to Alex (A), Kai (K) Max (M): connected to Kai (K) Sample network: Northern Eagles A

B

F

D

S

M

L

b 5 vertices and 6 edges (5 for the ring, 1 for the express line F-M). c Yes, the graph is planar. It can be drawn with no crossing edges (e.g., the FM edge can be drawn inside or outside the ring). V = 5, E = 6. To use Euler’s formula to verify, first, count faces from a planar drawing. If drawn planarly (e.g. F-M edge inside the pentagon), it creates one inner triangle (F – M – P or F – M – L depending on drawing) and one inner quadrilateral, plus the outer face. So, F = 3.

C Northern Sharks

Checking Euler’s formula: 5 + 3 – 6 = 2. Since it holds, the graph is planar (assuming it’s connected, which it is).

A

The number of faces is 3. 19 a Use Euler’s formula V + F – E = 2. Given V = 8, E = 12. Z

K

M

b Degrees of each vertex: Eagles: • Amy: 2 • Ben: 3 • Chloe: 2 • Diego: 1 Sharks: • Alex: 2 • Kai: 3 • Zara: 2 • Max: 1 Both networks contain the same number of vertices with the same number of vertices that also have matching degrees. The structure of connections is preserved across both networks, with the vertices relabelled. The networks are Isomorphic.

8 + F – 12 = 2 F – 4 = 2 F = 6. There are 6 faces. b No, Euler’s formula V + F – E = 2 only applies to a single connected planar graph. If the structure splits into two separate connected components, the original formula does not directly apply to the disconnected graph as a whole. A modified version, V + F – E = 1 + C (where C is the number of connected components), would apply. For C = 2, V + F – E = 3.

Answers 1087 mathspace.co


c Original: V = 8, E = 12, F = 6. New graph: V′ = 8 (no new joints), E′ = 13 (one more rod). Since the graph is still planar and connected, Euler’s formula V′ + F′ − E′ = 2 must hold. 8 + F′ − 13 = 2 F′ − 5 = 2 F′ = 7. The number of faces increases by 1, to 7 faces. (Adding an edge within an existing face in a planar graph divides that face into two, thus increasing the total number of faces by one).

1 a A sequence of vertices where no vertex is repeated (intermediate vertices cannot be repeated, and edges cannot be repeated). b An edge that connects a vertex to itself. c A graph where every vertex is reachable via some path from every other vertex. d A walk with no repeated edges. e A closed path with a length of at least 3, where the only repeated vertex is the start/end vertex. (In simple graphs, the minimum length is 3). 2 An open walk starts and ends at different vertices. A closed walk starts and ends at the same vertex.

4 a B c 5 vertices

b D, C, A d D b 7 edges d A

Practice 5 a No c Yes. Open walk.

v No

b i No

ii No

iv No

v No

c i Yes

ii No

iv No

v No

d i No

ii No

iv Yes

v No

iii No iii Yes iii No iii Yes

8 a Answers may vary. Possible answers: T - S - R - Q - P; P - Q - R - S - T. b Answers may vary. Possible answers: 9 a A - B - D; A - C - D

What do you remember?

c C

ii No

A - C - B - D - E; E - D - A - C - B

7.04 Walks and paths

3 a 3

7 a i Yes iv Yes

b Yes. Open walk. d No

6 a Yes

b Yes

c No

d No

b A - B - D - F; A - C - D - F; A - B - D - E - F; A-C-D-E-F 10 3 paths 11 5 unique paths 12 a Answers may vary. Possible answer: B - H - W - X. b Answers may vary. Possible answer: H - X - Y - Q - W - B. c Answers may vary. Possible answer: Q - R - T - P. d Answers may vary. Possible answer: P - U - T - S - Q. 13 a Yes. b No. Not a walk in the directed graph (edge P → M does not exist; only P → F and R → M exist). c No. Not a walk in the directed graph (edge P → M does not exist; only P → F and R → M exist). d No. Not a walk in the directed graph (edge M → P does not exist). 14 a i No

ii No

iii Yes

iv Yes

b i Yes

ii No

iii No

iv No

15 a Walk, trail, path, circuit, cycle b Walk, trail, path 16 a Answers may vary. Possible answer: A - B - D - B - E. The edge BD is used twice (B to D, then D to B). b Answers may vary. Possible answer: A - B - D - G - E - B. Vertex B is repeated; no edges are repeated.

1088 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


c Answers may vary. Possible answer: A - B - D - G - F. d Answers may vary. Possible answer: A - B - D - C - A. Extend your thinking 17 a Cycle. It is the only one that must be closed. b Path. It is the only one that is not necessarily closed. 18 Applicable: Walk, Trail. Reasoning: The sequence X - Y - W - Q - B - Y - H forms a walk because all consecutive vertices are connected by edges: XY, YW, WQ, QB, BY, YH exist in the graph. It is a trail because no edge is repeated. It is not a path because vertex Y is repeated as an intermediate vertex. It is open (starts at X, ends at H), so it is not a circuit or cycle. 19 No, it is not possible. Every circuit (closed trail) that is not itself a simple cycle can be shown to contain at least one simple cycle within it by removing any repeated vertex sequences that form their own closed trails. For example: A

B

Practice 3 a Yes, as it is an Eulerian circuit. All vertices have degree 2 (even), so the network is Eulerian and can be traversed starting at any vertex, visiting each edge exactly once and returning to the starting point. b Yes, as it is an Eulerian trail. The network has exactly two vertices with odd degree (degrees 3, 3), and the rest have even degrees (2, 2, 2, 2), so it can be traversed starting at one odd-degree vertex and ending at the other, visiting each edge exactly once. c No, not traversable without repeating an edge as it is not Eulerian. All vertices have degree 3 (odd), and there are 4 vertices with odd degree, which violates the condition for an Eulerian circuit (all degrees even) or trail (exactly 0 or 2 vertices with odd degree). 4 a i Any of the vertices. ii The possible next vertices are C, F, and G. Explanation: After traversing the path A, B, E, the current vertex is E. In this network, vertex E is connected to B, C, F, and G. Since the edge E – B was just used, the remaining available, unused edges lead to vertices C, F, and G. b i Only vertices E and F. ii The possible next vertices are C and G.

C

Explanation: After traversing the path A, B, E, the current vertex is E. In this network, vertex E is connected to B, C, and G. Since the edge E – B was just used, the remaining available, unused edges lead to vertices C and G.

D

7.05 Traverse connected graphs

5 a Traversable, exactly two vertices have an odd degree and the rest are even.

What do you remember? 1 a Yes

b No

c No

d No

e Yes

f No

g No

h Yes

i Yes

j No

2 a Not traversable b Eulerian (all degrees even — circuit possible) c Semi-Eulerian (exactly two odd degrees — trail possible) d Not traversable

b B and E c They both are connected to an odd number of edges. 6 a No, it is not possible to draw an Eulerian circuit. An Eulerian circuit requires all vertices to have an even degree. Vertices A and B have an odd degree (deg(A) = 3, deg(B) = 3), and all other vertices (C, D, E) have an even degree making it semi-Eulerian, not Eulerian. b Answers may vary. Possible answer: B-A-E-C-B-E-D-A

Answers 1089 mathspace.co


7 a semi-Eulerian b Vertices D and E c Answers may vary. Possible answers: • A - C - E - D - F - E • A - C - E - F - D - E 8 a Yes, exactly two vertices have an odd degree and the rest are even. b No, each vertex has an odd degree. c Yes, each vertex has an even degree. d Yes, exactly two vertices have an odd degree and the rest are even. 9 No 10 a Yes, an Eulerian trail is possible. The network has exactly two vertices with an odd degree (B and E, both degree 3). All other vertices (A - C - D - F - G - H) have even degrees. A network is semi-Eulerian (has an Eulerian trail) if it has exactly two odd-degree vertices. b This is not possible as C is an even-degree vertex. An Eulerian trail must start at one odd-degree vertex and end at the other. The odd-degree vertices are B and E. A trail can start at B and end at E, or start at E and end at B. For example, starting at B and passing E, then ending at E: B - A - C - F - E - H - G - F - D - B - E. 11 a Yes, since all vertices (D, X, Y) have even degrees, the graph is Eulerian. Therefore, the delivery driver can traverse each road exactly once and return to the depot (D). b D-X-Y-Y-D

13 a No. To complete the delivery in a circuit using each edge exactly once, the network must be connected with an even degree for all vertices (Eulerian circuit). This is not the case as there are two vertices with an odd degree. b The minimum number of streets that must be walked more than once is 1. By repeating a single street path between the two odddegree vertices, all vertices effectively become even degree for the purpose of a circuit covering original edges once and this repeated path. c Answers may vary. Possible answer: P - V1 - V2 - . . . - V13 - Q

7.06 Weighted graphs and networks What do you remember? 1 a Yes

b Yes

c No

2 a Yes

b Yes

c No

d No

e Yes

f Yes

g Yes

h No

i No

3 a Add an edge that connects any vertex from the component ′′U, S, Q, T′′ to any vertex from the component ′′V, W, P, R′′. For example, add the edge TV. b Yes 4 a Add a directed edge that connects any vertex from the component ′′P, T, U, Q′′ to any vertex from the component ′′R, S, W, V′′. For example, add the edge UV. b No

Extend your thinking

Practice

12 a Trail, as Jayden does not repeat edges, may revisit vertices, and does not necessarily return to the starting point.

5 a i 9

ii 33

b i 4

ii 63

b No. If the network is semi-Eulerian (has two odd-degree vertices, as implied by the fixed setup for part c), an Eulerian circuit is not possible. An Eulerian circuit requires zero odd-degree vertices. c Answers may vary. Possible answer: A-B-C-D-A-E-F-C

6 a 5

b 10

7 a 6

c 11 b 10

c The path A, W, X, Z is invalid. There is no directed edge from vertex A to vertex W; the arrow points in the opposite direction (W → A). Therefore, this path cannot be traversed. 8 a 16 9 a 22

1090 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

d Yes

b 21

c 19 b 15


10 a 21

b 15

11 S

b

3570 N

T 8

325

410 65 1240 535

6

12

P

475

F 965

230 c

L 12 a 39

A

b 27 d Path A - E

c 44 13 a 21

39

d Direct path A – C

c 20

23

4

41 6

15 C - A - B - F - I

53

16 A - D - F - G - H

F

17 A - C - B - E - F - H - J

C

4

5

4

Y

A

2

T

b The shortest path from hub S to hub A is S - C - A, with a total shipping time of 9 hours.

3

5

6

22

7

N

V 3

6

U

W

Extend your thinking 21 a

5

E

6

P

A

4 3

3

5

3

2

4

7

D

Z

U

19 D - C - A - E - B

4

12

9

d

18 D - C - E - G - F - I

S

2

R

32

14 L - J - I - H - D - A

20 a

13

11

b 19

9

3

4 X

C

10

7 5

5

4

H 11

6

P

S

8

T

13

Answers 1091 mathspace.co


23

F

S 9

5

A

11

B

3

G 6

10 C

5

7 8

S3

S1

D 5

S2

E

Quickest route: D - E - C - G - A - F - B

7.07 Trees What do you remember?

S4

Practice 5 a Yes

b No, because it has a circuit.

c Yes

d No, because it has a loop.

6

1 a A connected graph with no cycles (or a connected graph in which every edge is a bridge).

Lisa Kate

Amy Robert

Sarah

b A tree that connects every vertex of a graph.

e An algorithm that makes the locally optimal choice at each stage with the hope of finding a global optimum. 2 a False

b True

c True

d False

3 a No

b Yes

Chris

7 Unknown

Juliet

Daisy Leonard Unknown Richard

Mark B

C F

3

B G

4 3

D

E

1

B

6

7

b A

1092 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

April Todd

Connor

A

E

Patrick Mitchell

6

D

Unknown

Marbel Rebecca

8 a

C

Barbara

Tom

4 Answers may vary. Possible answers: V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 A

Joseph

Matt

c A spanning tree in a weighted graph that has the minimum total weighting possible. d An edge that makes a connected graph disconnected if it is removed.

Alex

Sandy

5 C 4 2

6 F

E

D


9 a 5

13

b

A

F

12

5

2

9

G

C

31

29 E

7 2

6

H 17

D

3

F

B

A Extend your thinking

c $21 000 000 10 a 4 b

500 720

740

10 10

26 C

B

E 15

D

9

12

I 19

640

14 The graph representation would show 5 vertices (A, B, C, D, E) with edges and weights as listed. One possible MST (using Prim’s starting at A, for example):

520

B–C (90 m), C–D (100 m), A–B (120 m), D–E (130 m).

560

Total length = 440 m A 120

720

B

c 2300 km 11

200

G 150

3 F

4 5

C

H 3

C

B

A

K

F 13 D

E

E 9 15

17 11

14

B 19 A

H

D 130

D G

180

100 220

2 4

4

12

90

E

2

21

K

15 a The graph representation would show 5 vertices (P, Q, R, S, T ) with edges and weights as listed in the table. Q 40 R 50 90 80 60 70 P

C

120

30

T

S b 180 000

Answers 1093 mathspace.co


16 a Alex’s order (Prim’s from A): (A, B), (B, C), (C, D), (D, E), (E, F). Total: 19 km. b Ben’s order (Prim’s from F): (F, E), (E, D), (D, C), (C, B), (B, A). Total: 19 km. c Yes, MSTs identical. Trails: {(A, B, 4), (B, C, 3), (C, D, 5), (D, E, 2), (E, F, 5)}. This graph has a unique MST, which Prim’s finds regardless of start. Not always guaranteed; multiple MSTs can exist, leading to different results based on start/ties. d No, D–F (6 km) not included. From A, after A, B, C, D, E connected (cost 14 km), to connect F, options are A – F (10), C – F (9), D – F (6), E – F (5). Prim’s selects E – F (5) (cheapest). MST remains 19 km. e Max length for C–F is 5 km. When A, B, C, D, E are connected (cost 14 km), edges to F are A – F (10), C – F (x), E – F (5). For C – F (x) to be chosen, x ≤ 5 km (to be ≤ E – F (5)). If C – F = 5 km, it’s an alternative MST path.

8.01 Explanatory and response variables What do you remember? 1 a iii

b i

c iv

d ii

2 a False. Univariate data analysis focuses on describing a single variable. b True. c False. This is bivariate data as it involves two variables per individual. d True.

7 a Yes b The explanatory variable is the monthly advertising spend (in dollars) and the response variable is the number of product units sold per month. 8 a Yes b The explanatory variable is the number of ticket sales and the response variable is the revenue from the show. 9 a Number of soft drinks

b

Waist size

c Number of soft drinks

d

Waist size

10 Time spent reading 11 Number of words known 12 Population P 13 D 14 a Univariate data b Type of coffee sold (e.g. latte, cappuccino, flat white) 15 a Univariate analysis; Variable: Resting heart rate b Bivariate analysis; Variables: Hours of training per week, resting heart rate 16 Height 17 Explanatory variable: Speed of the wind Response variable: Height of the kite 18 a Yes

b No

19 a False

b True

c False

d False

3 a Height of the ball Extend your thinking

b Amount of time passed

20 Possible answers include: The amount of money the house sells for.

Practice 4 a Univariate data

b Bivariate data

21 a Explanatory variable: People’s age

c Bivariate data

d Bivariate data

Response variable: Daily exercise time Response variable: Amount of germs

e Univariate data

b Explanatory variable: Type of soap

5 a No

b Yes

c No

d Yes

e No

f Yes

g Yes

h No

i No

j No

k Yes

l Yes

6 Univariate data

1094 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

c Explanatory variable: Day of the week Response variable: Petrol prices


The explanatory variable is the season (summer or winter), which is categorical and is used to create the two separate groups (the parallel box plots). The response variable is the number of ice cream sales, which is the numerical data being measured and displayed on the horizontal scale. The examination indicates how the ice cream sales (the response) change depending on the season (the explanatory variable). 23 Explanatory variable: Vehicle type (car driver or motorcycle rider). Response variable: Speed (km/h). Explanation: The data is organised into two distinct groups based on the vehicle type. The speed is the outcome being measured for each of these groups. Therefore, investigation addresses whether the vehicle type helps to explain the recorded speed.

8.02 Scatterplots and correlation What do you remember?

Practice 5

14 12 10 Height

22 The response variable is shown on the horizontal axis.

8 6 4 2 0

1

2

3

4 5 Week

6 a i No b i Yes

ii Positive

c i Yes

ii Positive

d i No

ii Not applicable

e i Yes

ii Negative

f i Yes

ii Positive

g i Yes

ii Positive

h i Yes

ii Negative

7 There is no direct relationship. 8 Negative relationship

b Positive

9 a Strong, positive, linear

c Positive

d Negative

b Sea temperature

2 a Strong positive correlation b No correlation

c Air temperature b Yes

10 a B

d Weak positive correlation b Non-linear d Non-linear

4 The correct order is A, C, and B. • A shows a weak positive correlation because the points are widely scattered and do not closely follow a straight line. • C shows a moderate positive correlation, with points clustering more tightly around a line but still showing some noticeable spread. • B shows a strong positive correlation, where the points are tightly grouped around an upward-sloping line, indicating a very consistent positive relationship between the variables.

11 a Resting heart rate (bpm)

c Strong negative correlation

c No relationship

7

ii Not applicable

1 a Negative

3 a Linear

6

80 75 70 65 60 55 50 0

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Hours of exercise

b Strong, negative, and linear c Yes, the data point (9 hours of exercise, 70 bpm resting heart rate) appears to be an outlier, as it deviates from the general negative trend.

Answers 1095 mathspace.co


12 a

15 a 90

140

80 Sports

130 IQ

120 110

70 60

100

50

90

40

0

0

140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 Height (cm) c Height = 175 cm

b Not correlated

40 50 60 70 80 90 Maths

b Weak, positive, linear c Student 10’s

13 a

16 a

3.8

65

3.6

60 Time

Reaction time (s)

4

3.4 3.2

50

3

45

0

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Amount of sleep (hours)

b Negatively 14 a

c

Yes

0

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Temperature

b 10 c Moderate, negative, linear

t 70

d 8°C, 69 seconds

60

17 a

50

Sightings

40 30 20 10 0

55

n 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

0

b Increases c Strong, positive, linear d No

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Operations

b No definite relationship c No

1096 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1


23 Answers may vary. One possible answer: Time spent studying and test scores could lead to a weak positive relationship.

18 a 17

Price

16 15 14 0

600 700 800 900 1000 Supply (kg)

b Strong, negative, linear c When very few bananas are available to be sold.

It could be that while additional study hours slightly benefit most students, other factors play a significant role in determining their final score. For instance, some students might have natural aptitude, meaning even with fewer study hours, they can achieve similar or even better scores than their peers who study longer. Others might benefit from private tutoring, have access to better resources, or engage in practical applications of their knowledge that aren’t directly measured by the study hours. Here is a table of values and scatterplot that would lead to a weak positive association:

Extend your thinking Hours studied

19 Dot 3 20 a The teacher

b Region 3

21 a It appears that y can change significantly without much corresponding change in x. b i Yes

ii Yes

iii Yes

22 a Based on the given data, medical expenses for males are generally lower than those for females. However, this trend does not always hold true when we look at the first two age brackets. For individuals aged 20 and below, medical expenses for females are lower than for males.

Test score

Student A

1

58

Student B

2

60

Student C

3

62

Student D

4

64

Student E

2

63

Student F

5

66

Student G

1

57

Student H

3

65

Student I

2

61

Student J

4

67

The trend for males is slightly stronger and more consistent. 65 Test score

b One outlier is the medical expense for a female at (10, ≈ 31 000). One possible explanation is that the individual may have experienced an injury, complications or developed an illness, resulting in a high medical bill.

60 55

0

1

4 2 3 Hours studied

5

Answers 1097 mathspace.co


11 a Confounding variable C causes A and B

8.03 Association and causation

b Causation: A causes B What do you remember?

12 a Positive non-linear correlation.

1 a False

b True

c False

d False

b Yes, because the rain will cause the height of the water to rise.

e False

13 a Negative correlation

2 a C

b B

c A

3 a No

b No

c Yes

4 a False

14 a Positive correlation d No

b True

5 There is a strong, positive, and approximately linear association between the hours spent studying and the test score. Practice 6 a Positive b Yes, as temperature rises this would cause people to buy more fans. 7 a Association

b Causation

c Causation

d Causation

e Causation

f Association

g Causation 8 a No

b Yes

c No

b Yes

d

No

9 a No b lt is highly likely a coincidence, or both trends might be independently influenced by broader factors such as global economic growth, technological advancement, and increasing population. For example, economic prosperity might lead to both more discretionary spending on items like athletic footwear and more investment in space programs and satellite technology. There is no direct, logical causal link suggesting that buying sneakers leads to launching satellites, or vice versa. c No 10 T here is no causal relationship between the two, as correlation does not imply causation. Also, there is a possible third variable that explains this correlation, such as the number of unemployed people in a city, which likely affects both the crime rate and the amount of homelessness in a city.

1098 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

b It is unlikely that there is a direct causal relationship. While both may be increasing due to broader societal trends (e.g., population growth, changing lifestyle preferences, economic factors), it’s improbable that drinking more flat whites directly causes more students to enrol in creative arts, or vice versa. The correlation is likely spurious or due to a lurking variable. 15 a Negative correlation b There is no causal relationship. The decline in landline connections is due to the widespread adoption of mobile phones, which offer more convenience. The rise in smashed avocado consumption is due to changing food trends and café culture. It’s highly improbable that having fewer landlines causes people to eat more smashed avocado, or vice versa. The correlation is spurious, as both trends are driven by separate, unrelated societal and technological shifts happening over the same time period. 16 a Positive correlation b No, while more sunlight may influence mood, other factors like personal circumstances could also affect mood scores, so a direct causal relationship cannot be assumed. Extend your thinking 17 Relationship A is more likely to involve direct causation because there is a known biochemical mechanism by which medicine can affect the body to lower blood pressure. In Relationship B, while parks can improve air quality, there are many confounding variables. Cities with more parks may also be wealthier, have stricter environmental regulations, less heavy industry, or different weather patterns, all of which strongly influence air quality.


9 a

Temperature (°C)

18 a Answers may vary. Possible answers: There is a positive correlation between the number of shark attacks at a beach and the number of sandcastles built. b The confounding variable is the number of people at the beach. When more people are at the beach, more shark attacks are likely to occur, and more people are building sandcastles. 19 a Spending more time on social media reduces the time available for studying science, leading to lower test scores. b Students with lower science test scores may lack confidence or interest in the subject, leading them to spend more time on social media as a distraction.

36 34 32 30 28 26 24 22 20 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 Number of people

b y = 0.2x + 18 10 a Skill level score

c Time management skills could be a confounding variable. Poor time management may lead to excessive social media use and insufficient study time, resulting in lower science test scores.

8.04 Line of good fit

45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0

What do you remember?

1

1 Decreasing 2 a No

b Yes

c No

3 Line 2

11 a 140

b Negative

120

d 4.35 Practice b h = 0.8

Ice blocks

c y decreases by 7.26 units.

100 80 60

6 4 knots

40

7 y = 4x – 15

20

8 y = 61.16 + 5.07x

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Hours practising per week

b i Approximately 20 ii Approximately 41

4 a –7.26

5 a 54.604 m

c y = 17.64 + 0.205x

0

14 16 182022 24 262830 3234363840 Temperature (°C)

b i Approximately 93 ii Approximately 152 c Increases

Answers 1099 mathspace.co


12 a Positive b 27 24 21 18 15 12 9 6 3

c Slope: For each additional week after release, the number of people watching is predicted to decrease by 2 thousand (2000 people).

y

y-intercept: At week 0, the model predicts that 19.86 thousand (19, 860) people would have attended.

x

0

1

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

c D

d Predicted attendance y = 19.86 – 2 (10) = – 0.14. The model predicts approximately 0 people. This prediction is an extrapolation, as 10 weeks is outside the data range of 1 − 7 weeks, making it unreliable. 17 a

13 a x = 20, y = 60

b −3

c y = −3x + 60

d 24 Eggs

14 a Negative slope b y = –2.5x + 105 c Slope: For every additional metre the diver descends, her lung capacity is predicted to decrease by 2.5 units. y-intercept: At the surface (0 metres depth), the diver’s predicted lung capacity is 105 units.

45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0

1

2 3 4 5 6 7 Ducks

8

1

2 3 4 5 6 7 Ducks

8

d y = 95 b

c 28

d L

1 A 28 40

e 0.675 years

Eggs

b

1 40

15 a (1040, 54)

Number of people (thousands)

16 a Yes, a linear model is appropriate as the points show a strong negative linear trend. 18

y

45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0

16 14 12

c 5

d 0

10

e y = 5x

f 150 eggs

8

18 a p = 2.16h + 3.48

6 4 2 0

x 1

2

3

4 5 Week

6

7

b y = 19.86 – 2x

1100 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

b For each additional hour of practice per week, the student’s average points per game is predicted to increase by 2.16 points. c Predicted points = 2.16 × 6 + 3.48 = 16.44. The student is predicted to score approximately 16.44 points.


19 a Interpolation

b Extrapolation

Practice

c Interpolation

d Extrapolation

5 a y = 30

b y = 15

c 3

b y = 5x

c y = 35

Extend your thinking

6 n = 5m

20 a y = 15.26

7 a k=5

b The data is strongly correlated and the prediction is an interpolation, so the prediction is very reliable. A 1 100 21 a b S 10 10

8 The distance (d) from a storm varies directly as the number of seconds (s) between seeing lightning and hearing thunder. The constant of 1 proportionality is . 5 9 The speed varies directly as the distance travelled (assuming time is constant).

c Slope: For every additional dollar spent on advertising, sales are predicted to increase by $100. y-intercept: With $0 spent on advertising, the model predicts sales of $100 000. d $490 000 e Reliable as the prediction made was within the original data set (interpolation).

10 r =

11 a y = 12 12 a

b A = 450 – 15T

22 a – 15 c 0 ha

d Unreliable as the prediction made was outside of the original data set. 23 a 70 seconds

b

b 125 seconds

c Unreliable as the prediction made was outside of the original data set. d Reliable as the prediction made was within the original data set.

9.01 Direct and inverse variation What do you remember? 1 a When x increases, y increases. When x decreases, y decreases.

b k = 40

c k = −3

3 a Direct

b Inverse

c Neither

d Neither

e Inverse

f Inverse

g Inverse

h Direct

i Inverse

j Neither

4 a Direct

b Inverse

d k=

c Inverse

b 36

x

1 4

1 2

1

2

4

y

24

12

6

3

3 2

24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2

y

0

b When x increases, y decreases. When x decreases, y increases. 2 a k = 90

k a

x 1

13 a k = 200 3 2

2 b y=

3

4

200 x

c y = 40

14 A and B 15 a q = 2p + 5 16 r =

b t=

48 s

5 n 125 2

17 a 375

b s=

18 a k = 2.5

b C = 2.5w

c s=

125 4

c $12.50

Answers 1101 mathspace.co


19 a k = 120

b t=

20 a k = 1220

120 s

c 1.5 hours

b t = 40

b n=

2 22 a k = 289

160 r2

c 40 pipes

b M = 0.29x3

c M = 148.48 g 24 It is doubled.

b 1.99 × 10− 6

11 The Earth is approximately 81.3 times more massive than the Moon. 12 a i 8 × 103

ii 3

b i 9.644 × 105

ii 5

c i 8 × 10− 4

ii − 4

13 a 7 × 10− 5 m

b −8

c −5

25 The centripetal force of an object varies directly as its mass (assuming velocity and radius are constant). 26 a k = 0.000 368

9 a 1.19 × 10− 6 b 3.742 × 109 mm

b n = 11 eggs

23 a k = 0.29

b 8.99 × 10− 3

10 a 3 742 000 000 mm

Extend your thinking 21 a k = 160

8 a 4.61 × 101

b y=

0.000 368 x2

d The human hair is 3 orders of magnitude larger. 14 The order of magnitude is 4. 15 The order of magnitude is 4. 16 a i B etween 4 and 5 (since 104 = 10 000 and 105 = 100 000)

9.02 Orders of magnitude and logarithms

ii 4.9777 b i B etween 2 and 3 (since 102 = 100 and 103 = 1000)

What do you remember? 1 B

ii 2.6990

2 a 300 = 3 × 102

c i Between − 2 and − 1 (since 10− 2 = 0.01 and 10− 1 = 0.1)

b 0.005 = 5 × 10− 3 c 0.000 04 = 4 × 10− 5

ii − 1.6021

d 7200 = 7.2 × 103

d i B etween 0 and 1 (since 100 = 1 and 101 = 10)

3 −7 4 a i 106

ii 6

b i 10− 6

ii − 6

c i 100

ii 0

ii 0.8451 e i B etween 6 and 7 (since 106 = 1 000 000 and 107 = 10 000 000) ii 6.0792 f i Between − 4 and − 3 (since 10− 4 = 0.0001 and 10− 3 = 0.001)

Practice 5 a 7 × 10− 2

b 1.2 × 103

ii − 3.1675

c 6.05 × 102

d 3 × 101

e 8 × 10− 3

f 3.04 × 105

g 9.73 × 10

−1

6

h 5.87 × 10

6 9.050 091 × 105 7 a 300 000 c 1 050 000

b 8200 d 70

e 0.0005

f 0.0275

g 0.000 090 1

h 4.6

1102 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

17 1 18 a 158.4893

b 0.0631

c 5011.8723

d 3.1623

e 0.1585

f 100 000

g 0.0013

h 44.6684

19 They differ by 2 orders of magnitude.


20 They differ by 6 orders of magnitude. 21 a The order of magnitude for the elephant’s mass is 3. b The order of magnitude for the mouse’s mass is − 2. c In this context, the elephant is approximately 105 or 100 000 times heavier than the mouse.

5 a 1 000 000 b 10 000 times more intense 6 a 11

b 17

7 a 4 countries

c 7 b 10 countries

Extend your thinking 8 a Animal/Insect

Lifespan (days)

Lifespan in a log10 scale

22 a The volume of the raindrop is 1 × 10− 16 km3.

Ant

20

1.30

b Earth is 28 orders of magnitude larger.

African elephant

25 500

4.41

Bowhead whale

71 400

4.85

Bumblebee

21

1.32

Chicken

2920

3.47

Extend your thinking

23 There are 84 000 bacteria in Sample B. 24 a 4.7 × 1023 b The side length would be approximately 8.94 metres. 25 a Star B is 2 orders of magnitude further away.

Dog

5110

3.71

Emperor penguin

8500

3.93

Fly

18

1.26

Giraffe

10 120

4.01

Hamster

780

2.89

Ladybug

365

2.56

Little penguin

2190

3.34

Monkey

7300

3.86

Shark

10 980

4.04

b Astronomer’s original calculation of how 9.0 1015 9.0 many times further: = × 1015 – 13 4.5 1013 4.5 = 2 × 102 = 200 times further. Correct calculation of how many times 9.0 1015 9.0 further: = × 1015 – 12 5.0 1012 5.0 = 1.8 × 103 = 1800 times further. The astronomer’s error caused them to significantly underestimate how many times further Star B is from Star A (they thought it was 200 times further, when it is actually 1800 times further). b

9.03 Log scales

5

What do you remember?

Practice 2 a $79 432.82 b $100 000 to $1 000 000 3 a 16 4 a R = 3.8

4

b 15 849 Frequency

1 a 4.88

b 251

c R = 7.2 b Minor

3 2 1

1

2 3 4 log10 of lifespan

5

Answers 1103 mathspace.co


9.04 Data transformations

b 25

What do you remember? 1 a No 2

y

b Non-linear

20

x

−3

−2

−1

0

1

2

3

y

18

8

2

0

2

8

18

3 A data analyst might perform a transformation to convert a non-linear relationship between two variables into a linear one. This allows for the use of linear regression techniques to model the data, make predictions, and better understand the underlying relationship.

15 10 5 x2 0 c

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 y

25

Practice 4 a Non-linear, quadratic

20

b Linear 15

c Non-linear, logarithmic d Non-linear, reciprocal

10

5 a i T he pattern is non-linear. As x increases, y increases at an increasing rate (curves upwards, like the right half of a parabola opening upwards or exponential growth).

5 0

ii y vs x2 b i T he pattern is non-linear. As x increases, y decreases rapidly at first, then the rate of decrease slows down (curves downwards, approaching the x-axis, like a reciprocal function). 1 ii y vs x c i The pattern is non-linear. As x increases, y increases, but the rate of increase slows down. ii y vs log10 (x) 6 a

x2 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80

7 a x

1 6

1 4

1 2

1

1 x

6

4

2

1

y

−5

−4

−3

2

b

1 x

0

1

−1

x2

0

9

36

81

y

1

4

13

28

−2 −3 −4 −5 −6

1104 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

1 2

y

2

3

4

5

6

7


c

1 x

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

log10 (x)

1

1.301

1.477

1.602

y

−2

− 1.398

− 1.046

− 0.796

7

−1

ii log10 (x) linearises the data. c i

−2

x

1

2

4

5

−4

1 x

1

0.5

0.25

0.2

−5

log10 (x)

0

0.301

0.602

0.699

y

− 5.75

−3

−6

y ii

8 a i

x

1

3

7

9

2

1

9

49

81

y

1

27

343

729

x

10 a i

ii No. Plotting y against x2 would show a curve, not a straight line. For example, (1, 1), (9, 27), (49, 343). The ratio of change in y to change in x2 is not constant. b i

x

1

2

4

5

1 x

1

0.5

0.25

0.2

y

1

0.25

0.0625

0.04

ii No. If y =

1 x

2

, then y =

1 x

− 5.875 − 5.9375 − 5.95

1 linearises the data. x x

−2

−1

0

1

y

−2

1 2

0

ii

2

1 −2 2

y x −2

1

−1

2

−1

2

.

−2

Plotting y against 1 would show a x quadratic relationship, not a linear one. For example, points would be (1, 1), (0.5, 0.25), (0.25, 0.0625). The change in y is not proportional to the change in 1 . x 9 a i x 1 2 4 6 x2

1

4

16

36

1 x

1

0.5

0.25

0.167

y

− 7.75

−7

−4

1

b i

x

−3

y

−2

−1

1

2

3

1 1 1 12 8 4

1 4

1 8

1 12

ii

ii x2 linearises the data.

3 4 1 2 1 4 −3

b i

−2 −1

1 4 1 − 2 3 − 4

y

x 1

2

3

− x

10

20

30

40

2

100

400

900

1600

x

Answers 1105 mathspace.co


c i

b

x

−2

−1

1 2

1 2

1

2

y

−1

−2

−4

4

2

1

ii 4

−1

12 10 8

3

6

2

4 2

x 1

−1

y

14

y

1 −2

16

x2

0

2

−2

c

−3

16

−4

14

2

4

6

8 10 12 14 16

y

12 10

d i

ii

x

0.1

1

10

100

8

y

−1

0

1

2

6 4

y

2

2

x2

0 1 0

12 a

2

4

6

8 10 12 14 16

y

x

14

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

12 10

−1

8 6 11 a

4 x

0

1

2

3

4

x2

0

1

4

9

16

y

0

1

4

9

16

1106 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

2 0

x2 4

8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36


b 10

14

y

y 18

8

16

6

14

4

12

2

x

0 −2

2

4

6

10

2

8

8

6

−4

4

−6

2

1 x

0 13 a

b

x

1

2

5

10

1 x

1

0.5

0.2

0.1

6

y

10

5

2

1

5

11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

15

c

3

4

5

6

y

3 2 1

1 x

0

1

16 a 1 x 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

x

1

10

100

1000

log10 (x)

0

1

2

3

y

0

5

10

15

1

2

1.2 b

11 y 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

2

4

y

0

1

y 14 12 10 8 6 4

1 x 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8

1

1.2

2 0

log10 (x) 3

Answers 1107 mathspace.co


c

18

y

y

2

14 12

log10 (x)

0

10

1

2

3

−2

8 −4

6

−6

4 2 0 17 a

−8

log10 (x) 1

2

3 19 a

log10 (x)

0

1

2

8

y

−3

7

17

7

b

6

y

5

15

4 3

10

2 1

5

0.5

1

1.5

2

y 15 10

0

log10 (x) 0.5

1

1.5

2

1108 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

1

2

3

4

5

b The data shows height increasing at an increasing rate, suggesting an exponentiallike growth or a quadratic relationship where the vertex is not included or is at t = 0. A logarithmic transformation of H (plotting log10 (H) vs t) or a square transformation of t (plotting H vs t2) might be appropriate. Given biological growth often follows exponential patterns, a log10 (H) vs t transformation is a good first choice. c

5

t

0

log10 (x)

0

c

H

t

1

2

3

4

5

log10 (H)

0.30

0.45

0.60

0.76

0.90

H

2.0

2.8

4.0

5.7

8.0


d

20 a

log10 (H)

t

1

2

4

6

t2

1

4

16

36

1 t

1.00

0.50

0.25

0.17

log10 (t)

0.00

0.30

0.60

0.78

d

4.9

19.6

78.4

176.4

0.8

0.6

b t2 linearises the data.

0.4 t 0

1

2

3

4

5

Yes, this transformation appears to have linearised the data reasonably well. 21 a

b

(Concentration of hydroxide)2

10− 6

10− 8

10− 10

10− 12

10− 14

1 Concentration of hydroxide

103

104

105

106

107

Concentration of hydrogen ions

10− 11

10− 10

10− 9

10− 8

10− 7

1 Concentration of hydroxide

22

hyperbola. Assuming the original data was for positive x, the graph would be a curve in the first quadrant.

log10 (y) 2

24 a The transformed equation is y = 3 (x2) − 5. The non-linear model is y = 3x2 − 5.

1 0

b Substitute x = − 4 into the non-linear model: y = 3 (− 4)2 – 5 = 3 (16) − 5 = 48 – 5 = 43. The predicted value is y = 43.

x 1

2

3

4

−1 −2

Extend your thinking 23 a The transformed equation is y = 5 − 2

1 . x

Simplifying this gives the non-linear model: 2 y=5− . x b The predicted value is y = 1. 2 c The equation y = 5 − is a transformation of x 2 the reciprocal function y = − shifted x upwards by 5 units. This would produce a

25 a Check if a plot of d vs v2 is linear and passes through the origin. First, calculate the v2 values: 400, 900, 1600, 2500, 3600. Now d check the ratio k = 2 for each pair: v 6 13.5 24 = 0.015, = 0.015, = 0.015, 400 900 1600 37.5 54 = 0.015, = 0.015. Since the ratio 2500 3600 d v2

is constant, a plot of d vs v2 is linear with

a vertical intercept of 0. The model is appropriate. b The constant of proportionality is k = 0.015. The equation is d = 0.015v2. For v = 80, the stopping distance is d = 0.015 (80)2 = 0.015 (6400) = 96 metres.

Answers 1109 mathspace.co


b True. A linear relationship between y and x2 implies y = a + bx2, which is a quadratic model.

9.05 Data models What do you remember?

c False. Linearisation is the process of applying a transformation to make non-linear data appear linear, so that linear regression techniques can be used.

1 B 2 a ii

b iii

c i

3 a The explanatory variable is x2. The response variable is y.

5 The essential first step is to create a scatterplot of the original data (y vs x). This allows you to visually inspect the data, identify its shape (e.g., linear, parabolic, hyperbolic), and determine if a transformation is needed and, if so, which type might be appropriate.

b The data model is y = 5 + 3x2. 4 a False. A logarithmic transformation can only be applied if all x-values are positive, since the logarithm of a non-positive number is undefined. Practice 6 a Parabolic c

b A

x2

1

3.24

4.84

9

16

20.25

33.64

38.44

49

81

y

5

9.5

12.7

21

35

43.5

70.3

79.9

101

165

7 a Logarithmic c

b B

log10 (x)

−1

0

1

2

3

y

− 12

−2

8

18

28

8 a Reciprocal c

b A

1 x

10

5

5 4

1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 8

1 10

y

30

15

15 4

3

3 2

1

3 4

3 8

3 10

9 a Parabolic c

b C

x2

1

4

7.84

16

30.25

y

4

−5

− 16.52

− 41

− 83.75

x2

72.25

116.64

231.04

400

1552.36

− 209.75

− 342.92

− 686.12

− 1193

− 4650.08

y 2

d y = − 3x + 7

e y = − 2693

10 a Logarithmic c

b B

log10 (x)

−1

0

1

2

3

y

4.8

5

5.2

5.4

5.6

d y=

1 log10 (x) + 5 5

11 a Reciprocal

e y = 5.24 b A

1110 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co


c

1 x

10

10 3

5 3

10 9

1

y

1 2

13 6

31 12

49 18

d y=

1 −3 4x

1 3

23 8

1 4

35 12

47 16

1 5

59 20

e y = − 2.975

12 a Parabolic c

11 4

1 2

b A

x2

1

0.81

2.25

4

12.25

16

25

38.44

81

100

y

6.5

6.4

7.1

8

12.1

14

18.5

25.2

46.5

56

d y=

1 2 x +6 2

e y = 1256

12 0.0060 13 a 1000

b 1100

14 a 2

Extend your thinking

c 100 b 2.5 mL

2

13 a y = 10 + 2x

Extend your thinking

b 108 kWh

15 a Volume = 0.459 cm3

c 8 rpm

b Mass = 19.3 × 0.459 = 8.8587 g

14 a y = 2 + 5 log10 (x)

c Mass ≈ 8.9 g (rounded to 2 significant figures)

b 18.5

16 a 2 million each second

c x = 105 = 100 000

b 120 000 000

10.01 Significant figures

17 a 1 hundred thousandth of a metre b 0.01 millimetres

What do you remember? 1 a True

18 1.67 × 10–24 grams 19 90 000

b False

2 No

10.02 Measurement units

3 27.8 4 a 0.08

b $724

c $35.05

What do you remember?

5 a 9.8765

b 12.3050

1 a m

b km

c mm

d cm

c 5.6789

d 0.4322

2 a ii

b i

c iv

d iii

Practice 6 a 7.5

b 10.65

7 a 6321.363

c 9.055 b – 4978.714

8 9.9 hours

b 100 cm = 1 m

c 1 cm = 10 mm

d 1000 mm = 1 m

4 a Division c Multiplication

b Multiplication d Division

5 a 1000 m, 10003, 1 000 000 000

9 31.62 m

b 100 cm, 1003, 1 000 000

10 a 4

b 3

e 4

f 3 4

11 a 7.231 010 8 × 10 c 72 310

3 a 1000 m = 1 km

c 4

d 2

c 10 mm, 103, 1000

g 3

h 6

d 34.2 mm ÷ 10 = 3.42 cm

b 8 significant figures

e 0. 85 m2 × 10 000 = 8500 cm2 f 256 mL = 256 cm3

Answers mathspace.co

1111


Practice

Extend your thinking

6 a 60 mm

b 65.2 mm

c 6540 mm 7 a 720 cm c 2.597 cm 8 a 1850 m

d 7320 mm

26 Plant 2 grows more in a week. In two weeks, Plant 2 will be 0.4 cm taller than Plant 1.

b 622 000 cm

27 1.56 km

d 5912 cm

28 833.33 cm2

b 5.147 m

29 a

c 76.65 m

d 42 001.3 m

9 a 18.445 km

b 6.0354 km

c 5.122 km

d 9.445 km

10 a 507 200 cm 2

11 a 70 000 cm

c 648 000 cm2

1

200

2

350

21

7350

3

100

24

2400

b 5.072 km

4

400

40

16 000

b 8.1 cm2

5

100

100

10 000

d 30 000 000 cm2

12 a 560 000 m2

b 3.4 m2

c 104 000 m2

d 56 m2

13 a 5.48 ha

20 000

c Farm 3 and Farm 2

30 5.76 litres

d 4 000 000 ha

31 40 cm

10.03 Pythagoras’ theorem

14 0.079 km2 15 a m3

b Farm 1 and Farm 4

100

d Farm 5

b 2 ha

c 300 ha

Length (m) Width (m) Area (m2)

Farm

b m3

c cm3

d m3

16 a B. Square metres are the most practical unit for measuring a garden. They are commonly understood from everyday spaces like rooms and offer clear, manageable figures ideal for planning planting or pathways. 2

b 850 m

17 a Square centimetres b Square metres

What do you remember? 1 c2 = a2 + b2 2 a AB or BA 2

b The side with length Y.

2

2

b 262 = b2 + 102

2

2

d 32 + 92 = c2

3 a c = 12 + 9 2

c 14 + x = 17 4 a x = 12.00

b x = 10.00

c x = 9.80

d x = 12.65

c Square centimetres d Square metres e Square kilometres

f Square centimetres

Practice

g Square metres

h Hectares

5 a No, it is not right-angled.

i Square metres

j Square metres

b Yes, it is right-angled.

k Square kilometres

l Square metres

c Yes, it is right-angled.

c kL

d No, it is not right-angled.

18 a mL

b L

d L

21 6 m3

6 The triangle can be a right-angled triangle since 52 + 122 = 132 (25 + 144 = 169). Therefore, by the converse of Pythagoras’ theorem, it is a right-angled triangle.

22 9000 cm3

7 a c = 17 cm

19 400 mL 20 a 1670 L

b 0.24 L

c 4250 L

d 0.45 L

c c = 6.71 m

23 0.0846 kL 24 a 700 mL

b 0.7 L

25 16

1112 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

b c = 50 cm d c = 9.49 cm

8 a c = 13.65 mm

b c = 11.40 m

c c = 25.31 m

d c = 25 m

9 a a = 8 cm

b a = 6 mm


c a = 9.64 m 10 a b = 24 m c b = 21.82 m

d a = 6.93 m

Practice

b b = 21 m

4 a 26 m

d b = 9.38 m

11 a 15.0 mm

b 18.0 cm

12 a x = 4.90

b y = 8.66

d 64 cm

b 30 m

c 30 cm

e 219 cm

f 3x + p + q units

5 a 84 m 6 a 45 m

b 75 mm

13 x = 10.30 cm

7 a 50 mm

b 160 mm c 54 cm

14 20.25 m

8 a y = 12 m

b y = 14 cm

c y=8m

d y = 7 mm

15 a x = 4.9 m

c 13.56

b 56 m

b x = 1.8 cm

16 22.6 m 17 a 10.4 cm

e x=4m

f d = 9 cm

g y = 6 cm

h x = 8 cm

9 a i y = 6 units

18 136 m

ii P = 24 units

b i c = 10.30 units

b x = 11.7

c x = 10.0

d x = 14.1, y = 14.1

ii P = 24.30 units

10 a 10 m

b 46 m

Extend your thinking

11 a x = 5 cm

b x = 7 cm

20 4.93 m

12 41.25 mm

21 h = 9.76 m

13 a a = 10 cm

22 142 = 102 + BD2

14 a P = 8.68 + 7.57x units

∴ BD = 142

102

196 100

96 ≈ 9.80 cm

142 = 102 + DC2 ∴ DC = 14

2

2

10

96 ≈ 9.80 cm

Since BD ≈ DC ≈ 9.80 cm, D is the midpoint of BC. 23 The exact length of x is 5 57 cm. 24 z = 18.47 b 17.55 cm2

25 a y = 12.08

10.04 Perimeter What do you remember? 1 a Multiply the length of one side by 4. b Add together the lengths of all four sides, or use the formula (2 × l) + (2 × w). c Multiply the length of one side by 8. d Multiply the length of one side by 3. e Add together the length of the sides around the outside of the shape.

3 a 6 sides

b Yes

b y=4m

b P = 4x2 – 10x + 2 units 15 a True. Both shapes have a perimeter of 24 cm, since the square has four sides of length 6 cm and the rectangle has two sides of length 9 cm and two sides of length 3 cm. b True. Since a regular hexagon has six congruent sides, the length of each side is equal to the perimeter of the hexagon divided by 6, which is 8 cm. c False. It is possible for a rectangle and a square to have the same perimeter. For example, a square with side length 5 cm and a rectangle with length 6 cm and width 4 cm both have a perimeter of 20 cm.

26 205 cm

2 a Yes

d 60 m

i s = 8 cm

b 19.2 mm

19 a x = 7.2

c 10 cm or 100 mm

c No b False

d No

d True. It is not possible for a triangle to have a greater perimeter than a rectangle with the same base and height. For example, a right-angled triangle with perpendicular side lengths of 6 cm and 8 cm has a perimeter of 24 cm, while a rectangle with base 6 cm and height 8 cm has a perimeter of 28 cm. 16 33.03 m 17 a x = 70.71

b 321.42 m

c $6495.90

18 a x = 7 m

b y=8m

c 42 m

Answers 1113 mathspace.co


Extend your thinking 19 x = 3 m 20 a 184 m

3 cm 2 11 a 36.09 cm

3 cm 2 b 25.74 m

c 261.5 cm

d 14.50 m

b 6+

10 a b $4710.40

21 22.86 m 22 64 m 23 a L + W = 60 b 1.8L + 2.4W = 124 100 c Original length m 33.33 m 3 80 m 26.67 m Original width 3 24 x = 5 m. There are two solutions to x (x = – 10 and x = 5.) When substituting each value back into the side lengths, one side length produces a negative solution. When substituting x = – 10: 3x – 10 = 3 (– 10) – 10 = – 40 As length is always positive, x = – 10 cannot be a practical solution to x.

12 a r = 11.46 cm

b r = 5.09 cm

c r = 4.79 cm

d r = 14.90 cm

13 a θ = 45.02°

b θ = 334.23°

c θ = 190.99°

d θ = 252.78°

14 23.7 cm 15 r = 9.72 m 16 29.85 cm 17 91.90 cm 18 a 31.4 cm

b 28.3 m

c 97.1 cm

d 239.9 cm

19 a $17.99

b $15.04

Extend your thinking

10.05  Arc length and perimeter of sectors

20 $3134.26

What do you remember?

22 a Statement is correct.

1 a d = 2x 2 a d = 2r 3 a 14π cm c 25π mm 4 a 31.42 m c 54.98 cm 5 a 3.18 cm

b C = 2πx b C = πr

c P = πr + 2r

b 30π m 9 d km 2 b 10.68 mm

c Statement is correct. 23 a 125.7 metres

b 177.7 metres

c 209.1 metres 24 10 : 1

10.06 Area

b 1.75 cm

What do you remember?

d 15.92 cm

6 a 14.01 cm

b 1.91 cm

c 17.51 cm

d 63.66 cm

Practice

143 m 72 3799 8 a m 180 9 a 9.42 units

7 b units 12 203 d units 18 53 b units 6 b 58.24 mm

c 5.01 cm

d 52.23 cm

c

b Statement is correct.

d 2.14 km

c 3.98 cm

7 a 4π units

21 12 315 m

1114 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

1 a Yes 2 a False

b No b False

c Yes c True

d True

3 The area is the space inside a shape, while the perimeter is the distance around the outside of the shape. 4 a 50 000 cm2

b 2.5 cm2 2

c 805 000 cm

d 50 000 000 cm2

Practice 5 a 344 m2 b 32.5 m2 c 33 mm2 d 18 mm2 6 40 m2


7 a 201.06 cm2

b 153.94 cm2

8 a 144π mm2

b 452.39 mm2

9 a 121π mm2

b 380.13 mm2

10 a 8 cm d 4.53 cm

b 3 mm

c 8 cm

e 12 cm

f 6 cm

2

27 Area of parallelogram = (7 + 10) × 2 = 34 mm2 7 10 2 34 mm2 2 × Area of trapezium 2 2 Therefore, the area of the parallelogram is equal to two times area of the trapezium.

10.07 Area of composite shapes

2

11 a 150 m

b 336 m

9 12 a cm2 2

25 b mm2 4

121 2 c m 4

d

1 a i Rectangle and semicircle. ii Addition method

338 mm2 3

13 a 362.3 cm2

b 114.0 cm2

2

d 315.4 m2

c 1470.3 cm

What do you remember?

iii Find the area of the rectangle and the semicircle separately, then add them together to get the total area. b i Trapezium and parallelogram

14 354 m2

ii Addition method

15 a a = 4

b h=4

16 a 5.08 mm

b 10.2 mm

17 a 7.3 m

b 8.4 m

18 a θ = 46°

b θ = 77°

19 a 0.0625 m2

b 144

iii Find the area of the trapezium and the parallelogram separately, then add them together to get the total area. c i Trapezium and triangle ii Addition method

20 The rectangle. Assume that the length of the shapes was a cm, the width of the rectangle would be b cm, but the height of the parallelogram must be less than b cm. 21 3 cm × 21 cm, 9 cm × 7 cm 22 a y

x b 2

xy c 2

xy d 2

Extend your thinking 23 a 6

d i Circle with a triangle cutout ii Subtraction method iii Find the area of the circle and subtract the area of the triangle from it to get the shaded area. e i Square with a semicircle cutout ii Subtraction method iii Find the area of the square and subtract the area of the semicircle from it to get the remaining area.

b 1.25 m2

24 a 75.92 m2

f i Rectangle with a triangle cutout

b The brightness of the light bulb does not affect the area it shines upon. The area is determined by the angle of the light and the distance to the fence, not the brightness of the light. Therefore, the area on which the security light shines would remain the same. 25 a The area will increase by a factor of 9. 2

b The area will increase by a factor of q . c The radius will increase by a factor of q. 26 a 44 cm2

iii Find the area of the trapezium and the triangle separately, then add them together to get the total area.

b 50 cm2

ii Subtraction method iii Find the area of the rectangle and subtract the area of the triangle from it to get the remaining area. 2 a a2 + b2 = c2 c A=b×h e A = π × r2 3 a 9.90 cm c 38.49 cm2

b A=l×w 1 d A b h 2 1 ( a b) h f A 2 b 4.95 cm d 24.5 cm2

e 63.00 cm2

Answers 1115 mathspace.co


Practice 4 a 112 m2

b 118 cm2

c 890 cm

2

d 513 cm2

5 120 cm2

b 2

6 a x=2

b 135 cm

7 a 143 cm2

b 231 cm2 2

c 0.625 m

d 0.575 m2

8 a 264 m2

b 136 cm2

c 80 m2

d 109 m2 2

f 107 units2

e 63 cm

2

b 146.1 cm2

9 a 113.1 cm

c 261.8 cm2

d 242.9 cm2

2

c 2

e 150.7 cm

f 176.6 units

g 226.2 cm2

h 1073.5 units2

10 a 136.94 m2

b 33.63 cm2

2

d 157.87 cm2

c 41.89 cm 11 a 414 m2

b 318 m2

12 120 cm2 13 13.98 cm2 14 65.75 cm2

d

2

15 3.01 m

Extend your thinking 16 a 70 m2

b $700

17 a $427.56

b $3537 2

18 a 22 603 m

b 33 904.5 kg

19 a 6507 cm2

b $1440

3 a True

b False

d False

e False

20 73.0 L

Practice

21 1.24 m2

4 96 cm2 5 238 mm2

10.08 Total surface area

6 280 cm2

What do you remember? 1 a Cylinder

b Cone

d Prism

e Sphere

c True

c Pyramid

7 a 480 cm2

b 864 cm2

8 a i 10 cm

ii 432 cm2

b i 4 cm

ii 312 cm2

9 260 cm2 2 a

10 a y = 15.65 cm 11 814 cm2

1116 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

b 751.2 cm2


12 120 cm2 2

2

13 a 80 cm

b 192 cm

14 a Using the Pythagoras’ theorem, let:

b Triangle, 7 m

c Rectangle, 3 cm

d square, 6 cm

e Circle, 22 mm

f Circle, 6 cm

3 a True

a = 6 cm = perpendicular height b = 5 cm = half of the base edge

b False

c False

d True

Practice

c = H = Height of triangular face c2 = a 2 + b 2

4 a 60 000 cm3

b 400 000 cm3

H2 = 62 + 52

5 a 84 cm3

b 48 cm3

3

H = 62 52 H ≈ 7.81 cm

6 2035.8 cm3

2

15 a 235.28 cm

b 256.20 cm

c 241.42 cm2

d 129.20 cm2

2

16 a 2827.43 units2

b 109 603.88 units2

17 a 1313.19 m2

b 964.09 cm2

18 a 58.31 cm2

b 122.52 cm2

19 a i 13 cm

d 330 cm3

c 32 cm

b 256.2 cm2

2

ii 282.74 cm

b i 17 cm

ii 1507.96 cm2

20 a 201.06 cm2

b 113.10 cm2

2

21 1158.12 cm

7 a 28π cm3

b 180π cm3

c 7π mm3

d 7π m3

8 a 653.5 cm3

b 108.0 cm3

9 34 900.0 cm3 10 a 30 cm3

11 a 200 cm3

b 40 m3 910 d mm3 3 b 864 cm3

c 16 cm3

d 154.78 cm3

c 64 cm3

b 2510 m3

12 a h = 24 13 a 24π cm3

22 1140.398 square units

100 π cm3 3 b 4577.20 cm3

b 720π cm3

14 a 113.10 cm3

23 11 cm

c 113 550.33 mm3

24 14 m 25 5.2756π m

2 a Rectangle, 14 cm

d 33.51 cm3

15 144 458.00 cm3

2

2048 π cm3 3 500 c π cm3 3 17 452.389 units3

16 a Extend your thinking 26 156x2 m2 27 101.8 m2 28 a 3240 m2

c

b 3175.2 m2

29 742.11 cm2

10.09 Volume What do you remember? 1 a Radius of the base, height of the cylinder b Radius of the sphere

b

256 π cm3 3

d 2304π cm3

18 18 cm 19 25 cm 20 a r = 3.78 cm

b r = 18.00 units

3

21 75.4 cm

22 a 87 880 000 mm3

b 2197 containers

Extend your thinking

c Area of the base, height of the prism

23 43.37 m3

d Area of the base, height of the pyramid

24 a 804.2 cm3

b 1206.4 cm3 c 33%

e Radius of the base, height of the cone

Answers 1117 mathspace.co


25 The volume of the smaller can is 1152π cm3 and the volume of the larger can is 9216π cm3. The volume of the bigger can compared to the smaller one is 8 times larger. Lyn is incorrect. 26 a V = lwh = 10 × 5 × 2 = 100 cm3 = 100 mL b Answers may vary. Possible answers: length = 5 cm, width = 5 cm and height = 4 cm 27 100 mm

11 a The first step is identifying all the faces. In this case there are three: the curved face of a cylinder and the curved faces of two identical cones. Calculate the slant height of the cone using Pythagoras’ theorem, then calculate the surface area of the curved part of the cone. Double this value (since there are two identical cones). Find the surface area of the curved face of the cylinder. Finally, add the surface areas of the faces. b 193.07 cm2

10.10 Composite solids

12 1209.84 cm2

What do you remember? 1 a A triangular prism and a rectangular prism

13 227.12 cm3

b A rectangular prism and half of a cylinder

14 641.41 units3

c A cube and a cylinder

15 a 38 475 cm3

d A cone and a sphere

c 11 400 cm3

2 a AreaA = πr2

b AreaB = 2πrh

c AreaC = πr2 3 a AreaA = πr

b AreaB = πrs

1 2 4 a Volume = πr2h + πr3 3 3 1 b Volume = πr2hcone + πr2hcylinder 3 c Volume = lwh –

1 lwhpyramid 3

5 a True

1 2 πr h 3 b False

c True

d True

e False

f True

Practice 205 cm

b 269.88 cm2

c 226.19 cm2

d 496 cm2

7 a 245.04 cm2

b 62.83 mm2

c 136 m2

d 3222.80 mm2

8 a 7.07 cm

b 7.81 cm

c 502.94 cm2

9 a 169.65 cm3

b 735.13 cm3

c 221.74 cm3

e 170 m3

f 81.69 cm3

3

3

g 8928.41 cm h 1417.19 m 10 a 619.94 m3 3

c 221.67 m

16 a 14.97 cm ii 143.76 cm2 2

iii 388.24 cm c 589 cm2

d 915 cm3

17 a 91.11 cm2

b 58.18 cm3

18 a 7996.07 cm3

b 4076.97 cm2

Extend your thinking

d Volume = s3 –

d 720 cm3

d 27 075 cm3

b i 56.55 cm2

2

6 a

b 30 cm

b 263.89 cm3 d 938.33 m3

1118 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

19 a 385 mL

b 25

c 19

20 a 30.14 m2

b 11.41 m3

c $6449.96

2

21 a 560 m of paint b The building with hexagonal spires will require less paint than the building with the rectangular spires. The spires with the square base require 560 m2 of paint while the spires with the hexagonal base require 420 m2 of paint. c The base of the hexagonal spire would need 2 to have a side length of 2 m. 3 2 8 xy xy2 22 a units3 b units3 3 3 1 c d 161 cm3 8


23 a The type with the most waffle will be the type with the greatest surface area, ignoring the hemispherical ice cream scoop on top. The slant height of the pointy waffle cone is 73 cm and its radius is 3 cm, so its surface area is 80.5 cm2. The cylindrical cone has a surface area of 122.5 cm2. A customer who wants the most waffle should buy the cylindrical ice cream cone. b The type that can hold more volume is the cylindrical cone. The volume of the pointy cone is 132.0 cm3, while the cylindrical cone holds a larger volume of 160.2 cm3. Therefore, a customer who wants the most volume should buy the cylindrical ice cream cone. 24 B lock A and Block B have the same surface area. This is because the faces generated by the cut out section in Block B add together with the original faces of the cube to get the same surface area as Block A. Block C has a greater surface area than the other two blocks since the cut out section generates four additional faces worth of surface area. Block B and Block C have the same volume, since they have had the same cube section cut out of them. Block A has more volume than the other two cubes since it hasn’t had anything cut out of it.

10.11 Similarity and scale factors What do you remember? 1 Yes, because all corresponding angles will be equal and all corresponding sides will be in equal ratio of one. 2 B

4 a False

ii False

iii False

b True

c True

d False

b EFGH

c 22.5 cm d 31.5 cm

5 Smaller 6 a ABCD

8 a Yes, the shapes are similar because they have identical corresponding angles, and their corresponding sides are scaled by a factor of 10. b No, the shapes are not similar because, although they have the same angles, the side lengths do not have a consistent scale factor across all corresponding sides. 9 In similar figures, the ratios between corresponding side lengths are equal. QR 18 2 BA 9 RS 24 2 AD 12 ST 8 2 DC 4 TQ 12 2 CB 6 Therefore, ABCD ∼ RQTS. 10 No, the two quadrilaterals are not necessarily similar. There is not enough information provided. 11

1 4

2 7 13 a 30 cm

12 a

b m=4 b 60°

1 14 The scale factor of would reduce it back to its 3 original size. For example, if a side had length x, the enlarged length would be 3x, so applying a 1 1 scale factor of results in 3 x x, the 3 3 original length. 15 h = 3.1

3 a Yes b i True

Practice

7 a LMJK ∼ USTV

b LKJM ∼ UVTS

16 h = 11.1 17 L = 5.3 18 d = 17 19 a 180 m

b 120 m

20 d = 4.63 21 4.4352 m

Answers 1119 mathspace.co


11 a x = 1280

Extend your thinking 22 a The triangles share a common angle, ∠BAE. They also both contain a right angle, with ∠ABE = ∠ACD = 90°. As two pairs of corresponding angles are equal, the third pair must also be equal. So, the triangles are similar since all three pairs of corresponding angles are equal. b 12.5 23 Answers may vary. Possible answer:

3

b 6.9 units

26 Since 115.4 < 400. Yes, the bridge can be built. 27 The height of the roof is about 4.33 m.

10.12 Area and volume in similar figures What do you remember? 3 9 1 a b 7 49 2 a 76 cm2 b 6 cm, 12 cm, and 15 cm d 9

e k2

3 a 4

b 64

4 a Yes

b 1.4

c 2.744

5 a False

b True

c False

Practice 6 a x = 27

b 2304π cm3 d m3 : n3

c 1 : 64 14 a 4

b h = 80

15 a 2

b 240 L

16 a 1 : 20

b 1 : 8000 b 1 64

c 54 528 cm3

b The amount of paint needed is not simply four times the amount for the first ceiling because the paint covers area, not length. The area scale factor is the square of the length scale factor, so the amount of paint needed is sixteen times the amount for the first ceiling.

24 Yes

c 684 cm2

13 a 36π cm3

19 a 24 L

1 5

25 a x = 2.5 units

d x = 15

12 x = 8.2

17 a 1 4 18 5

4 0

8

b x=4

c x = 36 000

b x = 504 c x = 12

d x = 4.38

7 a 4 b 28, 40, 64 c The perimeter of the larger triangle is 4 times as large as the perimeter of the smaller triangle. 8 a 4

b 2

c 26 mm

9 a 6

b 36

c 2.4 m2

10 3136 cm2

1120 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

20 a 2.5 cm

b 2 519 424 L

Extend your thinking 21 a A would be multiplied by 9. b A would be divided by 16. 22 3600 species 23 48 400 km2 24 16 : 1 25 Capacity is the amount that an object can hold, given in litres in this case. The required volume (which is the space the esky takes up) of the new esky is eight times the old esky. This means that the required dimensions of the new esky are 3 8 = 2 times the old dimensions. If Basili buys an esky with dimensions 8 times his old one, he will end up with an esky with a capacity of 20 × 83 = 10 240 L, which is much larger than he needs. 26 V = 6750 cm3 27 Yes, because the actual volume increase is around 19 times, which is reasonably close to the claim of 20 times.


11 a a = 6.99

11.01 Trigonometric ratios

b f = 79.36

c b = 26.15 What do you remember? 1 a i Hypotenuse: Z

ii Opposite: X

iii Adjacent: Y b i Hypotenuse: X O H

3 a 8.02 4 a 50°

b x = 16.31

c y = 5.03

d x = 81.14

b 3; Pythagoras’ theorem, Sine ratio, Tangent ratio

A H

c tan (θ ) =

b 4.25

c 0.14

d 0.11

b 83°

c 55°

d 45°

b cos (θ ) =

12 a f = 5.13 13 a a = 12

ii Opposite: Z

iii Adjacent: Y 2 a sin (θ ) =

d x=2

O A

14 a h = 21.03

b f = 21.53

15 a a = 12, b = 7, θ = 61° b a = 4010, c = 3286, θ = 35° 16 d = 3303.31 m

Practice

17 a 30°

5 a Cosine

b 45°

c 66°

b Tangent

c Tangent

18 a i Sine

d Sine

d 66°

ii sin (θ ) =

14 19

iii 47°

6 a i

11 61

ii

60 61

iii

11 60

b i Tangent

ii tan (θ ) =

13 6

iii 65°

b i

4 5

ii

3 5

iii

4 3

c i Cosine

ii cos (θ ) =

26 34

iii 40°

c i

15 17

ii

8 17

iii

15 8

d i Sine

ii sin (θ ) =

7.5 17.7

iii 25°

d i

24 40

ii

32 40

iii

24 32

19 a x = 74

b x = 38

c x = 53

d x = 67

e x = 67

f θ = 60°

15 c 17

20 θ = 54.78°

7 a ∠BCA

8 b 17

8 a ∠BCA

b 3

21 a A = 66.4°

3 4 c cos (θ ) = , tan (θ ) = 5 3 9 a

19 21

b

19 21

c

21 28.32

d

57 84.96

3 3 b cos (α) = 5 5 c Yes, the value of the ratio for sin (θ ) and 3 cos (α) is the same, which is . 5 d Yes, this is true for all right-angled triangles. This is because in any right-angled triangle, the opposite side in reference to one angle is the adjacent side in reference to the other angle, and the hypotenuse remains the same for both angles. So, sin (θ ) = cos (α) for all right-angled triangles.

10 a sin (θ ) =

b To create a right-angled triangle from the isosceles triangle given in the question, a vertical line must be added to divide the isosceles triangle into two halves (the line of symmetry). Then the hypotenuse is known to be 10 cm and the adjacent side to angle A is 4 cm. The cosine function is the most appropriate choice as it uses the hypotenuse and adjacent sides to an angle. 22 x = 26.57°, y = 50.19°, z = 13.24° Extend your thinking 23 a

8 17

b

8 15

Answers 1121 mathspace.co


24 From the diagram, the following relationships 12 5 12 are given: sin (θ ) = , cos (θ ) = tan (θ ) = 13 13 5 12 sin ( ) cos( )

12 13 13 5

13 5 13

9 a

28°

12 which is equal to 5

tan (θ ) as required. 25 sin( )

1 2

Landing pad

26 a b = 19.8

b b=8

b x = 94

27 29 m

10 θ = 48.01°

11.02 2D Applications of trigonometry

11 a 30.00°

b 19.84°

c 5.13° What do you remember? 1 a True

b False

2 a α or ∠CBD 3

xm

200 m

NNW

c True b θ

12 a x = 16.24 m

b y = 21.88 m c BC = 5.6 m

13 a 30 m

b 58 m

14 a 045°T

N

d 95 cm and 25 cm

b 310°T

15 a S 65°W b N 30°W c N 60°E

NW

NE ENE

W

E

SE SSE

4 a 090°T

b 315°T

c 292.5°T

d 112.5°T

e 045°T

f 135°T

Practice 5 a x = 32.01°

b y = 57.99°

6 θ = 52.52°

18 w = 76.8 km 19 a 53.9°

b S 53.9°W

c 233.9°T

b y = 24.6

Extend your thinking 21 a PC = 26.70 m

b PA = 17.09 m

c 28 m 22 Karen is incorrect as the angle of depression must be measured from the horizontal. The correct angle of depression is 24.7°. 23 a The shadow gets longer as the angle of elevation gets smaller. b The length of the shadow is zero.

7 d = 257 8 a y = 420

d N 50°W

17 055°T

20 a x = 17.2 SW

d 185°T

16 330°T

WNW

S

c 054°T

b 370 m

c tan 90° is undefined. The sun directly overhead means the angle of elevation is 90° and it’s not possible to draw a triangle, therefore the shadow has no length. 24 a 7.00 m

1122 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

b 16.43 m


11.03 Trigonometry in 3D

11.04 Trigonometry of obtuse angles

What do you remember?

What do you remember?

1 a r=5

b 10 m

2 a 10 cm

b 36.87°

3 a i EF = 10

ii CF = 15

iii Hypotenuse

iv CE = 18.03

b i XF = 5

ii Hypotenuse

iii CX = 15.81

1 a Acute

b Obtuse

c Right-angled

d Obtuse

2 a True

b False

c False

d True

3 A 4

θ

sin (θ )

cos (θ )

Practice

30°

Positive

Positive

4 a AW = 11.31 cm

b VW = 23.41 cm

60°

Positive

Positive

5 a HF = 19.21 cm

b DF = 22.65 cm

120°

Positive

Negative

150°

Positive

Negative

6 L = 13 7 a EG 97 c DG 106 8 a x 5125 mm

b AG 122 d 2 106 square units b z = 131.24 mm

c 151 mm 9 124.85 cm2

Practice 5 a sin (33°)

b – cos (15°)

c sin (55°)

d – cos (20°)

e sin (89°)

f – cos (60°)

g sin (2°)

h – cos (48°)

6 a – 0.766

b 0.56

c 0.94

10 a z = 10.77

b θ = 15.56

d – 0.906

e 0.766

f – 0.5

11 a z = 8.49

b θ = 68.34

7 a i 0.707

12 a i 7 2

ii 7 3

b i 45°

ii 35.26°

iii 90°

iv 54.74°

13 a i EG 117

ii

AG 142

iii DG 106 b 3 106 cm2

c 59.77°

d x = 65.19°

e y = 49.05°

14 a z = 21.47

b 75.15 cm2

b (– 0.707, 0.707) c i 0.707 8 a θ = 30°, 150°

d θ = 48°

e θ = 119°

f θ = 150°

9 a θ = 115°

b θ = 30°

c θ = 135°

d θ = 20°

e θ = 120°

f θ = 80°

10 a α = 30°, 150°

cos (α) = 0.6, – 0.6

11 ∠A = 110°

c PM 112 cm

d MN = 4 cm

12 ∠C = 96°

e PN 128 cm

f ∠PNM = 69.30° Extend your thinking

g z = 70.53° b y = 28.34 cm

13 cos (α) = 0.6, – 0.6

b 6.18 m

14 T he angle θ = 210° lies in the third quadrant. In the third quadrant, both sine and cosine are negative, so sin (210°) and cos (210°) are both negative.

c θ = 85.24 17 a

32 m

b θ = 45°, 135°

c θ = 22°, 158°

b 61.87°

16 a 30 cm

ii – 0.707

b cos (α) = 0.866, – 0.866

Extend your thinking 15 a MD 32 cm

ii 0.707

Answers 1123 mathspace.co


15 Changing the angle to 160° shifts the path further into the second quadrant, increasing the horizontal displacement and reducing the vertical ascent.

b i B

c

11.05 Sine rule A

What do you remember? 1

p q r sin (P ) sin (Q ) sin ( R)

2 a x = 71.71

c i

b x = 6.73

c x = 39.48° 3 a No

ii Yes

d x = 42.16°

b Yes

c Yes

B

d No

Practice 4 h = 86.52

A

5 a a = 13.40

b a = 3.02

c a = 11.29

d a = 29.96

6 a x = 13.1

b x = 12.9

7 a HK = 733.17 km

b KJ = 444.55 km

b ii Yes d i

8 y = 4.4 units

C

9 a x = 49.3°

b x = 30.4°

c x = 20.4°

d x = 43.2°

10 a ∠BAC = 29°

b c = 37.11

a

b

11 x = 33.19° 12 a ∠BAC = 93°

b b = 30.57 cm

c c = 17.48 cm 13 a ∠ABC = 36.81°

b a = 13.69 cm

c b = 22.68 cm 14 a C = 70.50°

b a = 5.621 m c b = 7.116 m

15 29.2 km

ii No 17 θ = 28.69° 18 a x = 140.4°

b x = 149.1°

c x = 133.1°

d x = 136.9°

19 a i ∠B1 = 74°, ∠B2 = 106° ii ∠C1 = 49°, ∠C2 = 17° iii c1 = 140.38 cm, c2 = 56.17 cm

16 a i

b i ∠B = 32° a

b

ii ∠C = 100°

iii c = 3.58 cm Extend your thinking

c ii No

1124 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

20 a a = 35.65 m

b h = 20.4 m

21 a b = 226.55 m

b h = 117 m

22 h = 102.58 km 23 1.8 minutes


11.06 Cosine rule

11.07 Area of non-right angled triangles

What do you remember?

What do you remember?

1 a Sine rule

b Pythagoras’ theorem

2 ∠ABC

1 bh 2 1 c Area bc sin ( A) 2

3 a a2 = b2 + c2 – 2bc cos (A)

d Area

c Cosine rule

d Trigonometric ratio

b a2 = 142 + 122 – 2 × 14 × 12 cos (72°) Practice 4 a a = 10.73

b a = 10.00

c a = 14.14

d a = 212.34

5 a q = 19.23

b c = 10.60

c y = 6.52

d w = 12.75

6 v=5

1 a Area

b Area

1 ab sin (C) 2

s( s a)( s b)( s c),

a b c 2 2 a Heron’s formula:

where s

s( s a)( s b)( s c), a b c where s 2 1 b Using sine: Area ab sin (C ) 2 3 a 16 cm2 b 32.5 m2 c 40 m2 Area

7 a w = 31.69

b A = 27.33

Practice

c B = 38.21

d C = 104.48

4 a 60.21 m2

b 216.01 m2

2

c 12.41 m

d 24.30 m2

5 a 326 cm2

b 110 cm2

8 θ = 48.24° 9 a θ = 102° 10 cos (U) =

b θ = 146° 1 15

11 a θ = 112.9

6 150 863 m2 b x = 33.6

c d = 13.3 cm

7 a 34.7 cm2

12 x = 48.57

8 37 888.61 m2

13 x = 34.78

9 3.49 km2

14 x = 22°

10 1389.32 m2

15 x = 104°

11 1 244 548 km2

16 θ = 24°

12 a 84 cm2

b 19.9 cm2 2

17 a BD = 23.88 m

b CD = 25.95 m d 218.64 m2

c 65.95 m

b 186.3 cm2

c 18.2 cm

d 7.3 m2

13 a 12 cm2

b 3.3 cm2

14 1242 cm2

Extend your thinking 18 There is no solution because cos (A) = 1.1 > 1. 19 36.06 km

15 9 3 cm2 16 a 20 cm

b 384 cm2

17 b = 38

20 36.87° b 21.37 km2

21 a 110.7°

22 a a2 = h2 + c2 – 2cx + x2

18 a = 5 19 20.93 cm2

b h2 = b2 – x2

20 a 16 cm

b 120 cm2

c x = b cos (A)

21 a 10 cm

b 250 cm2

2

2

2

d a = b + c – 2bc cos (A)

Answers 1125 mathspace.co


Extend your thinking

9 L = 4.0 m

22 OA = 6 m

10 a θ = 52.6°

b 136.66 cm2

23 θ = 43°

11 a x = 36.94 cm

b y = 39.89 cm

c h = 76.83 cm

24 4 cm 25

n 2 360 r sin cm2 2 n

11.08 Mixed applications What do you remember?

b IL = 1362.0 m

13 a x = 1948.2 m

b y = 1273.4 m

14 a θ = 37.22°

b d = 3.4 cm

15 1688 m 16 138.56 km

1 a SSS: Three sides b SAS: Two sides and the angle between them c SAA: Two angles and a non-included side d SSA: Two sides and an adjacent angle

17 a PQ = 46.37 km b A = 503.69 km2 c 267.38° 18 a 6527 m2

b 7704 m2

d Cosine rule

19 a x = 174.4 m

b θ = 203.4°

b Sine rule

Extend your thinking

d Cosine rule

20 a AB ≈ 13.2 km

2 a Cosine rule

b Sine rule

c Sine rule 3 a Sine rule c Cosine rule

12 a IS = 1515.3 m

4 a Cosine rule

b Pythagoras’ theorem

c Sine rule

d Sine area formula

e Bearings 5 The sine rule Practice 6 a i SSS: Three sides ii Cosine rule iii x = 34° b i ASA: Two angles and a non-included side ii Sine rule iii x = 11 km c i SAA: Two angles and a non-included side ii Sine rule iii x = 159 mm d i SAS: Two of the sides and an angle between them ii Cosine iii x = 55° 7 h = 81 m 8 b = 13.98 km

1126 Mathspace VCE General Mathematics Units 1 & 2 mathspace.co

b Not possible without additional data, such as the ranger’s bearing to A or B, or the coordinates of A and B relative to T. 21 147.5° 22 a 12 m, 10.14 m

b h = 9.19 m

c It would be possible. Remember that Area = 1 × Base × Height. The area can be changed 2 by changing either the base length or height, or both. If the base is fixed, then the height can be increased to be able to increase the area. The horizontal peak position is fixed, and the height can be changed by moving the peak along the vertical line. The horizontal distance of the peak from the left end of the base is calculated as 7.71 m. Using this, observe that the minimum height to achieve at least 15% increase in area is 10.58 m and the angle from the left side of the base is 53.91°. The angle can be chosen to be 60° and then that the angle from the right of the base can be calculated as 72.19°.


Turn static files into dynamic content formats.

Create a flipbook